Renesas H8SX1653 Renesas 32-bit cisc microcomputer h8sx family / h8sx/1600 sery Datasheet

REJ09B0219-0100
32
H8SX/1653Group
Hardware Manual
Renesas 32-Bit CISC Microcomputer
H8SX Family / H8SX/1600 Series
H8SX/1653
H8SX/1654
Rev.1.00
Revision Date: Sep. 08, 2005
R5F61653
R5F61654
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page ii of xlviii
Keep safety first in your circuit designs!
1. Renesas Technology Corp. puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and
more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with
semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage.
Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate
measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of nonflammable material or
(iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap.
Notes regarding these materials
1. These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas
Technology Corp. product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any license
under any intellectual property rights, or any other rights, belonging to Renesas Technology Corp. or
a third party.
2. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any thirdparty's rights, originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, or
circuit application examples contained in these materials.
3. All information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs and
algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are
subject to change by Renesas Technology Corp. without notice due to product improvements or
other reasons. It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corp. or
an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor for the latest product information
before purchasing a product listed herein.
The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or other loss rising
from these inaccuracies or errors.
Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corp. by various means,
including the Renesas Technology Corp. Semiconductor home page (http://www.renesas.com).
4. When using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product data,
diagrams, charts, programs, and algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all information as a total
system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products. Renesas
Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability or other loss resulting from the
information contained herein.
5. Renesas Technology Corp. semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or
system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. Please contact
Renesas Technology Corp. or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor when
considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or
systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use.
6. The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corp. is necessary to reprint or reproduce in
whole or in part these materials.
7. If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions, they must
be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country
other than the approved destination.
Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and/or the
country of destination is prohibited.
8. Please contact Renesas Technology Corp. for further details on these materials or the products
contained therein.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page iii of xlviiil
General Precautions on Handling of Product
1. Treatment of NC Pins
Note: Do not connect anything to the NC pins.
The NC (not connected) pins are either not connected to any of the internal circuitry or are
used as test pins or to reduce noise. If something is connected to the NC pins, the
operation of the LSI is not guaranteed.
2. Treatment of Unused Input Pins
Note: Fix all unused input pins to high or low level.
Generally, the input pins of CMOS products are high-impedance input pins. If unused pins
are in their open states, intermediate levels are induced by noise in the vicinity, a passthrough current flows internally, and a malfunction may occur.
3. Processing before Initialization
Note: When power is first supplied, the product's state is undefined.
The states of internal circuits are undefined until full power is supplied throughout the
chip and a low level is input on the reset pin. During the period where the states are
undefined, the register settings and the output state of each pin are also undefined. Design
your system so that it does not malfunction because of processing while it is in this
undefined state. For those products which have a reset function, reset the LSI immediately
after the power supply has been turned on.
4. Prohibition of Access to Undefined or Reserved Addresses
Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited.
The undefined or reserved addresses may be used to expand functions, or test registers
may have been be allocated to these addresses. Do not access these registers; the system's
operation is not guaranteed if they are accessed.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page iv of xlviii
Configuration of This Manual
This manual comprises the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
General Precautions on Handling of Product
Configuration of This Manual
Preface
Contents
Overview
Description of Functional Modules
• CPU and System-Control Modules
• On-Chip Peripheral Modules
The configuration of the functional description of each module differs according to the
module. However, the generic style includes the following items:
i) Feature
ii) Input/Output Pin
iii) Register Description
iv) Operation
v) Usage Note
When designing an application system that includes this LSI, take notes into account. Each section
includes notes in relation to the descriptions given, and usage notes are given, as required, as the
final part of each section.
7. List of Registers
8. Electrical Characteristics
9. Appendix
10. Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition (only for revised versions)
The list of revisions is a summary of points that have been revised or added to earlier versions.
This does not include all of the revised contents. For details, see the actual locations in this
manual.
11. Index
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page v of xlviiil
Preface
The H8SX/1653 Group is a single-chip microcomputer made up of the high-speed internal 32-bit
H8SX CPU as its core, and the peripheral functions required to configure a system. The H8SX
CPU is upward compatible with the H8/300, H8/300H, and H8S CPUs.
Target Users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8SX/1653 Group in the
design of application systems. Target users are expected to understand the
fundamentals of electrical circuits, logical circuits, and microcomputers.
Objective:
This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical
characteristics of the H8SX/1653 Group to the target users.
Refer to the H8SX Family Software Manual for a detailed description of the
instruction set.
Notes on reading this manual:
• In order to understand the overall functions of the chip
Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts
on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions and electrical characteristics.
• In order to understand the details of the CPU's functions
Read the H8SX Family Software Manual.
• In order to understand the details of a register when its name is known
Read the index that is the final part of the manual to find the page number of the entry on the
register. The addresses, bits, and initial values of the registers are summarized in section 23,
List of Registers.
Examples: Register name:
The following notation is used for cases when the same or a
similar function, e.g. 16-bit timer pulse unit or serial
communication interface, is implemented on more than one
channel:
XXX_N (XXX is the register name and N is the channel
number)
Bit order:
The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right.
Number notation: Binary is B'xxxx, hexadecimal is H'xxxx, decimal is xxxx.
Signal notation:
An overbar is added to a low-active signal: xxxx
Related Manuals:
The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site.
Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require.
http://www.renesas.com/
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page vi of xlviii
H8SX/1653 Group manuals:
Document Title
Document No.
H8SX/1653 Group Hardware Manual
This manual
H8SX Family Software Manual
REJ09B0102
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page vii of xlviiil
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page viii of xlviii
Contents
Section 1 Overview................................................................................................1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Features.................................................................................................................................. 1
Block Diagram ....................................................................................................................... 2
Pin Assignments..................................................................................................................... 3
1.3.1 Pin Assignments ....................................................................................................... 3
1.3.2 Pin Configuration in Each Operating Mode.............................................................. 4
1.3.3 Pin Functions ............................................................................................................ 8
Section 2 CPU......................................................................................................17
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Features................................................................................................................................ 17
CPU Operating Modes......................................................................................................... 19
2.2.1 Normal Mode.......................................................................................................... 19
2.2.2 Middle Mode .......................................................................................................... 21
2.2.3 Advanced Mode...................................................................................................... 22
2.2.4 Maximum Mode ..................................................................................................... 23
Instruction Fetch .................................................................................................................. 25
Address Space...................................................................................................................... 25
Registers............................................................................................................................... 26
2.5.1 General Registers.................................................................................................... 27
2.5.2 Program Counter (PC) ............................................................................................ 28
2.5.3 Condition-Code Register (CCR)............................................................................. 29
2.5.4 Extended Control Register (EXR) .......................................................................... 30
2.5.5 Vector Base Register (VBR)................................................................................... 31
2.5.6 Short Address Base Register (SBR)........................................................................ 31
2.5.7 Multiply-Accumulate Register (MAC)................................................................... 31
2.5.8 Initial Values of CPU Registers .............................................................................. 31
Data Formats........................................................................................................................ 32
2.6.1 General Register Data Formats ............................................................................... 32
2.6.2 Memory Data Formats ............................................................................................ 33
Instruction Set ...................................................................................................................... 34
2.7.1 Instructions and Addressing Modes........................................................................ 36
2.7.2 Table of Instructions Classified by Function .......................................................... 40
2.7.3 Basic Instruction Formats ....................................................................................... 50
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation........................................................ 51
2.8.1 Register Direct—Rn ............................................................................................... 51
2.8.2 Register Indirect—@ERn ....................................................................................... 52
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page ix of xlviiil
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.6
2.8.7
2.8.8
2.8.9
2.8.10
2.8.11
2.8.12
2.8.13
Register Indirect with Displacement —@(d:2, ERn), @(d:16, ERn),
or @(d:32, ERn) ..................................................................................................... 52
Index Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16,RnL.B), @(d:32,RnL.B),
@(d:16,Rn.W), @(d:32,Rn.W), @(d:16,ERn.L), or @(d:32,ERn.L)..................... 52
Register Indirect with Post-Increment, Pre-Decrement, Pre-Increment,
or Post-Decrement—@ERn+, @−ERn, @+ERn, or @ERn− ................................ 53
Absolute Address—@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32....................................... 54
Immediate—#xx ..................................................................................................... 55
Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC) ...................................... 55
Program-Counter Relative with Index Register—@(RnL.B, PC), @(Rn.W, PC),
or @(ERn.L, PC) .................................................................................................... 55
Memory Indirect—@@aa:8 ................................................................................... 56
Extended Memory Indirect—@@vec:7 ................................................................. 57
Effective Address Calculation ................................................................................ 57
MOVA Instruction.................................................................................................. 59
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes ....................................................................... 61
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Operating Mode Selection ................................................................................................... 61
Register Descriptions........................................................................................................... 62
3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) ............................................................................ 62
3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR)......................................................................... 64
Operating Mode Descriptions .............................................................................................. 66
3.3.1 Mode 2.................................................................................................................... 66
3.3.2 Mode 4.................................................................................................................... 66
3.3.3 Mode 5.................................................................................................................... 66
3.3.4 Mode 6.................................................................................................................... 67
3.3.5 Mode 7.................................................................................................................... 67
3.3.6 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................... 68
Address Map ........................................................................................................................ 69
3.4.1 Address Map........................................................................................................... 69
Section 4 Exception Handling ............................................................................. 73
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
Exception Handling Types and Priority............................................................................... 73
Exception Sources and Exception Handling Vector Table .................................................. 74
Reset .................................................................................................................................... 76
4.3.1 Reset Exception Handling ...................................................................................... 76
4.3.2 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................... 77
4.3.3 On-Chip Peripheral Functions after Reset Release................................................. 77
Traces................................................................................................................................... 79
Address Error....................................................................................................................... 80
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page x of xlviii
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.5.1 Address Error Source.............................................................................................. 80
4.5.2 Address Error Exception Handling ......................................................................... 81
Interrupts.............................................................................................................................. 82
4.6.1 Interrupt Sources..................................................................................................... 82
4.6.2 Interrupt Exception Handling ................................................................................. 83
Instruction Exception Handling ........................................................................................... 83
4.7.1 Trap Instruction....................................................................................................... 83
4.7.2 Exception Handling by Illegal Instruction .............................................................. 84
Stack Status after Exception Handling................................................................................. 85
Usage Note........................................................................................................................... 86
Section 5 Interrupt Controller ..............................................................................87
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
Features................................................................................................................................ 87
Input/Output Pins ................................................................................................................. 89
Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 89
5.3.1 Interrupt Control Register (INTCR) ....................................................................... 90
5.3.2 CPU Priority Control Register (CPUPCR) ............................................................. 91
5.3.3 Interrupt Priority Registers A to C, E to I, K, L, Q, and R
(IPRA to IPRC, IPRE to IPRI, IPRK, IPRL, IPRQ, and IPRR) ............................. 92
5.3.4 IRQ Enable Register (IER) ..................................................................................... 95
5.3.5 IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)........................................ 96
5.3.6 IRQ Status Register (ISR)..................................................................................... 101
5.3.7 Software Standby Release IRQ Enable Register (SSIER) .................................... 102
Interrupt Sources................................................................................................................ 103
5.4.1 External Interrupts ................................................................................................ 103
5.4.2 Internal Interrupts ................................................................................................. 104
5.4.3 Sleep Interrupt....................................................................................................... 104
Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table....................................................................... 105
Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation .............................................................. 110
5.6.1 Interrupt Control Mode 0 ...................................................................................... 110
5.6.2 Interrupt Control Mode 2 ...................................................................................... 112
5.6.3 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence ............................................................... 114
5.6.4 Interrupt Response Times ..................................................................................... 115
5.6.5 DTC and DMAC Activation by Interrupt ............................................................. 116
CPU Priority Control Function Over DTC and DMAC..................................................... 119
Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 122
5.8.1 Conflict between Interrupt Generation and Disabling .......................................... 122
5.8.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts ....................................................................... 123
5.8.3 Times when Interrupts are Disabled ..................................................................... 123
5.8.4 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction........................................... 123
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xi of xlviiil
5.8.5
5.8.6
Interrupts during Execution of MOVMD and MOVSD Instructions.................... 123
Interrupts of Peripheral Modules .......................................................................... 124
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) ........................................................................ 125
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
Features.............................................................................................................................. 125
Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 128
6.2.1 Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR) ............................................................... 129
6.2.2 Access State Control Register (ASTCR) .............................................................. 130
6.2.3 Wait Control Registers A and B (WTCRA, WTCRB) ......................................... 131
6.2.4 Read Strobe Timing Control Register (RDNCR) ................................................. 136
6.2.5 CS Assertion Period Control Registers (CSACR) ................................................ 137
6.2.6 Idle Control Register (IDLCR) ............................................................................. 140
6.2.7 Bus Control Register 1 (BCR1) ............................................................................ 142
6.2.8 Bus Control Register 2 (BCR2) ............................................................................ 144
6.2.9 Endian Control Register (ENDIANCR) ............................................................... 145
6.2.10 SRAM Mode Control Register (SRAMCR) ......................................................... 146
6.2.11 Burst ROM Interface Control Register (BROMCR) ............................................ 147
6.2.12 Address/Data Multiplexed I/O Control Register (MPXCR) ................................. 149
Bus Configuration.............................................................................................................. 150
Multi-Clock Function and Number of Access Cycles ....................................................... 151
External Bus....................................................................................................................... 155
6.5.1 Input/Output Pins.................................................................................................. 155
6.5.2 Area Division........................................................................................................ 158
6.5.3 Chip Select Signals ............................................................................................... 159
6.5.4 External Bus Interface .......................................................................................... 160
6.5.5 Area and External Bus Interface ........................................................................... 164
6.5.6 Endian and Data Alignment.................................................................................. 169
Basic Bus Interface ............................................................................................................ 172
6.6.1 Data Bus ............................................................................................................... 172
6.6.2 I/O Pins Used for Basic Bus Interface .................................................................. 172
6.6.3 Basic Timing......................................................................................................... 173
6.6.4 Wait Control ......................................................................................................... 179
6.6.5 Read Strobe (RD) Timing..................................................................................... 181
6.6.6 Extension of Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period .................................................. 182
6.6.7 DACK Signal Output Timing ............................................................................... 184
Byte Control SRAM Interface ........................................................................................... 185
6.7.1 Byte Control SRAM Space Setting....................................................................... 185
6.7.2 Data Bus ............................................................................................................... 185
6.7.3 I/O Pins Used for Byte Control SRAM Interface ................................................. 186
6.7.4 Basic Timing......................................................................................................... 187
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xii of xlviii
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.7.5 Wait Control ......................................................................................................... 189
6.7.6 Read Strobe (RD).................................................................................................. 191
6.7.7 Extension of Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period................................................... 191
6.7.8 DACK Signal Output Timing ............................................................................... 191
Burst ROM Interface.......................................................................................................... 193
6.8.1 Burst ROM Space Setting..................................................................................... 193
6.8.2 Data Bus................................................................................................................ 193
6.8.3 I/O Pins Used for Burst ROM Interface................................................................ 194
6.8.4 Basic Timing......................................................................................................... 195
6.8.5 Wait Control ......................................................................................................... 197
6.8.6 Read Strobe (RD) Timing..................................................................................... 197
6.8.7 Extension of Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period................................................... 197
Address/Data Multiplexed I/O Interface ............................................................................ 198
6.9.1 Address/Data Multiplexed I/O Space Setting ....................................................... 198
6.9.2 Address/Data Multiplex ........................................................................................ 198
6.9.3 Data Bus................................................................................................................ 198
6.9.4 I/O Pins Used for Address/Data Multiplexed I/O Interface .................................. 199
6.9.5 Basic Timing......................................................................................................... 200
6.9.6 Address Cycle Control.......................................................................................... 202
6.9.7 Wait Control ......................................................................................................... 203
6.9.8 Read Strobe (RD) Timing.................................................................................... 203
6.9.9 Extension of Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period................................................... 205
6.9.10 DACK Signal Output Timing ............................................................................... 207
Idle Cycle........................................................................................................................... 208
6.10.1 Operation .............................................................................................................. 208
6.10.2 Pin States in Idle Cycle ......................................................................................... 217
Bus Release........................................................................................................................ 218
6.11.1 Operation .............................................................................................................. 218
6.11.2 Pin States in External Bus Released State............................................................. 219
6.11.3 Transition Timing ................................................................................................. 220
Internal Bus........................................................................................................................ 221
6.12.1 Access to Internal Address Space ......................................................................... 221
Write Data Buffer Function ............................................................................................... 222
6.13.1 Write Data Buffer Function for External Data Bus............................................... 222
6.13.2 Write Data Buffer Function for Peripheral Modules ............................................ 223
Bus Arbitration................................................................................................................... 224
6.14.1 Operation .............................................................................................................. 224
6.14.2 Bus Transfer Timing............................................................................................. 225
Bus Controller Operation in Reset ..................................................................................... 227
Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 227
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xiii of xlviiil
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)................................................................. 229
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
Features.............................................................................................................................. 229
Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 232
Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 233
7.3.1 DMA Source Address Register (DSAR) .............................................................. 234
7.3.2 DMA Destination Address Register (DDAR) ...................................................... 235
7.3.3 DMA Offset Register (DOFR).............................................................................. 236
7.3.4 DMA Transfer Count Register (DTCR) ............................................................... 237
7.3.5 DMA Block Size Register (DBSR) ...................................................................... 238
7.3.6 DMA Mode Control Register (DMDR)................................................................ 239
7.3.7 DMA Address Control Register (DACR)............................................................. 248
7.3.8 DMA Module Request Select Register (DMRSR) ............................................... 254
Transfer Modes .................................................................................................................. 254
Operations.......................................................................................................................... 255
7.5.1 Address Modes ..................................................................................................... 255
7.5.2 Transfer Modes..................................................................................................... 259
7.5.3 Activation Sources................................................................................................ 264
7.5.4 Bus Access Modes................................................................................................ 266
7.5.5 Extended Repeat Area Function ........................................................................... 268
7.5.6 Address Update Function using Offset ................................................................. 271
7.5.7 Register during DMA Transfer............................................................................. 275
7.5.8 Priority of Channels.............................................................................................. 280
7.5.9 DMA Basic Bus Cycle.......................................................................................... 282
7.5.10 Bus Cycles in Dual Address Mode ....................................................................... 283
7.5.11 Bus Cycles in Single Address Mode..................................................................... 292
DMA Transfer End ............................................................................................................ 297
Relationship among DMAC and Other Bus Masters ......................................................... 300
7.7.1 CPU Priority Control Function Over DMAC ....................................................... 300
7.7.2 Bus Arbitration among DMAC and Other Bus Masters ....................................... 301
Interrupt Sources................................................................................................................ 302
Notes on Usage .................................................................................................................. 305
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)........................................................ 307
8.1
8.2
Features.............................................................................................................................. 307
Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 309
8.2.1 DTC Mode Register A (MRA) ............................................................................. 310
8.2.2 DTC Mode Register B (MRB).............................................................................. 311
8.2.3 DTC Source Address Register (SAR)................................................................... 312
8.2.4 DTC Destination Address Register (DAR)........................................................... 313
8.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA) ............................................................... 313
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xiv of xlviii
8.2.6
8.2.7
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB)................................................................ 314
DTC enable registers A to E, G, and H (DTCERA to DTCERE, DTCERG,
and DTCERH) ...................................................................................................... 314
8.2.8 DTC Control Register (DTCCR) .......................................................................... 315
8.2.9 DTC Vector Base Register (DTCVBR)................................................................ 317
Activation Sources ............................................................................................................. 317
Location of Transfer Information and DTC Vector Table ................................................. 317
Operation ........................................................................................................................... 321
8.5.1 Bus Cycle Division ............................................................................................... 323
8.5.2 Transfer Information Read Skip Function ............................................................ 325
8.5.3 Transfer Information Writeback Skip Function .................................................... 326
8.5.4 Normal Transfer Mode ......................................................................................... 326
8.5.5 Repeat Transfer Mode........................................................................................... 327
8.5.6 Block Transfer Mode ............................................................................................ 329
8.5.7 Chain Transfer ...................................................................................................... 330
8.5.8 Operation Timing.................................................................................................. 331
8.5.9 Number of DTC Execution Cycles ....................................................................... 333
8.5.10 DTC Bus Release Timing ..................................................................................... 334
8.5.11 DTC Priority Level Control to the CPU ............................................................... 334
DTC Activation by Interrupt.............................................................................................. 335
Examples of Use of the DTC ............................................................................................. 336
8.7.1 Normal Transfer Mode ......................................................................................... 336
8.7.2 Chain Transfer ...................................................................................................... 336
8.7.3 Chain Transfer when Counter = 0......................................................................... 337
Interrupt Sources................................................................................................................ 339
Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 339
8.9.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 339
8.9.2 On-Chip RAM ...................................................................................................... 339
8.9.3 DMAC Transfer End Interrupt.............................................................................. 339
8.9.4 DTCE Bit Setting.................................................................................................. 339
8.9.5 Chain Transfer ...................................................................................................... 340
8.9.6 Transfer Information Start Address, Source Address,
and Destination Address ....................................................................................... 340
8.9.7 Transfer Information Modification ....................................................................... 340
8.9.8 Endian Format....................................................................................................... 340
Section 9 I/O Ports .............................................................................................341
9.1
Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 347
9.1.1 Data Direction Register (PnDDR) (n = 1, 2, 6, A, B, D to F, H, I, and M)........... 348
9.1.2 Data Register (PnDR) (n = 1, 2, 6, A, B, D to F, H, I, and M) ............................. 349
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xv of xlviiil
9.1.3
9.1.4
9.2
9.3
9.4
Port Register (PORTn) (n = 1, 2, 5, 6, A, B, D to F, H, I, and M)........................ 349
Input Buffer Control Register (PnICR)
(n = 1, 2, 5, 6, A, B, D to F, H, I, and M) ............................................................. 350
9.1.5 Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PnPCR) (n = D to F, H, and I) .......................... 351
9.1.6 Open-Drain Control Register (PnODR) (n = 2 and F).......................................... 352
Output Buffer Control........................................................................................................ 352
9.2.1 Port 1..................................................................................................................... 353
9.2.2 Port 2..................................................................................................................... 357
9.2.3 Port 5..................................................................................................................... 361
9.2.4 Port 6..................................................................................................................... 361
9.2.5 Port A.................................................................................................................... 364
9.2.6 Port B.................................................................................................................... 369
9.2.7 Port D.................................................................................................................... 371
9.2.8 Port E .................................................................................................................... 371
9.2.9 Port F .................................................................................................................... 372
9.2.10 Port H.................................................................................................................... 374
9.2.11 Port I ..................................................................................................................... 375
9.2.12 Port M ................................................................................................................... 376
Port Function Controller .................................................................................................... 383
9.3.1 Port Function Control Register 0 (PFCR0)........................................................... 383
9.3.2 Port Function Control Register 1 (PFCR1)........................................................... 384
9.3.3 Port Function Control Register 2 (PFCR2)........................................................... 385
9.3.4 Port Function Control Register 4 (PFCR4)........................................................... 386
9.3.5 Port Function Control Register 6 (PFCR6)........................................................... 388
9.3.6 Port Function Control Register 7 (PFCR7)........................................................... 389
9.3.7 Port Function Control Register 9 (PFCR9)........................................................... 390
9.3.8 Port Function Control Register B (PFCRB) ......................................................... 391
9.3.9 Port Function Control Register C (PFCRC) ......................................................... 392
Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 393
9.4.1 Notes on Input Buffer Control Register (ICR) Setting ......................................... 393
9.4.2 Notes on Port Function Control Register (PFCR) Settings................................... 393
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) ....................................................... 395
10.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 395
10.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 399
10.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 400
10.3.1 Timer Control Register (TCR).............................................................................. 402
10.3.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR)............................................................................. 408
10.3.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)...................................................................... 409
10.3.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)............................................................... 427
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xvi of xlviii
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
10.10
10.3.5 Timer Status Register (TSR)................................................................................. 429
10.3.6 Timer Counter (TCNT)......................................................................................... 432
10.3.7 Timer General Register (TGR) ............................................................................. 432
10.3.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR) ................................................................................ 433
10.3.9 Timer Synchronous Register (TSYR)................................................................... 434
Operation ........................................................................................................................... 435
10.4.1 Basic Functions..................................................................................................... 435
10.4.2 Synchronous Operation......................................................................................... 441
10.4.3 Buffer Operation ................................................................................................... 443
10.4.4 Cascaded Operation .............................................................................................. 447
10.4.5 PWM Modes ......................................................................................................... 449
10.4.6 Phase Counting Mode........................................................................................... 454
Interrupt Sources................................................................................................................ 461
DTC Activation.................................................................................................................. 463
DMAC Activation.............................................................................................................. 463
A/D Converter Activation.................................................................................................. 463
Operation Timing............................................................................................................... 464
10.9.1 Input/Output Timing ............................................................................................. 464
10.9.2 Interrupt Signal Timing......................................................................................... 468
Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 472
10.10.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 472
10.10.2 Input Clock Restrictions ....................................................................................... 472
10.10.3 Caution on Cycle Setting ...................................................................................... 473
10.10.4 Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear Operations........................................... 473
10.10.5 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment Operations ................................... 474
10.10.6 Conflict between TGR Write and Compare Match............................................... 474
10.10.7 Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match .............................. 475
10.10.8 Conflict between TGR Read and Input Capture ................................................... 475
10.10.9 Conflict between TGR Write and Input Capture .................................................. 476
10.10.10 Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture................................ 477
10.10.11 Conflict between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing ........................... 477
10.10.12 Conflict between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow .................................. 478
10.10.13 Interrupts and Module Stop Mode ...................................................................... 478
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) ............................................479
11.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 479
11.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 480
11.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 480
11.3.1 Next Data Enable Registers H, L (NDERH, NDERL) ......................................... 481
11.3.2 Output Data Registers H, L (PODRH, PODRL)................................................... 482
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xvii of xlviiil
11.3.3 Next Data Registers H, L (NDRH, NDRL) .......................................................... 484
11.3.4 PPG Output Control Register (PCR) .................................................................... 486
11.3.5 PPG Output Mode Register (PMR) ...................................................................... 487
11.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 488
11.4.1 Output Timing ...................................................................................................... 489
11.4.2 Sample Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output............................................... 490
11.4.3 Example of Normal Pulse Output (Example of 5-Phase Pulse Output)................ 491
11.4.4 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output............................................................................. 492
11.4.5 Sample Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output............................... 494
11.4.6 Example of Non-Overlapping Pulse Output
(Example of 4-Phase Complementary Non-Overlapping Pulse Output) .............. 495
11.4.7 Inverted Pulse Output ........................................................................................... 497
11.4.8 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture ............................................................. 498
11.5 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 499
11.5.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 499
11.5.2 Operation of Pulse Output Pins............................................................................. 499
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR) ........................................................................ 501
12.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 501
12.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 506
12.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 507
12.3.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)......................................................................................... 509
12.3.2 Time Constant Register A (TCORA) ................................................................... 509
12.3.3 Time Constant Register B (TCORB).................................................................... 510
12.3.4 Timer Control Register (TCR).............................................................................. 510
12.3.5 Timer Counter Control Register (TCCR) ............................................................. 512
12.3.6 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)................................................................. 515
12.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 518
12.4.1 Pulse Output ......................................................................................................... 518
12.4.2 Reset Input............................................................................................................ 519
12.5 Operation Timing............................................................................................................... 520
12.5.1 TCNT Count Timing ............................................................................................ 520
12.5.2 Timing of CMFA and CMFB Setting at Compare Match .................................... 521
12.5.3 Timing of Timer Output at Compare Match......................................................... 521
12.5.4 Timing of Counter Clear by Compare Match ....................................................... 522
12.5.5 Timing of TCNT External Reset*......................................................................... 522
12.5.6 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting .............................................................. 523
12.6 Operation with Cascaded Connection................................................................................ 523
12.6.1 16-Bit Counter Mode ............................................................................................ 523
12.6.2 Compare Match Count Mode ............................................................................... 524
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xviii of xlviii
12.7 Interrupt Sources................................................................................................................ 524
12.7.1 Interrupt Sources and DTC Activation ................................................................. 524
12.7.2 A/D Converter Activation..................................................................................... 525
12.8 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 526
12.8.1 Notes on Setting Cycle.......................................................................................... 526
12.8.2 Conflict between TCNT Write and Counter Clear................................................ 526
12.8.3 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment...................................................... 527
12.8.4 Conflict between TCOR Write and Compare Match ............................................ 527
12.8.5 Conflict between Compare Matches A and B....................................................... 528
12.8.6 Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation.............................................. 528
12.8.7 Mode Setting with Cascaded Connection ............................................................. 530
12.8.8 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 530
12.8.9 Interrupts in Module Stop Mode........................................................................... 530
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)..................................................................531
13.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 531
13.2 Input/Output Pin................................................................................................................. 532
13.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 533
13.3.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)......................................................................................... 533
13.3.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)................................................................. 533
13.3.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)............................................................. 535
13.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 536
13.4.1 Watchdog Timer Mode ......................................................................................... 536
13.4.2 Interval Timer Mode............................................................................................. 538
13.5 Interrupt Source ................................................................................................................. 538
13.6 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 539
13.6.1 Notes on Register Access...................................................................................... 539
13.6.2 Conflict between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment........................... 540
13.6.3 Changing Values of Bits CKS2 to CKS0.............................................................. 540
13.6.4 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode................. 540
13.6.5 Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode.............................................................. 541
13.6.6 System Reset by WDTOVF Signal....................................................................... 541
13.6.7 Transition to Watchdog Timer Mode or Software Standby Mode........................ 541
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC).......................543
14.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 543
14.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 548
14.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 549
14.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) ............................................................................... 551
14.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) ............................................................................... 551
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xix of xlviiil
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
14.3.3 Transmit Data Register (TDR).............................................................................. 552
14.3.4 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) .............................................................................. 552
14.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ................................................................................ 552
14.3.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) .............................................................................. 556
14.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................. 561
14.3.8 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR)..................................................................... 568
14.3.9 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ....................................................................................... 569
14.3.10 Serial Extended Mode Register (SEMR_2) .......................................................... 576
14.3.11 Serial Extended Mode Register 5 and 6 (SEMR_5 and SEMR_6)....................... 578
14.3.12 IrDA Control Register (IrCR)............................................................................... 585
Operation in Asynchronous Mode ..................................................................................... 586
14.4.1 Data Transfer Format............................................................................................ 587
14.4.2 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode . 588
14.4.3 Clock..................................................................................................................... 589
14.4.4 SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode).............................................................. 590
14.4.5 Serial Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode) ................................................. 591
14.4.6 Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode) ...................................................... 593
Multiprocessor Communication Function.......................................................................... 597
14.5.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission ............................................................. 599
14.5.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception .................................................................. 600
Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode (SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4 only)................................. 603
14.6.1 Clock..................................................................................................................... 603
14.6.2 SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4 only) ......... 604
14.6.3 Serial Data Transmission (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
(SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4 only)....................................................................................... 605
14.6.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4 only) .. 607
14.6.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception
(Clocked Synchronous Mode) (SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4 only)...................................... 608
Operation in Smart Card Interface Mode........................................................................... 610
14.7.1 Sample Connection............................................................................................... 610
14.7.2 Data Format (Except in Block Transfer Mode) .................................................... 611
14.7.3 Block Transfer Mode ............................................................................................ 612
14.7.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin ....................................... 613
14.7.5 Initialization.......................................................................................................... 614
14.7.6 Data Transmission (Except in Block Transfer Mode) .......................................... 615
14.7.7 Serial Data Reception (Except in Block Transfer Mode) ..................................... 618
14.7.8 Clock Output Control............................................................................................ 619
IrDA Operation .................................................................................................................. 621
Interrupt Sources................................................................................................................ 624
14.9.1 Interrupts in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode ............................... 624
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xx of xlviii
14.9.2 Interrupts in Smart Card Interface Mode .............................................................. 625
14.10 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 627
14.10.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 627
14.10.2 Break Detection and Processing ........................................................................... 627
14.10.3 Mark State and Break Detection ........................................................................... 627
14.10.4 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations
(Clocked Synchronous Mode Only) ..................................................................... 627
14.10.5 Relation between Writing to TDR and TDRE Flag .............................................. 628
14.10.6 Restrictions on Using DTC or DMAC.................................................................. 628
14.10.7 SCI Operations during Mode Transitions ............................................................. 629
14.11 CRC Operation Circuit ...................................................................................................... 632
14.11.1 Features................................................................................................................. 632
14.11.2 Register Descriptions............................................................................................ 633
14.11.3 CRC Operation Circuit Operation......................................................................... 635
14.11.4 Note on CRC Operation Circuit............................................................................ 638
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)..........................................................639
15.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 639
15.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 640
15.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 641
15.3.1 Interrupt Flag Register 0 (IFR0) ........................................................................... 642
15.3.2 Interrupt Flag Register 1 (IFR1) ........................................................................... 643
15.3.3 Interrupt Flag Register 2 (IFR2) ........................................................................... 644
15.3.4 Interrupt Select Register 0 (ISR0)......................................................................... 645
15.3.5 Interrupt Select Register 1 (ISR1)......................................................................... 646
15.3.6 Interrupt Select Register 2 (ISR2)......................................................................... 647
15.3.7 Interrupt Enable Register 0 (IER0) ....................................................................... 648
15.3.8 Interrupt Enable Register 1 (IER1) ....................................................................... 649
15.3.9 Interrupt Enable Register 2 (IER2) ....................................................................... 649
15.3.10 EP0i Data Register (EPDR0i)............................................................................... 650
15.3.11 EP0o Data Register (EPDR0o) ............................................................................. 651
15.3.12 EP0s Data Register (EPDR0s) .............................................................................. 651
15.3.13 EP1 Data Register (EPDR1) ................................................................................. 652
15.3.14 EP2 Data Register (EPDR2) ................................................................................. 652
15.3.15 EP3 Data Register (EPDR3) ................................................................................. 653
15.3.16 EP0o Receive Data Size Register (EPSZ0o) ........................................................ 653
15.3.17 EP1 Receive Data Size Register (EPSZ1) ............................................................ 654
15.3.18 Trigger Register (TRG)......................................................................................... 654
15.3.19 Data Status Register (DASTS).............................................................................. 656
15.3.20 FIFO Clear Register (FCLR) ................................................................................ 657
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxi of xlviiil
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8
15.9
15.10
15.3.21 DMA Transfer Setting Register (DMA) ............................................................... 658
15.3.22 Endpoint Stall Register (EPSTL).......................................................................... 661
15.3.23 Configuration Value Register (CVR) ................................................................... 662
15.3.24 Control Register (CTLR) ...................................................................................... 662
15.3.25 Endpoint Information Register (EPIR) ................................................................. 664
15.3.26 Transceiver Test Register 0 (TRNTREG0) .......................................................... 668
15.3.27 Transceiver Test Register 1 (TRNTREG1) .......................................................... 670
Interrupt Sources................................................................................................................ 672
Operation ........................................................................................................................... 674
15.5.1 Cable Connection.................................................................................................. 674
15.5.2 Cable Disconnection ............................................................................................. 675
15.5.3 Suspend and Resume Operations.......................................................................... 676
15.5.4 Control Transfer.................................................................................................... 681
15.5.5 EP1 Bulk-Out Transfer (Dual FIFOs)................................................................... 687
15.5.6 EP2 Bulk-In Transfer (Dual FIFOs) ..................................................................... 688
15.5.7 EP3 Interrupt-In Transfer...................................................................................... 690
Processing of USB Standard Commands and Class/Vendor Commands .......................... 691
15.6.1 Processing of Commands Transmitted by Control Transfer................................. 691
Stall Operations.................................................................................................................. 692
15.7.1 Overview .............................................................................................................. 692
15.7.2 Forcible Stall by Application ................................................................................ 692
15.7.3 Automatic Stall by USB Function Module ........................................................... 694
DMA Transfer.................................................................................................................... 695
15.8.1 Overview .............................................................................................................. 695
15.8.2 DMA Transfer for Endpoint 1 .............................................................................. 695
15.8.3 DMA Transfer for Endpoint 2 .............................................................................. 696
Example of USB External Circuitry .................................................................................. 697
Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 699
15.10.1 Receiving Setup Data ........................................................................................... 699
15.10.2 Clearing the FIFO ................................................................................................. 699
15.10.3 Overreading and Overwriting the Data Registers ................................................. 699
15.10.4 Assigning Interrupt Sources to EP0...................................................................... 700
15.10.5 Clearing the FIFO When DMA Transfer is Enabled ............................................ 700
15.10.6 Notes on TR Interrupt ........................................................................................... 700
15.10.7 Restrictions on Peripheral Module Clock (Pφ) Operating Frequency................... 701
2
Section 16 I C Bus Interface2 (IIC2)................................................................. 703
16.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 703
16.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 705
16.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 706
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxii of xlviii
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7
16.3.1 I2C Bus Control Register A (ICCRA) ................................................................... 707
16.3.2 I2C Bus Control Register B (ICCRB).................................................................... 708
16.3.3 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)............................................................................ 710
16.3.4 I2C Bus Interrupt Enable Register (ICIER) ........................................................... 711
16.3.5 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR)............................................................................. 713
16.3.6 Slave Address Register (SAR).............................................................................. 716
16.3.7 I2C Bus Transmit Data Register (ICDRT)............................................................. 716
16.3.8 I2C Bus Receive Data Register (ICDRR).............................................................. 717
16.3.9 I2C Bus Shift Register (ICDRS)............................................................................ 717
Operation ........................................................................................................................... 718
16.4.1 I2C Bus Format...................................................................................................... 718
16.4.2 Master Transmit Operation ................................................................................... 719
16.4.3 Master Receive Operation..................................................................................... 721
16.4.4 Slave Transmit Operation ..................................................................................... 723
16.4.5 Slave Receive Operation....................................................................................... 726
16.4.6 Noise Canceler...................................................................................................... 727
16.4.7 Example of Use..................................................................................................... 728
Interrupt Request................................................................................................................ 732
Bit Synchronous Circuit..................................................................................................... 732
Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 733
Section 17 A/D Converter..................................................................................735
17.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 735
17.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 737
17.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 737
17.3.1 A/D Data Registers A to H (ADDRA to ADDRH) .............................................. 738
17.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ................................................................ 739
17.3.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ............................................................................. 741
17.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 742
17.4.1 Single Mode.......................................................................................................... 742
17.4.2 Scan Mode ............................................................................................................ 743
17.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time .......................................................... 745
17.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing.............................................................................. 746
17.5 Interrupt Source ................................................................................................................. 747
17.6 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions .............................................................................. 747
17.7 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 749
17.7.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 749
17.7.2 Permissible Signal Source Impedance .................................................................. 749
17.7.3 Influences on Absolute Accuracy ......................................................................... 749
17.7.4 Setting Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pins ....................................... 750
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxiii of xlviiil
17.7.5 Notes on Board Design ......................................................................................... 750
17.7.6 Notes on Noise Countermeasures ......................................................................... 750
17.7.7 A/D Input Hold Function in Software Standby Mode .......................................... 751
Section 18 D/A Converter ................................................................................. 753
18.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 753
18.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 754
18.3 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 754
18.3.1 D/A Data Registers 0 and 1 (DADR0 and DADR1)............................................. 754
18.3.2 D/A Control Register 01 (DACR01) .................................................................... 755
18.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 757
18.5 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 758
18.5.1 Module Stop Mode Setting ................................................................................... 758
18.5.2 D/A Output Hold Function in Software Standby Mode........................................ 758
Section 19 RAM ................................................................................................ 759
Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-µm F-ZTAT Version).................................... 761
20.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 761
20.2 Mode Transition Diagram.................................................................................................. 763
20.3 Block Structure .................................................................................................................. 765
20.3.1 Block Diagram of H8SX/1653.............................................................................. 765
20.3.2 Block Diagram of H8SX/1654.............................................................................. 766
20.4 Programming/Erasing Interface ......................................................................................... 767
20.5 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 769
20.6 Register Descriptions......................................................................................................... 770
20.6.1 Programming/Erasing Interface Registers ............................................................ 771
20.6.2 Programming/Erasing Interface Parameters ......................................................... 777
20.6.3 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER).................................................................... 788
20.7 On-Board Programming Mode .......................................................................................... 789
20.7.1 SCI Boot Mode ..................................................................................................... 789
20.7.2 USB Boot Mode ................................................................................................... 793
20.7.3 User Program Mode.............................................................................................. 797
20.7.4 On-Chip Program and Storable Area for Program Data ....................................... 807
20.8 Protection........................................................................................................................... 810
20.8.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................. 810
20.8.2 Software Protection .............................................................................................. 811
20.8.3 Error Protection .................................................................................................... 811
20.9 Flash Memory Emulation Using RAM.............................................................................. 813
20.10 Programmer Mode ............................................................................................................. 816
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxiv of xlviii
20.11 Standard Serial Communication Interface Specifications for Boot Mode ......................... 816
20.12 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 841
Section 21 Clock Pulse Generator .....................................................................843
21.1 Register Description........................................................................................................... 845
21.1.1 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR) ............................................................ 845
21.2 Oscillator............................................................................................................................ 848
21.2.1 Connecting Crystal Resonator .............................................................................. 848
21.2.2 External Clock Input............................................................................................. 849
21.3 PLL Circuit ........................................................................................................................ 850
21.4 Frequency Divider ............................................................................................................. 850
21.5 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 850
21.5.1 Notes on Clock Pulse Generator ........................................................................... 850
21.5.2 Notes on Resonator............................................................................................... 851
21.5.3 Notes on Board Design ......................................................................................... 852
Section 22 Power-Down Modes ........................................................................853
22.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 853
22.2 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 855
22.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) ..................................................................... 856
22.2.2 Module Stop Control Registers A and B (MSTPCRA and MSTPCRB) .............. 858
22.2.3 Module Stop Control Register C (MSTPCRC)..................................................... 861
22.3 Multi-Clock Function......................................................................................................... 862
22.4 Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................................ 863
22.4.1 Transition to Sleep Mode...................................................................................... 863
22.4.2 Clearing Sleep Mode ............................................................................................ 863
22.5 Software Standby Mode..................................................................................................... 864
22.5.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode .................................................................. 864
22.5.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode ......................................................................... 864
22.5.3 Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode ........... 865
22.5.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example..................................................... 867
22.6 Hardware Standby Mode ................................................................................................... 868
22.6.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode ................................................................. 868
22.6.2 Clearing Hardware Standby Mode........................................................................ 868
22.6.3 Hardware Standby Mode Timing.......................................................................... 868
22.6.4 Timing Sequence at Power-On ............................................................................. 869
22.7 Module Stop Mode ............................................................................................................ 869
22.7.1 Module Stop Mode ............................................................................................... 869
22.7.2 All-Module-Clock-Stop Mode.............................................................................. 870
22.8 Sleep Interrupt Function..................................................................................................... 871
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxv of xlviiil
22.9 Bφ Clock Output Control................................................................................................... 874
22.10 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 875
22.10.1 I/O Port Status....................................................................................................... 875
22.10.2 Current Consumption during Oscillation Settling Standby Period ....................... 875
22.10.3 Module Stop Mode of DMAC or DTC................................................................. 875
22.10.4 On-Chip Peripheral Module Interrupts ................................................................. 875
22.10.5 Writing to MSTPCRA, MSTPCRB, and MSTPCRC........................................... 875
Section 23 List of Registers............................................................................... 877
23.1 Register Addresses (Address Order).................................................................................. 878
23.2 Register Bits....................................................................................................................... 889
23.3 Register States in Each Operating Mode ........................................................................... 905
Section 24 Electrical Characteristics ................................................................. 917
24.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .............................................................................................. 917
24.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................................. 918
24.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................................. 921
24.3.1 Clock Timing ........................................................................................................ 921
24.3.2 Control Signal Timing .......................................................................................... 924
24.3.3 Bus Timing ........................................................................................................... 925
24.3.4 DMAC Timing...................................................................................................... 940
24.3.5 Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules ............................................................... 943
24.4 USB Characteristics ........................................................................................................... 948
24.5 A/D Conversion Characteristics ........................................................................................ 950
24.6 D/A Conversion Characteristics ........................................................................................ 950
24.7 Flash Memory Characteristics ........................................................................................... 951
24.7.1 H8SX/1653 ........................................................................................................... 951
24.7.2 H8SX/1654 ........................................................................................................... 952
Appendix
A.
B.
C.
......................................................................................................... 953
Port States in Each Pin State.............................................................................................. 953
Product Lineup................................................................................................................... 958
Package Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 959
Index
......................................................................................................... 961
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxvi of xlviii
Figures
Section 1 Overview
Figure 1.1 Block Diagram .............................................................................................................. 2
Figure 1.2 Pin Assignments ............................................................................................................ 3
Section 2 CPU
Figure 2.1 CPU Operating Modes ................................................................................................ 19
Figure 2.2 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode)..................................................................... 20
Figure 2.3 Stack Structure (Normal Mode) .................................................................................. 20
Figure 2.4 Exception Vector Table (Middle and Advanced Modes) ............................................ 22
Figure 2.5 Stack Structure (Middle and Advanced Modes).......................................................... 23
Figure 2.6 Exception Vector Table (Maximum Modes)............................................................... 24
Figure 2.7 Stack Structure (Maximum Mode) .............................................................................. 24
Figure 2.8 Memory Map............................................................................................................... 25
Figure 2.9 CPU Registers ............................................................................................................. 26
Figure 2.10 Usage of General Registers ....................................................................................... 27
Figure 2.11 Stack .......................................................................................................................... 28
Figure 2.12 General Register Data Formats ................................................................................. 32
Figure 2.13 Memory Data Formats............................................................................................... 33
Figure 2.14 Instruction Formats.................................................................................................... 50
Figure 2.15 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode ......................................... 56
Section 3
Figure 3.1
Figure 3.1
Figure 3.2
Figure 3.2
MCU Operating Modes
Address Map (1) in each Operating Mode of H8SX/1653 .......................................... 69
Address Map (2) in each Operating Mode of H8SX/1653 .......................................... 70
Address Map (1) in each Operating Mode of H8SX/1654 .......................................... 71
Address Map (2) in each Operating Mode of H8SX/1654 .......................................... 72
Section 4 Exception Handling
Figure 4.1 Reset Sequence (On-chip ROM Enabled Advanced Mode)........................................ 77
Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence
(16-Bit External Access in On-chip ROM Disabled Advanced Mode) ...................... 78
Figure 4.3 Stack Status after Exception Handling ........................................................................ 85
Figure 4.4 Operation when SP Value Is Odd................................................................................ 86
Section 5
Figure 5.1
Figure 5.2
Figure 5.3
Figure 5.4
Interrupt Controller
Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller........................................................................ 88
Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQn............................................................................ 104
Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 0... 111
Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 2... 113
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxvii of xlviii
Figure 5.5 Interrupt Exception Handling.................................................................................... 114
Figure 5.6 Block Diagram of DTC, DMAC, and Interrupt Controller ....................................... 117
Figure 5.7 Conflict between Interrupt Generation and Disabling............................................... 122
Section 6
Figure 6.1
Figure 6.2
Figure 6.3
Bus Controller (BSC)
Block Diagram of Bus Controller.............................................................................. 127
Read Strobe Negation Timing (Example of 3-State Access Space) .......................... 137
CS and Address Assertion Period Extension (Example of Basic Bus Interface,
3-State Access Space, and RDNn = 0)....................................................................... 139
Figure 6.4 Internal Bus Configuration........................................................................................ 150
Figure 6.5 System Clock: External Bus Clock = 4:1, External 2-State Access .......................... 153
Figure 6.6 System Clock: External Bus Clock = 2:1, External 3-State Access .......................... 154
Figure 6.7 Address Space Area Division.................................................................................... 158
Figure 6.8 CSn Signal Output Timing (n = 0 to 7) ..................................................................... 159
Figure 6.9 Timing When CS Signal is Output to the Same Pin.................................................. 160
Figure 6.10 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control for 8-Bit Access Space
(Big Endian) ............................................................................................................ 169
Figure 6.11 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control for 8-Bit Access Space
(Little Endian).......................................................................................................... 170
Figure 6.12 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control for 16-Bit Access Space
(Big Endian) ............................................................................................................ 171
Figure 6.13 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control for 16-Bit Access Space
(Little Endian).......................................................................................................... 171
Figure 6.14 16-Bit 2-State Access Space Bus Timing (Byte Access for Even Address)........... 173
Figure 6.15 16-Bit 2-State Access Space Bus Timing (Byte Access for Odd Address) ............ 174
Figure 6.16 16-Bit 2-State Access Space Bus Timing (Word Access for Even Address) ......... 175
Figure 6.17 16-Bit 3-State Access Space Bus Timing (Byte Access for Even Address)........... 176
Figure 6.18 16-Bit 3-State Access Space Bus Timing (Word Access for Odd Address) .......... 177
Figure 6.19 16-Bit 3-State Access Space Bus Timing (Word Access for Even Address) ......... 178
Figure 6.20 Example of Wait Cycle Insertion Timing................................................................ 180
Figure 6.21 Example of Read Strobe Timing ............................................................................. 181
Figure 6.22 Example of Timing when Chip Select Assertion Period is Extended ..................... 183
Figure 6.23 DACK Signal Output Timing.................................................................................. 184
Figure 6.24 16-Bit 2-State Access Space Bus Timing................................................................ 187
Figure 6.25 16-Bit 3-State Access Space Bus Timing................................................................ 188
Figure 6.26 Example of Wait Cycle Insertion Timing................................................................ 190
Figure 6.27 DACK Signal Output Timing.................................................................................. 192
Figure 6.28 Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (ASTn = 1, Two Burst Cycles)................ 195
Figure 6.29 Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (ASTn = 0, One Burst Cycle) .................. 196
Figure 6.30 8-Bit Access Space Access Timing (ABWHn = 1, ABWLn = 1) ........................... 200
Figure 6.31 16-Bit Access Space Access Timing (ABWHn = 0, ABWLn = 1) ......................... 201
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxviii of xlviii
Figure 6.32
Figure 6.33
Figure 6.34
Figure 6.35
Figure 6.36
Figure 6.37
Figure 6.38
Figure 6.39
Figure 6.40
Figure 6.41
Figure 6.42
Figure 6.43
Figure 6.44
Figure 6.45
Access Timing of 3 Address Cycles (ADDEX = 1) ................................................ 202
Read Strobe Timing................................................................................................. 204
Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period Extension Timing in Data Cycle ...................... 205
Consecutive Read Accesses to Same Area
(Address/Data Multiplexed I/O Space).................................................................... 206
DACK Signal Output Timing.................................................................................. 207
Example of Idle Cycle Operation (Consecutive Reads in Different Areas) ............ 210
Example of Idle Cycle Operation (Write after Read) .............................................. 211
Example of Idle Cycle Operation (Read after Write) .............................................. 212
Example of Idle Cycle Operation (Write after Single Address Transfer Write)...... 213
Idle Cycle Insertion Example .................................................................................. 214
Relationship between Chip Select (CS) and Read (RD).......................................... 215
Bus Released State Transition Timing .................................................................... 220
Example of Timing when Write Data Buffer Function is Used .............................. 222
Example of Timing when Peripheral Module
Write Data Buffer Function is Used ....................................................................... 223
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Figure 7.1 Block Diagram of DMAC ......................................................................................... 231
Figure 7.2 Example of Signal Timing in Dual Address Mode.................................................... 256
Figure 7.3 Operations in Dual Address Mode ............................................................................ 256
Figure 7.4 Data Flow in Single Address Mode........................................................................... 257
Figure 7.5 Example of Signal Timing in Single Address Mode ................................................. 258
Figure 7.6 Operations in Single Address Mode.......................................................................... 258
Figure 7.7 Example of Signal Timing in Normal Transfer Mode............................................... 259
Figure 7.8 Operations in Normal Transfer Mode ....................................................................... 260
Figure 7.9 Operations in Repeat Transfer Mode......................................................................... 261
Figure 7.10 Operations in Block Transfer Mode ........................................................................ 262
Figure 7.11 Operation in Single Address Mode in Block Transfer Mode
(Block Area Specified) ............................................................................................ 262
Figure 7.12 Operation in Dual Address Mode in Block Transfer Mode
(Block Area Not Specified) .................................................................................... 263
Figure 7.13 Example of Timing in Cycle Stealing Mode ........................................................... 267
Figure 7.14 Example of Timing in Burst Mode.......................................................................... 267
Figure 7.15 Example of Extended Repeat Area Operation......................................................... 269
Figure 7.16 Example of Extended Repeat Area Function in Block Transfer Mode ................... 270
Figure 7.17 Address Update Method .......................................................................................... 271
Figure 7.18 Operation of Offset Addition................................................................................... 272
Figure 7.19 XY Conversion Operation Using Offset Addition in Repeat Transfer Mode.......... 273
Figure 7.20 XY Conversion Flowchart Using Offset Addition in Repeat Transfer Mode ......... 274
Figure 7.21 Procedure for Changing Register Setting For Channel being Transferred .............. 278
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxix of xlviii
Figure 7.22
Figure 7.23
Figure 7.24
Figure 7.25
Figure 7.26
Figure 7.27
Figure 7.28
Figure 7.29
Figure 7.30
Figure 7.31
Figure 7.32
Figure 7.33
Figure 7.34
Figure 7.35
Figure 7.36
Figure 7.37
Figure 7.38
Figure 7.39
Figure 7.40
Section 8
Figure 8.1
Figure 8.2
Figure 8.3
Figure 8.4
Figure 8.5
Figure 8.6
Figure 8.7
Figure 8.8
Example of Timing for Channel Priority................................................................. 281
Example of Bus Timing of DMA Transfer ............................................................. 282
Example of Transfer in Normal Transfer Mode by Cycle Stealing......................... 283
Example of Transfer in Normal Transfer Mode by Cycle Stealing
(Transfer Source DSAR = Odd Address and Source Address Increment).............. 284
Example of Transfer in Normal Transfer Mode by Cycle Stealing (Transfer
Destination DDAR = Odd Address and Destination Address Decrement)............. 284
Example of Transfer in Normal Transfer Mode by Burst Access ........................... 285
Example of Transfer in Block Transfer Mode......................................................... 286
Example of Transfer in Normal Transfer Mode Activated
by DREQ Falling Edge ........................................................................................... 287
Example of Transfer in Block Transfer Mode Activated
by DREQ Falling Edge ........................................................................................... 288
Example of Transfer in Normal Transfer Mode Activated
by DREQ Low Level .............................................................................................. 289
Example of Transfer in Block Transfer Mode Activated
by DREQ Low Level .............................................................................................. 290
Example of Transfer in Normal Transfer Mode Activated
by DREQ Low Level with NRD = 1 ...................................................................... 291
Example of Transfer in Single Address Mode (Byte Read) .................................... 292
Example of Transfer in Single Address Mode (Byte Write) ................................... 293
Example of Transfer in Single Address Mode Activated
by DREQ Falling Edge ........................................................................................... 294
Example of Transfer in Single Address Mode Activated
by DREQ Low Level .............................................................................................. 295
Example of Transfer in Single Address Mode Activated
by DREQ Low Level with NRD = 1 ...................................................................... 296
Interrupt and Interrupt Sources................................................................................ 304
Procedure Example of Resuming Transfer by Clearing Interrupt Source ............... 304
Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Block Diagram of DTC ............................................................................................. 308
Transfer Information on Data Area ........................................................................... 318
Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Transfer Information............... 318
Flowchart of DTC Operation .................................................................................... 322
Bus Cycle Division Example .................................................................................... 324
Transfer Information Read Skip Timing ................................................................... 325
Memory Map in Normal Transfer Mode................................................................... 327
Memory Map in Repeat Transfer Mode
(When Transfer Source is Specified as Repeat Area)............................................... 328
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxx of xlviii
Figure 8.9 Memory Map in Block Transfer Mode
(When Transfer Destination is Specified as Block Area) .......................................... 329
Figure 8.10 Operation of Chain Transfer.................................................................................... 330
Figure 8.11 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Short Address Mode
in Normal Transfer Mode or Repeat Transfer Mode) ............................................. 331
Figure 8.12 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Short Address Mode
in Block Transfer Mode with Block Size of 2) ....................................................... 331
Figure 8.13 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Short Address Mode in Chain Transfer) ...... 332
Figure 8.14 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Full Address Mode
in Normal Transfer Mode or Repeat Transfer Mode) .............................................. 332
Figure 8.15 DTC with Interrupt Activation ................................................................................ 335
Figure 8.16 Chain Transfer when Counter = 0 ........................................................................... 338
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of TPU............................................................................................ 398
Figure 10.2 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure .................................................. 435
Figure 10.3 Free-Running Counter Operation ............................................................................ 436
Figure 10.4 Periodic Counter Operation..................................................................................... 437
Figure 10.5 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match.............. 437
Figure 10.6 Example of 0-Output/1-Output Operation............................................................... 438
Figure 10.7 Example of Toggle Output Operation ..................................................................... 438
Figure 10.8 Example of Setting Procedure for Input Capture Operation.................................... 439
Figure 10.9 Example of Input Capture Operation....................................................................... 440
Figure 10.10 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure ........................................ 441
Figure 10.11 Example of Synchronous Operation...................................................................... 442
Figure 10.12 Compare Match Buffer Operation......................................................................... 443
Figure 10.13 Input Capture Buffer Operation............................................................................. 444
Figure 10.14 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure................................................... 444
Figure 10.15 Example of Buffer Operation (1)........................................................................... 445
Figure 10.16 Example of Buffer Operation (2)........................................................................... 446
Figure 10.17 Example of Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure .............................................. 447
Figure 10.18 Example of Cascaded Operation (1)...................................................................... 448
Figure 10.19 Example of Cascaded Operation (2)...................................................................... 448
Figure 10.20 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure .......................................................... 451
Figure 10.21 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1) ................................................................. 451
Figure 10.22 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2) ................................................................. 452
Figure 10.23 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3) ................................................................. 453
Figure 10.24 Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure........................................... 454
Figure 10.25 Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation .................................................... 455
Figure 10.26 Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation .................................................... 456
Figure 10.27 Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation .................................................... 457
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxxi of xlviii
Figure 10.28
Figure 10.29
Figure 10.30
Figure 10.31
Figure 10.32
Figure 10.33
Figure 10.34
Figure 10.35
Figure 10.36
Figure 10.37
Figure 10.38
Figure 10.39
Figure 10.40
Figure 10.41
Figure 10.42
Figure 10.43
Figure 10.44
Figure 10.45
Figure 10.46
Figure 10.47
Figure 10.48
Figure 10.49
Figure 10.50
Figure 10.51
Figure 10.52
Figure 10.53
Figure 10.54
Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation .................................................... 458
Phase Counting Mode Application Example......................................................... 460
Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation............................................................ 464
Count Timing in External Clock Operation .......................................................... 464
Output Compare Output Timing ........................................................................... 465
Input Capture Input Signal Timing........................................................................ 465
Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match) .............................................................. 466
Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture) .................................................................. 466
Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match) ......................................................... 467
Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture) ............................................................. 467
TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match) ............................................................... 468
TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture) ................................................................... 468
TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing.............................................................................. 469
TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing.............................................................................. 469
Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU .............................................................. 470
Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC or DMAC Activation (1)...................... 471
Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC or DMAC Activation (2)...................... 471
Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode ................ 472
Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear Operations ........................................... 473
Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment Operations.................................... 474
Conflict between TGR Write and Compare Match ............................................... 474
Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match .............................. 475
Conflict between TGR Read and Input Capture.................................................... 476
Conflict between TGR Write and Input Capture................................................... 476
Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture .................................. 477
Conflict between Overflow and Counter Clearing ................................................ 478
Conflict between TCNT Write and Overflow ....................................................... 478
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of PPG............................................................................................ 479
Figure 11.2 Schematic Diagram of PPG..................................................................................... 488
Figure 11.3 Timing of Transfer and Output of NDR Contents (Example) ................................. 489
Figure 11.4 Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output (Example) ............................................ 490
Figure 11.5 Normal Pulse Output Example (5-Phase Pulse Output) .......................................... 491
Figure 11.6 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output ............................................................................... 492
Figure 11.7 Non-Overlapping Operation and NDR Write Timing ............................................. 493
Figure 11.8 Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example)............................. 494
Figure 11.9 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Example (4-Phase Complementary) ..................... 495
Figure 11.10 Inverted Pulse Output (Example) .......................................................................... 497
Figure 11.11 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture (Example)............................................ 498
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxxii of xlviii
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module (Unit 0) ..................................................... 502
Figure 12.2 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module (Unit 1) ..................................................... 503
Figure 12.3 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module (Unit 2) ..................................................... 504
Figure 12.4 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module (Unit 3) ..................................................... 505
Figure 12.5 Example of Pulse Output......................................................................................... 519
Figure 12.6 Example of Reset Input ........................................................................................... 519
Figure 12.7 Count Timing for Internal Clock Input.................................................................... 520
Figure 12.8 Count Timing for External Clock Input .................................................................. 520
Figure 12.9 Timing of CMF Setting at Compare Match............................................................. 521
Figure 12.10 Timing of Toggled Timer Output at Compare Match A ....................................... 521
Figure 12.11 Timing of Counter Clear by Compare Match........................................................ 522
Figure 12.12 Timing of Clearance by External Reset (Rising Edge).......................................... 522
Figure 12.13 Timing of Clearance by External Reset (High Level) ........................................... 522
Figure 12.14 Timing of OVF Setting.......................................................................................... 523
Figure 12.15 Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear.............................................................. 526
Figure 12.16 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment ...................................................... 527
Figure 12.17 Conflict between TCOR Write and Compare Match............................................. 527
Section 13
Figure 13.1
Figure 13.2
Figure 13.3
Figure 13.4
Figure 13.5
Figure 13.6
Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Block Diagram of WDT .......................................................................................... 532
Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode....................................................................... 537
Operation in Interval Timer Mode........................................................................... 538
Writing to TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR.................................................................. 539
Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment ........................................................ 540
Circuit for System Reset by WDTOVF Signal (Example)...................................... 541
Section 14
Figure 14.1
Figure 14.2
Figure 14.3
Figure 14.3
Figure 14.3
Figure 14.4
Figure 14.5
Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Block Diagram of SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4 ...................................................................... 546
Block Diagram of SCI_5 and SCI_6 ....................................................................... 547
Examples of Base Clock when Average Transfer Rate Is Selected (1) ................... 581
Examples of Base Clock when Average Transfer Rate Is Selected (2) ................... 582
Examples of Base Clock when Average Transfer Rate Is Selected (3) ................... 583
Example of Average Transfer Rate Setting when TMR Clock Is Input .................. 584
Data Format in Asynchronous Communication
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) ................................................. 586
Figure 14.6 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode ........................................ 588
Figure 14.7 Phase Relation between Output Clock and Transmit Data
(Asynchronous Mode) ............................................................................................. 589
Figure 14.8 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart ....................................................................... 590
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxxiii of xlviii
Figure 14.9 Example of Operation for Transmission in Asynchronous Mode
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) .................................................... 591
Figure 14.10 Example of Serial Transmission Flowchart........................................................... 592
Figure 14.11 Example of SCI Operation for Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit).................................................. 593
Figure 14.12 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (1)................................................................. 595
Figure 14.12 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (2)................................................................. 596
Figure 14.13 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format
(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)........................................... 598
Figure 14.14 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart ........................................ 599
Figure 14.15 Example of SCI Operation for Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) .............................. 600
Figure 14.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)........................................ 601
Figure 14.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)........................................ 602
Figure 14.17 Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication (LSB-First)..................... 603
Figure 14.18 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart ..................................................................... 604
Figure 14.19 Example of Operation for Transmission in Clocked Synchronous Mode ............. 606
Figure 14.20 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart ................................................................. 606
Figure 14.21 Example of Operation for Reception in Clocked Synchronous Mode .................. 607
Figure 14.22 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart ...................................................................... 608
Figure 14.23 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmission and Reception .............. 609
Figure 14.24 Pin Connection for Smart Card Interface .............................................................. 610
Figure 14.25 Data Formats in Normal Smart Card Interface Mode ........................................... 611
Figure 14.26 Direct Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 0) ...................................................... 611
Figure 14.27 Inverse Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 1) .................................................... 612
Figure 14.28 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Interface Mode
(When Clock Frequency is 372 Times the Bit Rate) ............................................. 613
Figure 14.29 Data Re-Transfer Operation in SCI Transmission Mode ...................................... 616
Figure 14.30 TEND Flag Set Timing during Transmission........................................................ 616
Figure 14.31 Sample Transmission Flowchart ........................................................................... 617
Figure 14.32 Data Re-Transfer Operation in SCI Reception Mode............................................ 618
Figure 14.33 Sample Reception Flowchart................................................................................. 619
Figure 14.34 Clock Output Fixing Timing ................................................................................. 619
Figure 14.35 Clock Stop and Restart Procedure......................................................................... 620
Figure 14.36 IrDA Block Diagram............................................................................................. 621
Figure 14.37 IrDA Transmission and Reception ........................................................................ 622
Figure 14.38 Sample Transmission using DTC in Clocked Synchronous Mode........................ 628
Figure 14.39 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission............................... 630
Figure 14.40 Port Pin States during Mode Transition
(Internal Clock, Asynchronous Transmission) ...................................................... 630
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxxiv of xlviii
Figure 14.41 Port Pin States during Mode Transition (Internal Clock, Clocked Synchronous
Transmission) (Setting is Prohibited in SCI_5 and SCI_6) ................................... 631
Figure 14.42 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception .................................... 631
Figure 14.43 Block Diagram of CRC Operation Circuit ............................................................ 632
Figure 14.44 LSB-First Data Transmission ................................................................................ 635
Figure 14.45 MSB-First Data Transmission ............................................................................... 635
Figure 14.46 LSB-First Data Reception ..................................................................................... 636
Figure 14.47 MSB-First Data Reception .................................................................................... 637
Figure 14.48 LSB-First and MSB-First Transmit Data .............................................................. 638
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of USB ........................................................................................... 640
Figure 15.2 Cable Connection Operation ................................................................................... 674
Figure 15.3 Cable Disconnection Operation............................................................................... 675
Figure 15.4 Suspend Operation .................................................................................................. 676
Figure 15.5 Resume Operation from Up-Stream ........................................................................ 677
Figure 15.6 Flow of Transition to and Canceling Software Standby Mode................................ 678
Figure 15.7 Timing of Transition to and Canceling Software Standby Mode ............................ 679
Figure 15.8 Remote-Wakeup...................................................................................................... 680
Figure 15.9 Transfer Stages in Control Transfer ........................................................................ 681
Figure 15.10 Setup Stage Operation ........................................................................................... 682
Figure 15.11 Data Stage (Control-In) Operation ........................................................................ 683
Figure 15.12 Data Stage (Control-Out) Operation...................................................................... 684
Figure 15.13 Status Stage (Control-In) Operation ...................................................................... 685
Figure 15.14 Status Stage (Control-Out) Operation ................................................................... 686
Figure 15.15 EP1 Bulk-Out Transfer Operation......................................................................... 687
Figure 15.16 EP2 Bulk-In Transfer Operation............................................................................ 688
Figure 15.17 Operation of EP3 Interrupt-In Transfer ................................................................. 690
Figure 15.18 Forcible Stall by Application................................................................................. 693
Figure 15.19 Automatic Stall by USB Function Module............................................................ 694
Figure 15.20 RDFN Bit Operation for EP1 ................................................................................ 695
Figure 15.21 PKTE Bit Operation for EP2................................................................................. 696
Figure 15.22 Example of Circuitry in Bus Power Mode ............................................................ 697
Figure 15.23 Example of Circuitry in Self Power Mode ............................................................ 698
Figure 15.24 TR Interrupt Flag Set Timing ................................................................................ 700
Section 16
Figure 16.1
Figure 16.2
Figure 16.3
Figure 16.4
I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2)
Block Diagram of I2C Bus Interface2...................................................................... 704
Connections to the External Circuit by the I/O Pins................................................ 705
I2C Bus Formats ...................................................................................................... 718
I2C Bus Timing........................................................................................................ 718
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxxv of xlviii
Figure 16.5 Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing 1............................................................ 720
Figure 16.6 Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing 2............................................................ 720
Figure 16.7 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing 1 ............................................................. 722
Figure 16.8 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing 2 ............................................................. 723
Figure 16.9 Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing 1.............................................................. 724
Figure 16.10 Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing 2............................................................ 725
Figure 16.11 Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing 1 ............................................................. 726
Figure 16.12 Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing 2 ............................................................. 727
Figure 16.13 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler......................................................................... 727
Figure 16.14 Sample Flowchart of Master Transmit Mode........................................................ 728
Figure 16.15 Sample Flowchart for Master Receive Mode ........................................................ 729
Figure 16.16 Sample Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode......................................................... 730
Figure 16.17 Sample Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode .......................................................... 731
Figure 16.18 Timing of the Bit Synchronous Circuit ................................................................. 733
Section 17
Figure 17.1
Figure 17.2
Figure 17.3
A/D Converter
Block Diagram of A/D Converter ........................................................................... 736
Example of A/D Converter Operation (Single Mode, Channel 1 Selected) ............ 743
Example of A/D Conversion
(Scan Mode, Three Channels (AN0 to AN2) Selected) .......................................... 744
Figure 17.4 A/D Conversion Timing.......................................................................................... 745
Figure 17.5 External Trigger Input Timing ................................................................................ 746
Figure 17.6 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions ................................................................... 748
Figure 17.7 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions ................................................................... 748
Figure 17.8 Example of Analog Input Circuit ............................................................................ 749
Figure 17.9 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit........................................................... 751
Figure 17.10 Analog Input Pin Equivalent Circuit ..................................................................... 751
Section 18 D/A Converter
Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of D/A Converter ........................................................................... 753
Figure 18.2 Example of D/A Converter Operation..................................................................... 757
Section 20
Figure 20.1
Figure 20.2
Figure 20.3
Figure 20.4
Figure 20.5
Figure 20.6
Figure 20.7
Figure 20.8
Figure 20.9
Flash Memory (0.18-mm F-ZTAT Version)
Block Diagram of Flash Memory............................................................................ 762
Mode Transition of Flash Memory.......................................................................... 763
Block Structure of User MAT ................................................................................. 765
Block Structure of User MAT ................................................................................. 766
Procedure for Creating Procedure Program............................................................. 767
System Configuration in SCI Boot Mode................................................................ 789
Automatic-Bit-Rate Adjustment Operation............................................................. 790
SCI Boot Mode State Transition Diagram .............................................................. 791
System Configuration in USB Boot Mode .............................................................. 793
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxxvi of xlviii
Figure 20.10
Figure 20.11
Figure 20.12
Figure 20.13
Figure 20.14
Figure 20.15
Figure 20.16
Figure 20.17
Figure 20.18
Figure 20.19
Figure 20.20
Figure 20.21
Figure 20.22
Figure 20.23
Figure 20.24
Figure 20.25
Section 21
Figure 21.1
Figure 21.2
Figure 21.3
Figure 21.4
Figure 21.5
Figure 21.6
Figure 21.7
Figure 21.8
USB Boot Mode State Transition Diagram ........................................................... 795
Programming/Erasing Flow................................................................................... 797
RAM Map when Programming/Erasing is Executed ............................................ 798
Programming Procedure in User Program Mode .................................................. 799
Erasing Procedure in User Program Mode ............................................................ 804
Repeating Procedure of Erasing, Programming,
and RAM Emulation in User Program Mode ....................................................... 806
Transitions to Error Protection State ..................................................................... 812
RAM Emulation Flow ........................................................................................... 813
Address Map of Overlaid RAM Area (H8SX/1653) ............................................. 814
Programming Tuned Data (H8SX/1653)............................................................... 815
Boot Program States .............................................................................................. 817
Bit-Rate-Adjustment Sequence ............................................................................. 818
Communication Protocol Format .......................................................................... 819
New Bit-Rate Selection Sequence......................................................................... 830
Programming Sequence......................................................................................... 833
Erasure Sequence .................................................................................................. 833
Clock Pulse Generator
Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator ............................................................... 844
Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example)........................................................... 848
Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit ...................................................................... 848
External Clock Input (Examples) ............................................................................ 849
External Clock Input Timing................................................................................... 849
Clock Modification Timing..................................................................................... 851
Note on Board Design for Oscillation Circuit ......................................................... 852
Recommended External Circuitry for PLL Circuit ................................................. 852
Section 22
Figure 22.1
Figure 22.2
Figure 22.3
Figure 22.4
Figure 22.5
Power-Down Modes
Mode Transitions..................................................................................................... 855
Software Standby Mode Application Example ....................................................... 867
Hardware Standby Mode Timing ............................................................................ 868
Timing Sequence at Power-On................................................................................ 869
When Canceling Factor Interrupt is Generated
after SLEEP Instruction Execution .......................................................................... 872
Figure 22.6 When Canceling Factor Interrupt is Generated
before SLEEP Instruction Execution (Sleep Interrupt Disabled)............................. 872
Figure 22.7 When Canceling Factor Interrupt is Generated
before SLEEP Instruction Execution (Sleep Interrupt Enabled).............................. 873
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxxvii of xlviii
Section 24 Electrical Characteristics
Figure 24.1 Output Load Circuit ................................................................................................ 921
Figure 24.2 External Bus Clock Timing..................................................................................... 922
Figure 24.3 Oscillation Settling Timing after Software Standby Mode ..................................... 922
Figure 24.4 Oscillation Settling Timing ..................................................................................... 923
Figure 24.5 External Input Clock Timing................................................................................... 923
Figure 24.6 Reset Input Timing.................................................................................................. 924
Figure 24.7 Interrupt Input Timing............................................................................................. 925
Figure 24.8 Basic Bus Timing: Two-State Access ..................................................................... 928
Figure 24.9 Basic Bus Timing: Three-State Access ................................................................... 929
Figure 24.10 Basic Bus Timing: Three-State Access, One Wait................................................ 930
Figure 24.11 Basic Bus Timing: Two-State Access (CS Assertion Period Extended) ............... 931
Figure 24.12 Basic Bus Timing: Three-State Access (CS Assertion Period Extended) ............. 932
Figure 24.13 Byte Control SRAM: Two-State Read/Write Access............................................ 933
Figure 24.14 Byte Control SRAM: Three-State Read/Write Access.......................................... 934
Figure 24.15 Burst ROM Access Timing: One-State Burst Access ........................................... 935
Figure 24.16 Burst ROM Access Timing: Two-State Burst Access........................................... 936
Figure 24.17 Address/Data Multiplexed Access Timing (No Wait)
(Basic, Four-State Access)..................................................................................... 937
Figure 24.18 Address/Data Multiplexed Access Timing (Wait Control)
(Address Cycle Program Wait × 1 + Data Cycle Program Wait × 1 +
Data Cycle Pin Wait × 1)....................................................................................... 938
Figure 24.19 External Bus Release Timing ................................................................................ 939
Figure 24.20 External Bus Request Output Timing.................................................................... 939
Figure 24.21 DMAC (DREQ) Input Timing .............................................................................. 940
Figure 24.22 DMAC (TEND) Output Timing............................................................................ 940
Figure 24.23 DMAC Single-Address Transfer Timing: Two-State Access ............................... 941
Figure 24.24 DMAC Single-Address Transfer Timing: Three-State Access ............................. 942
Figure 24.25 I/O Port Input/Output Timing................................................................................ 945
Figure 24.26 TPU Input/Output Timing ..................................................................................... 945
Figure 24.27 TPU Clock Input Timing....................................................................................... 945
Figure 24.28 PPG Output Timing............................................................................................... 945
Figure 24.29 8-Bit Timer Output Timing ................................................................................... 946
Figure 24.30 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing ............................................................................ 946
Figure 24.31 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing ........................................................................... 946
Figure 24.32 WDT Output Timing ............................................................................................. 946
Figure 24.33 SCK Clock Input Timing ...................................................................................... 946
Figure 24.34 SCI Input/Output Timing: Clocked Synchronous Mode ....................................... 947
Figure 24.35 A/D Converter External Trigger Input Timing...................................................... 947
Figure 24.36 I2C Bus Interface2 Input/Output Timing (Option) ................................................ 947
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxxviii of xlviii
Figure 24.37 Data Signal Timing ............................................................................................... 949
Figure 24.38 Load Condition...................................................................................................... 949
Appendix
Figure C.1 Package Dimensions (TFP-120) ............................................................................... 959
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xxxix of xlviii
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xl of xlviii
Tables
Section 1 Overview
Table 1.1
Pin Configuration in Each Operating Mode.............................................................. 4
Table 1.2
Pin Functions ............................................................................................................ 8
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.1
Instruction Classification ........................................................................................ 34
Table 2.2
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes (1)....................................... 36
Table 2.2
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes (2)....................................... 39
Table 2.3
Operation Notation ................................................................................................. 40
Table 2.4
Data Transfer Instructions....................................................................................... 41
Table 2.5
Block Transfer Instructions..................................................................................... 42
Table 2.6
Arithmetic Operation Instructions .......................................................................... 43
Table 2.7
Logic Operation Instructions .................................................................................. 45
Table 2.8
Shift Operation Instructions.................................................................................... 45
Table 2.9
Bit Manipulation Instructions ................................................................................. 46
Table 2.10
Branch Instructions ................................................................................................. 48
Table 2.11
System Control Instructions.................................................................................... 49
Table 2.12
Addressing Modes .................................................................................................. 51
Table 2.13
Absolute Address Access Ranges ........................................................................... 54
Table 2.14
Effective Address Calculation for Transfer and Operation Instructions ................. 58
Table 2.15
Effective Address Calculation for Branch Instructions........................................... 59
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Table 3.1
MCU Operating Mode Settings .............................................................................. 61
Table 3.2
Settings of Bits MDS3 to MDS0............................................................................. 63
Table 3.3
Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode (Advanced Mode) .................................... 68
Section 4 Exception Handling
Table 4.1
Exception Types and Priority.................................................................................. 73
Table 4.2
Exception Handling Vector Table........................................................................... 74
Table 4.3
Calculation Method of Exception Handling Vector Table Address........................ 76
Table 4.4
Status of CCR and EXR after Trace Exception Handling....................................... 79
Table 4.5
Bus Cycle and Address Error.................................................................................. 80
Table 4.6
Status of CCR and EXR after Address Error Exception Handling ......................... 81
Table 4.7
Interrupt Sources..................................................................................................... 82
Table 4.8
Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling...................... 84
Table 4.9
Status of CCR and EXR after Illegal Instruction Exception Handling ................... 85
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xli of xlviii
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Table 5.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................... 89
Table 5.2
Interrupt Sources, Vector Address Offsets, and Interrupt Priority........................ 105
Table 5.3
Interrupt Control Modes ....................................................................................... 110
Table 5.4
Interrupt Response Times ..................................................................................... 115
Table 5.5
Number of Execution States in Interrupt Handling Routine ................................. 116
Table 5.6
Interrupt Source Selection and Clear Control ....................................................... 118
Table 5.7
CPU Priority Control ............................................................................................ 120
Table 5.8
Example of Priority Control Function Setting and Control State ......................... 121
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Table 6.1
Synchronization Clocks and Their Corresponding Functions............................... 151
Table 6.2
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 155
Table 6.3
Pin Functions in Each Interface ............................................................................ 157
Table 6.4
Interface Names and Area Names......................................................................... 160
Table 6.5
Areas Specifiable for Each Interface .................................................................... 161
Table 6.6
Number of Access Cycles..................................................................................... 163
Table 6.7
Area 0 External Interface...................................................................................... 164
Table 6.8
Area 1 External Interface...................................................................................... 165
Table 6.9
Area 2 External Interface...................................................................................... 165
Table 6.10
Area 3 External Interface...................................................................................... 166
Table 6.11
Area 4 External Interface...................................................................................... 166
Table 6.12
Area 5 External Interface...................................................................................... 167
Table 6.13
Area 6 External Interface...................................................................................... 168
Table 6.14
Area 7 External Interface...................................................................................... 168
Table 6.15
I/O Pins for Basic Bus Interface ........................................................................... 172
Table 6.16
I/O Pins for Byte Control SRAM Interface .......................................................... 186
Table 6.17
I/O Pins Used for Burst ROM Interface................................................................ 194
Table 6.18
Address/Data Multiplex........................................................................................ 198
Table 6.19
I/O Pins for Address/Data Multiplexed I/O Interface ........................................... 199
Table 6.20
Number of Idle Cycle Insertion Selection in Each Area....................................... 209
Table 6.21
Number of Idle Cycle Insertions........................................................................... 209
Table 6.22
Idle Cycles in Mixed Accesses to Normal Space.................................................. 216
Table 6.23
Pin States in Idle Cycle......................................................................................... 217
Table 6.24
Pin States in Bus Released State........................................................................... 219
Table 6.25
Number of Access Cycles for On-Chip Memory Spaces...................................... 221
Table 6.26
Number of Access Cycles for Registers of On-Chip Peripheral Modules ............ 221
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Table 7.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 232
Table 7.2
Data Access Size, Valid Bits, and Settable Size ................................................... 239
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xlii of xlviii
Table 7.3
Table 7.4
Table 7.5
Table 7.6
Table 7.7
Settings and Areas of Extended Repeat Area ....................................................... 253
Transfer Modes ..................................................................................................... 254
List of On-chip module interrupts to DMAC........................................................ 265
Priority among DMAC Channels.......................................................................... 280
Interrupt Sources and Priority............................................................................... 302
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8.1
Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs............... 319
Table 8.2
DTC Transfer Modes ............................................................................................ 321
Table 8.3
Chain Transfer Conditions.................................................................................... 323
Table 8.4
Number of Bus Cycle Divisions and Access Size................................................. 323
Table 8.5
Transfer Information Writeback Skip Condition
and Writeback Skipped Registers ......................................................................... 326
Table 8.6
Register Function in Normal Transfer Mode ........................................................ 326
Table 8.7
Register Function in Repeat Transfer Mode ......................................................... 328
Table 8.8
Register Function in Block Transfer Mode........................................................... 329
Table 8.9
DTC Execution Status........................................................................................... 333
Table 8.10
Number of Cycles Required for Each Execution State ......................................... 334
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.1
Port Functions ....................................................................................................... 341
Table 9.2
Register Configuration in Each Port ..................................................................... 347
Table 9.3
Startup Mode and Initial Value............................................................................. 348
Table 9.4
Input Pull-Up MOS State...................................................................................... 351
Table 9.5
Available Output Signals and Settings in Each Port ............................................. 378
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.1
TPU Functions ...................................................................................................... 396
Table 10.2
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 399
Table 10.3
CCLR2 to CCLR0 (Channels 0 and 3) ................................................................. 403
Table 10.4
CCLR2 to CCLR0 (Channels 1, 2, 4, and 5) ........................................................ 404
Table 10.5
Input Clock Edge Selection .................................................................................. 404
Table 10.6
TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 0) .............................................................................. 405
Table 10.7
TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 1) .............................................................................. 405
Table 10.8
TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 2) .............................................................................. 406
Table 10.9
TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 3) .............................................................................. 406
Table 10.10
TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 4) .......................................................................... 407
Table 10.11
TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 5) .......................................................................... 407
Table 10.12
MD3 to MD0 .................................................................................................... 409
Table 10.13
TIORH_0 .......................................................................................................... 411
Table 10.14
TIORL_0........................................................................................................... 412
Table 10.15
TIOR_1 ............................................................................................................. 413
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xliii of xlviii
Table 10.16
Table 10.17
Table 10.18
Table 10.19
Table 10.20
Table 10.21
Table 10.22
Table 10.23
Table 10.24
Table 10.25
Table 10.26
Table 10.27
Table 10.28
Table 10.29
Table 10.30
Table 10.31
Table 10.32
Table 10.33
Table 10.34
Table 10.35
Table 10.36
Table 10.37
TIOR_2............................................................................................................. 414
TIORH_3 .......................................................................................................... 415
TIORL_3 .......................................................................................................... 416
TIOR_4............................................................................................................. 417
TIOR_5............................................................................................................. 418
TIORH_0 .......................................................................................................... 419
TIORL_0 .......................................................................................................... 420
TIOR_1............................................................................................................. 421
TIOR_2............................................................................................................. 422
TIORH_3 .......................................................................................................... 423
TIORL_3 .......................................................................................................... 424
TIOR_4............................................................................................................. 425
TIOR_5............................................................................................................. 426
Register Combinations in Buffer Operation ..................................................... 443
Cascaded Combinations.................................................................................... 447
PWM Output Registers and Output Pins .......................................................... 450
Clock Input Pins in Phase Counting Mode ....................................................... 454
Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1.................................. 455
Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2.................................. 456
Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3.................................. 457
Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4.................................. 458
TPU Interrupts .................................................................................................. 461
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Table 11.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 480
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
Table 12.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 506
Table 12.2
Clock Input to TCNT and Count Condition (Units 0 and 1)................................. 513
Table 12.3
Clock Input to TCNT and Count Condition (Units 2 and 3)................................. 514
Table 12.4
8-Bit Timer (TMR_0 or TMR_1) Interrupt Sources (in Unit 0 and Unit 1) ......... 524
Table 12.5
8-Bit Timer (TMR_4 or TMR_5) Interrupt Sources (in Unit 2 and Unit 3) ......... 525
Table 12.6
Timer Output Priorities......................................................................................... 528
Table 12.7
Switching of Internal Clock and TCNT Operation ............................................... 529
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Table 13.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 532
Table 13.2
WDT Interrupt Source .......................................................................................... 538
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Table 14.1
Function List of SCI Channels.............................................................................. 545
Table 14.2
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 548
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xliv of xlviii
Table 14.3
Table 14.4
Table 14.4
Table 14.5
Table 14.6
Table 14.7
Table 14.8
Table 14.9
Table 14.10
Table 14.11
Table 14.12
Table 14.13
Table 14.14
Table 14.15
Table 14.16
Table 14.17
Relationships between N Setting in BRR and Bit Rate B..................................... 569
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1) ...... 570
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2) ...... 571
Maximum Bit Rate for Each Operating Frequency (Asynchronous Mode).......... 572
Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode) ................ 573
BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)..................... 574
Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .... 574
BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates
(Smart Card Interface Mode, n = 0, S = 372) ....................................................... 575
Maximum Bit Rate for Each Operating Frequency
(Smart Card Interface Mode, S = 372).............................................................. 575
Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)................................................ 587
SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling .................................................. 594
IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 Bit Settings......................................................................... 623
SCI Interrupt Sources (SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4) ....................................................... 624
SCI Interrupt Sources (SCI_5 and SCI_6) ........................................................ 625
SCI Interrupt Sources (SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4) ....................................................... 625
SCI Interrupt Sources (SCI_5 and SCI_6) ........................................................ 625
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Table 15.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 640
Table 15.2
Example of Limitations for Setting Values........................................................... 666
Table 15.3
Example of Setting................................................................................................ 667
Table 15.4
Relationship between TRNTREG0 Setting and Pin Output ................................. 669
Table 15.5
Relationship between Pin Input and TRNTREG1 Monitoring Value................... 671
Table 15.6
Interrupt Sources................................................................................................... 672
Table 15.7
Command Decoding on Application Side............................................................. 691
Table 15.8
Selection of Peripheral Clock (Pφ) when USB is Connected................................ 701
Section 16 I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2)
Table 16.1
Pin configuration of the I2C bus interface2........................................................... 705
Table 16.2
Transfer Rate ........................................................................................................ 708
Table 16.3
Interrupt Requests ................................................................................................. 732
Table 16.4
Time for Monitoring SCL..................................................................................... 733
Section 17 A/D Converter
Table 17.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 737
Table 17.2
Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers .............................. 738
Table 17.3
A/D Conversion Characteristics (Single Mode).................................................... 746
Table 17.4
A/D Conversion Characteristics (Scan Mode) ...................................................... 746
Table 17.5
A/D Converter Interrupt Source............................................................................ 747
Table 17.6
Analog Pin Specifications..................................................................................... 751
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xlv of xlviii
Section 18 D/A Converter
Table 18.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 754
Table 18.2
Control of D/A Conversion................................................................................... 756
Section 20 Flash Memory (0.18-mm F-ZTAT Version)
Table 20.1
Differences between Boot Mode, User Program Mode,
and Programmer Mode ......................................................................................... 764
Table 20.2
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 769
Table 20.3
Registers/Parameters and Target Modes............................................................... 771
Table 20.4
Parameters and Target Modes............................................................................... 777
Table 20.5
On-Board Programming Mode Setting ................................................................. 789
Table 20.6
System Clock Frequency for Automatic-Bit-Rate Adjustment............................. 790
Table 20.7
Enumeration Information...................................................................................... 794
Table 20.8
Executable Memory MAT .................................................................................... 808
Table 20.9
Usable Area for Programming in User Program Mode ........................................ 808
Table 20.10
Usable Area for Erasure in User Program Mode .............................................. 809
Table 20.11
Hardware Protection ......................................................................................... 810
Table 20.12
Software Protection........................................................................................... 811
Table 20.13
Device Types Supported in Programmer Mode................................................ 816
Table 20.14
Inquiry and Selection Commands..................................................................... 820
Table 20.15
Programming/Erasing Commands .................................................................... 832
Table 20.16
Status Code ....................................................................................................... 839
Table 20.17
Error Code ........................................................................................................ 840
Section 21 Clock Pulse Generator
Table 21.1
Selection of Clock Pulse Generator ...................................................................... 844
Table 21.2
Damping Resistance Value................................................................................... 848
Table 21.3
Crystal Resonator Characteristics ......................................................................... 849
Section 22 Power-Down Modes
Table 22.1
Operating States.................................................................................................... 854
Table 22.2
Oscillation Settling Time Settings ........................................................................ 865
Table 22.3
Bφ Pin (PA7) State in Each Processing State ....................................................... 874
Section 24 Electrical Characteristics
Table 24.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................. 917
Table 24.2
DC Characteristics (1) .......................................................................................... 918
Table 24.2
DC Characteristics (2) .......................................................................................... 919
Table 24.3
Permissible Output Currents................................................................................. 920
Table 24.4
Clock Timing ........................................................................................................ 921
Table 24.5
Control Signal Timing .......................................................................................... 924
Table 24.6
Bus Timing (1)...................................................................................................... 925
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xlvi of xlviii
Table 24.6
Table 24.7
Table 24.8
Table 24.9
Table 24.10
Table 24.11
Table 24.12
Table 24.13
Bus Timing (2)...................................................................................................... 927
DMAC Timing...................................................................................................... 940
Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules ............................................................... 943
USB Characteristics when On-Chip USB Transceiver is Used
(USD+, USD− pin characteristics)........................................................................ 948
A/D Conversion Characteristics........................................................................ 950
D/A Conversion Characteristics........................................................................ 950
Flash Memory Characteristics .......................................................................... 951
Flash Memory Characteristics .......................................................................... 952
Appendix
Table A.1
Port States in Each Pin State................................................................................. 953
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xlvii of xlviii
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page xlviii of xlviii
Section 1 Overview
Section 1 Overview
1.1
Features
• 32-bit high-speed H8SX CPU
Upward compatible with the H8/300 CPU, H8/300H CPU, and H8S CPU
Object programs for those CPUs are executable
Sixteen 16-bit general registers
87 basic instructions
• Extensive peripheral functions
DMA controller (DMAC)
Data transfer controller (DTC)
16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU)
Programmable pulse generator (PPG)
8-bit timer (TMR)
Watch dog timer (WDT)
Serial communication interface (SCI) can be used in asynchronous and clocked synchronous
mode
Universal Serial Bus Interface (USB)
I2C Bus Interface2 (IIC2)
10-bit A/D converter
8-bit D/A converter
Clock pulse generator
• On-chip memory
Product Classification
Product Model
ROM
RAM
Flash memory
version
H8SX/1653
R5F61653
384 kbytes
40 kbytes
H8SX/1654
R5F61654
512 kbytes
40 kbytes
• General I/O port
75 input/output ports
Nine input ports
• Supports power-down modes
• Small package
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 1 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 1 Overview
Package
Code
Body Size
Pin Pitch
TQFP-120
TFP-120 (TFP-120V*)
14.0 × 14.0 mm
0.40 mm
Note:
1.2
*
Pb-free version
Block Diagram
Interrupt
controller
RAM
WDT
Port 1
TMR (unit 0)
× 2 channels
Port 2
TMR (unit 1)
× 2 channels
Port 5
TMR (unit 2)
× 2 channels
DTC
Peripheral bus
TMR (unit 3)
× 2 channels
Internal bus
H8SX
CPU
Port 6
BSC
ROM
TPU × 6 channels
PPG
Port B
SCI × 6 channels
Port D
USB
DMAC
× 4 channels
Port A
Port E
IIC2 × 2 channels
Port F
A/D converter
Clock pulse
generator
Port H
D/A converter
Port I
Port M
External bus
[Legend]
CPU: Central processing unit
DTC: Data transfer controller
BSC: Bus controller
DMAC: DMA controller
WDT: Watchdog timer
TMR: 8-bit timer
TPU:
PPG:
SCI:
USB:
IIC2:
16-bit timer pulse unit
Programmable pulse generator
Serial communication interface
Universal Serial Bus Interface
I2C Bus Interface2
Figure 1.1 Block Diagram
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 2 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 1 Overview
Pin Assignments
1.3.1
Pin Assignments
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
TFP-120
(top view)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
PH6/D6
PH5/D5
PH4/D4
Vss
PH3/D3
PH2/D2
PH1/D1
PH0/D0
NMI
P27/PO7/TIOCA5/TIOCB5
P26/PO6/TIOCA5/TMO1/TxD1
P25/PO5/TIOCA4/TMCI1/RxD1
P24/PO4/TIOCA4/TIOCB4/TMRI1/SCK1
P23/PO3/TIOCC3/TIOCD3/IRQ11-A
P22/PO2/TIOCC3/TMO0/TxD0/IRQ10-A
P21/PO1/TIOCA3/TMCI0/RxD0/IRQ9-A
Vcc
P20/PO0/TIOCA3/TIOCB3/TMRI0/SCK0/IRQ8-A
Vss
MD_CLK
VBUS
DrVSS
USD+
USDDrVCC
PM4
PM3
EMLE
PD0/A0
PD1/A1
PB1/CS1/CS2-B/CS5-A/CS6-B/CS7-B
PB2/CS2-A/CS6-A
PB3/CS3/CS7-A
MD2
PM0/TxD6
PM1/RxD6
PM2
PF4/A20
PF3/A19
Vss
PF2/A18
PF1/A17
PF0/A16
PE7/A15
PE6/A14
PE5/A13
Vss
PE4/A12
Vcc
PE3/A11
PE2/A10
PE1/A9
PE0/A8
PD7/A7
PD6/A6
Vss
PD5/A5
PD4/A4
PD3/A3
PD2/A2
P62/TMO2/SCK4/DACK2/IRQ10-B/TRST
PLLVcc
P63/TMRI3/DREQ3/IRQ11-B/TMS
PLLVss
P64/TMCI3/TEND3/TDI
P65/TMO3/DACK3/TCK
MD0
P50/AN0/IRQ0-B
P51/AN1/IRQ1-B
P52/AN2/IRQ2-B
AVcc
P53/AN3/IRQ3-B
AVss
P54/AN4/IRQ4-B
Vref
P55/AN5/IRQ5-B
P56/AN6/DA0/IRQ6-B
P57/AN7/DA1/IRQ7-B
MD1
PA0/BREQO/BS-A
PA1/BACK/(RD/WR-A)
PA2/BREQ/WAIT
PA3/LLWR/LLB
PA4/LHWR/LUB
PA5/RD
PA6/AS/AH/BS-B
Vss
PA7/Bφ
Vcc
PB0/CS0/CS4/CS5-B
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
P61/TMCI2/RxD4/TEND2/IRQ9-B
P60/TMRI2/TxD4/DREQ2/IRQ8-B
STBY
P17/IRQ7-A/TCLKD-B/SCL0
P16/DACK1-A/IRQ6-A/TCLKC-B/SDA0
Vcc
EXTAL
XTAL
Vss
WDTOVF/TDO
P15/RxD5/IrRXD/TEND1-A/IRQ5-A/TCLKB-B/SCL1
P14/TxD5/IrTXD/DREQ1-A/IRQ4-A/TCLKA-B/SDA1
VCL
RES
Vss
P13/ADTRG0/IRQ3-A
P12/SCK2/DACK0-A/IRQ2-A
P11/RxD2/TEND0-A/IRQ1-A
P10/TxD2/DREQ0-A/IRQ0-A
PI7/D15
PI6/D14
PI5/D13
PI4/D12
Vss
PI3/D11
PI2/D10
PI1/D9
PI0/D8
Vcc
PH7/D7
1.3
Note: *
This is an on-chip emulator enable pin. Drive this pin low for the connection in normal operating mode.
When this pin is driven high, the on-chip emulation function is enabled and pins P62, P63, P64, P65, and
WDTOVF are dedicated for the on-chip emulator. For details on a connection example with the E10A,
refer to the E10A Emulator User's Manual.
Figure 1.2 Pin Assignments
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 3 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 1 Overview
1.3.2
Pin Configuration in Each Operating Mode
Table 1.1
Pin Configuration in Each Operating Mode
Operating Mode
Pin No. Modes 2, 6, 7
Modes 4, 5
1
PB1/CS1/CS2-B/CS5-A/CS6-B/CS7-B
PB1/CS1/CS2-B/CS5-A/CS6-B/CS7-B
2
PB2/CS2-A/CS6-A
PB2/CS2-A/CS6-A
3
PB3/CS3/CS7-A
PB3/CS3/CS7-A
4
MD2
MD2
5
PM0/TxD6
PM0/TxD6
6
PM1/RxD6
PM1/RxD6
7
PM2
PM2
8
PF4/A20
PF4/A20
9
PF3/A19
PF3/A19
10
VSS
VSS
11
PF2/A18
PF2/A18
12
PF1/A17
PF1/A17
13
PF0/A16
PF0/A16
14
PE7/A15
A15
15
PE6/A14
A14
16
PE5/A13
A13
17
VSS
VSS
18
PE4/A12
A12
19
VCC
VCC
20
PE3/A11
A11
21
PE2/A10
A10
22
PE1/A9
A9
23
PE0/A8
A8
24
PD7/A7
A7
25
PD6/A6
A6
26
VSS
VSS
27
PD5/A5
A5
28
PD4/A4
A4
29
PD3/A3
A3
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 4 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 1 Overview
Operating Mode
Pin No. Modes 2, 6, 7
Modes 4, 5
30
PD2/A2
A2
31
PD1/A1
A1
32
PD0/A0
A0
33
EMLE
EMLE
34
PM3
PM3
35
PM4
PM4
36
DrVCC
DrVCC
37
USD+
USD+
38
USD-
USD-
39
DrVSS
DrVSS
40
VBUS
VBUS
41
MD_CLK
MD_CLK
42
VSS
VSS
43
P20/PO0/TIOCA3/TIOCB3/TMRI0/SCK0/IRQ8-A
P20/PO0/TIOCA3/TIOCB3/TMRI0/SCK0/IRQ8-A
44
VCC
VCC
45
P21/PO1/TIOCA3/TMCI0/RxD0/IRQ9-A
P21/PO1/TIOCA3/TMCI0/RxD0/IRQ9-A
46
P22/PO2/TIOCC3/TMO0/TxD0/IRQ10-A
P22/PO2/TIOCC3/TMO0/TxD0/IRQ10-A
47
P23/PO3/TIOCC3/TIOCD3/IRQ11-A
P23/PO3/TIOCC3/TIOCD3/IRQ11-A
48
P24/PO4/TIOCA4/TIOCB4/TMRI1/SCK1
P24/PO4/TIOCA4/TIOCB4/TMRI1/SCK1
49
P25/PO5/TIOCA4/TMCI1/RxD1
P25/PO5/TIOCA4/TMCI1/RxD1
50
P26/PO6/TIOCA5/TMO1/TxD1
P26/PO6/TIOCA5/TMO1/TxD1
51
P27/PO7/TIOCA5/TIOCB5
P27/PO7/TIOCA5/TIOCB5
52
NMI
NMI
53
PH0/D0
D0
54
PH1/D1
D1
55
PH2/D2
D2
56
PH3/D3
D3
57
VSS
VSS
58
PH4/D4
D4
59
PH5/D5
D5
60
PH6/D6
D6
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 5 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 1 Overview
Operating Mode
Pin No. Modes 2, 6, 7
Modes 4, 5
61
PH7/D7
D7
62
VCC
VCC
63
PI0/D8
PI0/D8
64
PI1/D9
PI1/D9
65
PI2/D10
PI2/D10
66
PI3/D11
PI3/D11
67
VSS
VSS
68
PI4/D12
PI4/D12
69
PI5/D13
PI5/D13
70
PI6/D14
PI6/D14
71
PI7/D15
PI7/D15
72
P10/TxD2/DREQ0-A/IRQ0-A
P10/TxD2/DREQ0-A/IRQ0-A
73
P11/RxD2/TEND0-A/IRQ1-A
P11/RxD2/TEND0-A/IRQ1-A
74
P12/SCK2/DACK0-A/IRQ2-A
P12/SCK2/DACK0-A/IRQ2-A
75
P13/ADTRG0/IRQ3-A
P13/ADTRG0/IRQ3-A
76
VSS
VSS
77
RES
RES
78
VCL
VCL
79
P14/TxD5/IrTXD/DREQ1-A/IRQ4-A/
TCLKA-B/SDA1
P14/TxD5/IrTXD/DREQ1-A/IRQ4-A/
TCLKA-B/SDA1
80
P15/RxD5/IrRXD/TEND1-A/IRQ5-A/
TCLKB-B/SCL1
P15/ RxD5/IrRXD/TEND1-A/IRQ5-A/
TCLKB-B/SCL1
81
WDTOVF/TDO
WDTOVF/TDO
82
VSS
VSS
83
XTAL
XTAL
84
EXTAL
EXTAL
85
VCC
VCC
86
P16/DACK1-A/IRQ6-A/TCLKC-B/SDA0
P16/DACK1-A/IRQ6-A/TCLKC-B/SDA0
87
P17/IRQ7-A/TCLKD-B/SCL0
P17/IRQ7-A/TCLKD-B/SCL0
88
STBY
STBY
89
P60/TMRI2/TxD4/DREQ2/IRQ8-B
P60/TMRI2/TxD4/DREQ2/IRQ8-B
90
P61/TMCI2/RxD4/TEND2/IRQ9-B
P61/TMCI2/RxD4/TEND2/IRQ9-B
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 6 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 1 Overview
Operating Mode
Pin No. Modes 2, 6, 7
Modes 4, 5
91
P62/TMO2/SCK4/DACK2/IRQ10-B/TRST
P62/TMO2/SCK4/DACK2/IRQ10-B/TRST
92
PLLVCC
PLLVCC
93
P63/TMRI3/DREQ3/IRQ11-B/TMS
P63/TMRI3/DREQ3/IRQ11-B/TMS
94
PLLVSS
PLLVSS
95
P64/TMCI3/TEND3/TDI
P64/TMCI3/TEND3/TDI
96
P65/TMO3/DACK3/TCK
P65/TMO3/DACK3/TCK
97
MD0
MD0
98
P50/AN0/IRQ0-B
P50/AN0/IRQ0-B
99
P51/AN1/IRQ1-B
P51/AN1/IRQ1-B
100
P52/AN2/IRQ2-B
P52/AN2/IRQ2-B
101
AVCC
AVCC
102
P53/AN3/IRQ3-B
P53/AN3/IRQ3-B
103
AVSS
AVSS
104
P54/AN4/IRQ4-B
P54/AN4/IRQ4-B
105
Vref
Vref
106
P55/AN5/IRQ5-B
P55/AN5/IRQ5-B
107
P56/AN6/DA0/IRQ6-B
P56/AN6/DA0/IRQ6-B
108
P57/AN7/DA1/IRQ7-B
P57/AN7/DA1/IRQ7-B
109
MD1
MD1
110
PA0/BREQO/BS-A
PA0/BREQO/BS-A
111
PA1/BACK/(RD/WR-A)
PA1/BACK/(RD/WR-A)
112
PA2/BREQ/WAIT
PA2/BREQ/WAIT
113
PA3/LLWR/LLB
PA3/LLWR/LLB
114
PA4/LHWR/LUB
PA4/LHWR/LUB
115
PA5/RD
PA5/RD
116
PA6/AS/AH/BS-B
PA6/AS/AH/BS-B
117
VSS
VSS
118
PA7/Bφ
PA7/Bφ
119
VCC
VCC
120
PB0/CS0/CS4/CS5-B
PB0/CS0/CS4/CS5-B
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 7 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 1 Overview
1.3.3
Pin Functions
Table 1.2
Pin Functions
Pin No.
(TFP-120)
Classification
Abbreviation
Power supply
VCC
19, 44, 62, 85, Input
119
Power supply pins. Connect to the system
power supply.
VCL
78
Connect to VSS via a 0.1-µF capacitor (place it
close to this pin).
VSS
10, 17, 26, 42, Input
57, 67, 76, 82,
117
Ground pins. Connect to the system power
supply (0 V).
PLLVCC
92
Input
Power supply pin for the PLL circuits. Connect
to the system power supply.
PLLVSS
94
Input
Ground pin for the PLL circuits.
DrVCC
36
Input
Power supply pin for USB on-chip transceiver.
Connect to the system power supply.
DrVSS
39
Input
Ground pin for USB on-chip transceiver
XTAL
83
Input
EXTAL
84
Input
Pins for a crystal resonator. External clock can
be input to the EXTAL pin. For a connection
example, see section 21, Clock Pulse
Generator.
Bφ
118
Output Outputs the system clock for external devices.
4
109
97
Input
Pins for setting the operating mode. The signal
levels of these pins must not be changed
during operation.
MD_CLK
41
Input
Pin for changing the multiplication ratio of the
clock pulse generator. The signal levels of this
pin must not be changed during operation.
RES
77
Input
Reset signal input pin. This LSI enters the
reset state when this signal goes low.
STBY
88
Input
This LSI enters hardware standby mode when
this signal goes low.
EMLE
33
Input
Input pin for on-chip emulator enable signal. If
the on-chip emulator is used, the signal level
should be fixed high. If the on-chip emulator is
not used, the signal level should be fixed low.
Clock
Operating mode MD2
control
MD1
MD0
System control
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 8 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
I/O
Input
Description
Section 1 Overview
Classification
Abbreviation
Pin No.
(TFP-120)
I/O
Description
On-chip
emulator
TRST
91
Input
TMS
93
Input
On-chip emulator pins. When the EMLE pin
is driven high, these pins are dedicated for
the on-chip emulator.
TDI
95
Input
TCK
96
Input
TDO
81
Output
Address bus
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
Output
Output pins for the addresses.
Data bus
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
71
70
69
68
66
65
64
63
61
60
59
58
56
55
54
53
Input/
output
Bidirectional data bus. These pins also
output addresses when accessing the
address/data multiplexed I/O interface
space.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 9 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 1 Overview
Classification
Abbreviation
Pin No.
(TFP-120)
I/O
Description
Bus control
BREQ
112
Input
External bus masters request the bus by
this signal.
BREQO
110
Output
The internal bus masters request the bus to
access the external space in the external
bus released state.
BACK
111
Output
Bus acknowledge signal which indicates
that the bus has been released.
BS-A/BS-B
110/116
Output
Indicates the start of a bus cycle.
AS
116
Output
Strobe signal which indicates that the output
address on the address bus is valid when
accessing the basic bus interface or byte
control SRAM interface space.
AH
116
Output
This signal is used to hold the address
when accessing the address/data
multiplexed I/O interface space.
RD
115
Output
Strobe signal to indicates that the basic bus
interface space is being read from.
RD/WR-A
111
Output
Indicates the direction (input/output) of the
data bus.
LHWR
114
Output
Strobe signal which indicates that the upper
byte (D15 to D8) is valid when accessing
the basic bus interface space.
LLWR
113
Output
Strobe signal which indicates that the lower
byte (D7 to D0) is valid when accessing the
basic bus interface space.
LUB
114
Output
Strobe signal which indicates that the upper
byte (D15 to D8) is valid when accessing
the byte control SRAM interface space.
LLB
113
Output
Strobe signal which indicates that the lower
byte (D7 to D0) is valid when accessing the
byte control SRAM interface space.
Bus control
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 10 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 1 Overview
Classification
Abbreviation
Pin No.
(TFP-120)
Bus control
CS0
CS1
CS2-A/CS2-B
CS3
CS4
CS5-A/CS5-B
CS6-A/CS6-B
CS7-A/CS7-B
Interrupt
DMA controller
(DMAC)
I/O
Description
120
1
2/1
3
120
1/120
2/1
3/1
Output
Select signals for areas 7 to 0.
WAIT
112
Input
Requests wait cycles when accessing the
external space.
NMI
52
Input
Non-maskable interrupt request signal. When
this pin is not in use, this signal must be fixed
high.
IRQ11-A/IRQ11-B
IRQ10-A/IRQ10-B
IRQ9-A/IRQ9-B
IRQ8-A/IRQ8-B
IRQ7-A/IRQ7-B
IRQ6-A/IRQ6-B
IRQ5-A/IRQ5-B
IRQ4-A/IRQ4-B
IRQ3-A/IRQ3-B
IRQ2-A/IRQ2-B
IRQ1-A/IRQ1-B
IRQ0-A/IRQ0-B
47/93
46/91
45/90
43/89
87/108
86/107
80/106
79/104
75/102
74/100
73/99
72/98
Input
Maskable interrupt request signal.
DREQ0-A
DREQ1-A
DREQ2
DREQ3
72
79
89
93
Input
Requests DMAC activation.
DACK0-A
DACK1-A
DACK2
DACK3
74
86
91
96
Output
DMAC single address transfer acknowledge
signal.
TEND0-A
TEND1-A
TEND2
TEND3
73
80
90
95
Output
Indicates DMAC data transfer end.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 11 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 1 Overview
Classification
Abbreviation
Pin No.
(TFP-120)
I/O
Description
16-bit timer
pulse unit
(TPU)
TCLKA-B
TCLKB-B
TCLKC-B
TCLKD-B
79
80
86
87
Input
Input pins for the external clocks.
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
43, 45
43
46, 47
47
Input/
output
Signals for TGRA_3 to TGRD_3. These are
used for the input capture inputs/output
compare outputs/PWM outputs.
TIOCA4
TIOCB4
48, 49
48
Input/
output
Signals for TGRA_4 and TGRB_4. These are
used for the input capture inputs/output
compare outputs/PWM outputs.
TIOCA5
TIOCB5
50, 51
51
Input/
output
Signals for TGRA_5 and TGRB_5. These are
used for the input capture inputs/output
compare outputs/PWM outputs.
Programmable
pulse generator
(PPG)
PO7
PO6
PO5
PO4
PO3
PO2
PO1
PO0
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
43
Output
Output pins for the pulse signals.
8-bit timer
(TMR)
TMO0
TMO1
TMO2
TMO3
46
50
91
96
Output
Output pins for the compare match signals.
TMCI0
TMCI1
TMCI2
TMCI3
45
49
90
95
Input
Input pins for the external clock signals used
for the counters.
TMRI0
TMRI1
TMRI2
TMRI3
43
48
89
93
Input
Input pins for the counter reset signals.
81
Output
Output pin for the counter overflow signal in
watchdog timer mode.
Watchdog timer WDTOVF
(WDT)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 12 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 1 Overview
Classification
Abbreviation
Pin No.
(TFP-120)
Serial
communication
interface (SCI)
TxD0
TxD1
TxD2
TxD4
TxD5
TxD6
I/O
Description
46
50
72
89
79
5
Output
Output pins for transmit data.
RxD0
RxD1
RxD2
RxD4
RxD5
RxD6
45
49
73
90
80
6
Input
Input pins for receive data.
SCK0
SCK1
SCK2
SCK4
43
48
74
91
Input/
output
Input/output pins for clock signals.
IrTxD
79
Output
Output pin that outputs decoded data for
IrDA
IrRxD
80
Input
Input pin that inputs decoded data for IrDA
I C bus interface SCL0, SCL1
2 (IIC2)
87, 80
Input/
output
Input/output pin for IIC clock. Bus can be
directly driven by the NMOS open drain
output.
SDA0, SDA1
86, 79
Input/
output
Input/output pin for IIC data. Bus can be
directly driven by the NMOS open drain
output.
Universal Serial USD+
Bus Interface
(USB)
37
Input/
output
Input/output pin for USB data
USD−
38
VBUS
40
Input
Pin for monitoring USB cable connection
SCI with IrDA
(SCI)
2
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 13 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 1 Overview
Classification
Abbreviation
Pin No.
(TFP-120)
A/D converter
AN7
AN6
AN5
AN4
AN3
AN2
AN1
AN0
I/O
Description
108
107
106
104
102
100
99
98
Input
Input pins for the analog signals for the A/D
converter.
ADTRG0
75
Input
Input pin for the external trigger signal to
start A/D conversion.
D/A converter
DA1
DA0
108
107
Output
Output pins for the analog signals for the D/A
converter.
A/D converter,
D/A converter
AVCC
101
Input
Analog power supply pin for the A/D and D/A
converters. When the A/D and D/A
converters are not in use, connect to the
system power supply.
AVSS
103
Input
Ground pin for the A/D and D/A converters.
Connect to the system power supply (0 V).
Vref
105
Input
Reference power supply pin for the A/D and
D/A converters. When the A/D and D/A
converters are not in use, connect to the
system power supply.
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
87
86
80
79
75
74
73
72
Input/
output
8-bit input/output pins.
P27
P26
P25
P24
P23
P22
P21
P20
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
43
Input/
output
8-bit input/output pins.
I/O port
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 14 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 1 Overview
Classification
Abbreviation
Pin No.
(TFP-120)
I/O port
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
I/O
Description
108
107
106
104
102
100
99
98
Input
8-bit input/output pins.
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
96
95
93
91
90
89
Input/
output
6-bit input/output pins.
PA7
118
Input
Input-only pin
PA6
PA5
PA4
PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
Input/
output
7-bit input/output pins.
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
3
2
1
120
Input/
output
4-bit input/output pins.
PD7
PD6
PD5
PD4
PD3
PD2
PD1
PD0
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
Input/
output
8-bit input/output pins.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 15 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 1 Overview
Classification
Abbreviation
Pin No.
(TFP-120)
I/O port
PE7
PE6
PE5
PE4
PE3
PE2
PE1
PE0
I/O
Description
14
15
16
18
20
21
22
23
Input/
output
8-bit input/output pins.
PF4
PF3
PF2
PF1
PF0
8
9
11
12
13
Input/
output
5-bit input/output pins.
PH7
PH6
PH5
PH4
PH3
PH2
PH1
PH0
61
60
59
58
56
55
54
53
Input/
output
8-bit input/output pins.
PI7
PI6
PI5
PI4
PI3
PI2
PI1
PI0
71
70
69
68
66
65
64
63
Input/
output
8-bit input/output pins.
PM4
PM3
PM2
PM1
PM0
35
34
7
6
5
Input/
output
5-bit input/output pins.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 16 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Section 2 CPU
The H8SX CPU is a high-speed CPU with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upwardcompatible with the H8/300, H8/300H, and H8S CPUs.
The H8SX CPU has sixteen 16-bit general registers, can handle a 4-Gbyte linear address space,
and is ideal for a realtime control system.
2.1
Features
• Upward-compatible with H8/300, H8/300H, and H8S CPUs
 Can execute H8/300, H8/300H, and H8S/2000 object programs
• Sixteen 16-bit general registers
 Also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers
• 87 basic instructions
 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions
 Multiply and divide instructions
 Bit field transfer instructions
 Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
 Bit condition branch instructions
 Multiply-and-accumulate instruction
• Eleven addressing modes
 Register direct [Rn]
 Register indirect [@ERn]
 Register indirect with displacement [@(d:2,ERn), @(d:16,ERn), or @(d:32,ERn)]
 Index register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,RnL.B), @(d:32,RnL.B),
@(d:16,Rn.W), @(d:32,Rn.W), @(d:16,ERn.L), or @(d:32,ERn.L)]
 Register indirect with pre-/post-increment or pre-/post-decrement [@+ERn, @−ERn,
@ERn+, or @ERn−]
 Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32]
 Immediate [#xx:3, #xx:4, #xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32]
 Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)]
 Program-counter relative with index register [@(RnL.B,PC), @(Rn.W,PC), or
@(ERn.L,PC)]
 Memory indirect [@@aa:8]
 Extended memory indirect [@@vec:7]
CPUSX10A_000120030800
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 17 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
• Two base registers
 Vector base register
 Short address base register
• 4-Gbyte address space
 Program: 4 Gbytes
 Data:
4 Gbytes
• High-speed operation
 All frequently-used instructions executed in one or two states
 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 1 state
 8 × 8-bit register-register multiply:
1 state
 16 ÷ 8-bit register-register divide:
10 states
 16 × 16-bit register-register multiply:
1 state
 32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide:
18 states
 32 × 32-bit register-register multiply:
5 states
 32 ÷ 32-bit register-register divide:
18 states
• Four CPU operating modes
 Normal mode
 Middle mode
 Advanced mode
 Maximum mode
• Power-down modes
 Transition is made by execution of SLEEP instruction
 Choice of CPU operating clocks
Notes: 1. Advanced mode is only supported as the CPU operating mode of the H8SX/1653
Group. Normal, middle, and maximum modes are not supported.
2. The multiplier and divider are supported by the H8SX/1653 Group.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 18 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.2
CPU Operating Modes
The H8SX CPU has four operating modes: normal, middle, advanced and maximum modes. For
details on mode settings, see section 3.1, Operating Mode Selection.
Maximum 64 kbytes for program
Normal mode
and data areas combined
Maximum 16-Mbyte program
Middle mode
area and 64-kbyte data area,
maximum 16 Mbytes for program
and data areas combined
CPU operating modes
Maximum 16-Mbyte program
Advanced mode
area and 4-Gbyte data area,
maximum 4 Gbytes for program
and data areas combined
Maximum mode
Maximum 4 Gbytes for program
and data areas combined
Figure 2.1 CPU Operating Modes
2.2.1
Normal Mode
The exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the H8/300 CPU.
Note: Normal mode is not supported in this LSI.
• Address Space
The maximum address space of 64 kbytes can be accessed.
• Extended Registers (En)
The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit
segments of 32-bit registers. When the extended register En is used as a 16-bit register it can
contain any value, even when the corresponding general register Rn is used as an address
register. (If the general register Rn is referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with
pre-/post-increment or pre-/post-decrement and a carry or borrow occurs, however, the value in
the corresponding extended register En will be affected.)
• Instruction Set
All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of effective
addresses (EA) are valid.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 19 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
• Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses
In normal mode, the top area starting at H'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table. One
branch address is stored per 16 bits. The structure of the exception vector table is shown in
figure 2.2.
H'0000
H'0001
H'0002
H'0003
Reset exception vector
Exception
vector table
Reset exception vector
Figure 2.2 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode)
The memory indirect (@@aa:8) and extended memory indirect (@@vec:7) addressing modes
are used in the JMP and JSR instructions. An 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction
code specifies a memory location. Execution branches to the contents of the memory location.
• Stack Structure
The stack structure of PC at a subroutine branch and that of PC and CCR at an exception
handling are shown in figure 2.3. The PC contents are saved or restored in 16-bit units.
SP
PC
(16 bits)
EXR*1
Reserved*1, *3
CCR
CCR*3
SP
*2
(SP
)
PC
(16 bits)
(a) Subroutine Branch
(b) Exception Handling
Notes: 1. When EXR is not used it is not stored on the stack.
2. SP when EXR is not used.
3. Ignored on return.
Figure 2.3 Stack Structure (Normal Mode)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 20 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.2.2
Middle Mode
The program area in middle mode is extended to 16 Mbytes as compared with that in normal
mode.
• Address Space
The maximum address space of 16 Mbytes can be accessed as a total of the program and data
areas. For individual areas, up to 16 Mbytes of the program area or up to 64 kbytes of the data
area can be allocated.
• Extended Registers (En)
The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit
segments of 32-bit registers. When the extended register En is used as a 16-bit register (in
other than the JMP and JSR instructions), it can contain any value even when the
corresponding general register Rn is used as an address register. (If the general register Rn is
referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with pre-/post-increment or pre-/postdecrement and a carry or borrow occurs, however, the value in the corresponding extended
register En will be affected.)
• Instruction Set
All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of effective
addresses (EA) are valid and the upper eight bits are sign-extended.
• Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses
In middle mode, the top area starting at H'000000 is allocated to the exception vector table.
One branch address is stored per 32 bits. The upper eight bits are ignored and the lower 24 bits
are stored. The structure of the exception vector table is shown in figure 2.4.
The memory indirect (@@aa:8) and extended memory indirect (@@vec:7) addressing modes
are used in the JMP and JSR instructions. An 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction
code specifies a memory location. Execution branches to the contents of the memory location.
In middle mode, an operand is a 32-bit (longword) operand, providing a 32-bit branch address.
The upper eight bits are reserved and assumed to be H'00.
• Stack Structure
The stack structure of PC at a subroutine branch and that of PC and CCR at an exception
handling are shown in figure 2.5. The PC contents are saved or restored in 24-bit units.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 21 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.2.3
Advanced Mode
The data area is extended to 4 Gbytes as compared with that in middle mode.
• Address Space
The maximum address space of 4 Gbytes can be linearly accessed. For individual areas, up to
16 Mbytes of the program area and up to 4 Gbytes of the data area can be allocated.
• Extended Registers (En)
The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit
segments of 32-bit registers or address registers.
• Instruction Set
All instructions and addressing modes can be used.
• Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses
In advanced mode, the top area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector
table. One branch address is stored per 32 bits. The upper eight bits are ignored and the lower
24 bits are stored. The structure of the exception vector table is shown in figure 2.4.
H'00000000
Reserved
H'00000001
H'00000002
Reset exception vector
H'00000003
H'00000004
Reserved
Exception vector table
H'00000005
H'00000006
H'00000007
Figure 2.4 Exception Vector Table (Middle and Advanced Modes)
The memory indirect (@@aa:8) and extended memory indirect (@@vec:7) addressing modes
are used in the JMP and JSR instructions. An 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction
code specifies a memory location. Execution branches to the contents of the memory location.
In advanced mode, an operand is a 32-bit (longword) operand, providing a 32-bit branch
address. The upper eight bits are reserved and assumed to be H'00.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 22 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
• Stack Structure
The stack structure of PC at a subroutine branch and that of PC and CCR at an exception
handling are shown in figure 2.5. The PC contents are saved or restored in 24-bit units.
EXR*1
Reserved*1, *3
CCR
SP
Reserved
SP
PC
(24 bits)
(a) Subroutine Branch
*2
(SP
)
PC
(24 bits)
(b) Exception Handling
Notes: 1. When EXR is not used it is not stored on the stack.
2. SP when EXR is not used.
3. Ignored on return.
Figure 2.5 Stack Structure (Middle and Advanced Modes)
2.2.4
Maximum Mode
The program area is extended to 4 Gbytes as compared with that in advanced mode.
• Address Space
The maximum address space of 4 Gbytes can be linearly accessed.
• Extended Registers (En)
The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers or as the upper 16-bit
segments of 32-bit registers or address registers.
• Instruction Set
All instructions and addressing modes can be used.
• Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses
In maximum mode, the top area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector
table. One branch address is stored per 32 bits. The structure of the exception vector table is
shown in figure 2.6.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 23 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
H'00000000
H'00000001
Reset exception vector
H'00000002
H'00000003
H'00000004
Exception vector table
H'00000005
H'00000006
H'00000007
Figure 2.6 Exception Vector Table (Maximum Modes)
The memory indirect (@@aa:8) and extended memory indirect (@@vec:7) addressing modes
are used in the JMP and JSR instructions. An 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction
code specifies a memory location. Execution branches to the contents of the memory location.
In maximum mode, an operand is a 32-bit (longword) operand, providing a 32-bit branch
address.
• Stack Structure
The stack structure of PC at a subroutine branch and that of PC and CCR at an exception
handling are shown in figure 2.7. The PC contents are saved or restored in 32-bit units. The
EXR contents are saved or restored regardless of whether or not EXR is in use.
SP
SP
PC
(32 bits)
EXR
CCR
PC
(32 bits)
(a) Subroutine Branch
(b) Exception Handling
Figure 2.7 Stack Structure (Maximum Mode)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 24 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.3
Instruction Fetch
The H8SX CPU has two modes for instruction fetch: 16-bit and 32-bit modes. It is recommended
that the mode be set according to the bus width of the memory in which a program is stored. The
instruction-fetch mode setting does not affect operation other than instruction fetch such as data
accesses. Whether an instruction is fetched in 16- or 32-bit mode is selected by the FETCHMD bit
in SYSCR. For details, see section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR).
2.4
Address Space
Figure 2.8 shows a memory map of the H8SX CPU. The address space differs depending on the
CPU operating mode.
Normal mode
Middle mode
H'0000
H'000000
H'FFFF
H'007FFF
Program area
Data area
(64 kbytes)
Maximum mode
Advanced mode
H'00000000
H'00000000
Program area
(16 Mbytes)
Program area
(16 Mbytes)
Data area
(64 kbytes)
H'FF8000
H'FFFFFF
Program area
Data area
(4 Gbytes)
H'00FFFFFF
Data area
(4 Gbytes)
H'FFFFFFFF
H'FFFFFFFF
Figure 2.8 Memory Map
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 25 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.5
Registers
The H8SX CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.9. There are two types of registers:
general registers and control registers. The control registers are the 32-bit program counter (PC),
8-bit extended control register (EXR), 8-bit condition-code register (CCR), 32-bit vector base
register (VBR), 32-bit short address base register (SBR), and 64-bit multiply-accumulate register
(MAC).
General Registers and Extended Registers
15
0 7
0 7
0
ER0
E0
R0H
R0L
ER1
E1
R1H
R1L
ER2
E2
R2H
R2L
ER3
E3
R3H
R3L
ER4
E4
R4H
R4L
ER5
E5
R5H
R5L
ER6
E6
R6H
R6L
ER7 (SP)
E7
R7H
R7L
Control Registers
31
0
PC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CCR
I UI H U N Z V C
EXR
T — — — — I2 I1 I0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
31
12
0
(Reserved)
VBR
31
8
0
(Reserved)
SBR
63
41
Sign extension
MAC
32
MACH
MACL
[Legend]
SP:
PC:
CCR:
I:
UI:
H:
31
Stack pointer
Program counter
Condition-code register
Interrupt mask bit
User bit or interrupt mask bit
Half-carry flag
0
U:
N:
Z:
V:
C:
EXR:
User bit
Negative flag
Zero flag
Overflow flag
Carry flag
Extended control register
Figure 2.9 CPU Registers
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 26 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
T:
I2 to I0:
VBR:
SBR:
MAC:
Trace bit
Interrupt mask bits
Vector base register
Short address base register
Multiply-accumulate register
Section 2 CPU
2.5.1
General Registers
The H8SX CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally alike
and can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is used as a
data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. Figure 2.10 illustrates the
usage of the general registers.
When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address registers, they are designated by
the letters ER (ER0 to ER7).
When the general registers are used as 16-bit registers, the ER registers are divided into 16-bit
general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R (R0 to R7). These registers are
functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 16-bit registers. The E registers (E0 to E7)
are also referred to as extended registers.
When the general registers are used as 8-bit registers, the R registers are divided into 8-bit general
registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are
functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 8-bit registers.
The general registers ER (ER0 to ER7), R (R0 to R7), and RL (R0L to R7L) are also used as index
registers. The size in the operand field determines which register is selected.
The usage of each register can be selected independently.
• Address registers
• 32-bit registers
• 32-bit index registers
General registers ER
(ER0 to ER7)
• 16-bit registers
General registers E
(E0 to E7)
• 8-bit registers
• 16-bit registers
• 16-bit index registers
General registers R
(R0 to R7)
General registers RH
(R0H to R7H)
• 8-bit registers
• 8-bit index registers
General registers RL
(R0L to R7L)
Figure 2.10 Usage of General Registers
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 27 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register
function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine branches. Figure 2.11 shows
the stack.
Free area
SP (ER7)
Stack area
Figure 2.11 Stack
2.5.2
Program Counter (PC)
PC is a 32-bit counter that indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The
length of all CPU instructions is 16 bits (one word) or a multiple of 16 bits, so the least significant
bit is ignored. (When the instruction code is fetched, the least significant bit is regarded as 0.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 28 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.5.3
Condition-Code Register (CCR)
CCR is an 8-bit register that contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask
(I) and user (UI, U) bits and half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C)
flags.
Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC
instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branch conditions for conditional branch (Bcc)
instructions.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
I
1
R/W
Interrupt Mask Bit
Masks interrupts when set to 1. This bit is set to 1 at the
start of an exception handling.
6
UI
Undefined R/W
User Bit
Can be written to and read from by software using the
LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.
5
H
Undefined R/W
Half-Carry Flag
When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B,
or NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if
there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0
otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or
NEG.W instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if
there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0
otherwise. When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L
instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a
carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise.
4
U
Undefined R/W
User Bit
Can be written to and read from by software using the
LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.
3
N
Undefined R/W
Negative Flag
Stores the value of the most significant bit (regarded as
sign bit) of data.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 29 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
2
Z
Undefined R/W
R/W
Description
Zero Flag
Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to
indicate non-zero data.
1
V
Undefined R/W
Overflow Flag
Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and
cleared to 0 otherwise.
0
C
Undefined R/W
Carry Flag
Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0
otherwise. A carry has the following types:
•
Carry from the result of addition
•
Borrow from the result of subtraction
•
Carry from the result of shift or rotation
The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit
manipulation instructions.
2.5.4
Extended Control Register (EXR)
EXR is an 8-bit register that contains the trace bit (T) and three interrupt mask bits (I2 to I0).
Operations can be performed on the EXR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC
instructions.
For details, see section 4, Exception Handling.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
T
0
R/W
Trace Bit
When this bit is set to 1, a trace exception is generated
each time an instruction is executed. When this bit is
cleared to 0, instructions are executed in sequence.
6 to 3
—
All 1
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
2
I2
1
R/W
Interrupt Mask Bits
1
I1
1
R/W
These bits designate the interrupt mask level (0 to 7).
0
I0
1
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 30 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.5.5
Vector Base Register (VBR)
VBR is a 32-bit register in which the upper 20 bits are valid. The lower 12 bits of this register are
read as 0s. This register is a base address of the vector area for exception handlings other than a
reset and a CPU address error (extended memory indirect is also out of the target). The initial
value is H'00000000. The VBR contents are changed with the LDC and STC instructions.
2.5.6
Short Address Base Register (SBR)
SBR is a 32-bit register in which the upper 24 bits are valid. The lower eight bits are read as 0s. In
8-bit absolute address addressing mode (@aa:8), this register is used as the upper address. The
initial value is H'FFFFFF00. The SBR contents are changed with the LDC and STC instructions.
2.5.7
Multiply-Accumulate Register (MAC)
MAC is a 64-bit register that stores the results of multiply-and-accumulate operations. It consists
of two 32-bit registers denoted MACH and MACL. The lower 10 bits of MACH are valid; the
upper bits are sign extended. The MAC contents are changed with the MAC, CLRMAC, LDMAC,
and STMAC instructions.
2.5.8
Initial Values of CPU Registers
Reset exception handling loads the start address from the vector table into the PC, clears the T bit
in EXR to 0, and sets the I bits in CCR and EXR to 1. The general registers, MAC, and the other
bits in CCR are not initialized. In particular, the initial value of the stack pointer (ER7) is
undefined. The SP should therefore be initialized using an MOV.L instruction executed
immediately after a reset.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 31 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.6
Data Formats
The H8SX CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit BCD, 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword)
data.
Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, …, 7) of byte
operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit
BCD data.
2.6.1
General Register Data Formats
Figure 2.12 shows the data formats in general registers.
1-bit data
RnH
7
0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Don't care
1-bit data
RnL
Don't care
7
0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
4-bit BCD data
RnH
43
7
Upper
4-bit BCD data
RnL
Byte data
RnH
Byte data
RnL
0
Lower
Don’t care
43
7
7
0
Lower
0
Don't care
MSB
LSB
7
Rn
Word data
Upper
Don't care
0
Don't care
MSB
En
Word data
15
0
ERn
Longword data
MSB
15
LSB
0
MSB
LSB
31
MSB
16 15
En
[Legend]
ERn: General register ER
En:
General register E
Rn:
General register R
RnH: General register RH
0
Rn
RnL: General register RL
MSB: Most significant bit
LSB: Least significant bit
Figure 2.12 General Register Data Formats
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 32 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
LSB
LSB
Section 2 CPU
2.6.2
Memory Data Formats
Figure 2.13 shows the data formats in memory.
The H8SX CPU can access word data and longword data which are stored at any addresses in
memory. When word data begins at an odd address or longword data begins at an address other
than a multiple of 4, a bus cycle is divided into two or more accesses. For example, when
longword data begins at an odd address, the bus cycle is divided into byte, word, and byte
accesses. In this case, these accesses are assumed to be individual bus cycles.
However, instructions to be fetched, word and longword data to be accessed during execution of
the stack manipulation, branch table manipulation, block transfer instructions, and MAC
instruction should be located to even addresses.
When SP (ER7) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word
size or longword size.
Data Type
Data Format
Address
7
1-bit data
Address L
Byte data
Address L MSB
Word data
7
0
6
5
4
2
1
0
LSB
Address 2M MSB
Address 2M + 1
Longword data
3
LSB
Address 2N MSB
Address 2N + 1
Address 2N + 2
Address 2N + 3
LSB
Figure 2.13 Memory Data Formats
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 33 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.7
Instruction Set
The H8SX CPU has 87 types of instructions. The instructions are classified by function as shown
in table 2.1. The arithmetic operation, logic operation, shift, and bit manipulation instructions are
called operation instruction in this manual.
Table 2.1
Instruction Classification
Function
Instructions
Data transfer
Block transfer
Arithmetic
operations
Size
Types
6
MOV
B/W/L
MOVFPE*6, MOVTPE*6
B
POP, PUSH*1
W/L
LDM, STM
L
MOVA
B/W*2
EEPMOV
B
MOVMD
B/W/L
MOVSD
B
ADD, ADDX, SUB, SUBX, CMP, NEG, INC, DEC
B/W/L
DAA, DAS
B
ADDS, SUBS
L
MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS
B/W
MULU, DIVU, MULS, DIVS
W/L
MULU/U, MULS/U
L
3
27
EXTU, EXTS
W/L
TAS
B
MAC
—
LDMAC, STMAC
—
CLRMAC
—
Logic operations
AND, OR, XOR, NOT
B/W/L
4
Shift
SHLL, SHLR, SHAL, SHAR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR B/W/L
8
Bit manipulation
BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR,
BXOR, BIXOR, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST
B
20
BSET/EQ, BSET/NE, BCLR/EQ, BCLR/NE, BSTZ, BISTZ
B
BFLD, BFST
B
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 34 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Function
Branch
Instructions
BRA/BS, BRA/BC, BSR/BS, BSR/BC
5
System control
Size
B*
3
Bcc* , JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS
—
RTS/L
L*5
BRA/S
—
TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, NOP
—
Types
9
10
5
RTE/L
L*
LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC
B/W/L
Total
87
[Legend]
B:
Byte size
W:
Word size
L:
Longword size
Notes: 1. POP.W Rn and PUSH.W Rn are identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn and MOV.W Rn,
@−SP.
POP.L ERn and PUSH.L ERn are identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn and MOV.L ERn,
@−SP.
2. Size of data to be added with a displacement
3. Size of data to specify a branch condition
4. Bcc is the generic designation of a conditional branch instruction.
5. Size of general register to be restored
6. Not available in this LSI.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 35 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.7.1
Instructions and Addressing Modes
Table 2.2 indicates the combinations of instructions and addressing modes that the H8SX CPU can
use.
Table 2.2
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes (1)
Addressing Mode
Classification
Data
transfer
Instruction
Size
#xx
Rn
@(d,
RnL.B/
Rn.W/
@ERn @(d,ERn) ERn.L)
MOV
B/W/L
S
SD
SD
Arithmetic
operations
SD
SD
SD
B
S/D
MOVFPE,
12
MOVTPE*
B
S/D
POP, PUSH
W/L
S/D
S/D*
2
LDM, STM
L
S/D
S/D*
2
B/W
S
MOVA*
Block
transfer
SD
@−ERn/
@ERn+/
@ERn−/
@aa:16/
@+ERn @aa:8 @aa:32 —
4
S/D
S/D*
S
S
S
S
1
S
EEPMOV
B
SD*
3
MOVMD
B/W/L
SD*
3
MOVSD
B
SD*
3
ADD, CMP
B
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
B
S
S
D
D
D
D
D
D
B
D
S
S
S
S
S
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
D
D
D
D
D
D
B
S
D
D
D
D
D
D
B
D
S
S
S
S
S
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
B
SUB
W/L
S
B
S
B
S
SD
ADDX, SUBX B/W/L
W/L
S
SD
B/W/L
S
B/W/L
S
INC, DEC
B/W/L
SD
SD*
D
ADDS, SUBS L
D
DAA, DAS
B
D
MULXU,
DIVXU
B/W
S:4
SD
MULU, DIVU W/L
S:4
SD
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 36 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
5
S
S
Section 2 CPU
Addressing Mode
@(d,
RnL.B/
Rn.W/
@ERn @(d,ERn) ERn.L)
@−ERn/
@ERn+/
@ERn−/
@aa:16/
@+ERn @aa:8 @aa:32 —
Classification
Instruction
Size
#xx
Rn
Arithmetic
operations
MULXS,
DIVXS
B/W
S:4
SD
MULS, DIVS
W/L
S:4
SD
NEG
B
D
D
D
D
D
W/L
D
D
D
D
D
D
EXTU, EXTS
W/L
D
D
D
D
D
D
TAS
B
Logic
operations
MAC
—
CLRMAC
—
LDMAC
—
STMAC
—
O
S
D
AND, OR, XOR B
S
D
D
D
D
D
B
D
S
S
S
S
S
SD
SD
SD
SD
W/L
NOT
Bit
manipulation
SHLL, SHLR
D
D
B
Shift
D
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
B
S
D
D
D
D
D
W/L
D
D
D
D
D
B
D
D
D
D
D
B/W/L*
6
D
D
D
D
D
B/W/L*
7
D
D
S
SD
SD
D
D
D
D
D
D
SHAL, SHAR
ROTL, ROTR
ROTXL,
ROTXR
B
D
D
D
D
D
W/L
D
D
D
D
D
BSET, BCLR,
BNOT, BTST,
BSET/cc,
BCLR/cc
B
D
D
D
D
BAND, BIAND, B
BOR, BIOR,
BXOR, BIXOR,
BLD, BILD,
BST, BIST,
BSTZ, BISTZ
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 37 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Addressing Mode
Rn
@(d,
RnL.B/
Rn.W/
@ERn @(d,ERn) ERn.L)
Bit
manipulation
BFLD
B
D
S
S
S
BFST
B
S
D
D
D
Branch
BRA/BS, BRA/BC*
8
B
S
S
S
BSR/BS, BSR/BC*
8
B
S
S
S
Classification
Instruction
System
control
Size
#xx
9
@−ERn/
@ERn+/
@ERn−/
@aa:16/
@+ERn @aa:8 @aa:32 —
10
S
11
D
LDC
(CCR, EXR)
B/W*
LDC
(VBR, SBR)
L
STC
(CCR, EXR)
B/W*
STC
(VBR, SBR)
L
ANDC, ORC,
XORC
B
SLEEP
—
O
NOP
—
O
S
S
S
S
S*
D
D
D*
S
9
D
D
S
[Legend]
d:
d:16 or d:32
S:
Can be specified as a source operand.
D:
Can be specified as a destination operand.
SD:
Can be specified as either a source or destination operand or both.
S/D:
Can be specified as either a source or destination operand.
S:4:
4-bit immediate data can be specified as a source operand.
Notes: 1. Only @aa:16 is available.
2. @ERn+ as a source operand and @−ERn as a destination operand
3. Specified by ER5 as a source address and ER6 as a destination address for data
transfer.
4. Size of data to be added with a displacement
5. Only @ERn− is available
6. When the number of bits to be shifted is 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16
7. When the number of bits to be shifted is specified by 5-bit immediate data or a general
register
8. Size of data to specify a branch condition
9. Byte when immediate or register direct, otherwise, word
10. Only @ERn+ is available
11. Only @−ERn is available
12. Not available in this LSI.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 38 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.2
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes (2)
Addressing Mode
@(RnL.
B/Rn.W/
Classification
Branch
System
control
ERn.L,
Instruction
Size
@ERn
BRA/BS,
BRA/BC
—
O
BSR/BS,
BSR/BC
—
O
Bcc
—
O
BRA
—
O
BRA/S
—
O*
JMP
—
BSR
—
JSR
—
@(d,PC) PC)
O
@
@aa:24 aa:32
@@vec:
@@ aa:8 7
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
—
O
O
O
RTS, RTS/L —
O
—
O
RTE, RTE/L —
O
TRAPA
[Legend]
d:
d:8 or d:16
Note: * Only @(d:8, PC) is available.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 39 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.7.2
Table of Instructions Classified by Function
Tables 2.4 to 2.11 summarize the instructions in each functional category. The notation used in
these tables is defined in table 2.3.
Table 2.3
Operation Notation
Operation Notation
Description
Rd
General register (destination)*
Rs
Rn
ERn
(EAd)
General register (source)*
General register*
General register (32-bit register)
Destination operand
(EAs)
EXR
CCR
VBR
SBR
Source operand
Extended control register
Condition-code register
Vector base register
Short address base register
N
Z
V
C
PC
SP
#IMM
disp
+
−
×
÷
∧
∨
N (negative) flag in CCR
Z (zero) flag in CCR
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C (carry) flag in CCR
Program counter
Stack pointer
Immediate data
Displacement
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
Logical AND
Logical OR
⊕
→
∼
:8/:16/:24/:32
Logical exclusive OR
Move
Logical not (logical complement)
8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length
Note:
*
General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0
to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7).
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 40 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.4
Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
MOV
B/W/L
#IMM → (EAd), (EAs) → (EAd)
Transfers data between immediate data, general registers, and memory.
MOVFPE*
B
(EAs) → Rd
MOVTPE*
B
Rs → (EAs)
POP
W/L
@SP+ → Rn
Restores the data from the stack to a general register.
PUSH
W/L
Rn → @−SP
Saves general register contents on the stack.
LDM
L
@SP+ → Rn (register list)
Restores the data from the stack to multiple general registers. Two, three,
or four general registers which have serial register numbers can be
specified.
STM
L
Rn (register list) → @−SP
Saves the contents of multiple general registers on the stack. Two, three,
or four general registers which have serial register numbers can be
specified.
MOVA
B/W
EA → Rd
Zero-extends and shifts the contents of a specified general register or
memory data and adds them with a displacement. The result is stored in a
general register.
Note:
Not available in this LSI.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 41 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.5
Block Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
EEPMOV.B
EEPMOV.W
B
Transfers a data block.
MOVMD.B
B
Transfers byte data which begins at a memory location specified by ER5
to a memory location specified by ER6. The number of byte data to be
transferred is specified by R4 or R4L.
Transfers a data block.
Transfers byte data which begins at a memory location specified by ER5
to a memory location specified by ER6. The number of byte data to be
transferred is specified by R4.
MOVMD.W
W
Transfers a data block.
Transfers word data which begins at a memory location specified by ER5
to a memory location specified by ER6. The number of word data to be
transferred is specified by R4.
MOVMD.L
L
Transfers a data block.
Transfers longword data which begins at a memory location specified by
ER5 to a memory location specified by ER6. The number of longword
data to be transferred is specified by R4.
MOVSD.B
B
Transfers a data block with zero data detection.
Transfers byte data which begins at a memory location specified by ER5
to a memory location specified by ER6. The number of byte data to be
transferred is specified by R4. When zero data is detected during transfer,
the transfer stops and execution branches to a specified address.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 42 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.6
Arithmetic Operation Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
ADD
SUB
B/W/L
ADDX
SUBX
B/W/L
INC
DEC
B/W/L
ADDS
SUBS
DAA
DAS
L
MULXU
B/W
MULU
W/L
MULU/U
L
MULXS
B/W
MULS
W/L
MULS/U
L
DIVXU
B/W
(EAd) ± #IMM → (EAd), (EAd) ± (EAs) → (EAd)
Performs addition or subtraction on data between immediate data,
general registers, and memory. Immediate byte data cannot be
subtracted from byte data in a general register.
(EAd) ± #IMM ± C → (EAd), (EAd) ± (EAs) ± C → (EAd)
Performs addition or subtraction with carry on data between immediate
data, general registers, and memory. The addressing mode which
specifies a memory location can be specified as register indirect with
post-decrement or register indirect.
Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd
Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte operands
can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.)
Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd, Rd ± 4 → Rd
Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a general register.
Rd (decimal adjust) → Rd
Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by
referring to the CCR to produce 2-digit 4-bit BCD data.
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8
bits × 8 bits → 16 bits, or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits.
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8
bits × 8 bits → 16 bits, or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits.
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers (32 bits
× 32 bits → upper 32 bits).
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8
bits × 8 bits → 16 bits, or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits.
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 16
bits × 16 bits → 16 bits, or 32 bits × 32 bits → 32 bits.
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers (32 bits ×
32 bits → upper 32 bits).
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits
÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder, or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit
quotient and 16-bit remainder.
B
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 43 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Instruction
Size
Function
DIVU
W/L
DIVXS
B/W
DIVS
W/L
CMP
B/W/L
NEG
B/W/L
EXTU
W/L
EXTS
W/L
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits
÷ 16 bits → 16-bit quotient, or 32 bits ÷ 32 bits → 32-bit quotient.
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ÷
8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder, or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit
quotient and 16-bit remainder.
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ÷
16 bits → 16-bit quotient, or 32 bits ÷ 32 bits → 32-bit quotient.
(EAd) − #IMM, (EAd) − (EAs)
Compares data between immediate data, general registers, and memory
and stores the result in CCR.
0 − (EAd) → (EAd)
Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general
register or the contents of a memory location.
(EAd) (zero extension) → (EAd)
Performs zero-extension on the lower 8 or 16 bits of data in a general
register or memory to word or longword size.
The lower 8 bits to word or longword, or the lower 16 bits to longword can
be zero-extended.
(EAd) (sign extension) → (EAd)
Performs sign-extension on the lower 8 or 16 bits of data in a general
register or memory to word or longword size.
The lower 8 bits to word or longword, or the lower 16 bits to longword can
be sign-extended.
TAS
B
MAC
—
CLRMAC
—
LDMAC
—
STMAC
—
@ERd − 0, 1 → (<bit 7> of @EAd)
Tests memory contents, and sets the most significant bit (bit 7) to 1.
(EAs) × (EAd) + MAC → MAC
Performs signed multiplication on memory contents and adds the result to
MAC.
0 → MAC
Clears MAC to zero.
Rs → MAC
Loads data from a general register to MAC.
MAC → Rd
Stores data from MAC to a general register.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 44 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.7
Logic Operation Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
AND
B/W/L
(EAd) ∧ #IMM → (EAd), (EAd) ∧ (EAs) → (EAd)
Performs a logical AND operation on data between immediate data,
general registers, and memory.
OR
B/W/L
(EAd) ∨ #IMM → (EAd), (EAd) ∨ (EAs) → (EAd)
Performs a logical OR operation on data between immediate data,
general registers, and memory.
XOR
B/W/L
(EAd) ⊕ #IMM → (EAd), (EAd) ⊕ (EAs) → (EAd)
Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on data between immediate
data, general registers, and memory.
NOT
B/W/L
∼ (EAd) → (EAd)
Takes the one's complement of the contents of a general register or a
memory location.
Table 2.8
Shift Operation Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
SHLL
B/W/L
(EAd) (shift) → (EAd)
SHLR
Performs a logical shift on the contents of a general register or a memory
location.
The contents of a general register or a memory location can be shifted by
1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 bits. The contents of a general register can be shifted by
any bits. In this case, the number of bits is specified by 5-bit immediate
data or the lower 5 bits of the contents of a general register.
SHAL
B/W/L
SHAR
(EAd) (shift) → (EAd)
Performs an arithmetic shift on the contents of a general register or a
memory location.
1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible.
ROTL
B/W/L
ROTR
(EAd) (rotate) → (EAd)
Rotates the contents of a general register or a memory location.
1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible.
ROTXL
ROTXR
B/W/L
(EAd) (rotate) → (EAd)
Rotates the contents of a general register or a memory location with the
carry bit.
1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 45 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.9
Bit Manipulation Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
BSET
B
BSET/cc
B
BCLR
B
1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Sets a specified bit in the contents of a general register or a memory
location to 1. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the
lower three bits of a general register.
if cc, 1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
If the specified condition is satisfied, this instruction sets a specified bit in
a memory location to 1. The bit number can be specified by 3-bit
immediate data, or by the lower three bits of a general register. The Z flag
status can be specified as a condition.
0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Clears a specified bit in the contents of a general register or a memory
location to 0. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the
lower three bits of a general register.
BCLR/cc
B
BNOT
B
BTST
B
BAND
B
BIAND
B
BOR
B
if cc, 0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
If the specified condition is satisfied, this instruction clears a specified bit
in a memory location to 0. The bit number can be specified by 3-bit
immediate data, or by the lower three bits of a general register. The Z flag
status can be specified as a condition.
∼ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Inverts a specified bit in the contents of a general register or a memory
location. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower
three bits of a general register.
∼ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z
Tests a specified bit in the contents of a general register or a memory
location and sets or clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is
specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general
register.
C ∧ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in the contents of a general
register or a memory location and stores the result in the carry flag. The
bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
C ∧ [∼ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C
ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in the contents of a
general register or a memory location and stores the result in the carry
flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
C ∨ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in the contents of a general register
or a memory location and stores the result in the carry flag. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 46 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Instruction
Size
Function
BIOR
B
C ∨ [~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C
ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in the contents of a
general register or a memory location and stores the result in the carry
flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BXOR
B
C ⊕ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in the contents of a
general register or a memory location and stores the result in the carry
flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BIXOR
B
C ⊕ [~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C
Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in the
contents of a general register or a memory location and stores the result
in the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BLD
B
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers a specified bit in the contents of a general register or a memory
location to the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate
data.
BILD
B
~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in the contents of a general
register or a memory location to the carry flag. The bit number is specified
by 3-bit immediate data.
BST
B
C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in the contents of a
general register or a memory location. The bit number is specified by 3-bit
immediate data.
BSTZ
B
Z → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the zero flag value to a specified bit in the contents of a
memory location. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BIST
B
∼ C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in the
contents of a general register or a memory location. The bit number is
specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 47 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Instruction
Size
Function
BISTZ
B
∼ Z → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the inverse of the zero flag value to a specified bit in the
contents of a memory location. The bit number is specified by 3-bit
immediate data.
BFLD
B
(EAs) (bit field) → Rd
Transfers a specified bit field in memory location contents to the lower bits
of a specified general register.
BFST
B
Rs → (EAd) (bit field)
Transfers the lower bits of a specified general register to a specified bit
field in memory location contents.
Table 2.10 Branch Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
BRA/BS
B
Tests a specified bit in memory location contents. If the specified
condition is satisfied, execution branches to a specified address.
B
Tests a specified bit in memory location contents. If the specified
condition is satisfied, execution branches to a subroutine at a specified
address.
Bcc
—
Branches to a specified address if the specified condition is satisfied.
BRA/S
—
Branches unconditionally to a specified address after executing the next
instruction. The next instruction should be a 1-word instruction except for
the block transfer and branch instructions.
JMP
—
Branches unconditionally to a specified address.
BSR
—
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
JSR
—
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
RTS
—
Returns from a subroutine.
RTS/L
—
Returns from a subroutine, restoring data from the stack to multiple
general registers.
BRA/BC
BSR/BS
BSR/BC
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 48 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.11 System Control Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
TRAPA
—
Starts trap-instruction exception handling.
RTE
—
Returns from an exception-handling routine.
RTE/L
—
Returns from an exception-handling routine, restoring data from the stack
to multiple general registers.
SLEEP
—
Causes a transition to a power-down state.
LDC
B/W
#IMM → CCR, (EAs) → CCR, #IMM → EXR, (EAs) → EXR
Loads immediate data or the contents of a general register or a memory
location to CCR or EXR.
Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are
performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid.
L
Rs → VBR, Rs → SBR
Transfers the general register contents to VBR or SBR.
STC
B/W
CCR → (EAd), EXR → (EAd)
Transfers the contents of CCR or EXR to a general register or memory.
Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are
performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid.
L
VBR → Rd, SBR → Rd
Transfers the contents of VBR or SBR to a general register.
ANDC
B
CCR ∧ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∧ #IMM → EXR
Logically ANDs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data.
ORC
B
CCR ∨ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∨ #IMM → EXR
Logically ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data.
XORC
B
CCR ⊕ #IMM → CCR, EXR ⊕ #IMM → EXR
Logically exclusive-ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data.
NOP
—
PC + 2 → PC
Only increments the program counter.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 49 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.7.3
Basic Instruction Formats
The H8SX CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an
operation field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a
condition field (cc).
Figure 2.14 shows examples of instruction formats.
(1) Operation field only
op
NOP, RTS, etc.
(2) Operation field and register fields
op
rm
rn
ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc.
(3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension
op
rn
rm
MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm, etc.
EA (disp)
(4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field
op
cc
EA (disp)
BRA d:16, etc
Figure 2.14 Instruction Formats
• Operation Field
Indicates the function of the instruction, and specifies the addressing mode and operation to be
carried out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the
instruction. Some instructions have two operation fields.
• Register Field
Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, data registers by 3 bits or
4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field.
• Effective Address Extension
8, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement.
• Condition Field
Specifies the branch condition of Bcc instructions.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 50 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.8
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation
The H8SX CPU supports the 11 addressing modes listed in table 2.12. Each instruction uses a
subset of these addressing modes.
Bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or absolute addressing mode to
specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions) or
immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand.
Table 2.12 Addressing Modes
No. Addressing Mode
Symbol
1
Register direct
Rn
2
Register indirect
@ERn
3
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:2,ERn)/@(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn)
4
Index register indirect with displacement
@(d:16, RnL.B)/@(d:16,Rn.W)/@(d:16,ERn.L)
@(d:32, RnL.B)/@(d:32,Rn.W)/@(d:32,ERn.L)
5
Register indirect with post-increment
@ERn+
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@−ERn
Register indirect with pre-increment
@+ERn
Register indirect with post-decrement
@ERn−
6
Absolute address
@aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32
7
Immediate
#xx:3/#xx:4/#xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
8
Program-counter relative
@(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC)
9
Program-counter relative with index register
@(RnL.B,PC)/@(Rn.W,PC)/@(ERn.L,PC)
10
Memory indirect
@@aa:8
11
Extended memory indirect
@@vec:7
2.8.1
Register Direct—Rn
The operand value is the contents of an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register which is specified by the
register field in the instruction code.
R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers.
R0 to R7 and E0 to E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers.
ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 51 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.8.2
Register Indirect—@ERn
The operand value is the contents of the memory location which is pointed to by the contents of an
address register (ERn). ERn is specified by the register field of the instruction code.
In advanced mode, if this addressing mode is used in a branch instruction, the lower 24 bits are
valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
2.8.3
Register Indirect with Displacement —@(d:2, ERn), @(d:16, ERn),
or @(d:32, ERn)
The operand value is the contents of a memory location which is pointed to by the sum of the
contents of an address register (ERn) and a 16- or 32-bit displacement. ERn is specified by the
register field of the instruction code. The displacement is included in the instruction code and the
16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added to ERn.
This addressing mode has a short format (@(d:2, ERn)). The short format can be used when the
displacement is 1, 2, or 3 and the operand is byte data, when the displacement is 2, 4, or 6 and the
operand is word data, or when the displacement is 4, 8, or 12 and the operand is longword data.
2.8.4
Index Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16,RnL.B), @(d:32,RnL.B),
@(d:16,Rn.W), @(d:32,Rn.W), @(d:16,ERn.L), or @(d:32,ERn.L)
The operand value is the contents of a memory location which is pointed to by the sum of the
following operation result and a 16- or 32-bit displacement: a specified bits of the contents of an
address register (RnL, Rn, ERn) specified by the register field in the instruction code are zeroextended to 32-bit data and multiplied by 1, 2, or 4. The displacement is included in the instruction
code and the 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added to ERn. If the operand is byte data,
ERn is multiplied by 1. If the operand is word or longword data, ERn is multiplied by 2 or 4,
respectively.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 52 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.8.5
Register Indirect with Post-Increment, Pre-Decrement, Pre-Increment,
or Post-Decrement—@ERn+, @−ERn, @+ERn, or @ERn−
• Register indirect with post-increment—@ERn+
The operand value is the contents of a memory location which is pointed to by the contents of
an address register (ERn). ERn is specified by the register field of the instruction code. After
the memory location is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents and the
sum is stored in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or
4 for longword access.
• Register indirect with pre-decrement—@−ERn
The operand value is the contents of a memory location which is pointed to by the following
operation result: the value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from the contents of an address register
(ERn). ERn is specified by the register field of the instruction code. After that, the operand
value is stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word
access, or 4 for longword access.
• Register indirect with pre-increment—@+ERn
The operand value is the contents of a memory location which is pointed to by the following
operation result: the value 1, 2, or 4 is added to the contents of an address register (ERn). ERn
is specified by the register field of the instruction code. After that, the operand value is stored
in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for
longword access.
• Register indirect with post-decrement—@ERn−
The operand value is the contents of a memory location which is pointed to by the contents of
an address register (ERn). ERn is specified by the register field of the instruction code. After
the memory location is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from the address register contents and
the remainder is stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for
word access, or 4 for longword access.
using this addressing mode, data to be written is the contents of the general register after
calculating an effective address. If the same general register is specified in an instruction and two
effective addresses are calculated, the contents of the general register after the first calculation of
an effective address is used in the second calculation of an effective address.
Example 1:
MOV.W
R0, @ER0+
When ER0 before execution is H'12345678, H'567A is written at H'12345678.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 53 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Example 2:
MOV.B @ER0+, @ER0+
When ER0 before execution is H'00001000, H'00001000 is read and the contents is written at
H'00001001.
After execution, ER0 is H'00001002.
2.8.6
Absolute Address—@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32
The operand value is the contents of a memory location which is pointed to by an absolute address
included in the instruction code.
There are 8-bit (@aa:8), 16-bit (@aa:16), 24-bit (@aa:24), and 32-bit (@aa:32) absolute
addresses.
To access the data area, the absolute address of 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits
(@aa:32) is used. For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 24 bits are specified by SBR. For a 16bit absolute address, the upper 16 bits are sign-extended. A 32-bit absolute address can access the
entire address space.
To access the program area, the absolute address of 24 bits (@aa:24) or 32 bits (@aa:32) is used.
For a 24-bit absolute address, the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
Table 2.13 shows the accessible absolute address ranges.
Table 2.13 Absolute Address Access Ranges
Absolute
Address
Data area
Normal
Mode
Middle
Mode
Advanced
Mode
Maximum
Mode
8 bits
(@aa:8)
A consecutive 256-byte area (the upper address is set in SBR)
16 bits
(@aa:16)
H'0000 to
H'FFFF
H'000000 to
H'007FFF,
H'00000000 to H'00007FFF,
H'FFFF8000 to H'FFFFFFFF
32 bits
(@aa:32)
H'FF8000 to
H'FFFFFF
H'00000000 to H'FFFFFFFF
Program area 24 bits
(@aa:24)
H'000000 to
H'FFFFFF
H'00000000 to H'00FFFFFF
32 bits
(@aa:32)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 54 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
H'00000000 to
H'00FFFFFF
H'00000000 to
H'FFFFFFFF
Section 2 CPU
2.8.7
Immediate—#xx
The operand value is 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) data included in the
instruction code.
This addressing mode has short formats in which 3- or 4-bit immediate data can be used.
When the size of immediate data is less than that of the destination operand value (byte, word, or
longword) the immediate data is zero-extended.
The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit
manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, for specifying a bit
number. The BFLD and BFST instructions contain 8-bit immediate data in the instruction code,
for specifying a bit field. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in the instruction
code, for specifying a vector address.
2.8.8
Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)
This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. The operand value is a 32-bit branch address,
which is the sum of an 8- or 16-bit displacement in the instruction code and the 32-bit address of
the PC contents. The 8-bit or 16-bit displacement is sign-extended to 32 bits when added to the PC
contents. The PC contents to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the
next instruction, so the possible branching range is −126 to +128 bytes (−63 to +64 words) or
−32766 to +32768 bytes (−16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting
value should be an even number. In advanced mode, only the lower 24 bits of this branch address
are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
2.8.9
Program-Counter Relative with Index Register—@(RnL.B, PC), @(Rn.W, PC),
or @(ERn.L, PC)
This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. The operand value is a 32-bit branch address,
which is the sum of the following operation result and the 32-bit address of the PC contents: the
contents of an address register specified by the register field in the instruction code (RnL, Rn, or
ERn) is zero-extended and multiplied by 2. The PC contents to which the displacement is added is
the address of the first byte of the next instruction. In advanced mode, only the lower 24 bits of
this branch address are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 55 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.8.10
Memory Indirect—@@aa:8
This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The operand value is a branch address,
which is the contents of a memory location pointed to by an 8-bit absolute address in the
instruction code.
The upper bits of an 8-bit absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255
(H'0000 to H'00FF in normal mode, H'000000 to H'0000FF in other modes).
In normal mode, the memory location is pointed to by word-size data and the branch address is 16
bits long. In other modes, the memory location is pointed to by longword-size data. In middle or
advanced mode, the first byte of the longword-size data is assumed to be all 0 (H'00).
Note that the top part of the address range is also used as the exception handling vector area. A
vector address of an exception handling other than a reset or a CPU address error can be changed
by VBR.
Figure 2.15 shows an example of specification of a branch address using this addressing mode.
Specified
by @aa:8
Branch address
Specified
by @aa:8
Reserved
Branch address
(a) Normal Mode
(b) Advanced Mode
Figure 2.15 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 56 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
2.8.11
Extended Memory Indirect—@@vec:7
This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The operand value is a branch address,
which is the contents of a memory location pointed to by the following operation result: the sum
of 7-bit data in the instruction code and the value of H'80 is multiplied by 2 or 4.
The address range to store a branch address is H'0100 to H'01FF in normal mode and H'000200 to
H'0003FF in other modes. In assembler notation, an address to store a branch address is specified.
In normal mode, the memory location is pointed to by word-size data and the branch address is 16
bits long. In other modes, the memory location is pointed to by longword-size data. In middle or
advanced mode, the first byte of the longword-size data is assumed to be all 0 (H'00).
2.8.12
Effective Address Calculation
Tables 2.14 and 2.15 show how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. The
lower bits of the effective address are valid and the upper bits are ignored (zero extended or sign
extended) according to the CPU operating mode.
The valid bits in middle mode are as follows:
• The lower 16 bits of the effective address are valid and the upper 16 bits are sign-extended for
the transfer and operation instructions.
• The lower 24 bits of the effective address are valid and the upper eight bits are zero-extended
for the branch instructions.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 57 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.14 Effective Address Calculation for Transfer and Operation Instructions
No.
1
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
Effective Address Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
Immediate
op
IMM
2
Register direct
3
Register indirect
op
rm
rn
31
0
31
0
31
0
+
31
0
+
31
0
31
0
31
0
31
0
0
31
0
0
31
0
0
31
0
General register contents
op
4
r
Register indirect with 16-bit displacement
31
0
General register contents
op
r
31
15
Register indirect with 32-bit displacement
+
0
disp
Sign extension
disp
31
0
General register contents
op
r
disp
5
Index register indirect with 16-bit displacement
op
r
disp
31
0
Zero extension
Contents of general register (RL, R, or ER) 1, 2, or 4
31
disp
r
31
0
Zero extension
Contents of general register (RL, R, or ER) 1, 2, or 4
0
31
disp
6
Register indirect with post-increment or post-decrement
×
+
disp
31
0
General register contents
op
×
0
disp
Sign extension
Index register indirect with 32-bit displacement
op
15
±
r
1, 2, or 4
Register indirect with pre-increment or pre-decrement
31
0
General register contents
op
±
r
1, 2, or 4
7
8-bit absolute address
31
op
aa
7
aa
SBR
16-bit absolute address
op
31
aa
15
aa
Sign extension
32-bit absolute address
op
31
aa
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 58 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
aa
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.15 Effective Address Calculation for Branch Instructions
No.
1
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
Register indirect
Effective Address Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
31
31
0
31
0
31
0
31
0
0
31
0
0
31
0
31
0
31
0
0
General register contents
r
op
2
Program-counter relative with 8-bit displacement
31
0
PC contents
31
op
7
Sign extension
disp
+
0
disp
Program-counter relative with 16-bit displacement
31
0
PC contents
31
op
disp
3
15
Program-counter relative with index register
disp
31
0
Zero extension
×
Contents of general register (RL, R, or ER)
op
+
0
Sign extension
r
2
+
0
31
PC contents
4
24-bit absolute address
Zero
31 extension 23
op
aa
aa
32-bit absolute address
op
31
aa
aa
5
Memory indirect
31
op
aa
0
7
aa
Zero extension
0
31
Memory contents
6
Extended memory indirect
31
op
vec
Zero extension
7
1
0
vec
2 or 4
31
×
0
31
0
Memory contents
2.8.13
MOVA Instruction
The MOVA instruction stores the effective address in a general register.
1. Firstly, data is obtained by the addressing mode shown in item 2of table 2.14.
2. Next, the effective address is calculated using the obtained data as the index by the addressing
mode shown in item 5 of table 2.14. The obtained data is used instead of the general register.
The result is stored in a general register. For details, see H8SX Family Software Manual.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 59 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 2 CPU
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 60 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.1
Operating Mode Selection
This LSI has five operating modes (modes 2, 4, 5, 6, and 7). The operating mode is selected by the
setting of mode pins (MD2 to MD0). Table 3.1 lists MCU operating mode settings.
Table 3.1
MCU Operating Mode Settings
MD0
CPU
Operating
Mode
Address
Space
1
0
Advanced
16 Mbytes Boot mode
1
0
0
5
1
0
1
6
1
1
7
1
1
MCU
Operating
Mode
MD2
MD1
2
0
4
LSI Initiation
Mode
External Data
Bus Width
On-Chip
ROM
Default Max.
Enabled
8 bits
16 bits
On-chip ROM
disabled extended
mode
Disabled
16 bits
16 bits
Disabled
8 bits
16 bits
0
On-chip ROM
enabled extended
mode
Enabled
8 bits
16 bits
1
Single-chip mode
Enabled
8 bits
16 bits
In this LSI, an advanced mode as the CPU operating mode and a 16-Mbyte address space are
available. The initial external bus widths are eight or 16 bits. As the LSI initiation mode, the
external extended mode, on-chip ROM initiation mode, or single-chip initiation mode can be
selected.
Mode 2 is the boot mode in which the flash memory can be programmed and erased. For details
on the boot mode, see section 20, Flash Memory (0.18-µm F-ZTAT Version).
Mode 7 is a single-chip initiation mode. In the initial state, all areas are designated to 8-bit access
space and all I/O ports can be used as general input/output ports. The external address space
cannot be accessed in the initial state, but setting the EXPE bit in the system control register
(SYSCR) to 1 enables to use the external address space. After the external address space is
enabled, ports D, E, and F can be used as an address output bus and ports H and I as a data bus by
specifying the data direction register (DDR) for each port.
Modes 4 to 6 are external extended modes, in which the external memory and devices can be
accessed. In the external extended modes, the external address space can be designated as 8-bit or
16-bit address space for each area by the bus controller after starting program execution.
If 16-bit address space is designated for any one area, it is called the 16-bit bus widths mode. If 8bit address space is designated for all areas, it is called the 8-bit bus width mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 61 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.2
Register Descriptions
The following registers are related to the operating mode setting.
• Mode control register (MDCR)
• System control register (SYSCR)
3.2.1
Mode Control Register (MDCR)
MDCR indicates the current operating mode. When MDCR is read from, the states of signals
MD2 to MD0 are latched. This latch is canceled by a reset.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Bit Name




MDS3
MDS2
MDS1
MDS0
Initial Value
0
1
0
1
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name








Initial Value
0
1
0
1
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
Undefined*
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Note: * Determined by pins MD2 to MD0.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value R/W
Descriptions
15

0
R
Reserved
14

1
R
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
13

0
R
12

1
R
11
MDS3
Undefined*
R
Mode Select 3 to 0
10
MDS2
Undefined*
R
9
MDS1
Undefined*
R
These bits indicate the operating mode selected by
the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) (see table 3.2).
8
MDS0
Undefined*
R
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 62 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
When MDCR is read, the signal levels input on pins
MD2 to MD0 are latched into these bits. These
latches are released by a reset.
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value R/W
Descriptions
7

0
R
Reserved
6

1
R
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
5

0
R
4

1
R
3

Undefined*
R
2

Undefined*
R
1

Undefined*
R

Undefined*
R
0
Note:
*
Table 3.2
Determined by pins MD2 to MD0.
Settings of Bits MDS3 to MDS0
Mode Pins
MDCR
MCU Operating
Mode
MD2
MD1
MD0
MDS3
MDS2
MDS1
MDS0
2
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
4
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
5
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
6
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
7
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 63 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.2.2
System Control Register (SYSCR)
SYSCR controls MAC saturation operation, selects bus width mode for instruction fetch, sets
external bus mode, enables/disables the on-chip RAM, and selects the DTC address mode.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Bit Name


MACS

FETCHMD

EXPE
RAME
Initial Value
1
1
0
1
0
Undefined*
Undefined*
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name






DTCMD

Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * The initial value depends on the startup mode.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Descriptions
15

1
R/W
Reserved
14

1
R/W
These bits are always read as 1. The write value should
always be 1.
13
MACS
0
R/W
MAC Saturation Operation Control
Selects either saturation operation or non-saturation
operation for the MAC instruction.
0: MAC instruction is non-saturation operation
1: MAC instruction is saturation operation
12

1
R/W
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1. The write value should
always be 1.
11
FETCHMD 0
R/W
Instruction Fetch Mode Select
This LSI can prefetch an instruction in units of 16 bits or
32 bits. Select the bus width for instruction fetch
depending on the used memory for the storage of
1
programs* .
0: 32-bit mode
1: 16-bit mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 64 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Bit
Bit Name
10

Initial
Value
2
Undefined*
R/W
Descriptions
R
Reserved
This bit is fixed at 1 in on-chip ROM enabled mode, and
0 in on-chip ROM disabled mode. This bit cannot be
changed.
9
EXPE
2
Undefined*
R/W
External Bus Mode Enable
Selects external bus mode. In external extended mode,
this bit is fixed 1 and cannot be changed. In single-chip
mode, the initial value of this bit is 0, and can be read
from or written to.
When writing 0 to this bit after reading EXPE = 1, an
external bus cycle should not be executed.
The external bus cycle may be carried out in parallel
with the internal bus cycle depending on the setting of
the write data buffer function.
0: External bus disabled
1: External bus enabled
8
RAME
1
R/W
RAM Enable
Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. This bit is
initialized when the reset state is released. Do not write
0 during access to the on-chip RAM.
0: On-chip RAM disabled
1: On-chip RAM enabled
7 to 2

All 0
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
1
DTCMD
1
R/W
DTC Mode Select
Selects DTC operating mode.
0: DTC is in full-address mode
1: DTC is in short address mode
0

1
R/W
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1. The write value should
always be 1.
Notes: 1. For details on instruction fetch mode, see section 2.3, Instruction Fetch.
2. The initial value depends on the LSI initiation mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 65 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.3
Operating Mode Descriptions
3.3.1
Mode 2
This is the boot mode for the flash memory. The LSI operates in the same way as in mode 7
except for programming and erasing of the flash memory. For details, see section 20, Flash
Memory (0.18-µm F-ZTAT Version).
3.3.2
Mode 4
The CPU operating mode is advanced mode in which the address space is 16 Mbytes, and the onchip ROM is disabled.
The initial bus width mode immediately after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access to all areas.
Ports D, E, and F function as an address bus, ports H and I function as a data bus, and parts of
ports A and B function as bus control signals. However, if all areas are designated as an 8-bit
access space by the bus controller, the bus mode switches to eight bits, and only port H functions
as a data bus.
3.3.3
Mode 5
The CPU operating mode is advanced mode in which the address space is 16 Mbytes, and the onchip ROM is disabled.
The initial bus width mode immediately after a reset is eight bits, with 8-bit access to all areas.
Ports D, E, and F function as an address bus, port H functions as a data bus, and parts of ports A
and B function as bus control signals. However, if any area is designated as a 16-bit access space
by the bus controller, the bus width mode switches to 16 bits, and ports H and I function as a data
bus.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 66 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.3.4
Mode 6
The CPU operating mode is advanced mode in which the address space is 16 Mbytes, and the onchip ROM is enabled.
The initial bus width mode immediately after a reset is eight bits, with 8-bit access to all areas.
Ports D, E, and F function as input ports, but they can be used as an address bus by specifying the
data direction register (DDR) for each port. For details, see section 9, I/O Ports. Port H functions
as a data bus, and parts of ports A and B function as bus control signals. However, if any area is
designated as a 16-bit access space by the bus controller, the bus width mode switches to 16 bits,
and ports H and I function as a data bus.
3.3.5
Mode 7
The CPU operating mode is advanced mode in which the address space is 16 Mbytes, and the onchip ROM is enabled.
In the initial state, all areas are designated to 8-bit access space and all I/O ports can be used as
general input/output ports. The external address space cannot be accessed in the initial state, but
setting the EXPE bit in the system control register (SYSCR) to 1 enables the external address
space. After the external address space is enabled, ports D, E, and F can be used as an address
output bus and ports H and I as a data bus by specifying the data direction register (DDR) for each
port. For details, see section 9, I/O Ports.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 67 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.3.6
Pin Functions
Table 3.3 lists the pin functions in each operating mode.
Table 3.3
Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode (Advanced Mode)
Port
Port A
Port B
Mode 2
Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
PA7
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
PA5 to PA3
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
PA6, PA2 to PA0
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
PB3 to PB1
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
PB0
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
P*/C
Port D
P*/A
A
A
P*/A
P*/A
Port E
P*/A
A
A
P*/A
P*/A
PF3 to PF0
P*/A
A
A
P*/A
P*/A
PF7 to PF4
P*/A
P*/A
P*/A
P*/A
P*/A
Port H
P*/D
D
D
D
P*/D
Port I
P*/D
P/D*
P*/D
P*/D
P*/D
Port F
[Legend]
P: I/O port
A: Address bus output
D: Data bus input/output
C: Control signals, clock input/output
*: Immediately after a reset
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 68 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.4
Address Map
3.4.1
Address Map
Figures 3.1 and 3.2 show the address map in each operating mode.
Mode 4
On-chip ROM disabled
extended mode
(Advanced mode)
Mode 2
Boot mode
(Advanced mode)
H'000000
H'000000
On-chip ROM
H'060000
External address space
External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
H'FD9000
Access prohibited area
H'FDC000
H'FD9000
External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
H'FF0000
Access prohibited area
H'FF2000
External address space
H'FF0000
H'FF2000
On-chip RAM*2
H'FFC000
On-chip I/O registers
H'FFFF00 External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
H'FFFF20
On-chip I/O registers
H'FFFFFF
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Access prohibited area
On-chip RAM/
external address
space*4
H'FFC000
External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
H'FFEA00
Access prohibited area
H'FDC000
External address space
H'FFEA00
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF20
H'FFFFFF
On-chip I/O registers
External address space
On-chip I/O registers
This area is specified as the external address space when EXPE = 1 and the reserved area when EXPE = 0.
The on-chip RAM is used for flash memory programming. Do not clear the RAME bit to 0.
Do not access the reserved areas.
This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.
Figure 3.1 Address Map (1) in each Operating Mode of H8SX/1653
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 69 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Mode 6
On-chip ROM enabled
extended mode
(Advanced mode)
Mode 5
On-chip ROM disabled
extended mode
(Advanced mode)
H'000000
H'000000
Mode 7
Single-chip mode
(Advanced mode)
H'000000
On-chip ROM
H'060000
On-chip ROM
H'060000
External address space
External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
External address space
H'FD9000
Access prohibited area
H'FD9000
H'FDC000
H'FDC000
H'FF2000
Access prohibited area
On-chip RAM/
external address
space*2
H'FF0000
H'FF2000
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF20
Access prohibited area
On-chip RAM/
external address
space*2
On-chip I/O registers
External address space
On-chip I/O registers
H'FFEA00
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF20
H'FFFFFF
H'FFFFFF
H'FF0000
H'FF2000
H'FFC000
External address space
External address space
H'FFEA00
H'FDC000
H'FFC000
H'FFC000
H'FD9000
External address space
External address space
H'FF0000
Access prohibited area
On-chip I/O registers
External address space
On-chip I/O registers
H'FFEA00
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF20
Access prohibited area
External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
Access prohibited area
On-chip RAM/
external address
space*2
External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
On-chip I/O registers
External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
On-chip I/O registers
H'FFFFFF
Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space when EXPE = 1 and the reserved area when EXPE = 0.
2. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.
3. Do not access the reserved areas.
Figure 3.1 Address Map (2) in each Operating Mode of H8SX/1653
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 70 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Mode 4
On-chip ROM disabled
extended mode
(Advanced mode)
Mode 2
Boot mode
(Advanced mode)
H'000000
H'000000
On-chip ROM
H'080000
External address space
External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
H'FD9000
Access prohibited area
H'FDC000
H'FD9000
External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
H'FF0000
Access prohibited area
H'FF2000
External address space
H'FF0000
H'FF2000
On-chip RAM*2
H'FFC000
On-chip I/O registers
H'FFFF00 External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
H'FFFF20
On-chip I/O registers
H'FFFFFF
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Access prohibited area
On-chip RAM/
external address
space*4
H'FFC000
External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
H'FFEA00
Access prohibited area
H'FDC000
External address space
H'FFEA00
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF20
H'FFFFFF
On-chip I/O registers
External address space
On-chip I/O registers
This area is specified as the external address space when EXPE = 1 and the reserved area when EXPE = 0.
The on-chip RAM is used for flash memory programming. Do not clear the RAME bit to 0.
Do not access the reserved areas.
This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.
Figure 3.2 Address Map (1) in each Operating Mode of H8SX/1654
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 71 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Mode 6
On-chip ROM enabled
extended mode
(Advanced mode)
Mode 5
On-chip ROM disabled
extended mode
(Advanced mode)
H'000000
H'000000
Mode 7
Single-chip mode
(Advanced mode)
H'000000
On-chip ROM
H'080000
On-chip ROM
H'080000
External address space
External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
External address space
H'FD9000
Access prohibited area
H'FD9000
H'FDC000
H'FDC000
H'FF2000
Access prohibited area
On-chip RAM/
external address
space*2
H'FF0000
H'FF2000
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF20
Access prohibited area
On-chip RAM/
external address
space*2
On-chip I/O registers
External address space
On-chip I/O registers
H'FFEA00
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF20
H'FFFFFF
H'FFFFFF
H'FF0000
H'FF2000
H'FFC000
External address space
External address space
H'FFEA00
H'FDC000
H'FFC000
H'FFC000
H'FD9000
External address space
External address space
H'FF0000
Access prohibited area
On-chip I/O registers
External address space
On-chip I/O registers
H'FFEA00
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF20
Access prohibited area
External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
Access prohibited area
On-chip RAM/
external address
space*2
External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
On-chip I/O registers
External address space/
reserved area*1, *3
On-chip I/O registers
H'FFFFFF
Notes: 1. This area is specified as the external address space when EXPE = 1 and the reserved area when EXPE = 0.
2. This area is specified as the external address space by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0.
3. Do not access the reserved areas.
Figure 3.2 Address Map (2) in each Operating Mode of H8SX/1654
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 72 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.1
Exception Handling Types and Priority
As table 4.1 indicates, exception handling is caused by a reset, a trace, an address error, an
interrupt, a trap instruction, and an illegal instruction (general illegal instruction or slot illegal
instruction). Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4.1. If two or more exceptions
occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. Exception sources, the
stack structure, and operation of the CPU vary depending on the interrupt control mode. For
details on the interrupt control mode, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Table 4.1
Exception Types and Priority
Priority
Exception Type
Exception Handling Start Timing
High
Reset
Exception handling starts at the timing of level change from
low to high on the RES pin, or when the watchdog timer
overflows. The CPU enters the reset state when the RES
pin is low.
Illegal instruction
Exception handling starts when an undefined code is
executed.
Trace*1
Exception handling starts after execution of the current
instruction or exception handling, if the trace (T) bit in EXR
is set to 1.
Address error
After an address error has occurred, exception handling
starts on completion of instruction execution.
Interrupt
Exception handling starts after execution of the current
instruction or exception handling, if an interrupt request has
occurred.*2
Trap instruction*3
Exception handling starts by execution of a trap instruction
(TRAPA).
Low
Notes: 1. Traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. Trace exception handling is not
executed after execution of an RTE instruction.
2. Interrupt detection is not performed on completion of ANDC, ORC, XORC, or LDC
instruction execution, or on completion of reset exception handling.
3. Trap instruction exception handling requests are accepted at all times in program
execution state.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 73 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.2
Exception Sources and Exception Handling Vector Table
Different vector table address offsets are assigned to different exception sources. The vector table
addresses are calculated from the contents of the vector base register (VBR) and vector table
address offset of the vector number. The start address of the exception service routine is fetched
from the exception handling vector table indicated by this vector table address.
Table 4.2 shows the correspondence between the exception sources and vector table address
offsets. Table 4.3 shows the calculation method of exception handling vector table addresses.
Table 4.2
Exception Handling Vector Table
Vector Table Address Offset*1
Exception Source
Vector Number
Normal Mode*
2
Advanced, Middle*2,
Maximum*2 Modes
Reset
0
H'0000 to H'0001
H'0000 to H'0003
Reserved for system use
1
H'0002 to H'0003
H'0004 to H'0007
2
H'0004 to H'0005
H'0008 to H'000B
3
H'0006 to H'0007
H'000C to H'000F
Illegal instruction
4
H'0008 to H'0009
H'0010 to H'0013
Trace
5
H'000A to H'000B
H'0014 to H'0017
Reserved for system use
6
H'000C to H'000D
H'0018 to H'001B
Interrupt (NMI)
7
H'000E to H'000F
H'001C to H'001F
(#0)
8
H'0010 to H'0011
H'0020 to H'0023
(#1)
9
H'0012 to H'0013
H'0024 to H'0027
(#2)
10
H'0014 to H'0015
H'0028 to H'002B
(#3)
11
H'0016 to H'0017
H'002C to H'002F
12
H'0018 to H'0019
H'0030 to H'0033
DMA address error*
13
H'001A to H'001B
H'0034 to H'0037
Reserved for system use
14

17
H'001C to H'001D

H'0022 to H'0023
H'0038 to H'003B

H'0044 to H'0047
Sleep interrupt
18
H'0024 to H'0025
H'0048 to H'004B
Trap instruction
CPU address error
3
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 74 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
Vector Table Address Offset*1
2
Advanced, Middle*2,
Maximum*2 Modes
Exception Source
Vector Number
Normal Mode*
Reserved for system use
19

23
H'0026 to H'0027

H'002E to H'002F
H'004C to H'004F

H'005C to H'005F
User area (not used)
24

63
H'0030 to H'0031

H'007E to H'007F
H'0060 to H'0063

H'00FC to H'00FF
External interrupt
IRQ0
64
H'0080 to H'0081
H'0100 to H'0103
IRQ1
65
H'0082 to H'0083
H'0104 to H'0107
IRQ2
66
H'0084 to H'0085
H'0108 to H'010B
IRQ3
67
H'0086 to H'0087
H'010C to H'010F
IRQ4
68
H'0088 to H'0089
H'0110 to H'0113
IRQ5
69
H'008A to H'008B
H'0114 to H'0117
IRQ6
70
H'008C to H'008D
H'0118 to H'011B
IRQ7
71
H'008E to H'008F
H'011C to H'011F
IRQ8
72
H'0090 to H'0091
H'0120 to H'0123
IRQ9
73
H'0092 to H'0093
H'0124 to H'0127
IRQ10
74
H'0094 to H'0095
H'0128 to H'012B
IRQ11
75
H'0096 to H'0097
H'012C to H'012F
Reserved for system use
76

79
H'0098 to H'0099

H'009E to H'009F
H'0130 to H'0133

H'013C to H'013F
Internal interrupt*4
80

255
H'00A0 to H'00A1

H'01FE to H'01FF
H'0140 to H'0143

H'03FC to H'03FF
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Lower 16 bits of the address.
Not available in this LSI.
A DMA address error is generated by the DTC and DMAC.
For details of internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.5, Interrupt Exception Handling
Vector Table.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 75 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
Table 4.3
Calculation Method of Exception Handling Vector Table Address
Exception Source
Calculation Method of Vector Table Address
Reset, CPU address error
Vector table address = (vector table address offset)
Other than above
Vector table address = VBR + (vector table address offset)
[Legend]
VBR: Vector base register
Vector table address offset: See table 4.2.
4.3
Reset
A reset has priority over any other exception. When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and
this LSI enters the reset state. To ensure that this LSI is reset, hold the RES pin low for at least 20
ms with the STBY pin driven high when the power is turned on. When operation is in progress,
hold the RES pin low for at least 20 cycles.
The chip can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details, see section 13,
Watchdog Timer (WDT).
A reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip peripheral modules.
The interrupt control mode is 0 immediately after a reset.
4.3.1
Reset Exception Handling
When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, this LSI starts reset
exception handling as follows:
1. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are
initialized, VBR is cleared to H'00000000, the T bit is cleared to 0 in EXR, and the I bits are
set to 1 in EXR and CCR.
2. The reset exception handling vector address is read and transferred to the PC, and program
execution starts from the address indicated by the PC.
Figures 4.1 and 4.2 show examples of the reset sequence.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 76 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.3.2
Interrupts after Reset
If an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and
CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests,
including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is
always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes
the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx: 32, SP).
4.3.3
On-Chip Peripheral Functions after Reset Release
After the reset state is released, MSTPCRA and MSTPCRB are initialized to H'0FFF and H'FFFF,
respectively, and all modules except the DTC and DMAC enter module stop mode.
Consequently, on-chip peripheral module registers cannot be read or written to. Register reading
and writing is enabled when module stop mode is canceled.
Vector
fetch
Internal
operation
First
instruction
prefetch
Iφ
RES
Internal
address bus
(1)
(3)
Internal read
signal
Internal write
signal
Internal data
bus
High
(2)
(4)
(1): Reset exception handling vector address (when reset, (1) = H'000000)
(2): Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address)
(3) Start address ((3) = (2))
(4) First instruction in the exception handling routine
Figure 4.1 Reset Sequence (On-chip ROM Enabled Advanced Mode)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 77 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
Internal First instruction
operation
prefetch
Vector fetch
*
*
*
Bφ
RES
Address bus
(1)
(3)
(5)
RD
HWR, LWR
D15 to D0
High
(2)
(4)
(6)
(1)(3) Reset exception handling vector address (when reset, (1) = H'000000, (3) = H'000002)
(2)(4) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address)
(5) Start address ((5) = (2)(4))
(6) First instruction in the exception handling routine
Note: * Seven program wait cycles are inserted.
Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence
(16-Bit External Access in On-chip ROM Disabled Advanced Mode)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 78 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.4
Traces
Traces are enabled in interrupt control mode 2. Trace mode is not activated in interrupt control
mode 0, irrespective of the state of the T bit. Before changing interrupt control modes, the T bit
must be cleared. For details on interrupt control modes, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
If the T bit in EXR is set to 1, trace mode is activated. In trace mode, a trace exception occurs on
completion of each instruction. Trace mode is not affected by interrupt masking by CCR. Table
4.4 shows the state of CCR and EXR after execution of trace exception handling. Trace mode is
canceled by clearing the T bit in EXR to 0 during the trace exception handling. However, the T bit
saved on the stack retains its value of 1, and when control is returned from the trace exception
handling routine by the RTE instruction, trace mode resumes. Trace exception handling is not
carried out after execution of the RTE instruction.
Interrupts are accepted even within the trace exception handling routine.
Table 4.4
Status of CCR and EXR after Trace Exception Handling
CCR
Interrupt Control Mode
I
UI
EXR
I2 to I0
0
Trace exception handling cannot be used.
2
1


T
0
[Legend]
1:
Set to 1
0:
Cleared to 0
:
Retains the previous value.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 79 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.5
Address Error
4.5.1
Address Error Source
Instruction fetch, stack operation, or data read/write shown in table 4.5 may cause an address
error.
Table 4.5
Bus Cycle and Address Error
Bus Cycle
Type
Bus Master
Description
Address Error
Instruction fetch
CPU
Fetches instructions from even addresses
No (normal)
Fetches instructions from odd addresses
Occurs
Fetches instructions from areas other than on-chip
1
peripheral module space*
No (normal)
Fetches instructions from on-chip peripheral module
1
space*
Occurs
Fetches instructions from external memory space in
single-chip mode
Occurs
Fetches instructions from access prohibited area.*
Stack operation
Data read/write
CPU
CPU
2
Accesses stack when the stack pointer value is even
address
No (normal)
Accesses stack when the stack pointer value is odd
Occurs
Accesses word data from even addresses
No (normal)
Accesses word data from odd addresses
No (normal)
Accesses external memory space in single-chip mode
Occurs
2
Data read/write
DTC or DMAC
Accesses to access prohibited area*
Occurs
Accesses word data from even addresses
No (normal)
Accesses word data from odd addresses
No (normal)
Accesses external memory space in single-chip mode
Occurs
2
Accesses to access prohibited area*
Single address
transfer
DMAC
Occurs
Occurs
Address access space is the external memory space for No (normal)
single address transfer
Address access space is not the external memory space Occurs
for single address transfer
Notes: 1. For on-chip peripheral module space, see section 6, Bus Controller (BSC).
2. For the access prohibited area, refer to figure 3.1, Address Map (Advanced Mode) in
section 3.4, Address Map.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 80 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.5.2
Address Error Exception Handling
When an address error occurs, address error exception handling starts after the bus cycle causing
the address error ends and current instruction execution completes. The address error exception
handling is as follows:
1. The contents of PC, CCR, and EXR are saved in the stack.
2. The interrupt mask bit is updated and the T bit is cleared to 0.
3. An exception handling vector table address corresponding to the address error is generated, the
start address of the exception service routine is loaded from the vector table to PC, and
program execution starts from that address.
Even though an address error occurs during a transition to an address error exception handling, the
address error is not accepted. This prevents an address error from occurring due to stacking for
exception handling, thereby preventing infinitive stacking.
If the SP contents are not a multiple of 2 when an address error exception handling occurs, the
stacked values (PC, CCR, and EXR) are undefined.
When an address error occurs, the following is performed to halt the DTC and DMAC.
• The ERR bit of DTCCR in the DTC is set to 1.
• The ERRF bit of DMDR_0 in the DMAC is set to 1.
• The DTE bits of DMDRs for all channels in the DMAC are cleared to 0 to forcibly terminate
transfer.
Table 4.6 shows the state of CCR and EXR after execution of the address error exception
handling.
Table 4.6
Status of CCR and EXR after Address Error Exception Handling
CCR
EXR
Interrupt Control Mode
I
UI
T
I2 to I0
0
1



2
1

0
7
[Legend]
1:
Set to 1
0:
Cleared to 0
:
Retains the previous value.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 81 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.6
Interrupts
4.6.1
Interrupt Sources
Interrupt sources are NMI, sleep interrupt, IRQ0 to IRQ11, and on-chip peripheral modules, as
shown in table 4.7.
Table 4.7
Interrupt Sources
Type
Source
Number of Sources
NMI
NMI pin (external input)
1
Sleep interrupt
SLEEP instruction
1
IRQ0 to IRQ11
Pins IRQ0 to IRQ11 (external input)
12
On-chip
peripheral
module
DMA controller (DMAC)
8
Watchdog timer (WDT)
1
A/D converter
1
16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU)
26
8-bit timer (TMR)
16
Serial communications interface (SCI)
24
2
I C bus interface 2 (IIC2)
2
USB function module (USB)
5
Different vector numbers and vector table offsets are assigned to different interrupt sources. For
vector number and vector table offset, refer to table 5.2, Interrupt Sources, Vector Address
Offsets, and Interrupt Priority in section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 82 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.6.2
Interrupt Exception Handling
Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has two interrupt
control modes and can assign interrupts other than NMI or sleep interrupt to eight priority/mask
levels to enable multiple-interrupt control. The source to start interrupt exception handling and the
vector address differ depending on the product. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller.
The interrupt exception handling is as follows:
1. The contents of PC, CCR, and EXR are saved in the stack.
2. The interrupt mask bit is updated and the T bit is cleared to 0.
3. An exception handling vector table address corresponding to the interrupt source is generated,
the start address of the exception service routine is loaded from the vector table to PC, and
program execution starts from that address.
4.7
Instruction Exception Handling
There are two instructions that cause exception handling: trap instruction and illegal instruction.
4.7.1
Trap Instruction
Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. Trap instruction
exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state. The trap
instruction exception handling is as follows:
1. The contents of PC, CCR, and EXR are saved in the stack.
2. The interrupt mask bit is updated and the T bit is cleared to 0.
3. An exception handling vector table address corresponding to the vector number specified in
the TRAPA instruction is generated, the start address of the exception service routine is loaded
from the vector table to PC, and program execution starts from that address.
A start address is read from the vector table corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, as
specified in the instruction code.
Table 4.8 shows the state of CCR and EXR after execution of trap instruction exception handling.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 83 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
Table 4.8
Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling
CCR
EXR
Interrupt Control Mode
I
UI
T
I2 to I0
0
1



2
1

0

[Legend]
1:
Set to 1
0:
Cleared to 0
:
Retains the previous value.
4.7.2
Exception Handling by Illegal Instruction
The illegal instructions are general illegal instructions and slot illegal instructions. The exception
handling by the general illegal instruction starts when an undefined code is executed. The
exception handling by the slot illegal instruction starts when a particular instruction (e.g. its code
length is two words or more, or it changes the PC contents) at a delay slot (immediately after a
delayed branch instruction) is executed. The exception handling by the general illegal instruction
and slot illegal instruction is always executable in the program execution state.
The exception handling is as follows:
1. The contents of PC, CCR, and EXR are saved in the stack.
2. The interrupt mask bit is updated and the T bit is cleared to 0.
3. An exception handling vector table address corresponding to the occurred exception is
generated, the start address of the exception service routine is loaded from the vector table to
PC, and program execution starts from that address.
Table 4.9 shows the state of CCR and EXR after execution of illegal instruction exception
handling.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 84 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
Table 4.9
Status of CCR and EXR after Illegal Instruction Exception Handling
CCR
EXR
Interrupt Control Mode
I
UI
T
I2 to I0
0
1



2
1

0

[Legend]
1:
Set to 1
0:
Cleared to 0
:
Retains the previous value.
4.8
Stack Status after Exception Handling
Figure 4.3 shows the stack after completion of exception handling.
Advanced mode
SP
EXR
Reserved*
SP
CCR
PC (24 bits)
Interrupt control mode 0
CCR
PC (24 bits)
Interrupt control mode 2
Note: * Ignored on return.
Figure 4.3 Stack Status after Exception Handling
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 85 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.9
Usage Note
When performing stack-manipulating access, this LSI assumes that the lowest address bit is 0. The
stack should always be accessed by a word transfer instruction or a longword transfer instruction,
and the value of the stack pointer (SP: ER7) should always be kept even. Use the following
instructions to save registers:
PUSH.W
Rn
(or MOV.W Rn, @-SP)
PUSH.L
ERn
(or MOV.L ERn, @-SP)
Use the following instructions to restore registers:
POP.W
Rn
(or MOV.W @SP+, Rn)
POP.L
ERn
(or MOV.L @SP+, ERn)
Performing stack manipulation while SP is set to an odd value leads to an address error. Figure 4.4
shows an example of operation when the SP value is odd.
Address
CCR
SP
R1L
SP
H'FFFEFA
H'FFFEFB
PC
PC
H'FFFEFC
H'FFFEFD
H'FFFEFE
SP
H'FFFEFF
TRAP instruction executed
SP set to H'FFFEFF
MOV.B R1L, @-ER7 executed
Data saved above SP
Contents of CCR lost
(Address error occurred)
[Legend]
CCR :
PC :
R1L :
SP :
Condition code register
Program counter
General register R1L
Stack pointer
Note: This diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode is 0, in advanced mode.
Figure 4.4 Operation when SP Value Is Odd
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 86 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.1
Features
• Two interrupt control modes
Any of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of bits INTM1 and INTM0 in the
interrupt control register (INTCR).
• Priority can be assigned by the interrupt priority register (IPR)
IPR provides for setting interrupt priory. Eight levels can be set for each module for all
interrupts except for the interrupt requests listed below. The following seven interrupt requests
are given priority of 8, therefore they are accepted at all times.
 NMI
 Illegal instructions
 Trace
 Trap instructions
 CPU address error
 DMA address error (occurred in the DTC and DMAC)
 Sleep interrupt
• Independent vector addresses
All interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary for the
source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine.
• Thirteen external interrupts
NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. Rising edge or falling edge
detection can be selected for NMI. Falling edge, rising edge, or both edge detection, or level
sensing, can be selected for IRQ11 to IRQ0.
• DTC and DMAC control
DTC and DMAC can be activated by means of interrupts.
• CPU priority control function
The priority levels can be assigned to the CPU, DTC, and DMAC. The priority level of the
CPU can be automatically assigned on an exception generation. Priority can be given to the
CPU interrupt exception handling over that of the DTC and DMAC transfer.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 87 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
A block diagram of the interrupt controller is shown in figure 5.1.
CPU
INTM1, INTM0
INTCR
IPR
NMIEG
I
I2 to I0
NMI input
IRQ input unit
EXR
CPU
interrupt request
NMI input unit
IRQ input
CCR
CPU
vector
ISR
Priority
determination
DMAC
ISCR
IER
SSIER
DMAC
activation
permission
Internal interrupt
sources
WOVI to RESUME
DMAC priority
control
DMDR
Source selector
CPU priority
DTC activation
request
DTCER DTCCR
CPUPCR
DTC priority
control
DTC vector
Activation
request
clear signal
DTC priority
Interrupt controller
DTC
[Legend]
INTCR: Interrupt control register
CPUPCR: CPU priority control register
IRQ sense control register
ISCR:
IRQ enable register
IER:
IRQ status register
ISR:
SSIER:
IPR:
DTCER:
DTCCR:
Software standby release IRQ enable register
Interrupt priority register
DTC enable register
DTC control register
Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 88 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 5.1 shows the pin configuration of the interrupt controller.
Table 5.1
Pin Configuration
Name
I/O
Function
NMI
Input
Nonmaskable External Interrupt
Rising or falling edge can be selected.
IRQ11 to IRQ0
Input
Maskable External Interrupts
Rising, falling, or both edges, or level sensing, can be
independently selected.
5.3
Register Descriptions
The interrupt controller has the following registers.
• Interrupt control register (INTCR)
• CPU priority control register (CPUPCR)
• Interrupt priority registers A to C, E to I, K, L, Q, and R
(IPRA to IPRC, IPRE to IPRI, IPRK, IPRL, IPRQ, and IPRR)
• IRQ enable register (IER)
• IRQ sense control registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)
• IRQ status register (ISR)
• Software standby release IRQ enable register (SSIER)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 89 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.3.1
Interrupt Control Register (INTCR)
INTCR selects the interrupt control mode, and the detected edge for NMI.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name


INTM1
INTM0
NMIEG



Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

0
R
Reserved
6

0
R
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
5
INTM1
0
R/W
Interrupt Control Select Mode 1 and 0
4
INTM0
0
R/W
These bits select either of two interrupt control modes for
the interrupt controller.
00: Interrupt control mode 0
Interrupts are controlled by I bit in CCR.
01: Setting prohibited.
10: Interrupt control mode 2
Interrupts are controlled by bits I2 to I0 in EXR, and
IPR.
11: Setting prohibited.
3
NMIEG
0
R/W
NMI Edge Select
Selects the input edge for the NMI pin.
0: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of NMI input
1: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of NMI input
2 to 0

All 0
R
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 90 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.3.2
CPU Priority Control Register (CPUPCR)
CPUPCR sets whether or not the CPU has priority over the DTC and DMAC. The interrupt
exception handling by the CPU can be given priority over that of the DTC and DMAC transfer.
The priority level of the DTC is set by bits DTCP2 to DTCP0 in CPUPCR. The priority level of
the DMAC is set by the DMAC control register for each channel.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CPUPCE
DTCP2
DTCP1
DTCP0
IPSETE
CPUP2
CPUP1
CPUP0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Note: * When the IPSETE bit is set to 1, the CPU priority is automatically updated, so these bits cannot be modified.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
CPUPCE
0
R/W
6
5
4
DTCP2
DTCP1
DTCP0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
3
IPSETE
0
R/W
CPU Priority Control Enable
Controls the CPU priority control function. Setting this bit
to 1 enables the CPU priority control over the DTC and
DMAC.
0: CPU always has the lowest priority
1: CPU priority control enabled
DTC Priority Level 2 to 0
These bits set the DTC priority level.
000: Priority level 0 (lowest)
001: Priority level 1
010: Priority level 2
011: Priority level 3
100: Priority level 4
101: Priority level 5
110: Priority level 6
111: Priority level 7 (highest)
Interrupt Priority Set Enable
Controls the function which automatically assigns the
interrupt priority level of the CPU. Setting this bit to 1
automatically sets bits CPUP2 to CPUP0 by the CPU
interrupt mask bit (I bit in CCR or bits I2 to I0 in EXR).
0: Bits CPUP2 to CPUP0 are not updated automatically
1: The interrupt mask bit value is reflected in bits CPUP2
to CPUP0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 91 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2
CPUP2
0
R/(W)*
CPU Priority Level 2 to 0
1
CPUP1
0
R/(W)*
0
CPUP0
0
R/(W)*
These bits set the CPU priority level. When the
CPUPCE is set to 1, the CPU priority control function
over the DTC and DMAC becomes valid and the priority
of CPU processing is assigned in accordance with the
settings of bits CPUP2 to CPUP0.
000: Priority level 0 (lowest)
001: Priority level 1
010: Priority level 2
011: Priority level 3
100: Priority level 4
101: Priority level 5
110: Priority level 6
111: Priority level 7 (highest)
Note:
When the IPSETE bit is set to 1, the CPU priority is automatically updated, so these bits
cannot be modified.
*
5.3.3
Interrupt Priority Registers A to C, E to I, K, L, Q, and R
(IPRA to IPRC, IPRE to IPRI, IPRK, IPRL, IPRQ, and IPRR)
IPR sets priory (levels 7 to 0) for interrupts other than NMI and sleep interrupt.
Setting a value in the range from B'000 to B'111 in the 3-bit groups of bits 14 to 12, 10 to 8, 6 to 4,
and 2 to 0 assigns a priority level to the corresponding interrupt. For the correspondence between
the interrupt sources and the IPR settings, see table 5.2.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Bit Name

IPR14
IPR13
IPR12

IPR10
IPR9
IPR8
Initial Value
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name

IPR6
IPR5
IPR4

IPR2
IPR1
IPR0
Initial Value
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 92 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15

0
R
Reserved
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
14
IPR14
1
R/W
13
IPR13
1
R/W
Sets the priority level of the corresponding interrupt
source.
12
IPR12
1
R/W
000: Priority level 0 (lowest)
001: Priority level 1
010: Priority level 2
011: Priority level 3
100: Priority level 4
101: Priority level 5
110: Priority level 6
111: Priority level 7 (highest)
11

0
R
Reserved
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
10
IPR10
1
R/W
9
IPR9
1
R/W
Sets the priority level of the corresponding interrupt
source.
8
IPR8
1
R/W
000: Priority level 0 (lowest)
001: Priority level 1
010: Priority level 2
011: Priority level 3
100: Priority level 4
101: Priority level 5
110: Priority level 6
111: Priority level 7 (highest)
7

0
R
Reserved
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 93 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
6
IPR6
1
R/W
5
IPR5
1
R/W
Sets the priority level of the corresponding interrupt
source.
4
IPR4
1
R/W
000: Priority level 0 (lowest)
001: Priority level 1
010: Priority level 2
011: Priority level 3
100: Priority level 4
101: Priority level 5
110: Priority level 6
111: Priority level 7 (highest)
3

0
R
Reserved
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
2
IPR2
1
R/W
1
IPR1
1
R/W
Sets the priority level of the corresponding interrupt
source.
0
IPR0
1
R/W
000: Priority level 0 (lowest)
001: Priority level 1
010: Priority level 2
011: Priority level 3
100: Priority level 4
101: Priority level 5
110: Priority level 6
111: Priority level 7 (highest)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 94 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.3.4
IRQ Enable Register (IER)
IER enables or disables interrupt requests IRQ11 to IRQ0.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Bit Name




IRQ11E
IRQ10E
IRQ9E
IRQ8E
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRQ7E
IRQ6E
IRQ5E
IRQ4E
IRQ3E
IRQ2E
IRQ1E
IRQ0E
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15 to 12

All 0
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
11
IRQ11E
0
R/W
IRQ11 Enable
The IRQ11 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is
1.
10
IRQ10E
0
R/W
IRQ10 Enable
The IRQ10 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is
1.
9
IRQ9E
0
R/W
IRQ9 Enable
The IRQ9 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.
8
IRQ8E
0
R/W
IRQ8 Enable
The IRQ8 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.
7
IRQ7E
0
R/W
IRQ7 Enable
6
IRQ6E
0
R/W
IRQ6 Enable
The IRQ7 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.
The IRQ6 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.
5
IRQ5E
0
R/W
IRQ5 Enable
The IRQ5 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 95 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
4
IRQ4E
0
R/W
IRQ4 Enable
The IRQ4 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.
3
IRQ3E
0
R/W
IRQ3 Enable
The IRQ3 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.
2
IRQ2E
0
R/W
IRQ2 Enable
The IRQ2 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.
1
IRQ1E
0
R/W
IRQ1 Enable
0
IRQ0E
0
R/W
IRQ0 Enable
The IRQ1 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.
The IRQ0 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1.
5.3.5
IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)
ISCRH and ISCRL select the source that generates an interrupt request on pins IRQ11 to IRQ0.
Upon changing the setting of ISCR, IRQnF (n = 0 to 11) in ISR is often set to 1 accidentally
through an internal operation. In this case, an interrupt exception handling is executed if an IRQn
interrupt request is enabled. In order to prevent such an accidental interrupt from occurring, the
setting of ISCR should be changed while the IRQn interrupt is disabled, and then the IRQnF in
ISR should be cleared to 0.
• ISCRH
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Bit Name








Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRQ11SR
IRQ11SF
IRQ10SR
IRQ10SF
IRQ9SR
IRQ9SF
IRQ8SR
IRQ8SF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 96 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
• ISCRL
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
IRQ7SR
IRQ7SF
IRQ6SR
IRQ6SF
IRQ5SR
IRQ5SF
IRQ4SR
IRQ4SF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRQ3SR
IRQ3SF
IRQ2SR
IRQ2SF
IRQ1SR
IRQ1SF
IRQ0SR
IRQ0SF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• ISCRH
Bit
Bit Name
15 to 8 
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
All 0
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
7
IRQ11SR
0
R/W
6
IRQ11SF
0
R/W
IRQ11 Sense Control Rise
IRQ11 Sense Control Fall
00: Interrupt request generated by low level of IRQ11
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ11
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ11
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising
edges of IRQ11
5
IRQ10SR
0
R/W
4
IRQ10SF
0
R/W
IRQ10 Sense Control Rise
IRQ10 Sense Control Fall
00: Interrupt request generated by low level of IRQ10
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ10
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ10
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising
edges of IRQ10
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 97 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
IRQ9SR
0
R/W
2
IRQ9SF
0
R/W
IRQ9 Sense Control Rise
IRQ9 Sense Control Fall
00: Interrupt request generated by low level of IRQ9
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ9
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ9
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising
edges of IRQ9
1
IRQ8SR
0
R/W
0
IRQ8SF
0
R/W
IRQ8 Sense Control Rise
IRQ8 Sense Control Fall
00: Interrupt request generated by low level of IRQ8
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ8
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ8
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising
edges of IRQ8
• ISCRL
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15
IRQ7SR
0
R/W
14
IRQ7SF
0
R/W
IRQ7 Sense Control Rise
IRQ7 Sense Control Fall
00: Interrupt request generated by low level of IRQ7
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ7
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ7
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising
edges of IRQ7
13
IRQ6SR
0
R/W
12
IRQ6SF
0
R/W
IRQ6 Sense Control Rise
IRQ6 Sense Control Fall
00: Interrupt request generated by low level of IRQ6
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ6
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ6
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising
edges of IRQ6
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 98 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
11
IRQ5SR
0
R/W
10
IRQ5SF
0
R/W
IRQ5 Sense Control Rise
IRQ5 Sense Control Fall
00: Interrupt request generated by low level of IRQ5
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ5
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ5
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising
edges of IRQ5
9
IRQ4SR
0
R/W
8
IRQ4SF
0
R/W
IRQ4 Sense Control Rise
IRQ4 Sense Control Fall
00: Interrupt request generated by low level of IRQ4
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ4
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ4
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising
edges of IRQ4
7
IRQ3SR
0
R/W
6
IRQ3SF
0
R/W
IRQ3 Sense Control Rise
IRQ3 Sense Control Fall
00: Interrupt request generated by low level of IRQ3
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ3
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ3
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising
edges of IRQ3
5
IRQ2SR
0
R/W
4
IRQ2SF
0
R/W
IRQ2 Sense Control Rise
IRQ2 Sense Control Fall
00: Interrupt request generated by low level of IRQ2
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ2
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ2
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising
edges of IRQ2
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 99 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
IRQ1SR
0
R/W
2
IRQ1SF
0
R/W
IRQ1 Sense Control Rise
IRQ1 Sense Control Fall
00: Interrupt request generated by low level of IRQ1
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ1
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ1
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising
edges of IRQ1
1
IRQ0SR
0
R/W
0
IRQ0SF
0
R/W
IRQ0 Sense Control Rise
IRQ0 Sense Control Fall
00: Interrupt request generated by low level of IRQ0
01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ0
10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ0
11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising
edges of IRQ0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 100 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.3.6
IRQ Status Register (ISR)
ISR is an IRQ11 to IRQ0 interrupt request register.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Bit Name




IRQ11F
IRQ10F
IRQ9F
IRQ8F
Initial Value
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IRQ7F
IRQ6F
IRQ5F
IRQ4F
IRQ3F
IRQ2F
IRQ1F
IRQ0F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Note:
Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. The bit manipulation instructions or memory operation instructions should
be used to clear the flag.
*
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15 to 12

All 0
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
11
IRQ11F
0
R/(W)*
[Setting condition]
10
IRQ10F
0
R/(W)*
•
9
IRQ9F
0
R/(W)*
[Clearing conditions]
8
IRQ8F
0
R/(W)*
•
Writing 0 after reading IRQnF = 1
7
IRQ7F
0
R/(W)*
•
6
IRQ6F
0
R/(W)*
When interrupt exception handling is executed when
low-level sensing is selected and IRQn input is high
5
IRQ5F
0
R/(W)*
•
4
IRQ4F
0
R/(W)*
3
IRQ3F
0
R/(W)*
When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed
when falling-, rising-, or both-edge sensing is
selected
2
IRQ2F
0
R/(W)*
•
1
IRQ1F
0
R/(W)*
When the DTC is activated by an IRQn interrupt,
and the DISEL bit in MRB of the DTC is cleared to 0
0
IRQ0F
0
R/(W)*
Note:
*
When the interrupt selected by ISCR occurs
Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 101 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.3.7
Software Standby Release IRQ Enable Register (SSIER)
SSIER selects pins used to leave software standby mode from pins IRQ11 to IRQ0.
The IRQ interrupt used to leave software standby mode should not be set as the DTC activation
source.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Bit Name




SSI11
SSI10
SSI9
SSI8
Initial Value
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSI7
SSI6
SSI5
SSI4
SSI3
SSI2
SSI1
SSI0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15 to 12

All 0
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
11
SSI11
0
R/W
Software Standby Release IRQ Setting
10
SSI10
0
R/W
9
SSI9
0
R/W
These bits select the IRQn pins used to leave software
standby mode (n = 11 to 0).
8
SSI8
0
R/W
7
SSI7
0
R/W
6
SSI6
0
R/W
5
SSI5
0
R/W
4
SSI4
0
R/W
3
SSI3
0
R/W
2
SSI2
0
R/W
1
SSI1
0
R/W
0
SSI0
0
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 102 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
0: IRQn requests are not sampled in software standby
mode
1: When an IRQn request occurs in software standby
mode, this LSI leaves software standby mode after
the oscillation settling time has elapsed
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.4
Interrupt Sources
5.4.1
External Interrupts
There are thirteen external interrupts: NMI and IRQ11 to IRQ0. These interrupts can be used to
leave software standby mode.
(1)
NMI Interrupts
Nonmaskable interrupt request (NMI) is the highest-priority interrupt, and is always accepted by
the CPU regardless of the interrupt control mode or the settings of the CPU interrupt mask bits.
The NMIEG bit in INTCR selects whether an interrupt is requested at the rising or falling edge on
the NMI pin.
When an NMI interrupt is generated, the interrupt controller determines that an error has occurred,
and performs the following procedure.
• Sets the ERR bit of DTCCR in the DTC to 1.
• Sets the ERRF bit of DMDR_0 in the DMAC to 1
• Clears the DTE bits of DMDRs for all channels in the DMAC to 0 to forcibly terminate
transfer
(2)
IRQn Interrupts
An IRQn interrupt is requested by a signal input on pins IRQ11 to IRQ0. IRQn (n = 11 to 0) have
the following features:
• Using ISCR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is generated by a low level, falling
edge, rising edge, or both edges, on pins IRQn.
• Enabling or disabling of interrupt requests IRQn can be selected by IER.
• The interrupt priority can be set by IPR.
• The status of interrupt requests IRQn is indicated in ISR. ISR flags can be cleared to 0 by
software. The bit manipulation instructions and memory operation instructions should be used
to clear the flag.
Detection of IRQn interrupts is enabled through the P1ICR, P2ICR, and P5ICR register settings,
and does not change regardless of the output setting. However, when a pin is used as an external
interrupt input pin, the pin must not be used as an I/O pin for another function by clearing the
corresponding DDR bit to 0.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 103 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
A block diagram of interrupts IRQn is shown in figure 5.2.
Corresponding bit
in ICR
IRQnSF, IRQnSR
Input buffer
Edge/level
detection circuit
IRQnE
IRQnF
IRQn interrupt request
S
Q
R
IRQn input
Clear signal
[Legend]
n = 11 to 0
Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQn
When the IRQ sensing control in ISCR is set to a low level of signal IRQn, the level of IRQn
should be held low until an interrupt handling starts. Then set the corresponding input signal IRQn
to high in the interrupt handling routine and clear the IRQnF to 0. Interrupts may not be executed
when the corresponding input signal IRQn is set to high before the interrupt handling begins.
5.4.2
Internal Interrupts
The sources for internal interrupts from on-chip peripheral modules have the following features:
• For each on-chip peripheral module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status,
and enable bits that enable or disable these interrupts. They can be controlled independently.
When the enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is issued to the interrupt controller.
• The interrupt priority can be set by means of IPR.
• The DTC and DMAC can be activated by a TPU, SCI, or other interrupt request.
• The priority levels of DTC and DMAC activation can be controlled by the DTC and DMAC
priority control functions.
5.4.3
Sleep Interrupt
A sleep interrupt is generated by executing a SLEEP instruction. The sleep interrupt is nonmaskable, and is always accepted regardless of the interrupt control mode or the settings of the
CPU interrupt mask bits. The SLPIE bit in SBYCR selects whether the sleep interrupt function is
enabled or not.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 104 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.5
Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table
Table 5.2 lists interrupt exception handling sources, vector address offsets, and interrupt priority.
In the default priority order, a lower vector number corresponds to a higher priority. When
interrupt control mode 2 is set, priority levels can be changed by setting the IPR contents. The
priority for interrupt sources allocated to the same level in IPR follows the default priority, that is,
they are fixed.
Table 5.2
Interrupt Sources, Vector Address Offsets, and Interrupt Priority
Vector
Address
Offset*
IPR
Priority
DTC
Activation
DMAC
Activation
High


Classification
Interrupt Source
Vector
Number
External pin
NMI
7
H'001C

SLEEP
instruction
Sleep interrupt
18
H'0048



External pin
IRQ0
64
H'0100
IPRA14 to IPRA12
O

IRQ1
65
H'0104
IPRA10 to IPRA8
O

IRQ2
66
H'0108
IPRA6 to IPRA4
O

IRQ3
67
H'010C
IPRA2 to IPRA0
O

IRQ4
68
H'0110
IPRB14 to IPRB12
O

IRQ5
69
H'0114
IPRB10 to IPRB8
O

IRQ6
70
H'0118
IPRB6 to IPRB4
O

IRQ7
71
H'011C
IPRB2 to IPRB0
O

IRQ8
72
H'0120
IPRC14 to IPRC12
O

IRQ9
73
H'0124
IPRC10 to IPRC8
O

IRQ10
74
H'0128
IPRC6 to IPRC4
O


WDT
IRQ11
75
H'012C
IPRC2 to IPRC0
O

Reserved for
system use
76
H'0130



77
H'0134


78
H'0138


79
H'013C






WOVI
80
H'0140
81
H'0144
IPRE10 to IPRE8
Low
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 105 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Classification
Interrupt Source

Reserved for
system use
Vector
Number
Vector
Address
Offset*
IPR
Priority

High
DTC
Activation
DMAC
Activation
82
H'0148


83
H'014C


84
H'0150


85
H'0154


A/D
ADI
86
H'0158
IPRF10 to IPRF8
O
O

Reserved for
system use
87
H'015C



TPU_0
TGI0A
88
H'0160
IPRF6 to IPRF4
O
O
TGI0B
89
H'0164
O

TGI0C
90
H'0168
O

TGI0D
91
H'016C
O

TPU_1
TPU_2
TPU_3
TPU_4
TCI0V
92
H'0170
TGI1A
93
H'0174
IPRF2 to IPRF0


O
O
TGI1B
94
H'0178
O

TCI1V
95
H'017C


TCI1U
96
H'0180


TGI2A
97
H'0184
O
O
TGI2B
98
H'0188
IPRG14 to IPRG12
O

TCI2V
99
H'018C




O
O
TCI2U
100
H'0190
TGI3A
101
H'0194
TGI3B
102
H'0198
O

TGI3C
103
H'019C
O

TGI3D
104
H'01A0
O

TCI3V
105
H'01A4
TGI4A
106
H'01A8
TGI4B
107
H'01AC
TCI4V
108
H'01B0
TCI4U
109
H'01B4
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 106 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
IPRG10 to IPRG8
IPRG6 to IPRG4
Low


O
O
O





Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Classification
TPU_5

TMR_0
TMR_1
TMR_2
TMR_3
DMAC

DMAC
Interrupt Source
Vector
Number
Vector
Address
Offset*
IPR
Priority
DTC
Activation
DMAC
Activation
IPRG2 to IPRG0
High
TGI5A
110
H'01B8
O
O
TGI5B
111
H'01BC
O

TCI5V
112
H'01C0








TCI5U
113
H'01C4
Reserved for
system use
114
H'01C8
115
H'01CC

CMI0A
116
H'01D0
O

CMI0B
117
H'01D4
O

OV0I
118
H'01D8


CMI1A
119
H'01DC
O

CMI1B
120
H'01E0
O

OV1I
121
H'01E4


CMI2A
122
H'01E8
O

CMI2B
123
H'01EC
O

OV2I
124
H'01F0


CMI3A
125
H'01F4
O

CMI3B
126
H'01F8
O

OV3I
127
H'01FC


IPRH14 to IPRH12
IPRH10 to IPRH8
IPRH6 to IPRH4
IPRH2 to IPRH0
DMTEND0
128
H'0200
IPRI14 to IPRI12
O

DMTEND1
129
H'0204
IPRI10 to IPRI8
O

DMTEND2
130
H'0208
IPRI6 to IPRI4
O

DMTEND3
131
H'020C
IPRI2 to IPRI0
O

Reserved for
system use
132
H'0210



133
H'0214


134
H'0218


135
H'021C


DMEEND0
136
H'0220
O

DMEEND1
137
H'0224
O

DMEEND2
138
H'0228
O

DMEEND3
139
H'022C
O

IPRK14 to IPRK12
Low
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 107 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Classification
Interrupt Source

Reserved for
system use
SCI_0
SCI_1
SCI_2

SCI_4

Vector
Number
Vector
Address
Offset*
IPR
Priority
DTC
Activation
DMAC
Activation
140
H'0230

High


141
H'0234


142
H'0238


143
H'023C


ERI0
144
H'0240


RXI0
145
H'0244
O
O
TXI0
146
H'0248
O
O
TEI0
147
H'024C


ERI1
148
H'0250


RXI1
149
H'0254
O
O
TXI1
150
H'0258
O
O
TEI1
151
H'025C


IPRK6 to IPRK4
IPRK2 to IPRK0
ERI2
152
H'0260


RXI2
153
H'0264
O
O
TXI2
154
H'0268
O
O
TEI2
155
H'026C


Reserved for
system use
156
H'0270


157
H'0274


158
H'0278


159
H'027C


IPRL14 to IPRL12

ERI4
160
H'0280


RXI4
161
H'0284
O
O
TXI4
162
H'0288
O
O
TEI4
163
H'028C


Reserved for
system use
164
|
215
H'0290
|
H'035C

|


|

Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 108 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
IPRL6 to IPRL4

Low
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Vector
Address
Offset*
IPR
Priority
DTC
Activation
DMAC
Activation
IPRQ6 to IPRQ4
High
—
—
—
—
Classification
Interrupt Source
Vector
Number
IIC2
IICI0
216
H'0360
Reserved for
system use
217
H'0364
IICI1
218
H'0368
—
—
Reserved for
system use
219
H'036C
—
—
RXI5
220
H'0370
—
O
TXI5
221
H'0374
—
O
ERI5
222
H'0378
—
—
TEI5
223
H'037C
—
—
RXI6
224
H'0380
—
O
TXI6
225
H'0384
—
O
ERI6
226
H'0388
—
—
TEI6
227
H'038C
—
—
TMR_4
CMIA4 or CMIB4 228
H'0390
—
—
TMR_5
CMIA5 or CMIB5 229
H'0394
—
—
TMR_6
CMIA6 or CMIB6 230
H'0398
—
—
TMR_7
CMIA7 or CMIB7 231
H'039C
—
—
USB
USBINTN0
232
H'03A0
—
O
USBINTN1
233
H'03A4
—
O
USBINTN2
234
H'03A8
—
—
USBINTN3
235
H'03AC
—
—
Reserved for
system use
236
H'03B0
—
—
237
H'03B4
—
—
USB
resume
238
H'03B8
—
—
—
Reserved for
system use
239
|
255
H'03BC
|
H'03FC
—
|
—
—
|
—
SCI_5
SCI_6
—
Note:
*
IPRQ2 to IPRQ0
IPRR14 to IPRR12
IPRR10 to IPRR8
IPRR6 to IPRR4
IPRR2 to IPRR0
—
Low
Lower 16 bits of the start address in advanced, middle, and maximum modes.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 109 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.6
Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation
The interrupt controller has two interrupt control modes: interrupt control mode 0 and interrupt
control mode 2. Interrupt operations differ depending on the interrupt control mode. The interrupt
control mode is selected by INTCR. Table 5.3 shows the differences between interrupt control
mode 0 and interrupt control mode 2.
Table 5.3
Interrupt Control Modes
Interrupt
Control
Mode
Priority
Setting
Register
Interrupt
Mask Bit
0
Default
I
The priority levels of the interrupt sources are fixed
default settings.
The interrupts except for NMI and sleep interrupt is
masked by the I bit.
2
IPR
I2 to I0
Eight priority levels can be set for interrupt sources
except for NMI and sleep interrupt with IPR.
8-level interrupt mask control is performed by bits I2 to
I0.
5.6.1
Description
Interrupt Control Mode 0
In interrupt control mode 0, interrupt requests except for NMI and sleep interrupt are masked by
the I bit in CCR of the CPU. Figure 5.3 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in
this case.
1. If an interrupt request occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, the
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller.
2. If the I bit in CCR is set to 1, NMI and sleep interrupt is accepted, and other interrupt requests
are held pending. If the I bit is cleared to 0, an interrupt request is accepted.
3. For multiple interrupt requests, the interrupt controller selects the interrupt request with the
highest priority, sends the request to the CPU, and holds other interrupt requests pending.
4. When the CPU accepts the interrupt request, it starts interrupt exception handling after
execution of the current instruction has been completed.
5. The PC and CCR contents are saved to the stack area during the interrupt exception handling.
The PC contents saved on the stack is the address of the first instruction to be executed after
returning from the interrupt handling routine.
6. Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This masks all interrupts except NMI and sleep interrupt.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 110 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
7. The CPU generates a vector address for the accepted interrupt and starts execution of the
interrupt handling routine at the address indicated by the contents of the vector address in the
vector table.
Program execution state
No
Interrupt generated?
Yes
Yes
NMI or sleep interrupt
No
I=0
No
Pending
Yes
No
IRQ0
Yes
No
IRQ1
Yes
TEI4
Yes
Save PC and CCR
I←1
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
Figure 5.3 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance
in Interrupt Control Mode 0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 111 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.6.2
Interrupt Control Mode 2
In interrupt control mode 2, interrupt requests except for NMI and sleep interrupt are masked by
comparing the interrupt mask level (I2 to I0 bits) in EXR of the CPU and the IPR setting. There
are eight levels in mask control. Figure 5.4 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation
in this case.
1. If an interrupt request occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller.
2. For multiple interrupt requests, the interrupt controller selects the interrupt request with the
highest priority according to the IPR setting, and holds other interrupt requests pending. If
multiple interrupt requests have the same priority, an interrupt request is selected according to
the default setting shown in table 5.2.
3. Next, the priority of the selected interrupt request is compared with the interrupt mask level set
in EXR. When the interrupt request does not have priority over the mask level set, it is held
pending, and only an interrupt request with a priority over the interrupt mask level is accepted.
4. When the CPU accepts an interrupt request, it starts interrupt exception handling after
execution of the current instruction has been completed.
5. The PC, CCR, and EXR contents are saved to the stack area during interrupt exception
handling. The PC saved on the stack is the address of the first instruction to be executed after
returning from the interrupt handling routine.
6. The T bit in EXR is cleared to 0. The interrupt mask level is rewritten with the priority of the
accepted interrupt. If the accepted interrupt is NMI or sleep interrupt, the interrupt mask level
is set to H'7.
7. The CPU generates a vector address for the accepted interrupt and starts execution of the
interrupt handling routine at the address indicated by the contents of the vector address in the
vector table.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 112 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Program execution state
No
Interrupt generated?
Yes
Yes
NMI or sleep interrupt
No
Level 7 interrupt?
No
No
Yes
Mask level 6
or below?
Yes
Level 6 interrupt?
No
Yes
Level 1 interrupt?
Mask level 5
or below?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Mask level 0?
No
Yes
Save PC, CCR, and EXR
Pending
Clear T bit to 0
Update mask level
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
Figure 5.4 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance
in Interrupt Control Mode 2
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 113 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
REJ09B0219-0100
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 114 of 966
Figure 5.5 Interrupt Exception Handling
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
Instruction prefetch address (Not executed. This is
the contents of the saved PC, the return address.)
(2) (4) Instruction code (Not executed.)
(3)
Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.)
(5)
SP − 2
(7)
SP − 4
(1)
Internal
data bus
Internal
write signal
Internal
read signal
Internal
address bus
Interrupt
request signal
Iφ
Instruction
prefetch
(6) (8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
Internal
operation
(6)
(7)
(8)
(10)
(9)
Vector fetch
Internal
operation
(12)
(11)
Saved PC and saved CCR
Vector address
Start address of interrupt handling routine (vector address contents)
Start address of Interrupt handling routine ((13) = (10)(12))
First instruction of interrupt handling routine
(5)
Stack
Instruction
prefetch
in interrupt
handling
routine
5.6.3
Interrupt level determination
Wait for end of instruction
Interrupt
acceptance
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence
Figure 5.5 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. The example is for the case where
interrupt control mode 0 is set in maximum mode, and the program area and stack area are in onchip memory.
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.6.4
Interrupt Response Times
Table 5.4 shows interrupt response times – the interval between generation of an interrupt request
and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. The symbols for execution
states used in table 5.4 are explained in table 5.5.
This LSI is capable of fast word transfer to on-chip memory, so allocating the program area in onchip ROM and the stack area in on-chip RAM enables high-speed processing.
Table 5.4
Interrupt Response Times
5
Normal Mode*
Interrupt
Control
Mode 0
Execution State
Interrupt
Control
Mode 2
Advanced Mode
Interrupt
Control
Mode 0
Interrupt
Control
Mode 2
1
Interrupt priority determination*
3
Number of states until executing
2
instruction ends*
1 to 19 + 2·SI
PC, CCR, EXR stacking
6
SK to 2·SK*
2·SK
6
SK to 2·SK*
Vector fetch
Interrupt
Control
Mode 0
Interrupt
Control
Mode 2
2·SK
2·SK
11 to 31
11 to 31
Sh
Instruction fetch*
3
2·SI
4
Internal processing*
Total (using on-chip memory)
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2·SK
5
Maximum Mode*
2
10 to 31
11 to 31
10 to 31
11 to 31
Two states for an internal interrupt.
In the case of the MULXS or DIVXS instruction
Prefetch after interrupt acceptance or for an instruction in the interrupt handling routine.
Internal operation after interrupt acceptance or after vector fetch
Not available in this LSI.
When setting the SP value to 4n, the interrupt response time is SK; when setting to 4n +
2, the interrupt response time is 2·SK.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 115 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Table 5.5
Number of Execution States in Interrupt Handling Routine
Object of Access
External Device
8-Bit Bus
16-Bit Bus
Symbol
On-Chip
Memory
2-State
Access
3-State
Access
2-State
Access
3-State
Access
Vector fetch Sh
1
8
12 + 4m
4
6 + 2m
Instruction fetch SI
1
4
6 + 2m
2
3+m
Stack manipulation SK
1
8
12 + 4m
4
6 + 2m
[Legend]
m:
Number of wait cycles in an external device access.
5.6.5
DTC and DMAC Activation by Interrupt
The DTC and DMAC can be activated by an interrupt. In this case, the following options are
available:
•
•
•
•
Interrupt request to the CPU
Activation request to the DTC
Activation request to the DMAC
Combination of the above
For details on interrupt requests that can be used to activate the DTC and DMAC, see table 5.2,
section 7, DMA Controller (DMAC), and section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC).
Figure 5.6 shows a block diagram of the DTC, DMAC, and interrupt controller.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 116 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Select signal
DMRSR_0 to DMRSR_3
Control signal
Interrupt request
On-chip
peripheral
module
Interrupt request
clear signal
DMAC activation request signal
DMAC
Clear signal
DMAC
select
circuit
DTCER
Clear signal
Select signal
Interrupt request
DTC activation request
vector number
Clear signal
DTC control
DTC
circuit
Interrupt request
IRQ
interrupt
select
CPU interrupt request
vector number
circuit
Interrupt request clear signal
Clear signal
DTC/CPU
Priority
determination
CPU
I, I2 to I0
Interrupt controller
Figure 5.6 Block Diagram of DTC, DMAC, and Interrupt Controller
(1)
Selection of Interrupt Sources
The activation source for each DMAC channel is selected by DMRSR. The selected activation
source is input to the DMAC through the select circuit. When transfer by an on-chip module
interrupt is enabled (DTF1 = 1, DTF0 = 0, and DTE = 1 in DMDR) and the DTA bit in DMDR is
set to 1, the interrupt source selected for the DMAC activation source is controlled by the DMAC
and cannot be used as a DTC activation source or CPU interrupt source.
Interrupt sources that are not controlled by the DMAC are set for DTC activation sources or CPU
interrupt sources by the DTCE bit in DTCERA to DTCERH of the DTC.
Specifying the DISEL bit in MRB of the DTC generates an interrupt request to the CPU by
clearing the DTCE bit to 0 after the individual DTC data transfer.
Note that when the DTC performs a predetermined number of data transfers and the transfer
counter indicates 0, an interrupt request is made to the CPU by clearing the DTCE bit to 0 after the
DTC data transfer.
When the same interrupt source is set as both the DTC and DMAC activation source and CPU
interrupt source, the DTC and DMAC must be given priority over the CPU. If the IPSETE bit in
CPUPCR is set to 1, the priority is determined according to the IPR setting. Therefore, the CPUP
setting or the IPR setting corresponding to the interrupt source must be set to lower than or equal
to the DTCP and DMAP setting. If the CPU is given priority over the DTC or DMAC, the DTC or
DMAC may not be activated, and the data transfer may not be performed.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 117 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
(2)
Priority Determination
The DTC activation source is selected according to the default priority, and the selection is not
affected by its mask level or priority level. For respective priority levels, see table 8.1, Interrupt
Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs.
(3)
Operation Order
If the same interrupt is selected as both the DTC activation source and CPU interrupt source, the
CPU interrupt exception handling is performed after the DTC data transfer. If the same interrupt is
selected as the DTC or DMAC activation source or CPU interrupt source, respective operations
are performed independently.
Table 5.6 lists the selection of interrupt sources and interrupt source clear control by setting the
DTA bit in DMDR of the DMAC, the DTCE bit in DTCERA to DTCERH of the DTC, and the
DISEL bit in MRB of the DTC.
Table 5.6
Interrupt Source Selection and Clear Control
DMAC Setting
DTC Setting
Interrupt Source Selection/Clear Control
DTA
DTCE
DISEL
DMAC
DTC
CPU
0
0
*
O
X
√
1
0
O
√
X
1
O
O
√
*
√
X
X
1
*
[Legend]
√: The corresponding interrupt is used. The interrupt source is cleared.
(The interrupt source flag must be cleared in the CPU interrupt handling routine.)
O: The corresponding interrupt is used. The interrupt source is not cleared.
X: The corresponding interrupt is not available.
*: Don't care.
(4)
Usage Note
The interrupt sources of the SCI, and A/D converter are cleared according to the setting shown in
table 5.6, when the DTC or DMAC reads/writes the prescribed register.
To initiate multiple channels for the DTC with the same interrupt, the same priority (DTCP =
DMAP) should be assigned.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 118 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.7
CPU Priority Control Function Over DTC and DMAC
The interrupt controller has a function to control the priority among the DTC, DMAC, and the
CPU by assigning different priority levels to the DTC, DMAC, and CPU. Since the priority level
can automatically be assigned to the CPU on an interrupt occurrence, it is possible to execute the
CPU interrupt exception handling prior to the DTC or DMAC transfer.
The priority level of the CPU is assigned by bits CPUP2 to CPUP0 in CPUPCR. The priority level
of the DTC is assigned by bits DTCP2 to DTCP0 in CPUPCR. The priority level of the DMAC is
assigned by bits DMAP2 to DMAP0 in DMDR for each channel.
The priority control function over the DTC and DMAC is enabled by setting the CPUPCE bit in
CPUPCR to 1. When the CPUPCE bit is 1, the DTC and DMAC activation sources are controlled
according to the respective priority levels.
The DTC activation source is controlled according to the priority level of the CPU indicated by
bits CPUP2 to CPUP0 and the priority level of the DTC indicated by bits DTCP2 to DTCP0. If the
CPU has priority, the DTC activation source is held. The DTC is activated when the condition by
which the activation source is held is cancelled (CPUPCE = 1 and value of bits CPUP2 to CPUP0
is greater than that of bits DTCP2 to DTCP0). The priority level of the DTC is assigned by the
DTCP2 to DTCP0 bits regardless of the activation source.
For the DMAC, the priority level can be specified for each channel. The DMAC activation source
is controlled according to the priority level of each DMAC channel indicated by bits DMAP2 to
DMAP0 and the priority level of the CPU. If the CPU has priority, the DMAC activation source is
held. The DMAC is activated when the condition by which the activation source is held is
cancelled (CPUPCE = 1 and value of bits CPUP2 to CPUP0 is greater than that of bits DMAP2 to
DMAP0). If different priority levels are specified for channels, the channels of the higher priority
levels continue transfer and the activation sources for the channels of lower priority levels than
that of the CPU are held.
There are two methods for assigning the priority level to the CPU by the IPSETE bit in CPUPCR.
Setting the IPSETE bit to 1 enables a function to automatically assign the value of the interrupt
mask bit of the CPU to the CPU priority level. Clearing the IPSETE bit to 0 disables the function
to automatically assign the priority level. Therefore, the priority level is assigned directly by
software rewriting bits CPUP2 to CPUP0. Even if the IPSETE bit is 1, the priority level of the
CPU is software assignable by rewriting the interrupt mask bit of the CPU (I bit in CCR or I2 to I0
bits in EXR).
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 119 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
The priority level which is automatically assigned when the IPSETE bit is 1 differs according to
the interrupt control mode.
In interrupt control mode 0, the I bit in CCR of the CPU is reflected in bit CPUP2. Bits CPUP1
and CPUP0 are fixed 0. In interrupt control mode 2, the values of bits I2 to I0 in EXR of the CPU
are reflected in bits CPUP2 to CPUP0.
Table 5.7 shows the CPU priority control.
Table 5.7
CPU Priority Control
Control Status
Interrupt
Control Interrupt
Mode
Priority
Interrupt
Mask Bit
IPSETE in
CPUPCR CPUP2 to CPUP0
Updating of CPUP2
to CPUP0
0
I = any
0
B'111 to B'000
Enabled
I=0
1
B'000
Disabled
Default
I=1
2
IPR setting
I2 to I0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 120 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
B'100
0
B'111 to B'000
Enabled
1
I2 to I0
Disabled
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
Table 5.8 shows a setting example of the priority control function over the DTC and DMAC and
the transfer request control state. A priority level can be independently set to each DMAC channel,
but the table only shows one channel for example. Transfers through the DMAC channels can be
separately controlled by assigning different priority levels for channels.
Table 5.8
Example of Priority Control Function Setting and Control State
Transfer Request Control State
Interrupt Control CPUPCE in CPUP2 to
Mode
CPUPCR
CPUP0
DTCP2 to
DTCP0
DMAP2 to
DMAP0
DTC
DMAC
0
2
0
Any
Any
Any
Enabled
Enabled
1
B'000
B'000
B'000
Enabled
Enabled
B'100
B'000
B'000
Masked
Masked
B'100
B'000
B'011
Masked
Masked
B'100
B'111
B'101
Enabled
Enabled
B'000
B'111
B'101
Enabled
Enabled
0
Any
Any
Any
Enabled
Enabled
1
B'000
B'000
B'000
Enabled
Enabled
B'000
B'011
B'101
Enabled
Enabled
B'011
B'011
B'101
Enabled
Enabled
B'100
B'011
B'101
Masked
Enabled
B'101
B'011
B'101
Masked
Enabled
B'110
B'011
B'101
Masked
Masked
B'111
B'011
B'101
Masked
Masked
B'101
B'011
B'101
Masked
Enabled
B'101
B'110
B'101
Enabled
Enabled
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 121 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.8
Usage Notes
5.8.1
Conflict between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to mask the interrupt, the masking becomes effective
after execution of the instruction.
When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as BCLR or MOV, if an
interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned will still be
enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt exception handling for that interrupt will
be executed on completion of the instruction. However, if there is an interrupt request with priority
over that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for the interrupt with priority,
and another interrupt will be ignored. The same also applies when an interrupt source flag is
cleared to 0. Figure 5.7 shows an example in which the TCIEV bit in TIER of the TPU is cleared
to 0. The above conflict will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while
the interrupt is masked.
TIER_0 write cycle by CPU
TCIV exception handling
φ
Internal
address bus
TIER_0 address
Internal
write signal
TCIEV
TCFV
TCIV
interrupt signal
Figure 5.7 Conflict between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
Similarly, when an interrupt is requested immediately before the DTC enable bit is changed to
activate the DTC, DTC activation and the interrupt exception handling by the CPU are both
executed. When changing the DTC enable bit, make sure that an interrupt is not requested.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 122 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.8.2
Instructions that Disable Interrupts
Instructions that disable interrupts immediately after execution are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and
XORC. After any of these instructions is executed, all interrupts including NMI are disabled and
the next instruction is always executed. When the I bit is set by one of these instructions, the new
value becomes valid two states after execution of the instruction ends.
5.8.3
Times when Interrupts are Disabled
There are times when interrupt acceptance is disabled by the interrupt controller.
The interrupt controller disables interrupt acceptance for a 3-state period after the CPU has
updated the mask level with an LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC instruction, and for a period of
writing to the registers of the interrupt controller.
5.8.4
Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction
Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B and the EEPMOV.W instructions.
With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during the transfer
is not accepted until the transfer is completed.
With the EEPMOV.W instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt
exception handling starts at the end of the individual transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the
stack in this case is the address of the next instruction. Therefore, if an interrupt is generated
during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the following coding should be used.
L1:
5.8.5
EEPMOV.W
MOV.W
R4,R4
BNE
L1
Interrupts during Execution of MOVMD and MOVSD Instructions
With the MOVMD or MOVSD instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer,
interrupt exception handling starts at the end of the individual transfer cycle. The PC value saved
on the stack in this case is the address of the MOVMD or MOVSD instruction. The transfer of the
remaining data is resumed after returning from the interrupt handling routine.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 123 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.8.6
Interrupts of Peripheral Modules
To clear an interrupt request flag by the CPU, the flag should be read from after clearing if the
peripheral module clock is generated by dividing the system clock. This makes the request signal
synchronized with the system clock. For details, see section 21.5.1, Notes on Clock Pulse
Generator.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 124 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
This LSI has an on-chip bus controller (BSC) that manages the external address space divided into
eight areas.
The bus controller also has a bus arbitration function, and controls the operation of the internal bus
masters; CPU, DMAC, and DTC.
6.1
Features
• Manages external address space in area units
Manages the external address space divided into eight areas
Chip select signals (CS0 to CS7) can be output for each area
Bus specifications can be set independently for each area
8-bit access or 16-bit access can be selected for each area
Burst ROM, byte control SRAM, or address/data multiplexed I/O interface can be set
An endian conversion function is provided to connect a device of little endian
• Basic bus interface
This interface can be connected to the SRAM and ROM
2-state access or 3-state access can be selected for each area
Program wait cycles can be inserted for each area
Wait cycles can be inserted by the WAIT pin.
Extension cycles can be inserted while CSn is asserted for each area (n = 0 to 7)
The negation timing of the read strobe signal (RD) can be modified
• Byte control SRAM interface
Byte control SRAM interface can be set for areas 0 to 7
The SRAM that has a byte control pin can be directly connected
• Burst ROM interface
Burst ROM interface can be set for areas 0 and 1
Burst ROM interface parameters can be set independently for areas 0 and 1
• Address/data multiplexed I/O interface
Address/data multiplexed I/O interface can be set for areas 3 to 7
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 125 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
• Idle cycle insertion
Idle cycles can be inserted between external read accesses to different areas
Idle cycles can be inserted before the external write access after an external read access
Idle cycles can be inserted before the external read access after an external write access
Idle cycles can be inserted before the external access after a DMAC single address transfer
(write access)
• Write buffer function
External write cycles and internal accesses can be executed in parallel
Write accesses to the on-chip peripheral module and on-chip memory accesses can be executed
in parallel
DMAC single address transfers and internal accesses can be executed in parallel
• External bus release function
• Bus arbitration function
Includes a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus mastership among the CPU, DMAC, DTC, and
external bus master
• Multi-clock function
The internal peripheral functions can be operated in synchronization with the peripheral
module clock (Pφ). Accesses to the external address space can be operated in synchronization
with the external bus clock (Bφ).
• The bus start (BS) and read/write (RD/WR) signals can be output.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 126 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
A block diagram of the bus controller is shown in figure 6.1.
CPU address bus
Address
selector
DMAC address bus
Area decoder
CS7 to CS0
DTC address bus
Internal bus
control unit
Internal bus
control signals
CPU bus mastership acknowledge signal
DTC bus mastership acknowledge signal
DMAC bus mastership acknowledge signal
CPU bus mastership request signal
DTC bus mastership request signal
DMAC bus mastership request signal
External bus
control unit
External bus
control signals
WAIT
Internal
bus
arbiter
External bus
arbiter
BREQ
BACK
BREQO
Control register
Internal data bus
ABWCR
IDLCR
ASTCR
BCR1
WTCRA
[Legend]
ABWCR:
ASTCR:
WTCRA:
WTCRB:
RDNCR:
CSACR:
Bus width control register
Access state control register
Wait control register A
Wait control register B
Read strobe timing control register
CS assertion period control register
BCR2
ENDIANCR
WTCRB
SRAMCR
RDNCR
BROMCR
CSACR
MPXCR
IDLCR:
BCR1:
BCR2:
ENDIANCR:
SRAMCR:
BROMCR:
MPXCR:
Idle control register
Bus control register 1
Bus control register 2
Endian control register
SRAM mode control register
Burst ROM interface control register
Address/data multiplexed I/O control register
Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of Bus Controller
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 127 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.2
Register Descriptions
The bus controller has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bus width control register (ABWCR)
Access state control register (ASTCR)
Wait control register A (WTCRA)
Wait control register B (WTCRB)
Read strobe timing control register (RDNCR)
CS assertion period control register (CSACR)
Idle control register (IDLCR)
Bus control register 1 (BCR1)
Bus control register 2 (BCR2)
Endian control register (ENDIANCR)
SRAM mode control register (SRAMCR)
Burst ROM interface control register (BROMCR)
Address/data multiplexed I/O control register (MPXCR)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 128 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.2.1
Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR)
ABWCR specifies the data bus width for each area in the external address space.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
ABWH7
ABWH6
ABWH5
ABWH4
ABWH3
ABWH2
ABWH1
ABWH0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1/0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ABWL7
ABWL6
ABWL5
ABWL4
ABWL3
ABWL2
ABWL1
ABWL0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Note: * Initial value at 16-bit bus initiation is H'FEFF, and that at 8-bit bus initiation is H'FFFF.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value*1
R/W
Description
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ABWH7
ABWH6
ABWH5
ABWH4
ABWH3
ABWH2
ABWH1
ABWL0
ABWL7
ABWL6
ABWL5
ABWL4
ABWL3
ABWL2
ABWL1
ABWL0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1/0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Area 7 to 0 Bus Width Control
These bits select whether the corresponding area is to be
designated as 8-bit access space or 16-bit access space.
ABWHn ABWLn (n = 7 to 0)
×
0:
Setting prohibited
0
1:
Area n is designated as 16-bit
access space
1
1:
Area n is designated as 8-bit access
2
space*
[Legend]
×: Don't care
Notes: 1. Initial value at 16-bit bus initiation is H'FEFF, and that at 8-bit bus initiation is H'FFFF.
2. An address space specified as byte control SRAM interface must not be specified as 8bit access space.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 129 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.2.2
Access State Control Register (ASTCR)
ASTCR designates each area in the external address space as either 2-state access space or 3-state
access space and enables/disables wait cycle insertion.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
AST7
AST6
AST5
AST4
AST3
AST2
AST1
AST0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name








Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15
AST7
1
R/W
Area 7 to 0 Access State Control
14
AST6
1
R/W
13
AST5
1
R/W
12
AST4
1
R/W
These bits select whether the corresponding area is to be
designated as 2-state access space or 3-state access
space. Wait cycle insertion is enabled or disabled at the
same time.
11
AST3
1
R/W
0: Area n is designated as 2-state access space
10
AST2
1
R/W
9
AST1
1
R/W
8
AST0
1
R/W
Wait cycle insertion in area n access is disabled
1: Area n is designated as 3-state access space
Wait cycle insertion in area n access is enabled
(n = 7 to 0)
7 to 0

All 0
R
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 130 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.2.3
Wait Control Registers A and B (WTCRA, WTCRB)
WTCRA and WTCRB select the number of program wait cycles for each area in the external
address space.
• WTCRA
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Bit Name

W72
W71
W70

W62
W61
W60
Initial Value
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name

W52
W51
W50

W42
W41
W40
Initial Value
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Bit Name

W32
W31
W30

W22
W21
W20
Initial Value
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name

W12
W11
W10

W02
W01
W00
• WTCRB
Initial Value
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 131 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
• WTCRA
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15

0
R
Reserved
14
W72
1
R/W
Area 7 Wait Control 2 to 0
13
W71
1
R/W
12
W70
1
R/W
These bits select the number of program wait cycles
when accessing area 7 while bit AST7 in ASTCR is 1.
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
000: Program wait cycle not inserted
001: 1 program wait cycle inserted
010: 2 program wait cycles inserted
011: 3 program wait cycles inserted
100: 4 program wait cycles inserted
101: 5 program wait cycles inserted
110: 6 program wait cycles inserted
111: 7 program wait cycles inserted
11

0
R
10
W62
1
R/W
Area 6 Wait Control 2 to 0
9
W61
1
R/W
8
W60
1
R/W
These bits select the number of program wait cycles
when accessing area 6 while bit AST6 in ASTCR is 1.
Reserved
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
000: Program wait cycle not inserted
001: 1 program wait cycle inserted
010: 2 program wait cycles inserted
011: 3 program wait cycles inserted
100: 4 program wait cycles inserted
101: 5 program wait cycles inserted
110: 6 program wait cycles inserted
111: 7 program wait cycles inserted
7

0
R
Reserved
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 132 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
6
W52
1
R/W
Area 5 Wait Control 2 to 0
5
W51
1
R/W
4
W50
1
R/W
These bits select the number of program wait cycles
when accessing area 5 while bit AST5 in ASTCR is 1.
000: Program cycle wait not inserted
001: 1 program wait cycle inserted
010: 2 program wait cycles inserted
011: 3 program wait cycles inserted
100: 4 program wait cycles inserted
101: 5 program wait cycles inserted
110: 6 program wait cycles inserted
111: 7 program wait cycles inserted
3

0
R
Reserved
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
2
W42
1
R/W
Area 4 Wait Control 2 to 0
1
W41
1
R/W
0
W40
1
R/W
These bits select the number of program wait cycles
when accessing area 4 while bit AST4 in ASTCR is 1.
000: Program wait cycle not inserted
001: 1 program wait cycle inserted
010: 2 program wait cycles inserted
011: 3 program wait cycles inserted
100: 4 program wait cycles inserted
101: 5 program wait cycles inserted
110: 6 program wait cycles inserted
111: 7 program wait cycles inserted
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 133 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
• WTCRB
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15

0
R
Reserved
14
W32
1
R/W
Area 3 Wait Control 2 to 0
13
W31
1
R/W
12
W30
1
R/W
These bits select the number of program wait cycles
when accessing area 3 while bit AST3 in ASTCR is 1.
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
000: Program wait cycle not inserted
001: 1 program wait cycle inserted
010: 2 program wait cycles inserted
011: 3 program wait cycles inserted
100: 4 program wait cycles inserted
101: 5 program wait cycles inserted
110: 6 program wait cycles inserted
111: 7 program wait cycles inserted
11

0
R
10
W22
1
R/W
Area 2 Wait Control 2 to 0
9
W21
1
R/W
8
W20
1
R/W
These bits select the number of program wait cycles
when accessing area 2 while bit AST2 in ASTCR is 1.
Reserved
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
000: Program wait cycle not inserted
001: 1 program wait cycle inserted
010: 2 program wait cycles inserted
011: 3 program wait cycles inserted
100: 4 program wait cycles inserted
101: 5 program wait cycles inserted
110: 6 program wait cycles inserted
111: 7 program wait cycles inserted
7

0
R
Reserved
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 134 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
6
W12
1
R/W
Area 1 Wait Control 2 to 0
5
W11
1
R/W
4
W10
1
R/W
These bits select the number of program wait cycles
when accessing area 1 while bit AST1 in ASTCR is 1.
000: Program wait cycle not inserted
001: 1 program wait cycle inserted
010: 2 program wait cycles inserted
011: 3 program wait cycles inserted
100: 4 program wait cycles inserted
101: 5 program wait cycles inserted
110: 6 program wait cycles inserted
111: 7 program wait cycles inserted
3

0
R
Reserved
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
2
W02
1
R/W
Area 0 Wait Control 2 to 0
1
W01
1
R/W
0
W00
1
R/W
These bits select the number of program wait cycles
when accessing area 0 while bit AST0 in ASTCR is 1.
000: Program wait cycle not inserted
001: 1 program wait cycle inserted
010: 2 program wait cycles inserted
011: 3 program wait cycles inserted
100: 4 program wait cycles inserted
101: 5 program wait cycles inserted
110: 6 program wait cycles inserted
111: 7 program wait cycles inserted
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 135 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.2.4
Read Strobe Timing Control Register (RDNCR)
RDNCR selects the negation timing of the read strobe signal (RD) when reading the external
address spaces specified as a basic bus interface or the address/data multiplexed I/O interface.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
RDN7
RDN6
RDN5
RDN4
RDN3
RDN2
RDN1
RDN0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name








Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15
RDN7
0
R/W
Read Strobe Timing Control
14
RDN6
0
R/W
13
RDN5
0
R/W
RDN7 to RDN0 set the negation timing of the read
strobe in a corresponding area read access.
12
RDN4
0
R/W
11
RDN3
0
R/W
10
RDN2
0
R/W
9
RDN1
0
R/W
8
RDN0
0
R/W
As shown in figure 6.2, the read strobe for an area for
which the RDNn bit is set to 1 is negated one halfcycle earlier than that for an area for which the RDNn
bit is cleared to 0. The read data setup and hold time
are also given one half-cycle earlier.
0: In an area n read access, the RD signal is negated
at the end of the read cycle
1: In an area n read access, the RD signal is negated
one half-cycle before the end of the read cycle
(n = 7 to 0)
7 to 0

All 0
R
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
Notes: 1. In an external address space which is specified as byte control SRAM interface, the
RDNCR setting is ignored and the same operation when RDNn = 1 is performed.
2. In an external address space which is specified as burst ROM interface, the RDNCR
setting is ignored during CPU read accesses and the same operation when RDNn = 0 is
performed.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 136 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
Bφ
RD
RDNn = 0
Data
RD
RDNn = 1
Data
(n = 7 to 0)
Figure 6.2 Read Strobe Negation Timing (Example of 3-State Access Space)
6.2.5
CS Assertion Period Control Registers (CSACR)
CSACR selects whether or not the assertion periods of the chip select signals (CSn) and address
signals for the basic bus, byte-control SRAM, burst ROM, and address/data multiplexed I/O
interface are to be extended. Extending the assertion period of the CSn and address signals allows
the setup time and hold time of read strobe (RD) and write strobe (LHWR/LLWR) to be assured
and to make the write data setup time and hold time for the write strobe become flexible.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
CSXH7
CSXH6
CSXH5
CSXH4
CSXH3
CSXH2
CSXH1
CSXH0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CSXT7
CSXT6
CSXT5
CSXT4
CSXT3
CSXT2
CSXT1
CSXT0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 137 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15
CSXH7
0
R/W
CS and Address Signal Assertion Period Control 1
14
CSXH6
0
R/W
13
CSXH5
0
R/W
12
CSXH4
0
R/W
11
CSXH3
0
R/W
These bits specify whether or not the Th cycle is to be
inserted (see figure 6.3). When an area for which bit
CSXHn is set to 1 is accessed, one Th cycle, in which
the CSn and address signals are asserted, is inserted
before the normal access cycle.
10
CSXH2
0
R/W
9
CSXH1
0
R/W
8
CSXH0
0
R/W
7
CSXT7
0
R/W
CS and Address Signal Assertion Period Control 2
6
CSXT6
0
R/W
5
CSXT5
0
R/W
4
CSXT4
0
R/W
3
CSXT3
0
R/W
These bits specify whether or not the Tt cycle is to be
inserted (see figure 6.3). When an area for which bit
CSXTn is set to 1 is accessed, one Tt cycle, in which
the CSn and address signals are retained, is inserted
after the normal access cycle.
2
CSXT2
0
R/W
1
CSXT1
0
R/W
0
CSXT0
0
R/W
0: In access to area n, the CSn and address assertion
period (Th) is not extended
1: In access to area n, the CSn and address assertion
period (Th) is extended
(n = 7 to 0)
0: In access to area n, the CSn and address assertion
period (Tt) is not extended
1: In access to area n, the CSn and address assertion
period (Tt) is extended
(n = 7 to 0)
Note:
*
In burst ROM interface, the CSXTn settings are ignored during CPU read accesses.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 138 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bus cycle
Th
T1
T2
T3
Tt
Bφ
Address
CSn
AS
BS
RD/WR
RD
Read
Read data
Data bus
LHWR, LLWR
Write
Data bus
Write data
Figure 6.3 CS and Address Assertion Period Extension
(Example of Basic Bus Interface, 3-State Access Space, and RDNn = 0)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 139 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.2.6
Idle Control Register (IDLCR)
IDLCR specifies the idle cycle insertion conditions and the number of idle cycles.
Bit
Bit Name
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
IDLS3
IDLS2
IDLS1
IDLS0
IDLCB1
IDLCB0
IDLCA1
IDLCA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IDLSEL7
IDLSEL6
IDLSEL5
IDLSEL4
IDLSEL3
IDLSEL2
IDLSEL1
IDLSEL0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15
IDLS3
1
R/W
Idle Cycle Insertion 3
Inserts an idle cycle between the bus cycles when the
DMAC single address transfer (write cycle) is followed
by external access.
0: No idle cycle is inserted
1: An idle cycle is inserted
14
IDLS2
1
R/W
Idle Cycle Insertion 2
Inserts an idle cycle between the bus cycles when the
external write cycle is followed by external read cycle.
0: No idle cycle is inserted
1: An idle cycle is inserted
13
IDLS1
1
R/W
Idle Cycle Insertion 1
Inserts an idle cycle between the bus cycles when the
external read cycles of different areas continue.
0: No idle cycle is inserted
1: An idle cycle is inserted
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 140 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
12
IDLS0
1
R/W
Idle Cycle Insertion 0
Inserts an idle cycle between the bus cycles when the
external read cycle is followed by external write cycle.
0: No idle cycle is inserted
1: An idle cycle is inserted
11
IDLCB1
1
R/W
Idle Cycle State Number Select B
10
IDLCB0
1
R/W
Specifies the number of idle cycles to be inserted for
the idle condition specified by IDLS1 and IDLS0.
00: No idle cycle is inserted
01: 2 idle cycles are inserted
00: 3 idle cycles are inserted
01: 4 idle cycles are inserted
9
IDLCA1
1
R/W
Idle Cycle State Number Select A
8
IDLCA0
1
R/W
Specifies the number of idle cycles to be inserted for
the idle condition specified by IDLS3 to IDLS0.
00: 1 idle cycle is inserted
01: 2 idle cycles are inserted
10: 3 idle cycles are inserted
11: 4 idle cycles are inserted
7
IDLSEL7
0
R/W
Idle Cycle Number Select
6
IDLSEL6
0
R/W
5
IDLSEL5
0
R/W
4
IDLSEL4
0
R/W
Specifies the number of idle cycles to be inserted for
each area for the idle insertion condition specified by
IDLS1 and IDLS0.
3
IDLSEL3
0
R/W
2
IDLSEL2
0
R/W
1
IDLSEL1
0
R/W
1: Number of idle cycles to be inserted for area n is
specified by IDLCB1 and IDLCB0.
0
IDLSEL0
0
R/W
(n = 7 to 0)
0: Number of idle cycles to be inserted for area n is
specified by IDLCA1 and IDLCA0.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 141 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.2.7
Bus Control Register 1 (BCR1)
BCR1 is used for selection of the external bus released state protocol, enabling/disabling of the
write data buffer function, and enabling/disabling of the WAIT pin input.
Bit
Bit Name
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BRLE
BREQOE




WDBE
WAITE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DKC







0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15
BRLE
0
R/W
External Bus Release Enable
Enables/disables external bus release.
0: External bus release disabled
BREQ, BACK, and BREQO pins can be used as I/O
ports
1: External bus release enabled*
For details, see section 9, I/O Ports.
14
BREQOE
0
R/W
BREQO Pin Enable
Controls outputting the bus request signal (BREQO) to
the external bus master in the external bus released
state when an internal bus master performs an
external address space access.
0: BREQO output disabled
BREQO pin can be used as I/O port
1: BREQO output enabled
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 142 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
13, 12

All 0
R
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
11, 10

All 0
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
9
WDBE
0
R/W
Write Data Buffer Enable
The write data buffer function can be used for an
external write cycle and a DMAC single address
transfer cycle.
The changed setting may not affect an external access
immediately after the change.
0: Write data buffer function not used
1: Write data buffer function used
8
WAITE
0
R/W
WAIT Pin Enable
Selects enabling/disabling of wait input by the WAIT
pin.
0: Wait input by WAIT pin disabled
WAIT pin can be used as I/O port
1: Wait input by WAIT pin enabled
For details, see section 9, I/O Ports.
7
DKC
0
R/W
DACK Control
Selects the timing of DMAC transfer acknowledge
signal assertion.
0: DACK signal is asserted at the Bφ falling edge
1: DACK signal is asserted at the Bφ rising edge
6

0
R/W
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
5 to 0

All 0
R
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
Note: When external bus release is enabled or input by the WAIT pin is enabled, make sure to set
the ICR bit to 1. For details, see section 9, I/O Ports.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 143 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.2.8
Bus Control Register 2 (BCR2)
BCR2 is used for bus arbitration control of the CPU, DMAC, and DTC, and enabling/disabling of
the write data buffer function to the peripheral modules.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name



IBCCS



PWDBE
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7, 6

All 0
R
Description
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
5

0
R/W
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
4
IBCCS
0
R/W
Internal Bus Cycle Control Select
Selects the internal bus arbiter function.
0: Releases the bus mastership according to the priority
1: Executes the bus cycles alternatively when a CPU
bus mastership request conflicts with a DMAC or
DTC bus mastership request
3, 2

All 0
R
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
1

1
R/W
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1. The write value should
always be 1.
0
PWDBE
0
R/W
Peripheral Module Write Data Buffer Enable
Specifies whether or not to use the write data buffer
function for the peripheral module write cycles.
0: Write data buffer function not used
1: Write data buffer function used
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 144 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.2.9
Endian Control Register (ENDIANCR)
ENDIANCR selects the endian format for each area of the external address space. Though the data
format of this LSI is big endian, data can be transferred in the little endian format during external
address space access.
Note that the data format for the areas used as a program area or a stack area should be big endian.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LE7
LE6
LE5
LE4
LE3
LE2


0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
LE7
0
R/W
Little Endian Select
6
LE6
0
R/W
Selects the endian for the corresponding area.
5
LE5
0
R/W
0: Data format of area n is specified as big endian
4
LE4
0
R/W
1: Data format of area n is specified as little endian
3
LE3
0
R/W
(n = 7 to 2)
2
LE2
0
R/W
1, 0

All 0
R
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 145 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.2.10
SRAM Mode Control Register (SRAMCR)
SRAMCR specifies the bus interface of each area in the external address space as a basic bus
interface or a byte control SRAM interface.
In areas specified as 8-bit access space by ABWCR, the SRAMCR setting is ignored and the byte
control SRAM interface cannot be specified.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BCSEL7
BCSEL6
BCSEL5
BCSEL4
BCSEL3
BCSEL2
BCSEL1
BCSEL0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name








Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15
BCSEL7
0
R/W
Byte Control SRAM Interface Select
14
BCSEL6
0
R/W
Selects the bus interface for the corresponding area.
13
BCSEL5
0
R/W
12
BCSEL4
0
R/W
When setting a bit to 1, the bus interface select bits in
BROMCR and MPXCR must be cleared to 0.
11
BCSEL3
0
R/W
0: Area n is basic bus interface
10
BCSEL2
0
R/W
1: Area n is byte control SRAM interface
9
BCSEL1
0
R/W
(n = 7 to 0)
8
BCSEL0
0
R/W
7 to 0

All 0
R
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 146 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.2.11
Burst ROM Interface Control Register (BROMCR)
BROMCR specifies the burst ROM interface.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BSRM0
BSTS02
BSTS01
BSTS00


BSWD01
BSWD00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BSRM1
BSTS12
BSTS11
BSTS10


BSWD11
BSWD10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15
BSRM0
0
R/W
Area 0 Burst ROM Interface Select
Specifies the area 0 bus interface. To set this bit to 1,
clear bit BCSEL0 in SRAMCR to 0.
0: Basic bus interface or byte-control SRAM interface
1: Burst ROM interface
14
BSTS02
0
R/W
Area 0 Burst Cycle Select
13
BSTS01
0
R/W
Specifies the number of burst cycles of area 0
12
BSTS00
0
R/W
000: 1 cycle
001: 2 cycles
010: 3 cycles
011: 4 cycles
100: 5 cycles
101: 6 cycles
110: 7 cycles
111: 8 cycles
11, 10

All 0
R
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 147 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
9
BSWD01
0
R/W
Area 0 Burst Word Number Select
8
BSWD00
0
R/W
Selects the number of words in burst access to the area
0 burst ROM interface
00: Up to 4 words (8 bytes)
01: Up to 8 words (16 bytes)
10: Up to 16 words (32 bytes)
11: Up to 32 words (64 bytes)
7
BSRM1
0
R/W
Area 1 Burst ROM Interface Select
Specifies the area 1 bus interface as a basic interface
or a burst ROM interface. To set this bit to 1, clear bit
BCSEL1 in SRAMCR to 0.
0: Basic bus interface or byte-control SRAM interface
1: Burst ROM interface
6
BSTS12
0
R/W
Area 1 Burst Cycle Select
5
BSTS11
0
R/W
Specifies the number of cycles of area 1 burst cycle
4
BSTS10
0
R/W
000: 1 cycle
001: 2 cycles
010: 3 cycles
011: 4 cycles
100: 5 cycles
101: 6 cycles
110: 7 cycles
111: 8 cycles
3, 2

All 0
R
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
1
BSWD11
0
R/W
Area 1 Burst Word Number Select
0
BSWD10
0
R/W
Selects the number of words in burst access to the area
1 burst ROM interface
00: Up to 4 words (8 bytes)
01: Up to 8 words (16 bytes)
10: Up to 16 words (32 bytes)
11: Up to 32 words (64 bytes)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 148 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.2.12
Address/Data Multiplexed I/O Control Register (MPXCR)
MPXCR specifies the address/data multiplexed I/O interface.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
MPXE7
MPXE6
MPXE5
MPXE4
MPXE3



0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name







ADDEX
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15
MPXE7
0
R/W
Address/Data Multiplexed I/O Interface Select
14
MPXE6
0
R/W
Specifies the bus interface for the corresponding area.
13
MPXE5
0
R/W
12
MPXE4
0
R/W
To set this bit to 1, clear the BCSELn bit in SRAMCR to
0.
11
MPXE3
0
R/W
0: Area n is specified as a basic interface or a byte
control SRAM interface.
1: Area n is specified as an address/data multiplexed
I/O interface
(n = 7 to 3)
10 to 1 
All 0
R
0
0
R/W
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
ADDEX
Address Output Cycle Extension
Specifies whether a wait cycle is inserted for the
address output cycle of address/data multiplexed I/O
interface.
0: No wait cycle is inserted for the address output cycle
1: One wait cycle is inserted for the address output
cycle
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 149 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.3
Bus Configuration
Figure 6.4 shows the internal bus configuration of this LSI. The internal bus of this LSI consists of
the following three types.
• Internal system bus
A bus that connects the CPU, DTC, DMAC, on-chip RAM, on-chip ROM, internal peripheral
bus, and external access bus.
• Internal peripheral bus
A bus that accesses registers in the bus controller, interrupt controller, and DMAC, and
registers of peripheral modules such as SCI and timer.
• External access cycle
A bus that accesses external devices via the external bus interface.
Iφ
synchronization
CPU
DTC
On-chip
RAM
On-chip
ROM
Internal system bus
Write data
buffer
Bus controller,
interrupt controller,
power-down controller
Internal peripheral bus
Pφ
synchronization
DMAC
Write data
buffer
External access bus
Bφ
synchronization
Peripheral
functions
External bus
interface
Figure 6.4 Internal Bus Configuration
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 150 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.4
Multi-Clock Function and Number of Access Cycles
The internal functions of this LSI operate synchronously with the system clock (Iφ), the peripheral
module clock (Pφ), or the external bus clock (Bφ). Table 6.1 shows the synchronization clock and
their corresponding functions.
Table 6.1
Synchronization Clocks and Their Corresponding Functions
Synchronization Clock
Function Name
Iφ
MCU operating mode
Interrupt controller
Bus controller
CPU
DTC
DMAC
Internal memory
Clock pulse generator
Power down control
Pφ
I/O ports
TPU
PPG
TMR
WDT
SCI
A/D
D/A
IIC2
USB
Bφ
External bus interface
The frequency of each synchronization clock (Iφ, Pφ, and Bφ) is specified by the system clock
control register (SCKCR) independently. For further details, see section 21, Clock Pulse
Generator.
There will be cases when Pφ and Bφ are equal to Iφ and when Pφ and Bφ are different from Iφ
according to the SCKCR specifications. In any case, access cycles for internal peripheral functions
and external space is performed synchronously with Pφ and Bφ, respectively.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 151 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
For example, in an external address space access where the frequency rate of Iφ and Bφ is n : 1,
the operation is performed in synchronization with Bφ. In this case, external 2-state access space is
2n cycles and external 3-state access space is 3n cycles (no wait cycles is inserted) if the number
of access cycles is counted based on Iφ.
If the frequencies of Iφ, Pφ and Bφ are different, the start of bus cycle may not synchronize with
Pφ or Bφ according to the bus cycle initiation timing. In this case, clock synchronization cycle
(Tsy) is inserted at the beginning of each bus cycle.
For example, if an external address space access occurs when the frequency rate of Iφ and Bφ is
n : 1, 0 to n-1 cycles of Tsy may be inserted. If an internal peripheral module access occurs when
the frequency rate of Iφ and Pφ is m : 1, 0 to m-1 cycles of Tsy may be inserted.
Figure 6.5 shows the external 2-state access timing when the frequency rate of Iφ and Bφ is 4 : 1.
Figure 6.6 shows the external 3-state access timing when the frequency rate of Iφ and Bφ is 2 : 1.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 152 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Divided clock
synchronization
cycle
Tsy
T1
T2
Iφ
Bφ
Address
CSn
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
LHWR
LLWR
Write
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
BS
RD/WR
Figure 6.5 System Clock: External Bus Clock = 4:1, External 2-State Access
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 153 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Divided clock
synchronization
cycle
Tsy
T1
T2
T3
Iφ
Bφ
Address
CSn
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
LHWR
LLWR
Write
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
BS
RD/WR
Figure 6.6 System Clock: External Bus Clock = 2:1, External 3-State Access
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 154 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.5
External Bus
6.5.1
Input/Output Pins
Table 6.2 shows the pin configuration of the bus controller and table 6.3 shows the pin functions
on each interface.
Table 6.2
Pin Configuration
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Bus cycle start
BS
Output
Signal indicating that the bus cycle has started
Address strobe/
address hold
AS/AH
Output
•
Strobe signal indicating that the basic bus, byte
control SRAM, or burst ROM space is accessed
and address output on address bus is enabled
•
Signal to hold the address during access to the
address/data multiplexed I/O interface
Read strobe
RD
Output
Strobe signal indicating that the basic bus, byte
control SRAM, burst ROM, or address/data
multiplexed I/O space is being read
Read/write
RD/WR
Output
•
Signal indicating the input or output direction
•
Write enable signal of the SRAM during access
to the byte control SRAM space
•
Strobe signal indicating that the basic bus, burst
ROM, or address/data multiplexed I/O space is
written to, and the upper byte (D15 to D8) of
data bus is enabled
•
Strobe signal indicating that the byte control
SRAM space is accessed, and the upper byte
(D15 to D8) of data bus is enabled
•
Strobe signal indicating that the basic bus, burst
ROM, or address/data multiplexed I/O space is
written to, and the lower byte (D7 to D0) of data
bus is enabled
•
Strobe signal indicating that the byte control
SRAM space is accessed, and the lower byte
(D7 to D0) of data bus is enabled
Low-high write/
lower-upper byte
select
Low-low write/
lower-lower byte
select
LHWR/LUB Output
LLWR/LLB
Output
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 155 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Chip select 0
CS0
Output
Strobe signal indicating that area 0 is selected
Chip select 1
CS1
Output
Strobe signal indicating that area 1 is selected
Chip select 2
CS2
Output
Strobe signal indicating that area 2 is selected
Chip select 3
CS3
Output
Strobe signal indicating that area 3 is selected
Chip select 4
CS4
Output
Strobe signal indicating that area 4 is selected
Chip select 5
CS5
Output
Strobe signal indicating that area 5 is selected
Chip select 6
CS6
Output
Strobe signal indicating that area 6 is selected
Chip select 7
CS7
Output
Strobe signal indicating that area 7 is selected
Wait
WAIT
Input
Wait request signal when accessing external
address space.
Bus request
BREQ
Input
Request signal for release of bus to external bus
master
Bus request
acknowledge
BACK
Output
Acknowledge signal indicating that bus has been
released to external bus master
Bus request output
BREQO
Output
External bus request signal used when internal bus
master accesses external address space in the
external-bus released state
Data transfer
acknowledge 3
(DMAC_3)
DACK3
Output
Data transfer acknowledge signal for DMAC_3
single address transfer
Data transfer
acknowledge 2
(DMAC_2)
DACK2
Output
Data transfer acknowledge signal for DMAC_2
single address transfer
Data transfer
acknowledge 1
(DMAC_1)
DACK1
Output
Data transfer acknowledge signal for DMAC_1
single address transfer
Data transfer
acknowledge 0
(DMAC_0)
DACK0
Output
Data transfer acknowledge signal for DMAC_0
single address transfer
External bus clock
Bφ
Output
External bus clock
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 156 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Table 6.3
Pin Functions in Each Interface
Initial State
Basic Bus
Byte
Control
SRAM
16
16
Address/Data
Burst
ROM
Multiplexed
I/O
Single-
8
16
8
O
O
O
O
O
O
O


O
O
O
O


O
O




O
O
O


O
O

O
O
O


O
O


O
O
O


O
O



O
O
O


O
O
CS7



O
O
O


O
O
BS



O
O
O
O
O
O
O
RD/WR



O
O
O
O
O
O
O
AS
Output Output 
O
O
O
O
O


AH







O
O
RD
Output Output 
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
LHWR/LUB
Output Output 
O

O
O

O

LLWR/LLB
Output Output 
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
WAIT

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
8
8
Pin Name
16
Bφ
Output Output 
O
O
O
CS0
Output Output 
O
O
CS1



O
CS2



O
CS3



CS4


CS5

CS6


Chip

16
Remarks
Controlled by
WAITE
[Legend]
O: Used as a bus control signal
: Not used as a bus control signal (used as a port input when initialized)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 157 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.5.2
Area Division
The bus controller divides the 16-Mbyte address space into eight areas, and performs bus control
for the external address space in area units. Chip select signals (CS0 to CS7) can be output for
each area.
Figure 6.7 shows an area division of the 16-Mbyte address space. For details on address map, see
section 3, MCU Operating Mode.
H'000000
Area 0
(2 Mbytes)
H'1FFFFF
H'200000
Area 1
(2 Mbytes)
H'3FFFFF
H'400000
Area 2
(8 Mbytes)
H'BFFFFF
H'C00000
Area 3
(2 Mbytes)
H'DFFFFF
H'E00000
Area 4
(1 Mbyte)
H'EFFFFF
H'F00000
Area 5
(1 Mbyte − 8 kbytes)
H'FFDFFF
H'FFE000
Area 6
H'FFFEFF (8 kbytes − 256 bytes)
H'FFFF00
Area 7
H'FFFFFF
(256 bytes)
16-Mbyte space
Figure 6.7 Address Space Area Division
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 158 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.5.3
Chip Select Signals
This LSI can output chip select signals (CS0 to CS7) for areas 0 to 7. The signal outputs low when
the corresponding external address space area is accessed. Figure 6.8 shows an example of CSn (n
= 0 to 7) signal output timing.
Enabling or disabling of CSn signal output is set by the port function control register (PFCR). For
details, see section 9.3, Port Function Controller.
In on-chip ROM disabled extended mode, pin CS0 is placed in the output state after a reset. Pins
CS1 to CS7 are placed in the input state after a reset and so the corresponding PFCR bits should
be set to 1 when outputting signals CS1 to CS7.
In on-chip ROM enabled extended mode, pins CS0 to CS7 are all placed in the input state after a
reset and so the corresponding PFCR bits should be set to 1 when outputting signals CS0 to CS7.
The PFCR can specify multiple CS outputs for a pin. If multiple CSn outputs are specified for a
single pin by the PFCR, CS to be output are generated by mixing all the CS signals. In this case,
the settings for the external bus interface areas in which the CSn signals are output to a single pin
should be the same.
Figure 6.9 shows the signal output timing when the CS signals to be output to areas 5 and 6 are
output to the same pin.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
Bφ
Address bus
External address of area n
CSn
Figure 6.8 CSn Signal Output Timing (n = 0 to 7)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 159 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Area 5 access
Area 6 access
Area 5 access
Area 6 access
Bφ
CS5
CS6
Output waveform
Address bus
Figure 6.9 Timing When CS Signal is Output to the Same Pin
6.5.4
External Bus Interface
The type of the external bus interfaces, bus width, endian format, number of access cycles, and
strobe assert/negate timings can be set for each area in the external address space. The bus width
and the number of access cycles for both on-chip memory and internal I/O registers are fixed, and
are not affected by the external bus settings.
(1)
Type of External Bus Interface
Four types of external bus interfaces are provided and can be selected in area units. Table 6.4
shows each interface name, description, area name to be set for each interface. Table 6.5 shows the
areas that can be specified for each interface. The initial state of each area is a basic bus interface.
Table 6.4
Interface Names and Area Names
Interface
Description
Area Name
Basic interface
Directly connected to ROM and
RAM
Basic bus space
Byte control SRAM interface
Directly connected to byte
SRAM with byte control pin
Byte control SRAM space
Burst ROM interface
Directly connected to the ROM
that allows page access
Burst ROM space
Address/data multiplexed I/O
interface
Directly connected to the
peripheral LSI that requires
address and data multiplexing
Address/data multiplexed I/O
space
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 160 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Table 6.5
Areas Specifiable for Each Interface
Interface
Related
Registers
Basic interface
SRAMCR
Byte control SRAM interface
Areas
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Burst ROM interface
BROMCR
O
O






Address/data multiplexed I/O
interface
MPXCR



O
O
O
O
O
(2)
Bus Width
A bus width of 8 or 16 bits can be selected with ABWCR. An area for which an 8-bit bus is
selected functions as an 8-bit access space and an area for which a 16-bit bus is selected functions
as a 16-bit access space. In addition, the bus width of address/data multiplexed I/O space is 8 bits
or 16 bits, and the bus width for the byte control SRAM space is 16 bits.
The initial state of the bus width is specified by the operating mode.
If all areas are designated as 8-bit access space, 8-bit bus mode is set; if any area is designated as
16-bit access space, 16-bit bus mode is set.
(3)
Endian Format
Though the endian format of this LSI is big endian, data can be converted into little endian format
when reading or writing to the external address space.
Areas 7 to 2 can be specified as either big endian or little endian format by the LE7 to LE2 bits in
ENDIANCR.
The initial state of each area is the big endian format.
Note that the data format for the areas used as a program area or a stack area should be big endian.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 161 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(4)
Number of Access Cycles
(a)
Basic Bus Interface
The number of access cycles in the basic bus interface can be specified as two or three cycles by
the ASTCR. An area specified as 2-state access is specified as 2-state access space; an area
specified as 3-state access is specified as 3-state access space.
For the 2-state access space, a wait cycle insertion is disabled. For the 3-state access space, a
program wait (0 to 7 cycles) specified by WTCRA and WTCRB or an external wait by WAIT can
be inserted.
Number of access cycles in the basic bus interface
= number of basic cycles (2, 3) + number of program wait cycles (0 to 7)
+ number of CS extension cycles (0, 1, 2)
[+ number of external wait cycles by the WAIT pin]
Assertion period of the chip select signal can be extended by CSACR.
(b)
Byte Control SRAM Interface
The number of access cycles in the byte control SRAM interface is the same as that in the basic
bus interface.
Number of access cycles in byte control SRAM interface
= number of basic cycles (2, 3) + number of program wait cycles (0 to 7)
+ number of CS extension cycles (0, 1, 2)
[+ number of external wait cycles by the WAIT pin]
(c)
Burst ROM Interface
The number of access cycles at full access in the burst ROM interface is the same as that in the
basic bus interface. The number of access cycles in the burst access can be specified as one to
eight cycles by the BSTS bit in BROMCR.
Number of access cycles in the burst ROM interface
= number of basic cycles (2, 3) + number of program wait cycles (0 to 7)
+ number of CS extension cycles (0, 1)
[+number of external wait cycles by the WAIT pin]
+ number of burst access cycles (1 to 8) × number of burst accesses (0 to 63)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 162 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(d)
Address/data multiplexed I/O interface
The number of access cycles in data cycle of the address/data multiplexed I/O interface is the
same as that in the basic bus interface. The number of access cycles in address cycle can be
specified as two or three cycles by the ADDEX bit in MPXCR.
Number of access cycles in the address/data multiplexed I/O interface
= number of address output cycles (2, 3) + number of data output cycles (2, 3)
+ number of program wait cycles (0 to 7)
+ number of CS extension cycles (0, 1, 2)
[+number of external wait cycles by the WAIT pin]
Table 6.6 lists the number of access cycles for each interface.
Table 6.6
Number of Access Cycles
Basic bus interface
=
=
Byte control SRAM interface
=
=
Burst ROM interface
=
=
Address/data multiplexed I/O
interface
= Tma
[2,3]
= Tma
[2,3]
Th
[0,1]
Th
[0,1]
Th
[0,1]
Th
[0,1]
Th
[0,1]
Th
[0,1]
+Th
[0,1]
+Th
[0,1]
+T1
[1]
+T1
[1]
+T1
[1]
+T1
[1]
+T1
[1]
+T1
[1]
+T1
[1]
+T1
[1]
+T2
[1]
+T2
[1]
+T2
[1]
+T2
[1]
+T2
[1]
+T2
[1]
+T2
[1]
+T2
[1]
+Tpw
+Ttw
[0 to 7] [n]
+T3
[1]
+Tpw
+Ttw
[0 to 7] [n]
+T3
[1]
+Tpw
+Ttw
[0 to 7] [n]
+Tpw
+Ttw
[0 to 7] [n]
+Tt
[0,1]
+Tt
[0,1]
+Tt
[0,1]
+Tt
[0,1]
[3 to 12 + n]
[2 to 4]
[3 to 12 + n]
+Tb
[(1 to 8) × m]
+Tb
[(1 to 8) × m]
+T3
[1]
+T3
[1]
[2 to 4]
+Tt
[0,1]
+Tt
[0,1]
[(2 to 3) + (1 to 8) × m]
[(2 to 11 + n) + (1 to 8) × m]
[4 to 7]
[5 to 15 + n]
[Legend]
Numbers: Number of access cycles
n:
Pin wait (0 to ∞)
m:
Number of burst accesses (0 to 63)
(5)
Strobe Assert/Negate Timings
The assert and negate timings of the strobe signals can be modified as well as number of access
cycles.
• Read strobe (RD) in the basic bus interface
• Chip select assertion period extension cycles in the basic bus interface
• Data transfer acknowledge (DACK3 to DACK0) output for DMAC single address transfers
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 163 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.5.5
(1)
Area and External Bus Interface
Area 0
Area 0 includes on-chip ROM. All of area 0 is used as external address space in on-chip ROM
disabled extended mode, and the space excluding on-chip ROM is external address space in onchip ROM enabled extended mode.
When area 0 external address space is accessed, the CS0 signal can be output.
Either of the basic bus interface, byte control SRAM interface, or burst ROM interface can be
selected for area 0 by bit BSRM0 in BROMCR and bit BCSEL0 in SRAMCR. Table 6.7 shows
the external interface of area 0.
Table 6.7
Area 0 External Interface
Register Setting
Interface
BSRM0 of BROMCR
BCSEL0 of SRAMCR
Basic bus interface
0
0
Byte control SRAM interface
0
1
Burst ROM interface
1
0
Setting prohibited
1
1
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 164 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(2)
Area 1
n externally extended mode, all of area 1 is external address space. In on-chip ROM enabled
extended mode, the space excluding on-chip ROM is external address space.
When area 1 external address space is accessed, the CS1 signal can be output.
Either of the basic bus interface, byte control SRAM, or burst ROM interface can be selected for
area 1 by bit BSRM1 in BROMCR and bit BCSEL1 in SRAMCR. Table 6.8 shows the external
interface of area 1.
Table 6.8
Area 1 External Interface
Register Setting
Interface
BSRM1 of BROMCR
BCSEL1 of SRAMCR
Basic bus interface
0
0
Byte control SRAM interface
0
1
Burst ROM interface
1
0
Setting prohibited
1
1
(3)
Area 2
In externally extended mode, all of area 2 is external address space.
When area 2 external address space is accessed, the CS2 signal can be output.
Either the basic bus interface or byte control SRAM interface can be selected for area 2 by bit
BCSEL2 in SRAMCR. Table 6.9 shows the external interface of area 2.
Table 6.9
Area 2 External Interface
Register Setting
Interface
BCSEL2 of SRAMCR
Basic bus interface
0
Byte control SRAM interface
1
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 165 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(4)
Area 3
In externally extended mode, all of area 3 is external address space.
When area 3 external address space is accessed, the CS3 signal can be output.
Either of the basic bus interface, byte control SRAM interface, or address/data multiplexed I/O
interface can be selected for area 3 by bit MPXE3 in MPXCR and bit BCSEL3 in SRAMCR.
Table 6.10 shows the external interface of area 3.
Table 6.10 Area 3 External Interface
Register Setting
Interface
MPXE3 of MPXCR
BCSEL3 of SRAMCR
Basic bus interface
0
0
Byte control SRAM interface
0
1
Address/data multiplexed I/O
interface
1
0
Setting prohibited
1
1
(5)
Area 4
In externally extended mode, all of area 4 is external address space.
When area 4 external address space is accessed, the CS4 signal can be output.
Either of the basic bus interface, byte control SRAM interface, or address/data multiplexed I/O
interface can be selected for area 4 by bit MPXE4 in MPXCR and bit BCSEL4 in SRAMCR.
Table 6.11 shows the external interface of area 4.
Table 6.11 Area 4 External Interface
Register Setting
Interface
MPXE4 of MPXCR
BCSEL4 of SRAMCR
Basic bus interface
0
0
Byte control SRAM interface
0
1
Address/data multiplexed I/O
interface
1
0
Setting prohibited
1
1
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 166 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(6)
Area 5
Area 5 includes the on-chip RAM and access prohibited spaces. In external extended mode, area
5, other than the on-chip RAM and access prohibited spaces, is external address space. Note that
the on-chip RAM is enabled when the RAME bit in SYSCR are set to 1. If the RAME bit in
SYSCR is cleared to 0, the on-chip RAM is disabled and the corresponding addresses are an
external address space. For details, see section 3, MCU Operating Modes.
When area 5 external address space is accessed, the CS5 signal can be output.
Either of the basic bus interface, byte control SRAM interface, or address/data multiplexed I/O
interface can be selected for area 5 by the MPXE5 bit in MPXCR and the BCSEL5 bit in
SRAMCR. Table 6.12 shows the external interface of area 5.
Table 6.12 Area 5 External Interface
Register Setting
Interface
MPXE5 of MPXCR
BCSEL5 of SRAMCR
Basic bus interface
0
0
Byte control SRAM interface
Address/data multiplexed I/O
interface
Setting prohibited
0
1
1
0
1
1
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 167 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(7)
Area 6
Area 6 includes internal I/O registers. In external extended mode, area 6 other than on-chip I/O
register area is external address space.
When area 6 external address space is accessed, the CS6 signal can be output.
Either of the basic bus interface, byte control SRAM interface, or address/data multiplexed I/O
interface can be selected for area 6 by the MPXE6 bit in MPXCR and the BCSEL6 bit in
SRAMCR. Table 6.13 shows the external interface of area 6.
Table 6.13 Area 6 External Interface
Register Setting
Interface
MPXE6 of MPXCR
BCSEL6 of SRAMCR
Basic bus interface
Byte control SRAM interface
Address/data multiplexed I/O
interface
Setting prohibited
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
(8)
Area 7
Area 7 includes internal I/O registers. In external extended mode, area 7 other than internal I/O
register area is external address space.
When area 7 external address space is accessed, the CS7 signal can be output.
Either of the basic bus interface, byte control SRAM interface, or address/data multiplexed I/O
interface can be selected for area 7 by the MPXE7 bit in MPXCR and the BCSEL7 bit in
SRAMCR. Table 6.14 shows the external interface of area 7.
Table 6.14 Area 7 External Interface
Register Setting
Interface
MPXE7 of MPXCR
BCSEL7 of SRAMCR
Basic bus interface
Byte control SRAM interface
Address/data multiplexed I/O
interface
Setting prohibited
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 168 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.5.6
Endian and Data Alignment
Data sizes for the CPU and other internal bus masters are byte, word, and longword. The bus
controller has a data alignment function, and controls whether the upper byte data bus (D15 to D8)
or lower data bus (D7 to D0) is used according to the bus specifications for the area being
accessed (8-bit access space or 16-bit access space), the data size, and endian format when
accessing external address space.
(1)
8-Bit Access Space
With the 8-bit access space, the lower byte data bus (D7 to D0) is always used for access. The
amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte: a word access is performed as two
byte accesses, and a longword access, as four byte accesses.
Figures 6.10 and 6.11 illustrate data alignment control for the 8-bit access space. Figure 6.10
shows the data alignment when the data endian format is specified as big endian. Figure 6.11
shows the data alignment when the data endian format is specified as little endian.
Strobe signal
LHWR/LUB
LLWR/LLB
RD
Data
Size
Access
Address
Byte
n
1
Word
n
2
Longword
n
Access
Count
4
Bus
Cycle
Data Size
D15
Data bus
D8 D7
D0
1st
Byte
7
0
1st
Byte
15
8
2nd
Byte
7
0
1st
Byte
31
24
2nd
Byte
23
16
3rd
Byte
15
8
4th
Byte
7
0
Figure 6.10 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control for 8-Bit Access Space (Big Endian)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 169 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Strobe signal
LHWR/LUB
LLWR/LLB
RD
Data
Size
Byte
Word
Longword
Access
Address
n
n
n
Data bus
D8 D7
Access
Count
Bus
Cycle
1
1st
Byte
7
0
1st
Byte
7
0
2nd
Byte
15
8
1st
Byte
7
0
2nd
Byte
15
8
3rd
Byte
23
16
4th
Byte
31
24
Data Size
D15
D0
2
4
Figure 6.11 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control for 8-Bit Access Space
(Little Endian)
(2)
16-Bit Access Space
With the 16-bit access space, the upper byte data bus (D15 to D8) and lower byte data bus (D7 to
D0) are used for accesses. The amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte or one
word.
Figures 6.12 and 6.13 illustrate data alignment control for the 16-bit access space. Figure 6.12
shows the data alignment when the data endian format is specified as big endian. Figure 6.13
shows the data alignment when the data endian format is specified as little endian.
In big endian, byte access for an even address is performed by using the upper byte data bus and
byte access for an odd address is performed by using the lower byte data bus.
In little endian, byte access for an even address is performed by using the lower byte data bus, and
byte access for an odd address is performed by using the third byte data bus.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 170 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Strobe signal
LHWR/LUB
LLWR/LLB
RD
Access
Size
Byte
Word
Longword
Access
Address
Even
(2n)
Odd
(2n+1)
Even
(2n)
Odd
(2n+1)
Even
(2n)
Odd
(2n+1)
Access
Count
Bus
Cycle
Data Size
1
1st
Byte
1
1st
Byte
1
1st
Word
2
2
3
D15
Data bus
D8 D7
D0
0
7
15
7
0
8 7
0
15
8
1st
Byte
2nd
Byte
7
0
1st
Word
31
24 23
16
2nd
Word
15
8 7
0
1st
Byte
31
24
2nd
Word
23
16 15
8
3rd
Byte
7
0
Figure 6.12 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control for 16-Bit Access Space (Big Endian)
Strobe signal
LHWR/LUB
LLWR/LLB
RD
Access
Size
Byte
Word
Access
Address
Even
(2n)
Odd
(2n+1)
Even
(2n)
Odd
(2n+1)
Longword
Even
(2n)
Odd
(2n+1)
Access
Count
Bus
Cycle
Data Size
1
1st
Byte
1
1st
1
1st
2
2
3
D15
Data bus
D8 D7
D0
7
0
Byte
7
0
Word
15
8 7
0
1st
Byte
7
2nd
Byte
1st
2nd
0
15
8
Word
15
8 7
0
Word
31
24 23
16
1st
Byte
7
2nd
Word
23
3rd
Byte
0
16 15
8
31
24
Figure 6.13 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control for 16-Bit Access Space
(Little Endian)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 171 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.6
Basic Bus Interface
The basic bus interface can be connected directly to the ROM and SRAM. The bus specifications
can be specified by the ABWCR, ASTCR, WTCRA, WTCRB, RDNCR, CSACR, and
ENDIANCR.
6.6.1
Data Bus
Data sizes for the CPU and other internal bus masters are byte, word, and longword. The bus
controller has a data alignment function, and controls whether the upper byte data bus (D15 to D8)
or lower byte data bus (D7 to D0) is used according to the bus specifications for the area being
accessed (8-bit access space or 16-bit access space), the data size, and endian format when
accessing external address space,. For details, see section 6.5.6, Endian and Data Alignment.
6.6.2
I/O Pins Used for Basic Bus Interface
Table 6.15 shows the pins used for basic bus interface.
Table 6.15 I/O Pins for Basic Bus Interface
Name
Symbol
I/O
Bus cycle start
BS
Output
Signal indicating that the bus cycle has started
Address strobe
AS*
Output
Strobe signal indicating that an address output on the
address bus is valid during access
Read strobe
RD
Output
Strobe signal indicating the read access
Read/write
RD/WR
Output
Signal indicating the data bus input or output
direction
Low-high write
LHWR
Output
Strobe signal indicating that the upper byte (D15 to
D8) is valid during write access
Low-low write
LLWR
Output
Strobe signal indicating that the lower byte (D7 to
D0) is valid during write access
Chip select 0 to 7
CS0 to CS7 Output
Strobe signal indicating that the area is selected
Wait
WAIT
Wait request signal used when an external address
space is accessed
Note:
*
Input
Function
When the address/data multiplexed I/O is selected, this pin only functions as the AH
output and does not function as the AS output.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 172 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.6.3
Basic Timing
This section describes the basic timing when the data is specified as big endian.
(1)
16-Bit 2-State Access Space
Figures 6.14 to 6.16 show the bus timing of 16-bit 2-state access space.
When accessing 16-bit access space, the upper byte data bus (D15 to D8) is used for even
addresses access, and the lower byte data bus (D7 to D0) is used for odd addresses. No wait cycles
can be inserted.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
Bφ
Address
CSn
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Invalid
LHWR
LLWR
High level
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
High-Z
Write
BS
RD/WR
DACK
Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7
2. When RDNn = 0
3. When DKC = 0
Figure 6.14 16-Bit 2-State Access Space Bus Timing (Byte Access for Even Address)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 173 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bus cycle
T1
T2
Bφ
Address
CSn
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Invalid
D7 to D0
Valid
LHWR
Write
High level
LLWR
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
High-Z
Valid
BS
RD/WR
DACK
Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7
2. When RDNn = 0
3. When DKC = 0
Figure 6.15 16-Bit 2-State Access Space Bus Timing (Byte Access for Odd Address)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 174 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bus cycle
T1
T2
Bφ
Address
CSn
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
LHWR
LLWR
Write
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
BS
RD/WR
DACK
Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7
2. When RDNn = 0
3. When DKC = 0
Figure 6.16 16-Bit 2-State Access Space Bus Timing (Word Access for Even Address)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 175 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(2)
16-Bit 3-State Access Space
Figures 6.17 to 6.19 show the bus timing of 16-bit 3-state access space.
When accessing 16-bit access space, the upper byte data bus (D15 to D8) is used for even
addresses, and the lower byte data bus (D7 to D0) is used for odd addresses. Wait cycles can be
inserted.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
Bφ
Address
CSn
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Invalid
LHWR
LLWR
High level
Write
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
High-Z
BS
RD/WR
DACK
Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7
2. When RDNn = 0
3. When DKC = 0
Figure 6.17 16-Bit 3-State Access Space Bus Timing (Byte Access for Even Address)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 176 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
Bφ
Address
CSn
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Invalid
D7 to D0
Valid
LHWR
High level
Write
LLWR
D15 to D8
D7 to D0
High-Z
Valid
BS
RD/WR
DACK
Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7
2. When RDNn = 0
3. When DKC = 0
Figure 6.18 16-Bit 3-State Access Space Bus Timing (Word Access for Odd Address)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 177 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
Bφ
Address
CSn
AS
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
LHWR
LLWR
Write
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
BS
RD/WR
DACK
Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7
2. When RDNn = 0
3. When DKC = 0
Figure 6.19 16-Bit 3-State Access Space Bus Timing (Word Access for Even Address)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 178 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.6.4
Wait Control
This LSI can extend the bus cycle by inserting wait cycles (Tw) when the external address space is
accessed. There are two ways of inserting wait cycles: program wait (Tpw) insertion and pin wait
(Ttw) insertion using the WAIT pin.
(1)
Program Wait Insertion
From 0 to 7 wait cycles can be inserted automatically between the T2 state and T3 state for 3-state
access space, according to the settings in WTCRA and WTCRB.
(2)
Pin Wait Insertion
For 3-state access space, when the WAITE bit in BCR1 is set to 1 and the corresponding ICR bit
is set to 1, wait input by means of the WAIT pin is enabled. When the external address space is
accessed in this state, a program wait (Tpw) is first inserted according to the WTCRA and
WTCRB settings. If the WAIT pin is low at the falling edge of Bφ in the last T2 or Tpw cycle,
another Ttw cycle is inserted until the WAIT pin is brought high. The pin wait insertion is
effective when the Tw cycles are inserted to seven cycles or more, or when the number of Tw
cycles to be inserted is changed according to the external devices. The WAITE bit is common to
all areas. For details on ICR, see section 9, I/O port.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 179 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Figure 6.20 shows an example of wait cycle insertion timing. After a reset, the 3-state access is
specified, the program wait is inserted for seven cycles, and the WAIT input is disabled.
T1
T2
Wait by
program
Wait by WAIT pin
wait
Tpw
Ttw
Ttw
T3
Bφ
WAIT
Address
CSn
AS
RD
Read
Read
data
Data bus
LHWR, LLWR
Write
Data bus
Write data
BS
RD/WR
Notes: 1. Upward arrows indicate the timing of WAIT pin sampling.
2. n = 0 to 7
3. When RDNn = 0
Figure 6.20 Example of Wait Cycle Insertion Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 180 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.6.5
Read Strobe (RD) Timing
The read strobe timing can be modified in area units by setting bits RDN7 to RDN0 in RDNCR to
1.
Note that the RD timing with respect to the DACK rising edge will change if the read strobe
timing is modified by setting RDNn to 1 when the DMAC is used in the single address mode.
Figure 6.21 shows an example of timing when the read strobe timing is changed in the basic bus 3state access space.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
T3
Bφ
Address bus
CSn
AS
RD
RDNn = 0
Data bus
RD
RDNn = 1
Data bus
BS
RD/WR
DACK
Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7
2. When DKC = 0
Figure 6.21 Example of Read Strobe Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 181 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.6.6
Extension of Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period
Some external I/O devices require a setup time and hold time between address and CS signals and
strobe signals such as RD, LHWR, and LLWR.
Settings can be made in CSACR to insert cycles in which only the CS, AS, and address signals are
asserted before and after a basic bus space access cycle. Extension of the CS assertion period can
be set in area units. With the CS assertion extension period in write access, the data setup and hold
times are less stringent since the write data is output to the data bus.
Figure 6.22 shows an example of the timing when the CS assertion period is extended in basic bus
3-state access space.
Both extension cycle Th inserted before the basic bus cycle and extension cycle Tt inserted after
the basic bus cycle, or only one of these, can be specified for individual areas. Insertion or noninsertion can be specified for the Th cycle with the upper eight bits (CSXH7 to CSXH0) in
CSACR, and for the Tt cycle with the lower eight bits (CSXT7 to CSXT0).
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 182 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bus cycle
Th
T1
T2
T3
Tt
Bφ
Address
CSn
AS
RD
Read
Data bus
Read data
LHWR, LLWR
Write
Data bus
Write data
BS
RD/WR
DACK
Notes: 1. n = 0 to 7
2. When DKC = 0
Figure 6.22 Example of Timing when Chip Select Assertion Period is Extended
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 183 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.6.7
DACK Signal Output Timing
For DMAC single address transfers, the DACK signal assert timing can be modified by using the
DKC bit in BCR1.
Figure 6.23 shows the DACK signal output timing. Setting the DKC bit to 1 asserts the DACK
signal a half cycle earlier.
Bus cycle
T1
T2
Bφ
Address bus
CSn
AS
RD
Read
Data bus
Read data
LHWR, LLWR
Write
Data bus
Write data
BS
RD/WR
DKC = 0
DACK
DKC = 1
Notes: 1. n = 7 to 0
2. RDNn = 0
Figure 6.23 DACK Signal Output Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 184 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.7
Byte Control SRAM Interface
The byte control SRAM interface is a memory interface for outputting a byte select strobe during
a read or a write bus cycle. This interface has 16-bit data input/output pins and can be connected to
the SRAM that has the upper byte select and the lower byte select strobes such as UB and LB.
The operation of the byte control SRAM interface is the same as the basic bus interface except
that: the byte select strobes (LUB and LLB) are output from the write strobe output pins (LHWR
and LLWR), respectively; the read strobe (RD) negation timing is a half cycle earlier than that in
the case where RDNn = 0 in the basic bus interface regardless of the RDNCR settings; and the
RD/WR signal is used as write enable.
6.7.1
Byte Control SRAM Space Setting
Byte control SRAM interface can be specified for areas 0 to 7. Each area can be specified as byte
control SRAM interface by setting bits BCSELn (n = 0 to 7) in SRAMCR. For the area specified
as burst ROM interface or address/data multiplexed I/O interface, the SRAMCR setting is invalid
and byte control SRAM interface cannot be used.
6.7.2
Data Bus
The bus width of the byte control SRAM space can be specified as 16-bit byte control SRAM
space according to bits ABWHn and ABWLn (n = 0 to 7) in ABWCR. The area specified as 8-bit
access space cannot be specified as the byte control SRAM space.
For the 16-bit byte control SRAM space, data bus (D15 to D0) is valid.
Access size and data alignment are the same as the basic bus interface. For details, see section
6.5.6, Endian and Data Alignment.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 185 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.7.3
I/O Pins Used for Byte Control SRAM Interface
Table 6.16 shows the pins used for the byte control SRAM interface.
In the byte control SRAM interface, write strobe signals (LHWR and LLWR) are output from the
byte select strobes. The RD/WR signal is used as a write enable signal.
Table 6.16 I/O Pins for Byte Control SRAM Interface
Pin
When Byte Control
SRAM is Specified
AS/AH
Name
I/O
Function
AS
Address
strobe
Output
Strobe signal indicating that the address
output on the address bus is valid when a
basic bus interface space or byte control
SRAM space is accessed
CSn
CSn
Chip select
Output
Strobe signal indicating that area n is
selected
RD
RD
Read strobe
Output
Output enable for the SRAM when the byte
control SRAM space is accessed
RD/WR
RD/WR
Read/write
Output
Write enable signal for the SRAM when the
byte control SRAM space is accessed
LHWR/LUB
LUB
Lower-upper
byte select
Output
Upper byte select when the 16-bit byte
control SRAM space is accessed
LLWR/LLB
LLB
Lower-lower
byte select
Output
Lower byte select when the 16-bit byte
control SRAM space is accessed
WAIT
WAIT
Wait
Input
Wait request signal used when an external
address space is accessed
A20 to A0
A20 to A0
Address pin
Output
Address output pin
D15 to D0
D15 to D0
Data pin
Input/
output
Data input/output pin
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 186 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.7.4
(1)
Basic Timing
2-State Access Space
Figure 6.24 shows the bus timing when the byte control SRAM space is specified as a 2-state
access space.
Data buses used for 16-bit access space is the same as those in basic bus interface. No wait cycles
can be inserted.
T1
Bus cycle
T2
Bφ
Address
CSn
AS
LUB
LLB
RD/WR
Read
RD
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
RD/WR
Write
High level
RD
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
BS
DACK
Note: n = 0 to 7
Figure 6.24 16-Bit 2-State Access Space Bus Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 187 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(2)
3-State Access Space
Figure 6.25 shows the bus timing when the byte control SRAM space is specified as a 3-state
access space.
Data buses used for 16-bit access space is the same as those in the basic bus interface. Wait cycles
can be inserted.
T1
Bus cycle
T2
T3
Bφ
Address
CSn
AS
LUB
LLB
RD/WR
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
RD/WR
Write
RD
High level
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
BS
DACK
Note: n = 0 to 7
Figure 6.25 16-Bit 3-State Access Space Bus Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 188 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.7.5
Wait Control
The bus cycle can be extended for the byte control SRAM interface by inserting wait cycles (Tw)
in the same way as the basic bus interface.
(1)
Program Wait Insertion
From 0 to 7 wait cycles can be inserted automatically between T2 cycle and T3 cycle for the 3state access space in area units, according to the settings in WTCRA and WTCRB.
(2)
Pin Wait Insertion
For 3-state access space, when the WAITE bit in BCR1 is set to 1, the corresponding DDR bit is
cleared to 0, and the ICR bit is set to 1, wait input by means of the WAIT pin is enabled. For
details on DDR and ICR, refer to section 9, I/O ports.
Figure 6.26 shows an example of wait cycle insertion timing.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 189 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Wait by
program wait
T1
T2
Tpw
Wait by WAIT pin
Ttw
Ttw
Bφ
WAIT
Address
CSn
AS
LUB, LLB
RD/WR
Read
RD
Data bus
Read data
RD/WR
Write
RD
High level
Data bus
Write data
BS
DACK
Notes: 1. Upward arrows indicate the timing of WAIT pin sampling.
2. n = 0 to 7
Figure 6.26 Example of Wait Cycle Insertion Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 190 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
T3
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.7.6
Read Strobe (RD)
When the byte control SRAM space is specified, the RDNCR setting for the corresponding space
is invalid.
The read strobe negation timing is the same timing as when RDNn = 1 in the basic bus interface.
Note that the RD timing with respect to the DACK rising edge becomes different.
6.7.7
Extension of Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period
In the byte control SRAM interface, the extension cycles can be inserted before and after the bus
cycle in the same way as the basic bus interface. For details, refer to section 6.6.6, Extension of
Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period.
6.7.8
DACK Signal Output Timing
For DMAC single address transfers, the DACK signal assert timing can be modified by using the
DKC bit in BCR1.
Figure 6.27 shows the DACK signal output timing. Setting the DKC bit to 1 asserts the DACK
signal a half cycle earlier.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 191 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bus cycle
T2
T1
Bφ
Address
CSn
AS
LUB
LLB
RD/WR
RD
Read
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
RD/WR
RD
High level
Write
D15 to D8
Valid
D7 to D0
Valid
BS
DKC = 0
DACK
DKC = 1
Figure 6.27 DACK Signal Output Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 192 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.8
Burst ROM Interface
In this LSI, external address space areas 0 and 1 can be designated as burst ROM space, and burst
ROM interfacing performed. The burst ROM interface enables ROM with page access capability
to be accessed at high speed.
Areas 1 and 0 can be designated as burst ROM space by means of bits BSRM1 and BSRM0 in
BROMCR. Consecutive burst accesses of up to 32 words can be performed, according to the
setting of bits BSWDn1 and BSWDn0 (n = 0, 1) in BROMCR. From one to eight cycles can be
selected for burst access.
Settings can be made independently for area 0 and area 1.
In the burst ROM interface, the burst access covers only CPU read accesses. Other accesses are
performed with the similar method to the basic bus interface.
6.8.1
Burst ROM Space Setting
Burst ROM interface can be specified for areas 0 and 1. Areas 0 and 1 can be specified as burst
ROM space by setting bits BSRMn (n = 0, 1) in BROMCR.
6.8.2
Data Bus
The bus width of the burst ROM space can be specified as 8-bit or 16-bit burst ROM interface
space according to the ABWHn and ABWLn bits (n = 0, 1) in ABWCR.
For the 8-bit bus width, data bus (D7 to D0) is valid. For the 16-bit bus width, data bus (D15 to
D0) is valid.
Access size and data alignment are the same as the basic bus interface. For details, see section
6.5.6, Endian and Data Alignment.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 193 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.8.3
I/O Pins Used for Burst ROM Interface
Table 6.17 shows the pins used for the burst ROM interface.
Table 6.17 I/O Pins Used for Burst ROM Interface
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Bus cycle start
BS
Output
Signal indicating that the bus cycle has
started.
Address strobe
AS
Output
Strobe signal indicating that an address output on
the address bus is valid during access
Read strobe
RD
Output
Strobe signal indicating the read access
Read/write
RD/WR
Output
Signal indicating the data bus input or output
direction
Low-high write
LHWR
Output
Strobe signal indicating that the upper byte (D15 to
D8) is valid during write access
Low-low write
LLWR
Output
Strobe signal indicating that the lower byte (D7 to
D0) is valid during write access
Chip select 0 to 7
CS0 to CS7 Output
Strobe signal indicating that the area is selected
Wait
WAIT
Wait request signal used when an external address
space is accessed
Input
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 194 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.8.4
Basic Timing
The number of access cycles in the initial cycle (full access) on the burst ROM interface is
determined by the basic bus interface settings in ABWCR, ASTCR, WTCRA, WTCRB, and bits
CSXHn in CSACR (n = 0 to 7). When area 0 or area 1 designated as burst ROM space is read by
the CPU, the settings in RDNCR and bits CSXTn in CSACR (n = 0 to 7) are ignored.
From one to eight cycles can be selected for the burst cycle, according to the settings of bits
BSTS02 to BSTS00 and BSTS12 to BSTS10 in BROMCR. Wait cycles cannot be inserted. In
addition, 4-word, 8-word, 16-word, or 32-word consecutive burst access can be performed
according to the settings of BSTS01, BSTS00, BSTS11, and BSTS10 bits in BROMCR.
The basic access timing for burst ROM space is shown in figures 6.28 and 6.29.
Burst access
Full access
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T1
T2
Bφ
Upper
address bus
Lower
address bus
CSn
AS
RD
Data bus
BS
RD/WR
Note: n = 1, 0
Figure 6.28 Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (ASTn = 1, Two Burst Cycles)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 195 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Burst access
Full access
T1
T2
T1
T1
Bφ
Upper address bus
Lower address bus
CSn
AS
RD
Data bus
BS
RD/WR
Note: n = 1, 0
Figure 6.29 Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (ASTn = 0, One Burst Cycle)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 196 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.8.5
Wait Control
As with the basic bus interface, either program wait insertion or pin wait insertion by the WAIT
pin can be used in the initial cycle (full access) on the burst ROM interface. See section 6.6.4,
Wait Control. Wait cycles cannot be inserted in a burst cycle.
6.8.6
Read Strobe (RD) Timing
When the burst ROM space is read by the CPU, the RDNCR setting for the corresponding space is
invalid.
The read strobe negation timing is the same timing as when RDNn = 0 in the basic bus interface.
6.8.7
Extension of Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period
In the burst ROM interface, the extension cycles can be inserted in the same way as the basic bus
interface.
For the burst ROM space, the burst access can be enabled only in read access by the CPU. In this
case, the setting of the corresponding CSXTn bit in CSACR is ignored and an extension cycle can
be inserted only before the full access cycle. Note that no extension cycle can be inserted before or
after the burst access cycles.
In accesses other than read accesses by the CPU, the burst ROM space is equivalent to the basic
bus interface space. Accordingly, extension cycles can be inserted before and after the burst access
cycles.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 197 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.9
Address/Data Multiplexed I/O Interface
If areas 3 to 7 of external address space are specified as address/data multiplexed I/O space in this
LSI, the address/data multiplexed I/O interface can be performed. In the address/data multiplexed
I/O interface, peripheral LSIs that require the multiplexed address/data can be connected directly
to this LSI.
6.9.1
Address/Data Multiplexed I/O Space Setting
Address/data multiplexed I/O interface can be specified for areas 3 to 7. Each area can be
specified as the address/data multiplexed I/O space by setting bits MPXEn (n = 3 to 7) in
MPXCR.
6.9.2
Address/Data Multiplex
In the address/data multiplexed I/O space, data bus is multiplexed with address bus. Table 6.18
shows the relationship between the bus width and address output.
Table 6.18 Address/Data Multiplex
Data Pins
Bus Width
8 bits
16 bits
6.9.3
Cycle
PI7
PI6
PI5
PI4
PI3
PI2
PI1
PI0
PH7 PH6 PH5 PH4 PH3 PH2 PH1 PH0
Address
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
Data
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Address
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
Data
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data Bus
The bus width of the address/data multiplexed I/O space can be specified for either 8-bit access
space or 16-bit access space by the ABWHn and ABWLn bits (n = 3 to 7) in ABWCR.
For the 8-bit access space, D7 to D0 are valid for both address and data. For 16-bit access space,
D15 to D0 are valid for both address and data. If the address/data multiplexed I/O space is
accessed, the corresponding address will be output to the address bus.
For details on access size and data alignment, see section 6.5.6, Endian and Data Alignment.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 198 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.9.4
I/O Pins Used for Address/Data Multiplexed I/O Interface
Table 6.19 shows the pins used for the address/data multiplexed I/O Interface.
Table 6.19 I/O Pins for Address/Data Multiplexed I/O Interface
Pin
When Byte
Control
SRAM is
Specified
Name
I/O
Function
CSn
CSn
Chip select
Output
Chip select (n = 3 to 7) when area n is specified as the
address/data multiplexed I/O space
AS/AH
AH*
Address hold
Output
Signal to hold an address when the address/data
multiplexed I/O space is specified
RD
RD
Read strobe
Output
Signal indicating that the address/data multiplexed I/O
space is being read
LHWR/LUB
LHWR
Low-high write Output
Strobe signal indicating that the upper byte (D15 to
D8) is valid when the address/data multiplexed I/O
space is written
LLWR/LLB
LLWR
Low-low write
Output
Strobe signal indicating that the lower byte (D7 to D0)
is valid when the address/data multiplexed I/O space is
written
D15 to D0
D15 to D0
Address/data
Input/
output
Address and data multiplexed pins for the
address/data multiplexed I/O space.
Only D7 to D0 are valid when the 8-bit space is
specified. D15 to D0 are valid when the 16-bit space is
specified.
A20 to A0
A20 to A0
Address
Output
Address output pin
WAIT
WAIT
Wait
Input
Wait request signal used when the external address
space is accessed
BS
BS
Bus cycle start Output
Signal to indicate the bus cycle start
RD/WR
RD/WR
Read/write
Signal indicating the data bus input or output direction
Note:
*
Output
The AH output is multiplexed with the AS output. At the timing that an area is specified
as address/data multiplexed I/O, this pin starts to function as the AH output meaning
that this pin cannot be used as the AS output. At this time, when other areas set to the
basic bus interface is accessed, this pin does not function as the AS output. Until an
area is specified as address/data multiplexed I/O, be aware that this pin functions as
the AS output.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 199 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.9.5
Basic Timing
The bus cycle in the address/data multiplexed I/O interface consists of an address cycle and a data
cycle. The data cycle is based on the basic bus interface timing specified by the ABWCR,
ASTCR, WTCRA, WTCRB, RDNCR, and CSACR.
Figures 6.30 and 6.31 show the basic access timings.
Data cycle
Address cycle
Tma1
Tma2
T1
T2
Bφ
Address bus
CSn
AH
RD
Read
D7 to D0
Address
Read data
LLWR
Write
D7 to D0
Address
Write data
BS
RD/WR
DACK
Note: n = 3 to 7
Figure 6.30 8-Bit Access Space Access Timing (ABWHn = 1, ABWLn = 1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 200 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Bus cycle
Data cycle
Address cycle
Tma1
Tma2
T1
T2
Bφ
Address bus
CSn
AH
RD
Read
D15 to D0
Address
Read data
LHWR
LLWR
Write
D15 to D0
Address
Write data
BS
RD/WR
DACK
Note: n = 3 to 7
Figure 6.31 16-Bit Access Space Access Timing (ABWHn = 0, ABWLn = 1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 201 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.9.6
Address Cycle Control
An extension cycle (Tmaw) can be inserted between Tma1 and Tma2 cycles to extend the AH
signal output period by setting the ADDEX bit in MPXCR. By inserting the Tmaw cycle, the
address setup for AH and the AH minimum pulse width can be assured.
Figure 6.32 shows the access timing when the address cycle is three cycles.
Data cycle
Address cycle
Tma1
Tmaw
Tma2
T1
T2
Bφ
Address bus
CSn
AH
RD
Read
D15 to D0
Address
Read data
LHWR
Write
LLWR
D15 to D0
Address
Write data
BS
RD/WR
DACK
Note: n = 3 to 7
Figure 6.32 Access Timing of 3 Address Cycles (ADDEX = 1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 202 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.9.7
Wait Control
In the data cycle of the address/data multiplexed I/O interface, program wait insertion and pin wait
insertion by the WAIT pin are enabled in the same way as in the basic bus interface. For details,
refer to section 6.6.4, Wait Control.
Wait control settings do not affect the address cycles.
6.9.8
Read Strobe (RD) Timing
In the address/data multiplexed I/O interface, the read strobe timing of data cycles can be modified
in the same way as in basic bus interface. For details, refer to section 6.6.5, Read Strobe (RD)
Timing.
Figure 6.33 shows an example when the read strobe timing is modified.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 203 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Data cycle
Address cycle
Tma1
Tma2
T1
T2
Bφ
Address bus
CSn
AH
RD
RDNn = 0
D15 to D0
Address
Read data
RD
RDNn = 1
D15 to D0
Address
BS
RD/WR
DACK
Note: n = 3 to 7
Figure 6.33 Read Strobe Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 204 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Read
data
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.9.9
Extension of Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period
In the address/data multiplexed interface, the extension cycles can be inserted before and after the
bus cycle. For details, see section 6.6.6, Extension of Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period.
Figure 6.34 shows an example of the chip select (CS) assertion period extension timing.
Bus cycle
Data cycle
Address cycle
Tma1
Tma2
Th
T1
T2
Tt
Bφ
Address bus
CSn
AH
RD
Read
D15 to D0
Address
Read data
LHWR
Write
LLWR
D15 to D0
Address
Write data
BS
RD/WR
DACK
Note: n = 3 to 7
Figure 6.34 Chip Select (CS) Assertion Period Extension Timing in Data Cycle
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 205 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
When consecutively reading from the same area connected to a peripheral LSI whose data hold
time is long, data outputs from the peripheral LSI and this LSI may conflict. Inserting the chip
select assertion period extension cycle after the access cycle can avoid the data conflict.
Figure 6.35 shows an example of the operation. In the figure, both bus cycles A and B are read
access cycles to the address/data multiplexed I/O space. An example of the data conflict is shown
in (a), and an example of avoiding the data conflict by the CS assertion period extension cycle in
(b).
Bus cycle A
Bus cycle B
Bφ
Address bus
CS
AH
RD
Data bus
Data hold time is long.
Data conflict
(a) Without CS assertion period extension cycle (CSXTn = 0)
Bus cycle A
Bus cycle B
Bφ
Address bus
CS
AH
RD
Data bus
(b) With CS assertion period extension cycle (CSXTn = 1)
Figure 6.35 Consecutive Read Accesses to Same Area
(Address/Data Multiplexed I/O Space)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 206 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.9.10
DACK Signal Output Timing
For DMAC single address transfers, the DACK signal assert timing can be modified by using the
DKC bit in BCR1.
Figure 6.36 shows the DACK signal output timing. Setting the DKC bit to 1 asserts the DACK
signal a half cycle earlier.
Address cycle
Tma1
Tma2
Data cycle
T1
T2
Bφ
Address bus
CSn
AH
RD
RDNn = 0
D15 to D0
Read data
Address
RD
RDNn = 1
D15 to D0
Read
data
Address
BS
RD/WR
DKC = 0
DACK
DKC = 1
Note: n = 3 to 7
Figure 6.36 DACK Signal Output Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 207 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.10
Idle Cycle
In this LSI, idle cycles can be inserted between the consecutive external accesses. By inserting the
idle cycle, data conflicts between ROM read cycle whose output floating time is long and an
access cycle from/to high-speed memory or I/O interface can be prevented.
6.10.1
Operation
When this LSI consecutively accesses external address space, it can insert an idle cycle between
bus cycles in the following four cases. These conditions are determined by the sequence of read
and write and previously accessed area.
1.
2.
3.
4.
When read cycles of different areas in the external address space occur consecutively
When an external write cycle occurs immediately after an external read cycle
When an external read cycle occurs immediately after an external write cycle
When an external access occurs immediately after a DMAC single address transfer (write
cycle)
Up to four idle cycles can be inserted under the conditions shown above. The number of idle
cycles to be inserted should be specified to prevent data conflicts between the output data from a
previously accessed device and data from a subsequently accessed device.
Under conditions 1 and 2, which are the conditions to insert idle cycles after read, the number of
idle cycles can be selected from setting A specified by bits IDLCA1 and IDLCA0 in IDLCR or
setting B specified by bits IDLCB1 and IDLCB0 in IDLCR: Setting A can be selected from one to
four cycles, and setting B can be selected from one or two to four cycles. Setting A or B can be
specified for each area by setting bits IDLSEL7 to IDLSEL0 in IDLCR. Note that bits IDLSEL7
to IDLSEL0 correspond to the previously accessed area of the consecutive accesses.
The number of idle cycles to be inserted under conditions 3 and 4, which are conditions to insert
idle cycles after write, can be determined by setting A as described above.
After the reset release, IDLCR is initialized to four idle cycle insertion under all conditions 1 to 4
shown above.
Table 6.20 shows the correspondence between conditions 1 to 4 and number of idle cycles to be
inserted for each area. Table 6.21 shows the correspondence between the number of idle cycles to
be inserted specified by settings A and B, and number of cycles to be inserted.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 208 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Table 6.20 Number of Idle Cycle Insertion Selection in Each Area
Bit Settings
IDLSn
Insertion Condition
n
Consecutive reads in different areas 1
Write after read
0
Read after write
2
Setting
IDLSELn
n = 0 to 7
Area for Previous Access
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
0

1
0
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
Invalid
0

1
0
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
0
Invalid

Invalid
1
External access after single address 3
transfer
4
0
A

Invalid
1
A
[Legend]
A: Number of idle cycle insertion A is selected.
B: Number of idle cycle insertion B is selected.
Invalid: No idle cycle is inserted for the corresponding condition.
Table 6.21 Number of Idle Cycle Insertions
Bit Settings
A
IDLCA1
IDLCA0
B
IDLCB1
IDLCB0
Number of Cycles


0
0
0
0
0


1
0
1
0
1
2
1
0
1
0
3
1
1
1
1
4
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 209 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(1)
Consecutive Reads in Different Areas
If consecutive reads in different areas occur while bit IDLS1 in IDLCR is set to 1, idle cycles
specified by bits IDLCA1 and IDLCA0 when bit IDLSELn in IDLCR is cleared to 0, or bits
IDLCB1 and IDLCB0 when bit IDLSELn is set to 1 are inserted at the start of the second read
cycle (n = 0 to 7).
Figure 6.37 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read
cycle for ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a read cycle for SRAM, each
being located in a different area. In (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a conflict occurs in bus
cycle B between the read data from ROM and that from SRAM. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted,
and a data conflict is prevented.
Bus cycle B
Bus cycle A
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
Bus cycle B
Bus cycle A
T1
T2
T3
Ti
T1
T2
Bφ
Address bus
CS (area A)
CS (area B)
RD
Data bus
Data conflict
Data hold
time is long.
(a) No idle cycle inserted
(IDLS1 = 0)
(b) Idle cycle inserted
(IDLS1 = 1, IDLSELn = 0, IDLCA1 = 0, IDLCA0 = 0)
Figure 6.37 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (Consecutive Reads in Different Areas)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 210 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(2)
Write after Read
If an external write occurs after an external read while bit IDLS0 in IDLCR is set to 1, idle cycles
specified by bits IDLCA1 and IDLCA0 when bit IDLSELn in IDLCR is cleared to 0 when
IDLSELn = 0, or bits IDLCB1 and IDLCB0 when IDLSELn is set to 1 are inserted at the start of
the write cycle (n = 0 to 7).
Figure 6.38 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read
cycle for ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a CPU write cycle. In (a), an
idle cycle is not inserted, and a conflict occurs in bus cycle B between the read data from ROM
and the CPU write data. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data conflict is prevented.
Bus cycle B
Bus cycle A
T1
T2
T3
T1
Bus cycle B
Bus cycle A
T1
T2
T2
T3
Ti
T1
T2
Bφ
Address bus
CS (area A)
CS (area B)
RD
LLWR
Data bus
Data hold
time is long.
(a) No idle cycle inserted
(IDLS0 = 0)
Data conflict
(b) Idle cycle inserted
(IDLS0 = 1, IDLSELn = 0, IDLCA1 = 0, IDLCA0 = 0)
Figure 6.38 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (Write after Read)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 211 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(3)
Read after Write
If an external read occurs after an external write while bit IDLS2 in IDLCR is set to 1, idle cycles
specified by bits IDLCA1 and IDLCA0 are inserted at the start of the read cycle (n = 0 to 7).
Figure 6.39 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a CPU
write cycle and bus cycle B is a read cycle from the SRAM. In (a), an idle cycle is not inserted,
and a conflict occurs in bus cycle B between the CPU write data and read data from an SRAM
device. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data conflict is prevented.
Bus cycle B
Bus cycle A
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
Bus cycle B
Bus cycle A
T1
T2
T3
Ti
T1
T2
Bφ
Address bus
CS (area A)
CS (area B)
RD
LLWR
Data bus
Data conflict
Output floating
time is long.
(a) No idle cycle inserted
(IDLS2 = 0)
(b) Idle cycle inserted
(IDLS2 = 1, IDLCA1 = 0, IDLCA0 = 0)
Figure 6.39 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (Read after Write)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 212 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(4)
External Access after Single Address Transfer Write
If an external access occurs after a single address transfer write while bit IDLS3 in IDLCR is set
to 1, idle cycles specified by bits IDLCA1 and IDLCA0 are inserted at the start of the external
access (n = 0 to 7).
Figure 6.40 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a
single address transfer (write cycle) and bus cycle B is a CPU write cycle. In (a), an idle cycle is
not inserted, and a conflict occurs in bus cycle B between the external device write data and this
LSI write data. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data conflict is prevented.
Bus cycle B
Bus cycle A
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
Bus cycle B
Bus cycle A
T1
T2
T3
Ti
T1
T2
Bφ
Address bus
CS (area A)
CS (area B)
LLWR
DACK
Data bus
Data conflict
Output floating
time is long.
(a) No idle cycle inserted
(IDLS3 = 0)
(b) Idle cycle inserted
(IDLS3 = 1, IDLCA1 = 0, IDLCA0 = 0)
Figure 6.40 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (Write after Single Address Transfer Write)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 213 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(5)
External NOP Cycles and Idle Cycles
A cycle in which an external space is not accessed due to internal operations is called an external
NOP cycle. Even when an external NOP cycle occurs between consecutive external bus cycles, an
idle cycle can be inserted. In this case, the number of external NOP cycles is included in the
number of idle cycles to be inserted.
Figure 6.41 shows an example of external NOP and idle cycle insertion.
No external access Idle cycle
(NOP)
(remaining)
Preceding bus cycle
T1
T2
Tpw
T3
Ti
Ti
Following bus cycle
T1
T2
Bφ
Address bus
CS (area A)
CS (area B)
RD
Data bus
Specified number of idle cycles or more
including no external access cycles (NOP)
(Condition: Number of idle cycles to be inserted when different reads continue: 4 cycles)
Figure 6.41 Idle Cycle Insertion Example
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 214 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Tpw
T3
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(6)
Relationship between Chip Select (CS) Signal and Read (RD) Signal
Depending on the system's load conditions, the RD signal may lag behind the CS signal. An
example is shown in figure 6.44. In this case, with the setting for no idle cycle insertion (a), there
may be a period of overlap between the RD signal in bus cycle A and the CS signal in bus cycle B.
Setting idle cycle insertion, as in (b), however, will prevent any overlap between the RD and CS
signals. In the initial state after reset release, idle cycle indicated in (b) is set.
Bus cycle B
Bus cycle A
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
Bus cycle B
Bus cycle A
T1
T2
T3
Ti
T1
T2
Bφ
Address bus
CS (area A)
CS (area B)
RD
Overlap time may occur between the
CS (area B) and RD
(a) No idle cycle inserted
(IDLS1 = 0)
(b) Idle cycle inserted
(IDLS1 = 1, IDLSELn = 0, IDLCA1 = 0, IDLCA0 = 0)
Figure 6.42 Relationship between Chip Select (CS) and Read (RD)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 215 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
Table 6.22 Idle Cycles in Mixed Accesses to Normal Space
Previous
Access
Next
Access
Normal space Normal
read
space read
IDLS
3
2
1
IDLSEL
0
7 to 0
Single
Normal
address
space read
transfer write
1
0
Idle Cycle

0






Disabled

1

0
0
0


1 cycle inserted
0
1
2 cycles inserted
1
0
3 cycles inserted
1
1
4 cycles inserted


0
0
0 cycle inserted
0
1
2 cycle inserted
1
0
3 cycles inserted
1
1
4 cycles inserted



0





Disabled



1
0
0
0


1 cycle inserted
0
1
2 cycles inserted
1
0
3 cycles inserted
1
1
4 cycles inserted


0
0
0 cycle inserted
0
1
2 cycle inserted
1
0
3 cycles inserted
1
1
4 cycles inserted

0







Disabled

1



0
0


1 cycle inserted
0
1
2 cycles inserted
1
0
3 cycles inserted
1
1
4 cycles inserted
0








Disabled
1




0
0


1 cycle inserted
0
1
2 cycles inserted
1
0
3 cycles inserted
1
1
4 cycles inserted
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 216 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
0

1
Normal space Normal
write
space read
1
IDLCB

1
Normal space Normal
read
space write
IDLCA
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.10.2
Pin States in Idle Cycle
Table 6.23 shows the pin states in an idle cycle.
Table 6.23 Pin States in Idle Cycle
Pins
Pin State
A20 to A0
Contents of following bus cycle
D15 to D0
High impedance
CSn (n = 7 to 0)
High
AS
High
RD
High
BS
High
RD/WR
High
AH
low
LHWR, LLWR
High
DACKn (n = 3 to 0)
High
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 217 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.11
Bus Release
This LSI can release the external bus in response to a bus request from an external device. In the
external bus released state, internal bus masters continue to operate as long as there is no external
access.
In addition, in the external bus released state, the BREQO signal can be driven low to output a bus
request externally.
6.11.1
Operation
In external extended mode, when the BRLE bit in BCR1 is set to 1 and the ICR bits for the
corresponding pin are set to 1, the bus can be released to the external. Driving the BREQ pin low
issues an external bus request to this LSI. When the BREQ pin is sampled, at the prescribed
timing, the BACK pin is driven low, and the address bus, data bus, and bus control signals are
placed in the high-impedance state, establishing the external bus released state. For details on
DDR and ICR, see section 9, I/O Ports.
In the external bus released state, the CPU, DTC, and DMAC can access the internal space using
the internal bus. When the CPU, DTC, or DMAC attempts to access the external address space, it
temporarily defers initiation of the bus cycle, and waits for the bus request from the external bus
master to be canceled.
If the BREQOE bit in BCR1 is set to 1, the BREQO pin can be driven low when any of the
following requests are issued, to request cancellation of the bus request externally.
• When the CPU, DTC, or DMAC attempts to access the external address space
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed to place the chip in software standby mode or allmodule-clock-stop mode
• When SCKCR is written to for setting the clock frequency
If an external bus release request and external access occur simultaneously, the priority is as
follows:
(High) External bus release > External access by CPU, DTC, or DMAC (Low)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 218 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.11.2
Pin States in External Bus Released State
Table 6.24 shows pin states in the external bus released state.
Table 6.24 Pin States in Bus Released State
Pins
Pin State
A20 to A0
High impedance
D15 to D0
High impedance
BS
High impedance
CSn (n = 7 to 0)
High impedance
AS
High impedance
AH
High impedance
RD/WR
High impedance
RD
High impedance
LUB, LLB
High impedance
LHWR, LLWR
High impedance
DACKn (n = 3 to 0)
High level
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 219 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.11.3
Transition Timing
Figure 6.43 shows the timing for transition to the bus released state.
External space
access cycle
T1
CPU cycle
External bus released state
T2
Bφ
Hi-Z
Address bus
Hi-Z
Data bus
Hi-Z
CSn
Hi-Z
AS
Hi-Z
RD
Hi-Z
LHWR, LLWR
BREQ
BACK
BREQO
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[8]
[6]
[1] A low level of the BREQ signal is sampled at the rising edge of the Bφ signal.
[2] The bus control signals are driven high at the end of the external space access cycle. It takes two cycles or
more after the low level of the BREQ signal is sampled.
[3] The BACK signal is driven low, releasing bus to the external bus master.
[4] The BREQ signal state sampling is continued in the external bus released state.
[5] A high level of the BREQ signal is sampled.
[6] The external bus released cycles are ended one cycle after the BREQ signal is driven high.
[7] When the external space is accessed by an internal bus master during external bus released while the BREQOE
bit is set to 1, the BREQO signal goes low.
[8] Normally the BREQO signal goes high at the rising edge of the BACK signal.
Figure 6.43 Bus Released State Transition Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 220 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.12
Internal Bus
6.12.1
Access to Internal Address Space
The internal address spaces of this LSI are the on-chip ROM space, on-chip RAM space, and
register space for the on-chip peripheral modules. The number of cycles necessary for access
differs according the space.
Table 6.25 shows the number of access cycles for each on-chip memory space.
Table 6.25 Number of Access Cycles for On-Chip Memory Spaces
Access Space
Access
On-chip ROM space
Read
One Iφ cycle
Write
Three Iφ cycles
Read
One Iφ cycle
Write
One Iφ cycle
On-chip RAM space
Number of Access Cycles
In access to the registers for on-chip peripheral modules, the number of access cycles differs
according to the register to be accessed. When the dividing ratio of the operating clock of a bus
master and that of a peripheral module is 1 : n, synchronization cycles using a clock divided by 0
to n-1 are inserted for register access in the same way as for external bus clock division.
Table 6.26 lists the number of access cycles for registers of on-chip peripheral modules.
Table 6.26 Number of Access Cycles for Registers of On-Chip Peripheral Modules
Number of Cycles
Module to be Accessed
Read
DMAC registers
Two Iφ
MCU operating mode, clock pulse generator,
Two Iφ
power-down control registers, interrupt controller,
bus controller, and DTC registers
Write
Write Data Buffer Function
Disabled
Three Iφ
Disabled
I/O port registers of PFCR and WDT
Two Pφ
Three Pφ Disabled
I/O port registers other than PFCR and PORTM,
TPU, PPG, TMR, SCI, SCI0 to SCI2, SCI4, A/D,
and D/A registers
Two Pφ
Enabled
I/O port registers of PORTM,
USB, SCI5, and SCI6
Three Pφ
Enabled
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 221 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.13
Write Data Buffer Function
6.13.1
Write Data Buffer Function for External Data Bus
This LSI has a write data buffer function for the external data bus. Using the write data buffer
function enables internal accesses in parallel with external writes or DMAC single address
transfers. The write data buffer function is made available by setting the WDBE bit to 1 in BCR1.
Figure 6.44 shows an example of the timing when the write data buffer function is used. When this
function is used, if an external address space write or a DMAC single address transfer continues
for two cycles or longer, and there is an internal access next, an external write only is executed in
the first two cycles. However, from the next cycle onward, internal accesses (on-chip memory or
internal I/O register read/write) and the external address space write rather than waiting until it
ends are executed in parallel.
On-chip memory read
Peripheral module read
External write cycle
Iφ
On-chip
memory 1
Internal
address bus
T1
On-chip
memory 2
T2
Peripheral module address
T3
Bφ
Address bus
External
space
write
External address
CSn
HHWR, HLWR,
LHWR, LLWR
D15 to D0
Figure 6.44 Example of Timing when Write Data Buffer Function is Used
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 222 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.13.2
Write Data Buffer Function for Peripheral Modules
This LSI has a write data buffer function for the peripheral module access. Using the write data
buffer function enables peripheral module writes and on-chip memory or external access to be
executed in parallel. The write data buffer function is made available by setting the PWDBE bit in
BCR2 to 1. For details on the on-chip peripheral module registers, see table 6.26, Number of
Access Cycles for Registers of On-Chip Peripheral Modules in section 6.12, Internal Bus.
Figure 6.45 shows an example of the timing when the write data buffer function is used. When this
function is used, if an internal I/O register write continues for two cycles or longer and then there
is an on-chip RAM, an on-chip ROM, or an external access, internal I/O register write only is
performed in the first two cycles. However, from the next cycle onward an internal memory or an
external access and internal I/O register write are executed in parallel rather than waiting until it
ends.
On-chip
memory
read
Peripheral module write
Iφ
Internal
address bus
Pφ
Internal I/O
address bus
Peripheral module address
Internal I/O
data bus
Figure 6.45 Example of Timing when Peripheral Module
Write Data Buffer Function is Used
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 223 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.14
Bus Arbitration
This LSI has bus arbiters that arbitrate bus mastership operations (bus arbitration). This LSI
incorporates internal access and external access bus arbiters that can be used and controlled
independently. The internal bus arbiter handles the CPU, DTC, and DMAC accesses. The external
bus arbiter handles the external access by the CPU, DTC, and DMAC and external bus release
request (external bus master).
The bus arbiters determine priorities at the prescribed timing, and permit use of the bus by means
of the bus request acknowledge signal.
6.14.1
Operation
The bus arbiter detects the bus masters' bus request signals, and if the bus is requested, sends a bus
request acknowledge signal to the bus master. If there are bus requests from more than one bus
master, the bus request acknowledge signal is sent to the one with the highest priority. When a bus
master receives the bus request acknowledge signal, it takes possession of the bus until that signal
is canceled.
The priority of the internal bus arbitration:
(High) DMAC > DTC > CPU (Low)
The priority of the external bus arbitration:
(High) External bus release request > External access by the CPU, DTC, and DMAC (Low)
If the DMAC or DTC accesses continue, the CPU can be given priority over the DMAC or DTC
to execute the bus cycles alternatively between them by setting the IBCCS bit in BCR2. In this
case, the priority between the DMAC and DTC does not change.
An internal bus access by the CPU, DTC, or DMAC and an external bus access by an external bus
release request can be executed in parallel.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 224 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.14.2
Bus Transfer Timing
Even if a bus request is received from a bus master with a higher priority over that of the bus
master that has taken control of the bus and is currently operating, the bus is not necessarily
transferred immediately. There are specific timings at which each bus master can release the bus.
(1)
CPU
The CPU is the lowest-priority bus master, and if a bus request is received from the DTC or
DMAC, the bus arbiter transfers the bus to the bus master that issued the request.
The timing for transfer of the bus is at the end of the bus cycle. In sleep mode, the bus is
transferred synchronously with the clock.
Note, however, that the bus cannot be transferred in the following cases.
• The word or longword access is performed in some divisions.
• Stack handling is performed in multiple bus cycles.
• Transfer data read or write by memory transfer instructions, block transfer instructions, or TAS
instruction.
(In the block transfer instructions, the bus can be transferred in the write cycle and the
following transfer data read cycle.)
• From the target read to write in the bit manipulation instructions or memory operation
instructions.
(In an instruction that performs no write operation according to the instruction condition, up to
a cycle corresponding the write cycle)
(2)
DTC
The DTC sends the internal bus arbiter a request for the bus when an activation request is
generated. When the DTC accesses an external bus space, the DTC first takes control of the bus
from the internal bus arbiter and then requests a bus to the external bus arbiter.
Once the DTC takes control of the bus, the DTC continues the transfer processing cycles. If a bus
master whose priority is higher than the DTC requests the bus, the DTC transfers the bus to the
higher priority bus master. If the IBCCS bit in BCR2 is set to 1, the DTC transfers the bus to the
CPU.
Note, however, that the bus cannot be transferred in the following cases.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 225 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
• During transfer information read
• During the first data transfer
• During transfer information write back
The DTC releases the bus when the consecutive transfer cycles completed.
(3)
DMAC
The DMAC sends the internal bus arbiter a request for the bus when an activation request is
generated. When the DMAC accesses an external bus space, the DMAC first takes control of the
bus from the internal bus arbiter and then requests a bus to the external bus arbiter.
After the DMAC takes control of the bus, it may continue the transfer processing cycles or release
the bus at the end of every bus cycle depending on the conditions.
The DMAC continues transfers without releasing the bus in the following case:
• Between the read cycle in the dual-address mode and the write cycle corresponding to the read
cycle
If no bus master of a higher priority than the DMAC requests the bus and the IBCCS bit in BCR2
is cleared to 0, the DMAC continues transfers without releasing the bus in the following cases:
• During 1-block transfers in the block transfer mode
• During transfers in the burst mode
In other cases, the DMAC transfers the bus at the end of the bus cycle.
(4)
External Bus Release
When the BREQ pin goes low and an external bus release request is issued while the BRLE bit in
BCR1 is set to 1 with the corresponding ICR bit set to 1, a bus request is sent to the bus arbiter.
External bus release can be performed on completion of an external bus cycle.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 226 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
6.15
Bus Controller Operation in Reset
In a reset, this LSI, including the bus controller, enters the reset state immediately, and any
executing bus cycle is aborted.
6.16
(1)
Usage Notes
Setting Registers
The BSC registers must be specified before accessing the external address space. In on-chip ROM
disabled mode, the BSC registers must be specified before accessing the external address space for
other than an instruction fetch access.
(2)
External Bus Release Function and All-Module-Clock-Stop Mode
In this LSI, if the ACSE bit in MSTPCRA is set to 1, and then a SLEEP instruction is executed
with the setting for all peripheral module clocks to be stopped (MSTPCRA and MSTPCRB =
H'FFFFFFFF) or for operation of the 8-bit timer module alone (MSTPCRA and MSTPCRB =
H'F[E to 0]FFFFFF), and a transition is made to the sleep state, the all-module-clock-stop mode is
entered in which the clock is also stopped for the bus controller and I/O ports. For details, see
section 22, Power-Down Modes.
In this state, the external bus release function is halted. To use the external bus release function in
sleep mode, the ACSE bit in MSTPCR must be cleared to 0. Conversely, if a SLEEP instruction to
place the chip in all-module-clock-stop mode is executed in the external bus released state, the
transition to all-module-clock-stop mode is deferred and performed until after the bus is
recovered.
(3)
External Bus Release Function and Software Standby
In this LSI, internal bus master operation does not stop even while the bus is released, as long as
the program is running in on-chip ROM, etc., and no external access occurs. If a SLEEP
instruction to place the chip in software standby mode is executed while the external bus is
released, the transition to software standby mode is deferred and performed after the bus is
recovered.
Also, since clock oscillation halts in software standby mode, if the BREQ signal goes low in this
mode, indicating an external bus release request, the request cannot be answered until the chip has
recovered from the software standby mode.
Note that the BACK and BREQO pins are both in the high-impedance state in software standby
mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 227 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC)
(4)
BREQO Output Timing
When the BREQOE bit is set to 1 and the BREQO signal is output, both the BREQO and BACK
signals may go low simultaneously.
This will occur if the next external access request occurs while internal bus arbitration is in
progress after the chip samples a low level of the BREQ signal.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 228 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
This LSI includes a 4-channel DMA controller (DMAC).
7.1
Features
• Maximum of 4-G byte address space can be accessed
• Byte, word, or longword can be set as data transfer unit
• Maximum of 4-G bytes (4,294,967,295 bytes) can be set as total transfer size
Supports free-running mode in which total transfer size setting is not needed
• DMAC activation methods are auto-request, on-chip module interrupt, and external request.
Auto request:
CPU activates (cycle stealing or burst access can be selected)
On-chip module interrupt: Interrupt requests from on-chip peripheral modules can be selected
as an activation source
External request:
Low level or falling edge detection of the DREQ signal can be
selected. External request is available for all four channels.
In block transfer mode, low level detection is only available.
• Dual or single address mode can be selected as address mode
Dual address mode: Both source and destination are specified by addresses
Single address mode: Either source or destination is specified by the DREQ signal and the
other is specified by address
• Normal, repeat, or block transfer can be selected as transfer mode
Normal transfer mode:
One byte, one word, or one longword data is transferred at a
single transfer request
Repeat transfer mode:
One byte, one word, or one longword data is transferred at a
single transfer request
Repeat size of data is transferred and then a transfer address
returns to the transfer start address
Up to 65536 transfers (65,536 bytes/words/longwords) can be set
as repeat size
Block transfer mode:
One block data is transferred at a single transfer request
Up to 65,536 bytes/words/longwords can be set as block size
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 229 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
• Extended repeat area function which repeats the addressees within a specified area using the
transfer address with the fixed upper bits (ring buffer transfer can be performed, as an
example) is available
One bit (two bytes) to 27 bits (128 Mbytes) for transfer source and destination can be set as
extended repeat areas
• Address update can be selected from fixed address, offset addition, and increment or
decrement by 1, 2, or 4
Address update by offset addition enables to transfer data at addresses which are not placed
continuously
• Word or longword data can be transferred to an address which is not aligned with the
respective boundary
Data is divided according to its address (byte or word) when it is transferred
• Two types of interrupts can be requested to the CPU
A transfer end interrupt is generated after the number of data specified by the transfer counter
is transferred. A transfer escape end interrupt is generated when the remaining total transfer
size is less than the transfer data size at a single transfer request, when the repeat size of data
transfer is completed, or when the extended repeat area overflows.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 230 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
A block diagram of the DMAC is shown in figure 7.1.
Internal data bus
Internal address bus
External pins
DREQn
Data buffer
DACKn
TENDn
Interrupt signals
requested to the
CPU by each
channel
Internal activation sources
...
Controller
Address buffer
Operation unit
Operation unit
DOFR_n
DSAR_n
Internal activation
source detector
DMRSR_n
DDAR_n
DMDR_n
DTCR_n
DACR_n
DBSR_n
Module data bus
[Legend]
DSAR_n:
DDAR_n:
DOFR_n:
DTCR_n:
DBSR_n:
DMDR_n:
DACR_n:
DMRSR_n:
DMA source address register
DMA destination address register
DMA offset register
DMA transfer count register
DMA block size register
DMA mode control register
DMA address control register
DMA module request select register
DREQn: DMA transfer request
DACKn: DMA transfer acknowledge
TENDn: DMA transfer end
n = 0 to 3
Figure 7.1 Block Diagram of DMAC
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 231 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 7.1 shows the pin configuration of the DMAC.
Table 7.1
Pin Configuration
Channel
Pin Name
Abbr.
I/O
Function
0
DMA transfer request 0
DREQ0
Input
Channel 0 external request
DMA transfer acknowledge 0
DACK0
Output
Channel 0 single address transfer
acknowledge
DMA transfer end 0
TEND0
Output
Channel 0 transfer end
DMA transfer request 1
DREQ1
Input
Channel 1 external request
DMA transfer acknowledge 1
DACK1
Output
Channel 1 single address transfer
acknowledge
DMA transfer end 1
TEND1
Output
Channel 1 transfer end
DMA transfer request 2
DREQ2
Input
Channel 2 external request
DMA transfer acknowledge 2
DACK2
Output
Channel 2 single address transfer
acknowledge
DMA transfer end 2
TEND2
Output
Channel 2 transfer end
DMA transfer request 3
DREQ3
Input
Channel 3 external request
DMA transfer acknowledge 3
DACK3
Output
Channel 3 single address transfer
acknowledge
DMA transfer end 3
TEND3
Output
Channel 3 transfer end
1
2
3
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 232 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.3
Register Descriptions
The DMAC has the following registers.
Channel 0:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DMA source address register_0 (DSAR_0)
DMA destination address register_0 (DDAR_0)
DMA offset register_0 (DOFR_0)
DMA transfer count register_0 (DTCR_0)
DMA block size register_0 (DBSR_0)
DMA mode control register_0 (DMDR_0)
DMA address control register_0 (DACR_0)
DMA module request select register_0 (DMRSR_0)
Channel 1:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DMA source address register_1 (DSAR_1)
DMA destination address register_1 (DDAR_1)
DMA offset register_1 (DOFR_1)
DMA transfer count register_1 (DTCR_1)
DMA block size register_1 (DBSR_1)
DMA mode control register_1 (DMDR_1)
DMA address control register_1 (DACR_1)
DMA module request select register_1 (DMRSR_1)
Channel 2:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DMA source address register_2 (DSAR_2)
DMA destination address register_2 (DDAR_2)
DMA offset register_2 (DOFR_2)
DMA transfer count register_2 (DTCR_2)
DMA block size register_2 (DBSR_2)
DMA mode control register_2 (DMDR_2)
DMA address control register_2 (DACR_2)
DMA module request select register_2 (DMRSR_2)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 233 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Channel 3:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DMA source address register_3 (DSAR_3)
DMA destination address register_3 (DDAR_3)
DMA offset register_3 (DOFR_3)
DMA transfer count register_3 (DTCR_3)
DMA block size register_3 (DBSR_3)
DMA mode control register_3 (DMDR_3)
DMA address control register_3 (DACR_3)
DMA module request select register_3 (DMRSR_3)
7.3.1
DMA Source Address Register (DSAR)
DSAR is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies the transfer source address. DSAR
updates the transfer source address every time data is transferred. When DDAR is specified as the
destination address (the DIRS bit in DACR is 1) in single address mode, DSAR is ignored.
Although DSAR can always be read from by the CPU, it must be read from in longwords and
must not be written to while data for the channel is being transferred.
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 234 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.3.2
DMA Destination Address Register (DDAR)
DDAR is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies the transfer destination address. DDAR
updates the transfer destination address every time data is transferred. When DSAR is specified as
the source address (the DIRS bit in DACR is 0) in single address mode, DDAR is ignored.
Although DDAR can always be read from by the CPU, it must be read from in longwords and
must not be written to while data for the channel is being transferred.
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 235 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.3.3
DMA Offset Register (DOFR)
DOFR is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies the offset to update the source and
destination addresses. Although different values are specified for individual channels, the same
values must be specified for the source and destination sides of a single channel.
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 236 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.3.4
DMA Transfer Count Register (DTCR)
DTCR is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies the size of data to be transferred (total
transfer size).
To transfer 1-byte data in total, set H'00000001 in DTCR. When H'00000000 is set in this register,
it means that the total transfer size is not specified and data is transferred with the transfer counter
stopped (free running mode). When H'FFFFFFFF is set, the total transfer size is 4 Gbytes
(4,294,967,295), which is the maximum size. While data is being transferred, this register
indicates the remaining transfer size. The value corresponding to its data access size is subtracted
every time data is transferred (byte: −1, word: −2, and longword: −4).
Although DTCR can always be read from by the CPU, it must be read from in longwords and
must not be written to while data for the channel is being transferred.
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 237 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.3.5
DMA Block Size Register (DBSR)
DBSR specifies the repeat size or block size. DBSR is enabled in repeat transfer mode and block
transfer mode and is disabled in normal transfer mode.
Bit
Bit Name
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
BKSZH31
BKSZH30
BKSZH29
BKSZH28
BKSZH27
BKSZH26
BKSZH25
BKSZH24
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
BKSZH22
BKSZH21
BKSZH20
BKSZH19
BKSZH18
BKSZH17
BKSZH16
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
BKSZ15
BKSZ14
BKSZ13
BKSZ12
BKSZ11
BKSZ10
BKSZ9
BKSZ8
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BKSZ7
BKSZ6
BKSZ5
BKSZ4
BKSZ3
BKSZ2
BKSZ1
BKSZ0
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
R/W
23
R/W
Bit Name
0
R/W
BKSZH23
Initial Value
Bit Name
0
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
31 to 16 BKSZH31 to Undefined R/W
BKSZH16
Specify the repeat size or block size.
15 to 0
Indicate the remaining repeat or block size while the
DMA is in operation. The value is decremented by 1
every time data is transferred. When the remaining size
becomes 0, the value of the BKSZH bits is loaded. Set
the same value as the BKSZH bits.
BKSZ15 to
BKSZ0
Undefined
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 238 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
When H'0001 is set, the repeat or block size is one byte,
one word, or one longword. When H'0000 is set, it
means the maximum value (refer to table 7.1). While the
DMA is in operation, the setting is fixed.
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Table 7.2
Data Access Size, Valid Bits, and Settable Size
Mode
Data Access Size BKSZH Valid Bits BKSZ Valid Bits
Byte
Repeat transfer
and block transfer Word
31 to 16
15 to 0
1 to 65,536
2 to 131,072
Longword
7.3.6
Settable Size
(Byte)
4 to 262,144
DMA Mode Control Register (DMDR)
DMDR controls the DMAC operation.
• DMDR_0
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
DTE
DACKE
TENDE

DREQS
NRD


0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
ACT



ERRF

ESIF
DTIF
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R/(W)*
R
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Note: *
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
DTSZ1
DTSZ0
MDS1
MDS0
TSEIE

ESIE
DTIE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTF1
DTF0
DTA


DMAP2
DMAP1
DMAP0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Only 0 can be written to this bit after having been read as 1, to clear the flag.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 239 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
• DMDR_1 to DMDR_3
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
DTE
DACKE
TENDE

DREQS
NRD


0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
ACT





ESIF
DTIF
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Bit
Bit Name
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
DTSZ1
DTSZ0
MDS1
MDS0
TSEIE

ESIE
DTIE
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Note: *
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTF1
DTF0
DTA


DMAP2
DMAP1
DMAP0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Only 0 can be written to this bit after having been read as 1, to clear the flag.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 240 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
31
DTE
0
R/W
Data Transfer Enable
Enables/disables a data transfer for the corresponding
channel. When this bit is set to 1, it indicates that the
DMAC is in operation.
Setting this bit to 1 starts a transfer when the autorequest is selected. When the on-chip module interrupt
or external request is selected, a transfer request after
setting this bit to 1 starts the transfer. While data is
being transferred, clearing this bit to 0 stops the
transfer.
In block transfer mode, if writing 0 to this bit while data is
being transferred, this bit is cleared to 0 after the current
1-block size data transfer.
If an event which stops (sustains) a transfer occurs
externally, this bit is automatically cleared to 0 to stop
the transfer.
Operating modes and transfer methods must not be
changed while this bit is set to 1.
0: Disables a data transfer
1: Enables a data transfer (DMA is in operation)
[Clearing conditions]
•
When the specified total transfer size of transfers is
completed
•
When a transfer is stopped by an overflow interrupt
by a repeat size end
•
When a transfer is stopped by an overflow interrupt
by an extended repeat size end
•
When a transfer is stopped by a transfer size error
interrupt
•
When clearing this bit to 0 to stop a transfer
In block transfer mode, this bit changes after the current
block transfer.
•
When an address error or an NMI interrupt is
requested
•
In the reset state or hardware standby mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 241 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
30
DACKE
0
R/W
DACK Signal Output Enable
Enables/disables the DACK signal output in single
address mode. This bit is ignored in dual address mode.
0: Enables DACK signal output
1: Disables DACK signal output
29
TENDE
0
R/W
TEND Signal Output Enable
Enables/disables the TEND signal output.
0: Enables TEND signal output
1: Disables TEND signal output
28

0
R/W
Reserved
Initial value should not be changed.
27
DREQS
0
R/W
DREQ Select
Selects whether a low level or the falling edge of the
DREQ signal used in external request mode is detected.
When a block transfer is performed in external request
mode, clear this bit to 0.
0: Low level detection
1: Falling edge detection (the first transfer after a
transfer enabled is detected on a low level)
26
NRD
0
R/W
Next Request Delay
Selects the accepting timing of the next transfer request.
0: Starts accepting the next transfer request after
completion of the current transfer
1: Starts accepting the next transfer request one cycle
after completion of the current transfer
25, 24

All 0
R
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
23
ACT
0
R
Active State
Indicates the operating state for the channel.
0: Waiting for a transfer request or a transfer disabled
state by clearing the DTE bit to 0
1: Active state
22 to 20 
All 0
R
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 242 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
19
ERRF
0
R/(W)* System Error Flag
Description
Indicates that an address error or an NMI interrupt has
been generated. This bit is available only in DMDR_0.
Setting this bit to 1 prohibits writing to the DTE bit for all
the channels. This bit is reserved in DMDR_1 to
DMDR_3. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
0: An address error or an NMI interrupt has not been
generated
1: An address error or an NMI interrupt has been
generated
[Clearing condition]
•
When clearing to 0 after reading ERRF = 1
[Setting condition]
•
When an address error or an NMI interrupt has been
generated
However, when an address error or an NMI interrupt has
been generated in DMAC module stop mode, this bit is
not set to 1.
18

0
R
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
17
ESIF
0
R/(W)* Transfer Escape Interrupt Flag
Indicates that a transfer escape end interrupt has been
requested. A transfer escape end means that a transfer
is terminated before the transfer counter reaches 0.
0: A transfer escape end interrupt has not been
requested
1: A transfer escape end interrupt has been requested
[Clearing conditions]
•
When setting the DTE bit to 1
•
When clearing to 0 before reading ESIF = 1
[Setting conditions]
•
When a transfer size error interrupt is requested
•
When a repeat size end interrupt is requested
•
When a transfer end interrupt by an extended repeat
area overflow is requested
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 243 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
16
DTIF
0
R/(W)* Data Transfer Interrupt Flag
Description
Indicates that a transfer end interrupt by the transfer
counter has been requested.
0: A transfer end interrupt by the transfer counter has
not been requested
1: A transfer end interrupt by the transfer counter has
been requested
[Clearing conditions]
•
When setting the DTE bit to 1
•
When clearing to 0 after reading DTIF = 1
[Setting condition]
•
When DTCR reaches 0 and the transfer is
completed
15
DTSZ1
0
R/W
Data Access Size 1 and 0
14
DTSZ0
0
R/W
Select the data access size for a transfer.
00: Byte size (eight bits)
01: Word size (16 bits)
10: Longword size (32 bits)
11: Setting prohibited
13
MDS1
0
R/W
Transfer Mode Select 1 and 0
12
MDS0
0
R/W
Select the transfer mode.
00: Normal transfer mode
01: Block transfer mode
10: Repeat transfer mode
11: Setting prohibited
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 244 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
11
TSEIE
0
R/W
Transfer Size Error Interrupt Enable
Enables/disables a transfer size error interrupt.
When the next transfer is requested while this bit is set
to 1 and the contents of the transfer counter is less than
the size of data to be transferred at a single transfer
request, the DTE bit is cleared to 0. At this time, the
ESIF bit is set to 1 to indicate that a transfer size error
interrupt has been requested.
The sources of a transfer size error are as follows:
•
In normal or repeat transfer mode, the total transfer
size set in DTCR is less than the data access size
•
In block transfer mode, the total transfer size set in
DTCR is less than the block size
0: Disables a transfer size error interrupt request
1: Enables a transfer size error interrupt request
10

0
R
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
9
ESIE
0
R/W
Transfer Escape Interrupt Enable
Enables/disables a transfer escape end interrupt
request. When the ESIF bit is set to 1 with this bit set to
1, a transfer escape end interrupt is requested to the
CPU or DTC. The transfer end interrupt request is
cleared by clearing this bit or the ESIF bit to 0.
0: Disables a transfer escape end interrupt
1: Enables a transfer escape end interrupt
8
DTIE
0
R/W
Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable
Enables/disables a transfer end interrupt request by the
transfer counter. When the DTIF bit is set to 1 with this
bit set to 1, a transfer end interrupt is requested to the
CPU or DTC. The transfer end interrupt request is
cleared by clearing this bit or the DTIF bit to 0.
0: Disables a transfer end interrupt
1: Enables a transfer end interrupt
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 245 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
DTF1
0
R/W
Data Transfer Factor 1 and 0
6
DTF0
0
R/W
Select a DMAC activation source. When the on-chip
peripheral module setting is selected, the interrupt
source should be selected by DMRSR. When the
external request setting is selected, the sampling
method should be selected by the DREQS bit.
00: Auto request (cycle stealing)
01: Auto request (burst access)
10: On-chip module interrupt
11: External request
5
DTA
0
R/W
Data Transfer Acknowledge
This bit is valid in DMA transfer by the on-chip module
interrupt source. This bit enables or disables to clear the
source flag selected by DMRSR.
0: To clear the source in DMA transfer is disabled.
Since the on-chip module interrupt source is not
cleared in DMA transfer, it should be cleared by the
CPU or DTC transfer.
1: To clear the source in DMA transfer is enabled.
Since the on-chip module interrupt source is cleared
in DMA transfer, it does not require an interrupt by
the CPU or DTC transfer.
4, 3

All 0
R
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 246 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2
DMAP2
0
R/W
DMA Priority Level 2 to 0
1
DMAP1
0
R/W
0
DMAP0
0
R/W
Select the priority level of the DMAC when using the
CPU priority control function over DTC and DMAC.
When the CPU has priority over the DMAC, the DMAC
masks a transfer request and waits for the timing when
the CPU priority becomes lower than the DMAC priority.
The priority levels can be set to the individual channels.
This bit is valid when the CPUPCE bit in CPUPCR is set
to 1.
000: Priority level 0 (low)
001: Priority level 1
010: Priority level 2
011: Priority level 3
100: Priority level 4
101: Priority level 5
110: Priority level 6
111: Priority level 7 (high)
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to, to clear the flag.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 247 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.3.7
DMA Address Control Register (DACR)
DACR specifies the operating mode and transfer method.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
AMS
DIRS



RPTIE
ARS1
ARS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Bit Name


SAT1
SAT0


DAT1
DAT0
R/W
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
SARIE


SARA4
SARA3
SARA2
SARA1
SARA0
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DARIE


DARA4
DARA3
DARA2
DARA1
DARA0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
31
AMS
0
R/W
Address Mode Select
Selects address mode from single or dual address
mode. In single address mode, the DACK pin is enabled
according to the DACKE bit.
0: Dual address mode
1: Single address mode
30
DIRS
0
R/W
Single Address Direction Select
Specifies the data transfer direction in single address
mode. This bit s ignored in dual address mode.
0: Specifies DSAR as source address
1: Specifies DDAR as destination address
29 to 27 
0
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 248 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
26
RPTIE
0
R/W
25
24
ARS1
ARS0
0
0
R/W
R/W
Repeat Size End Interrupt Enable
Enables/disables a repeat size end interrupt request.
In repeat transfer mode, when the next transfer is
requested after completion of a 1-repeat-size data
transfer while this bit is set to 1, the DTE bit in DMDR is
cleared to 0. At this time, the ESIF bit in DMDR is set to
1 to indicate that a repeat size end interrupt is
requested. Even when the repeat area is not specified
(ARS1 = 1 and ARS0 = 0), a repeat size end interrupt
after a 1-block data transfer can be requested.
In addition, in block transfer mode, when the next
transfer is requested after 1-block data transfer while
this bit is set to 1, the DTE bit in DMDR is cleared to 0.
At this time, the ESIF bit in DMDR is set to 1 to indicate
that a repeat size end interrupt is requested.
0: Disables a repeat size end interrupt
1: Enables a repeat size end interrupt
Area Select 1 and 0
Specify the block area or repeat area in block or repeat
transfer mode.
00: Specify the block area or repeat area on the source
address
01: Specify the block area or repeat area on the
destination address
10: Do not specify the block area or repeat area
11: Setting prohibited
23, 22

All 0
R
21
20
SAT1
SAT0
0
0
R/W
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
Source Address Update Mode 1 and 0
Select the update method of the source address
(DSAR). When DSAR is not specified as the transfer
source in single address mode, this bit is ignored.
00: Source address is fixed
01: Source address is updated by adding the offset
10: Source address is updated by adding 1, 2, or 4
according to the data access size
11: Source address is updated by subtracting 1, 2, or 4
according to the data access size
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 249 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
19, 18

All 0
R
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
17
DAT1
0
R/W
Destination Address Update Mode 1 and 0
16
DAT0
0
R/W
Select the update method of the destination address
(DDAR). When DDAR is not specified as the transfer
destination in single address mode, this bit is ignored.
00: Destination address is fixed
01: Destination address is updated by adding the offset
10: Destination address is updated by adding 1, 2, or 4
according to the data access size
11: Destination address is updated by subtracting 1, 2,
or 4 according to the data access size
15
SARIE
0
R/W
Interrupt Enable for Source Address Extended Area
Overflow
Enables/disables an interrupt request for an extended
area overflow on the source address.
When an extended repeat area overflow on the source
address occurs while this bit is set to 1, the DTE bit in
DMDR is cleared to 0. At this time, the ESIF bit in
DMDR is set to 1 to indicate an interrupt by an extended
repeat area overflow on the source address is
requested.
When block transfer mode is used with the extended
repeat area function, an interrupt is requested after
completion of a 1-block size transfer. When setting the
DTE bit in DMDR of the channel for which a transfer has
been stopped to 1, the transfer is resumed from the
state when the transfer is stopped.
When the extended repeat area is not specified, this bit
is ignored.
0: Disables an interrupt request for an extended area
overflow on the source address
1: Enables an interrupt request for an extended area
overflow on the source address
14, 13

All 0
R
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 250 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
12
SARA4
0
R/W
Source Address Extended Repeat Area
11
SARA3
0
R/W
10
SARA2
0
R/W
9
SARA1
0
R/W
8
SARA0
0
R/W
Specify the extended repeat area on the source address
(DSAR). With the extended repeat area, the specified
lower address bits are updated and the remaining upper
address bits are fixed. The extended repeat area size is
specified from four bytes to 128 Mbytes in units of byte
and a power of 2.
When the lower address is overflowed from the
extended repeat area by address update, the address
becomes the start address and the end address of the
area for address addition and subtraction, respectively.
When an overflow in the extended repeat area occurs
with the SARIE bit set to 1, an interrupt can be
requested. Table 7.3 shows the settings and areas of
the extended repeat area.
7
DARIE
0
R/W
Destination Address Extended Repeat Area Overflow
Interrupt Enable
Enables/disables an interrupt request for an extended
area overflow on the destination address.
When an extended repeat area overflow on the
destination address occurs while this bit is set to 1, the
DTE bit in DMDR is cleared to 0. At this time, the ESIF
bit in DMDR is set to 1 to indicate an interrupt by an
extended repeat area overflow on the destination
address is requested.
When block transfer mode is used with the extended
repeat area function, an interrupt is requested after
completion of a 1-block size transfer. When setting the
DTE bit in DMDR of the channel for which the transfer
has been stopped to 1, the transfer is resumed from the
state when the transfer is stopped.
When the extended repeat area is not specified, this bit
is ignored.
0: Disables an interrupt request for an extended area
overflow on the destination address
1: Enables an interrupt request for an extended area
overflow on the destination address
6, 5

All 0
R
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 251 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
4
DARA4
0
R/W
Destination Address Extended Repeat Area
3
DARA3
0
R/W
2
DARA2
0
R/W
1
DARA1
0
R/W
0
DARA0
0
R/W
Specify the extended repeat area on the destination
address (DDAR). With the extended repeat area, the
specified lower address bits are updated and the
remaining upper address bits are fixed. The extended
repeat area size is specified from four bytes to 128
Mbytes in units of byte and a power of 2.
When the lower address is overflowed from the
extended repeat area by address update, the address
becomes the start address and the end address of the
area for address addition and subtraction, respectively.
When an overflow in the extended repeat area occurs
with the DARIE bit set to 1, an interrupt can be
requested. Table 7.3 shows the settings and areas of
the extended repeat area.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 252 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Table 7.3
Settings and Areas of Extended Repeat Area
SARA4 to
SARA0 or
DARA4 to
DARA0
Extended Repeat Area
00000
Not specified
00001
2 bytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 1 bit of the address
00010
4 bytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 2 bits of the address
00011
8 bytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 3 bits of the address
00100
16 bytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 4 bits of the address
00101
32 bytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 5 bits of the address
00110
64 bytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 6 bits of the address
00111
128 bytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 7 bits of the address
01000
256 bytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 8 bits of the address
01001
512 bytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 9 bits of the address
01010
1 kbyte specified as extended repeat area by the lower 10 bits of the address
01011
2 kbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 11 bits of the address
01100
4 kbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 12 bits of the address
01101
8 kbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 13 bits of the address
01110
16 kbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 14 bits of the address
01111
32 kbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 15 bits of the address
10000
64 kbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 16 bits of the address
10001
128 kbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 17 bits of the address
10010
256 kbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 18 bits of the address
10011
512 kbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 19 bits of the address
10100
1 Mbyte specified as extended repeat area by the lower 20 bits of the address
10101
2 Mbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 21 bits of the address
10110
4 Mbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 22 bits of the address
10111
8 Mbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 23 bits of the address
11000
16 Mbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 24 bits of the address
11001
32 Mbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 25 bits of the address
11010
64 Mbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 26 bits of the address
11011
128 Mbytes specified as extended repeat area by the lower 27 bits of the address
111××
Setting prohibited
[Legend]
×: Don't care
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 253 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.3.8
DMA Module Request Select Register (DMRSR)
DMRSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies the on-chip module interrupt source.
The vector number of the interrupt source is specified in eight bits. However, 0 is regarded as no
interrupt source. For the vector numbers of the interrupt sources, refer to table 7.5.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7.4
Transfer Modes
Table 7.4 shows the DMAC transfer modes. The transfer modes can be specified to the individual
channels.
Table 7.4
Transfer Modes
Address Register
Address
Mode
Transfer mode
Dual
address
•
Normal transfer
•
Repeat transfer
•
Activation Source
Common Function
Source
Destination
•
•
DSAR
DDAR
On-chip module
interrupt
Total transfer
size: 1 to 4
Gbytes or not
specified
•
Offset addition
External request
•
Extended repeat
area function
DSAR/
DACK
DACK/
DDAR
Block transfer
Repeat or block size •
= 1 to 65,536 bytes,
1 to 65,536 words, or •
1 to 65,536
longwords
Single
address
Auto request
(activated by
CPU)
•
Instead of specifying the source or destination address
registers, data is directly transferred from/to the external
device using the DACK pin
•
The same settings as above are available other than address
register setting (e.g., above transfer modes can be specified)
•
One transfer can be performed in one bus cycle (the types of
transfer modes are the same as those of dual address modes)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 254 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
When the auto request setting is selected as the activation source, the cycle stealing or burst access
can be selected. When the total transfer size is not specified (DTCR = H'00000000), the transfer
counter is stopped and the transfer is continued without the limitation of the transfer count.
7.5
Operations
7.5.1
Address Modes
(1)
Dual Address Mode
In dual address mode, the transfer source address is specified in DSAR and the transfer destination
address is specified in DDAR. A transfer at a time is performed in two bus cycles (when the data
bus width is less than the data access size or the access address is not aligned with the boundary of
the data access size, the number of bus cycles are needed more than two because one bus cycle is
divided into multiple bus cycles).
In the first bus cycle, data at the transfer source address is read and in the next cycle, the read data
is written to the transfer destination address.
The read and write cycles are not separated. Other bus cycles (bus cycle by other bus masters,
refresh cycle, and external bus release cycle) are not generated between read and write cycles.
The TEND signal output is enabled or disabled by the TENDE bit in DMDR. The TEND signal is
output in two bus cycles. When an idle cycle is inserted before the bus cycle, the TEND signal is
also output in the idle cycle. The DACK signal is not output.
Figure 7.2 shows an example of the signal timing in dual address mode and figure 7.3 shows the
operation in dual address mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 255 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
DMA read
cycle
DMA write
cycle
DSAR
DDAR
Bφ
Address bus
RD
WR
TEND
Figure 7.2 Example of Signal Timing in Dual Address Mode
Transfer
Address TA
Address TB
Address update setting is as follows:
Source address increment
Fixed destination address
Address BA
Figure 7.3 Operations in Dual Address Mode
(2)
Single Address Mode
In single address mode, data between an external device and an external memory is directly
transferred using the DACK pin instead of DSAR or DDAR. A transfer at a time is performed in
one bus cycle. In this mode, the data bus width must be the same as the data access size. For
details on the data bus width, see section 6, Bus Controller (BSC).
The DMAC accesses an external device as the transfer source or destination by outputting the
strobe signal (DACK) to the external device with DACK and accesses the other transfer target by
outputting the address. Accordingly, the DMA transfer is performed in one bus cycle. Figure 7.4
shows an example of a transfer between an external memory and an external device with the
DACK pin. In this example, the external device outputs data on the data bus and the data is written
to the external memory in the same bus cycle.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 256 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
The transfer direction is decided by the DIRS bit in DACR which specifies an external device with
the DACK pin as the transfer source or destination. When DIRS = 0, data is transferred from an
external memory (DSAR) to an external device with the DACK pin. When DIRS = 1, data is
transferred from an external device with the DACK pin to an external memory (DDAR). The
settings of registers which are not used as the transfer source or destination are ignored.
The DACK signal output is enabled in single address mode by the DACKE bit in DMDR. The
DACK signal is low active.
The TEND signal output is enabled or disabled by the TENDE bit in DMDR. The TEND signal is
output in one bus cycle. When an idle cycle is inserted before the bus cycle, the TEND signal is
also output in the idle cycle.
Figure 7.5 shows an example of timing charts in single address mode and figure 7.6 shows an
example of operation in single address mode.
External
address
bus
External
data
bus
LSI
External
memory
DMAC
Data flow
External device
with DACK
DACK
DREQ
Figure 7.4 Data Flow in Single Address Mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 257 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Transfer from external memory to external device with DACK
DMA cycle
Bφ
Address bus
Address for external memory space
DSAR
RD
RD signal for external memory space
WR
High
DACK
Data output by external memory
Data bus
TEND
Transfer from external device with DACK to external memory
DMA cycle
Bφ
Address bus
RD
Address for external memory space
DDAR
High
WR
WR signal for external memory space
DACK
Data output by external device with DACK
Data bus
TEND
Figure 7.5 Example of Signal Timing in Single Address Mode
Address T
Transfer
Address B
Figure 7.6 Operations in Single Address Mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 258 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
DACK
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.5.2
(1)
Transfer Modes
Normal Transfer Mode
In normal transfer mode, one data access size of data is transferred at a single transfer request. Up
to 4 Gbytes can be specified as a total transfer size by DTCR. DBSR is ignored in normal transfer
mode.
The TEND signal is output only in the last DMA transfer. The DACK signal is output every time a
transfer request is received and a transfer starts.
Figure 7.7 shows an example of the signal timing in normal transfer mode and figure 7.8 shows
the operation in normal transfer mode.
Auto request transfer in dual address mode:
Bus cycle
DMA transfer
cycle
Last DMA
transfer cycle
Read
Read
Write
Write
TEND
External request transfer in single address mode:
DREQ
Bus cycle
DMA
DMA
DACK
Figure 7.7 Example of Signal Timing in Normal Transfer Mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 259 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Transfer
Address TA
Address TB
Total transfer
size (DTCR)
Address BA
Address BB
Figure 7.8 Operations in Normal Transfer Mode
(2)
Repeat Transfer Mode
In repeat transfer mode, one data access size of data is transferred at a single transfer request. Up
to 4 Gbytes can be specified as a total transfer size by DTCR. The repeat size can be specified in
DBSR up to 65536 × data access size.
The repeat area can be specified for the source or destination address side by bits ARS1 and ARS0
in DACR. The address specified as the repeat area returns to the transfer start address when the
repeat size of transfers is completed. This operation is repeated until the total transfer size
specified in DTCR is completed. When H'00000000 is specified in DTCR, it is regarded as the
free running mode and repeat transfer is continued until the DTE bit in DMDR is cleared to 0.
In addition, a DMA transfer can be stopped and a repeat size end interrupt can be requested to the
CPU or DTC when the repeat size of transfers is completed. When the next transfer is requested
after completion of a 1-repeat size data transfer while the RPTIE bit is set to 1, the DTE bit in
DMDR is cleared to 0 and the ESIF bit in DMDR is set to 1 to complete the transfer. At this time,
an interrupt is requested to the CPU or DTC when the ESIE bit in DMDR is set to 1.
The timings of the TEND and DACK signals are the same as in normal transfer mode.
Figure 7.9 shows the operation in repeat transfer mode while dual address mode is set.
When the repeat area is specified as neither source nor destination address side, the operation is
the same as the normal transfer mode operation shown in figure 7.8. In this case, a repeat size end
interrupt can also be requested to the CPU when the repeat size of transfers is completed.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 260 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Transfer
Address TA
Address TB
Repeat size =
BKSZH ×
data access size
Total transfer
size (DTCR)
Address BA
Address BB
Operation when the repeat area is specified
to the source side
Figure 7.9 Operations in Repeat Transfer Mode
(3)
Block Transfer Mode
In block transfer mode, one block size of data is transferred at a single transfer request. Up to 4
Gbytes can be specified as total transfer size by DTCR. The block size can be specified in DBSR
up to 65536 × data access size.
While one block of data is being transferred, transfer requests from other channels are suspended.
When the transfer is completed, the bus is released to the other bus master.
The block area can be specified for the source or destination address side by bits ARS1 and ARS0
in DACR. The address specified as the block area returns to the transfer start address when the
block size of data is completed. When the block area is specified as neither source nor destination
address side, the operation continues without returning the address to the transfer start address. A
repeat size end interrupt can be requested.
The TEND signal is output every time 1-block data is transferred in the last DMA transfer cycle.
When the external request is selected as an activation source, the low level detection of the DREQ
signal (DREQS = 0) should be selected.
When an interrupt request by an extended repeat area overflow is used in block transfer mode,
settings should be selected carefully. For details, see section 7.5.5, Extended Repeat Area
Function.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 261 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Figure 7.10 shows an example of the DMA transfer timing in block transfer mode. The transfer
conditions are as follows:
• Address mode: single address mode
• Data access size: byte
• 1-block size: three bytes
The block transfer mode operations in single address mode and in dual address mode are shown in
figures 7.11 and 7.12, respectively.
DREQ
Transfer cycles for one block
Bus cycle
CPU
CPU
DMAC
DMAC
DMAC
CPU
No CPU cycle generated
TEND
Figure 7.10 Operations in Block Transfer Mode
Address T
Transfer
Block
BKSZH ×
data access size
DACK
Address B
Figure 7.11 Operation in Single Address Mode in Block Transfer Mode
(Block Area Specified)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 262 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Address TB
Address TA
Transfer
First block
First block
BKSZH ×
data access size
Second block
Second block
Total transfer
size (DTCR)
Nth block
Nth block
Address BB
Address BA
Figure 7.12 Operation in Dual Address Mode in Block Transfer Mode
(Block Area Not Specified)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 263 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.5.3
Activation Sources
The DMAC is activated by an auto request, an on-chip module interrupt, and an external request.
The activation source is specified by bits DTF1 and DTF0 in DMDR.
(1)
Activation by Auto Request
The auto request activation is used when a transfer request from an external device or an on-chip
peripheral module is not generated such as a transfer between memory and memory or between
memory and an on-chip peripheral module which does not request a transfer. A transfer request is
automatically generated inside the DMAC. In auto request activation, setting the DTE bit in
DMDR starts a transfer. The bus mode can be selected from cycle stealing and burst modes.
(2)
Activation by On-Chip Module Interrupt
An interrupt request from an on-chip peripheral module (on-chip peripheral module interrupt) is
used as a transfer request. When a DMA transfer is enabled (DTE = 1), the DMA transfer is
started by an on-chip module interrupt.
The activation source of the on-chip module interrupt is selected by the DMA module request
select register (DMRSR). The activation sources are specified to the individual channels. Table
7.5 is a list of on-chip module interrupts for the DMAC. The interrupt request selected as the
activation source can generate an interrupt request simultaneously to the CPU or DTC. For details,
refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller.
The DMAC receives interrupt requests by on-chip peripheral modules independent of the interrupt
controller. Therefore, the DMAC is not affected by priority given in the interrupt controller.
When the DMAC is activated while DTA = 1, the interrupt request flag is automatically cleared by
a DMA transfer. If multiple channels use a single transfer request as an activation source, when
the channel having priority is activated, the interrupt request flag is cleared. In this case, other
channels may not be activated because the transfer request is not held in the DMAC.
When the DMAC is activated while DTA = 0, the interrupt request flag is not cleared by the
DMAC and should be cleared by the CPU or DTC transfer.
When an activation source is selected while DTE = 0, the activation source does not request a
transfer to the DMAC. It requests an interrupt to the CPU or DTC.
In addition, make sure that an interrupt request flag as an on-chip module interrupt source is
cleared to 0 before writing 1 to the DTE bit.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 264 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Table 7.5
List of On-chip module interrupts to DMAC
On-Chip Module Interrupt Source
On-Chip
Module
DMRSR
(Vector
Number)
ADI (conversion end interrupt for A/D converter)
A/D
86
TGI0A (TGI0A input capture/compare match)
TPU_0
88
TGI1A (TGI1A input capture/compare match)
TPU_1
93
TGI2A (TGI2A input capture/compare match)
TPU_2
97
TGI3A (TGI3A input capture/compare match)
TPU_3
101
TGI4A (TGI4A input capture/compare match)
TPU_4
106
TGI5A (TGI5A input capture/compare match)
TPU_5
110
RXI0 (receive data full interrupt for SCI channel 0)
SCI_0
145
TXI0 (transmit data empty interrupt for SCI channel 0)
SCI_0
146
RXI1 (receive data full interrupt for SCI channel 1)
SCI_1
149
TXI1 (transmit data empty interrupt for SCI channel 1)
SCI_1
150
RXI2 (receive data full interrupt for SCI channel 2)
SCI_2
153
TXI2 (transmit data empty interrupt for SCI channel 2)
SCI_2
154
RXI4 (receive data full interrupt for SCI channel 4)
SCI_4
161
TXI4 (transmit data empty interrupt for SCI channel 4)
SCI_4
162
RXI5 (receive data full interrupt for SCI channel 5)
SCI_5
220
TXI5 (transmit data empty interrupt for SCI channel 5)
SCI_5
221
RXI6 (receive data full interrupt for SCI channel 6)
SCI_6
224
TXI6 (transmit data empty interrupt for SCI channel 6)
SCI_6
225
USBINTN0 (EP1FIFO full interrupt)
USB
232
USBINTN1 (EP2FIFO empty interrupt)
USB
233
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 265 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
(3)
Activation by External Request
A transfer is started by a transfer request signal (DREQ) from an external device. When a DMA
transfer is enabled (DTE = 1), the DMA transfer is started by the DREQ assertion. When a DMA
transfer between on-chip peripheral modules is performed, select an activation source from the
auto request and on-chip module interrupt (the external request cannot be used).
A transfer request signal is input to the DREQ pin. The DREQ signal is detected on the falling
edge or low level. Whether the falling edge or low level detection is used is selected by the
DREQS bit in DMDR. To perform a block transfer, select the low level detection (DREQS = 0).
When an external request is selected as an activation source, clear the DDR bit to 0 and set the
ICR bit to 1 for the corresponding pin. For details, see section 9, I/O Ports.
7.5.4
Bus Access Modes
There are two types of bus access modes: cycle stealing and burst.
When an activation source is the auto request, the cycle stealing or burst mode is selected by bit
DTF0 in DMDR. When an activation source is the on-chip module interrupt or external request,
the cycle stealing mode is selected.
(1)
Cycle Stealing Mode
In cycle stealing mode, the DMAC releases the bus every time one unit of transfers (byte, word,
longword, or 1-block size) is completed. After that, when a transfer is requested, the DMAC
obtains the bus to transfer 1-unit data and then releases the bus on completion of the transfer. This
operation is continued until the transfer end condition is satisfied.
When a transfer is requested to another channel during a DMA transfer, the DMAC releases the
bus and then transfers data for the requested channel. For details on operations when a transfer is
requested to multiple channels, see section 7.5.8, Priority of Channels.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 266 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Figure 7.13 shows an example of timing in cycle stealing mode. The transfer conditions are as
follows:
• Address mode: Single address mode
• Sampling method of the DREQ signal: Low level detection
DREQ
Bus cycle
CPU
CPU
DMAC
CPU
DMAC
CPU
Bus released temporarily for the CPU
Figure 7.13 Example of Timing in Cycle Stealing Mode
(2)
Burst Access Mode
In burst mode, once it takes the bus, the DMAC continues a transfer without releasing the bus until
the transfer end condition is satisfied. Even if a transfer is requested from another channel having
priority, the transfer is not stopped once it is started. The DMAC releases the bus in the next cycle
after the transfer for the channel in burst mode is completed. This is similarly to operation in cycle
stealing mode. However, setting the IBCCS bit in IBCR of the bus controller makes the DMAC
release the bus to pass the bus to another bus master.
In block transfer mode, the burst mode setting is ignored (operation is the same as that in burst
mode during one block of transfers). The DMAC is always operated in cycle stealing mode.
Clearing the DTE bit in DMDR stops a DMA transfer. A transfer requested before the DTE bit is
cleared to 0 by the DMAC is executed. When an interrupt by a transfer size error, a repeat size
end, or an extended repeat area overflow occurs, the DTE bit is cleared to 0 and the transfer ends.
Figure 7.14 shows an example of timing in burst mode.
Bus cycle
CPU
CPU
DMAC
DMAC
DMAC
CPU
CPU
No CPU cycle generated
Figure 7.14 Example of Timing in Burst Mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 267 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.5.5
Extended Repeat Area Function
The source and destination address sides can be specified as the extended repeat area. The contents
of the address register repeat addresses within the area specified as the extended repeat area. For
example, to use a ring buffer as the transfer target, the contents of the address register should
return to the start address of the buffer every time the contents reach the end address of the buffer
(overflow on the ring buffer address). This operation can automatically be performed using the
extended repeat area function of the DMAC.
The extended repeat areas can be specified independently to the source address register (DSAR)
and destination address register (DDAR).
The extended repeat area on the source address is specified by bits SARA4 to SARA0 in DACR.
The extended repeat area on the destination address is specified by bits DARA4 to DARA0 in
DACR. The extended repeat area sizes for each side can be specified independently.
A DMA transfer is stopped and an interrupt by an extended repeat area overflow can be requested
to the CPU when the contents of the address register reach the end address of the extended repeat
area. When an overflow on the extended repeat area set in DSAR occurs while the SARIE bit in
DACR is set to 1, the ESIF bit in DMDR is set to 1 and the DTE bit in DMDR is cleared to 0 to
stop the transfer. At this time, if the ESIE bit in DMDR is set to 1, an interrupt by an extended
repeat area overflow is requested to the CPU. When the DARIE bit in DACR is set to 1, an
overflow on the extended repeat area set in DDAR occurs, meaning that the destination side is a
target. During the interrupt handling, setting the DTE bit in DMDR resumes the transfer.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 268 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Figure 7.15 shows an example of the extended repeat area operation.
...
When the area represented by the lower three bits of DSAR (eight bytes)
is specified as the extended repeat area (SARA4 to SARA0 = B'00011)
External memory
Area specified
by DSAR
H'23FFFE
H'23FFFF
H'240000
H'240000
H'240001
H'240001
H'240002
H'240002
H'240003
H'240003
H'240004
H'240004
H'240005
H'240005
H'240006
H'240006
H'240007
H'240007
H'240008
Repeat
An interrupt request by extended repeat area
overflow can be generated.
...
H'240009
Figure 7.15 Example of Extended Repeat Area Operation
When an interrupt by an extended repeat area overflow is used in block transfer mode, the
following should be taken into consideration.
When a transfer is stopped by an interrupt by an extended repeat area overflow, the address
register must be set so that the block size is a power of 2 or the block size boundary is aligned with
the extended repeat area boundary. When an overflow on the extended repeat area occurs during a
transfer of one block, the interrupt by the overflow is suspended and the transfer overruns.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 269 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Figure 7.16 shows examples when the extended repeat area function is used in block transfer
mode.
...
When the are represented by the lower three bits (eight bytes) of DSAR are specified as the extended
repeat area (SARA4 to SARA0 = 3) and the block size in block transfer mode is specified to 5 (bits 23
to 16 in DTCR = 5).
External memory Area specified
1st block
2nd block
by DSAR
transfer
transfer
H'23FFFE
H'23FFFF
H'240000
H'240000
H'240000
H'240000
H'240001
H'240001
H'240001
H'240001
H'240002
H'240002
H'240002
H'240003
H'240003
H'240003
H'240004
H'240004
H'240004
H'240005
H'240005
H'240005
H'240006
H'240006
H'240006
H'240007
H'240007
H'240007
H'240008
Block transfer
continued
...
H'240009
Interrupt
request
generated
Figure 7.16 Example of Extended Repeat Area Function in Block Transfer Mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 270 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.5.6
Address Update Function using Offset
The source and destination addresses are updated by fixing, increment/decrement by 1, 2, or 4, or
offset addition. When the offset addition is selected, the offset specified by the offset register
(DOFR) is added to the address every time the DMAC transfers the data access size of data. This
function realizes a data transfer where addresses are allocated to separated areas.
Figure 7.17 shows the address update method.
External memory
External memory
±0
External memory
±1, 2, or 4
+ offset
Address not
updated
(a) Address fixed
Data access size
added to or subtracted
from address (addresses
are continuous)
(b) Increment or decrement
by 1, 2, or 4
Offset is added to address
(addresses are not
continuous)
(c) Offset addition
Figure 7.17 Address Update Method
In item (a), Address fixed, the transfer source or destination address is not updated indicating the
same address.
In item (b), Increment or decrement by 1, 2, or 4, the transfer source or destination address is
incremented or decremented by the value according to the data access size at each transfer. Byte,
word, or longword can be specified as the data access size. The value of 1 for byte, 2 for word, and
4 for longword is used for updating the address. This operation realizes the data transfer placed in
consecutive areas.
In item (c), Offset addition, the address update does not depend on the data access size. The offset
specified by DOFR is added to the address every time the DMAC transfers data of the data access
size.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 271 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
The address is calculated by the offset set in DOFR and the contents of DSAR and DDAR.
Although the DMAC calculates only addition, an offset subtraction can be realized by setting the
negative value in DOFR. In this case, the negative value must be 2's complement.
(1)
Basic Transfer Using Offset
Figure 7.18 shows a basic operation of a transfer using the offset addition.
Data 1
Address A1
Transfer
Offset
Data 2
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
:
Address B1
Address B2 = Address B1 + 4
Address B3 = Address B2 + 4
Address B4 = Address B3 + 4
Address B5 = Address B4 + 4
Address A2
= Address A1 + Offset
:
:
:
Offset
Data 3
Address A3
= Address A2 + Offset
Offset
Data 4
Transfer source:
Offset addition
Transfer destination: Increment by 4 (longword)
Address A4
= Address A3 + Offset
Offset
Data 5
Address A5
= Address A4 + Offset
Figure 7.18 Operation of Offset Addition
In figure 7.18, the offset addition is selected as the transfer source address update and increment or
decrement by 1, 2, or 4 is selected as the transfer destination address. The address update means
that data at the address which is away from the previous transfer source address by the offset is
read from. The data read from the address away from the previous address is written to the
consecutive area in the destination side.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 272 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
(2)
XY Conversion Using Offset
Figure 7.19 shows the XY conversion using the offset addition in repeat transfer mode.
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
Data 8
1st transfer
Offset
Offset
Offset
Data 1
Data 5
Data 9
Data 13
Data 2
Data 6
Data 10
Data 14
Data 3
Data 7
Data 11
Data 15
Data 4
Data 8
Data 12
Data 16
Data 9
Data 10
Data 11
Data 12
Data 13
Data 14
Data 15
Data 16
1st transfer
2nd transfer
Transfer
3rd transfer
4th transfer
2nd transfer Transfer source 3rd transfer
addresses
changed
by CPU
Data 1
Data 1
Data 5
Data 5
Address
initialized Data 9
Data 9
Address
initialized Data 13
Data 13
Data 2
Data 2
Data 6
Data 6
Data 10
Data 10
Data 14
Data 14
Data 3
Data 3
Data 7
Data 7
Data 11
Data 11
Data 15
Data 15
Data 4
Data 4
Data 8
Data 8
Interrupt
request
Data 12
Data 12
Interrupt
generated
request
Data 16
Data 16
generated
Data 1
Data 2
Data 5
Data 9
Data 6
Data 10
Data 3
Data 7
Data 11
Data 4
Data 8
Data 12
Data 13
Data 14
Data 15
Data 16
Transfer
Transfer source
addresses
changed
by CPU
Interrupt
request
generated
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
Data 8
Data 9
Data 10
Data 11
Data 12
Data 13
Data 14
Data 15
Data 16
1st transfer
2nd transfer
3rd transfer
4th transfer
Figure 7.19 XY Conversion Operation Using Offset Addition in Repeat Transfer Mode
In figure 7.19, the source address side is specified to the repeat area by DACR and the offset
addition is selected. The offset value is set to 4 × data access size (when the data access size is
longword, H'00000010 is set in DOFR, as an example). The repeat size is set to 4 × data access
size (when the data access size is longword, the repeat size is set to 4 × 4 = 16 bytes, as an
example). The increment or decrement by 1, 2, or 4 is specified as the transfer destination address.
A repeat size end interrupt is requested when the repeat size of transfers is completed.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 273 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
When a transfer starts, the transfer source address is added to the offset every time data is
transferred. The transfer data is written to the destination continuous addresses. When data 4 is
transferred meaning that the repeat size of transfers is completed, the transfer source address
returns to the transfer start address (address of data 1 on the transfer source) and a repeat size end
interrupt is requested. While this interrupt stops the transfer temporarily, the contents of DSAR are
written to the address of data 5 by the CPU (when the data access size is longword, write the data
1 address + 4). When the DTE bit in DMDR is set to 1, the transfer is resumed from the state when
the transfer is stopped. Accordingly, operations are repeated and the transfer source data is
transposed to the destination area (XY conversion).
Figure 7.20 shows a flowchart of the XY conversion.
Start
Set address and transfer count
Set repeat transfer mode
Enable repeat escape interrupt
Set DTE bit to 1
Receives transfer request
Transfers data
Decrements transfer count
and repeat size
No
Transfer count = 0?
No
Yes
Repeat size = 0?
Yes
Initializes transfer source address
Generates repeat size end
interrupt request
Set transfer source address + 4
(Longword transfer)
End
: User operation
: DMAC operation
Figure 7.20 XY Conversion Flowchart Using Offset Addition in Repeat Transfer Mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 274 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
(3)
Offset Subtraction
When setting the negative value in DOFR, the offset value must be 2's complement. The 2's
complement is obtained by the following formula.
2's complement of offset = 1 + ~offset (~: bit inversion)
Example:
2's complement of H'0001FFFF
= H'FFFE0000 + H'00000001
= H'FFFE0001
The value of 2's complement can be obtained by the NEG.L instruction.
7.5.7
Register during DMA Transfer
The DMAC registers are updated by a DMA transfer. The value to be updated differs according to
the other settings and transfer state. The registers to be updated are DSAR, DDAR, DTCR, bits
BKSZH and BKSZ in DBSR, and the DTE, ACT, ERRF, ESIF, and DTIF bits in DMDR.
(1)
DMA Source Address Register
When the transfer source address set in DSAR is accessed, the contents of DSAR are output and
then are updated to the next address.
The increment or decrement can be specified by bits SAT1 and SAT0 in DACR. When SAT1 and
SAT0 = B'00, the address is fixed. When SAT1 and SAT0 = B'01, the address is added with the
offset. When SAT1 and SAT0 = B'10, the address is incremented. When SAT1 and SAT0 = B'11,
the address is decremented. The size of increment or decrement depends on the data access size.
The data access size is specified by bits DTSZ1 and DTSZ0 in DMDR. When DTSZ1 and DTSZ0
= B'00, the data access size is byte and the address is incremented or decremented by 1. When
DTSZ1 and DTSZ0 = B'01, the data access size is word and the address is incremented or
decremented by 2. When DTSZ1 and DTSZ0 = B'10, the data access size is longword and the
address is incremented or decremented by 4. Even if the access data size of the source address is
word or longword, when the source address is not aligned with the word or longword boundary,
the read bus cycle is divided into byte or word cycles. While data of one word or one longword is
being read, the size of increment or decrement is changing according to the actual data access size,
for example, +1 or +2 for byte or word data. After one word or one longword of data is read, the
address when the read cycle is started is incremented or decremented by the value according to
bits SAT1 and SAT0.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 275 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
In block or repeat transfer mode, when the block or repeat size of data transfers is completed while
the block or repeat area is specified to the source address side, the source address returns to the
transfer start address and is not affected by the address update.
When the extended repeat area is specified to the source address side, operation follows the
setting. The upper address bits are fixed and is not affected by the address update.
While data is being transferred, DSAR must be accessed in longwords. If the upper word and
lower word are read separately, incorrect data may be read from since the contents of DSAR
during the transfer may be updated regardless of the access by the CPU. Moreover, DSAR for the
channel being transferred must not be written to.
(2)
DMA Destination Address Register
When the transfer destination address set in DDAR is accessed, the contents of DDAR are output
and then are updated to the next address.
The increment or decrement can be specified by bits DAT1 and DAT0 in DACR. When DAT1
and DAT0 = B'00, the address is fixed. When DAT1 and DAT0 = B'01, the address is added with
the offset. When DAT1 and DAT0 = B'10, the address is incremented. When DAT1 and DAT0 =
B'11, the address is decremented. The incrementing or decrementing size depends on the data
access size.
The data access size is specified by bits DTSZ1 and DTSZ0 in DMDR. When DTSZ1 and DTSZ0
= B'00, the data access size is byte and the address is incremented or decremented by 1. When
DTSZ1 and DTSZ0 = B'01, the data access size is word and the address is incremented or
decremented by 2. When DTSZ1 and DTSZ0 = B'10, the data access size is longword and the
address is incremented or decremented by 4. Even if the access data size of the destination address
is word or longword, when the destination address is not aligned with the word or longword
boundary, the write bus cycle is divided into byte and word cycles. While one word or one
longword of data is being written, the incrementing or decrementing size is changing according to
the actual data access size, for example, +1 or +2 for byte or word data. After the one word or one
longword of data is written, the address when the write cycle is started is incremented or
decremented by the value according to bits SAT1 and SAT0.
In block or repeat transfer mode, when the block or repeat size of data transfers is completed while
the block or repeat area is specified to the destination address side, the destination address returns
to the transfer start address and is not affected by the address update.
When the extended repeat area is specified to the destination address side, operation follows the
setting. The upper address bits are fixed and is not affected by the address update.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 276 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
While data is being transferred, DDAR must be accessed in longwords. If the upper word and
lower word are read separately, incorrect data may be read from since the contents of DDAR
during the transfer may be updated regardless of the access by the CPU. Moreover, DDAR for the
channel being transferred must not be written to.
(3)
DMA Transfer Count Register (DTCR)
A DMA transfer decrements the contents of DTCR by the transferred bytes. When byte data is
transferred, DTCR is decremented by 1. When word data is transferred, DTCR is decremented by
2. When longword data is transferred, DTCR is decremented by 4. However, when DTCR = 0, the
contents of DTCR are not changed since the number of transfers is not counted.
While data is being transferred, all the bits of DTCR may be changed. DTCR must be accessed in
longwords. If the upper word and lower word are read separately, incorrect data may be read from
since the contents of DTCR during the transfer may be updated regardless of the access by the
CPU. Moreover, DTCR for the channel being transferred must not be written to.
When a conflict occurs between the address update by DMA transfer and write access by the CPU,
the CPU has priority. When a conflict occurs between change from 1, 2, or 4 to 0 in DTCR and
write access by the CPU (other than 0), the CPU has priority in writing to DTCR. However, the
transfer is stopped.
(4)
DMA Block Size Register (DBSR)
DBSR is enabled in block or repeat transfer mode. Bits 31 to 16 in DBSR function as BKSZH and
bits 15 to 0 in DBSR function as BKSZ. The BKSZH bits (16 bits) store the block size and repeat
size and its value is not changed. The BKSZ bits (16 bits) function as a counter for the block size
and repeat size and its value is decremented every transfer by 1. When the BKSZ value is to
change from 1 to 0 by a DMA transfer, 0 is not stored but the BKSZH value is loaded into the
BKSZ bits.
Since the upper 16 bits of DBSR are not updated, DBSR can be accessed in words.
DBSR for the channel being transferred must not be written to.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 277 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
(5)
DTE Bit in DMDR
Although the DTE bit in DMDR enables or disables data transfer by the CPU write access, it is
automatically cleared to 0 according to the DMA transfer state by the DMAC.
The conditions for clearing the DTE bit by the DMAC are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
When the total size of transfers is completed
When a transfer is completed by a transfer size error interrupt
When a transfer is completed by a repeat size end interrupt
When a transfer is completed by an extended repeat area overflow interrupt
When a transfer is stopped by an NMI interrupt
When a transfer is stopped by and address error
Reset state
Hardware standby mode
When a transfer is stopped by writing 0 to the DTE bit
Writing to the registers for the channels when the corresponding DTE bit is set to 1 is prohibited
(except for the DTE bit). When changing the register settings after writing 0 to the DTE bit,
confirm that the DTE bit has been cleared to 0.
Figure 7.21 show the procedure for changing the register settings for the channel being
transferred.
Changing register settings
of channel during operation
[1] Write 0 to the DTE bit in DMDR.
[2] Read the DTE bit.
Write 0 to DTE bit
[1]
Read DTE bit
[2]
[3] Confirm that DTE = 0. DTE = 1
indicates that DMA is transferring.
[4] Write the desired values to the
registers.
[3]
DTE = 0?
No
Yes
Change register settings
[4]
End of changing
register settings
Figure 7.21 Procedure for Changing Register Setting For Channel being Transferred
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 278 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
(6)
ACT Bit in DMDR
The ACT bit in DMDR indicates whether the DMAC is in the idle or active state. When DTE = 0
or DTE = 1 and the DMAC is waiting for a transfer request, the ACT bit is 0. Otherwise (the
DMAC is in the active state), the ACT bit is 1. When individual transfers are stopped by writing 0
and the transfer is not completed, the ACT bit retains 1.
In block transfer mode, even if individual transfers are stopped by writing 0 to the DTE bit, the 1block size of transfers is not stopped. The ACT bit retains 1 from writing 0 to the DTE bit to
completion of a 1-block size transfer.
In burst mode, up to three times of DMA transfer are performed from the cycle in which the DTE
bit is written to 0. The ACT bit retains 1 from writing 0 to the DTE bit to completion of DMA
transfer.
(7)
ERRF Bit in DMDR
When an address error or an NMI interrupt occur, the DMAC clears the DTE bits for all the
channels to stop a transfer. In addition, it sets the ERRF bit in DMDR_0 to 1 to indicate that an
address error or an NMI interrupt has occurred regardless of whether or not the DMAC is in
operation.
(8)
ESIF Bit in DMDR
When an interrupt by an transfer size error, a repeat size end, or an extended repeat area overflow
is requested, the ESIF bit in DMDR is set to 1. When both the ESIF and ESIE bits are set to 1, a
transfer escape interrupt is requested to the CPU or DTC.
The ESIF bit is set to 1 when the ACT bit in DMDR is cleared to 0 to stop a transfer after the bus
cycle of the interrupt source is completed.
The ESIF bit is automatically cleared to 0 and a transfer request is cleared if the transfer is
resumed by setting the DTE bit to 1 during interrupt handling.
For details on interrupts, see section 7.8, Interrupt Sources.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 279 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
(9)
DTIF Bit in DMDR
The DTIF bit in DMDR is set to 1 after the total transfer size of transfers is completed. When both
the DTIF and DTIE bits in DMDR are set to 1, a transfer end interrupt by the transfer counter is
requested to the CPU or DTC.
The DTIF bit is set to 1 when the ACT bit in DMDR is cleared to 0 to stop a transfer after the bus
cycle is completed.
The DTIF bit is automatically cleared to 0 and a transfer request is cleared if the transfer is
resumed by setting the DTE bit to 1 during interrupt handling.
For details on interrupts, see section 7.8, Interrupt Sources.
7.5.8
Priority of Channels
The channels of the DMAC are given following priority levels: channel 0 > channel 1 >
channel 2 > channel3. Table 7.6 shows the priority levels among the DMAC channels.
Table 7.6
Priority among DMAC Channels
Channel
Priority
Channel 0
High
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Low
The channel having highest priority other than the channel being transferred is selected when a
transfer is requested from other channels. The selected channel starts the transfer after the channel
being transferred releases the bus. At this time, when a bus master other than the DMAC requests
the bus, the cycle for the bus master is inserted.
In a burst transfer or a block transfer, channels are not switched.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 280 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Figure 7.22 shows a transfer example when multiple transfer requests from channels 0 to 2.
Channel 1 transfer
Channel 0 transfer
Channel 2 transfer
Bφ
Address bus
DMAC
operation
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 0
Wait
Bus
released
Channel 1
Channel 0
Channel 1
Bus
released
Channel 2
Channel 2
Wait
Request cleared
Request cleared
Request Selected
retained
Request Not
Request
retained selected retained
Selected
Request cleared
Figure 7.22 Example of Timing for Channel Priority
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 281 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.5.9
DMA Basic Bus Cycle
Figure 7.23 shows an examples of signal timing of a basic bus cycle. In figure 7.23, data is
transferred in words from the 16-bit 2-state access space to the 8-bit 3-state access space. When
the bus mastership is passed from the DMAC to the CPU, data is read from the source address and
it is written to the destination address. The bus is not released between the read and write cycles
by other bus requests. DMAC bus cycles follows the bus controller settings.
DMAC cycle (one word transfer)
CPU cycle
T1
T2
T1
T2
T3
T1
CPU cycle
T2
T3
Bφ
Source address
Destination address
Address bus
RD
LHWR
High
LLWR
Figure 7.23 Example of Bus Timing of DMA Transfer
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 282 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.5.10
(1)
Bus Cycles in Dual Address Mode
Normal Transfer Mode (Cycle Stealing Mode)
In cycle stealing mode, the bus is released every time one transfer size of data (one byte, one
word, or one longword) is completed. One bus cycle or more by the CPU or DTC are executed in
the bus released cycles.
In figure 7.24, the TEND signal output is enabled and data is transferred in words from the
external 16-bit 2-state access space to the external 16-bit 2-state access space in normal transfer
mode by cycle stealing.
DMA read
cycle
DMA read
cycle
DMA write
cycle
DMA write
cycle
DMA read
cycle
DMA write
cycle
Bφ
Address bus
RD
LHWR, LLWR
TEND
Bus
released
Bus
released
Bus
released
Last transfer cycle
Bus
released
Figure 7.24 Example of Transfer in Normal Transfer Mode by Cycle Stealing
In figures 7.25 and 7.26, the TEND signal output is enabled and data is transferred in longwords
from the external 16-bit 2-state access space to the 16-bit 2-state access space in normal transfer
mode by cycle stealing.
In figure 7.25, the transfer source (DSAR) is not aligned with a longword boundary and the
transfer destination (DDAR) is aligned with a longword boundary.
In figure 7.26, the transfer source (DSAR) is aligned with a longword boundary and the transfer
destination (DDAR) is not aligned with a longword boundary.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 283 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
DMA byte
read cycle
DMA word
read cycle
DMA byte
read cycle
DMA word
write cycle
DMA word
write cycle
DMA byte
read cycle
DMA word
read cycle
DMA byte
read cycle
DMA word
write cycle
DMA word
write cycle
4m + 1
4m + 2
4m + 4
4n
4n +2
4m + 5
4m + 6
4m + 8
4n + 4
4n + 6
Bφ
Address
bus
RD
LHWR
LLWR
TEND
Bus
released
Bus
released
Last transfer cycle
Bus
released
m and n are integers.
Figure 7.25 Example of Transfer in Normal Transfer Mode by Cycle Stealing
(Transfer Source DSAR = Odd Address and Source Address Increment)
DMA word
read cycle
DMA word
read cycle
DMA byte
write cycle
DMA word
write cycle
DMA byte
write cycle
DMA word
read cycle
DMA word
read cycle
DMA byte
write cycle
DMA word
write cycle
DMA byte
write cycle
4m + 2
4n + 5
4n + 6
4n + 8
4m + 4
4m + 6
4n + 1
4n + 2
4n + 4
Bφ
Address
bus
4m
RD
LHWR
LLWR
TEND
Bus
released
Bus
released
Last transfer cycle
Bus
released
m and n are integers.
Figure 7.26 Example of Transfer in Normal Transfer Mode by Cycle Stealing
(Transfer Destination DDAR = Odd Address and Destination Address Decrement)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 284 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
(2)
Normal Transfer Mode (Burst Mode)
In burst mode, one byte, one word, or one longword of data continues to be transferred until the
transfer end condition is satisfied.
When a burst transfer starts, a transfer request from a channel having priority is suspended until
the burst transfer is completed.
In figure 7.27, the TEND signal output is enabled and data is transferred in words from the
external 16-bit 2-state access space to the external 16-bit 2-state access space in normal transfer
mode by burst access.
DMA read cycle DMA write cycle
DMA read cycle
DMA write cycle DMA read cycle
DMA write cycle
Bφ
Address bus
RD
LHWR, LLWR
TEND
Last transfer cycle
Bus
released
Bus
released
Burst transfer
Figure 7.27 Example of Transfer in Normal Transfer Mode by Burst Access
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 285 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
(3)
Block Transfer Mode
In block transfer mode, the bus is released every time a 1-block size of transfers at a single transfer
request is completed.
In figure 7.28, the TEND signal output is enabled and data is transferred in words from the
external 16-bit 2-state access space to the external 16-bit 2-state access space in block transfer
mode.
DMA read
cycle
DMA write
cycle
DMA read
cycle
DMA write
cycle
DMA read
cycle
DMA write
cycle
DMA read
cycle
DMA write
cycle
Bφ
Address bus
RD
LHWR, LLWR
TEND
Bus
released
Block transfer
Bus
released
Last block transfer cycle
Figure 7.28 Example of Transfer in Block Transfer Mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 286 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Bus
released
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
(4)
Activation Timing by DREQ Falling Edge
Figure 7.29 shows an example of normal transfer mode activated by the DREQ signal falling edge.
The DREQ signal is sampled every cycle from the next rising edge of the Bφ signal immediately
after the DTE bit write cycle.
When a low level of the DREQ signal is detected while a transfer request by the DREQ signal is
enabled, a transfer request is held in the DMAC. When the DMAC is activated, the transfer
request is cleared and starts detecting a high level of the DREQ signal for falling edge detection. If
a high level of the DREQ signal has been detected until completion of the DMA write cycle,
receiving the next transfer request resumes and then a low level of the DREQ signal is detected.
This operation is repeated until the transfer is completed.
DMA read
cycle
Bus released
DMA write
cycle
DMA read
cycle
Bus released
DMA write
cycle
Bus released
Bφ
DREQ
Address bus
DMA
operation
Transfer source Transfer destination
Read
Wait
Read
Wait
Duration of transfer
request disabled
Request
Channel
Write
Transfer source Transfer destination
[2]
Wait
Duration of transfer
request disabled
Request
Min. of 3 cycles
Min. of 3 cycles
[1]
Write
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Transfer request enable resumed
[7]
Transfer request enable resumed
[1]
After DMA transfer request is enabled, a low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer
request is held.
[2][5] The DMAC is activated and the transfer request is cleared.
[3][6] A DMA cycle is started and sampling the DREQ signal at the rising edge of the Bφ signal is started to detect a high level of the
DREQ signal.
[4][7] When a high level of the DREQ signal has been detected, transfer request enable is resumed after completion of the write cycle.
(A low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer request is held. This is the same as [1].)
Figure 7.29 Example of Transfer in Normal Transfer Mode Activated
by DREQ Falling Edge
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 287 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Figure 7.30 shows an example of block transfer mode activated by the DREQ signal falling edge.
The DREQ signal is sampled every cycle from the next rising edge of the Bφ signal immediately
after the DTE bit write cycle.
When a low level of the DREQ signal is detected while a transfer request by the DREQ signal is
enabled, a transfer request is held in the DMAC. When the DMAC is activated, the transfer
request is cleared and starts detecting a high level of the DREQ signal for falling edge detection. If
a high level of the DREQ signal has been detected until completion of the DMA write cycle,
receiving the next transfer request resumes and then a low level of the DREQ signal is detected.
This operation is repeated until the transfer is completed.
1-block transfer
1-block transfer
DMA read
cycle
Bus released
DMA write
cycle
DMA read
cycle
Bus released
DMA write
cycle
Bus released
Bφ
DREQ
Address bus
DMA
operation
Channel
Transfer source Transfer destination
Read
Wait
Write
Read
Wait
Duration of transfer
request disabled
Request
Transfer source Transfer destination
Request
[2]
Wait
Duration of transfer
request disabled
Min. of 3 cycles
Min. of 3 cycles
[1]
Write
[3]
[4]
[5]
Transfer request enable resumed
[6]
[7]
Transfer request enable resumed
After DMA transfer request is enabled, a low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer
request is held.
[2][5] The DMAC is activated and the transfer request is cleared.
[3][6] A DMA cycle is started and sampling the DREQ signal at the rising edge of the Bφ signal is started to detect a high level of the
DREQ signal.
[4][7] When a high level of the DREQ signal has been detected, transfer request enable is resumed after completion of the write cycle.
(A low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer request is held. This is the same as [1].)
[1]
Figure 7.30 Example of Transfer in Block Transfer Mode Activated
by DREQ Falling Edge
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 288 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
(5)
Activation Timing by DREQ Low Level
Figure 7.31 shows an example of normal transfer mode activated by the DREQ signal low level.
The DREQ signal is sampled every cycle from the next rising edge of the Bφ signal immediately
after the DTE bit write cycle.
When a low level of the DREQ signal is detected while a transfer request by the DREQ signal is
enabled, a transfer request is held in the DMAC. When the DMAC is activated, the transfer
request is cleared. Receiving the next transfer request resumes after completion of the write cycle
and then a low level of the DREQ signal is detected. This operation is repeated until the transfer is
completed.
Bus released
DMA read
cycle
DMA write
cycle
Transfer
source
Transfer
destination
DMA read
cycle
Bus released
DMA write
cycle
Bus released
Bφ
DREQ
Address bus
DMA
operation
Channel
Wait
Read
Write
Wait
Duration of transfer
request disabled
Request
Transfer
source
Read
[2]
Write
Wait
Duration of transfer
request disabled
Request
Min. of 3 cycles
Min. of 3 cycles
[1]
Transfer
destination
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Transfer request enable resumed
[7]
Transfer request enable resumed
After DMA transfer request is enabled, a low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer
request is held.
[2][5] The DMAC is activated and the transfer request is cleared.
[3][6] A DMA cycle is started.
[4][7] Transfer request enable is resumed after completion of the write cycle.
(A low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer request is held. This is the same as [1].)
[1]
Figure 7.31 Example of Transfer in Normal Transfer Mode Activated
by DREQ Low Level
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 289 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Figure 7.32 shows an example of block transfer mode activated by the DREQ signal low level.
The DREQ signal is sampled every cycle from the next rising edge of the Bφ signal immediately
after the DTE bit write cycle.
When a low level of the DREQ signal is detected while a transfer request by the DREQ signal is
enabled, a transfer request is held in the DMAC. When the DMAC is activated, the transfer
request is cleared. Receiving the next transfer request resumes after completion of the write cycle
and then a low level of the DREQ signal is detected. This operation is repeated until the transfer is
completed.
1-block transfer
1-block transfer
DMA read
cycle
Bus released
DMA write
cycle
DMA write
cycle
DMA read
cycle
Bus released
Bus released
Bφ
DREQ
Transfer
source
Address bus
DMA
operation
Channel
Wait
Read
Request
Transfer
destination
Transfer
source
Wait
Write
Read
Duration of transfer
request disabled
[1]
[2]
Write
Wait
Duration of transfer
request disabled
Request
Min. of 3 cycles
Transfer
destination
Min. of 3 cycles
[3]
[4]
[5]
Transfer request enable resumed
[6]
[7]
Transfer request enable resumed
After DMA transfer request is enabled, a low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer
request is held.
[2][5] The DMAC is activated and the transfer request is cleared.
[3][6] A DMA cycle is started.
[4][7] Transfer request enable is resumed after completion of the write cycle.
(A low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer request is held. This is the same as [1].)
[1]
Figure 7.32 Example of Transfer in Block Transfer Mode Activated
by DREQ Low Level
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 290 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Activation Timing by DREQ Low Level with NRD = 1
(6)
When the NRD bit in DMDR is set to 1, the timing of receiving the next transfer request is
delayed for one cycle.
Figure 7.33 shows an example of normal transfer mode activated by the DREQ signal low level
with NRD = 1.
The DREQ signal is sampled every cycle from the next rising edge of the Bφ signal immediately
after the DTE bit write cycle.
When a low level of the DREQ signal is detected while a transfer request by the DREQ signal is
enabled, a transfer request is held in the DMAC. When the DMAC is activated, the transfer
request is cleared. Receiving the next transfer request resumes after completion of the write cycle
and then a low level of the DREQ signal is detected. This operation is repeated until the transfer is
completed.
DMA read
cycle
Bus released
DMA read
cycle
DMA read
cycle
Bus released
DMA read
cycle
Bus released
Bφ
DREQ
Transfer
source
Address bus
Channel
Request
Duration of transfer
request disabled
Transfer
destination
Transfer
source
Duration of transfer request
disabled which is extended
by NRD
[1]
[2]
Duration of transfer
request disabled
Request
Min. of 3 cycles
Transfer
destination
Duration of transfer request
disabled which is extended
by NRD
Min. of 3 cycles
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Transfer request enable resumed
[7]
Transfer request enable resumed
[1]
After DMA transfer request is enabled, a low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer
request is held.
[2][5] The DMAC is activated and the transfer request is cleared.
[3][6] A DMA cycle is started.
[4][7] Transfer request enable is resumed one cycle after completion of the write cycle.
(A low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer request is held. This is the same as [1].)
Figure 7.33 Example of Transfer in Normal Transfer Mode Activated
by DREQ Low Level with NRD = 1
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 291 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.5.11
(1)
Bus Cycles in Single Address Mode
Single Address Mode (Read and Cycle Stealing)
In single address mode, one byte, one word, or one longword of data is transferred at a single
transfer request and after the transfer the bus is released temporarily. One bus cycle or more by the
CPU or DTC are executed in the bus released cycles.
In figure 7.34, the TEND signal output is enabled and data is transferred in bytes from the external
8-bit 2-state access space to the external device in single address mode (read).
DMA read
cycle
DMA read
cycle
DMA read
cycle
DMA read
cycle
Bφ
Address bus
RD
DACK
TEND
Bus
released
Bus
released
Bus
released
Bus
Last transfer Bus
released
released
cycle
Figure 7.34 Example of Transfer in Single Address Mode (Byte Read)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 292 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
(2)
Single Address Mode (Write and Cycle Stealing)
In single address mode, data of one byte, one word, or one longword is transferred at a single
transfer request and after the transfer the bus is released temporarily. One bus cycle or more by the
CPU or DTC are executed in the bus released cycles.
In figure 7.35, the TEND signal output is enabled and data is transferred in bytes from the external
8-bit 2-state access space to the external device in single address mode (write).
DMA write
cycle
DMA write
cycle
DMA write
cycle
DMA write
cycle
Bφ
Address bus
LLWR
DACK
TEND
Bus
released
Bus
released
Bus
released
Last transfer Bus
Bus
cycle released
released
Figure 7.35 Example of Transfer in Single Address Mode (Byte Write)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 293 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Activation Timing by DREQ Falling Edge
(3)
Figure 7.36 shows an example of single address mode activated by the DREQ signal falling edge.
The DREQ signal is sampled every cycle from the next rising edge of the Bφ signal immediately
after the DTE bit write cycle.
When a low level of the DREQ signal is detected while a transfer request by the DREQ signal is
enabled, a transfer request is held in the DMAC. When the DMAC is activated, the transfer
request is cleared and starts detecting a high level of the DREQ signal for falling edge detection. If
a high level of the DREQ signal has been detected until completion of the single cycle, receiving
the next transfer request resumes and then a low level of the DREQ signal is detected. This
operation is repeated until the transfer is completed.
Bus
released
DMA single
cycle
Bus
released
DMA single
cycle
Bus
released
Bφ
DREQ
Transfer source/
Transfer destination
Transfer source/
Transfer destination
Address bus
DACK
DMA
operation
Channel
Single
Wait
Request
Single
Wait
Duration of transfer
request disabled
Request
Min. of 3 cycles
[1]
[2]
Wait
Duration of transfer
request disabled
Min. of 3 cycles
[3]
[4]
Transfer request
enable resumed
[5]
[6]
[7]
Transfer request
enable resumed
After DMA transfer request is enabled, a low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer
request is held.
[2][5] The DMAC is activated and the transfer request is cleared.
[3][6] A DMA cycle is started and sampling the DREQ signal at the rising edge of the Bφ signal is started to detect a high level of the
DREQ signal.
[4][7] When a high level of the DREQ signal has been detected, transfer enable is resumed after completion of the write cycle.
(A low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer request is held. This is the same as [1].)
[1]
Figure 7.36 Example of Transfer in Single Address Mode Activated
by DREQ Falling Edge
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 294 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Activation Timing by DREQ Low Level
(4)
Figure 7.37 shows an example of normal transfer mode activated by the DREQ signal low level.
The DREQ signal is sampled every cycle from the next rising edge of the Bφ signal immediately
after the DTE bit write cycle.
When a low level of the DREQ signal is detected while a transfer request by the DREQ signal is
enabled, a transfer request is held in the DMAC. When the DMAC is activated, the transfer
request is cleared. Receiving the next transfer request resumes after completion of the single cycle
and then a low level of the DREQ signal is detected. This operation is repeated until the transfer is
completed.
Bus
released
DMA single
cycle
Bus
released
DMA single
cycle
Bus
released
Bφ
DREQ
Transfer source/
Transfer destination
Address bus
Transfer source/
Transfer destination
DACK
DMA
Wait
operation
Single
Request
Channel
Single
Wait
Duration of transfer
request disabled
[1]
[2]
Duration of transfer
request disabled
Request
Min. of 3 cycles
Wait
Min. of 3 cycles
[3]
[4]
Transfer request
enable resumed
[5]
[6]
[7]
Transfer request
enable resumed
After DMA transfer request is enabled, a low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer
request is held.
[2][5] The DMAC is activated and the transfer request is cleared.
[3][6] A DMA cycle is started.
[4][7] Transfer request enable is resumed after completion of the single cycle.
(A low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer request is held. This is the same as [1].)
[1]
Figure 7.37 Example of Transfer in Single Address Mode Activated
by DREQ Low Level
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 295 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Activation Timing by DREQ Low Level with NRD = 1
(5)
When the NRD bit in DMDR is set to 1, the timing of receiving the next transfer request is
delayed for one cycle.
Figure 7.38 shows an example of single address mode activated by the DREQ signal low level
with NRD = 1.
The DREQ signal is sampled every cycle from the next rising edge of the Bφ signal immediately
after the DTE bit write cycle.
When a low level of the DREQ signal is detected while a transfer request by the DREQ signal is
enabled, a transfer request is held in the DMAC. When the DMAC is activated, the transfer
request is cleared. Receiving the next transfer request resumes after one cycle of the transfer
request duration inserted by NRD = 1 on completion of the single cycle and then a low level of the
DREQ signal is detected. This operation is repeated until the transfer is completed.
DMA single
cycle
Bus
released
DMA single
cycle
Bus
released
Bus
released
Bφ
DREQ
Transfer source/
Transfer destination
Transfer source/
Transfer destination
Address bus
Channel
Request
Duration of transfer request
disabled which is extended
by NRD
Duration of transfer
Request
request disabled
Min. of 3 cycles
[1]
[2]
Duration of transfer request
disabled which is extended
by NRD
Duration of transfer
request disabled
Min. of 3 cycles
[3]
[4]
[5]
Transfer request
enable resumed
[6]
[7]
Transfer request
enable resumed
After DMA transfer request is enabled, a low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer
request is held.
[2][5] The DMAC is activated and the transfer request is cleared.
[3][6] A DMA cycle is started.
[4][7] Transfer request enable is resumed one cycle after completion of the single cycle.
(A low level of the DREQ signal is detected at the rising edge of the Bφ signal and a transfer request is held. This is the same as [1].)
[1]
Figure 7.38 Example of Transfer in Single Address Mode Activated
by DREQ Low Level with NRD = 1
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 296 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.6
DMA Transfer End
Operations on completion of a transfer differ according to the transfer end condition. DMA
transfer completion is indicated that the DTE and ACT bits in DMDR are changed from 1 to 0.
(1)
Transfer End by DTCR Change from 1, 2, or 4, to 0
When DTCR is changed from 1, 2, or 4 to 0, a DMA transfer for the channel is completed. The
DTE bit in DMDR is cleared to 0 and the DTIF bit in DMDR is set to 1. At this time, when the
DTIE bit in DMDR is set to 1, a transfer end interrupt by the transfer counter is requested. When
the DTCR value is 0 before the transfer, the transfer is not stopped.
(2)
Transfer End by Transfer Size Error Interrupt
When the following conditions are satisfied while the TSEIE bit in DMDR is set to 1, a transfer
size error occurs and a DMA transfer is terminated. At this time, the DTE bit in DMR is cleared to
0 and the ESIF bit in DMDR is set to 1.
• In normal transfer mode and repeat transfer mode, when the next transfer is requested while a
transfer is disabled due to the DTCR value less than the data access size
• In block transfer mode, when the next transfer is requested while a transfer is disabled due to
the DTCR value less than the block size
When the TSEIE bit in DMDR is cleared to 0, data is transferred until the DTCR value reaches 0.
A transfer size error is not generated. Operation in each transfer mode is shown below.
• In normal transfer mode and repeat transfer mode, when the DTCR value is less than the data
access size, data is transferred in bytes
• In block transfer mode, when the DTCR value is less than the block size, the specified size of
data in DTCR is transferred instead of transferring the block size of data. The transfer is
performed in bytes.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 297 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
(3)
Transfer End by Repeat Size End Interrupt
In repeat transfer mode, when the next transfer is requested after completion of a 1-repeat size data
transfer while the RPTIE bit in DACR is set to 1, a repeat size end interrupt is requested. When
the interrupt is requested to complete DMA transfer, the DTE bit in DMDR is cleared to 0 and the
ESIF bit in DMDR is set to 1. Under this condition, setting the DTE bit to 1 resumes the transfer.
In block transfer mode, when the next transfer is requested after completion of a 1-block size data
transfer, a repeat size end interrupt can be requested.
(4)
Transfer End by Interrupt on Extended Repeat Area Overflow
When an overflow on the extended repeat area occurs while the extended repeat area is specified
and the SARIE or DARIE bit in DACR is set to 1, an interrupt by an extended repeat area
overflow is requested. When the interrupt is requested, the DMA transfer is terminated, the DTE
bit in DMDR is cleared to 0, and the ESIF bit in DMDR is set to 1.
In dual address mode, even if an interrupt by an extended repeat area overflow occurs during a
read cycle, the following write cycle is performed.
In block transfer mode, even if an interrupt by an extended repeat area overflow occurs during a 1block transfer, the remaining data is transferred. The transfer is not terminated by an extended
repeat area overflow interrupt unless the current transfer is complete.
(5)
Transfer End by Clearing DTE Bit in DMDR
When the DTE bit in DMDR is cleared to 0 by the CPU, a transfer is completed after the current
DMA cycle and a DMA cycle in which the transfer request is accepted are completed.
In block transfer mode, a DMA transfer is completed after 1-block data is transferred.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 298 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
(6)
Transfer End by NMI Interrupt
When an NMI interrupt is requested, the DTE bits for all the channels are cleared to 0 and the
ERRF bit in DMDR_0 is set to 1. When an NMI interrupt is requested during a DMA transfer, the
transfer is forced to stop. To perform DMA transfer after an NMI interrupt is requested, clear the
ERRF bit to 0 and then set the DTE bits for the channels to 1.
The transfer end timings after an NMI interrupt is requested are shown below.
(a)
Normal Transfer Mode and Repeat Transfer Mode
In dual address mode, a DMA transfer is completed after completion of the write cycle for one
transfer unit.
In single address mode, a DMA transfer is completed after completion of the bus cycle for one
transfer unit.
(b)
Block Transfer Mode
A DMA transfer is forced to stop. Since a 1-block size of transfers is not completed, operation is
not guaranteed.
In dual address mode, the write cycle corresponding to the read cycle is performed. This is similar
to (a) in normal transfer mode.
(7)
Transfer End by Address Error
When an address error occurs, the DTE bits for all the channels are cleared to 0 and the ERRF bit
in DMDR_0 is set to 1. When an address error occurs during a DMA transfer, the transfer is
forced to stop. To perform a DMA transfer after an address error occurs, clear the ERRF bit to 0
and then set the DTE bits for the channels.
The transfer end timing after an address error is the same as that after an NMI interrupt.
(8)
Transfer End by Hardware Standby Mode or Reset
The DMAC is initialized by a reset and a transition to the hardware standby mode. A DMA
transfer is not guaranteed.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 299 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.7
Relationship among DMAC and Other Bus Masters
7.7.1
CPU Priority Control Function Over DMAC
The CPU priority control function over DMAC can be used according to the CPU priority control
register (CPUPCR) setting. For details, see section 5.7, CPU Priority Control Function Over DTC
and DMAC.
The priority level of the DMAC is specified by bits DMAP2 to DMAP0 and can be specified for
each channel.
The priority level of the CPU is specified by bits CPUP2 to CPUP0. The value of bits CPUP2 to
CPUP0 is updated according to the exception handling priority.
If the CPU priority control is enabled by the CPUPCE bit in CPUPCR, when the CPU has priority
over the DMAC, a transfer request for the corresponding channel is masked and the transfer is not
activated. When another channel has priority over or the same as the CPU, a transfer request is
received regardless of the priority between channels and the transfer is activated.
The transfer request masked by the CPU priority control function is suspended. When the transfer
channel is given priority over the CPU by changing priority levels of the CPU or channel, the
transfer request is received and the transfer is resumed. Writing 0 to the DTE bit clears the
suspended transfer request.
When the CPUPCE bit is cleared to 0, it is regarded as the lowest priority.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 300 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.7.2
Bus Arbitration among DMAC and Other Bus Masters
When DMA transfer cycles are consecutively performed, bus cycles of other bus masters may be
inserted between the transfer cycles. The DMAC can release the bus temporarily to pass the bus to
other bus masters.
The consecutive DMA transfer cycles may not be divided according to the transfer mode settings
to achieve high-speed access.
The read and write cycles of a DMA transfer are not separated. Refreshing, external bus release,
and on-chip bus master (CPU or DTC) cycles are not inserted between the read and write cycles of
a DMA transfer.
In block transfer mode and an auto request transfer by burst access, bus cycles of the DMA
transfer are consecutively performed. For this duration, since the DMAC has priority over the
CPU and DTC, accesses to the external space is suspended (the IBCCS bit in the bus control
register 2 (BCR2) is cleared to 0).
When the bus is passed to another channel or an auto request transfer by cycle stealing, bus cycles
of the DMAC and on-chip bus master are performed alternatively.
When the arbitration function among the DMAC and on-chip bus masters is enabled by setting the
IBCCS bit in BCR2, the bus is used alternatively except the bus cycles which are not separated.
For details, see section 6, Bus Controller (BSC).
A conflict may occur between external space access of the DMAC and an external bus release
cycle. Even if a burst or block transfer is performed by the DMAC, the transfer is stopped
temporarily and a cycle of external bus release is inserted by the BSC according to the external
bus priority (when the CPU external access and the DTC external access do not have priority over
a DMAC transfer, the transfers are not operated until the DMAC releases the bus).
In dual address mode, the DMAC releases the external bus after the external space write cycle.
Since the read and write cycles are not separated, the bus is not released.
An internal space (on-chip memory and internal I/O registers) access of the DMAC and an
external bus release cycle may be performed at the same time.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 301 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.8
Interrupt Sources
The DMAC interrupt sources are a transfer end interrupt by the transfer counter and a transfer
escape end interrupt which is generated when a transfer is terminated before the transfer counter
reaches 0. Table 7.7 shows interrupt sources and priority.
Table 7.7
Interrupt Sources and Priority
Abbr.
Interrupt Sources
Priority
DMTEND0
Transfer end interrupt by channel 0 transfer counter
High
DMTEND1
Transfer end interrupt by channel 1 transfer counter
DMTEND2
Transfer end interrupt by channel 2 transfer counter
DMTEND3
Transfer end interrupt by channel 3 transfer counter
DMEEND0
Interrupt by channel 0 transfer size error
Interrupt by channel 0 repeat size end
Interrupt by channel 0 extended repeat area overflow on source address
Interrupt by channel 0 extended repeat area overflow on destination address
DMEEND1
Interrupt by channel 1 transfer size error
Interrupt by channel 1 repeat size end
Interrupt by channel 1 extended repeat area overflow on source address
Interrupt by channel 1 extended repeat area overflow on destination address
DMEEND2
Interrupt by channel 2 transfer size error
Interrupt by channel 2 repeat size end
Interrupt by channel 2 extended repeat area overflow on source address
Interrupt by channel 2 extended repeat area overflow on destination address
DMEEND3
Interrupt by channel 3 transfer size error
Interrupt by channel 3 repeat size end
Interrupt by channel 3 extended repeat area overflow on source address
Interrupt by channel 3 extended repeat area overflow on destination address
Low
Each interrupt is enabled or disabled by the DTIE and ESIE bits in DMDR for the corresponding
channel. A DMTEND interrupt is generated by the combination of the DTIF and DTIE bits in
DMDR. A DMEEND interrupt is generated by the combination of the ESIF and ESIE bits in
DMDR. The DMEEND interrupt sources are not distinguished. The priority among channels are
decided by the interrupt controller and it is shown in table 7.7. For details, see section 5, Interrupt
Controller.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 302 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Each interrupt source is specified by the interrupt enable bit in the register for the corresponding
channel. A transfer end interrupt by the transfer counter, a transfer size error interrupt, a repeat
size end interrupt, an interrupt by an extended repeat area overflow on the source address, and an
interrupt by an extended repeat area overflow on the destination address are enabled or disabled by
the DTIE bit in DMDR, the TSEIE bit in DMDR, the RPTIE bit in DACR, SARIE bit in DACR,
and the DARIE bit in DACR, respectively.
A transfer end interrupt by the transfer counter is generated when the DTIF bit in DMDR is set to
1. The DTIF bit is set to 1 when DTCR becomes 0 by a transfer while the DTIE bit in DMDR is
set to 1.
An interrupt other than the transfer end interrupt by the transfer counter is generated when the
ESIF bit in DMDR is set to 1. The ESIF bit is set to 1 when the conditions are satisfied by a
transfer while the enable bit is set to 1.
A transfer size error interrupt is generated when the next transfer cannot be performed because the
DTCR value is less than the data access size, meaning that the data access size of transfers cannot
be performed. In block transfer mode, the block size is compared with the DTCR value for
transfer error decision.
A repeat size end interrupt is generated when the next transfer is requested after completion of the
repeat size of transfers in repeat transfer mode. Even when the repeat area is not specified in the
address register, the transfer can be stopped periodically according to the repeat size. At this time,
when a transfer end interrupt by the transfer counter is generated, the ESIF bit is set to 1.
An interrupt by an extended repeat area overflow on the source and destination addresses is
generated when the address exceeds the extended repeat area (overflow). At this time, when a
transfer end interrupt by the transfer counter, the ESIF bit is set to 1.
Figure 7.39 is a block diagram of interrupts and interrupt flags. To clear an interrupt, clear the
DTIF or ESIF bit in DMDR to 0 in the interrupt handling routine or continue the transfer by
setting the DTE bit in DMDR after setting the register. Figure 7.40 shows procedure to resume the
transfer by clearing a interrupt.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 303 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
TSIE bit
DTIE bit
DMAC is activated in
transfer size error state
Transfer end
interrupt
DTIF bit
RPTIE bit
[Setting condition]
When DTCR becomes 0
and transfer ends
DMAC is activated
after BKSZ bits are
changed from 1 to 0
SARIE bit
ESIE bit
Extended repeat area
overflow occurs in
source address
Transfer escape
end interrupt
ESIF bit
DARIE bit
Setting condition is satisfied
Extended repeat area
overflow occurs in
destination address
Figure 7.39 Interrupt and Interrupt Sources
Transfer end interrupt
handling routine
Transfer resumed after
interrupt handling routine
Consecutive transfer
processing
Registers are specified
[1]
DTIF and ESIF bits are
cleared to 0
[4]
DTE bit is set to 1
[2]
Interrupt handling routine
ends
[5]
Interrupt handling routine
ends (RTE instruction
executed)
[3]
Registers are specified
[6]
DTE bit is set to 1
[7]
Transfer resume
processing end
Transfer resume
processing end
[1] Specify the values in the registers such as transfer counter and address register.
[2] Set the DTE bit in DMDR to 1 to resume DMA operation. Setting the DTE bit to 1 automatically clears the DTIF or
ESIF bit in DMDR to 0 and an interrupt source is cleared.
[3] End the interrupt handling routine by the RTE instruction.
[4] Read that the DTIF or the ESIF bit in DMDR = 1 and then write 0 to the bit.
[5] Complete the interrupt handling routine and clear the interrupt mask.
[6] Specify the values in the registers such as transfer counter and address register.
[7] Set the DTE bit to 1 to resume DMA operation.
Figure 7.40 Procedure Example of Resuming Transfer by Clearing Interrupt Source
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 304 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
7.9
Notes on Usage
1. DMAC Register Access During Operation
Except for clearing the DTE bit in DMDR, the settings for channels being transferred
(including waiting state) must not be changed. The register settings must be changed during
the transfer prohibited state.
2. Settings of Module Stop Function
The DMAC operation can be enabled or disabled by the module stop control register. The
DMAC is enabled by the initial value.
Setting bit MSTPA13 in MSTPCRA stops the clock supplied to the DMAC and the DMAC
enters the module stop state. However, when a transfer for a channel is enabled or when an
interrupt is being requested, bit MSTPA13 cannot be set to 1. Clear the DTE bit to 0, clear the
DTIF or DTIE bit in DMDR to 0, and then set bit MSTPA13.
When the clock is stopped, the DMAC registers cannot be accessed. However, the following
register settings are valid in the module stop state. Disable them before entering the module
stop state, if necessary.
 TENDE bit in DMDR is 1 (the TEND signal output enabled)
 DACKE bit in DMDR is 1 (the DACK signal output enabled)
3. Activation by DREQ Falling Edge
The DREQ falling edge detection is synchronized with the DMAC internal operation.
A. Activation request waiting state: Waiting for detecting the DREQ low level. A transition to
2. is made.
B. Transfer waiting state: Waiting for a DMAC transfer. A transition to 3. is made.
C. Transfer prohibited state: Waiting for detecting the DREQ high level. A transition to 1. is
made.
After a DMAC transfer enabled, a transition to 1. is made. Therefore, the DREQ signal is
sampled by low level detection at the first activation after a DMAC transfer enabled.
4. Acceptation of Activation Source
At the beginning of an activation source reception, a low level is detected regardless of the
setting of DREQ falling edge or low level detection. Therefore, if the DREQ signal is driven
low before setting DMDR, the low level is received as a transfer request.
When the DMAC is activated, clear the DREQ signal of the previous transfer.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 305 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 7 DMA Controller (DMAC)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 306 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
This LSI includes a data transfer controller (DTC). The DTC can be activated to transfer data by
an interrupt request.
8.1
Features
• Transfer possible over any number of channels:
Multiple data transfer enabled for one activation source (chain transfer)
Chain transfer specifiable after data transfer (when the counter is 0)
• Three transfer modes
Normal/repeat/block transfer modes selectable
Transfer source and destination addresses can be selected from increment/decrement/fixed
• Short address mode or full address mode selectable
 Short address mode
Transfer information is located on a 3-longword boundary
The transfer source and destination addresses can be specified by 24 bits to select a 16Mbyte address space directly
 Full address mode
Transfer information is located on a 4-longword boundary
The transfer source and destination addresses can be specified by 32 bits to select a 4Gbyte address space directly
• Size of data for data transfer can be specified as byte, word, or longword
The bus cycle is divided if an odd address is specified for a word or longword transfer.
The bus cycle is divided if address 4n + 2 is specified for a longword transfer.
• A CPU interrupt can be requested for the interrupt that activated the DTC
A CPU interrupt can be requested after one data transfer completion
A CPU interrupt can be requested after the specified data transfer completion
• Read skip of the transfer information specifiable
• Writeback skip executed for the fixed transfer source and destination addresses
• Module stop mode specifiable
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 307 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Figure 8.1 shows a block diagram of the DTC. The DTC transfer information can be allocated to
the data area*. When the transfer information is allocated to the on-chip RAM, a 32-bit bus
connects the DTC to the on-chip RAM, enabling 32-bit/1-state reading and writing of the DTC
transfer information.
Note: * When the transfer information is stored in the on-chip RAM, the RAME bit in SYSCR
must be set to 1.
DTC
Interrupt controller
On-chip
ROM
MRA
DTC activation request
vector number
Register
control
SAR
DAR
CRA
Activation
control
8
CPU interrupt request
Interrupt source clear
request
External bus
Bus interface
External device
(memory mapped)
Bus controller
REQ
DTCVBR
ACK
[Legend]
DTC mode registers A, B
DTC source address register
DTC destination address register
DTC transfer count registers A, B
DTC enable registers A to E, G, and sH
DTC control register
DTC vector base register
Figure 8.1 Block Diagram of DTC
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 308 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
CRB
Interrupt
control
External
memory
MRA, MRB:
SAR:
DAR:
CRA, CRB:
DTCERA to DTCERE,
DTCERG, and DTCERH:
DTCCR:
DTCVBR:
MRB
DTC internal bus
On-chip
peripheral
module
Peripheral bus
On-chip
RAM
DTCCR
Internal bus (32 bits)
DTCERA to DTCERE,
DTCERG, and DTCERH
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2
Register Descriptions
DTC has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
DTC mode register A (MRA)
DTC mode register B (MRB)
DTC source address register (SAR)
DTC destination address register (DAR)
DTC transfer count register A (CRA)
DTC transfer count register B (CRB)
These six registers MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB cannot be directly accessed by the
CPU. The contents of these registers are stored in the data area as transfer information. When a
DTC activation request occurs, the DTC reads a start address of transfer information that is stored
in the data area according to the vector address, reads the transfer information, and transfers data.
After the data transfer, it writes a set of updated transfer information back to the data area.
• DTC enable registers A to E, G, and H (DTCERA to DTCERE, DTCERG, and DTCERH)
• DTC control register (DTCCR)
• DTC vector base register (DTCVBR)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 309 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.1
DTC Mode Register A (MRA)
MRA selects DTC operating mode. MRA cannot be accessed directly by the CPU.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MD1
MD0
Sz1
Sz0
SM1
SM0


Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined








R/W
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
7
MD1
Undefined 
DTC Mode 1 and 0
6
MD0
Undefined 
Specify DTC transfer mode.
Description
00: Normal mode
01: Repeat mode
10: Block transfer mode
11: Setting prohibited
5
Sz1
Undefined 
DTC Data Transfer Size 1 and 0
4
Sz0
Undefined 
Specify the size of data to be transferred.
00: Byte-size transfer
01: Word-size transfer
10: Longword-size transfer
11: Setting prohibited
3
SM1
Undefined 
Source Address Mode 1 and 0
2
SM0
Undefined 
Specify an SAR operation after a data transfer.
0x: SAR is fixed
(SAR writeback is skipped)
10: SAR is incremented after a transfer
(by 1 when Sz1 and Sz0 = B'00; by 2 when Sz1 and
Sz0 = B'01; by 4 when Sz1 and Sz0 = B'10)
11: SAR is decremented after a transfer
(by 1 when Sz1 and Sz0 = B'00; by 2 when Sz1 and
Sz0 = B'01; by 4 when Sz1 and Sz0 = B'10)
1, 0

Undefined 
Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 310 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.2
DTC Mode Register B (MRB)
MRB selects DTC operating mode. MRB cannot be accessed directly by the CPU.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CHNE
CHNS
DISEL
DTS
DM1
DM0


Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined








R/W
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
7
CHNE
Undefined 
Description
DTC Chain Transfer Enable
Specifies the chain transfer. For details, see 8.5.7,
Chain Transfer. The chain transfer condition is selected
by the CHNS bit.
0: Disables the chain transfer
1: Enables the chain transfer
6
CHNS
Undefined 
DTC Chain Transfer Select
Specifies the chain transfer condition. If the following
transfer is a chain transfer, the completion check of the
specified transfer count is not performed and activation
source flag or DTCER is not cleared.
0: Chain transfer every time
1: Chain transfer only when transfer counter = 0
5
DISEL
Undefined 
DTC Interrupt Select
When this bit is set to 1, a CPU interrupt request is
generated every time after a data transfer ends. When
this bit is set to 0, a CPU interrupt request is only
generated when the specified number of data transfer
ends.
4
DTS
Undefined 
DTC Transfer Mode Select
Specifies either the source or destination as repeat or
block area during repeat or block transfer mode.
0: Specifies the destination as repeat or block area
1: Specifies the source as repeat or block area
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 311 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
3
DM1
Undefined 
Destination Address Mode 1 and 0
2
DM0
Undefined 
Specify a DAR operation after a data transfer.
R/W
Description
0X: DAR is fixed
(DAR writeback is skipped)
10: DAR is incremented after a transfer
(by 1 when Sz1 and Sz0 = B'00; by 2 when Sz1 and
Sz0 = B'01; by 4 when Sz1 and Sz0 = B'10)
11: SAR is decremented after a transfer
(by 1 when Sz1 and Sz0 = B'00; by 2 when Sz1 and
Sz0 = B'01; by 4 when Sz1 and Sz0 = B'10)
1, 0

Undefined 
Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
[Legend]
X: Don't care
8.2.3
DTC Source Address Register (SAR)
SAR is a 32-bit register that designates the source address of data to be transferred by the DTC.
In full address mode, 32 bits of SAR are valid. In short address mode, the lower 24 bits of SAR is
valid and bits 31 to 24 are ignored. At this time, the upper eight bits are filled with the value of
bit 23.
If a word or longword access is performed while an odd address is specified in SAR or if a
longword access is performed while address 4n + 2 is specified in SAR, the bus cycle is divided
into multiple cycles to transfer data. For details, see section 8.5.1, Bus Cycle Division.
SAR cannot be accessed directly from the CPU.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 312 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.4
DTC Destination Address Register (DAR)
DAR is a 32-bit register that designates the destination address of data to be transferred by the
DTC.
In full address mode, 32 bits of DAR are valid. In short address mode, the lower 24 bits of DAR is
valid and bits 31 to 24 are ignored. At this time, the upper eight bits are filled with the value of
bit 23.
If a word or longword access is performed while an odd address is specified in DAR or if a
longword access is performed while address 4n + 2 is specified in DAR, the bus cycle is divided
into multiple cycles to transfer data. For details, see section 8.5.1, Bus Cycle Division.
DAR cannot be accessed directly from the CPU.
8.2.5
DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA)
CRA is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC.
In normal transfer mode, CRA functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536). It is
decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and bit DTCEn (n = 15 to 0) corresponding to the
activation source is cleared and then an interrupt is requested to the CPU when the count reaches
H'0000. The transfer count is 1 when CRA = H'0001, 65,535 when CRA = H'FFFF, and 65,536
when CRA = H'0000.
In repeat transfer mode, CRA is divided into two parts: the upper eight bits (CRAH) and the lower
eight bits (CRAL). CRAH holds the number of transfers while CRAL functions as an 8-bit
transfer counter (1 to 256). CRAL is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and the
contents of CRAH are sent to CRAL when the count reaches H'00. The transfer count is 1 when
CRAH = CRAL = H'01, 255 when CRAH = CRAL = H'FF, and 256 when CRAH = CRAL =
H'00.
In block transfer mode, CRA is divided into two parts: the upper eight bits (CRAH) and the lower
eight bits (CRAL). CRAH holds the block size while CRAL functions as an 8-bit block-size
counter (1 to 256 for byte, word, or longword). CRAL is decremented by 1 every time a byte
(word or longword) data is transferred, and the contents of CRAH are sent to CRAL when the
count reaches H'00. The block size is 1 byte (word or longword) when CRAH = CRAL =H'01,
255 bytes (words or longwords) when CRAH = CRAL = H'FF, and 256 bytes (words or
longwords) when CRAH = CRAL =H'00.
CRA cannot be accessed directly from the CPU.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 313 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.6
DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB)
CRB is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC in
block transfer mode. It functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536) that is decremented by 1
every time data is transferred, and bit DTCEn (n = 15 to 0) corresponding to the activation source
is cleared and then an interrupt is requested to the CPU when the count reaches H'0000. The
transfer count is 1 when CRB = H'0001, 65,535 when CRB = H'FFFF, and 65,536 when CRB =
H'0000.
CRB is not available in normal and repeat modes and cannot be accessed directly by the CPU.
8.2.7
DTC enable registers A to E, G, and H
(DTCERA to DTCERE, DTCERG, and DTCERH)
DTCER which is comprised of eight registers, DTCERA to DTCERE, DTCERG, and DTCERH,
is a register that specifies DTC activation interrupt sources. The correspondence between interrupt
sources and DTCE bits is shown in table 8.1. Use bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and
BCLR to read or write a DTCE bit. If all interrupts are masked, multiple activation sources can be
set at one time (only at the initial setting) by writing data after executing a dummy read on the
relevant register.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
DTCE15
DTCE14
DTCE13
DTCE12
DTCE11
DTCE10
DTCE9
DTCE8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTCE7
DTCE6
DTCE5
DTCE4
DTCE3
DTCE2
DTCE1
DTCE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 314 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTCE15
DTCE14
DTCE13
DTCE12
DTCE11
DTCE10
DTCE9
DTCE8
DTCE7
DTCE6
DTCE5
DTCE4
DTCE3
DTCE2
DTCE1
DTCE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
DTC Activation Enable 15 to 0
Setting this bit to 1 specifies a relevant interrupt source to
a DTC activation source.
[Clearing conditions]
• When writing 0 to the bit to be cleared after reading 1
• When the DISEL bit is 1 and the data transfer has
ended
• When the specified number of transfers have ended
These bits are not cleared when the DISEL bit is 0 and
the specified number of transfers have not ended
8.2.8
DTC Control Register (DTCCR)
DTCCR specifies transfer information read skip.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name



RRS
RCHNE


ERR
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/(W)*
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 5

All 0
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 315 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
4
RRS
0
R/W
DTC Transfer Information Read Skip Enable
Controls the vector address read and transfer
information read. A DTC vector number is always
compared with the vector number for the previous
activation. If the vector numbers match and this bit is
set to 1, the DTC data transfer is started without
reading a vector address and transfer information. If the
previous DTC activation is a chain transfer, the vector
address read and transfer information read are always
performed.
0: Transfer read skip is not performed.
1: Transfer read skip is performed when the vector
numbers match.
3
RCHNE
0
R/W
Chain Transfer Enable After DTC Repeat Transfer
Enables/disables the chain transfer while transfer
counter (CRAL) is 0 in repeat transfer mode.
In repeat transfer mode, the CRAH value is written to
CRAL when CRAL is 0. Accordingly, chain transfer may
not occur when CRAL is 0. If this bit is set to 1, the
chain transfer is enabled when CRAH is written to
CRAL.
0: Disables the chain transfer after repeat transfer
1: Enables the chain transfer after repeat transfer

2, 1
All 0
R
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
0
ERR
0
R/(W)* Transfer Stop Flag
Indicates that an address error or an NMI interrupt
occurs. If an address error or an NMI interrupt occurs,
the DTC stops.
0: No interrupt occurs
1: An interrupt occurs
[Clearing condition]
•
Note:
*
When writing 0 after reading 1
Only 0 can be written to clear this flag.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 316 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.2.9
DTC Vector Base Register (DTCVBR)
DTCVBR is a 32-bit register that specifies the base address for vector table address calculation.
Bits 31 to 28 and bits 11 to 0 are fixed 0 and cannot be written to. The initial value of DTCVBR is
H'00000000.
Bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Bit Name
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
8.3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Activation Sources
The DTC is activated by an interrupt request. The interrupt source is selected by DTCER. A DTC
activation source can be selected by setting the corresponding bit in DTCER; the CPU interrupt
source can be selected by clearing the corresponding bit in DTCER. At the end of a data transfer
(or the last consecutive transfer in the case of chain transfer), the activation source interrupt flag or
corresponding DTCER bit is cleared.
8.4
Location of Transfer Information and DTC Vector Table
Locate the transfer information in the data area. The start address of transfer information should be
located at the address that is a multiple of four (4n). Otherwise, the lower two bits are ignored
during access ([1:0] = B'00.) Transfer information can be located in either short address mode
(three longwords) or full address mode (four longwords). The DTCMD bit in SYSCR specifies
either short address mode (DTCMD = 1) or full address mode (DTCMD = 0). For details, see
section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). Transfer information located in the data area is
shown in figure 8.2
The DTC reads the start address of transfer information from the vector table according to the
activation source, and then reads the transfer information from the start address. Figure 8.3 shows
correspondences between the DTC vector address and transfer information.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 317 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Transfer information
in short address mode
Transfer information
in full address mode
Lower addresses
Start
address
0
MRA
MRB
Chain
transfer
CRA
1
2
Lower addresses
Start
address
3
SAR
DAR
CRB
MRA
SAR
MRB
DAR
CRA
CRB
Transfer information
for one transfer
(3 longwords)
Transfer information
for the 2nd transfer
in chain transfer
(3 longwords)
0
1
2
MRA MRB
3
Reserved
(0 write)
Transfer
information
for one transfer
(4 longwords)
SAR
Chain
transfer
DAR
CRA
CRB
MRA MRB
Reserved
(0 write)
Transfer
information
for the 2nd
transfer
in chain transfer
(4 longwords)
SAR
DAR
4 bytes
CRA
CRB
4 bytes
Figure 8.2 Transfer Information on Data Area
Upper: DTCVBR
Lower: H'400 + vector number × 4
DTC vector
address
+4
Vector table
Transfer information (1)
Transfer information (1)
start address
Transfer information (2)
start address
Transfer information (2)
:
:
:
+4n
Transfer information (n)
start address
:
:
:
4 bytes
Transfer information (n)
Figure 8.3 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Transfer Information
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 318 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8.1 shows correspondence between the DTC activation source and vector address.
Table 8.1
Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs
Origin of
Activation
Activation Source Source
Vector
Number
DTC Vector
Address Offset
DTCE*
Priority
External pin
IRQ0
64
H'500
DTCEA15
High
IRQ1
65
H'504
DTCEA14
IRQ2
66
H'508
DTCEA13
IRQ3
67
H'50C
DTCEA12
IRQ4
68
H'510
DTCEA11
IRQ5
69
H'514
DTCEA10
IRQ6
70
H'518
DTCEA9
IRQ7
71
H'51C
DTCEA8
IRQ8
72
H'520
DTCEA7
IRQ9
73
H'524
DTCEA6
IRQ10
74
H'528
DTCEA5
IRQ11
75
H'52C
DTCEA4
A/D
ADI
86
H'558
DTCEB15
TPU_0
TGI0A
88
H'560
DTCEB13
TGI0B
89
H'564
DTCEB12
TPU_1
TPU_2
TPU_3
TPU_4
TPU_5
TGI0C
90
H'568
DTCEB11
TGI0D
91
H'56C
DTCEB10
TGI1A
93
H'574
DTCEB9
TGI1B
94
H'578
DTCEB8
TGI2A
97
H'584
DTCEB7
TGI2B
98
H'588
DTCEB6
TGI3A
101
H'594
DTCEB5
TGI3B
102
H'598
DTCEB4
TGI3C
103
H'59C
DTCEB3
TGI3D
104
H'5A0
DTCEB2
TGI4A
106
H'5A8
DTCEB1
TGI4B
107
H'5AC
DTCEB0
TGI5A
110
H'5B8
DTCEC15
TGI5B
111
H'5BC
DTCEC14
Low
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 319 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Origin of
Activation
Activation Source Source
Vector
Number
DTC Vector
Address Offset
DTCE*
Priority
TMR_0
CMI0A
116
H'5D0
DTCEC13
High
CMI0B
117
H'5D4
DTCEC12
TMR_1
CMI1A
119
H'5DC
DTCEC11
CMI1B
120
H'5E0
DTCEC10
TMR_2
CMI2A
122
H'5E8
DTCEC9
CMI2B
123
H'5EC
DTCEC8
TMR_3
CMI3A
125
H'5F4
DTCEC7
CMI3B
126
H'5F8
DTCEC6
DMAC
DMTEND0
128
H'600
DTCEC5
DMTEND1
129
H'604
DTCEC4
DMTEND2
130
H'608
DTCEC3
DMAC
DMTEND3
131
H'60C
DTCEC2
DMEEND0
136
H'620
DTCED13
DMEEND1
137
H'624
DTCED12
DMEEND2
138
H'628
DTCED11
DMEEND3
139
H'62C
DTCED10
SCI_0
RXI0
145
H'644
DTCED5
TXI0
146
H'648
DTCED4
SCI_1
RXI1
149
H'654
DTCED3
TXI1
150
H'658
DTCED2
SCI_2
RXI2
153
H'664
DTCED1
TXI2
154
H'668
DTCED0
SCI_4
RXI4
161
H'684
DTCEE13
Note:
*
TXI4
162
H'688
DTCEE12
Low
The DTCE bits with no corresponding interrupt are reserved, and the write value should
always be 0. To leave software standby mode or all-module-clock-stop mode with an
interrupt, write 0 to the corresponding DTCE bit.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 320 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5
Operation
The DTC stores transfer information in the data area. When activated, the DTC reads transfer
information that is stored in the data area and transfers data on the basis of that transfer
information. After the data transfer, it writes updated transfer information back to the data area.
Since transfer information is in the data area, it is possible to transfer data over any required
number of channels. There are three transfer modes: normal, repeat, and block.
The DTC specifies the source address and destination address in SAR and DAR, respectively.
After a transfer, SAR and DAR are incremented, decremented, or fixed independently.
Table 8.2 shows the DTC transfer modes.
Table 8.2
DTC Transfer Modes
Transfer
Mode
Size of Data Transferred at
One Transfer Request
Memory Address Increment or
Decrement
Normal
1 byte/word/longword
Incremented/decremented by 1, 2, or 4, 1 to 65536
or fixed
Repeat*1
1 byte/word/longword
Incremented/decremented by 1, 2, or 4, 1 to 256*3
or fixed
Block*2
Block size specified by CRAH (1 Incremented/decremented by 1, 2, or 4, 1 to 65536
to 256 bytes/words/longwords) or fixed
Transfer
Count
Notes: 1. Either source or destination is specified to repeat area.
2. Either source or destination is specified to block area.
3. After transfer of the specified transfer count, initial state is recovered to continue the
operation.
Setting the CHNE bit in MRB to 1 makes it possible to perform a number of transfers with a
single activation (chain transfer). Setting the CHNS bit in MRB to 1 can also be made to have
chain transfer performed only when the transfer counter value is 0.
Figure 8.4 shows a flowchart of DTC operation, and table 8.3 summarizes the chain transfer
conditions (combinations for performing the second and third transfers are omitted).
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 321 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Start
Match &
RRS = 1
Vector number
comparison
Not match | RRS = 0
Read DTC vector
Next transfer
Read transfer
information
Transfer data
Update transfer
information
Update the start address
of transfer information
Write transfer information
CHNE = 1
Yes
No
Transfer counter = 0
or DISEL = 1
Yes
No
CHNS = 0
Yes
No
Transfer counter = 0
Yes
No
DISEL = 1
Yes
No
Clear activation
source flag
Clear DTCER/request an interrupt
to the CPU
End
Figure 8.4 Flowchart of DTC Operation
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 322 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8.3
Chain Transfer Conditions
1st Transfer
2nd Transfer
Transfer
CHNE CHNS DISEL Counter*1
0

0
Transfer
CHNE CHNS DISEL Counter*1 DTC Transfer
0
Not 0




Ends at 1st transfer

0
0*
2




Ends at 1st transfer
0

1




Interrupt request to CPU
1
0


0

0
Not 0
Ends at 2nd transfer
0

0
2
Ends at 2nd transfer
0

1


0

0
Not 0
Ends at 2nd transfer
0

0
0*2
Ends at 2nd transfer
0

1



1
1
1
1
0
1

1
1
Not 0
2
0*
Not 0
0*

Interrupt request to CPU

Ends at 1st transfer
Interrupt request to CPU

Ends at 1st transfer
Interrupt request to CPU
Notes: 1. CRA in normal mode transfer, CRAL in repeat transfer mode, or CRB in block transfer
mode
2. When the contents of the CRAH is written to the CRAL in repeat transfer mode
8.5.1
Bus Cycle Division
When the transfer data size is word and the SAR and DAR values are not a multiple of 2, the bus
cycle is divided and the transfer data is read from or written to in bytes. Similarly, when the
transfer data size is longword and the SAR and DAR values are not a multiple of 4, the bus cycle
is divided and the transfer data is read from or written to in words.
Table 8.4 shows the relationship among, SAR, DAR, transfer data size, bus cycle divisions, and
access data size. Figure 8.5 shows the bus cycle division example.
Table 8.4
Number of Bus Cycle Divisions and Access Size
Specified Data Size
SAR and DAR Values Byte (B)
Word (W)
Longword (LW)
Address 4n
1 (B)
1 (W)
1 (LW)
Address 2n + 1
1 (B)
2 (B-B)
3 (B-W-B)
Address 4n + 2
1 (B)
1 (W)
2 (W-W)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 323 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
[Example 1: When an odd address and even address are specified in SAR and DAR, respectively, and when the data size of transfer is specified as word]
Clock
DTC activation
request
DTC request
W
R
Address
B
Vector read
B
W
Transfer information Data transfer Transfer information
read
write
[Example 2: When an odd address and address 4n are specified in SAR and DAR, respectively, and when the data size of transfer is specified as longword]
Clock
DTC activation
request
DTC request
W
R
Address
B
Vector read
Transfer information
read
W
B
Data transfer
L
Transfer information
write
[Example 3: When address 4n + 2 and address 4n are specified in SAR and DAR, respectively, and when the data size of transfer is specified as longword]
Clock
DTC activation
request
DTC request
W
R
Address
W
Vector read
W
L
Transfer information Data transfer Transfer information
read
write
Figure 8.5 Bus Cycle Division Example
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 324 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.2
Transfer Information Read Skip Function
By setting the RRS bit of DTCCR, the vector address read and transfer information read can be
skipped. The current DTC vector number is always compared with the vector number of previous
activation. If the vector numbers match when RRS = 1, a DTC data transfer is performed without
reading the vector address and transfer information. If the previous activation is a chain transfer,
the vector address read and transfer information read are always performed. Figure 8.6 shows the
transfer information read skip timing.
To modify the vector table and transfer information, temporarily clear the RRS bit to 0, modify the
vector table and transfer information, and then set the RRS bit to 1 again. When the RRS bit is
cleared to 0, the stored vector number is deleted, and the updated vector table and transfer
information are read at the next activation.
Clock
DTC activation (1)
request
(2)
DTC request
Transfer
information
read skip
Address
R
Vector read
W
Transfer information Data Transfer information
read
transfer
write
R
W
Data Transfer information
transfer
write
Note: Transfer information read is skipped when the activation sources of (1) and (2) (vector numbers) are the same while RRS = 1.
Figure 8.6 Transfer Information Read Skip Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 325 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.3
Transfer Information Writeback Skip Function
By specifying bit SM1 in MRA and bit DM1 in MRB to the fixed address mode, a part of transfer
information will not be written back. This function is performed regardless of short or full address
mode. Table 8.5 shows the transfer information writeback skip condition and writeback skipped
registers. Note that the CRA and CRB are always written back regardless of the short or full
address mode. In addition in full address mode, the writeback of the MRA and MRB are always
skipped.
Table 8.5
Transfer Information Writeback Skip Condition and Writeback Skipped
Registers
SM1
DM1
SAR
DAR
0
0
Skipped
Skipped
0
1
Skipped
Written back
1
0
Written back
Skipped
1
1
Written back
Written back
8.5.4
Normal Transfer Mode
In normal transfer mode, one operation transfers one byte, one word, or one longword of data.
From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. The transfer source and destination addresses can be
specified as incremented, decremented, or fixed. When the specified number of transfers ends, an
interrupt can be requested to the CPU.
Table 8.6 lists the register function in normal transfer mode. Figure 8.7 shows the memory map in
normal transfer mode.
Table 8.6
Register Function in Normal Transfer Mode
Register
Function
Written Back Value
SAR
Source address
Incremented/decremented/fixed*
DAR
Destination address
Incremented/decremented/fixed*
CRA
Transfer count A
CRA − 1
CRB
Transfer count B
Not updated
Note:
*
Transfer information writeback is skipped.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 326 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Transfer source data area
Transfer destination data area
SAR
DAR
Transfer
Figure 8.7 Memory Map in Normal Transfer Mode
8.5.5
Repeat Transfer Mode
In repeat transfer mode, one operation transfers one byte, one word, or one longword of data. By
the DTS bit in MRB, either the source or destination can be specified as a repeat area. From 1 to
256 transfers can be specified. When the specified number of transfers ends, the transfer counter
and address register specified as the repeat area is restored to the initial state, and transfer is
repeated. The other address register is then incremented, decremented, or left fixed. In repeat
transfer mode, the transfer counter (CRAL) is updated to the value specified in CRAH when
CRAL becomes H'00. Thus the transfer counter value does not reach H'00, and therefore a CPU
interrupt cannot be requested when DISEL = 0.
Table 8.7 lists the register function in repeat transfer mode. Figure 8.8 shows the memory map in
repeat transfer mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 327 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8.7
Register Function in Repeat Transfer Mode
Written Back Value
Register Function
CRAL is not 1
SAR
Incremented/decremented/fixed DTS =0: Incremented/
*
decremented/fixed*
Source address
CRAL is 1
DTS = 1: SAR initial value
DAR
Destination address Incremented/decremented/fixed DTS = 0: DAR initial value
*
DTS =1: Incremented/
decremented/fixed*
CRAH
Transfer count
storage
CRAH
CRAH
CRAL
Transfer count A
CRAL − 1
CRAH
CRB
Transfer count B
Not updated
Not updated
Note:
*
Transfer information writeback is skipped.
Transfer source data area
(specified as repeat area)
Transfer destination data area
SAR
DAR
Transfer
Figure 8.8 Memory Map in Repeat Transfer Mode
(When Transfer Source is Specified as Repeat Area)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 328 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.6
Block Transfer Mode
In block transfer mode, one operation transfers one block of data. Either the transfer source or the
transfer destination is designated as a block area by the DTS bit in MRB.
The block size is 1 to 256 bytes (1 to 256 words, or 1 to 256 longwords). When the transfer of one
block ends, the block size counter (CRAL) and address register (SAR when DTS = 1 or DAR
when DTS = 0) specified as the block area is restored to the initial state. The other address register
is then incremented, decremented, or left fixed. From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. When
the specified number of transfers ends, an interrupt is requested to the CPU.
Table 8.8 lists the register function in block transfer mode. Figure 8.9 shows the memory map in
block transfer mode.
Table 8.8
Register Function in Block Transfer Mode
Register Function
Written Back Value
SAR
DTS =0: Incremented/decremented/fixed*
Source address
DTS = 1: SAR initial value
DAR
Destination address
DTS = 0: DAR initial value
DTS =1: Incremented/decremented/fixed*
CRAH
Block size storage
CRAH
CRAL
Block size counter
CRAH
CRB
Block transfer counter
CRB − 1
Note:
*
Transfer information writeback is skipped.
Transfer source data area
SAR
1st block
:
:
Transfer destination data area
(specified as block area)
Transfer
Block area
DAR
Nth block
Figure 8.9 Memory Map in Block Transfer Mode
(When Transfer Destination is Specified as Block Area)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 329 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.7
Chain Transfer
Setting the CHNE bit in MRB to 1 enables a number of data transfers to be performed
consecutively in response to a single transfer request. Setting the CHNE and CHNS bits in MRB
set to 1 enables a chain transfer only when the transfer counter reaches 0. SAR, DAR, CRA, CRB,
MRA, and MRB, which define data transfers, can be set independently. Figure 8.10 shows the
chain transfer operation.
In the case of transfer with CHNE set to 1, an interrupt request to the CPU is not generated at the
end of the specified number of transfers or by setting the DISEL bit to 1, and the interrupt source
flag for the activation source and DTCER are not affected.
In repeat transfer mode, setting the RCHNE bit in DTCCR and the CHNE and CHNS bits in MRB
to 1 enables a chain transfer after transfer with transfer counter = 1 has been completed.
Data area
Transfer source data (1)
Vector table
Transfer information
stored in user area
Transfer destination data (1)
DTC vector
address
Transfer information
start address
Transfer information
CHNE = 1
Transfer information
CHNE = 0
Transfer source data (2)
Transfer destination data (2)
Figure 8.10 Operation of Chain Transfer
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 330 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.8
Operation Timing
Figures 8.11 to 8.14 show the DTC operation timings.
Clock
DTC activation
request
DTC request
Address
R
Vector read
Transfer
information
read
W
Data transfer
Transfer
information
write
Figure 8.11 DTC Operation Timing
(Example of Short Address Mode in Normal Transfer Mode or Repeat Transfer Mode)
Clock
DTC activation
request
DTC request
R
Address
Vector read
Transfer
information
read
W
R
Data transfer
W
Transfer
information
write
Figure 8.12 DTC Operation Timing
(Example of Short Address Mode in Block Transfer Mode with Block Size of 2)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 331 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Clock
DTC activation
request
DTC request
Address
R
Vector
read
Transfer
information
read
W
R
Data
transfer
Transfer
information
write
Transfer
information
read
W
Data
transfer
Transfer
information
write
Figure 8.13 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Short Address Mode in Chain Transfer)
Clock
DTC activation
request
DTC request
Address
R
Vector read
Transfer information
read
W
Data Transfer information
transfer
write
Figure 8.14 DTC Operation Timing
(Example of Full Address Mode in Normal Transfer Mode or Repeat Transfer Mode)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 332 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.5.9
Number of DTC Execution Cycles
Table 8.9 shows the execution status for a single DTC data transfer, and table 8.10 shows the
number of cycles required for each execution.
Table 8.9
Mode
DTC Execution Status
Vector
Read
I
Transfer
Information
Write
L
Transfer
Information
Read
J
Data Read
L
Internal
Operation
N
Data Write
M
Normal 1
0*1
4*2
3*3
0*1
3*2.3 2*4
1*5
3*6
2*7
1
3*6
2*7
1
1
0*1
Repeat 1
0*1
4*2
3*3
0*1
3*2.3 2*4
1*5
3*6
2*7
1
3*6
2*7
1
1
0*1
Block 1
transfer
0*1
4*2
3*3
0*1
3*2.3 2*4
1*5
3•P
6
*
2•P* 1•P 3•P
6
*
2•P* 1•P 1
0*1
7
7
[Legend]
P: Block size (CRAH and CRAL value)
Note: 1. When transfer information read is skipped
2. In full address mode operation
3. In short address mode operation
4. When the SAR or DAR is in fixed mode
5. When the SAR and DAR are in fixed mode
6. When a longword is transferred while an odd address is specified in the address
register
7. When a word is transferred while an odd address is specified in the address register or
when a longword is transferred while address 4n + 2 is specified
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 333 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
Table 8.10 Number of Cycles Required for Each Execution State
On-Chip On-Chip
On-Chip I/O
Registers
External Devices
Object to be Accessed
RAM
ROM
Bus width
32
32
8
16
32
Access cycles
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
Execution Vector read SI
1
1



8
12 + 4m
4
6 + 2m
Transfer information read SJ 1
1



8
12 + 4m
4
6 + 2m
Transfer information write Sk 1
1



8
12 + 4m
4
6 + 2m
Byte data read SL
1
1
2
2
2
2
3+m
2
3+m
Word data read SL
1
1
4
2
2
4
4 + 2m
2
3+m
Longword data read SL
1
1
8
4
2
8
12 + 4m
4
6 + 2m
Byte data write SM
1
1
2
2
2
2
3+m
2
3+m
Word data write SM
1
1
4
2
2
4
4 + 2m
2
3+m
Longword data write SM
1
1
8
4
2
8
12 + 4m
4
6 + 2m
status
Internal operation SN
8
16
1
[Legend]
m: Number of wait cycles 0 to 7 (For details, see section 6, Bus Controller (BSC).)
The number of execution cycles is calculated from the formula below. Note that Σ means the sum
of all transfers activated by one activation event (the number in which the CHNE bit is set to 1,
plus 1).
Number of execution cycles = I • SI + Σ (J • SJ + K • SK + L • SL + M • SM) + N • SN
8.5.10
DTC Bus Release Timing
The DTC requests the bus mastership to the bus arbiter when an activation request occurs. The
DTC releases the bus after a vector read, transfer information read, a single data transfer, or
transfer information writeback. The DTC does not release the bus during transfer information
read, single data transfer, or transfer information writeback.
8.5.11
DTC Priority Level Control to the CPU
The priority of the DTC activation sources over the CPU can be controlled by the CPU priority
level specified by bits CPUP2 to CPUP0 in CPUPCR and the DTC priority level specified by bits
DTCP2 to DTCP0. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 334 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.6
DTC Activation by Interrupt
The procedure for using the DTC with interrupt activation is shown in figure 8.15.
DTC activation by interrupt
Clear RRS bit in DTCCR to 0
[1]
Set transfer information
(MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR,
CRA, CRB)
[2]
Set starts address of transfer
information in DTC vector table
[3]
Set RRS bit in DTCCR to 1
[4]
[1] Clearing the RRS bit in DTCCR to 0 clears the read skip flag
of transfer information. Read skip is not performed when the
DTC is activated after clearing the RRS bit. When updating
transfer information, the RRS bit must be cleared.
[2] Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB transfer
information in the data area. For details on setting transfer
information, see section 8.2, Register Descriptions. For details
on location of transfer information, see section 8.4, Location of
Transfer Information and DTC Vector Table.
[3] Set the start address of the transfer information in the DTC
vector table. For details on setting DTC vector table, see section
8.4, Location of Transfer Information and DTC Vector Table.
Set corresponding bit in
DTCER to 1
[5]
Set enable bit of interrupt
request for activation source
to 1
[6]
[4] Setting the RRS bit to 1 performs a read skip of second time or
later transfer information when the DTC is activated consecutively by the same interrupt source. Setting the RRS bit to 1 is
always allowed. However, the value set during transfer will be
valid from the next transfer.
[5] Set the bit in DTCER corresponding to the DTC activation
interrupt source to 1. For the correspondence of interrupts and
DTCER, refer to table 8.1. The bit in DTCER may be set to 1 on
the second or later transfer. In this case, setting the bit is not
needed.
Interrupt request generated
[6] Set the enable bits for the interrupt sources to be used as the
activation sources to 1. The DTC is activated when an interrupt
used as an activation source is generated. For details on the
settings of the interrupt enable bits, see the corresponding
descriptions of the corresponding module.
DTC activated
Determine
clearing method of
activation source
Clear corresponding
bit in DTCER
Clear
activation
source
[7]
[7] After the end of one data transfer, the DTC clears the activation
source flag or clears the corresponding bit in DTCER and
requests an interrupt to the CPU. The operation after transfer
depends on the transfer information. For details, see section
8.2, Register Descriptions and figure 8.4.
Corresponding bit in DTCER
cleared or CPU interrupt
requested
Transfer end
Figure 8.15 DTC with Interrupt Activation
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 335 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.7
Examples of Use of the DTC
8.7.1
Normal Transfer Mode
An example is shown in which the DTC is used to receive 128 bytes of data via the SCI.
1. Set MRA to fixed source address (SM1 = SM0 = 0), incrementing destination address (DM1 =
1, DM0 = 0), normal transfer mode (MD1 = MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz1 = Sz0 = 0). The
DTS bit can have any value. Set MRB for one data transfer by one interrupt (CHNE = 0,
DISEL = 0). Set the RDR address of the SCI in SAR, the start address of the RAM area where
the data will be received in DAR, and 128 (H'0080) in CRA. CRB can be set to any value.
2. Set the start address of the transfer information for an RXI interrupt at the DTC vector address.
3. Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1.
4. Set the SCI to the appropriate receive mode. Set the RIE bit in SCR to 1 to enable the receive
end (RXI) interrupt. Since the generation of a receive error during the SCI reception operation
will disable subsequent reception, the CPU should be enabled to accept receive error
interrupts.
5. Each time reception of one byte of data ends on the SCI, the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an
RXI interrupt is generated, and the DTC is activated. The receive data is transferred from RDR
to RAM by the DTC. DAR is incremented and CRA is decremented. The RDRF flag is
automatically cleared to 0.
6. When CRA becomes 0 after the 128 data transfers have ended, the RDRF flag is held at 1, the
DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and an RXI interrupt request is sent to the CPU. Termination
processing should be performed in the interrupt handling routine.
8.7.2
Chain Transfer
An example of DTC chain transfer is shown in which pulse output is performed using the PPG.
Chain transfer can be used to perform pulse output data transfer and PPG output trigger cycle
updating. Repeat mode transfer to the PPG's NDR is performed in the first half of the chain
transfer, and normal mode transfer to the TPU's TGR in the second half. This is because clearing
of the activation source and interrupt generation at the end of the specified number of transfers are
restricted to the second half of the chain transfer (transfer when CHNE = 0).
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 336 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
1. Perform settings for transfer to the PPG's NDR. Set MRA to source address incrementing
(SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), fixed destination address (DM1 = DM0 = 0), repeat mode (MD1 = 0,
MD0 = 1), and word size (Sz1 = 0, Sz0 = 1). Set the source side as a repeat area (DTS = 1). Set
MRB to chain transfer mode (CHNE = 1, CHNS = 0, DISEL = 0). Set the data table start
address in SAR, the NDRH address in DAR, and the data table size in CRAH and CRAL.
CRB can be set to any value.
2. Perform settings for transfer to the TPU's TGR. Set MRA to source address incrementing
(SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), fixed destination address (DM1 = DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 = MD0
= 0), and word size (Sz1 = 0, Sz0 = 1). Set the data table start address in SAR, the TGRA
address in DAR, and the data table size in CRA. CRB can be set to any value.
3. Locate the TPU transfer information consecutively after the NDR transfer information.
4. Set the start address of the NDR transfer information to the DTC vector address.
5. Set the bit corresponding to the TGIA interrupt in DTCER to 1.
6. Set TGRA as an output compare register (output disabled) with TIOR, and enable the TGIA
interrupt with TIER.
7. Set the initial output value in PODR, and the next output value in NDR. Set bits in DDR and
NDER for which output is to be performed to 1. Using PCR, select the TPU compare match to
be used as the output trigger.
8. Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1, and start the TCNT count operation.
9. Each time a TGRA compare match occurs, the next output value is transferred to NDR and the
set value of the next output trigger period is transferred to TGRA. The activation source TGFA
flag is cleared.
10. When the specified number of transfers are completed (the TPU transfer CRA value is 0), the
TGFA flag is held at 1, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and a TGIA interrupt request is sent to the
CPU. Termination processing should be performed in the interrupt handling routine.
8.7.3
Chain Transfer when Counter = 0
By executing a second data transfer and performing re-setting of the first data transfer only when
the counter value is 0, it is possible to perform 256 or more repeat transfers.
An example is shown in which a 128-kbyte input buffer is configured. The input buffer is assumed
to have been set to start at lower address H'0000. Figure 8.16 shows the chain transfer when the
counter value is 0.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 337 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
1. For the first transfer, set the normal transfer mode for input data. Set the fixed transfer source
address, CRA = H'0000 (65,536 times), CHNE = 1, CHNS = 1, and DISEL = 0.
2. Prepare the upper 8-bit addresses of the start addresses for 65,536-transfer units for the first
data transfer in a separate area (in ROM, etc.). For example, if the input buffer is configured at
addresses H'200000 to H'21FFFF, prepare H'21 and H'20.
3. For the second transfer, set repeat transfer mode (with the source side as the repeat area) for resetting the transfer destination address for the first data transfer. Use the upper eight bits of
DAR in the first transfer information area as the transfer destination. Set CHNE = DISEL = 0.
If the above input buffer is specified as H'200000 to H'21FFFF, set the transfer counter to 2.
4. Execute the first data transfer 65536 times by means of interrupts. When the transfer counter
for the first data transfer reaches 0, the second data transfer is started. Set the upper eight bits
of the transfer source address for the first data transfer to H'21. The lower 16 bits of the
transfer destination address of the first data transfer and the transfer counter are H'0000.
5. Next, execute the first data transfer the 65536 times specified for the first data transfer by
means of interrupts. When the transfer counter for the first data transfer reaches 0, the second
data transfer is started. Set the upper eight bits of the transfer source address for the first data
transfer to H'20. The lower 16 bits of the transfer destination address of the first data transfer
and the transfer counter are H'0000.
6. Steps 4 and 5 are repeated endlessly. As repeat mode is specified for the second data transfer,
no interrupt request is sent to the CPU.
Input circuit
Transfer information
located on the on-chip memory
Input buffer
1st data transfer
information
Chain transfer
(counter = 0)
2nd data transfer
information
Upper 8 bits of DAR
Figure 8.16 Chain Transfer when Counter = 0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 338 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.8
Interrupt Sources
An interrupt request is issued to the CPU when the DTC finishes the specified number of data
transfers or a data transfer for which the DISEL bit was set to 1. In the case of interrupt activation,
the interrupt set as the activation source is generated. These interrupts to the CPU are subject to
CPU mask level and priority level control in the interrupt controller.
8.9
Usage Notes
8.9.1
Module Stop Mode Setting
Operation of the DTC can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The
initial setting is for operation of the DTC to be enabled. Register access is disabled by setting
module stop mode. Module stop mode cannot be set while the DTC is activated. For details, refer
to section 22, Power-Down Modes.
8.9.2
On-Chip RAM
Transfer information can be located in on-chip RAM. In this case, the RAME bit in SYSCR must
not be cleared to 0.
8.9.3
DMAC Transfer End Interrupt
When the DTC is activated by a DMAC transfer end interrupt, the DTE bit of DMDR is not
controlled by the DTC but its value is modified with the write data regardless of the transfer
counter value and DISEL bit setting. Accordingly, even if the DTC transfer counter value
becomes 0, no interrupt request may be sent to the CPU in some cases.
8.9.4
DTCE Bit Setting
For DTCE bit setting, use bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR. If all interrupts
are disabled, multiple activation sources can be set at one time (only at the initial setting) by
writing data after executing a dummy read on the relevant register.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 339 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 8 Data Transfer Controller (DTC)
8.9.5
Chain Transfer
When chain transfer is used, clearing of the activation source or DTCER is performed when the
last of the chain of data transfers is executed. At this time, SCI and A/D converter
interrupt/activation sources, are cleared when the DTC reads or writes to the relevant register.
Therefore, when the DTC is activated by an interrupt or activation source, if a read/write of the
relevant register is not included in the last chained data transfer, the interrupt or activation source
will be retained.
8.9.6
Transfer Information Start Address, Source Address, and Destination Address
The transfer information start address to be specified in the vector table should be address 4n. If an
address other than address 4n is specified, the lower 2 bits of the address are regarded as 0s.
The source and destination addresses specified in SAR and DAR, respectively, will be transferred
in the divided bus cycles depending on the address and data size.
8.9.7
Transfer Information Modification
When IBCCS = 1 and the DMAC is used, clear the IBCCS bit to 0 and then set to 1 again before
modifying the DTC transfer information in the CPU exception handling routine initiated by a DTC
transfer end interrupt.
8.9.8
Endian Format
The DTC supports big and little endian formats. The endian formats used when transfer
information is written to and when transfer information is read from by the DTC must be the
same.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 340 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.1 summarizes the port functions. The pins of each port also have other functions such as
input/output pins of on-chip peripheral modules or external interrupt input pins. Each I/O port
includes a data direction register (DDR) that controls input/output, a data register (DR) that stores
output data, a port register (PORT) used to read the pin states, and an input buffer control register
(ICR) that controls input buffer on/off. Port 5 does not have a DR or a DDR register.
Ports D to F, H, and I have internal input pull-up MOSs and a pull-up MOS control register (PCR)
that controls the on/off state of the input pull-up MOSs.
Ports 2 and F include an open-drain control register (ODR) that controls on/off of the output
buffer PMOSs.
All of the I/O ports can drive a single TTL load and capacitive loads up to 30 pF.
All of the I/O ports can drive Darlington transistors when functioning as output ports.
Port 2 is Schmitt-trigger input. Schmitt-trigger inputs for other ports are enabled when used as the
IRQ, TPU, TMR, or IIC2 inputs.
Table 9.1
Port Functions
Function
Port
Description
Bit
SchmittTrigger
1
Input*
Input
Pull-up
MOS
Function
I/O
Input
Output
P17/SCL0
IRQ7-A/
TCLKD-B

IRQ7-A,

TCLKD-B,
SCL0
P16/SDA0
IRQ6-A/
TCLKC-B
DACK1-A
IRQ6-A,
TCLKC-B,
SDA0
P15/SCL1
IRQ5-A/
TCLKB-B/
RxD5/
IrRXD
TEND1-A
IRQ5-A,
TCLKB-B,
SCL1
4
P14/SDA1
DREQ1-A/
IRQ4-A/
TCLKA-B
TxD5/
IrTxD
IRQ4-A,
TCLKA-B,
SDA1
3
P13
ADTRG0/
IRQ3-A

IRQ3-A
Port 1 General I/O port
7
also functioning
as interrupt inputs,
SCI I/Os, DMAC
6
I/Os, A/D
converter inputs,
TPU inputs, and
5
IIC2 I/Os
OpenDrain
Output
Function

Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 341 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Function
Bit
I/O
Input
Output
SchmittTrigger
1
Input *
2
P12/SCK2
IRQ2-A
DACK0-A
IRQ2-A
P11
RxD2/
IRQ1-A
TEND0-A
IRQ1-A
P10
DREQ0-A/
IRQ0-A
TxD2
IRQ0-A
Port 2 General I/O port
7
also functioning
as interrupt inputs,
PPG outputs, TPU
6
I/Os, TMR I/Os,
and SCI I/Os
5
P27/
TIOCB5
TIOCA5
PO7
P27,
TIOCB5,
TIOCA5
P26/
TIOCA5

PO6/TMO1/ All input
TxD1
functions
P25/
TIOCA4
TMCI1/
RxD1
PO5
P25,
TIOCA4,
TMCI1
4
P24/
TIOCB4/
SCK1
TIOCA4/
TMRI1
PO4
P24,
TIOCB4,
TIOCA4,
TMRI1
3
P23/
TIOCD3
IRQ11-A/
TIOCC3
PO3
P23,
TIOCD3,
IRQ11-A
2
P22/
TIOCC3
IRQ10-A
PO2/TMO0/ All input
TxD0
functions
1
P21/
TIOCA3
TMCI0/
RxD0/
IRQ9-A
PO1
P21,
IRQ9-A,
TIOCA3,
TMCI0
0
P20/
TIOCB3/
SCK0
TIOCA3/
TMRI0/
IRQ8-A
PO0
P20,
IRQ8-A,
TIOCB3,
TIOCA3,
TMRI0
Port
Description
Port 1 General I/O port
also functioning
1
as interrupt inputs,
SCI I/Os, DMAC
0
I/Os, A/D
converter inputs,
TPU inputs, and
IIC2 I/Os
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 342 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Input
Pull-up
MOS
Function
OpenDrain
Output
Function

O
Section 9 I/O Ports
Function
I/O
Input
Output
SchmittTrigger
1
Input*
Port 5 General input port 7
also functioning
as interrupt inputs,
6
A/D converter
inputs, and D/A
converter outputs 5

P57/AN7/
IRQ7-B
DA1
IRQ7-B

P56/AN6/
IRQ6-B
DA0
IRQ6-B

P55/AN5/
IRQ5-B

IRQ5-B
4

P54/AN4/
IRQ4-B

IRQ4-B
3

P53/AN3/
IRQ3-B

IRQ3-B
2

P52/AN2/
IRQ2-B

IRQ2-B
1

P51/AN1/
IRQ1-B

IRQ1-B
0

P50/AN0/
IRQ0-B

IRQ0-B
7




6




5
P65
TCK
TMO3/
DACK3

4
P64
TMCI3/TDI
TEND3
TMCI3
3
P63
TMRI3/
DREQ3/
IRQ11-B/
TMS

TMRI3,
IRQ11-B
2
P62/SCK4
IRQ10-B/
TRST
TMO2/
DACK2
IRQ10-B
1
P61
TMCI2/
RxD4/
IRQ9-B
TEND2
TMCI2,
IRQ9-B
0
P60
TMRI2/
DREQ2/
IRQ8-B
TxD4
TMRI2,
IRQ8-B
Port
Description
Port 6 General I/O port
also functioning
as SCI inputs,
DMAC I/Os,
H-UDI inputs, and
interrupt inputs
Bit
Input
Pull-up
MOS
Function
OpenDrain
Output
Function




Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 343 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Function
Port
Description
Port A General I/O port
also functioning
as system clock
output and bus
control I/Os
Port B General I/O port
also functioning
as bus control
outputs
OpenDrain
Output
Function
Bit
I/O
Input
Output
7

PA7
Bφ



6
PA6

AS/AH/
BS-B
5
PA5

RD
4
PA4

LHWR/LUB
3
PA3

LLWR/LLB
2
PA2
BREQ/
WAIT

1
PA1

BACK/
(RD/WR)
0
PA0

BREQO/
BS-A
7






6



5



4



3
PB3

CS3/
CS7-A
2
PB2

CS2-A/
CS6-A
1
PB1

CS1/
CS2-B/
CS5-A/
CS6-B/
CS7-B
0
PB0

CS0/CS4/
CS5-B
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 344 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Input
Pull-up
MOS
Function
SchmittTrigger
1
Input*
Section 9 I/O Ports
Output
SchmittTrigger
1
Input*
Input
Pull-up
MOS
Function
OpenDrain
Output
Function

O


O


O
O
Function
Port
Description
Port D General I/O port
also functioning
as address
outputs
Port E General I/O port
also functioning
as address
outputs
Port F General I/O port
also functioning
as address
outputs
Bit
I/O
Input
7
PD7

A7
6
PD6

A6
5
PD5

A5
4
PD4

A4
3
PD3

A3
2
PD2

A2
1
PD1

A1
0
PD0

A0
7
PE7

A15
6
PE6

A14
5
PE5

A13
4
PE4

A12
3
PE3

A11
2
PE2

A10
1
PE1

A9
0
PE0

A8
7



6



5



4
PF4

A20
3
PF3

A19
2
PF2

A18
1
PF1

A17
0
PF0

A16
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 345 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Function
Port
Description
Port H General I/O port
also functioning
as bi-directional
data bus
Bit
O


O






PH6/D6*
2


5
PH5/D5*
2


PH4/D4*
2


PH3/D3*
2


PH2/D2*
2


PH1/D1*
2


PH0/D0*
2


2


2


2


2


2


2
1
0
7
PI7/D15*
6
PI6/D14*
5
PI5/D13*
4
3
2
1
Port M General I/O port
also functioning
as SCI I/Os

PH7/D7*
6
2
General I/O port
also functioning
as bi-directional
data bus
Output
7
3
PI4/D12*
PI3/D11*


2


2
PI2/D10*
PI1/D9*
OpenDrain
Output
Function
Input
2
4
Port I
I/O
Input
Pull-up
MOS
Function
SchmittTrigger
1
Input*
0
PI0/D8*


7



6



5



4
PM4


3
PM3


2
PM2


1
PM1
RxD6

0
PM0

TxD6
Notes: 1. Pins without Schmitt-trigger input buffer have CMOS input buffer.
2. Addresses are also output when accessing to the address/data multiplexed I/O space.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 346 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1
Register Descriptions
Table 9.2 lists each port registers.
Table 9.2
Register Configuration in Each Port
Registers
Port
Number of
Pins
DDR
DR
PORT
ICR
PCR
ODR
Port 1
8
O
O
O
O


Port 2
8
O
O
O
O

O
8


O
O


1
6
O
O
O
O


Port A
8
O
O
O
O


Port B*2
4
O
O
O
O


Port D
8
O
O
O
O
O

8
O
O
O
O
O

Port F*
5
O
O
O
O
O
O
Port H
8
O
O
O
O
O

8
O
O
O
O
O

5
O
O
O
O


Port 5
Port 6*
Port E
3
Port I
4
Port M*
[Legend]
O:
Register exists
:
No register exists
Notes: 1. The lower six bits are valid and the upper two bits are reserved. The write value should
always be the initial value.
2. The lower four bits are valid and the upper four bits are reserved. The write value
should always be the initial value.
3. The lower five bits are valid and the upper three bits are reserved. The write value
should always be the initial value.
4. The lower five bits are valid and the upper three bits are reserved. The write value
should always be the initial value.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 347 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.1
Data Direction Register (PnDDR) (n = 1, 2, 6, A, B, D to F, H, I, and M)
DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that specifies the port input or output for each bit. A read from
the DDR is invalid and DDR is always read as an undefined value.
When the general I/O port function is selected, the corresponding pin functions as an output port
by setting the corresponding DDR bit to 1; the corresponding pin functions as an input port by
clearing the corresponding DDR bit to 0.
The initial DDR values are shown in table 9.3.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Pn7DDR
Pn6DDR
Pn5DDR
Pn4DDR
Pn3DDR
Pn2DDR
Pn1DDR
Pn0DDR
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Bit Name
Note:
The lower six bits are valid and the upper two bits are reserved for port 6 registers.
The lower four bits are valid and the upper four bits are reserved for port B registers.
The lower five bits are valid and the upper three bits are reserved for port F registers.
The lower three bits are valid and the upper five bits are reserved for port M registers.
Table 9.3
Startup Mode and Initial Value
Startup Mode
Port
External Extended Mode
Single-Chip Mode
Port A
H'80
H'00
Other ports
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 348 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
H'00
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.2
Data Register (PnDR) (n = 1, 2, 6, A, B, D to F, H, I, and M)
DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the output data of the pins to be used as the
general output port.
The initial value of DR is H'00.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Note:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Pn7DR
Pn6DR
Pn5DR
Pn4DR
Pn3DR
Pn2DR
Pn1DR
Pn0DR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The lower six bits are valid and the upper two bits are reserved for port 6 registers.
The lower four bits are valid and the upper four bits are reserved for port B registers.
The lower five bits are valid and the upper three bits are reserved for port F registers.
The lower five bits are valid and the upper three bits are reserved for port M registers.
9.1.3
Port Register (PORTn) (n = 1, 2, 5, 6, A, B, D to F, H, I, and M)
PORT is an 8-bit read-only register that reflects the port pin state. A write to PORT is invalid.
When PORT is read, the DR bits that correspond to the respective DDR bits set to 1 are read and
the status of each pin whose corresponding DDR bit is cleared to 0 is also read regardless of the
ICR value.
The initial value of PORT is undefined and is determined based on the port pin state.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Note:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Pn7
Pn6
Pn5
Pn4
Pn3
Pn2
Pn1
Pn0
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
The lower six bits are valid and the upper two bits are reserved for port 6 registers.
The lower four bits are valid and the upper four bits are reserved for port B registers.
The lower five bits are valid and the upper three bits are reserved for port F registers.
The lower five bits are valid and the upper three bits are reserved for port M registers.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 349 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.4
Input Buffer Control Register (PnICR) (n = 1, 2, 5, 6, A, B, D to F, H, I, and M)
ICR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the port input buffers.
For bits in ICR set to 1, the input buffers of the corresponding pins are valid. For bits in ICR
cleared to 0, the input buffers of the corresponding pins are invalid and the input signals are fixed
high.
When the pin functions as an input for the peripheral modules, the corresponding bits should be
set to 1. The initial value should be written to a bit whose corresponding pin is not used as an input
or is used as an analog input/output pin.
When PORT is read, the pin state is always read regardless of the ICR value. When the ICR value
is cleared to 0 at this time, the read pin state is not reflected in a corresponding on-chip peripheral
module.
If ICR is modified, an internal edge may occur depending on the pin state. Accordingly, ICR
should be modified when the corresponding input pins are not used. For example, an IRQ input,
modify ICR while the corresponding interrupt is disabled, clear the IRQF flag in ISR of the
interrupt controller to 0, and then enable the corresponding interrupt. If an edge occurs after the
ICR setting, the edge should be cancelled.
The initial value of ICR is H'00.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Note:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Pn7ICR
Pn6ICR
Pn5ICR
Pn4ICR
Pn3ICR
Pn2ICR
Pn1ICR
Pn0ICR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The lower six bits are valid and the upper two bits are reserved for port 6 registers.
The lower four bits are valid and the upper four bits are reserved for port B registers.
The lower five bits are valid and the upper three bits are reserved for port F registers.
The lower five bits are valid and the upper three bits are reserved for port M registers.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 350 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.5
Pull-Up MOS Control Register (PnPCR) (n = D to F, H, and I)
PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls on/off of the port input pull-up MOS.
If a bit in PCR is set to 1 while the pin is in input state, the input pull-up MOS corresponding to
the bit in PCR is turned on. Table 9.4 shows the input pull-up MOS status.
The initial value of PCR is H'00.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Table 9.4
Port
Port D
Port E
Port F
Port H
Port I
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Pn7PCR
Pn6PCR
Pn5PCR
Pn4PCR
Pn3PCR
Pn2PCR
Pn1PCR
Pn0PCR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Input Pull-Up MOS State
Pin State
Reset
Hardware
Standby Mode
Software
Standby Mode
Address output
OFF
Port output
Port input
Address output
Port output
Port input
Address output
Port output
Port input
Data input/output
Port output
Port input
Data input/output
Port output
OFF
Port input
OFF
Other
Operation
ON/OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF
[Legend]
OFF:
ON/OFF:
The input pull-up MOS is always off.
If PCR is set to 1, the input pull-up MOS is on; if PCR is cleared to 0, the input pull-up
MOS is off.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 351 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.6
Open-Drain Control Register (PnODR) (n = 2 and F)
ODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the open-drain output function.
If a bit in ODR is set to 1, the pin corresponding to that bit in ODR functions as an NMOS opendrain output. If a bit in ODR is cleared to 0, the pin corresponding to that bit in ODR functions as
a CMOS output.
The initial value of ODR is H'00.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Note:
9.2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Pn7ODR
Pn6ODR
Pn5ODR
Pn4ODR
Pn3ODR
Pn2ODR
Pn1ODR
Pn0ODR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The lower five bits are valid and the upper three bits are reserved for port F registers.
Output Buffer Control
This section describes the output priority of each pin.
The name of each peripheral module pin is followed by "_OE". This (for example: TIOCA4_OE)
indicates whether the output of the corresponding function is valid (1) or if another setting is
specified (0). Table 9.5 lists each port output signal's valid setting. For details on the
corresponding output signals, see the register description of each peripheral module. If the name
of each peripheral module pin is followed by A or B, the pin function can be modified by the port
function control register (PFCR). For details, see section 9.3, Port Function Controller.
For a pin whose initial value changes according to the activation mode, "Initial value E" indicates
the initial value when the LSI is started up in external extended mode and "Initial value S"
indicates the initial value when the LSI is started in single-chip mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 352 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.1
(1)
Port 1
P17/IRQ7-A/TCLKD-B/SCL0
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the IIC2 register
setting and P17DDR bit setting.
Setting
IIC2
I/O Port
Pin Function
SCL0_OE*
P17DDR
IIC2
SCL0 input/output
1

I/O port
P17 output
0
1
P17 input
(initial setting)
0
0
Module Name
Note:
(2)
*
When pin functions as I/O: 1
P16/DACK1-A/IRQ6-A/TCLKC-B/SDA0
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the DMAC and IIC2
register setting and P16DDR bit setting.
Setting
Module Name
Pin Function
DMAC
IIC2
I/O Port
DACK1A_OE*
SDA0_OE*
P16DDR
DMAC
DACK1-A output
1

—
IIC2
SDA0 input/output
0
1

I/O port
P16 output
0
0
1
P16 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
Note:
*
When pin functions as I/O: 1
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 353 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(3)
P15/RxD5/IrRXD/TEND1-A/IRQ5-A/TCLKB-B/SCL1
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the DMAC and IIC2
register setting and P15DDR bit setting.
Setting
DMAC
IIC2
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
TEND1A_OE*
SCL1_OE*
P15DDR
DMAC
TEND1-A output
1

—
IIC2
SCL1 input/output
0
1

I/O port
P15 output
0
0
1
P15 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
Note:
(4)
*
When pin functions as I/O: 1
P14/TxD5/IrTXD/DREQ1-A/IRQ4-A/TCLKA-B/SDA1
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the SCI, IrDA, and
IIC2 register setting and P14DDR bit setting.
Setting
Module Name
Pin Function
SCI
IrDA
IIC2
I/O Port
TxD5_OE
IrTXD_OE
SDA1_OE*
P14DDR
SCI
TxD5 output
1
—
—
—
IrDA
IrTXD output
0
1
—
—
IIC2
SDA1 input/output
0
0
1
—
I/O port
P14 output
0
0
0
1
P14 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
0
Note:
*
When pin functions as I/O: 1
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 354 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(5)
P13/ADTRG0/IRQ3-A
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the P13DDR bit setting.
Setting
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
P13DDR
I/O port
P13 output
1
P13 input
(initial setting)
0
(6)
P12/SCK2/DACK0-A/IRQ2-A
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the DMAC and SCI
register settings and P12DDR bit setting.
Setting
DMAC
SCI
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
DACK0A_OE
SCK2_OE
P12DDR
DMAC
DACK0-A output
1


SCI
SCK2 output
0
1

I/O port
P12 output
0
0
1
P12 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 355 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(7)
P11/RxD2/TEND0-A/IRQ1-A
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the DMAC register
setting and P11DDR bit setting.
Setting
DMAC
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
TEND0A_OE
P11DDR
DMAC
TEND0-A output
1

I/O port
P11 output
0
1
P11 input
(initial setting)
0
0
(8)
P10/TxD2/DREQ0-A/IRQ0-A:
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the SCI register
setting and P10DDR bit setting.
Setting
SCI
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
TxD2_OE
P10DDR
SCI
TxD2 output
1

I/O port
P10 output
0
1
P10 input
(initial setting)
0
0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 356 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.2
(1)
Port 2
P27/PO7/TIOCA5/TIOCB5
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU and PPG
register settings and P27DDR bit setting.
Setting
TPU
PPG
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
TIOCB5_OE
PO7_OE
P27DDR
TPU
TIOCB5 output
1
—
—
PPG
PO7 output
0
1
—
P27 output
0
0
1
P27 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
I/O port
(2)
P26/PO6/TIOCA5/TMO1/TxD1
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU, TMR,
SCI, and PPG register settings and P26DDR bit setting.
Setting
TPU
TMR
SCI
PPG
I/O Port
TxD1_OE
PO6_OE
P26DDR



Module Name
Pin Function
TIOCA5_OE TMO1_OE
TPU
TIOCA5 output
1

TMR
TMO1 output
0
1



SCI
TxD1 output
0
0
1


PPG
PO6 output
0
0
0
1

I/O port
P26 output
0
0
0
0
1
P26 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
0
0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 357 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(3)
P25/PO5/TIOCA4/TMCI1/RxD1
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU and PPG
register settings and P25DDR bit setting.
Setting
TPU
PPG
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
TIOCA4_OE
PO5_OE
P25DDR
TPU
TIOCA4 output
1


PPG
PO5 output
0
1

I/O port
P25 output
0
0
1
P25 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
(4)
P24/PO4/TIOCA4/TIOCB4/TMRI1/SCK1
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU, SCI, and
PPG register settings and P24DDR bit setting.
Setting
TPU
SCI
PPG
I/O Port
PO4_OE
P24DDR
Module Name
Pin Function
TIOCB4_OE SCK1_OE
TPU
TIOCB4 output
1



SCI
SCK1 output
0
1


PPG
PO4 output
0
0
1

P24 output
0
0
0
1
P24 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
0
I/O port
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 358 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(5)
P23/PO3/TIOCC3/TIOCD3/IRQ11-A
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU and PPG
register settings and P23DDR bit setting.
Setting
TPU
PPG
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
TIOCD3_OE
PO3_OE
P23DDR
TPU
TIOCD3 output
1
—
—
PPG
PO3 output
0
1
—
I/O port
P23 output
0
0
1
P23 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
(6)
P22 /PO2/TIOCC3/TMO0/TxD0/IRQ10-A
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU, TMR,
SCI, and PPG register settings and P22DDR bit setting.
Setting
TPU
TMR
SCI
PPG
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
TIOCC3_OE
TMO0_OE TxD0_OE
PO2_OE
P22DDR
TPU
TIOCC3 output
1




TMR
TMO0 output
0
1



SCI
TxD0 output
0
0
1


PPG
PO2 output
0
0
0
1

I/O port
P22 output
0
0
0
0
1
P22 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
0
0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 359 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(7)
P21/PO1/TIOCA3/TMCI0/RxD0/IRQ9-A
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU and PPG
register settings and P21DDR bit setting.
Setting
TPU
PPG
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
TIOCA3_OE
PO1_OE
P21DDR
TPU
TIOCA3 output
1


PPG
PO1 output
0
1

I/O port
P21 output
0
0
1
P21 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
(8)
P20/PO0/TIOCA3/TIOCB3/TMRI0/SCK0/IRQ8-A
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU, SCI, and
PPG register settings and P20DDR bit setting.
Setting
TPU
SCI
PPG
I/O Port
PO0_OE
P20DDR
Module Name
Pin Function
TIOCB3_OE SCK0_OE
TPU
TIOCB3 output
1



SCI
SCK0 output
0
1


PPG
PO0 output
0
0
1

P20 output
0
0
0
1
P20 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
0
I/O port
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 360 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.3
(1)
Port 5
P57/AN7/DA1/IRQ7-B
Module Name
Pin Function
D/A converter
DA1 output
(2)
P56/AN6/DA0/IRQ6-B
Module Name
Pin Function
D/A converter
DA0 output
9.2.4
(1)
Port 6
P65/TMO3/DACK3/TCK
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the DMAC and
TMR register settings and P65DDR bit setting.
Setting
Module Name
Pin Function
DMAC
TMR
I/O Port
DACK3_OE
TMO3_OE
P65DDR
DMAC
DACK3 output
1


TMR
TMO3 output
0
1

I/O port
P65 output
0
0
1
P65 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 361 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(2)
P64/TMCI3/TEND3/TDI
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the DMAC register
setting and P64DDR bit setting.
Setting
DMAC
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
TEND3_OE
P64DDR
DMAC
TEND3 output
1

I/O port
P64 output
0
1
P64 input
(initial setting)
0
0
(3)
P63/TMRI3/DREQ3/IRQ11-B/TMS
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the P63DDR bit setting.
Setting
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
P63DDR
I/O port
P63 output
1
P63 input
(initial setting)
0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 362 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(4)
P62/TMO2/SCK4/DACK2/IRQ10-B/TRST
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the DMAC, TMR,
and SCI register settings and P62DDR bit setting.
Setting
DMAC
TMR
SCI
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
DACK2_OE
TMO2_OE
SCK4_OE
P62DDR
DMAC
DACK2 output
1



TMR
TMO2 output
0
1


SCI
SCK4 output
0
0
1

I/O port
P62 output
0
0
0
1
P62 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
0
(5)
P61/TMCI2/RxD4/TEND2/IRQ9-B
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the DMAC register
setting and P61DDR bit setting.
Setting
DMAC
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
TEND2_OE
P61DDR
DMAC
TEND2 output
1

I/O port
P61 output
0
1
P61 input
(initial setting)
0
0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 363 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(6)
P60/TMRI2/TxD4/DREQ2/IRQ8-B
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the SCI register
setting and P60DDR bit setting.
Setting
SCI
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
TxD4_OE
P60DDR
SCI
TxD4 output
1

I/O port
P60 output
0
1
P60 input
(initial setting)
0
0
9.2.5
(1)
Port A
PA7/Bφ
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the PA7DDR bit setting.
Setting
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
PA7DDR
I/O port
Bφ output*
(initial setting E)
PA7 input
(initial setting S)
1
0
[Legend]
Initial setting E: Initial setting in external extended mode
Initial setting S: Initial setting in single-chip mode
Note: * The type of φ to be output switches according to the POSEL1 bit in SCKCR. For details,
see section 21.1.1, System Clock Control Register (SCKCR).
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 364 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(2)
PA6/AS/AH/BS-B
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode,
EXPE bit, bus controller register, port function control register (PFCR), and the PA6DDR bit
settings.
Setting
Bus
Controller
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
AH_OE
BSB_OE
AS_OE
PA6DDR
Bus controller
AH output*
BS-B output*
AS output*
(initial setting E)
PA6 output
PA6 input
(initial setting S)
1
0
0

1
0


1



0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
I/O port
[Legend]
Initial setting E: Initial setting in external extended mode
Initial setting S: Initial setting in single-chip mode
Note: * Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
(3)
PA5/RD
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, the
EXPE bit, and the PA5DDR bit settings.
Setting
MCU Operating Mode
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
Bus controller
RD output*
(Initial setting E)
1

I/O port
PA5 output
0
1
PA5 input
(initial setting S)
0
0
EXPE
PA5DDR
[Legend]
Initial setting E: Initial setting in external extended mode
Initial setting S: Initial setting in single-chip mode
Note: * Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 365 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(4)
PA4/LHWR/LUB
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode,
EXPE bit, bus controller register, port function control register (PFCR), and the PA4DDR bit
settings.
Setting
Bus Controller
Module Name
Pin Function
Bus controller
LUB output*
LUB_OE*
I/O Port
LHWR_OE*
2
PA4DDR
1


LHWR output*
(initial setting E)

1

PA4 output
0
0
1
PA4 input
(initial setting S)
0
0
0
1
1
I/O port
2
[Legend]
Initial setting E: Initial setting in external extended mode
Initial setting S: Initial setting in single-chip mode
Notes: 1. Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
2. When the byte control SRAM space is accessed while the byte control SRAM space is
specified or while LHWROE =1, this pin functions as the LUB output; otherwise, the
LHWR output.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 366 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(5)
PA3/LLWR/LLB
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode,
EXPE bit, bus controller register, and the PA3DDR bit settings.
Setting
Bus Controller
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
LLB_OE*
LLWR_OE*
PA3DDR
Bus controller
LLB output*1
1


LLWR output*
(initial setting E)

1

PA3 output
0
0
1
PA3 input
(initial setting S)
0
0
0
2
1
I/O port
2
[Legend]
Initial setting E: Initial setting in external extended mode
Initial setting S: Initial setting in single-chip mode
Notes: 1. Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
2. If the byte control SRAM space is accessed, this pin functions as the LLB output;
otherwise, the LLWR.
(6)
PA2/BREQ/WAIT
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the bus controller
register setting and the PA2DDR bit setting.
Setting
Bus Controller
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
BCR_BRLE
BCR_WAITE
PA2DDR
Bus controller
BREQ input
1


WAIT input
0
1

PA2 output
0
0
1
PA2 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
I/O port
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 367 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(7)
PA1/BACK/(RD/WR)
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode,
EXPE bit, bus controller register, port function control register (PFCR), and the PA1DDR bit
settings.
Setting
Bus Controller
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
BACK_OE
Byte control
SRAM
Selection
Bus controller
BACK output *
1



RD/WR output *
0
1


0
0
1

PA1 output
0
0
0
1
PA1 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
0
I/O port
Note:
(8)
*
(RD/WR)_OE
PA1DDR
Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
PA0/BREQO/BS-A
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode,
EXPE bit, bus controller register, port function control register (PFCR), and the PA0DDR bit
settings.
Setting
I/O Port
Bus Controller
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
BSA_OE
BREQO_OE
PA0DDR
Bus controller
BS-A output*
1


BREQO output*
0
1

PA0 output
0
0
1
PA0 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
I/O port
Note:
*
Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 368 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.6
(1)
Port B
PB3/CS3/CS7-A
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode,
EXPE bit, port function control register (PFCR), and the PB3DDR bit settings.
Setting
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
CS3_OE
CS7A_OE
PB3DDR
Bus controller
CS3 output*
1


CS7-A output*

1

PB3 output
0
0
1
PB3 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
I/O port
Note:
(2)
*
Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
PB2/CS2-A/CS6-A
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode,
EXPE bit, port function control register (PFCR), and the PB2DDR bit settings.
Setting
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
CS2A_OE
CS6A_OE
PB2DDR
Bus controller
CS2-A output*
1


CS6-A output*

1

PB2 output
0
0
1
PB2 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
I/O port
Note:
*
Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 369 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(3)
PB1/CS1/CS2-B/CS5-A/CS6-B/CS7-B
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode,
EXPE bit, port function control register (PFCR), and the PB1DDR bit settings.
Setting
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
CS1_OE
CS2B_OE CS5A_OE CS6B_OE CS7B_OE PB1DDR
Bus controller
CS1 output*
1





CS2-B output*

1




CS5-A output*


1



CS6-B output*



1


I/O port
Note:
(4)
*
CS7-B output*




1

PB1 output
0
0
0
0
0
1
PB1 input
(initial setting)
0
0
0
0
0
0
Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
PB0/CS0/CS4/CS5-B
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode,
EXPE bit, port function control register (PFCR), and the PB0DDR bit settings.
Setting
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
CS0_OE
CS4_OE
CS5B_OE
PB0DDR
Bus controller
CS0 output*
(initial setting E)
1



CS4 output*

1


CS5-B output*


1

PB0 output
0
0
0
1
PB0 input
(initial setting S)
0
0
0
0
I/O port
[Legend]
Initial setting E: Initial setting in on-chip ROM disabled external extended mode
Initial setting S: Initial setting in other modes
Note: * Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 370 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.7
(1)
Port D
PD7/A7, PD6/A6, PD5/A5, PD4/A4, PD3/A3, PD2/A2, PD1/A1, PD0/A0
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, the
EXPE bit, and the PDnDDR bit settings.
Setting
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
MCU Operating Mode
Bus controller
Address output
I/O port
PDn output
PDn input
(initial setting)
On-chip ROM disabled extended mode
On-chip ROM enabled extended mode
Single-chip mode*
Modes other than on-chip ROM
disabled extended mode
PDnDDR

1
1
0
[Legend]
n:
0 to 7
Note: * Address output is enabled by setting PDnDDR = 1 in external extended mode
(EXPE = 1)
9.2.8
(1)
Port E
PE7/A15, PE6/A14, PE5/A13, PE4/A12, PE3/A11, PE2/A10, PE1/A9, PE0/A8
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, the
EXPE bit, and the PEnDDR bit settings.
Setting
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
MCU Operating Mode
PEnDDR
Bus controller
Address output
On-chip ROM disabled extended mode
On-chip ROM enabled extended mode

1
I/O port
PEn output
PEn input
(initial setting)
Single-chip mode*
Modes other than on-chip ROM
disabled extended mode
1
0
[Legend]
n:
0 to 7
Note: * Address output is enabled by setting PDnDDR = 1 in external extended mode
(EXPE = 1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 371 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.9
(1)
Port F
PF4/A20
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, the
EXPE bit, port function control register (PFCR), and the PF4DDR bit settings.
Setting
MCU
Operating Mode
On-chip ROM
disabled extended
mode
Modes other than
on-chip ROM
disabled extended
mode
Note:
(2)
*
I/O Port
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
A20_OE
PF4DDR
Bus controller
A20 output


Bus controller
I/O port
A20 output*
PF4 output
PF4 input
(initial setting)
1
0
0

1
0
Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
PF3/A19
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, the
EXPE bit, port function control register (PFCR), and the PF3DDR bit settings.
Setting
MCU
Operating Mode
On-chip ROM
disabled extended
mode
Modes other than
on-chip ROM
disabled extended
mode
Note:
*
I/O Port
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
A19_OE
PF3DDR
Bus controller
A19 output


Bus controller
I/O port
A19 output*
PF3 output
PF3 input
(initial setting)
1
0
0

1
0
Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 372 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(3)
PF2/A18
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, the
EXPE bit, port function control register (PFCR), and the PF2DDR bit settings.
Setting
MCU
Operating Mode
I/O Port
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
A18_OE
PF2DDR
On-chip ROM
disabled extended
mode
Bus controller
A18 output


Modes other than
on-chip ROM
disabled extended
mode
Bus controller
A18 output*
1

I/O port
PF2 output
0
1
PF2 input
(initial setting)
0
0
Note:
(4)
*
Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
PF1/A17
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, the
EXPE bit, port function control register (PFCR), and the PF1DDR bit settings.
Setting
MCU
Operating Mode
I/O Port
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
A17_OE
PF1DDR
On-chip ROM
disabled extended
mode
Bus controller
A17 output


Modes other than
on-chip ROM
disabled extended
mode
Bus controller
A17 output*
1

I/O port
PF1 output
0
1
PF1 input
(initial setting)
0
0
Note:
*
Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 373 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(5)
PF0/A16
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, the
EXPE bit, port function control register (PFCR), and the PF0DDR bit settings.
Setting
MCU
Operating Mode
I/O Port
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
A16_OE
PF0DDR
On-chip ROM
disabled extended
mode
Bus controller
A16 output


Modes other than
on-chip ROM
disabled extended
mode
Bus controller
A16 output*
1

I/O port
PF0 output
0
1
PF0 input
(initial setting)
0
0
Note:
*
9.2.10
(1)
Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
Port H
PH7/D7, PH6/D6, PH5/D5, PH4/D4, PH3/D3, PH2/D2, PH1/D1, PH0/D0
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, the
EXPE bit, and the PHnDDR bit settings.
Setting
MCU Operating Mode
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
EXPE
PHnDDR
Bus controller
Data I/O*
(initial setting E)
1

I/O port
PHn output
0
1
PHn input
(initial setting S)
0
0
[Legend]
Initial setting E: Initial setting in external extended mode
Initial setting S: Initial setting in single-chip mode
n:
0 to 7
Note: * Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 374 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.11
(1)
Port I
PI7/D15, PI6/D14, PI5/D13, PI4/D12, PI3/D11, PI2/D10, PI1/D9, PI0/D8
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, bus
mode, the EXPE bit, and the PInDDR bit settings.
Setting
Bus Controller
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
16-Bit Bus Mode
PInDDR
Bus controller
Data I/O*
(initial setting E)
PIn output
PIn input
(initial setting S)
1

0
0
1
0
I/O port
[Legend]
Initial setting E: Initial setting in external extended mode
Initial setting S: Initial setting in single-chip mode
n:
0 to 7
Note: * Valid in external extended mode (EXPE = 1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 375 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.12
(1)
Port M
PM4
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the USB register
setting and PM4DDR bit setting.
Setting
USB
I/O Port
PULLUP_E
PM4DDR
Module Name
Pin Function
USB
PULLUP control output 1
—
I/O port
PM4 output
0
1
PM4 input
(initial setting)
0
0
(2)
PM3
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the PM3DDR bit
setting.
Setting
I/O Port
Module Name
I/O port
(3)
Pin Function
PM3 output
PM3 input
(initial setting)
PM3DDR
1
0
PM2
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the PM2DDR bit
setting.
Setting
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
PM2DDR
I/O port
PM2 output
1
PM2 input
(initial setting)
0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 376 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
(4)
PM1/RxD6
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the PM1DDR bit
setting.
Setting
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
PM1DDR
I/O port
PM1 output
1
PM1 input
(initial setting)
0
(5)
PM0/TxD6
The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the SCI register
setting and PM0DDR bit setting.
Setting
SCI
I/O Port
Module Name
Pin Function
TxD6_OE
PM0DDR
SCI
TxD6 output
1
—
I/O port
PM0 output
0
1
PM0 input
(initial setting)
0
0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 377 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Table 9.5
Output
Specification
Signal Name
Output
Signal
Name
7
SCL0_OE
SCL0
6
DACK1A_OE
DACK1
SDA0_OE
SDA0
TEND1A_OE
TEND1
SCL1_OE
SCL1
ICCRA.ICE = 1
TxD5_OE
TxD5
SCR.TE = 1, IrCR.IrE = 0
IrTxD5_OE
IrTxD5
SCR.TE = 1, IrCR.IrE = 1
SDA1_OE
SDA1
ICCRA.ICE = 1
3
—
—
—
2
DACK0A_OE
DACK0
PFCR7.DMAS0[A,B] = 00 DACR.AMS = 1, DMDR.DACKE = 1
SCK2_OE
SCK2
1
TEND0A_OE
TEND0
0
TxD2_OE
TxD2
SCR.TE = 1
7
TIOCB5_OE
TIOCB5
TPU.TIOR5.IOB3 = 0, TPU.TIOR5.IOB[1,0]
= 01/10/11
PO7_OE
PO7
NDERL.NDER7 = 1
TIOCA5_OE
TIOCA5
TPU.TIOR5.IOA3 = 0, TPU.TIOR5.IOA[1,0]
= 01/10/11
TMO1_OE
TMO1
TCSR.OS3,2 = 01/10/11 or
TCSR.OS[1,0] = 01/10/11
TxD1_OE
TxD1
SCR.TE = 1
PO6_OE
PO6
NDERL.NDER6 = 1
TIOCA4_OE
TIOCA4
TPU.TIOR4.IOA3 = 0, TPU.TIOR4.IOA[1,0]
= 01/10/11
PO5_OE
PO5
NDERL.NDER5 = 1
Port
P1
5
4
P2
Available Output Signals and Settings in Each Port
6
5
Signal Selection
Register Settings
ICCRA.ICE = 1
PFCR7.DMAS1[A,B] = 00 DACR.AMS = 1, DMDR.DACKE = 1
ICCRA.ICE = 1
PFCR7.DMAS1[A,B] = 00 DMDR.TENDE = 1
—
When SCMR.SMIF = 1:
SCR.TE = 1 or SCR.RE = 1 while
SMR.GM = 0, SCR.CKE [1, 0] = 01 or while
SMR.GM = 1
When SCMR.SMIF = 0:
SCR.TE = 1 or SCR.RE = 1 while
SMR.C/A = 0, SCR.CKE [1, 0] = 01 or while
SMR.C/A = 1, SCR.CKE 1 = 0
PFCR7.DMAS0[A,B] = 00 DMDR.TENDE = 1
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 378 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Peripheral Module Settings
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port
P2
4
3
2
1
0
Output
Specification
Signal Name
Output
Signal
Name
TIOCB4_OE
TIOCB4
TPU.TIOR4.IOB3 = 0, TPU.TIOR4.IOB[1,0]
= 01/10/11
SCK1_OE
SCK1
When SCMR.SMIF = 1:
SCR.TE = 1 or SCR.RE = 1 while
SMR.GM = 0, SCR.CKE [1, 0] = 01 or while
SMR.GM = 1
When SCMR.SMIF = 0:
SCR.TE = 1 or SCR.RE = 1 while
SMR.C/A = 0, SCR.CKE [1, 0] = 01 or while
SMR.C/A = 1, SCR.CKE 1 = 0
Signal Selection
Register Settings
Peripheral Module Settings
PO4_OE
PO4
NDERL.NDER4 = 1
TIOCD3_OE
TIOCD3
TPU.TMDR.BFB = 0, TPU.TIORL3.IOD3
= 0, TPU.TIORL3.IOD[1,0] = 01/10/11
PO3_OE
PO3
NDERL.NDER3 = 1
TIOCC3_OE
TIOCC3
TPU.TMDR.BFA = 0, TPU.TIORL3.IOC3
= 0, TPU.TIORL3.IOD[1,0] = 01/10/11
TMO0_OE
TMO0
TCSR.OS[3,2] = 01/10/11 or TCSR.OS[1,0]
= 01/10/11
TxD0_OE
TxD0
SCR.TE = 1
PO2_OE
PO2
NDERL.NDER2 = 1
TIOCA3_OE
TIOCA3
TPU.TIORH3.IOA3 = 0,
TPU.TIORH3.IOA[1,0] = 01/10/11
PO1_OE
PO1
NDERL.NDER1 = 1
TIOCB3_OE
TIOCB3
TPU.TIORH3.IOB3 = 0,
TPU.TIORH3.IOB[1,0] = 01/10/11
SCK0_OE
SCK0
When SCMR.SMIF = 1:
SCR.TE = 1 or SCR.RE = 1 while
SMR.GM = 0, SCR.CKE [1, 0] = 01 or while
SMR.GM = 1
When SCMR.SMIF = 0:
SCR.TE = 1 or SCR.RE = 1 while
SMR.C/A = 0, SCR.CKE [1, 0] = 01 or while
SMR.C/A = 1, SCR.CKE 1 = 0
PO0_OE
PO0
NDERL.NDER0 = 1
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 379 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Output
Specification
Signal Name
Output
Signal
Name
Signal Selection
Register Settings
DACK3_OE
DACK3
PFCR7.DMAS3[A,B] = 01 DACR.AMS = 1, DMDR.DACKE = 1
TMO3_OE
TMO3
4
TEND3_OE
TEND3
PFCR7.DMAS3[A,B] = 01 DMDR.TENDE = 1
2
DACK2_OE
DACK2
PFCR7.DMAS2[A,B] = 01 DACR.AMS = 1, DMDR.DACKE = 1
TMO2_OE
TMO2
TCSR.OS[3,2] = 01/10/11 or TCSR.OS[1,0]
= 01/10/11
SCK4_OE
SCK4
When SCMR.SMIF = 1:
SCR.TE = 1 or SCR.RE = 1 while
SMR.GM = 0, SCR.CKE [1, 0] = 01 or while
SMR.GM = 1
When SCMR.SMIF = 0:
SCR.TE = 1 or SCR.RE = 1 while
SMR.C/A = 0, SCR.CKE [1, 0] = 01 or while
SMR.C/A = 1, SCR.CKE 1 = 0
1
TEND2_OE
TEND2
0
TxD4_OE
TxD4
7
Bφ_OE
Bφ
PADDR.PA7DDR = 1, SCKCR.POSEL1 = 0
6
AH_OE
AH
SYSCR.EXPE = 1,
MPXCR.MPXEn (n = 7 to 3) = 1
BSB_OE
BS
AS_OE
AS
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR2.ASOE = 1
5
RD_OE
RD
SYSCR.EXPE = 1
4
LUB_OE
LUB
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR6.LHWROE = 1 or
SRAMCR.BCSELn = 1
LHWR_OE
LHWR
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR6.LHWROE = 1
LLB_OE
LLB
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, SRAMCR.BCSELn = 1
LLWR_OE
LLWR
SYSCR.EXPE = 1
BACK_OE
BACK
SYSCR.EXPE = 1,BCR1.BRLE = 1
(RD/WR)_OE
RD/WR
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR2.REWRE = 1 or
SRAMCR.BCSELn = 1
BSA_OE
BS
BREQO_OE
BREQO
Port
P6
PA
5
3
1
0
TCSR.OS[3,2] = 01/10/11 or TCSR.OS[1,0]
= 01/10/11
PFCR7.DMAS2[A,B] = 01 DMDR.TENDE = 1
SCR.TE = 1
PFCR2.BSS = 1
PFCR2.BSS = 0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 380 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Peripheral Module Settings
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR2.BSE = 1
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR2.BSE = 1
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, BCR1.BRLE = 1,
BCR1.BREQOE = 1
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port
PB
3
2
1
0
PD
PE
Output
Specification
Signal Name
Output
Signal
Name
CS3_OE
CS3
CS7A_OE
CS7
PFCR1.CS7S[A,B] = 00
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR0.CS7E = 1
CS2A_OE
CS2
PFCR2.CS2S = 0
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR0.CS2E = 1
CS6A_OE
CS6
PFCR1.CS6S[A,B] = 00
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR0.CS6E = 1
CS1_OE
CS1
CS2B_OE
CS2
PFCR2.CS2S = 1
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR0.CS2E = 1
CS5A_OE
CS5
PFCR1.CS5S[A,B] = 00
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR0.CS5E = 1
CS6B_OE
CS6
PFCR1.CS6S[A,B] = 01
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR0.CS6E = 1
CS7B_OE
CS7
PFCR1.CS7S[A,B] = 01
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR0.CS7E = 1
CS0_OE
CS0
Signal Selection
Register Settings
Peripheral Module Settings
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR0.CS3E = 1
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR0.CS1E = 1
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR0.CS0E = 1
CS4_OE
CS4
CS5B_OE
CS5
7
A7_OE
A7
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PD7DDR = 1
6
A6_OE
A6
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PD6DDR = 1
5
A5_OE
A5
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PD5DDR = 1
4
A4_OE
A4
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PD4DDR = 1
3
A3_OE
A3
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PD3DDR = 1
2
A2_OE
A2
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PD2DDR = 1
1
A1_OE
A1
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PD1DDR = 1
0
A0_OE
A0
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PD0DDR = 1
7
A15_OE
A15
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PE7DDR = 1
6
A14_OE
A14
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PE6DDR = 1
5
A13_OE
A13
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PE5DDR = 1
4
A12_OE
A12
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PE4DDR = 1
3
A11_OE
A11
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PE3DDR = 1
2
A10_OE
A10
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PE2DDR = 1
1
A9_OE
A9
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PE1DDR = 1
0
A8_OE
A8
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PDDDR.PE0DDR = 1
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR0.CS4E = 1
PFCR1.CS5S[A,B] = 01
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR0.CS5E = 1
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 381 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Output
Specification
Signal Name
Port
PF
PH
PI
PM
Output
Signal
Name
Signal Selection
Register Settings
Peripheral Module Settings
4
A20_OE
A20
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR4.A20E = 1
3
A19_OE
A19
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR4.A19E = 1
2
A18_OE
A18
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR4.A18E = 1
1
A17_OE
A17
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR4.A17E = 1
0
A16_OE
A16
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, PFCR4.A16E = 1
7
D7_E
D7
SYSCR.EXPE = 1
6
D6_E
D6
SYSCR.EXPE = 1
5
D5_E
D5
SYSCR.EXPE = 1
4
D4_E
D4
SYSCR.EXPE = 1
3
D3_E
D3
SYSCR.EXPE = 1
2
D2_E
D2
SYSCR.EXPE = 1
1
D1_E
D1
SYSCR.EXPE = 1
0
D0_E
D0
SYSCR.EXPE = 1
7
D15_E
D15
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, ABWCR.ABW[H,L]n = 01
6
D14_E
D14
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, ABWCR.ABW[H,L]n = 01
5
D13_E
D13
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, ABWCR.ABW[H,L]n = 01
4
D12_E
D12
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, ABWCR.ABW[H,L]n = 01
3
D11_E
D11
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, ABWCR.ABW[H,L]n = 01
2
D10_E
D10
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, ABWCR.ABW[H,L]n = 01
1
D9_E
D9
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, ABWCR.ABW[H,L]n = 01
0
D8_E
D8
SYSCR.EXPE = 1, ABWCR.ABW[H,L]n = 01
4
—
—
—
—
3
—
—
—
—
2
—
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
0
TxD6_OE
TxD6
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 382 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
SCR.TE = 1
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3
Port Function Controller
The port function controller controls the I/O ports.
The port function controller incorporates the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Port function control register 0 (PFCR0)
Port function control register 1 (PFCR1)
Port function control register 2 (PFCR2)
Port function control register 4 (PFCR4)
Port function control register 6 (PFCR6)
Port function control register 7 (PFCR7)
Port function control register 9 (PFCR9)
Port function control register B (PFCRB)
Port function control register C (PFCRC)
9.3.1
Port Function Control Register 0 (PFCR0)
PFCR0 enables/disables the CS output.
Bit
Bit Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CS7E
CS6E
CS5E
CS4E
CS3E
CS2E
CS1E
CS0E
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Undefined*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial Value
R/W
Note: * 1 in external extended mode; 0 in other modes.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CS7E
CS6E
CS5E
CS4E
CS3E
CS2E
CS1E
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
CS7 to CS0 Enable
These bits enable/disable the corresponding CSn
output.
0: Pin functions as I/O port
1: Pin functions as CSn output pin
(n = 7 to 0)
CS0E
Undefined* R/W
0
Note:
*
1 in external extended mode, 0 in other modes.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 383 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3.2
Port Function Control Register 1 (PFCR1)
PFCR1 selects the CS output pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CS7SA
CS7SB
CS6SA
CS6SB
CS5SA
CS5SB


0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
CS7SA*
0
R/W
CS7 Output Pin Select
6
CS7SB*
0
R/W
Selects the output pin for CS7 when CS7 output is
enabled (CS7E = 1)
00: Specifies pin PB3 as CS7-A output
01: Specifies pin PB1 as CS7-B output
10: Setting prohibited
11: Setting prohibited
5
CS6SA*
0
R/W
CS6 Output Pin Select
4
CS6SB*
0
R/W
Selects the output pin for CS6 when CS6 output is
enabled (CS6E = 1)
00: Specifies pin PB2 as CS6-A output
01: Specifies pin PB1 as CS6-B output
10: Setting prohibited
11: Setting prohibited
3
CS5SA*
0
R/W
CS5 Output Pin Select
2
CS5SB*
0
R/W
Selects the output pin for CS5 when CS5 output is
enabled (CS5E = 1)
00: Specifies pin PB1 as CS5-A output
01: Specifies pin PB0 as CS5-B output
10: Setting prohibited
11: Setting prohibited

1
0
Note:
*
0
R/W
Reserved
0
R/W
These bits are always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
If multiple CS outputs are specified to a single pin according to the CSn output pin
select bits (n=4 to 7), multiple CS signals are output from the pin. For details, see
section 6.5.3, Chip Select Signals.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 384 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3.3
Port Function Control Register 2 (PFCR2)
PFCR2 selects the CS output pin, enables/disables bus control I/O, and selects the bus control I/O
pins.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name

CS2S
BSS
BSE

RDWRE
ASOE

Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

0
R/W
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
6
CS2S*1
0
R/W
CS2 Output Pin Select
Selects the output pin for CS2 when CS2 output is
enabled (CS2E = 1)
0: Specifies pin PB2 as CS2-A output pin
1: Specifies pin PB1 as CS2-B output pin
5
BSS
0
R/W
BS Output Pin Select
Selects the BS output pin
0: Specifies pin PA0 as BS-A output pin
1: Specifies pin PA6 as BS-B output pin
4
BSE
0
R/W
BS Output Enable
Enables/disables the BS output
0: Disables the BS output
1: Enables the BS output
3

0
R/W
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
2
RDWRE*2
0
R/W
RD/WR Output Enable
Enables/disables the RD/WR output
0: Disables the RD/WR output
1: Enables the RD/WR output
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 385 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
1
ASOE
1
R/W
AS Output Enable
Enables/disables the AS output
0: Specifies pin PA6 as I/O port
1: Specifies pin PA6 as AS output pin

0
0
R/W
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
Notes: 1. If multiple CS outputs are specified to a single pin according to the CSn output pin
select bits (n = 2 and 3), multiple CS signals are output from the pin. For details, see
section 6.5.3, Chip Select Signals.
2. If an area is specified as a byte control SDRAM space, the pin functions as RD/WR
output regardless of the RDWRE bit value.
9.3.4
Port Function Control Register 4 (PFCR4)
PFCR4 enables/disables the address output.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name



A20E
A19E
A18E
A17E
A16E
Initial Value
0
0
0
0/1*
0/1*
0/1*
0/1*
0/1*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 5
—
All 0
R/W
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1. The write value should
always be 0.
4
A20E
0/1*
R/W
Address A20 Enable
Enables/disables the address output (A20)
0: Disables the A20 output
1: Enables the A20 output
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 386 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
A19E
0/1*
R/W
Address A19 Enable
Enables/disables the address output (A19)
0: Disables the A19 output
1: Enables the A19 output
2
A18E
0/1*
R/W
Address A18 Enable
Enables/disables the address output (A18)
0: Disables the A18 output
1: Enables the A18 output
1
A17E
0/1*
R/W
Address A17 Enable
Enables/disables the address output (A17)
0: Disables the A17 output
1: Enables the A17 output
0
A16E
0/1*
R/W
Address A16 Enable
Enables/disables the address output (A16)
0: Disables the A16 output
1: Enables the A16 output
Note:
*
When external extended mode: Initial value is 1, reserved.
This bit is always read as 1. The write value should
always be 1.
When other modes:
Initial value is 1, enable setting.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 387 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3.5
Port Function Control Register 6 (PFCR6)
PFCR6 selects the TPU clock input pin.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name

LHWROE


TCLKS



Initial Value
R/W
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

1
R/W
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1. The write value should
always be 1.
6
LHWROE
1
R/W
LHWR Output Enable
Enables/disables LHWR output (valid in external
extended mode).
0: Specifies pin PA4 as I/O port
1: Specifies pin PA4 as LHWR output pin
5

1
R/W
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1. The write value should
always be 1.
4

0
R
Reserved
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
3
TCLKS
0
R/W
TPU External Clock Input Pin Select
Selects the TPU external clock input pins.
0: External clock input pins cannot be used.
1: Specifies pins P14 to P17 as external clock inputs
2 to 0

All 0
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 388 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3.6
Port Function Control Register 7 (PFCR7)
PFCR7 selects the DMAC I/O pins (DREQ, DACK, and TEND).
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DMAS3A
DMAS3B
DMAS2A
DMAS2B
DMAS1A
DMAS1B
DMAS0A
DMAS0B
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
DMAS3A
0
R/W
DMAC control pin select
6
DMAS3B
0
R/W
Selects the I/O port to control DMAC_3.
00: Setting prohibited
01: Specifies pins P63 to P65 as DMAC control pins
10: Setting prohibited
11: Setting prohibited
5
DMAS2A
0
R/W
DMAC control pin select
4
DMAS2B
0
R/W
Selects the I/O port to control DMAC_2.
00: Setting prohibited
01: Specifies pins P60 to P62 as DMAC control pins
10: Setting prohibited
11: Setting prohibited
3
DMAS1A
0
R/W
DMAC control pin select
2
DMAS1B
0
R/W
Selects the I/O port to control DMAC_1.
00: Specifies pins P14 to P16 as DMAC control pins
01: Setting prohibited
10: Setting prohibited
11: Setting prohibited
1
DMAS0A
0
R/W
DMAC control pin select
0
DMAS0B
0
R/W
Selects the I/O port to control DMAC_0.
00: Specifies pins P10 to P12 as DMAC control pins
01: Setting prohibited
10: Setting prohibited
11: Setting prohibited
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 389 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3.7
Port Function Control Register 9 (PFCR9)
PFCR9 selects the multiple functions for the TPU I/O pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TPUMS5
TPUMS4
TPUMS3A





0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
TPUMS5
0
R/W
TPU I/O Pin Multiplex Function Select
Selects TIOCA5 function
0: Specifies pin P26 as output compare output and input
capture
1: Specifies P27 as input capture input and P26 as output
compare
6
TPUMS4
0
R/W
TPU I/O Pin Multiplex Function Select
Selects TIOCA4 function
0: Specifies P25 as output compare output and input
capture
1: Specifies P24 as input capture input and P25 as output
compare
5
TPUMS3A 0
R/W
TPU I/O Pin Multiplex Function Select
Selects TIOCA3 function
0: Specifies P21 as output compare output and input
capture
1: Specifies P20 as input capture input and P21 as output
compare
4
TPUMS3B 0
R/W
TPU I/O Pin Multiplex Function Select
Selects TIOCC3 function
0: Specifies P22 as output compare output and input
capture
1: Specifies P23 as input capture input and P22 as output
compare
3 to 0
—
All 0
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 390 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3.8
Port Function Control Register B (PFCRB)
PFCRB selects the input pins for IRQ11 to IRQ8.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name




ITS11
ITS10
ITS9
ITS8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4

All 0
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
3
ITS11
0
R/W
IRQ11 Pin Select
Selects an input pin for IRQ11.
0: Selects pin P23 as IRQ11-A input
1: Selects pin P63 as IRQ11-B input
2
ITS10
0
R/W
IRQ10 Pin Select
Selects an input pin for IRQ10.
0: Selects pin P22 as IRQ10-A input
1: Selects pin P62 as IRQ10-B input
1
ITS9
0
R/W
IRQ9 Pin Select
Selects an input pin for IRQ9.
0: Selects pin P21 as IRQ9-A input
1: Selects pin P61 as IRQ9-B input
0
ITS8
0
R/W
IRQ8 Pin Select
Selects an input pin for IRQ8.
0: Selects pin P20 as IRQ8-A input
1: Selects pin P60 as IRQ8-B input
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 391 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3.9
Port Function Control Register C (PFCRC)
PFCRC selects input pins for IRQ7 to IRQ0.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ITS7
ITS6
ITS5
ITS4
ITS3
ITS2
ITS1
ITS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
ITS7
0
R/W
IRQ7 Pin Select
Selects an input pin for IRQ7.
0: Selects pin P17 as IRQ7-A input
1: Selects pin P57 as IRQ7-B output
6
ITS6
0
R/W
IRQ6 Pin Select
Selects an input pin for IRQ6.
0: Selects pin P16 as IRQ6-A input
1: Selects pin P56 as IRQ6-B output
5
ITS5
0
R/W
IRQ5 Pin Select
Selects an input pin for IRQ5.
0: Selects pin P15 as IRQ5-A input
1: Selects pin P55 as IRQ5-B output
4
ITS4
0
R/W
IRQ4 Pin Select
Selects an input pin for IRQ4.
0: Selects pin P14 as IRQ4-A input
1: Selects pin P54 as IRQ4-B output
3
ITS3
0
R/W
IRQ3 Pin Select
Selects an input pin for IRQ3.
0: Selects pin P13 as IRQ3-A input
1: Selects pin P53 as IRQ3-B output
2
ITS2
0
R/W
IRQ2 Pin Select
Selects an input pin for IRQ2.
0: Selects pin P12 as IRQ2-A input
1: Selects pin P52 as IRQ2-B output
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 392 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
1
ITS1
0
R/W
IRQ1 Pin Select
Selects an input pin for IRQ1.
0: Selects pin P11 as IRQ1-A input
1: Selects pin P51 as IRQ1-B output
0
ITS0
0
R/W
IRQ0 Pin Select
Selects an input pin for IRQ0.
0: Selects pin P10 as IRQ0-A input
1: Selects pin P50 as IRQ0-B output
9.4
Usage Notes
9.4.1
Notes on Input Buffer Control Register (ICR) Setting
1. When the ICR setting is changed, the LSI may malfunction due to an edge occurred internally
according to the pin state. Before changing the ICR setting, fix the pin state high or disable the
input function corresponding to the pin by the on-chip peripheral module settings.
2. If an input is enabled by setting ICR while multiple input functions are assigned to the pin, the
pin state is reflected in all the inputs. Care must be taken for each module settings for unused
input functions.
3. When a pin is used as an output, data to be output from the pin will be latched as the pin state
if the input function corresponding to the pin is enabled. To use the pin as an output, disable
the input function for the pin by setting ICR.
9.4.2
Notes on Port Function Control Register (PFCR) Settings
1. Port function controller controls the I/O port.
Before enabling a port function, select the input/output destination.
2. When changing input pins, this LSI may malfunction due to the internal edge generated by the
pin level difference before and after the change.
• To change input pins, the following procedure must be performed.
A. Disable the input function by the corresponding on-chip peripheral module settings
B. Select another input pin by PFCR
C. Enable its input function by the corresponding on-chip peripheral module settings
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 393 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 9 I/O Ports
3. If a pin function has both a select bit that modifies the input/output destination and an enable
bit that enables the pin function, first specify the input/output destination by the selection bit
and then enable the pin function by the enable bit.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 394 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
This LSI has an on-chip 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) that comprises six 16-bit timer channels.
Tables 10.1 lists the 16-bit timer unit functions and figure 10.1 is a block diagram.
10.1
Features
• Maximum 8-pulse input/output
• Selection of eight counter input clocks for each channel
• The following operations can be set for each channel:
 Waveform output at compare match (supported only in channels 3 to 5)
 Input capture function (supported other than in channel 2)
 Counter clear operation
 Synchronous operations:
• Multiple timer counters (TCNT) can be written to simultaneously
• Simultaneous clearing by compare match and input capture possible
• Simultaneous input/output for registers possible by counter synchronous operation
• Maximum of 7-phase PWM output possible by combination with synchronous
operation
• Buffer operation settable for channels 0 and 3
• Phase counting mode settable independently for each of channels 1, 2, 4, and 5
• Cascaded operation
• Fast access via internal 16-bit bus
• 26 interrupt sources
• Automatic transfer of register data
• Programmable pulse generator (PPG) output trigger can be generated
• Conversion start trigger for the A/D converter can be generated
• Module stop mode can be set
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 395 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.1 TPU Functions
Item
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Count clock
Pφ/1
Pφ/4
Pφ/16
Pφ/64
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKC
TCLKD
Pφ/1
Pφ/4
Pφ/16
Pφ/64
Pφ/256
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCNT2
Pφ/1
Pφ/4
Pφ/16
Pφ/64
Pφ/1024
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKC
Pφ/1
Pφ/4
Pφ/16
Pφ/64
Pφ/256
Pφ/1024
Pφ/4096
TCLKA
Pφ/1
Pφ/4
Pφ/16
Pφ/64
Pφ/1024
TCLKA
TCLKC
TCNT5
Pφ/1
Pφ/4
Pφ/16
Pφ/64
Pφ/256
TCLKA
TCLKC
TCLKD
General registers (TGR)
TGRA_0
TGRB_0
TGRA_1
TGRB_1
TGRA_2
TGRB_2
TGRA_3
TGRB_3
TGRA_4
TGRB_4
TGRA_5
TGRB_5
General registers/
buffer registers
TGRC_0
TGRD_0


TGRC_3
TGRD_3


I/O pins



TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
TIOCA4
TIOCB4
TIOCA5
TIOCB5
Counter clear function
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
Compare
match
output
0 output



O
O
O
1 output



O
O
O
Toggle
output



O
O
O
Input capture function
O
O

O
O
O
Synchronous operation
O
O
O
O
O
O
PWM mode
O
O
O
O
O
O
Phase counting mode

O
O

O
O
Buffer operation
O


O


DTC activation
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
TGR
compare
match or
input
capture
DMAC activation
TGRA_0
compare
match or
input
capture
TGRA_1
compare
match or
input
capture
TGRA_2
compare
match
TGRA_3
compare
match or
input
capture
TGRA_4
compare
match or
input
capture
TGRA_5
compare
match or
input
capture
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 396 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Item
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
A/D converter trigger
TGRA_0
compare
match or
input
capture
TGRA_1
compare
match or
input
capture
TGRA_2
compare
match
TGRA_3
compare
match or
input
capture
TGRA_4
compare
match or
input
capture
TGRA_5
compare
match or
input
capture
PPG trigger
TGRA_0/
TGRB_0
compare
match or
input
capture
TGRA_1/
TGRB_1
compare
match or
input
capture
TGRA_2/
TGRB_2
compare
match
TGRA_3/
TGRB_3
compare
match or
input
capture


Interrupt sources
5 sources
4 sources
4 sources
5 sources
4 sources
4 sources
Compare
match or
input
capture 0A
Compare
match or
input
capture 1A
Compare
match
Compare
match or
input
capture 3A
Compare
match or
input
capture 4A
Compare
match or
input
capture 5A
Compare
match or
input
capture 0B
Compare
match or
input
capture 1B
Compare
match or
input
capture 3B
Compare
match or
input
capture 4B
Compare
match or
input
capture 5B
Compare
match or
input
capture 0C
Overflow
Compare
match or
input
capture 3C
Overflow
Overflow
Underflow
Underflow
Underflow
Compare
match
Overflow
Underflow
Compare
match or
input
capture 0D
Compare
match or
input
capture 3D
Overflow
Overflow
[Legend]
O : Possible
 : Not possible
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 397 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
[Legend]
TSTR:
TSYR:
TCR:
TMDR:
TIOR (H, L):
TCNT
TGRA
TGRB
TGRC
TGRD
TCNT
TGRA
TGRB
Bus interface
TCNT
TGRA
TGRB
TCNT
TGRA
TGRB
TCNT
TGRA
TGRB
TCNT
TGRA
TGRB
TGRC
TGRD
Module data bus
TSTR TSYR
Channel 4
TCR TMDR
TIOR
TIER TSR
Channel 5
TCR TMDR
TIOR
TIER TSR
Channel 3
Timer start register
Timer synchronous register
Timer control register
Timer mode register
Timer I/O control registers (H, L)
Control logic
Common
Channel 2
TCR TMDR
TIOR
TIER TSR
Channel 1
TCR TMDR
TIOR
TIER TSR
Channel 0
TCR TMDR
TIORH TIORL
TIER TSR
Control logic for channels 0 to 2
Clock input
Internal clock: Pφ/1
Pφ/4
Pφ/16
Pφ/64
Pφ/256
Pφ/1024
Pφ/4096
External clock: TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKC
TCLKD
Control logic for channels 3 to 5
Input/output pins
TIOCA3
Channel 3:
TIOCB3
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
TIOCA4
Channel 4:
TIOCB4
TIOCA5
Channel 5:
TIOCB5
TCR TMDR
TIORH TIORL
TIER TSR
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
REJ09B0219-0100
Internal data bus
A/D conversion
start request signal
PPG output trigger signal
Interrupt request signals
Channel 0: TGI0A
TGI0B
TGI0C
TGI0D
TCI0V
Channel 1: TGI1A
TGI1B
TCI1V
TCI1U
Channel 2: TGI2A
TGI2B
TCI2V
TCI2U
TIER:
Timer interrupt enable register
TSR:
Timer status register
TGR (A, B, C, D): Timer general registers (A, B, C, D)
TCNT:
Timer counter
Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of TPU
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 398 of 966
Interrupt request signals
Channel 3: TGI3A
TGI3B
TGI3C
TGI3D
TCI3V
Channel 4: TGI4A
TGI4B
TCI4V
TCI4U
Channel 5: TGI5A
TGI5B
TCI5V
TCI5U
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 10.2 shows TPU pin configurations.
Table 10.2 Pin Configuration
Channel Symbol
I/O
All
Input External clock A input pin
TCLKA
Function
(Channel 1 and 5 phase counting mode A phase input)
TCLKB
Input External clock B input pin
(Channel 1 and 5 phase counting mode B phase input)
TCLKC
Input External clock C input pin
(Channel 2 and 4 phase counting mode A phase input)
TCLKD
Input External clock D input pin
(Channel 2 and 4 phase counting mode B phase input)
3
4
5
TIOCA3
I/O
TGRA_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCB3
I/O
TGRB_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCC3
I/O
TGRC_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCD3
I/O
TGRD_3 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCA4
I/O
TGRA_4 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCB4
I/O
TGRB_4 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCA5
I/O
TGRA_5 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
TIOCB5
I/O
TGRB_5 input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 399 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3
Register Descriptions
The TPU has the following registers in each channel.
• Channel 0
 Timer control register_0 (TCR_0)
 Timer mode register_0 (TMDR_0)
 Timer I/O control register H_0 (TIORH_0)
 Timer I/O control register L_0 (TIORL_0)
 Timer interrupt enable register_0 (TIER_0)
 Timer status register_0 (TSR_0)
 Timer counter_0 (TCNT_0)
 Timer general register A_0 (TGRA_0)
 Timer general register B_0 (TGRB_0)
 Timer general register C_0 (TGRC_0)
 Timer general register D_0 (TGRD_0)
• Channel 1
 Timer control register_1 (TCR_1)
 Timer mode register_1 (TMDR_1)
 Timer I/O control register _1 (TIOR_1)
 Timer interrupt enable register_1 (TIER_1)
 Timer status register_1 (TSR_1)
 Timer counter_1 (TCNT_1)
 Timer general register A_1 (TGRA_1)
 Timer general register B_1 (TGRB_1)
• Channel 2
 Timer control register_2 (TCR_2)
 Timer mode register_2 (TMDR_2)
 Timer I/O control register_2 (TIOR_2)
 Timer interrupt enable register_2 (TIER_2)
 Timer status register_2 (TSR_2)
 Timer counter_2 (TCNT_2)
 Timer general register A_2 (TGRA_2)
 Timer general register B_2 (TGRB_2)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 400 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• Channel 3
 Timer control register_3 (TCR_3)
 Timer mode register_3 (TMDR_3)
 Timer I/O control register H_3 (TIORH_3)
 Timer I/O control register L_3 (TIORL_3)
 Timer interrupt enable register_3 (TIER_3)
 Timer status register_3 (TSR_3)
 Timer counter_3 (TCNT_3)
 Timer general register A_3 (TGRA_3)
 Timer general register B_3 (TGRB_3)
 Timer general register C_3 (TGRC_3)
 Timer general register D_3 (TGRD_3)
• Channel 4
 Timer control register_4 (TCR_4)
 Timer mode register_4 (TMDR_4)
 Timer I/O control register _4 (TIOR_4)
 Timer interrupt enable register_4 (TIER_4)
 Timer status register_4 (TSR_4)
 Timer counter_4 (TCNT_4)
 Timer general register A_4 (TGRA_4)
 Timer general register B_4 (TGRB_4)
• Channel 5
 Timer control register_5 (TCR_5)
 Timer mode register_5 (TMDR_5)
 Timer I/O control register_5 (TIOR_5)
 Timer interrupt enable register_5 (TIER_5)
 Timer status register_5 (TSR_5)
 Timer counter_5 (TCNT_5)
 Timer general register A_5 (TGRA_5)
 Timer general register B_5 (TGRB_5)
• Common Registers
 Timer start register (TSTR)
 Timer synchronous register (TSYR)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 401 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.1
Timer Control Register (TCR)
TCR controls the TCNT operation for each channel. The TPU has a total of six TCR registers, one
for each channel. TCR register settings should be made only while TCNT operation is stopped.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CCLR2
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
CCLR2
0
R/W
Counter Clear 2 to 0
6
CCLR1
0
R/W
5
CCLR0
0
R/W
These bits select the TCNT counter clearing source.
See tables 10.3 and 10.4 for details.
4
CKEG1
0
R/W
Clock Edge 1 and 0
3
CKEG0
0
R/W
These bits select the input clock edge. For details, see
table 10.5. When the input clock is counted using both
edges, the input clock period is halved (e.g. Pφ/4 both
edges = Pφ/2 rising edge). If phase counting mode is
used on channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, this setting is ignored
and the phase counting mode setting has priority.
Internal clock edge selection is valid when the input
clock is Pφ/4 or slower. This setting is ignored if the
input clock is Pφ/1, or when overflow/underflow of
another channel is selected.
2
TPSC2
0
R/W
Timer Prescaler 2 to 0
1
TPSC1
0
R/W
0
TPSC0
0
R/W
These bits select the TCNT counter clock. The clock
source can be selected independently for each channel.
See tables 10.6 to 10.11 for details. To select the
external clock as the clock source, the DDR bit and ICR
bit for the corresponding pin should be set to 0 and 1,
respectively. For details, see section 9, I/O Ports.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 402 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.3 CCLR2 to CCLR0 (Channels 0 and 3)
Channel
Bit 7
CCLR2
Bit 6
CCLR1
Bit 5
CCLR0
Description
0, 3
0
0
0
TCNT clearing disabled
0
0
1
TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input
capture
0
1
0
TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input
capture
0
1
1
TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another
channel performing synchronous clearing/
1
synchronous operation*
1
0
0
TCNT clearing disabled
1
0
1
TCNT cleared by TGRC compare match/input
2
capture*
1
1
0
TCNT cleared by TGRD compare match/input
capture*2
1
1
1
TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another
channel performing synchronous clearing/
1
synchronous operation*
Notes: 1. Synchronous operation is selected by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1.
2. When TGRC or TGRD is used as a buffer register, TCNT is not cleared because the
buffer register setting has priority, and compare match/input capture does not occur.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 403 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.4 CCLR2 to CCLR0 (Channels 1, 2, 4, and 5)
Channel
Bit 7
Reserved
*2
Bit 6
CCLR1
Bit 5
CCLR0
Description
1, 2, 4, 5
0
0
0
TCNT clearing disabled
0
0
1
TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input
capture*3
0
1
0
TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input
capture*3
0
1
1
TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another
channel performing synchronous clearing/
1
synchronous operation*
Notes: 1. Synchronous operation is selected by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1.
2. Bit 7 is reserved in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. It is always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
3. In channel 2, the TCNT cannot be cleared by an input capture.
Table 10.5 Input Clock Edge Selection
Clock Edge Selection
Input Clock
CKEG1
CKEG0
Internal Clock
External Clock
0
0
Counted at falling edge
Counted at rising edge
0
1
Counted at rising edge
Counted at falling edge
1
X
Counted at both edges
Counted at both edges
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 404 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.6 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 0)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
0
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1
0
0
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/4
0
1
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/16
0
1
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/64
1
0
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
0
1
External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input
1
1
0
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
1
1
1
External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input
Table 10.7 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 1)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
1
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1
0
0
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/4
0
1
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/16
0
1
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/64
1
0
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
0
1
External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input
1
1
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/256
1
1
1
Counts on TCNT2 overflow/underflow
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 1 is in phase counting mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 405 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.8 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 2)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
2
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1
0
0
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/4
0
1
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/16
0
1
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/64
1
0
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
0
1
External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input
1
1
0
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
1
1
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1024
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 2 is in phase counting mode.
Table 10.9 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 3)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
3
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1
0
0
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/4
0
1
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/16
0
1
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/64
1
0
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
0
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1024
1
1
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/256
1
1
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/4096
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 406 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.10 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 4)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
4
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1
0
0
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/4
0
1
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/16
0
1
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/64
1
0
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
0
1
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
1
1
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1024
1
1
1
Counts on TCNT5 overflow/underflow
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 4 is in phase counting mode.
Table 10.11 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 5)
Channel
Bit 2
TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
5
0
0
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/1
0
0
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/4
0
1
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/16
0
1
1
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/64
1
0
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
0
1
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
1
1
0
Internal clock: counts on Pφ/256
1
1
1
External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input
Note: This setting is ignored when channel 5 is in phase counting mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 407 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.2
Timer Mode Register (TMDR)
TMDR sets the operating mode for each channel. The TPU has six TMDR registers, one for each
channel. TMDR register settings should be made only while TCNT operation is stopped.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name


BFB
BFA
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
Initial Value
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7, 6

All 1
R
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
5
BFB
0
R/W
Buffer Operation B
Specifies whether TGRB is to normally operate, or
TGRB and TGRD are to be used together for buffer
operation. When TGRD is used as a buffer register,
TGRD input capture/output compare is not generated.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no TGRD, bit 5 is
reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
0: TGRB operates normally
1: TGRB and TGRD used together for buffer operation
4
BFA
0
R/W
Buffer Operation A
Specifies whether TGRA is to normally operate, or
TGRA and TGRC are to be used together for buffer
operation. When TGRC is used as a buffer register,
TGRC input capture/output compare is not generated.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no TGRC, bit 4 is
reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
0: TGRA operates normally
1: TGRA and TGRC used together for buffer operation
3
MD3
0
R/W
Modes 3 to 0
2
MD2
0
R/W
Set the timer operating mode.
1
MD1
0
R/W
0
MD0
0
R/W
MD3 is a reserved bit. The write value should always be
0. See table 10.12 for details.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 408 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.12 MD3 to MD0
Bit 3
1
MD3*
Bit 2
MD2*2
Bit 1
MD1
Bit 0
MD0
Description
0
0
0
0
Normal operation
0
0
0
1
Reserved
0
0
1
0
PWM mode 1
0
0
1
1
PWM mode 2
0
1
0
0
Phase counting mode 1
0
1
0
1
Phase counting mode 2
0
1
1
0
Phase counting mode 3
0
1
1
1
Phase counting mode 4
1
X
X
X

[Legend]
X: Don't care
Notes: 1. MD3 is a reserved bit. The write value should always be 0.
2. Phase counting mode cannot be set for channels 0 and 3. In this case, 0 should always
be written to MD2.
10.3.3
Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)
TIOR controls TGR. The TPU has eight TIOR registers, two each for channels 0 and 3, and one
each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. Care is required since TIOR is affected by the TMDR setting.
The initial output specified by TIOR is valid when the counter is stopped (the CST bit in TSTR is
cleared to 0). Note also that, in PWM mode 2, the output at the point at which the counter is
cleared to 0 is specified.
When TGRC or TGRD is designated for buffer operation, this setting is invalid and the register
operates as a buffer register.
To designate the input capture pin in TIOR, the DDR bit and ICR bit for the corresponding pin
should be set to 0 and 1, respectively. For details, see section 9, I/O Ports.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 409 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• TIORH_0, TIOR_1, TIOR_2, TIORH_3, TIOR_4, TIOR_5
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• TIORL_0, TIORL_3
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IOD3
IOD2
IOD1
IOD0
IOC3
IOC2
IOC1
IOC0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• TIORH_0, TIOR_1, TIOR_2, TIORH_3, TIOR_4, TIOR_5
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
IOB3
0
R/W
I/O Control B3 to B0
6
IOB2
0
R/W
Specify the function of TGRB.
5
IOB1
0
R/W
4
IOB0
0
R/W
For details, see tables 10.13, 10.15, 10.16, 10.17,
10.19, and 10.20.
3
IOA3
0
R/W
I/O Control A3 to A0
2
IOA2
0
R/W
Specify the function of TGRA.
1
IOA1
0
R/W
0
IOA0
0
R/W
For details, see tables 10.21, 10.23, 10.24, 10.25,
10.27, and 10.28.
• TIORL_0, TIORL_3:
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
IOD3
0
R/W
I/O Control D3 to D0
6
IOD2
0
R/W
Specify the function of TGRD.
5
IOD1
0
R/W
For details, see tables 10.14 and 10.18.
4
IOD0
0
R/W
3
IOC3
0
R/W
I/O Control C3 to C0
2
IOC2
0
R/W
Specify the function of TGRC.
1
IOC1
0
R/W
For details, see tables 10.22 and 10.26.
0
IOC0
0
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 410 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.13 TIORH_0
Description
Bit 7
IOB3
Bit 6
IOB2
Bit 5
IOB1
Bit 4
IOB0
TGRB_0
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
Output disabled
0
0
0
1

Setting prohibited
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
x
1
1
x
x
Input
capture
register
Capture input source is channel 1/count clock
TIOCB0 Pin Function
Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down*
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Note: When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_1 are set to B'000 and Pφ/1 is used as the TCNT_1
count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 411 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.14 TIORL_0
Description
Bit 7
IOD3
Bit 6
IOD2
Bit 5
IOD1
Bit 4
IOD0
TGRD_0
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
Output disabled
0
0
0
1

Setting prohibited
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
X
1
1
X
X
Input
capture
register*2
Capture input source is channel 1/count clock
TIOCD0 Pin Function
1
Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down*
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Notes: 1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_1 are set to B'000 and Pφ/1 is used as the
TCNT_1 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
2. When the BFB bit in TMDR_0 is set to 1 and TGRD_0 is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 412 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.15 TIOR_1
Description
Bit 7
IOB3
Bit 6
IOB2
Bit 5
IOB1
Bit 4
IOB0
TGRB_1
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
Output disabled
0
0
0
1

Setting prohibited
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
X
1
1
X
X
Input
capture
register
TGRC_0 compare match/input capture
TIOCB1 Pin Function
Input capture at generation of TGRC_0 compare
match/input capture
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 413 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.16 TIOR_2
Description
Bit 7
IOB3
Bit 6
IOB2
Bit 5
IOB1
Bit 4
IOB0
TGRB_2
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
Output disabled
0
0
0
1

Setting prohibited
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
X
0
0
1
X
0
1
1
X
1
X
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 414 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
TIOCB2 Pin Function
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.17 TIORH_3
Description
Bit 7
IOB3
Bit 6
IOB2
Bit 5
IOB1
Bit 4
IOB0
TGRB_3
Function
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Output
compare
register
TIOCB3 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0 output
0 output at compare match
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
Initial output is 0 output
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 0 output
Toggle output at compare match
0
1
0
0
Output disabled
0
1
0
1
Initial output is 1 output
0 output at compare match
0
1
1
0
Initial output is 1 output
1 output at compare match
0
1
1
Initial output is 1 output
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Input
capture
register
Capture input source is TIOCB3 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is TIOCB3 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
0
1
x
Capture input source is TIOCB3 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
1
x
x
Capture input source is channel 4/count clock
Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down*
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Note: When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_4 are set to B'000 and Pφ/1 is used as the TCNT_4
count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 415 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.18 TIORL_3
Description
Bit 7
IOD3
Bit 6
IOD2
Bit 5
IOD1
Bit 4
IOD0
TGRD_3
Function
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Output
compare
register*2
TIOCD3 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0 output
0 output at compare match
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
Initial output is 0 output
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 0 output
Toggle output at compare match
0
1
0
0
Output disabled
0
1
0
1
Initial output is 1 output
0 output at compare match
0
1
1
0
Initial output is 1 output
1 output at compare match
0
1
1
1
Initial output is 1 output
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Input
capture
register*2
Capture input source is TIOCD3 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is TIOCD3 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
0
1
x
Capture input source is TIOCD3 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
1
x
x
Capture input source is channel 4/count clock
1
Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down*
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Notes: 1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR_4 are set to B'000 and Pφ/1 is used as the
TCNT_4 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
2. When the BFB bit in TMDR_3 is set to 1 and TGRD_3 is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 416 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.19 TIOR_4
Description
Bit 7
IOB3
Bit 6
IOB2
Bit 5
IOB1
Bit 4
IOB0
TGRB_4
Function
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Output
compare
register
TIOCB4 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0 output
0 output at compare match
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
Initial output is 0 output
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 0 output
Toggle output at compare match
0
1
0
0
Output disabled
0
1
0
1
Initial output is 1 output
0 output at compare match
0
1
1
0
Initial output is 1 output
1 output at compare match
0
1
1
Initial output is 1 output
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Input
capture
register
Capture input source is TIOCB4 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is TIOCB4 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
0
1
x
Capture input source is TIOCB4 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
1
x
x
Capture input source is TGRC_3 compare
match/input capture
Input capture at generation of TGRC_3 compare
match/input capture
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 417 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.20 TIOR_5
Description
Bit 7
IOB3
Bit 6
IOB2
Bit 5
IOB1
Bit 4
IOB0
TGRB_5
Function
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Output
compare
register
TIOCB5 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0 output
0 output at compare match
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
Initial output is 0 output
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 0 output
Toggle output at compare match
0
1
0
0
Output disabled
0
1
0
1
Initial output is 1 output
0 output at compare match
0
1
1
0
Initial output is 1 output
1 output at compare match
0
1
1
Initial output is 1 output
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
x
0
0
1
x
0
1
Input
capture
register
Capture input source is TIOCB5 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is TIOCB5 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
x
1
x
Capture input source is TIOCB5 pin
Input capture at both edges
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 418 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.21 TIORH_0
Description
Bit 3
IOA3
Bit 2
IOA2
Bit 1
IOA1
Bit 0
IOA0
TGRA_0
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
Output disabled
0
0
0
1

Setting prohibited
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
X
1
1
X
X
Input
capture
register
Capture input source is channel 1/count clock
TIOCA0 Pin Function
Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 419 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.22 TIORL_0
Description
Bit 3
IOC3
Bit 2
IOC2
Bit 1
IOC1
Bit 0
IOC0
TGRC_0
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
Output disabled
0
0
0
1

Setting prohibited
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
X
1
1
X
X
Input
capture
register*
Capture input source is channel 1/count clock
TIOCC0 Pin Function
Input capture at TCNT_1 count-up/count-down
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Note: 1. When the BFA bit in TMDR_0 is set to 1 and TGRC_0 is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture is not generated.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 420 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.23 TIOR_1
Description
Bit 3
IOA3
Bit 2
IOA2
Bit 1
IOA1
Bit 0
IOA0
TGRA_1
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
Output disabled
0
0
0
1

Setting prohibited
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
X
1
1
X
X
Input
capture
register
Capture input source is TGRA_0 compare
match/input capture
TIOCA1 Pin Function
Input capture at generation of channel 0/TGRA_0
compare match/input capture
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 421 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.24 TIOR_2
Description
Bit 3
IOA3
Bit 2
IOA2
Bit 1
IOA1
Bit 0
IOA0
TGRA_2
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
Output disabled
0
0
0
1

Setting prohibited
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
X
0
0
1
X
0
1
1
X
1
X
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 422 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
TIOCA2 Pin Function
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.25 TIORH_3
Description
Bit 3
IOA3
Bit 2
IOA2
Bit 1
IOA1
Bit 0
IOA0
TGRA_3
Function
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Output
compare
register
TIOCA3 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0 output
0 output at compare match
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
Initial output is 0 output
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 0 output
Toggle output at compare match
0
1
0
0
Output disabled
0
1
0
1
Initial output is 1 output
0 output at compare match
0
1
1
0
Initial output is 1 output
1 output at compare match
0
1
1
Initial output is 1 output
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Input
capture
register
Capture input source is TIOCA3 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is TIOCA3 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
0
1
X
Capture input source is TIOCA3 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
1
X
X
Capture input source is channel 4/count clock
Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 423 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.26 TIORL_3
Description
Bit 3
IOC3
Bit 2
IOC2
Bit 1
IOC1
Bit 0
IOC0
TGRC_3
Function
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Output
compare
register*
TIOCC3 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0 output
0 output at compare match
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
Initial output is 0 output
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 0 output
Toggle output at compare match
0
1
0
0
Output disabled
0
1
0
1
Initial output is 1 output
0 output at compare match
0
1
1
0
Initial output is 1 output
1 output at compare match
0
1
1
Initial output is 1 output
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Input
capture
register*
Capture input source is TIOCC3 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is TIOCC3 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
0
1
X
Capture input source is TIOCC3 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
1
X
X
Capture input source is channel 4/count clock
Input capture at TCNT_4 count-up/count-down
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Note: * When the BFA bit in TMDR_3 is set to 1 and TGRC_3 is used as a buffer register, this
setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 424 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.27 TIOR_4
Description
Bit 3
IOA3
Bit 2
IOA2
Bit 1
IOA1
Bit 0
IOA0
TGRA_4
Function
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Output
compare
register
TIOCA4 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0 output
0 output at compare match
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
Initial output is 0 output
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 0 output
Toggle output at compare match
0
1
0
0
Output disabled
0
1
0
1
Initial output is 1 output
0 output at compare match
0
1
1
0
Initial output is 1 output
1 output at compare match
0
1
1
Initial output is 1 output
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Input
capture
register
Capture input source is TIOCA4 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is TIOCA4 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
0
1
X
Capture input source is TIOCA4 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
1
X
X
Capture input source is TGRA_3 compare
match/input capture
Input capture at generation of TGRA_3 compare
match/input capture
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 425 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.28 TIOR_5
Description
Bit 3
IOA3
Bit 2
IOA2
Bit 1
IOA1
Bit 0
IOA0
TGRA_5
Function
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Output
compare
register
TIOCA5 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0 output
0 output at compare match
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
Initial output is 0 output
1 output at compare match
Initial output is 0 output
Toggle output at compare match
0
1
0
0
Output disabled
0
1
0
1
Initial output is 1 output
0 output at compare match
0
1
1
0
Initial output is 1 output
1 output at compare match
0
1
1
Initial output is 1 output
1
Toggle output at compare match
1
X
0
0
1
X
0
1
Input
capture
register
Input capture source is TIOCA5 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Input capture source is TIOCA5 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
X
1
X
Input capture source is TIOCA5 pin
Input capture at both edges
[Legend]
X: Don't care
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 426 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.4
Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)
TIER controls enabling or disabling of interrupt requests for each channel. The TPU has six TIER
registers, one for each channel.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TTGE

TCIEU
TCIEV
TGIED
TGIEC
TGIEB
TGIEA
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
TTGE
0
R/W
A/D Conversion Start Request Enable
Enables/disables generation of A/D conversion start
requests by TGRA input capture/compare match.
0: A/D conversion start request generation disabled
1: A/D conversion start request generation enabled
6

1
R
Reserved
5
TCIEU
0
R/W
Underflow Interrupt Enable
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
Enables/disables interrupt requests (TCIU) by the
TCFU flag when the TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 in
channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
In channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read
as 0 and cannot be modified.
0: Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU enabled
4
TCIEV
0
R/W
Overflow Interrupt Enable
Enables/disables interrupt requests (TCIV) by the TCFV
flag when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1.
0: Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV enabled
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 427 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
TGIED
0
R/W
TGR Interrupt Enable D
Enables/disables interrupt requests (TGID) by the
TGFD bit when the TGFD bit in TSR is set to 1 in
channels 0 and 3.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. It is always
read as 0 and cannot be modified.
0: Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit enabled
2
TGIEC
0
R/W
TGR Interrupt Enable C
Enables/disables interrupt requests (TGIC) by the
TGFC bit when the TGFC bit in TSR is set to 1 in
channels 0 and 3.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. It is always
read as 0 and cannot be modified.
0: Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit enabled
1
TGIEB
0
R/W
TGR Interrupt Enable B
Enables/disables interrupt requests (TGIB) by the
TGFB bit when the TGFB bit in TSR is set to 1.
0: Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit enabled
0
TGIEA
0
R/W
TGR Interrupt Enable A
Enables/disables interrupt requests (TGIA) by the
TGFA bit when the TGFA bit in TSR is set to 1.
0: Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit enabled
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 428 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.5
Timer Status Register (TSR)
TSR indicates the status of each channel. The TPU has six TSR registers, one for each channel.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TCFD

TCFU
TCFV
TGFD
TGFC
TGFB
TGFA
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Note:
R
R
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
* Only 0 can be written to bits 5 to 0, to clear flags.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
TCFD
1
R
6

1
5
TCFU
0
4
TCFV
0
Description
Count Direction Flag
Status flag that shows the direction in which TCNT
counts in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
In channels 0 and 3, bit 7 is reserved. It is always read
as 1 and cannot be modified.
0: TCNT counts down
1: TCNT counts up
R
Reserved
This is a read-only bit and cannot be modified.
R/(W)* Underflow Flag
Status flag that indicates that a TCNT underflow has
occurred when channels 1, 2, 4, and 5 are set to phase
counting mode.
In channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read
as 0 and cannot be modified.
[Setting condition]
When the TCNT value underflows (changes from
H'0000 to H'FFFF)
[Clearing condition]
When a 0 is written to TCFU after reading TCFU = 1
R/(W)* Overflow Flag
Status flag that indicates that a TCNT overflow has
occurred.
[Setting condition]
When the TCNT value overflows (changes from H'FFFF
to H'0000)
[Clearing condition]
When a 0 is written to TCFV after reading TCFV = 1
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 429 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
3
TGFD
0
R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag D
Description
Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRD input
capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. It is always
read as 0 and cannot be modified.
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRD while TGRD is functioning as
output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRD by input
capture signal while TGRD is functioning as input
capture register
[Clearing conditions]
2
TGFC
0
•
When DTC is activated by a TGID interrupt while
the DISEL bit in MRB of DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFD after reading TGFD = 1
R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag C
Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRC input
capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3.
In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. It is always
read as 0 and cannot be modified.
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRC while TGRC is functioning as
output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRC by input
capture signal while TGRC is functioning as input
capture register
[Clearing conditions]
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 430 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
•
When DTC is activated by a TGIC interrupt while
the DISEL bit in MRB of DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFC after reading TGFC = 1
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
1
TGFB
0
R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag B
Description
Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRB input
capture or compare match.
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRB while TGRB is functioning as
output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRB by input
capture signal while TGRB is functioning as input
capture register
[Clearing conditions]
0
TGFA
0
•
When DTC is activated by a TGIB interrupt while the
DISEL bit in MRB of DTC is 0
•
When 0 is written to TGFB after reading TGFB = 1
R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag A
Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRA input
capture or compare match.
[Setting conditions]
•
When TCNT = TGRA while TGRA is functioning as
output compare register
•
When TCNT value is transferred to TGRA by input
capture signal while TGRA is functioning as input
capture register
[Clearing conditions]
Note:
*
•
When DTC is activated by a TGIA interrupt while the
DISEL bit in MRB of DTC is 0
•
When DMAC is activated by a TGIA interrupt while
the DTA bit in DMDR of DMAC is 1
•
When 0 is written to TGFA after reading TGFA = 1
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 431 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.6
Timer Counter (TCNT)
TCNT is a 16-bit readable/writable counter. The TPU has six TCNT counters, one for each
channel.
TCNT is initialized to H'0000 by a reset or in hardware standby mode.
TCNT cannot be accessed in 8-bit units. TCNT must always be accessed in 16-bit units.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
10.3.7
Timer General Register (TGR)
TGR is a 16-bit readable/writable register with a dual function as output compare and input
capture registers. The TPU has 16 TGR registers, four each for channels 0 and 3 and two each for
channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. TGRC and TGRD for channels 0 and 3 can also be designated for
operation as buffer registers. The TGR registers cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must
always be accessed in 16-bit units. TGR and buffer register combinations during buffer operations
are TGRA−TGRC and TGRB−TGRD.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 432 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.8
Timer Start Register (TSTR)
TSTR starts or stops operation for channels 0 to 5. When setting the operating mode in TMDR or
setting the count clock in TCR, first stop the TCNT counter.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name


CST5
CST4
CST3
CST2
CST1
CST0
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7, 6

All 0
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
5
CST5
0
R/W
Counter Start 5 to 0
4
CST4
0
R/W
These bits select operation or stoppage for TCNT.
3
CST3
0
R/W
2
CST2
0
R/W
1
CST1
0
R/W
0
CST0
0
R/W
If 0 is written to the CST bit during operation with the
TIOC pin designated for output, the counter stops but
the TIOC pin output compare output level is retained. If
TIOR is written to when the CST bit is cleared to 0, the
pin output level will be changed to the set initial output
value. Note that TIOC pins are not provided for
channels 0 to 2.
0: TCNT_5 to TCNT_0 count operation is stopped
1: TCNT_5 to TCNT_0 performs count operation
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 433 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.3.9
Timer Synchronous Register (TSYR)
TSYR selects independent operation or synchronous operation for the TCNT counters of channels
0 to 5. A channel performs synchronous operation when the corresponding bit in TSYR is set to 1.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name


SYNC5
SYNC4
SYNC3
SYNC2
SYNC1
SYNC0
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7, 6

All 0
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
5
SYNC5
0
R/W
Timer Synchronization 5 to 0
4
SYNC4
0
R/W
3
SYNC3
0
R/W
These bits select whether operation is independent of
or synchronized with other channels.
2
SYNC2
0
R/W
1
SYNC1
0
R/W
0
SYNC0
0
R/W
When synchronous operation is selected, synchronous
presetting of multiple channels, and synchronous
clearing through counter clearing on another channel
are possible.
To set synchronous operation, the SYNC bits for at
least two channels must be set to 1. To set
synchronous clearing, in addition to the SYNC bit, the
TCNT clearing source must also be set by means of
bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR.
0: TCNT_5 to TCNT_0 operate independently (TCNT
presetting/clearing is unrelated to other channels)
1: TCNT_5 to TCNT_0 perform synchronous operation
(TCNT synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing
is possible)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 434 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4
Operation
10.4.1
Basic Functions
Each channel has a TCNT and TGR register. TCNT performs up-counting, and is also capable of
free-running operation, periodic counting, and external event counting.
Each TGR can be used as an input capture register or output compare register.
(1)
Counter Operation
When one of bits CST0 to CST5 is set to 1 in TSTR, the TCNT counter for the corresponding
channel starts counting. TCNT can operate as a free-running counter, periodic counter, and so on.
(a)
Example of count operation setting procedure
Figure 10.2 shows an example of the count operation setting procedure.
[1] Select the counter clock with
bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR.
At the same time, select the
input clock edge with bits
CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR.
[2]
For periodic counter operation,
select the TGR to be used as
the TCNT clearing source with
bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR.
Operation selection
Select counter clock
[1]
Free-running counter
Periodic counter
Select counter clearing source
[2]
Select output compare register
[3]
Set period
[4]
Start count
[5]
<Periodic counter>
[3] Designate the TGR selected in
[2] as an output compare
register by means of TIOR.
[4] Set the periodic counter cycle in
the TGR selected in [2].
[5] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to
start the counter operation.
Start count
[5]
<Free-running counter>
Figure 10.2 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 435 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(b)
Free-running count operation and periodic count operation
Immediately after a reset, the TPU's TCNT counters are all designated as free-running counters.
When the relevant bit in TSTR is set to 1 the corresponding TCNT counter starts up-count
operation as a free-running counter. When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000),
the TCFV bit in TSR is set to 1. If the value of the corresponding TCIEV bit in TIER is 1 at this
point, the TPU requests an interrupt. After overflow, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000.
Figure 10.3 illustrates free-running counter operation.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
H'0000
Time
CST bit
TCFV
Figure 10.3 Free-Running Counter Operation
When compare match is selected as the TCNT clearing source, the TCNT counter for the relevant
channel performs periodic count operation. The TGR register for setting the period is designated
as an output compare register, and counter clearing by compare match is selected by means of bits
CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR. After the settings have been made, TCNT starts count-up operation as
a periodic counter when the corresponding bit in TSTR is set to 1. When the count value matches
the value in TGR, the TGF bit in TSR is set to 1 and TCNT is cleared to H'0000.
If the value of the corresponding TGIE bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests an interrupt.
After a compare match, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000.
Figure 10.4 illustrates periodic counter operation.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 436 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
TCNT value
Counter cleared by TGR
compare match
TGR
H'0000
Time
CST bit
Flag cleared by software or
DTC activation
TGF
Figure 10.4 Periodic Counter Operation
(2)
Waveform Output by Compare Match
The channels 3 to 5 of the TPU can perform 0, 1, or toggle output from the corresponding output
pin using a compare match.
(a)
Example of setting procedure for waveform output by compare match
Figure 10.5 shows an example of the setting procedure for waveform output by a compare match.
Output selection
[1] Select initial value from 0-output or 1-output,
and compare match output value from 0-output,
1-output, or toggle-output, by means of TIOR.
The set initial value is output on the TIOC pin
until the first compare match occurs.
Select waveform output mode
[1]
Set output timing
[2]
[2] Set the timing for compare match generation in
TGR.
Start count
[3]
[3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
<Waveform output>
Figure 10.5 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 437 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(b)
Examples of waveform output operation
Figure 10.6 shows an example of 0-output and 1-output.
In this example, TCNT has been designated as a free-running counter, and settings have been
made so that 1 is output by compare match A, and 0 is output by compare match B. When the set
level and the pin level match, the pin level does not change.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
TGRA
TGRB
Time
H'0000
No change
No change
1-output
TIOCA
No change
TIOCB
No change
0-output
Figure 10.6 Example of 0-Output/1-Output Operation
Figure 10.7 shows an example of toggle output.
In this example, TCNT has been designated as a periodic counter (with counter clearing performed
by compare match B), and settings have been made so that output is toggled by both compare
match A and compare match B.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by TGRB compare match
H'FFFF
TGRB
TGRA
Time
H'0000
Toggle-output
TIOCB
Toggle-output
TIOCA
Figure 10.7 Example of Toggle Output Operation
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 438 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(3)
Input Capture Function
The TCNT value can be transferred to TGR on detection of the TIOC pin input edge.
The detection edge can be selected for channels 3 to 5.
Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected as the detection edge. For channels 0, 1, 3,
and 4, it is also possible to specify another channel's counter input clock or compare match signal
as the input capture source.
Note: When another channel's counter input clock is used as the input capture input for
channels 0 and 3, Pφ/1 should not be selected as the counter input clock used for input
capture input. Input capture will not be generated if Pφ/1 is selected.
(a)
Example of setting procedure for input capture operation
Figure 10.8 shows an example of the setting procedure for input capture operation.
Input selection
Select input capture input
[1]
Start count
[2]
[1] Designate TGR as an input capture register by
means of TIOR, and select the input capture source
and input signal edge (rising edge, falling
edge, or both edges).
[2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
<Input capture operation>
Figure 10.8 Example of Setting Procedure for Input Capture Operation
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 439 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(b)
Example of input capture operation
Figure 10.9 shows an example of input capture operation.
In this example, both rising and falling edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture
input edge, falling edge has been selected as the TIOCB pin input capture input edge, and counter
clearing by TGRB input capture has been designated for TCNT.
Counter cleared by TIOCB
input (falling edge)
TCNT value
H'0180
H'0160
H'0010
H'0005
Time
H'0000
TIOCA
TGRA
H'0005
H'0160
H'0010
TIOCB
TGRB
H'0180
Figure 10.9 Example of Input Capture Operation
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 440 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.2
Synchronous Operation
In synchronous operation, the values in multiple TCNT counters can be rewritten simultaneously
(synchronous presetting). Also, multiple TCNT counters can be cleared simultaneously
(synchronous clearing) by making the appropriate setting in TCR.
Synchronous operation enables TGR to be incremented with respect to a single time base.
Channels 0 to 5 can all be designated for synchronous operation.
(1)
Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure
Figure 10.10 shows an example of the synchronous operation setting procedure.
Synchronous operation
selection
Set synchronous
operation
[1]
Synchronous presetting
Set TCNT
Synchronous clearing
[2]
Clearing
source generation
channel?
No
Yes
Select counter
clearing source
Start count
<Synchronous presetting>
<Counter clearing>
[3]
Set synchronous
counter clearing
[4]
[5]
Start count
[5]
<Synchronous clearing>
[1] Set the SYNC bits in TSYR corresponding to the channels to be designated for synchronous operation to 1.
[2] When the TCNT counter of any of the channels designated for synchronous operation is written to, the
same value is simultaneously written to the other TCNT counters.
[3] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to specify TCNT clearing by input capture/output compare, etc.
[4] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to designate synchronous clearing for the counter clearing source.
[5] Set the CST bits in TSTR for the relevant channels to 1, to start the count operation.
Figure 10.10 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 441 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(2)
Example of Synchronous Operation
Figure 10.11 shows an example of synchronous operation.
In this example, synchronous operation and PWM mode 1 have been designated for channels 3 to
5, TGRB_3 compare match has been set as the channel 3 counter clearing source, and
synchronous clearing has been set for the channel 4 and 5 counter clearing source.
Three-phase PWM waveforms are output from pins TIOCA3, TIOCA4, and TIOCA5. At this
time, synchronous presetting and synchronous clearing by TGRB_3 compare match are performed
for channel 3 to 5 TCNT counters, and the data set in TGRB_3 is used as the PWM cycle.
For details on PWM modes, see section 10.4.5, PWM Modes.
Synchronous clearing by TGRB_3 compare match
TCNT_3 to TCNT_5 values
TGRB_3
TGRB_4
TGRA_3
TGRB_5
TGRA_4
TGRA_5
Time
H'0000
TIOCA3
TIOCA4
TIOCA5
Figure 10.11 Example of Synchronous Operation
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 442 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.3
Buffer Operation
Buffer operation, provided for channels 0 and 3, enables TGRC and TGRD to be used as buffer
registers.
Buffer operation differs depending on whether TGR has been designated as an input capture
register or a compare match register.
Table 10.29 shows the register combinations used in buffer operation.
Table 10.29 Register Combinations in Buffer Operation
Channel
Timer General Register
Buffer Register
0
TGRA_0
TGRC_0
TGRB_0
TGRD_0
TGRA_3
TGRC_3
TGRB_3
TGRD_3
3
• When TGR is an output compare register
When a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register for the corresponding channel is
transferred to the timer general register.
This operation is illustrated in figure 10.12.
Compare match signal
Buffer register
Timer general
register
Comparator
TCNT
Figure 10.12 Compare Match Buffer Operation
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 443 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
• When TGR is an input capture register
When input capture occurs, the value in TCNT is transferred to TGR and the value previously
held in TGR is transferred to the buffer register.
This operation is illustrated in figure 10.13.
Input capture
signal
Timer general
register
Buffer register
TCNT
Figure 10.13 Input Capture Buffer Operation
(1)
Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure
Figure 10.14 shows an example of the buffer operation setting procedure.
[1] Designate TGR as an input capture register or
output compare register by means of TIOR.
Buffer operation
Select TGR function
Set buffer operation
Start count
[1]
[2]
[2] Designate TGR for buffer operation with bits
BFA and BFB in TMDR.
[3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
[3]
<Buffer operation>
Figure 10.14 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 444 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(2)
Examples of Buffer Operation
(a)
When TGR is an output compare register
Figure 10.15 shows an operation example in which PWM mode 1 has been designated for channel
3, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC. The settings used in this
example are TCNT clearing by compare match B, 1 output at compare match A, and 0 output at
compare match B.
As buffer operation has been set, when compare match A occurs, the output changes and the value
in buffer register TGRC is simultaneously transferred to timer general register TGRA. This
operation is repeated each time compare match A occurs.
For details on PWM modes, see section 10.4.5, PWM Modes.
TCNT value
TGRB_3
H'0520
H'0450
H'0200
TGRA_3
Time
H'0000
TGRC_3 H'0200
H'0450
H'0520
Transfer
TGRA_3
H'0200
H'0450
TIOCA3
Figure 10.15 Example of Buffer Operation (1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 445 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(b)
When TGR is an input capture register
Figure 10.16 shows an operation example in which TGRA has been designated as an input capture
register, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC.
Counter clearing by TGRA input capture has been set for TCNT, and both rising and falling edges
have been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture input edge.
As buffer operation has been set, when the TCNT value is stored in TGRA upon occurrence of
input capture A, the value previously stored in TGRA is simultaneously transferred to TGRC.
TCNT value
H'0F07
H'09FB
H'0532
H'0000
Time
TIOCA
TGRA
H'0532
TGRC
H'0F07
H'09FB
H'0532
H'0F07
Figure 10.16 Example of Buffer Operation (2)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 446 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.4
Cascaded Operation
In cascaded operation, two 16-bit counters for different channels are used together as a 32-bit
counter.
This function works by counting the channel 1 (channel 4) counter clock at overflow/underflow of
TCNT_2 (TCNT_5) as set in bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR.
Underflow occurs only when the lower 16-bit TCNT is in phase-counting mode.
Table 10.30 shows the register combinations used in cascaded operation.
Note: When phase counting mode is set for channel 1 or 4, the counter clock setting is invalid
and the counter operates independently in phase counting mode.
Table 10.30 Cascaded Combinations
Combination
Upper 16 Bits
Lower 16 Bits
Channels 1 and 2
TCNT_1
TCNT_2
Channels 4 and 5
TCNT_4
TCNT_5
(1)
Example of Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure
Figure 10.17 shows an example of the setting procedure for cascaded operation.
Cascaded operation
Set cascading
[1]
[1] Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in the channel 1
(channel 4) TCR to B'1111 to select TCNT_2
(TCNT_5) overflow/underflow counting.
[2] Set the CST bit in TSTR for the upper and lower
channels to 1 to start the count operation.
Start count
[2]
<Cascaded operation>
Figure 10.17 Example of Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 447 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(2)
Examples of Cascaded Operation
Figure 10.18 illustrates the operation when counting upon TCNT_5 overflow/underflow has been
set for TCNT_4, TGRA_4 and TGRA_5 have been designated as input capture registers, and the
TIOC pin rising edge has been selected.
When a rising edge is input to the TIOCA4 and TIOCA5 pins simultaneously, the upper 16 bits of
the 32-bit data are transferred to TGRA_4, and the lower 16 bits to TGRA_5.
TCNT_4 clock
TCNT_4
H'03A1
H'03A2
TCNT_5 clock
TCNT_5
H'FFFF
H'0000
H'0001
TIOCA4, TIOCA5
TGRA_4
H'03A2
TGRA_5
H'0000
Figure 10.18 Example of Cascaded Operation (1)
Figure 10.19 illustrates the operation when counting upon TCNT_5 overflow/underflow has been
set for TCNT_4, and phase counting mode has been designated for channel 5.
TCNT_4 is incremented by TCNT_5 overflow and decremented by TCNT_5 underflow.
TCLKC
TCLKD
TCNT_5
TCNT_4
FFFD
FFFE
FFFF
0000
0000
0001
0002
0001
0000
0001
Figure 10.19 Example of Cascaded Operation (2)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 448 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
FFFF
0000
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.5
PWM Modes
In PWM mode, PWM waveforms are output from the output pins. 0-, 1-, or toggle-output can be
selected as the output level in response to compare match of each TGR.
Settings of TGR registers can output a PWM waveform in the range of 0% to 100% duty cycle.
Designating TGR compare match as the counter clearing source enables the cycle to be set in that
register. All channels can be designated for PWM mode independently. Synchronous operation is
also possible.
There are two PWM modes, as described below.
1. PWM mode 1
PWM output is generated from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins by pairing TGRA with TGRB and
TGRC with TGRD. The outputs specified by bits IOA3 to IOA0 and IOC3 to IOC0 in TIOR
are output from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins at compare matches A and C, respectively. The
outputs specified by bits IOB3 to IOB0 and IOD3 to IOD0 in TIOR are output at compare
matches B and D, respectively. The initial output value is the value set in TGRA or TGRC. If
the set values of paired TGRs are identical, the output value does not change when a compare
match occurs.
In PWM mode 1, a maximum 4-phase PWM output is possible.
2. PWM mode 2
PWM output is generated using one TGR as the cycle register and the others as duty cycle
registers. The output specified in TIOR is performed by means of compare matches. Upon
counter clearing by a synchronous register compare match, the output value of each pin is the
initial value set in TIOR. If the set values of the cycle and duty cycle registers are identical, the
output value does not change when a compare match occurs.
In PWM mode 2, a maximum 7-phase PWM output is possible by combined use with
synchronous operation.
The correspondence between PWM output pins and registers is shown in table 10.31.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 449 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 10.31 PWM Output Registers and Output Pins
Output Pins
Channel
Registers
PWM Mode 1
PWM Mode 2
0
TGRA_0


TGRB_0
TGRC_0
TGRD_0
1
TGRA_1
TGRB_1
2
TGRA_2
TGRB_2
3
TGRA_3
TIOCA3
TGRB_3
TGRC_3
TIOCC3
TGRD_3
4
TGRA_4
TGRA_5
TGRB_5
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
TIOCA4
TGRB_4
5
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TIOCA4
TIOCB4
TIOCA5
TIOCA5
TIOCB5
Note: In PWM mode 2, PWM output is not possible for the TGR register in which the cycle is set.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 450 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(1)
Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure
Figure 10.20 shows an example of the PWM mode setting procedure.
PWM mode
Select counter clock
[1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to
TPSC0 in TCR. At the same time, select the
input clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in
TCR.
[1]
Select counter clearing source
[2]
[2] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to select the
TGR to be used as the TCNT clearing source.
Select waveform output level
[3]
Set TGR
[4]
[3] Use TIOR to designate TGR as an output
compare register, and select the initial value and
output value.
Set PWM mode
[5]
[4] Set the cycle in TGR selected in [2], and set the
duty in the other TGRs.
Start count
[6]
[5] Select the PWM mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR.
[6] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
<PWM mode>
Figure 10.20 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure
(2)
Examples of PWM Mode Operation
Figure 10.21 shows an example of PWM mode 1 operation.
In this example, TGRA compare match is set as the TCNT clearing source, 0 is set for the TGRA
initial output value and output value, and 1 is set as the TGRB output value.
In this case, the value set in TGRA is used as the cycle, and the value set in TGRB register as the
duty cycle.
TCNT value
TGRA
Counter cleared by
TGRA compare match
TGRB
H'0000
Time
TIOCA
Figure 10.21 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 451 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 10.22 shows an example of PWM mode 2 operation.
In this example, synchronous operation is designated for channels 3 and 4, TGRB_4 compare
match is set as the TCNT clearing source, and 0 is set for the initial output value and 1 for the
output value of the other TGR registers (TGRA_3 to TGRD_3, TGRA_4), to output a 5-phase
PWM waveform.
In this case, the value set in TGRB_4 is used as the cycle, and the values set in the other TGRs as
the duty cycle.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by
TGRB_4 compare match
TGRB_4
TGRA_4
TGRD_3
TGRC_3
TGRB_3
TGRA_3
H'0000
Time
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TIOCC3
TIOCD3
TIOCA4
Figure 10.22 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 452 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 10.23 shows examples of PWM waveform output with 0% duty cycle and 100% duty cycle
in PWM mode.
TCNT value
TGRB changed
TGRA
TGRB
TGRB changed
TGRB
changed
H'0000
Time
0% duty
TIOCA
Output does not change when compare matches in cycle register
and duty register occur simultaneously
TCNT value
TGRB changed
TGRA
TGRB changed
TGRB changed
TGRB
H'0000
Time
100% duty
TIOCA
Output does not change when compare matches in cycle register
and duty register occur simultaneously
TCNT value
TGRB changed
TGRA
TGRB changed
TGRB
TGRB changed
Time
H'0000
TIOCA
100% duty
0% duty
Figure 10.23 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 453 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.4.6
Phase Counting Mode
In phase counting mode, the phase difference between two external clock inputs is detected and
TCNT is incremented/decremented accordingly. This mode can be set for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
When phase counting mode is set, an external clock is selected as the counter input clock and
TCNT operates as an up/down-counter regardless of the setting of bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 and bits
CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. However, the functions of bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR, and of
TIOR, TIER, and TGR are valid, and input capture/compare match and interrupt functions can be
used.
This can be used for two-phase encoder pulse input.
When overflow occurs while TCNT is counting up, the TCFV flag in TSR is set; when underflow
occurs while TCNT is counting down, the TCFU flag is set.
The TCFD bit in TSR is the count direction flag. Reading the TCFD flag provides an indication of
whether TCNT is counting up or down.
Table 10.32 shows the correspondence between external clock pins and channels.
Table 10.32 Clock Input Pins in Phase Counting Mode
External Clock Pins
Channels
A-Phase
B-Phase
When channel 1 or 5 is set to phase counting mode
When channel 2 or 4 is set to phase counting mode
TCLKA
TCLKC
TCLKB
TCLKD
Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 10.24 shows an example of the
phase counting mode setting procedure.
Phase counting mode
Select phase counting mode
[1]
Start count
[2]
[1] Select phase counting mode with bits MD3 to
MD0 in TMDR.
[2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
<Phase counting mode>
Figure 10.24 Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 454 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(1)
Examples of Phase Counting Mode Operation
In phase counting mode, TCNT counts up or down according to the phase difference between two
external clocks. There are four modes, according to the count conditions.
(a)
Phase counting mode 1
Figure 10.25 shows an example of phase counting mode 1 operation, and table 10.33 summarizes
the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Down-count
Up-count
Time
Figure 10.25 Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation
Table 10.33 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
Operation
Up-count
High level
Low level
Low level
High level
High level
Down-count
Low level
High level
Low level
[Legend]
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 455 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(b)
Phase counting mode 2
Figure 10.26 shows an example of phase counting mode 2 operation, and table 10.34 summarizes
the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Up-count
Down-count
Time
Figure 10.26 Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation
Table 10.34 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
Operation
High level
Don't care
Low level
Don't care
Low level
Don't care
High level
Up-count
High level
Don't care
Low level
Don't care
[Legend]
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 456 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
High level
Don't care
Low level
Down-count
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(c)
Phase counting mode 3
Figure 10.27 shows an example of phase counting mode 3 operation, and table 10.35 summarizes
the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Down-count
Up-count
Time
Figure 10.27 Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation
Table 10.35 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
Operation
High level
Don't care
Low level
Don't care
Low level
Don't care
High level
Up-count
High level
Down-count
Low level
Don't care
High level
Don't care
Low level
Don't care
[Legend]
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 457 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(d)
Phase counting mode 4
Figure 10.28 shows an example of phase counting mode 4 operation, and table 10.36 summarizes
the TCNT up/down-count conditions.
TCLKA (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (channels 2 and 4)
TCNT value
Down-count
Up-count
Time
Figure 10.28 Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation
Table 10.36 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4
TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4)
TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5)
TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4)
Operation
Up-count
High level
Low level
Low level
Don't care
High level
Down-count
High level
Low level
High level
Low level
[Legend]
: Rising edge
: Falling edge
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 458 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Don't care
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(2)
Phase Counting Mode Application Example
Figure 10.29 shows an example in which phase counting mode is designated for channel 1, and
channel 1 is coupled with channel 0 to input servo motor 2-phase encoder pulses in order to detect
the position or speed.
Channel 1 is set to phase counting mode 1, and the encoder pulse A-phase and B-phase are input
to TCLKA and TCLKB.
Channel 0 operates with TCNT counter clearing by TGRC_0 compare match; TGRA_0 and
TGRC_0 are used for the compare match function and are set with the speed control cycle and
position control cycle. TGRB_0 is used for input capture, with TGRB_0 and TGRD_0 operating
in buffer mode. The channel 1 counter input clock is designated as the TGRB_0 input capture
source, and the pulse width of 2-phase encoder 4-multiplication pulses is detected.
TGRA_1 and TGRB_1 for channel 1 are designated for input capture, channel 0 TGRA_0 and
TGRC_0 compare matches are selected as the input capture source, and the up/down-counter
values for the control cycles are stored.
This procedure enables accurate position/speed detection to be achieved.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 459 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel 1
TCLKA
TCLKB
Edge
detection
circuit
TCNT_1
TGRA_1
(speed cycle capture)
TGRB_1
(position cycle capture)
TCNT_0
TGRA_0
(speed control cycle)
+
-
TGRC_0
(position control cycle)
+
-
TGRB_0 (pulse width capture)
TGRD_0 (buffer operation)
Channel 0
Figure 10.29 Phase Counting Mode Application Example
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 460 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.5
Interrupt Sources
There are three kinds of TPU interrupt sources: TGR input capture/compare match, TCNT
overflow, and TCNT underflow. Each interrupt source has its own status flag and enable/disable
bit, allowing generation of interrupt request signals to be enabled or disabled individually.
When an interrupt request is generated, the corresponding status flag in TSR is set to 1. If the
corresponding enable/disable bit in TIER is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt is requested. The
interrupt request is cleared by clearing the status flag to 0.
Relative channel priority levels can be changed by the interrupt controller, but the priority within a
channel is fixed. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Table 10.37 lists the TPU interrupt sources.
Table 10.37 TPU Interrupts
Channel
Name
Interrupt Source
Interrupt Flag
DTC
Activation
DMAC
Activation
0
TGI0A
TGRA_0 input capture/compare match
TGFA_0
O
O
TGI0B
TGRB_0 input capture/compare match
TGFB_0
O

TGI0C
TGRC_0 input capture/compare match TGFC_0
O

TGI0D
TGRD_0 input capture/compare match TGFD_0
O

TCI0V
TCNT_0 overflow
TCFV_0


TGI1A
TGRA_1 input capture/compare match
TGFA_1
O
O
TGI1B
TGRB_1 input capture/compare match
TGFB_1
O

TCI1V
TCNT_1 overflow
TCFV_1


1
2
3
TCI1U
TCNT_1 underflow
TCFU_1


TGI2A
TGRA_2 compare match
TGFA_2
O
O
TGI2B
TGRB_2 compare match
TGFB_2
O

TCI2V
TCNT_2 overflow
TCFV_2


TCI2U
TCNT_2 underflow
TCFU_2


TGI3A
TGRA_3 input capture/compare match
TGFA_3
O
O
TGI3B
TGRB_3 input capture/compare match
TGFB_3
O

TGI3C
TGRC_3 input capture/compare match TGFC_3
O

TGI3D
TGRD_3 input capture/compare match TGFD_3
O

TCI3V
TCNT_3 overflow


TCFV_3
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 461 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Channel
Name
Interrupt Source
Interrupt Flag
DTC
Activation
DMAC
Activation
4
TGI4A
TGRA_4 input capture/compare match
TGFA_4
O
O
TGI4B
TGRB_4 input capture/compare match
TGFB_4
O

TCI4V
TCNT_4 overflow
TCFV_4


TCI4U
TCNT_4 underflow
TCFU_4


TGI5A
TGRA_5 input capture/compare match
TGFA_5
O
O
TGI5B
TGRB_5 input capture/compare match
TGFB_5
O

TCI5V
TCNT_5 overflow
TCFV_5


TCI5U
TCNT_5 underflow
TCFU_5


5
[Legend]
O : Possible
 : Not possible
Note: This table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. The relative channel priority
levels can be changed by the interrupt controller.
(1)
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt
An interrupt is requested if the TGIE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGF flag in TSR is set to 1
by the occurrence of a TGR input capture/compare match on a channel. The interrupt request is
cleared by clearing the TGF flag to 0. The TPU has 16 compare match interrupts, four each for
channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5; and 14 input capture interrupts, four
each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 4, and 5.
(2)
Overflow Interrupt
An interrupt is requested if the TCIEV bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to
1 by the occurrence of a TCNT overflow on a channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing
the TCFV flag to 0. The TPU has six overflow interrupts, one for each channel.
(3)
Underflow Interrupt
An interrupt is requested if the TCIEU bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TCFU flag in TSR is set to
1 by the occurrence of a TCNT underflow on a channel. The interrupt request is cleared by
clearing the TCFU flag to 0. The TPU has four underflow interrupts, one each for channels 1, 2, 4,
and 5.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 462 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.6
DTC Activation
The DTC can be activated by the TGR input capture/compare match interrupt for a channel. For
details, see section 8, Data Transfer Controller (DTC).
A total of 16 TPU input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as DTC activation sources,
four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5.
Note that the DTC cannot be activated by the channel 2 input capture.
10.7
DMAC Activation
The DMAC can be activated by the TGRA input capture/compare match interrupt for a channel.
For details, see section 7, DMA Controller (DMAC).
A total of six TPU input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as DMAC activation
sources, one for each channel.
Note that the DMAC cannot be activated by the channel 2 input capture.
10.8
A/D Converter Activation
The TGRA input capture/compare match for each channel can activate the A/D converter.
If the TTGE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGFA flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a
TGRA input capture/compare match on a particular channel, a request to start A/D conversion is
sent to the A/D converter. If the TPU conversion start trigger has been selected on the A/D
converter side at this time, A/D conversion is started.
In the TPU, a total of six TGRA input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as A/D
converter conversion start sources, one for each channel.
Note that the A/D conversion cannot be started by the channel 2 input capture.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 463 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9
Operation Timing
10.9.1
Input/Output Timing
(1)
TCNT Count Timing
Figure 10.30 shows TCNT count timing in internal clock operation, and figure 10.31 shows TCNT
count timing in external clock operation.
Pφ
Internal clock
Falling edge
Rising edge
Falling edge
TCNT input
clock
N−1
TCNT
N+1
N
N+2
Figure 10.30 Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation
Pφ
External clock
Falling edge
Rising edge
Falling edge
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N−1
N
N+1
Figure 10.31 Count Timing in External Clock Operation
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 464 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
N+2
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(2)
Output Compare Output Timing
A compare match signal is generated in the final state in which TCNT and TGR match (the point
at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated). When a compare match signal is
generated, the output value set in TIOR is output at the output compare output pin (TIOC pin).
After a match between TCNT and TGR, the compare match signal is not generated until the
TCNT input clock is generated.
Note that the output compare output pins (TIOCs) are available only for channels 3 to 5.
Figure 10.32 shows output compare output timing.
Pφ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
TGR
N
N+1
Compare match
signal
TIOC pin
Figure 10.32 Output Compare Output Timing
(3)
Input Capture Signal Timing
Figure 10.33 shows input capture signal timing.
Pφ
Input capture
input
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
N
N+2
N+1
N+2
N
Figure 10.33 Input Capture Input Signal Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 465 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(4)
Timing for Counter Clearing by Compare Match/Input Capture
Figure 10.34 shows the timing when counter clearing by compare match occurrence is specified,
and figure 10.35 shows the timing when counter clearing by input capture occurrence is specified.
Pφ
Compare match
signal
Counter clear
signal
TCNT
N
TGR
N
H'0000
Figure 10.34 Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match)
Pφ
Input capture
signal
Counter clear
signal
N
TCNT
TGR
H'0000
N
Figure 10.35 Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 466 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(5)
Buffer Operation Timing
Figures 10.36 and 10.37 show the timings in buffer operation.
Pφ
TCNT
n
n+1
TGRA,
TGRB
n
N
TGRC,
TGRD
N
Compare match
signal
Figure 10.36 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match)
Pφ
Input capture
signal
TCNT
N
TGRA,TGRB
n
TGRC,TGRD
N+1
N
N+1
n
N
Figure 10.37 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 467 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.9.2
(1)
Interrupt Signal Timing
TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Compare Match
Figure 10.38 shows the timing for setting of the TGF flag in TSR by compare match occurrence,
and the TGI interrupt request signal timing.
Pφ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
TGR
N
N+1
Compare match
signal
TGF flag
TGI interrupt
Figure 10.38 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match)
(2)
TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Input Capture
Figure 10.39 shows the timing for setting of the TGF flag in TSR by input capture occurrence, and
the TGI interrupt request signal timing.
Pφ
Input capture
signal
N
TCNT
TGR
N
TGF flag
TGI interrupt
Figure 10.39 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 468 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(3)
TCFV Flag/TCFU Flag Setting Timing
Figure 10.40 shows the timing for setting of the TCFV flag in TSR by overflow occurrence, and
the TCIV interrupt request signal timing.
Figure 10.41 shows the timing for setting of the TCFU flag in TSR by underflow occurrence, and
the TCIU interrupt request signal timing.
Pφ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
(overflow)
H'FFFF
H'0000
Overflow signal
TCFV flag
TCIV interrupt
Figure 10.40 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing
Pφ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
(underflow)
H'0000
H'FFFF
Underflow signal
TCFU flag
TCIU interrupt
Figure 10.41 TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 469 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(4)
Status Flag Clearing Timing
After a status flag is read as 1 by the CPU, it is cleared by writing 0 to it. When the DTC or
DMAC is activated, the flag is cleared automatically. Figure 10.42 shows the timing for status flag
clearing by the CPU, and figures 10.43 and 10.44 show the timing for status flag clearing by the
DTC or DMAC.
TSR write cycle
T1
T2
Pφ
TSR address
Address
Write
Status flag
Interrupt request
signal
Figure 10.42 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU
The status flag and interrupt request signal are cleared in synchronization with Pφ after the DTC or
DMAC transfer has started, as shown in figure 10.43. If conflict occurs for clearing the status flag
and interrupt request signal due to activation of multiple DTC or DMAC transfers, it will take up
to five clock cycles (Pφ) for clearing them, as shown in figure 10.44. The next transfer request is
masked for a longer period of either a period until the current transfer ends or a period for five
clock cycles (Pφ) from the beginning of the transfer. Note that in the DTC transfer, the status flag
may be cleared during outputting the destination address.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 470 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
DTC/DMAC
read cycle
T1
T2
DTC/DMAC
write cycle
T1
T2
Source
address
Destination
address
Pφ
Address
Status flag
Period in which the next transfer request is masked
Interrupt request
signal
Figure 10.43 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC or DMAC Activation (1)
DTC/DMAC
read cycle
DTC/DMAC
write cycle
Pφ
Address
Source address
Destination address
Period in which the next transfer request is masked
Status flag
Interrupt request
signal
Period of flag clearing
Period of interrupt request signal clearing
Figure 10.44 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC or DMAC Activation (2)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 471 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.10
Usage Notes
10.10.1 Module Stop Mode Setting
Operation of the TPU can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial
setting is for operation of the TPU to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop
mode. For details, refer to section 22, Power-Down Modes.
10.10.2 Input Clock Restrictions
The input clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states in the case of single-edge detection, and at
least 2.5 states in the case of both-edge detection. The TPU will not operate properly with a
narrower pulse width.
In phase counting mode, the phase difference and overlap between the two input clocks must be at
least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at least 2.5 states. Figure 10.45 shows the input clock
conditions in phase counting mode.
Phase
Phase
difference
difference
Overlap
Overlap
Pulse width
Pulse width
TCLKA
(TCLKC)
TCLKB
(TCLKD)
Pulse width
Pulse width
Note: Phase difference, Overlap ≥ 1.5 states
Pulse width ≥ 2.5 states
Figure 10.45 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 472 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.10.3 Caution on Cycle Setting
When counter clearing by compare match is set, TCNT is cleared in the final state in which it
matches the TGR value (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated).
Consequently, the actual counter frequency is given by the following formula:
f=
Pφ
(N + 1)
f: Counter frequency
Pφ: Operating frequency
N: TGR set value
10.10.4 Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear Operations
If the counter clearing signal is generated in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, TCNT clearing
takes precedence and the TCNT write is not performed. Figure 10.46 shows the timing in this
case.
TCNT write cycle
T2
T1
Pφ
Address
TCNT address
Write
Counter clear
signal
TCNT
N
H'0000
Figure 10.46 Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear Operations
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 473 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.10.5 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment Operations
If incrementing occurs in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the TCNT write takes precedence
and TCNT is not incremented. Figure 10.47 shows the timing in this case.
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
Pφ
Address
TCNT address
Write
TCNT input clock
TCNT
N
M
TCNT write data
Figure 10.47 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment Operations
10.10.6 Conflict between TGR Write and Compare Match
If a compare match occurs in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the TGR write takes precedence
and the compare match signal is disabled. A compare match also does not occur when the same
value as before is written.
Figure 10.48 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle
T1
T2
Pφ
Address
TGR address
Write
Compare match
signal
TCNT
TGR
Disabled
N
N
N+1
M
TGR write data
Figure 10.48 Conflict between TGR Write and Compare Match
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 474 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.10.7 Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match
If a compare match occurs in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the data transferred to TGR by the
buffer operation will be the write data.
Figure 10.49 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle
T1
T2
Pφ
Address
Buffer register
address
Write
Compare match
signal
Buffer register
Data written to buffer register
N
TGR
M
M
Figure 10.49 Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match
10.10.8 Conflict between TGR Read and Input Capture
If the input capture signal is generated in the T1 state of a TGR read cycle, the data that is read
will be the data after input capture transfer.
Figure 10.50 shows the timing in this case.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 475 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
TGR read cycle
T2
T1
Pφ
Address
TGR address
Read
Input capture
signal
X
TGR
Internal data
bus
M
M
Figure 10.50 Conflict between TGR Read and Input Capture
10.10.9 Conflict between TGR Write and Input Capture
If the input capture signal is generated in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the input capture
operation takes precedence and the write to TGR is not performed.
Figure 10.51 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle
T2
T1
Pφ
Address
TGR address
Write
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
M
M
Figure 10.51 Conflict between TGR Write and Input Capture
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 476 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
10.10.10 Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture
If the input capture signal is generated in the T2 state of a buffer register write cycle, the buffer
operation takes precedence and the write to the buffer register is not performed.
Figure 10.52 shows the timing in this case.
Buffer register write cycle
T1
T2
Pφ
Address
Buffer register
address
Write
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
Buffer register
N
M
N
M
Figure 10.52 Conflict between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture
10.10.11 Conflict between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing
If overflow/underflow and counter clearing occur simultaneously, the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is
not set and TCNT clearing takes precedence.
Figure 10.53 shows the operation timing when a TGR compare match is specified as the clearing
source, and H'FFFF is set in TGR.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 477 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 10 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Pφ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
H'0000
H'FFFF
Counter clear
signal
TGF flag
Disabled
TCFV flag
Figure 10.53 Conflict between Overflow and Counter Clearing
10.10.12 Conflict between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow
If an overflow/underflow occurs due to increment/decrement in the T2 state of a TCNT write
cycle, the TCNT write takes precedence and the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set.
Figure 10.54 shows the operation timing when there is conflict between TCNT write and
overflow.
TGR write cycle
T2
T1
Pφ
TCNT address
Address
Write
TCNT
TCNT write data
H'FFFF
M
TCFV flag
Figure 10.54 Conflict between TCNT Write and Overflow
10.10.13 Interrupts and Module Stop Mode
If module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to
clear the CPU interrupt source or the DMAC or DTC activation source. Interrupts should therefore
be disabled before entering module stop mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 478 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
The programmable pulse generator (PPG) provides pulse outputs by using the 16-bit timer pulse
unit (TPU) as a time base. The PPG pulse outputs are divided into 4-bit groups (groups 1 and 0)
that can operate both simultaneously and independently. Figure 11.1 shows a block diagram of the
PPG.
11.1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Features
8-bit output data
Two output groups
Selectable output trigger signals
Non-overlapping mode
Can operate together with the data transfer controller (DTC) and DMA controller (DMAC)
Inverted output can be set
Module stop mode can be set
Compare match signals
Control logic
PO7
PO6
PO5
PO4
PO3
PO2
PO1
PO0
[Legend]
PMR:
PCR:
NDERH:
NDERL:
NDERH
NDERL
PMR
PCR
PODRH
NDRH
PODRL
NDRL
Internal
data bus
Pulse output
pins, group 1
Pulse output
pins, group 0
PPG output mode register
PPG output control register
Next data enable register H
Next data enable register L
NDRH:
NDRL:
PODRH:
PODRL:
Next data register H
Next data register L
Output data register H
Output data register L
Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of PPG
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 479 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 11.1 shows the PPG pin configuration.
Table 11.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
I/O
Function
PO7
Output
Group 1 pulse output
PO6
Output
PO5
Output
PO4
Output
PO3
Output
PO2
Output
PO1
Output
PO0
Output
11.3
Register Descriptions
The PPG has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Next data enable register H (NDERH)
Next data enable register L (NDERL)
Output data register H (PODRH)
Output data register L (PODRL)
Next data register H (NDRH)
Next data register L (NDRL)
PPG output control register (PCR)
PPG output mode register (PMR)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 480 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Group 0 pulse output
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.1
Next Data Enable Registers H, L (NDERH, NDERL)
NDERH and NDERL enable/disable pulse output on a bit-by-bit basis.
• NDERH
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDER15
NDER14
NDER13
NDER12
NDER11
NDER10
NDER9
NDER8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDER7
NDER6
NDER5
NDER4
NDER3
NDER2
NDER1
NDER0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• NDERL
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
• NDERH
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
NDER15
0
R/W
Next Data Enable 15 to 8
6
NDER14
0
R/W
There are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
5
NDER13
0
R/W
4
NDER12
0
R/W
3
NDER11
0
R/W
2
NDER10
0
R/W
1
NDER9
0
R/W
0
NDER8
0
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 481 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
• NDERL
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
NDER7
0
R/W
Next Data Enable 7 to 0
6
NDER6
0
R/W
5
NDER5
0
R/W
4
NDER4
0
R/W
When a bit is set to 1, the value in the corresponding
NDRL bit is transferred to the PODRL bit by the
selected output trigger. Values are not transferred from
NDRL to PODRL for cleared bits.
3
NDER3
0
R/W
2
NDER2
0
R/W
1
NDER1
0
R/W
0
NDER0
0
R/W
11.3.2
Output Data Registers H, L (PODRH, PODRL)
PODRH and PODRL store output data for use in pulse output. A bit that has been set for pulse
output by NDER is read-only and cannot be modified.
• PODRH
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
POD15
POD14
POD13
POD12
POD11
POD10
POD9
POD8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
POD7
POD6
POD5
POD4
POD3
POD2
POD1
POD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• PODRL
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 482 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
• PODRH
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
POD15
0
R/W
Output Data Register 15 to 8
6
POD14
0
R/W
There are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
5
POD13
0
R/W
4
POD12
0
R/W
3
POD11
0
R/W
2
POD10
0
R/W
1
POD9
0
R/W
0
POD8
0
R/W
• PODRL
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
POD7
0
R/W
Output Data Register 7 to 0
6
POD6
0
R/W
5
POD5
0
R/W
4
POD4
0
R/W
3
POD3
0
R/W
For bits which have been set to pulse output by
NDERL, the output trigger transfers NDRL values to this
register during PPG operation. While NDERL is set to 1,
the CPU cannot write to this register. While NDERL is
cleared, the initial output value of the pulse can be set.
2
POD2
0
R/W
1
POD1
0
R/W
0
POD0
0
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 483 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.3
Next Data Registers H, L (NDRH, NDRL)
NDRH and NDRL store the next data for pulse output. The NDR addresses differ depending on
whether pulse output groups have the same output trigger or different output triggers.
• NDRH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDR15
NDR14
NDR13
NDR12
NDR11
NDR10
NDR9
NDR8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NDR7
NDR6
NDR5
NDR4
NDR3
NDR2
NDR1
NDR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
• NDRL
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
• NDRH
If pulse output groups 0 and 1 have the same output trigger, all eight bits are mapped to the
same address and can be accessed at one time, as shown below.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
NDR15
0
R/W
Next Data Register 15 to 8
6
NDR14
0
R/W
There are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
5
NDR13
0
R/W
4
NDR12
0
R/W
3
NDR11
0
R/W
2
NDR10
0
R/W
1
NDR9
0
R/W
0
NDR8
0
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 484 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
• NDRL
If pulse output groups 0 and 1 have the same output trigger, all eight bits are mapped to the
same address and can be accessed at one time, as shown below.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
NDR7
0
R/W
Next Data Register 7 to 0
6
NDR6
0
R/W
5
NDR5
0
R/W
4
NDR4
0
R/W
The register contents are transferred to the
corresponding PODRL bits by the output trigger
specified with PCR.
3
NDR3
0
R/W
2
NDR2
0
R/W
1
NDR1
0
R/W
0
NDR0
0
R/W
If pulse output groups 0 and 1 have different output triggers, the upper four bits and lower four
bits are mapped to different addresses as shown below.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
NDR7
0
R/W
Next Data Register 7 to 4
6
NDR6
0
R/W
5
NDR5
0
R/W
4
NDR4
0
R/W
The register contents are transferred to the
corresponding PODRL bits by the output trigger
specified with PCR.
3 to 0

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
3
NDR3
0
R/W
Next Data Register 3 to 0
2
NDR2
0
R/W
1
NDR1
0
R/W
0
NDR0
0
R/W
The register contents are transferred to the
corresponding PODRL bits by the output trigger
specified with PCR.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 485 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.4
PPG Output Control Register (PCR)
PCR selects output trigger signals on a group-by-group basis. For details on output trigger
selection, refer to section 11.3.5, PPG Output Mode Register (PMR).
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
G3CMS1
G3CMS0
G2CMS1
G2CMS0
G1CMS1
G1CMS0
G0CMS1
G0CMS0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
G3CMS1
1
R/W
There are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
6
G3CMS0
1
R/W
5
G2CMS1
1
R/W
4
G2CMS0
1
R/W
3
G1CMS1
1
R/W
Group 1 Compare Match Select 1 and 0
2
G1CMS0
1
R/W
These bits select output trigger of pulse output group 1.
There are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
00: Compare match in TPU channel 0
01: Compare match in TPU channel 1
10: Compare match in TPU channel 2
11: Compare match in TPU channel 3
1
G0CMS1
1
R/W
Group 0 Compare Match Select 1 and 0
0
G0CMS0
1
R/W
These bits select output trigger of pulse output group 0.
00: Compare match in TPU channel 0
01: Compare match in TPU channel 1
10: Compare match in TPU channel 2
11: Compare match in TPU channel 3
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 486 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.3.5
PPG Output Mode Register (PMR)
PMR selects the pulse output mode of the PPG for each group. If inverted output is selected, a
low-level pulse is output when PODRL is 1 and a high-level pulse is output when PODRL is 0. If
non-overlapping operation is selected, PPG updates its output values at compare match A or B of
the TPU that becomes the output trigger. For details, refer to section 11.4.4, Non-Overlapping
Pulse Output.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
G3INV
G2INV
G1INV
G0INV
G3NOV
G2NOV
G1NOV
G0NOV
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
G3INV
1
R/W
This is read-only bit and cannot be modified.
6
G2INV
1
R/W
This is read-only bit and cannot be modified.
5
G1INV
1
R/W
Group 1 Inversion
Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output
group 1.
0: Inverted output
1: Direct output
4
G0INV
1
R/W
Group 0 Inversion
Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output
group 0.
0: Inverted output
1: Direct output
3
G3NOV
0
R/W
This is read-only bit and cannot be modified.
2
G2NOV
0
R/W
This is read-only bit and cannot be modified.
1
G1NOV
0
R/W
Group 1 Non-Overlap
Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse
output group 1.
0: Normal operation (output values updated at compare
match A in the selected TPU channel)
1: Non-overlapping operation (output values updated at
compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 487 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
0
G0NOV
0
R/W
Group 0 Non-Overlap
Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse
output group 0.
0: Normal operation (output values updated at compare
match A in the selected TPU channel)
1: Non-overlapping operation (output values updated at
compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel)
11.4
Operation
Figure 11.2 shows a schematic diagram of the PPG. PPG pulse output is enabled when the
corresponding bits in NDER are set to 1. An initial output value is determined by its
corresponding PODR initial setting. When the compare match event specified by PCR occurs, the
corresponding NDR bit contents are transferred to PODR to update the output values. Sequential
output of data of up to eight bits is possible by writing new output data to NDR before the next
compare match.
NDER
Q
Output trigger signal
C
Q PODR D
Q NDR D
Pulse output pin
Normal output/inverted output
Figure 11.2 Schematic Diagram of PPG
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 488 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Internal data bus
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.1
Output Timing
If pulse output is enabled, the NDR contents are transferred to PODR and output when the
specified compare match event occurs. Figure 11.3 shows the timing of these operations for the
case of normal output in groups 0 and 1, triggered by compare match A.
Pφ
N
TCNT
TGRA
N+1
N
Compare match
A signal
n
NDRL
PODRL
PO0 to PO7
m
n
m
n
Figure 11.3 Timing of Transfer and Output of NDR Contents (Example)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 489 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.2
Sample Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output
Figure 11.4 shows a sample procedure for setting up normal pulse output.
Normal PPG output
Select TGR functions
[1]
Set TGRA value
[2]
Set counting operation
[3]
Select interrupt request
[4]
Set initial output data
[5]
Enable pulse output
[6]
Select output trigger
[7]
Set next pulse
output data
[8]
Start counter
[9]
[1]
Set TIOR to make TGRA an output
compare register (with output disabled).
[2]
Set the PPG output trigger cycle.
[3]
Select the counter clock source with bits
TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Select the
counter clear source with bits CCLR1 and
CCLR0.
[4]
Enable the TGIA interrupt in TIER. The
DTC or DMAC can also be set up to
transfer data to NDR.
[5]
Set the initial output values in PODR.
[6]
Set the bits in NDER for the pins to be
used for pulse output to 1.
[7]
Select the TPU compare match event to
be used as the output trigger in PCR.
[8]
Set the next pulse output values in NDR.
[9]
Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the
TCNT counter.
TPU setup
PPG setup
TPU setup
Compare match?
[10] At each TGIA interrupt, set the next
output values in NDR.
No
Yes
Set next pulse
output data
[10]
Figure 11.4 Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output (Example)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 490 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.3
Example of Normal Pulse Output (Example of 5-Phase Pulse Output)
Figure 11.5 shows an example in which pulse output is used for cyclic 5-phase pulse output.
TCNT
TCNT value
Compare match
TGRA
H'0000
Time
80
NDRL
PODRL
00
C0
80
40
C0
60
40
20
60
30
20
10
30
18
10
08
18
88
08
80
88
C0
80
40
C0
PO7
PO6
PO5
PO4
PO3
Figure 11.5 Normal Pulse Output Example (5-Phase Pulse Output)
1. Set up TGRA in TPU which is used as the output trigger to be an output compare register. Set
a cycle in TGRA so the counter will be cleared by compare match A. Set the TGIEA bit in
TIER to 1 to enable the compare match/input capture A (TGIA) interrupt.
2. Write H'F8 to NDERH, and set bits G1CMS1, G1CMS0, G0CMS1, and G0CMS0 in PCR to
select compare match in the TPU channel set up in the previous step to be the output trigger.
Write output data H'80 in NDRL.
3. The timer counter in the TPU channel starts. When compare match A occurs, the NDRL
contents are transferred to PODRL and output. The TGIA interrupt handling routine writes the
next output data (H'C0) in NDRL.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 491 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
4. 5-phase pulse output (one or two phases active at a time) can be obtained subsequently by
writing H'40, H'60, H'20, H'30, H'10, H'18, H'08, H'88... at successive TGIA interrupts.
If the DTC or DMAC is set for activation by the TGIA interrupt, pulse output can be obtained
without imposing a load on the CPU.
11.4.4
Non-Overlapping Pulse Output
During non-overlapping operation, transfer from NDR to PODR is performed as follows:
• At compare match A, the NDR bits are always transferred to PODR.
• At compare match B, the NDR bits are transferred only if their value is 0. The NDR bits are
not transferred if their value is 1.
Figure 11.6 illustrates the non-overlapping pulse output operation.
NDER
Q
Compare match A
Compare match B
C
Q PODR D
Pulse
output
pin
Q NDR D
Internal data bus
Normal output/inverted output
Figure 11.6 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output
Therefore, 0 data can be transferred ahead of 1 data by making compare match B occur before
compare match A.
The NDR contents should not be altered during the interval from compare match B to compare
match A (the non-overlapping margin).
This can be accomplished by having the TGIA interrupt handling routine write the next data in
NDR, or by having the TGIA interrupt activate the DTC or DMAC. Note, however, that the next
data must be written before the next compare match B occurs.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 492 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Figure 11.7 shows the timing of this operation.
Compare match A
Compare match B
Write to NDR
Write to NDR
NDR
PODR
0 output
0/1 output
Write to NDR
Do not write here
to NDR here
0 output 0/1 output
Do not write
to NDR here
Write to NDR
here
Figure 11.7 Non-Overlapping Operation and NDR Write Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 493 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.5
Sample Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output
Figure 11.8 shows a sample procedure for setting up non-overlapping pulse output.
Non-overlapping
pulse output
Select TGR functions
[1]
Set TGR values
[2]
Set counting operation
[3]
Select interrupt request
[4]
Set initial output data
[5]
Enable pulse output
[6]
TPU setup
PPG setup
TPU setup
[1]
Set TIOR to make TGRA and TGRB
output compare registers (with output
disabled).
[2]
Set the pulse output trigger cycle in
TGRB and the non-overlapping margin
in TGRA.
[3]
Select the counter clock source with bits
TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Select the
counter clear source with bits CCLR1
and CCLR0.
[4]
Enable the TGIA interrupt in TIER. The
DTC or DMAC can also be set up to
transfer data to NDR.
[5]
Set the initial output values in PODR.
[6]
Set the bits in NDER for the pins to be
used for pulse output to 1.
[7]
Select the TPU compare match event to
be used as the pulse output trigger in
PCR.
Select output trigger
[7]
Set non-overlapping groups
[8]
Set next pulse
output data
[9]
[8]
In PMR, select the groups that will
operate in non-overlapping mode.
Start counter
[10]
[9]
Set the next pulse output values in NDR.
Compare match A?
No
[11] At each TGIA interrupt, set the next
output values in NDR.
Yes
Set next pulse
output data
[10] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the
TCNT counter.
[11]
Figure 11.8 Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 494 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.6
Example of Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example of 4-Phase Complementary
Non-Overlapping Pulse Output)
Figure 11.9 shows an example in which pulse output is used for 4-phase complementary nonoverlapping pulse output.
TCNT value
TGRB
TCNT
TGRA
H'0000
NDRL
PODRL
Time
95
00
65
95
59
05
65
56
41
59
95
50
56
65
14
95
05
65
Non-overlapping margin
PO7
PO6
PO5
PO4
PO3
PO2
PO1
PO0
Figure 11.9 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Example (4-Phase Complementary)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 495 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
1. Set up the TPU channel to be used as the output trigger channel so that TGRA and TGRB are
output compare registers. Set the cycle in TGRB and the non-overlapping margin in TGRA,
and set the counter to be cleared by compare match B. Set the TGIEA bit in TIER to 1 to
enable the TGIA interrupt.
2. Write H'FF to NDERL, and set bits G1CMS1, G1CMS0, G0CMS1, and G0CMS0 in PCR to
select compare match in the TPU channel set up in the previous step to be the output trigger.
Set bits G1NOV and G0NOV in PMR to 1 to select non-overlapping pulse output.
Write output data H'95 to NDRL.
3. The timer counter in the TPU channel starts. When a compare match with TGRB occurs,
outputs change from 1 to 0. When a compare match with TGRA occurs, outputs change from 0
to 1 (the change from 0 to 1 is delayed by the value set in TGRA).
The TGIA interrupt handling routine writes the next output data (H'65) to NDRL.
4. 4-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output can be obtained subsequently by writing
H'59, H'56, H'95... at successive TGIA interrupts.
If the DTC or DMAC is set for activation by a TGIA interrupt, pulse can be output without
imposing a load on the CPU.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 496 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.7
Inverted Pulse Output
If the G1INV, and G0INV bits in PMR are cleared to 0, values that are the inverse of the PODR
contents can be output.
Figure 11.10 shows the outputs when the G1INV and G0INV bits are cleared to 0, in addition to
the settings of figure 11.9.
TCNT value
TGRB
TCNT
TGRA
H'0000
NDRL
PODRL
Time
95
00
65
95
59
05
65
56
41
59
95
50
56
65
14
95
05
65
PO7
PO6
PO5
PO4
PO3
PO2
PO1
PO0
Figure 11.10 Inverted Pulse Output (Example)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 497 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.4.8
Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture
Pulse output can be triggered by TPU input capture as well as by compare match. If TGRA
functions as an input capture register in the TPU channel selected by PCR, pulse output will be
triggered by the input capture signal.
Figure 11.11 shows the timing of this output.
Pφ
TIOC pin
Input capture
signal
NDR
N
PODR
M
PO
M
N
N
Figure 11.11 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture (Example)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 498 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
11.5
Usage Notes
11.5.1
Module Stop Mode Setting
PPG operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial value
is for PPG operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. For
details, refer to section 22, Power-Down Modes.
11.5.2
Operation of Pulse Output Pins
Pins PO0 to PO7 are also used for other peripheral functions such as the TPU. When output by
another peripheral function is enabled, the corresponding pins cannot be used for pulse output.
Note, however, that data transfer from NDR bits to PODR bits takes place, regardless of the usage
of the pins.
Pin functions should be changed only under conditions in which the output trigger event will not
occur.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 499 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 11 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 500 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
This LSI has four units (unit 0 to unit 3) of an on-chip 8-bit timer module that comprise two 8-bit
counter channels, totaling eight channels. The 8-bit timer module can be used to count external
events and also be used as a multifunction timer in a variety of applications, such as generation of
counter reset, interrupt requests, and pulse output with a desired duty cycle using a compare-match
signal with two registers.
Figures 12.1 to 12.4 show block diagrams of the 8-bit timer module (unit 0 to unit 3).
This section describes unit 0 (channels 0 and 1) and unit 2 (channels 4 and 5), both of which have
the same functions. Unit2 and unit 3 can generate baud rate clock for SCI and have the same
functions.
12.1
Features
• Selection of seven clock sources
The counters can be driven by one of six internal clock signals (Pφ/2, Pφ/8, Pφ/32, Pφ/64,
Pφ/1024, or Pφ/8192) or an external clock input (only internal clock available in units 2 and 3:
Pφ, Pφ/2, Pφ/8, Pφ/32, Pφ/64, Pφ/1024, and Pφ/8192).
• Selection of three ways to clear the counters
The counters can be cleared on compare match A or B, or by an external reset signal. (This is
available only in unit 0 and unit 1.)
• Timer output control by a combination of two compare match signals
The timer output signal in each channel is controlled by a combination of two independent
compare match signals, enabling the timer to output pulses with a desired duty cycle or PWM
output.
• Cascading of two channels
Operation as a 16-bit timer is possible, using TMR_0 for the upper 8 bits and TMR_1 for the
lower 8 bits (16-bit count mode).
TMR_1 can be used to count TMR_0 compare matches (compare match count mode).
• Three interrupt sources
Compare match A, compare match B, and overflow interrupts can be requested independently.
(This is available only in unit 0 and unit 1.)
• Generation of trigger to start A/D converter conversion (available in unit 0 and unit 1 only)
• Capable of generating baud rate clock for SCI_5 and SCI_6. (This is available only in unit 2
and unit 3.)For details, see section 14, Serial Communication Interface (SCI).
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 501 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
Internal clocks
Pφ/2
Pφ/8
Pφ/32
Pφ/64
Pφ/1024
Pφ/8192
Counter clock 1
Counter clock 0
External clocks
TMCI0
TMCI1
Clock select
Compare match A1
Compare match A0 Comparator A_0
Overflow 1
Overflow 0
TMO0
TMO1
Counter clear 0
Counter clear 1
Compare match B1
Compare match B0
TCORA_1
Comparator A_1
TCNT_0
TCNT_1
Comparator B_0
Comparator B_1
TCORB_0
TCORB_1
TCSR_0
TCSR_1
TCR_0
TCR_1
TCCR_0
TCCR_1
Channel 0
(TMR_0)
Channel 1
(TMR_1)
Control logic
TMRI0
TMRI1
A/D
conversion
start request
signal
CMIA0
CMIA1
CMIB0
CMIB1
OVI0
OVI1
Interrupt signals
[Legend]
TCORA_0:
TCNT_0:
TCORB_0:
TCSR_0:
TCR_0:
TCCR_0:
Time constant register A_0
Timer counter_0
Time constant register B_0
Timer control/status register_0
Timer control register_0
Timer counter control register_0
TCORA_1:
TCNT_1:
TCORB_1:
TCSR_1:
TCR_1:
TCCR_1:
Time constant register A_1
Timer counter_1
Time constant register B_1
Timer control/status register_1
Timer control register_1
Timer counter control register_1
Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module (Unit 0)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 502 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Internal bus
TCORA_0
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
Internal clocks
Pφ/2
Pφ/8
Pφ/32
Pφ/64
Pφ/1024
Pφ/8192
Counter clock 3
Counter clock 2
External clocks
Clock select
TCORA_2
Compare match A3
Compare match A2 Comparator A_2
Overflow 3
Overflow 2
TMO2
TMO3
TMRI2
TMRI3
Counter clear 2
Counter clear 3
Compare match B3
Compare match B2
TCORA_3
Comparator A_3
TCNT_2
TCNT_3
Comparator B_2
Comparator B_3
TCORB_2
TCORB_3
TCSR_2
TCSR_3
TCR_2
TCR_3
TCCR_2
TCCR_3
Channel 2
(TMR_2)
Channel 3
(TMR_3)
Internal bus
TMCI2
TMCI3
Control logic
A/D
conversion
start request
signal
CMIA2
CMIA3
CMIB2
CMIB3
OVI2
OVI3
Interrupt signals
[Legend]
TCORA_2:
TCNT_2:
TCORB_2:
TCSR_2:
TCR_2:
TCCR_2:
Time constant register A_2
Timer counter_2
Time constant register B_2
Timer control/status register_2
Timer control register_2
Timer counter control register_2
TCORA_3:
TCNT_3:
TCORB_3:
TCSR_3:
TCR_3:
TCCR_3:
Time constant register A_3
Timer counter_3
Time constant register B_3
Timer control/status register_3
Timer control register_3
Timer counter control register_3
Figure 12.2 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module (Unit 1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 503 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
Internal clocks
Pφ
Pφ/2
Pφ/8
Pφ/32
Pφ/64
Pφ/1024
Pφ/8192
Counter clock 5
Counter clock 4
Clock select
TCORA_4
Overflow 5
Overflow 4
Counter clear 4
Counter clear5
Compare match B5
Compare match B4
To SCI_5
TMO4
TMO5
Comparator A_5
TCNT_4
TCNT_5
Comparator B_4
Comparator B_5
TCORB_4
TCORB_5
TCSR_4
TCSR_5
TCR_4
TCR_5
TCCR_4
TCCR_5
Channel 4
(TMR_4)
Channel 5
(TMR_5)
Control logic
CMIA4
CMIB4
CMIA5
CMIB5
Internal bus
Compare match A5
Compare match A4 Comparator A_4
TCORA_5
CMI4
CMI5
Interrupt signals
[Legend]
TCORA_4:
TCNT_4:
TCORB_4:
TCSR_4:
TCR_4:
TCCR_4:
Time constant register A_4
Timer counter_4
Time constant register B_4
Timer control/status register_4
Timer control register_4
Timer counter control register_4
TCORA_5:
TCNT_5:
TCORB_5:
TCSR_5:
TCR_5:
TCCR_5:
Time constant register A_5
Timer counter_5
Time constant register B_5
Timer control/status register_5
Timer control register_5
Timer counter control register_5
Figure 12.3 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module (Unit 2)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 504 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
Internal clocks
Pφ
Pφ/2
Pφ/8
Pφ/32
Pφ/64
Pφ/1024
Pφ/8192
Counter clock 7
Counter clock 6
Clock select
TCORA_6
TCORA_7
Overflow 7
Overflow 6
Counter clear 6
Counter clear 7
Compare match B7
Compare match B6
To SCI_6
TMO6
TMO7
Comparator A_7
TCNT_6
TCNT_7
Comparator B_6
Comparator B_7
TCORB_6
TCORB_7
TCSR_6
TCSR_7
TCR_6
TCR_7
TCCR_6
TCCR_7
Channel 6
(TMR_6)
Channel 7
(TMR_7)
Control logic
CMIA6
CMIB6
CMIA7
CMIB7
Internal bus
Compare match A7
Compare match A6 Comparator A_6
CMI6
CMI7
Interrupt signals
[Legend]
TCORA_6:
TCNT_6:
TCORB_6:
TCSR_6:
TCR_6:
TCCR_6:
Time constant register A_6
Timer counter_6
Time constant register B_6
Timer control/status register_6
Timer control register_6
Timer counter control register_6
TCORA_7:
TCNT_7:
TCORB_7:
TCSR_7:
TCR_7:
TCCR_7:
Time constant register A_7
Timer counter_7
Time constant register B_7
Timer control/status register_7
Timer control register_7
Timer counter control register_7
Figure 12.4 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module (Unit 3)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 505 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
12.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 12.1 shows the pin configuration of the TMR.
Table 12.1 Pin Configuration
Unit
Channel Name
Symbol
I/O
0
0
Timer output pin
TMO0
Output Outputs compare match
Timer clock input pin
TMCI0
Input
Inputs external clock for counter
Timer reset input pin
TMRI0
Input
Inputs external reset to counter
Timer output pin
TMO1
Output Outputs compare match
1
1
2
3
2
4
Timer clock input pin
TMCI1
Input
Inputs external clock for counter
Timer reset input pin
TMRI1
Input
Inputs external reset to counter
Timer output pin
TMO2
Output Outputs compare match
Timer clock input pin
TMCI2
Input
Inputs external clock for counter
Timer reset input pin
TMRI2
Input
Inputs external reset to counter
Timer output pin
TMO3
Output Outputs compare match
Timer clock input pin
TMCI3
Input
Inputs external clock for counter
Timer reset input pin
TMRI3
Input
Inputs external reset to counter




5
3
6
7
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 506 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Function
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
12.3
Register Descriptions
The TMR has the following registers.
Unit 0:
• Channel 0 (TMR_0):
 Timer counter_0 (TCNT_0)
 Time constant register A_0 (TCORA_0)
 Time constant register B_0 (TCORB_0)
 Timer control register_0 (TCR_0)
 Timer counter control register_0 (TCCR_0)
 Timer control/status register_0 (TCSR_0)
• Channel 1 (TMR_1):
 Timer counter_1 (TCNT_1)
 Time constant register A_1 (TCORA_1)
 Time constant register B_1 (TCORB_1)
 Timer control register_1 (TCR_1)
 Timer counter control register_1 (TCCR_1)
 Timer control/status register_1 (TCSR_1)
Unit 1:
• Channel 2 (TMR_2):
 Timer counter_2 (TCNT_2)
 Time constant register A_2 (TCORA_2)
 Time constant register B_2 (TCORB_2)
 Timer control register_2 (TCR_2)
 Timer counter control register_2 (TCCR_2)
 Timer control/status register_2 (TCSR_2)
• Channel 3 (TMR_3):
 Timer counter_3 (TCNT_3)
 Time constant register A_3 (TCORA_3)
 Time constant register B_3 (TCORB_3)
 Timer control register_3 (TCR_3)
 Timer counter control register_3 (TCCR_3)
 Timer control/status register_3 (TCSR_3)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 507 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
Unit 2:
• Channel 4 (TMR_4):
 Timer counter_4 (TCNT_4)
 Time constant register A_4 (TCORA_4)
 Time constant register B_4 (TCORB_4)
 Timer control register_4 (TCR_4)
 Timer counter control register_4 (TCCR_4)
 Timer control/status register_4 (TCSR_4)
• Channel 5 (TMR_5):
 Timer counter_5 (TCNT_5)
 Time constant register A_5 (TCORA_5)
 Time constant register B_5 (TCORB_5)
 Timer control register_5 (TCR_5)
 Timer counter control register_5 (TCCR_5)
 Timer control/status register_5 (TCSR_5)
Unit 3:
• Channel 6 (TMR_6):
 Timer counter_6 (TCNT_6)
 Time constant register A_6 (TCORA_6)
 Time constant register B_6 (TCORB_6)
 Timer control register_6 (TCR_6)
 Timer counter control register_6 (TCCR_6)
 Timer control/status register_6 (TCSR_6)
• Channel 7 (TMR_7):
 Timer counter_7 (TCNT_7)
 Time constant register A_7 (TCORA_7)
 Time constant register B_7 (TCORB_7)
 Timer control register_7 (TCR_7)
 Timer counter control register_7 (TCCR_7)
 Timer control/status register_7 (TCSR_7)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 508 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
12.3.1
Timer Counter (TCNT)
TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 comprise a single 16-bit
register so they can be accessed together by a word transfer instruction. Bits CKS2 to CKS0 in
TCR and bits ICKS1 and ICKS0 in TCCR are used to select a clock. TCNT can be cleared by an
external reset input signal, compare match A signal, or compare match B signal. Which signal to
be used for clearing is selected by bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR. When TCNT overflows from
H'FF to H'00, bit OVF in TCSR is set to 1. TCNT is initialized to H'00.
Bit
7
6
5
TCNT_0
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
TCNT_1
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
12.3.2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Time Constant Register A (TCORA)
TCORA is an 8-bit readable/writable register. TCORA_0 and TCORA_1 comprise a single 16-bit
register so they can be accessed together by a word transfer instruction. The value in TCORA is
continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, the corresponding
CMFA flag in TCSR is set to 1. Note however that comparison is disabled during the T2 state of a
TCORA write cycle. The timer output from the TMO pin can be freely controlled by this compare
match signal (compare match A) and the settings of bits OS1 and OS0 in TCSR. TCORA is
initialized to H'FF.
Bit
TCORA_0
4
3
7
6
5
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TCORA_1
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 509 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
12.3.3
Time Constant Register B (TCORB)
TCORB is an 8-bit readable/writable register. TCORB_0 and TCORB_1 comprise a single 16-bit
register so they can be accessed together by a word transfer instruction. TCORB is continually
compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, the corresponding CMFB flag in
TCSR is set to 1. Note however that comparison is disabled during the T2 state of a TCORB write
cycle. The timer output from the TMO pin can be freely controlled by this compare match signal
(compare match B) and the settings of bits OS3 and OS2 in TCSR. TCORB is initialized to H'FF.
Bit
7
6
TCORB_0
4
3
5
2
1
0
7
6
TCORB_1
4
3
5
2
0
1
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
12.3.4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Timer Control Register (TCR)
TCR selects the TCNT clock source and the condition for clearing TCNT, and enables/disables
interrupt requests.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CMIEB
CMIEA
OVIE
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
CMIEB
0
R/W
Compare Match Interrupt Enable B
Selects whether CMFB interrupt requests (CMIB) are
enabled or disabled when the CMFB flag in TCSR is set
2
to 1. *
0: CMFB interrupt requests (CMIB) are disabled
1: CMFB interrupt requests (CMIB) are enabled
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 510 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
6
CMIEA
0
R/W
Compare Match Interrupt Enable A
Selects whether CMFA interrupt requests (CMIA) are
enabled or disabled when the CMFA flag in TCSR is set
2
to 1. *
0: CMFA interrupt requests (CMIA) are disabled
1: CMFA interrupt requests (CMIA) are enabled
5
OVIE
0
R/W
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable*3
Selects whether OVF interrupt requests (OVI) are
enabled or disabled when the OVF flag in TCSR is set to
1.
0: OVF interrupt requests (OVI) are disabled
1: OVF interrupt requests (OVI) are enabled
4
CCLR1
0
R/W
Counter Clear 1 and 0*1
3
CCLR0
0
R/W
These bits select the method by which TCNT is cleared.
00: Clearing is disabled
01: Cleared by compare match A
10: Cleared by compare match B
11: Cleared at rising edge (TMRIS in TCCR is cleared to
0) of the external reset input or when the external
3
reset input is high (TMRIS in TCCR is set to 1) *
1
2
CKS2
0
R/W
Clock Select 2 to 0*
1
CKS1
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
These bits select the clock input to TCNT and count
condition. See table 12.2.
Notes: 1. To use an external reset or external clock, the DDR and ICR bits in the corresponding
pin should be set to 0 and 1, respectively. For details, see section 9, I/O Ports.
2. In unit 2 and unit 3, one interrupt signal is used for CMIEB or CMIEA. For details, see
12.7, Interrupt Sources.
3. Available only in unit 0 and unit 1
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 511 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
12.3.5
Timer Counter Control Register (TCCR)
TCCR selects the TCNT internal clock source and controls external reset input.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name




TMRIS

ICKS1
ICKS0
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4

All 0
R
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. It should not be set to 0.
3
TMRIS
0
R/W
Timer Reset Input Select*
Selects an external reset input when the CCLR1 and
CCLR0 bits in TCR are B'11.
0: Cleared at rising edge of the external reset
1: Cleared when the external reset is high

2
0
R
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0. It should not be set to 0.
1
ICKS1
0
R/W
Internal Clock Select 1 and 0
0
ICKS0
0
R/W
These bits in combination with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR
select the internal clock. See table 12.2.
Note:
*
Available only in unit 0 and unit 1. The write value should always be 0 in unit 2 and unit
3.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 512 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
Table 12.2 Clock Input to TCNT and Count Condition (Units 0 and 1)
TCR
Channel
TMR_0
Bit 2
CKS2
0
0
0


Clock input prohibited
0
0
1
0
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/8.
0
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/2.
1
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/8.
1
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/2.
0
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/64.
0
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/32.
1
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/64.
1
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/32.
0
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/8192.
0
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/1024.
1
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/8192.
1
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/1024.


Counts at TCNT_1 overflow signal* .
0
0
1
TMR_1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0


Clock input prohibited
0
0
1
0
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/8.
0
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/2.
1
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/8.
1
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/2.
0
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/64.
0
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/32.
1
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/64.
1
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/32.
0
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/8192.
0
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/1024.
1
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/8192.
1
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/1024.
0
0
All
TCCR
Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 0
CKS1 CKS0 ICKS1 ICKS0 Description
1
1
0
1
1
0
0


Counts at TCNT_0 compare match A* .
1
0
1


Uses external clock. Counts at rising edge* .
1
1
0


Uses external clock. Counts at falling edge* .
1
1
1


Uses external clock. Counts at both rising and falling
2
edges* .
1
2
2
Notes: 1. If the clock input of channel 0 is the TCNT_1 overflow signal and that of channel 1 is the
TCNT_0 compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. Do not use this
setting.
2. To use the external clock, the DDR and ICR bits in the corresponding pin should be set
to 0 and 1, respectively. For details, see section 9, I/O Ports.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 513 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
Table 12.3 Clock Input to TCNT and Count Condition (Units 2 and 3)
TCR
TCCR
Channel
Bit 2
CKS2
Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 0
CKS1 CKS0 ICKS1 ICKS0 Description
TMR_4
0
0
0


Clock input prohibited
0
0
1
0
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/8.
0
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/2.
1
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/8.
1
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/2.
0
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/64.
0
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/32.
1
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/64.
1
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/32.
0
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/8192.
0
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/1024.
1
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ.
1
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/1024.
0
0
TMR_5
*
1
0
0


Counts at TCNT_1 overflow signal*.
0
0
0


Clock input prohibited
0
0
1
0
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/8.
0
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/2.
1
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/8.
1
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/2.
0
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/64.
0
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/32.
1
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/64.
1
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/32.
0
0
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/8192.
0
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ/1024.
Uses internal clock. Counts at rising edge of Pφ.
0
Note:
1
0
1
0
All
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
Uses internal clock. Counts at falling edge of Pφ/1024.
1
0
0


Counts at TCNT_0 compare match A*.
1
0
1


Setting prohibited
1
1
0


Setting prohibited
1
1
1


Setting prohibited
If the clock input of channel 4 is the TCNT_1 overflow signal and that of channel 5 is the
TCNT_0 compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. Do not use this
setting.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 514 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
12.3.6
Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
TCSR displays status flags, and controls compare match output.
• TCSR_0
Bit
Bit Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CMFB
CMFA
OVF
ADTE
OS3
OS2
OS1
OS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial Value
R/W
• TCSR_1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CMFB
CMFA
OVF

OS3
OS2
OS1
OS0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written to this bit, to clear the flag.
• TCSR_0
Bit
7
Bit Name
CMFB
Initial
Value
0
R/W
Description
1
R/(W)* Compare Match Flag B
[Setting condition]
•
When TCNT matches TCORB
[Clearing conditions]
6
CMFA
0
•
When writing 0 after reading CMFB = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by a CMIB interrupt while
the DISEL bit in MRB of the DTC is 0*3
1
R/(W)* Compare Match Flag A
[Setting condition]
•
When TCNT matches TCORA
[Clearing conditions]
•
When writing 0 after reading CMFA = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by a CMIA interrupt while
the DISEL bit in MRB in the DTC is 0*3
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 515 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
Bit
5
Bit Name
OVF
Initial
Value
0
R/W
Description
1
R/(W)* Timer Overflow Flag
[Setting condition]
When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00
[Clearing condition]
When writing 0 after reading OVF = 1
4
ADTE
0
R/W
A/D Trigger Enable*3
Selects enabling or disabling of A/D converter start
requests by compare match A.
0: A/D converter start requests by compare match A are
disabled
1: A/D converter start requests by compare match A are
enabled
3
OS3
0
R/W
Output Select 3 and 2*2
2
OS2
0
R/W
These bits select a method of TMO pin output when
compare match B of TCORB and TCNT occurs.
00: No change when compare match B occurs
01: 0 is output when compare match B occurs
10: 1 is output when compare match B occurs
11: Output is inverted when compare match B occurs
(toggle output)
1
0
OS1
OS0
0
0
R/W
R/W
Output Select 1 and 0*2
These bits select a method of TMO pin output when
compare match A of TCORA and TCNT occurs.
00: No change when compare match A occurs
01: 0 is output when compare match A occurs
10: 1 is output when compare match A occurs
11: Output is inverted when compare match A occurs
(toggle output)
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags.
2. Timer output is disabled when bits OS3 to OS0 are all 0. Timer output is 0 until the first
compare match occurs after a reset.
3. Available in unit 0 and unit 1 only.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 516 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
• TCSR_1
Bit
7
Bit Name
CMFB
Initial
Value
0
R/W
Description
1
R/(W)* Compare Match Flag B
[Setting condition]
•
When TCNT matches TCORB
[Clearing conditions]
6
CMFA
0
•
When writing 0 after reading CMFB = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by a CMIB interrupt while
the DISEL bit in MRB of the DTC is 0*3
R/(W)*1 Compare Match Flag A
[Setting condition]
•
When TCNT matches TCORA
[Clearing conditions]
5
OVF
0
•
When writing 0 after reading CMFA = 1
•
When the DTC is activated by a CMIA interrupt while
the DISEL bit in MRB of the DTC is 0*3
R/(W)*1 Timer Overflow Flag
[Setting condition]
When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00
[Clearing condition]
Cleared by reading OVF when OVF = 1, then writing 0 to
OVF
4

1
R
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
3
OS3
0
R/W
Output Select 3 and 2*2
2
OS2
0
R/W
These bits select a method of TMO pin output when
compare match B of TCORB and TCNT occurs.
00: No change when compare match B occurs
01: 0 is output when compare match B occurs
10: 1 is output when compare match B occurs
11: Output is inverted when compare match B occurs
(toggle output)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 517 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
1
OS1
0
R/W
Output Select 1 and 0*2
0
OS0
0
R/W
These bits select a method of TMO pin output when
compare match A of TCORA and TCNT occurs.
00: No change when compare match A occurs
01: 0 is output when compare match A occurs
10: 1 is output when compare match A occurs
11: Output is inverted when compare match A occurs
(toggle output)
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags.
2. Timer output is disabled when bits OS3 to OS0 are all 0. Timer output is 0 until the first
compare match occurs after a reset.
3. Available only in unit 0 and unit 1.
12.4
Operation
12.4.1
Pulse Output
Figure 12.5 shows an example of the 8-bit timer being used to generate a pulse output with a
desired duty cycle. The control bits are set as follows:
1. Clear the bit CCLR1 in TCR to 0 and set the bit CCLR0 in TCR to 1 so that TCNT is cleared
at a TCORA compare match.
2. Set the bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR to B'0110, causing the output to change to 1 at a TCORA
compare match and to 0 at a TCORB compare match.
With these settings, the 8-bit timer provides pulses output at a cycle determined by TCORA with a
pulse width determined by TCORB. No software intervention is required. The timer output is 0
until the first compare match occurs after a reset.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 518 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
TCNT
H'FF
Counter clear
TCORA
TCORB
H'00
TMO
Figure 12.5 Example of Pulse Output
12.4.2
Reset Input
Figure 12.6 shows an example of the 8-bit timer being used to generate a pulse which is output
after a desired delay time from a TMRI input. The control bits are set as follows:
1. Set both bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR to 1 and set the TMRIS bit in TCCR to 1 so that
TCNT is cleared at the high level input of the TMRI signal.
2. In TCSR, set bits OS3 to OS0 to B'0110, causing the output to change to 1 at a TCORA
compare match and to 0 at a TCORB compare match.
With these settings, the 8-bit timer provides pulses output at a desired delay time from a TMRI
input determined by TCORA and with a pulse width determined by TCORB and TCORA.
TCORB
TCORA
TCNT
H'00
TMRI
TMO
Figure 12.6 Example of Reset Input
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 519 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
12.5
Operation Timing
12.5.1
TCNT Count Timing
Figure 12.7 shows the TCNT count timing for internal clock input. Figure 12.8 shows the TCNT
count timing for external clock input. Note that the external clock pulse width must be at least 1.5
states for increment at a single edge, and at least 2.5 states for increment at both edges. The
counter will not increment correctly if the pulse width is less than these values.
Pφ
Internal clock
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N–1
N
N+1
Figure 12.7 Count Timing for Internal Clock Input
Pφ
External clock
input pin
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N–1
N
Figure 12.8 Count Timing for External Clock Input
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 520 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
N+1
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
12.5.2
Timing of CMFA and CMFB Setting at Compare Match
The CMFA and CMFB flags in TCSR are set to 1 by a compare match signal generated when the
TCOR and TCNT values match. The compare match signal is generated at the last state in which
the match is true, just before the timer counter is updated. Therefore, when the TCOR and TCNT
values match, the compare match signal is not generated until the next TCNT clock input. Figure
12.9 shows this timing.
Pφ
TCNT
N
TCOR
N
N+1
Compare match
signal
CMF
Figure 12.9 Timing of CMF Setting at Compare Match
12.5.3
Timing of Timer Output at Compare Match
When a compare match signal is generated, the timer output changes as specified by the bits OS3
to OS0 in TCSR. Figure 12.10 shows the timing when the timer output is toggled by the compare
match A signal.
Pφ
Compare match A
signal
Timer output pin
Figure 12.10 Timing of Toggled Timer Output at Compare Match A
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 521 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
12.5.4
Timing of Counter Clear by Compare Match
TCNT is cleared when compare match A or B occurs, depending on the settings of the bits
CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR. Figure 12.11 shows the timing of this operation.
Pφ
Compare match
signal
TCNT
H'00
N
Figure 12.11 Timing of Counter Clear by Compare Match
12.5.5
Timing of TCNT External Reset*
TCNT is cleared at the rising edge or high level of an external reset input, depending on the
settings of bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR. The clear pulse width must be at least 2 states. Figure
12.12 and Figure 12.13 shows the timing of this operation.
Note: * Clearing by an external reset is available only in units 0 and 1.
Pφ
External reset
input pin
Clear signal
TCNT
N–1
N
H'00
Figure 12.12 Timing of Clearance by External Reset (Rising Edge)
Pφ
External reset
input pin
Clear signal
TCNT
N–1
N
H'00
Figure 12.13 Timing of Clearance by External Reset (High Level)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 522 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
12.5.6
Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting
The OVF bit in TCSR is set to 1 when TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00). Figure
12.14 shows the timing of this operation.
Pφ
TCNT
H'FF
H'00
Overflow signal
OVF
Figure 12.14 Timing of OVF Setting
12.6
Operation with Cascaded Connection
If the bits CKS2 to CKS0 in either TCR_0 or TCR_1 are set to B'100, the 8-bit timers of the two
channels are cascaded. With this configuration, a single 16-bit timer could be used (16-bit counter
mode) or compare matches of the 8-bit channel 0 could be counted by the timer of channel 1
(compare match count mode).
12.6.1
16-Bit Counter Mode
When the bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR_0 are set to B'100, the timer functions as a single 16-bit
timer with channel 0 occupying the upper 8 bits and channel 1 occupying the lower 8 bits.
(1)
Setting of Compare Match Flags
• The CMF flag in TCSR_0 is set to 1 when a 16-bit compare match event occurs.
• The CMF flag in TCSR_1 is set to 1 when a lower 8-bit compare match event occurs.
(2)
Counter Clear Specification
• If the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR_0 have been set for counter clear at compare match, the
16-bit counter (TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 together) is cleared when a 16-bit compare match event
occurs. The 16-bit counter (TCNT0 and TCNT1 together) is cleared even if counter clear by
the TMRI0 pin has been set.
• The settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR_1 are ignored. The lower 8 bits cannot be
cleared independently.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 523 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
(3)
Pin Output
• Control of output from the TMO0 pin by the bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_0 is in accordance with
the 16-bit compare match conditions.
• Control of output from the TMO1 pin by the bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_1 is in accordance with
the lower 8-bit compare match conditions.
12.6.2
Compare Match Count Mode
When the bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR_1 are set to B'100, TCNT_1 counts compare match A for
channel 0. Channels 0 and 1 are controlled independently. Conditions such as setting of the CMF
flag, generation of interrupts, output from the TMO pin, and counter clear are in accordance with
the settings for each channel.
12.7
Interrupt Sources
12.7.1
Interrupt Sources and DTC Activation
• Interrupt in unit 0 and unit 1
There are three interrupt sources for the 8-bit timer (TMR_0 or TMR_1): CMIA, CMIB, and OVI.
Their interrupt sources and priorities are shown in table 12.4. Each interrupt source is enabled or
disabled by the corresponding interrupt enable bit in TCR or TCSR, and independent interrupt
requests are sent for each to the interrupt controller. It is also possible to activate the DTC by
means of CMIA and CMIB interrupts (This is available in unit 0 and unit 1 only).
Table 12.4 8-Bit Timer (TMR_0 or TMR_1) Interrupt Sources (in Unit 0 and Unit 1)
Signal
Name
Name
Interrupt Source
CMIA0
CMIA0
CMIB0
DTC
Activation
Priority
TCORA_0 compare match CMFA
Possible
High
CMIB0
TCORB_0 compare match CMFB
Possible
OVI0
OVI0
TCNT_0 overflow
Not possible Low
CMIA1
CMIA1
TCORA_1 compare match CMFA
Possible
CMIB1
CMIB1
TCORB_1 compare match CMFB
Possible
OVI1
OVI1
TCNT_1 overflow
Not possible Low
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 524 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Interrupt
Flag
OVF
OVF
High
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
• Interrupt in unit 2 and unit 3
There are two interrupt sources for the 8-bit timer (TMR_4 or TMR_5): CMIA, CMIB. The
interrupt signal is CMI only. The interrupt sources are shown in table 12.5. When enabling or
disabling is set by the interrupt enable bit in TCR or TCSR, and when either CMIA or CMIB
interrupt source is generated, CMI is sent to the interrupt controller. To verify which interrupt
source is generated, confirm by checking each flag in TCSR. No overflow-related interrupt signal
exists. DTC cannot be activated by this interrupt.
Table 12.5 8-Bit Timer (TMR_4 or TMR_5) Interrupt Sources (in Unit 2 and Unit 3)
Signal
Name
Name
Interrupt Source
Interrupt
Flag
DTC
Activation
Priority
CMI4
CMIA4
TCORA_4 compare match
CMFA
Not possible

CMIB4
TCORB_4 compare match
CMFB
CMIA5
TCORA_5 compare match
CMFA
Not possible

CMIB5
TCORB_5 compare match
CMFB
CMI5
12.7.2
A/D Converter Activation
The A/D converter can be activated only by TMR_0 compare match A.*
If the ADTE bit in TCSR_0 is set to 1 when the CMFA flag in TCSR_0 is set to 1 by the
occurrence of TMR_0 compare match A, a request to start A/D conversion is sent to the A/D
converter. If the 8-bit timer conversion start trigger has been selected on the A/D converter side at
this time, A/D conversion is started.
Note: * Available only in unit 0 and unit 1.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 525 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
12.8
Usage Notes
12.8.1
Notes on Setting Cycle
If the compare match is selected for counter clear, TCNT is cleared at the last state in the cycle in
which the values of TCNT and TCOR match. TCNT updates the counter value at this last state.
Therefore, the counter frequency is obtained by the following formula.
f = φ / (N + 1 )
f: Counter frequency
φ: Operating frequency
N: TCOR value
12.8.2
Conflict between TCNT Write and Counter Clear
If a counter clear signal is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the clear takes
priority and the write is not performed as shown in figure 12.15.
TCNT write cycle by CPU
T1
T2
Pφ
Address
TCNT address
Internal write signal
Counter clear signal
TCNT
N
H'00
Figure 12.15 Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 526 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
12.8.3
Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment
If a TCNT input clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write takes
priority and the counter is not incremented as shown in figure 12.16.
TCNT write cycle by CPU
T1
T2
Pφ
Address
TCNT address
Internal write signal
TCNT input clock
TCNT
N
M
Counter write data
Figure 12.16 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment
12.8.4
Conflict between TCOR Write and Compare Match
If a compare match event occurs during the T2 state of a TCOR write cycle, the TCOR write takes
priority and the compare match signal is inhibited as shown in figure 12.17.
TCOR write cycle by CPU
T1
T2
Pφ
Address
TCOR address
Internal write signal
TCNT
N
TCOR
N
N+1
M
TCOR write data
Compare match signal
Inhibited
Figure 12.17 Conflict between TCOR Write and Compare Match
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 527 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
12.8.5
Conflict between Compare Matches A and B
If compare match events A and B occur at the same time, the 8-bit timer operates in accordance
with the priorities for the output statuses set for compare match A and compare match B, as shown
in table 12.6.
Table 12.6 Timer Output Priorities
Output Setting
Priority
Toggle output
High
1-output
0-output
No change
12.8.6
Low
Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation
TCNT may be incremented erroneously depending on when the internal clock is switched. Table
12.7 shows the relationship between the timing at which the internal clock is switched (by writing
to the bits CKS1 and CKS0) and the TCNT operation.
When the TCNT clock is generated from an internal clock, the rising or falling edge of the internal
clock pulse are always monitored. Table 12.7 assumes that the falling edge is selected. If the
signal levels of the clocks before and after switching change from high to low as shown in item 3,
the change is considered as the falling edge. Therefore, a TCNT clock pulse is generated and
TCNT is incremented. This is similar to when the rising edge is selected.
The erroneous increment of TCNT can also happen when switching between rising and falling
edges of the internal clock, and when switching between internal and external clocks.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 528 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
Table 12.7 Switching of Internal Clock and TCNT Operation
No.
1
Timing to Change CKS1
and CKS0 Bits
TCNT Clock Operation
1
Switching from low to low*
Clock before
switchover
Clock after
switchover
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
N+1
CKS bits changed
2
Switching from low to high*
2
Clock before
switchover
Clock after
switchover
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
CKS bits changed
3
Switching from high to low*3
Clock before
switchover
Clock after
switchover
*4
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
CKS bits changed
4
Switching from high to high
Clock before
switchover
Clock after
switchover
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
CKS bits changed
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Includes switching from low to stop, and from stop to low.
Includes switching from stop to high.
Includes switching from high to stop.
Generated because the change of the signal levels is considered as a falling edge;
TCNT is incremented.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 529 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 12 8-Bit Timers (TMR)
12.8.7
Mode Setting with Cascaded Connection
If 16-bit counter mode and compare match count mode are specified at the same time, input clocks
for TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 are not generated, and the counter stops. Do not specify 16-bit counter
mode and compare match count mode simultaneously.
12.8.8
Module Stop Mode Setting
Operation of the TMR can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The
initial setting is for operation of the TMR to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing
module stop mode. For details, see section 22, Power-Down Modes.
12.8.9
Interrupts in Module Stop Mode
If module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to
clear the CPU interrupt source or the DTC activation source. Interrupts should therefore be
disabled before entering module stop mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 530 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
The watchdog timer (WDT) is an 8-bit timer that outputs an overflow signal (WDTOVF) if a
system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, thus allowing it to overflow. At
the same time, the WDT can also generate an internal reset signal.
When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In interval
timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows.
Figure 13.1 shows a block diagram of the WDT.
13.1
Features
• Selectable from eight counter input clocks
• Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode
 In watchdog timer mode
If the counter overflows, the WDT outputs WDTOVF. It is possible to select whether or
not the entire LSI is reset at the same time.
 In interval timer mode
If the counter overflows, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI).
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 531 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Clock
WDTOVF
Internal reset signal*
Clock
select
Reset
control
RSTCSR
TCNT
Pφ/2
Pφ/64
Pφ/128
Pφ/512
Pφ/2048
Pφ/8192
Pφ/32768
Pφ/131072
Internal clocks
TCSR
Module bus
Bus
interface
Internal bus
Overflow
Interrupt
control
WOVI
(interrupt request
signal)
WDT
[Legend]
Timer control/status register
TCSR:
Timer counter
TCNT:
RSTCSR: Reset control/status register
Note: * An internal reset signal can be generated by the RSTCSR setting.
Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of WDT
13.2
Input/Output Pin
Table 13.1 shows the WDT pin configuration.
Table 13.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Symbol
I/O
Function
Watchdog timer overflow
WDTOVF
Output
Outputs a counter overflow signal in
watchdog timer mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 532 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
13.3
Register Descriptions
The WDT has the following three registers. To prevent accidental overwriting, TCSR, TCNT, and
RSTCSR have to be written to in a method different from normal registers. For details, see section
13.6.1, Notes on Register Access.
• Timer counter (TCNT)
• Timer control/status register (TCSR)
• Reset control/status register (RSTCSR)
13.3.1
Timer Counter (TCNT)
TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. TCNT is initialized to H'00 when the TME bit in
TCSR is cleared to 0.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
13.3.2
Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
TCSR selects the clock source to be input to TCNT, and the timer mode.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Note:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OVF
WT/IT
TME


CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
* Only 0 can be written to this bit, to clear the flag.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 533 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
7
OVF
0
6
WT/IT
0
5
TME
0
4, 3

All 1
R
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
2
1
0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select 2 to 0
Select the clock source to be input to TCNT. The overflow
cycle for Pφ = 20 MHz is indicated in parentheses.
000: Clock Pφ/2 (cycle: 25.6 µs)
001: Clock Pφ/64 (cycle: 819.2 µs)
010: Clock Pφ/128 (cycle: 1.6 ms)
011: Clock Pφ/512 (cycle: 6.6 ms)
100: Clock Pφ/2048 (cycle: 26.2 ms)
101: Clock Pφ/8192 (cycle: 104.9 ms)
110: Clock Pφ/32768 (cycle: 419.4 ms)
111: Clock Pφ/131072 (cycle: 1.68 s)
Note:
*
R/W
Description
R/(W)* Overflow Flag
Indicates that TCNT has overflowed in interval timer
mode. Only 0 can be written to this bit, to clear the flag.
[Setting condition]
When TCNT overflows in interval timer mode (changes
from H'FF to H'00)
When internal reset request generation is selected in
watchdog timer mode, OVF is cleared automatically by
the internal reset.
[Clearing condition]
Cleared by reading TCSR when OVF = 1, then writing 0
to OVF
R/W
Timer Mode Select
Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or
interval timer.
0: Interval timer mode
When TCNT overflows, an interval timer interrupt
(WOVI) is requested.
1: Watchdog timer mode
When TCNT overflows, the WDTOVF signal is output.
R/W
Timer Enable
When this bit is set to 1, TCNT starts counting. When this
bit is cleared, TCNT stops counting and is initialized to
H'00.
Only 0 can be written to this bit, to clear the flag.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 534 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
13.3.3
Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)
RSTCSR controls the generation of the internal reset signal when TCNT overflows, and selects
the type of internal reset signal. RSTCSR is initialized to H'1F by a reset signal from the RES pin,
but not by the WDT internal reset signal caused by WDT overflows.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WOVF
RSTE






0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
R/(W)*
R/W
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written to this bit, to clear the flag.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
WOVF
0
R/(W)* Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag
Description
This bit is set when TCNT overflows in watchdog timer
mode. This bit cannot be set in interval timer mode, and
only 0 can be written.
[Setting condition]
When TCNT overflows (changed from H'FF to H'00) in
watchdog timer mode
[Clearing condition]
Reading RSTCSR when WOVF = 1, and then writing 0 to
WOVF
6
RSTE
0
R/W
Reset Enable
Specifies whether or not this LSI is internally reset if
TCNT overflows during watchdog timer operation.
0: LSI is not reset even if TCNT overflows (Though this
LSI is not reset, TCNT and TCSR in WDT are reset)
1: LSI is reset if TCNT overflows

5
0
R/W
Reserved
Although this bit is readable/writable, reading from or
writing to this bit does not affect operation.

4 to 0
All 1
R
Reserved
These are read-only bits and cannot be modified.
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to this bit, to clear the flag.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 535 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
13.4
Operation
13.4.1
Watchdog Timer Mode
To use the WDT in watchdog timer mode, set both the WT/IT and TME bits in TCSR to 1.
During watchdog timer operation, if TCNT overflows without being rewritten because of a system
crash or other error, the WDTOVF signal is output. This ensures that TCNT does not overflow
while the system is operating normally. Software must prevent TCNT overflows by rewriting the
TCNT value (normally H'00 is written) before overflow occurs. This WDTOVF signal can be used
to reset the LSI internally in watchdog timer mode.
If TCNT overflows when the RSTE bit in RSTCSR is set to 1, a signal that resets this LSI
internally is generated at the same time as the WDTOVF signal. If a reset caused by a signal input
to the RES pin occurs at the same time as a reset caused by a WDT overflow, the RES pin reset
has priority and the WOVF bit in RSTCSR is cleared to 0.
The WDTOVF signal is output for 133 cycles of Pφ when RSTE = 1 in RSTCSR, and for 130
cycles of Pφ when RSTE = 0 in RSTCSR. The internal reset signal is output for 519 cycles of Pφ.
When RSTE = 1, an internal reset signal is generated. Since the system clock control register
(SCKCR) is initialized, the multiplication ratio of Pφ becomes the initial value.
When RSTE = 0, an internal reset signal is not generated. Neither SCKCR nor the multiplication
ratio of Pφ is changed.
When TCNT overflows in watchdog timer mode, the WOVF bit in RSTCSR is set to 1. If TCNT
overflows when the RSTE bit in RSTCSR is set to 1, an internal reset signal is generated for the
entire LSI.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 536 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
TCNT value
Overflow
H'FF
Time
H'00
WT/IT = 1
TME = 1
H'00 written
to TCNT
WOVF = 1
WDTOVF and
internal reset are
generated
WT/IT = 1 H'00 written
TME = 1 to TCNT
WDTOVF signal
133 states*2
Internal reset signal*1
519 states
Notes: 1. If TCNT overflows when the RSTE bit is set to 1, an internal reset signal is generated.
2. 130 states when the RSTE bit is cleared to 0.
Figure 13.2 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 537 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
13.4.2
Interval Timer Mode
To use the WDT as an interval timer, set the WT/IT bit to 0 and the TME bit to 1 in TCSR.
When the WDT is used as an interval timer, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated each
time the TCNT overflows. Therefore, an interrupt can be generated at intervals.
When the TCNT overflows in interval timer mode, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested
at the same time the OVF bit in the TCSR is set to 1.
TCNT value
Overflow
H'FF
Overflow
Overflow
Overflow
Time
H'00
WT/IT = 0
TME = 1
WOVI
WOVI
WOVI
WOVI
[Legend]
WOVI: Interval timer interrupt request
Figure 13.3 Operation in Interval Timer Mode
13.5
Interrupt Source
During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI).
The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR. The OVF flag
must be cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine.
Table 13.2 WDT Interrupt Source
Name
Interrupt Source
Interrupt Flag
DTC Activation
WOVI
TCNT overflow
OVF
Impossible
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 538 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
13.6
Usage Notes
13.6.1
Notes on Register Access
The watchdog timer's TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR registers differ from other registers in being
more difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given
below.
(1)
Writing to TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR
TCNT and TCSR must be written to by a word transfer instruction. They cannot be written to by a
byte transfer instruction.
For writing, TCNT and TCSR are assigned to the same address. Accordingly, perform data
transfer as shown in figure 13.4. The transfer instruction writes the lower byte data to TCNT or
TCSR.
To write to RSTCSR, execute a word transfer instruction for address H'FFA6. A byte transfer
instruction cannot be used to write to RSTCSR.
The method of writing 0 to the WOVF bit in RSTCSR differs from that of writing to the RSTE bit
in RSTCSR. Perform data transfer as shown in figure 13.4.
At data transfer, the transfer instruction clears the WOVF bit to 0, but has no effect on the RSTE
bit. To write to the RSTE bit, perform data transfer as shown in figure 13.4. In this case, the
transfer instruction writes the value in bit 6 of the lower byte to the RSTE bit, but has no effect on
the WOVF bit.
TCNT write or writing to the RSTE bit in RSTCSR:
15
Address: H'FFA4 (TCNT)
H'FFA6 (RSTCSR)
8
7
H'5A
0
Write data
TCSR write:
Address: H'FFA4 (TCSR)
15
Writing 0 to the WOVF bit in RSTCSR:
15
Address: H'FFA6 (RSTCSR)
8
7
H'A5
8
H'A5
0
Write data
7
0
H'00
Figure 13.4 Writing to TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 539 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
(2)
Reading from TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR
These registers can be read from in the same way as other registers. For reading, TCSR is assigned
to address H'FFA4, TCNT to address H'FFA5, and RSTCSR to address H'FFA7.
13.6.2
Conflict between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment
If a TCNT clock pulse is generated during the T2 cycle of a TCNT write cycle, the write takes
priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 13.5 shows this operation.
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
Pφ
Address
Internal write signal
TCNT input clock
TCNT
N
M
Counter write data
Figure 13.5 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment
13.6.3
Changing Values of Bits CKS2 to CKS0
If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR are written to while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in
the incrementation. The watchdog timer must be stopped (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before the
values of bits CKS2 to CKS0 are changed.
13.6.4
Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode
If the timer mode is switched from watchdog timer mode to interval timer mode while the WDT is
operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. The watchdog timer must be stopped (by
clearing the TME bit to 0) before switching the timer mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 540 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
13.6.5
Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode
This LSI is not reset internally if TCNT overflows while the RSTE bit is cleared to 0 during
watchdog timer mode operation, but TCNT and TCSR of the WDT are reset.
TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCR cannot be written to while the WDTOVF signal is low. Also note that
a read of the WOVF flag is not recognized during this period. To clear the WOVF flag, therefore,
read TCSR after the WDTOVF signal goes high, then write 0 to the WOVF flag.
13.6.6
System Reset by WDTOVF Signal
If the WDTOVF signal is input to the RES pin, this LSI will not be initialized correctly. Make
sure that the WDTOVF signal is not input logically to the RES pin. To reset the entire system by
means of the WDTOVF signal, use a circuit like that shown in figure 13.6.
This LSI
Reset input
Reset signal to entire system
RES
WDTOVF
Figure 13.6 Circuit for System Reset by WDTOVF Signal (Example)
13.6.7
Transition to Watchdog Timer Mode or Software Standby Mode
When the WDT operates in watchdog timer mode, a transition to software standby mode is not
made even when the SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1.
Instead, a transition to sleep mode is made.
To transit to software standby mode, the SLEEP instruction must be executed after halting the
WDT (clearing the TME bit to 0).
When the WDT operates in interval timer mode, a transition to software standby mode is made
through execution of the SLEEP instruction when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 541 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 13 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 542 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface
(SCI, IrDA, CRC)
This LSI has six independent serial communication interface (SCI) channels. The SCI can handle
both asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial communication. Asynchronous serial data
communication can be carried out with standard asynchronous communication chips such as a
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or Asynchronous Communication
Interface Adapter (ACIA). A function is also provided for serial communication between
processors (multiprocessor communication function). The SCI also supports the smart card (smart
card) interface supporting ISO/IEC 7816-3 (Identification Card) as an extended asynchronous
communication mode. SCI_5 enables transmitting and receiving IrDA communication waveform
based on the IrDA Specifications version 1.0. This LSI incorporates the on-chip CRC (Cyclic
Redundancy Check) computing unit that realizes high reliability of high-speed data transfer. Since
the CRC computing unit is not connected to SCI, operation is executed by writing data to
registers.
Figure 14.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI_0 to SCI_4. Figure 14.2 shows a block diagram of
the SCI_5 and SCI_6.
14.1
Features
• Choice of asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication mode
• Full-duplex communication capability
The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to
be executed simultaneously. Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver,
enabling continuous transmission and continuous reception of serial data.
• On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected
The external clock can be selected as a transfer clock source (except for the smart card
interface).
• Choice of LSB-first or MSB-first transfer (except in the case of asynchronous mode 7-bit data)
• Four interrupt sources
The interrupt sources are transmit-end, transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, and receive
error. The transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupt sources can activate the DTC or
DMAC.
• Module stop mode can be set
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 543 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Asynchronous Mode (SCI_0, 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6):
•
•
•
•
•
Data length: 7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits
Parity: Even, odd, or none
Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors
Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RxD pin level directly in case of a
framing error
• Enables transfer rate clock input from TMR (SCI_5, SCI_6)
• Average transfer rate generator (SCI_2)
10.667-MHz operation: 115.192 kbps or 460.784 kbps can be selected
16-MHz operation: 115.192 kbps, 460.784 kbps, or 720 kbps can be selected
32-MHz operation: 720 kbps
• Average transfer rate generator (SCI_5, SCI_6)
8-MHz operation: 460.784 kbps can be selected
10.667-MHz operation: 115.152 kbps or 460.606 kbps can be selected
12-MHz operation: 230.263 kbps or 460.526 kbps can be selected
16-MHz operation: 115.196 kbps, 460.784 kbps, 720 kbps, or 921.569 kbps can be selected
24-MHz operation: 115.132 kbps, 460.526 kbps, 720 kbps, or 921.053 kbps can be selected
32-MHz operation: 720 kbps can be selected
Clocked Synchronous Mode (SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4):
• Data length: 8 bits
• Receive error detection: Overrun errors
Smart Card Interface:
• An error signal can be automatically transmitted on detection of a parity error during reception
• Data can be automatically re-transmitted on receiving an error signal during transmission
• Both direct convention and inverse convention are supported
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 544 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Table 14.1 lists the functions of each channel.
Table 14.1 Function List of SCI Channels
SCI_0, 1, 4
SCI_2
SCI_5, SCI_6
Clocked synchronous mode
O
O
—
Asynchronous mode
O
O
O
TMR clock input
—
—
O
—
—
460.784 kbps
460.784 kbps
460.606 kbps
When average
transfer rate
generator is used
Pφ = 8 Hz
Pφ = 10.667 Hz —
Pφ = 12 Hz
—
115.192 kbps
115.152 kbps
—
460.526 kbps
230.263 kbps
Pφ = 16 Hz
—
720 kbps
921.569 kbps
460 784kbps
720 kbps
115.192 kbps
460.784 kbps
115.196 kbps
Pφ = 24 Hz
—
—
921.053 kbps
720 kbps
460.526 kbps
115.132 kbps
Pφ = 32 Hz
—
720 kbps
720 kbps
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 545 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Bus interface
Module data bus
RDR
SCMR
TDR
Internal data bus
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
BRR
SSR
Pφ
SCR
RxD
RSR
TSR
Baud rate
generator
SMR
Pφ/4
Pφ/16
Transmission/
reception control
TxD
Parity generation
Pφ/64
Clock
Parity check
External clock
SCK
[Legend]
RSR:
Receive shift register
RDR: Receive data register
TSR:
Transmit shift register
TDR:
Transmit data register
SMR: Serial mode register
TEI
TXI
RXI
ERI
SCR:
SSR:
SCMR:
BRR:
SEMR:
Serial control register
Serial status register
Smart card mode register
Bit rate register
Serial extended mode register (available only for SCI_2)
Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 546 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Average transfer rate
generator (SCI_2)
At 10.667-MHz operation:
115.192 kbps
460.784 kbps
At 16-MHz operation:
115.192 kbps
460.784 kbps
720 kbps
At 32-MHz operation:
720 kbps
Bus interface
Module data bus
RDR
SCMR
TDR
Internal data bus
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
BRR
SSR
SCR
RxD0
RSR
TSR
IrCR*
Pφ
Baud rate
generator
Pφ/4
Pφ/16
Transmission/
reception control
TxD0
Parity generation
Pφ/64
Clock
Parity check
TEI
TXI
RXI
ERI
Note: * SCL_5 only.
[Legend]
RSR:
Receive shift register
RDR: Receive data register
TSR:
Transmit shift register
TDR:
Transmit data register
SMR: Serial mode register
SCR:
Serial control register
SSR:
Serial status register
SCMR: Smart card mode register
BRR:
Bit rate register
SEMR: Serial extended mode register
IrCR:
IrDA control register (available only for SCI_5)
Average transfer rate
generator
At 8-MHz operation:
460.784 kbps
At 10.667-MHz operation:
115.152 kbps
460.606 kbps
At 12-MHz operation:
230.263 kbps
460.526 kbps
At 16-MHz operation:
115.196 kbps
460.784 kbps
720 kbps,
921.569 kbps
At 24-MHz operation:
115.132 kbps
460.526 kbps
720 kbps
921.053 kbps
At 32-MHz operation:
720 kbps
TMO4, 6
TMO5, 7
TMR
Figure 14.2 Block Diagram of SCI_5 and SCI_6
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 547 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 14.2 lists the pin configuration of the SCI.
Table 14.2 Pin Configuration
Channel
Pin Name*
I/O
Function
0
SCK0
I/O
Channel 0 clock input/output
RxD0
Input
Channel 0 receive data input
TxD0
Output
Channel 0 transmit data output
SCK1
I/O
Channel 1 clock input/output
1
2
3
4
5
6
Note:
*
RxD1
Input
Channel 1 receive data input
TxD1
Output
Channel 1 transmit data output
SCK2
I/O
Channel 2 clock input/output
RxD2
Input
Channel 2 receive data input
TxD2
Output
Channel 2 transmit data output
SCK3
I/O
Channel 3 clock input/output
RxD3
Input
Channel 3 receive data input
TxD3
Output
Channel 3 transmit data output
SCK4
I/O
Channel 4 clock input/output
RxD4
Input
Channel 4 receive data input
TxD4
Output
Channel 4 transmit data output
RxD5/IrRxD
Input
Channel 5 receive data input
TxD5/IrTxD
Output
Channel 5 transmit data output
RxD6
Input
Channel 6 receive data input
TxD6
Output
Channel 6 transmit data output
Pin names SCK, RxD, and TxD are used in the text for all channels, omitting the
channel designation.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 548 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.3
Register Descriptions
The SCI has the following registers. Some bits in the serial mode register (SMR), serial status
register (SSR), and serial control register (SCR) have different functions in different
modesnormal serial communication interface mode and smart card interface mode; therefore,
the bits are described separately for each mode in the corresponding register sections.
Channel 0:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Receive shift register_0 (RSR_0)
Transmit shift register_0 (TSR_0)
Receive data register_0 (RDR_0)
Transmit data register_0 (TDR_0)
Serial mode register_0 (SMR_0)
Serial control register_0 (SCR_0)
Serial status register_0 (SSR_0)
Smart card mode register_0 (SCMR_0)
Bit rate register_0 (BRR_0)
Channel 1:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Receive shift register_1 (RSR_1)
Transmit shift register_1 (TSR_1)
Receive data register_1 (RDR_1)
Transmit data register_1 (TDR_1)
Serial mode register_1 (SMR_1)
Serial control register_1 (SCR_1)
Serial status register_1 (SSR_1)
Smart card mode register_1 (SCMR_1)
Bit rate register_1 (BRR_1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 549 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Channel 2:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Receive shift register_2 (RSR_2)
Transmit shift register_2 (TSR_2)
Receive data register_2 (RDR_2)
Transmit data register_2 (TDR_2)
Serial mode register_2 (SMR_2)
Serial control register_2 (SCR_2)
Serial status register_2 (SSR_2)
Smart card mode register_2 (SCMR_2)
Bit rate register_2 (BRR_2)
Serial extended mode register_2 (SEMR_2)
Channel 4:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Receive shift register_4 (RSR_4)
Transmit shift register_4 (TSR_4)
Receive data register_4 (RDR_4)
Transmit data register_4 (TDR_4)
Serial mode register_4 (SMR_4)
Serial control register_4 (SCR_4)
Serial status register_4 (SSR_4)
Smart card mode register_4 (SCMR_4)
Bit rate register_4 (BRR_4)
Channel 5:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Receive shift register_5 (RSR_5)
Transmit shift register_5 (TSR_5)
Receive data register_5 (RDR_5)
Transmit data register_5 (TDR_5)
Serial mode register_5 (SMR_5)
Serial control register_5 (SCR_5)
Serial status register_5 (SSR_5)
Smart card mode register_5 (SCMR_5)
Bit rate register_5 (BRR_5)
Serial extended mode register_5 (SEMR_5)
IrDA control register_5 (IrCR)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 550 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Channel 6:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Receive shift register_6 (RSR_6)
Transmit shift register_6 (TSR_6)
Receive data register_6 (RDR_6)
Transmit data register_6 (TDR_6)
Serial mode register_6 (SMR_6)
Serial control register_6 (SCR_6)
Serial status register_6 (SSR_6)
Smart card mode register_6 (SCMR_6)
Serial extended mode register_6 (SEMR_6)
Bit rate register_6 (BRR_6)
14.3.1
Receive Shift Register (RSR)
RSR is a shift register which is used to receive serial data input from the RxD pin and converts it
into parallel data. When one frame of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR
automatically. RSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU.
14.3.2
Receive Data Register (RDR)
RDR is an 8-bit register that stores receive data. When the SCI has received one frame of serial
data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR where it is stored. This allows RSR to
receive the next data. Since RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, continuous
receive operations can be performed. After confirming that the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, read
RDR only once. RDR cannot be written to by the CPU.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit
Bit Name
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 551 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.3.3
Transmit Data Register (TDR)
TDR is an 8-bit register that stores transmit data. When the SCI detects that TSR is empty, it
transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and starts transmission. The double-buffered
structures of TDR and TSR enable continuous serial transmission. If the next transmit data has
already been written to TDR when one frame of data is transmitted, the SCI transfers the written
data to TSR to continue transmission. Although TDR can be read from or written to by the CPU at
all times, to achieve reliable serial transmission, write transmit data to TDR for only once after
confirming that the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
14.3.4
Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
TSR is a shift register that transmits serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI first
automatically transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR, and then sends the data to the TxD pin.
TSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU.
14.3.5
Serial Mode Register (SMR)
SMR is used to set the SCI's serial transfer format and select the baud rate generator clock source.
Some bits in SMR have different functions in normal mode and smart card interface mode.
• When SMIF in SCMR = 0
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
C/A
CHR
PE
O/E
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• When SMIF in SCMR = 1
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GM
BLK
PE
O/E
BCP1
BCP0
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 552 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit Functions in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR = 0):
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
C/A
0
R/W
Communication Mode
0: Asynchronous mode
1: Clocked synchronous mode*
6
CHR
0
R/W
Character Length (valid only in asynchronous mode)
0: Selects 8 bits as the data length.
1: Selects 7 bits as the data length. LSB-first is fixed and
the MSB (bit 7) in TDR is not transmitted in
transmission.
In clocked synchronous mode, a fixed data length of 8
bits is used.
5
PE
0
R/W
Parity Enable (valid only in asynchronous mode)
When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to transmit
data before transmission, and the parity bit is checked in
reception. For a multiprocessor format, parity bit addition
and checking are not performed regardless of the PE bit
setting.
4
O/E
0
R/W
Parity Mode (valid only when the PE bit is 1 in
asynchronous mode)
0: Selects even parity.
1: Selects odd parity.
3
STOP
0
R/W
Stop Bit Length (valid only in asynchronous mode)
Selects the stop bit length in transmission.
0: 1 stop bit
1: 2 stop bits
In reception, only the first stop bit is checked. If the
second stop bit is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next
transmit frame.
2
MP
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Mode (valid only in asynchronous mode)
When this bit is set to 1, the multiprocessor function is
enabled. The PE bit and O/E bit settings are invalid in
multiprocessor mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 553 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Clock Select 1, 0
0
CKS0
0
R/W
These bits select the clock source for the baud rate
generator.
00: Pφ clock (n = 0)
01: Pφ/4 clock (n = 1)
10: Pφ/16 clock (n = 2)
11: Pφ/64 clock (n = 3)
For the relation between the settings of these bits and the
baud rate, see section 14.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR). n
is the decimal display of the value of n in BRR (see
section 14.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR)).
Note:
*
Available in SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4 only. Setting is prohibited in SCI_5 and SCI_6.
Bit Functions in Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR = 1):
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
GM
0
R/W
GSM Mode
Setting this bit to 1 allows GSM mode operation. In GSM
mode, the TEND set timing is put forward to 11.0 etu from
the start and the clock output control function is
appended. For details, see sections 14.7.6, Data
Transmission (Except in Block Transfer Mode) and
14.7.8, Clock Output Control.
6
BLK
0
R/W
Setting this bit to 1 allows block transfer mode operation.
For details, see section 14.7.3, Block Transfer Mode.
5
PE
0
R/W
Parity Enable (valid only in asynchronous mode)
When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to transmit
data before transmission, and the parity bit is checked in
reception. Set this bit to 1 in smart card interface mode.
4
O/E
0
R/W
Parity Mode (valid only when the PE bit is 1 in
asynchronous mode)
0: Selects even parity
1: Selects odd parity
For details on the usage of this bit in smart card interface
mode, see section 14.7.2, Data Format (Except in Block
Transfer Mode).
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 554 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
BCP1
0
R/W
Base clock Pulse 1, 0
2
BCP0
0
R/W
These bits select the number of base clock cycles in a 1bit data transfer time in smart card interface mode.
00: 32 clock cycles (S = 32)
01: 64 clock cycles (S = 64)
10: 372 clock cycles (S = 372)
11: 256 clock cycles (S = 256)
For details, see section 14.7.4, Receive Data Sampling
Timing and Reception Margin. S is described in section
14.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR).
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Clock Select 1, 0
0
CKS0
0
R/W
These bits select the clock source for the baud rate
generator.
00: Pφ clock (n = 0)
01: Pφ/4 clock (n = 1)
10: Pφ/16 clock (n = 2)
11: Pφ/64 clock (n = 3)
For the relation between the settings of these bits and the
baud rate, see section 14.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR). n
is the decimal display of the value of n in BRR (see
section 14.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR)).
Note:
etu (Elementary Time Unit): 1-bit transfer time
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 555 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.3.6
Serial Control Register (SCR)
SCR is a register that enables/disables the following SCI transfer operations and interrupt requests,
and selects the transfer clock source. For details on interrupt requests, see section 14.9, Interrupt
Sources. Some bits in SCR have different functions in normal mode and smart card interface
mode.
• When SMIF in SCMR = 0
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
• When SMIF in SCMR = 1
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit Functions in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR = 0):
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
TIE
0
R/W
Transmit Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is
enabled.
A TXI interrupt request can be cancelled by reading 1
from the TDRE flag and then clearing the flag to 0, or by
clearing the TIE bit to 0.
6
RIE
0
R/W
Receive Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt requests
are enabled.
RXI and ERI interrupt requests can be cancelled by
reading 1 from the RDRF, FER, PER, or ORER flag and
then clearing the flag to 0, or by clearing the RIE bit to 0.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 556 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
5
TE
0
R/W
Transmit Enable
When this bit is set to 1, transmission is enabled. Under
this condition, serial transmission is started by writing
transmit data to TDR, and clearing the TDRE flag in SSR
to 0. Note that SMR should be set prior to setting the TE
bit to 1 in order to designate the transmission format.
If transmission is halted by clearing this bit to 0, the
TDRE flag in SSR is fixed to 1.
4
RE
0
R/W
Receive Enable
When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled. Under this
condition, serial reception is started by detecting the start
bit in asynchronous mode or the synchronous clock input
in clocked synchronous mode. Note that SMR should be
set prior to setting the RE bit to 1 in order to designate
the reception format.
Even if reception is halted by clearing this bit to 0, the
RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags are not affected and
the previous value is retained.
3
MPIE
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (valid only when the MP
bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode)
When this bit is set to 1, receive data in which the
multiprocessor bit is 0 is skipped, and setting of the
RDRF, FER, and ORER status flags in SSR is disabled.
On receiving data in which the multiprocessor bit is 1, this
bit is automatically cleared and normal reception is
resumed. For details, see section 14.5, Multiprocessor
Communication Function.
When receive data including MPB = 0 in SSR is being
received, transfer of the received data from RSR to RDR,
detection of reception errors, and the settings of RDRF,
FER, and ORER flags in SSR are not performed. When
receive data including MPB = 1 is received, the MPB bit
in SSR is set to 1, the MPIE bit is automatically cleared to
0, and RXI and ERI interrupt requests (in the case where
the TIE and RIE bits in SCR are set to 1) and setting of
the FER and ORER flags are enabled.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 557 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2
TEIE
0
R/W
Transmit End Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is
enabled. A TEI interrupt request can be cancelled by
reading 1 from the TDRE flag and then clearing the flag
to 0 in order to clear the TEND flag to 0, or by clearing
the TEIE bit to 0.
1
CKE1
0
R/W
Clock Enable 1, 0 (for SCI_0, 1, and 4)
0
CKE0
0
R/W
These bits select the clock source and SCK pin function.
•
Asynchronous mode
00: On-chip baud rate generator
The SCK pin functions as I/O port.
01: On-chip baud rate generator
The clock with the same frequency as the bit rate is
output from the SCK pin.
1X: External clock
The clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate
should be input from the SCK pin.
•
Clocked synchronous mode
0X: Internal clock
The SCK pin functions as the clock output pin.
1X: External clock
The SCK pin functions as the clock input pin.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 558 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
1
CKE1
0
R/W
Clock Enable 1, 0 (for SCI_2)
0
CKE0
0
R/W
These bits select the clock source and SCK pin function.
•
Asynchronous mode
00: On-chip baud rate generator
The SCK pin functions as I/O port.
01: On-chip baud rate generator
The clock with the same frequency as the bit rate is
output from the SCK pin.
1X: External clock or average transfer rate generator
When an external clock is used, the clock with a
frequency 16 times the bit rate should be input from
the SCK pin.
When an average transfer rate generator is used.
•
Clocked synchronous mode
0X: Internal clock
The SCK pin functions as the clock output pin.
1X: External clock
The SCK pin functions as the clock input pin.
1
CKE1
0
R/W
Clock Enable 1, 0 (for SCI_5 and SCI_6)
0
CKE0
0
R/W
These bits select the clock source.
•
Asynchronous mode
00: On-chip baud rate generator
1X: TMR clock input or average transfer rate generator
When an average transfer rate generator is used.
When TMR clock input is used.
•
Clocked synchronous mode
Not available
[Legend]
X:
Don't care
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 559 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit Functions in Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR = 1):
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
TIE
0
R/W
Transmit Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1,a TXI interrupt request is
enabled.
A TXI interrupt request can be cancelled by reading 1
from the TDRE flag and then clearing the flag to 0, or by
clearing the TIE bit to 0.
6
RIE
0
R/W
Receive Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt requests
are enabled.
RXI and ERI interrupt requests can be cancelled by
reading 1 from the RDRF, FER, PER, or ORER flag and
then clearing the flag to 0, or by clearing the RIE bit to 0.
5
TE
0
R/W
Transmit Enable
When this bit is set to 1, transmission is enabled. Under
this condition, serial transmission is started by writing
transmit data to TDR, and clearing the TDRE flag in SSR
to 0. Note that SMR should be set prior to setting the TE
bit to 1 in order to designate the transmission format.
If transmission is halted by clearing this bit to 0, the
TDRE flag in SSR is fixed 1.
4
RE
0
R/W
Receive Enable
When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled. Under this
condition, serial reception is started by detecting the start
bit in asynchronous mode or the synchronous clock input
in clocked synchronous mode. Note that SMR should be
set prior to setting the RE bit to 1 in order to designate
the reception format.
Even if reception is halted by clearing this bit to 0, the
RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags are not affected and
the previous value is retained.
3
MPIE
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (valid only when the MP
bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode)
Write 0 to this bit in smart card interface mode.
2
TEIE
0
R/W
Transmit End Interrupt Enable
Write 0 to this bit in smart card interface mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 560 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
1
CKE1
0
R/W
Clock Enable 1, 0*
0
CKE0
0
R/W
These bits control the clock output from the SCK pin. In
GSM mode, clock output can be dynamically switched.
For details, see section 14.7.8, Clock Output Control.
•
When GM in SMR = 0
00: Output disabled (SCK pin functions as I/O port.) *
01: Clock output
1X: Reserved
•
When GM in SMR = 1
00: Output fixed low
01: Clock output
10: Output fixed high
11: Clock output
Note:
No SCK pins exist in SCI_5 and SCI_6.
*
14.3.7
Serial Status Register (SSR)
SSR is a register containing status flags of the SCI and multiprocessor bits for transfer. TDRE,
RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER can only be cleared. Some bits in SSR have different functions in
normal mode and smart card interface mode.
• When SMIF in SCMR = 0
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
FRE
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 561 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
• When SMIF in SCMR = 1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
ERS
PER
TEND
MPB
MPBT
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R/(W)*
R
R
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
Bit Functions in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR = 0):
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
TDRE
1
R/(W)* Transmit Data Register Empty
Description
Indicates whether TDR contains transmit data.
[Setting conditions]
•
When the TE bit in SCR is 0
•
When data is transferred from TDR to TSR
[Clearing conditions]
6
RDRF
0
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
•
When a TXI interrupt request is issued allowing
DMAC or DTC to write data to TDR
R/(W)* Receive Data Register Full
Indicates whether receive data is stored in RDR.
[Setting condition]
•
When serial reception ends normally and receive data
is transferred from RSR to RDR
[Clearing conditions]
•
When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1
•
When an RXI interrupt request is issued allowing
DMAC or DTC to read data from RDR
The RDRF flag is not affected and retains its previous
value when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.
Note that when the next serial reception is completed
while the RDRF flag is being set to 1, an overrun error
occurs and the received data is lost.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 562 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
5
ORER
0
R/(W)* Overrun Error
Description
Indicates that an overrun error has occurred during
reception and the reception ends abnormally.
[Setting condition]
•
When the next serial reception is completed while
RDRF = 1
In RDR, receive data prior to an overrun error
occurrence is retained, but data received after the
overrun error occurrence is lost. When the ORER flag
is set to 1, subsequent serial reception cannot be
performed. Note that, in clocked synchronous mode,
serial transmission also cannot continue.
[Clearing condition]
•
When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1
Even when the RE bit in SCR is cleared, the ORER
flag is not affected and retains its previous value.
4
FER
0
R/(W)* Framing Error
Indicates that a framing error has occurred during
reception in asynchronous mode and the reception ends
abnormally.
[Setting condition]
•
When the stop bit is 0
In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked
whether it is 1 but the second stop bit is not checked.
Note that receive data when the framing error occurs
is transferred to RDR, however, the RDRF flag is not
set. In addition, when the FER flag is being set to 1,
the subsequent serial reception cannot be performed.
In clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission
also cannot continue.
[Clearing condition]
•
When 0 is written to FER after reading FER = 1
Even when the RE bit in SCR is cleared, the FER flag
is not affected and retains its previous value.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 563 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
3
PER
0
R/(W)* Parity Error
Description
Indicates that a parity error has occurred during reception
in asynchronous mode and the reception ends
abnormally.
[Setting condition]
•
When a parity error is detected during reception
Receive data when the parity error occurs is
transferred to RDR, however, the RDRF flag is not
set. Note that when the PER flag is being set to 1, the
subsequent serial reception cannot be performed. In
clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission also
cannot continue.
[Clearing condition]
•
When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1
Even when the RE bit in SCR is cleared, the PER bit
is not affected and retains its previous value.
2
TEND
1
R
Transmit End
[Setting conditions]
•
When the TE bit in SCR is 0
•
When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a
transmit character
[Clearing conditions]
1
MPB
0
R
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
•
When a TXI interrupt request is issued allowing
DMAC or DTC to write data to TDR
Multiprocessor Bit
Stores the multiprocessor bit value in the receive frame.
When the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0 its previous state
is retained.
0
MPBT
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Bit Transfer
Sets the multiprocessor bit value to be added to the
transmit frame.
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 564 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit Functions in Smart Card Interface Mode (When SMIF in SCMR = 1):
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
TDRE
1
R/(W)* Transmit Data Register Empty
Description
Indicates whether TDR contains transmit data.
[Setting conditions]
•
When the TE bit in SCR is 0
•
When data is transferred from TDR to TSR
[Clearing conditions]
6
RDRF
0
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
•
When a TXI interrupt request is issued allowing
DMAC or DTC to write data to TDR
R/(W)* Receive Data Register Full
Indicates whether receive data is stored in RDR.
[Setting condition]
•
When serial reception ends normally and receive data
is transferred from RSR to RDR
[Clearing conditions]
•
When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1
•
When an RXI interrupt request is issued allowing
DMAC or DTC to read data from RDR
The RDRF flag is not affected and retains its previous
value even when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.
Note that when the next reception is completed while the
RDRF flag is being set to 1, an overrun error occurs and
the received data is lost.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 565 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
5
ORER
0
R/(W)* Overrun Error
Description
Indicates that an overrun error has occurred during
reception and the reception ends abnormally.
[Setting condition]
•
When the next serial reception is completed while
RDRF = 1
In RDR, the receive data prior to an overrun error
occurrence is retained, but data received following the
overrun error occurrence is lost. When the ORER flag
is set to 1, subsequent serial reception cannot be
performed. Note that, in clocked synchronous mode,
serial transmission also cannot continue.
[Clearing condition]
•
When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1
Even when the RE bit in SCR is cleared, the ORER
flag is not affected and retains its previous value.
4
ERS
0
R/(W)* Error Signal Status
[Setting condition]
•
When a low error signal is sampled
[Clearing condition]
•
3
PER
0
When 0 is written to ERS after reading ERS = 1
R/(W)* Parity Error
Indicates that a parity error has occurred during reception
in asynchronous mode and the reception ends
abnormally.
[Setting condition]
•
When a parity error is detected during reception
Receive data when the parity error occurs is
transferred to RDR, however, the RDRF flag is not
set. Note that when the PER flag is being set to 1, the
subsequent serial reception cannot be performed. In
clocked synchronous mode, serial transmission also
cannot continue.
[Clearing condition]
•
When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1
Even when the RE bit in SCR is cleared, the PER flag
is not affected and retains its previous value.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 566 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2
TEND
1
R
Transmit End
This bit is set to 1 when no error signal is sent from the
receiving side and the next transmit data is ready to be
transferred to TDR.
[Setting conditions]
•
When both the TE and ERS bits in SCR are 0
•
When ERS = 0 and TDRE = 1 after a specified time
passed after completion of 1-byte data transfer. The
set timing depends on the register setting as follows:
When GM = 0 and BLK = 0, 2.5 etu after transmission
start
When GM = 0 and BLK = 1, 1.5 etu after transmission
start
When GM = 1 and BLK = 0, 1.0 etu after transmission
start
When GM = 1 and BLK = 1, 1.0 etu after transmission
start
[Clearing conditions]
1
MPB
0
R
•
When 0 is written to TEND after reading TEND = 1
•
When a TXI interrupt request is issued allowing
DMAC or DTC to write the next data to TDR
Multiprocessor Bit
Not used in smart card interface mode.
0
MPBT
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Bit Transfer
Write 0 to this bit in smart card interface mode.
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 567 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.3.8
Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR)
SCMR selects smart card interface mode and its format.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name




SDIR
SINV

SMIF
Initial Value
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
R/W




R/W
R/W

R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
3
SDIR
0
R/W
Smart Card Data Transfer Direction
Selects the serial/parallel conversion format.
0: Transfer with LSB-first
1: Transfer with MSB-first
This bit is valid only when the 8-bit data format is used for
transmission/reception; when the 7-bit data format is
used, data is always transmitted/received with LSB-first.
2
SINV
0
R/W
Smart Card Data Invert
Inverts the transmit/receive data logic level. This bit does
not affect the logic level of the parity bit. To invert the
parity bit, invert the O/E bit in SMR.
0: TDR contents are transmitted as they are. Receive
data is stored as it is in RDR.
1: TDR contents are inverted before being transmitted.
Receive data is stored in inverted form in RDR.
1

1

Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
0
SMIF
0
R/W
Smart Card Interface Mode Select
When this bit is set to 1, smart card interface mode is
selected.
0: Normal asynchronous or clocked synchronous mode
1: Smart card interface mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 568 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.3.9
Bit Rate Register (BRR)
BRR is an 8-bit register that adjusts the bit rate. As the SCI performs baud rate generator control
independently for each channel, different bit rates can be set for each channel. Table 14.2 shows
the relationships between the N setting in BRR and bit rate B for normal asynchronous mode and
clocked synchronous mode, and smart card interface mode. The initial value of BRR is H'FF, and
it can be read from or written to by the CPU at all times.
Table 14.3 Relationships between N Setting in BRR and Bit Rate B
Mode
ABCS Bit Bit Rate
Asynchronous
mode
0
B=
Pφ × 106
64 × 2
1
B=
N=
N=
2n – 1
2n + 1
Pφ × 106
Error (%) = {
B × 64 × 2
−1
×B
2n – 1
– 1 } × 100
× (N + 1)
Pφ × 106
Error (%) = {
B × 32 × 2
2n – 1
– 1 } × 100
× (N + 1)
−1
×B
Pφ × 106
S×2
[Legend]
B:
N:
Pφ:
n and S:
2n – 1
−1
×B
Pφ × 106
8×2
Smart card interface mode
2n – 1
Pφ × 106
32 × 2
Clocked synchronous mode
Error
−1
×B
Pφ × 106
Error (%) = {
B×S×2
2n + 1
– 1 } × 100
× (N + 1)
Bit rate (bit/s)
BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
Operating frequency (MHz)
Determined by the SMR settings shown in the following table.
SMR Setting
SMR Setting
CKS1
CKS0
n
BCP1
BCP0
S
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
32
64
372
256
Table 14.4 shows sample N settings in BRR in normal asynchronous mode. Table 14.5 shows the
maximum bit rate settable for each operating frequency. Tables 14.7 and 14.9 show sample N
settings in BRR in clocked synchronous mode and smart card interface mode, respectively. In
smart card interface mode, the number of base clock cycles S in a 1-bit data transfer time can be
selected. For details, see section 14.7.4, Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin.
Tables 14.6 and 14.8 show the maximum bit rates with external clock input.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 569 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
When the ABCS bit in the serial extended mode register_2, 5, and 6 (SEMR_2, 5, and 6) of
SCI_2, 5, and 6 are set to 1 in asynchronous mode, the bit rate is two times that of shown in table
14.4.
Table 14.4 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1)
Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz)
8
9.8304
10
12
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
141
0.03
2
174
–0.26
2
177
–0.25
2
212
0.03
150
2
103
0.16
2
127
0.00
2
129
0.16
2
155
0.16
300
1
207
0.16
1
255
0.00
2
64
0.16
2
77
0.16
600
1
103
0.16
1
127
0.00
1
129
0.16
1
155
0.16
1200
0
207
0.16
0
255
0.00
1
64
0.16
1
77
0.16
2400
0
103
0.16
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
0
155
0.16
4800
0
51
0.16
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
0
77
0.16
9600
0
25
0.16
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36
0
38
0.16
19200
0
12
0.16
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
0
19
–2.34
31250
0
7
0.00
0
9
–1.70
0
9
0.00
0
11
0.00
38400



0
7
0.00
0
7
1.73
0
9
–2.34
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 570 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz)
12.288
14
14.7456
Error
(%)
16
Error
(%)
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
217
0.08
2
248
–0.17
3
64
0.70
3
70
0.03
150
2
159
0.00
2
181
0.16
2
191
0.00
2
207
0.16
300
2
79
0.00
2
90
0.16
2
95
0.00
2
103
0.16
600
1
159
0.00
1
181
0.16
1
191
0.00
1
207
0.16
1200
1
79
0.00
1
90
0.16
1
95
0.00
1
103
0.16
2400
0
159
0.00
0
181
0.16
0
191
0.00
0
207
0.16
4800
0
79
0.00
0
90
0.16
0
95
0.00
0
103
0.16
9600
0
39
0.00
0
45
–0.93
0
47
0.00
0
51
0.16
19200
0
19
0.00
0
22
–0.93
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
31250
0
11
2.40
0
13
0.00
0
14
–1.70
0
15
0.00
38400
0
9
0.00



0
11
0.00
0
12
0.16
n
N
n
N
Note: In SCI_2, 5, and 6, this is an example when the ABCS bit in SEMR_2, 5, and 6 is 0.
When the ABCS bit is set to 1, the bit rate is two times.
Table 14.4 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2)
Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz)
17.2032
18
19.6608
20
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
3
75
0.48
3
79
–0.12
3
86
0.31
3
88
–0.25
150
2
223
0.00
2
233
0.16
2
255
0.00
3
64
0.16
300
2
111
0.00
2
116
0.16
2
127
0.00
2
129
0.16
600
1
223
0.00
1
233
0.16
1
255
0.00
2
64
0.16
1200
1
111
0.00
1
116
0.16
1
127
0.00
1
129
0.16
2400
0
223
0.00
0
233
0.16
0
255
0.00
1
64
0.16
4800
0
111
0.00
0
116
0.16
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
9600
0
55
0.00
0
58
–0.69
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
19200
0
27
0.00
0
28
1.02
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36
31250
0
16
1.20
0
17
0.00
0
19
–1.70
0
19
0.00
38400
0
13
0.00
0
14
–2.34
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 571 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz)
25
30
33
35
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
3
110
–0.02
3
132
0.13
3
145
0.33
3
154
0.23
150
3
80
–0.47
3
97
–0.35
3
106
0.39
3
113
–0.66
300
2
162
0.15
2
194
0.16
2
214
–0.07
2
227
0.00
600
2
80
–0.47
2
97
–0.35
2
106
0.39
2
113
0.00
1200
1
162
0.15
1
194
0.16
1
214
–0.07
1
227
0.00
2400
1
80
–0.47
1
97
–0.35
1
106
0.39
1
113
0.00
4800
0
162
0.15
0
194
0.16
0
214
–0.07
0
227
0.00
9600
0
80
–0.47
0
97
–0.35
0
106
0.39
0
113
0.00
19200
0
40
–0.76
0
48
–0.35
0
53
–0.54
0
56
0.00
31250
0
24
0.00
0
29
0
0
32
0
0
34
0.00
38400
0
19
1.73
0
23
1.73
0
26
–0.54
0
28
–1.78
Note: In SCI_2, 5, and 6, this is an example when the ABCS bit in SEMR_2, 5, and 6 is 0.
When the ABCS bit is set to 1, the bit rate is two times.
Table 14.5 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Operating Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)
Pφ (MHz)
Maximum
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
Pφ (MHz)
Maximum
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
n
N
8
250000
0
0
17.2032
537600
0
0
9.8304
307200
0
0
18
562500
0
0
10
312500
0
0
19.6608
614400
0
0
12
375000
0
0
20
625000
0
0
12.288
384000
0
0
25
781250
0
0
14
437500
0
0
30
937500
0
0
14.7456
460800
0
0
33
1031250
0
0
16
500000
0
0
35
1093750
0
0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 572 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Table 14.6 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode)
Pφ (MHz)
External Input
Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
Pφ (MHz)
External Input
Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
8
2.0000
125000
17.2032
4.3008
268800
9.8304
2.4576
153600
18
4.5000
281250
10
2.5000
156250
19.6608
4.9152
307200
12
3.0000
187500
20
5.0000
312500
12.288
3.0720
192000
25
6.2500
390625
14
3.5000
218750
30
7.5000
468750
14.7456
3.6864
230400
33
8.2500
515625
16
4.0000
250000
35
8.7500
546875
Note: In SCI_2, this is an example when the ABCS bit in SEMR_2 is 0.
When the ABCS bit is set to 1, the bit rate is two times.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 573 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Table 14.7 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)*2
Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz)
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
8
10
n
N
n
3
124 —
16
N
n
N
—
3
249
20
n
N
25
30
N
33
n
N
35
n
N
n
n
N
3
233
3
97
3
116 3
128 3
136
155 2
187 2
205 2
218
110
250
500
2
249 —
—
3
124 —
—
1k
2
124 —
—
2
249 —
—
2.5k
1
199 1
249 2
99
124 2
2
5k
1
99
1
124 1
199 1
249 2
77
2
102 2
108
10k
0
199 0
249 1
99
1
124 1
155 1
187 1
205 1
218
25k
0
79
0
99
0
159 0
199 0
249 1
74
82
87
50k
0
39
0
49
0
79
0
99
0
124 0
149 0
164 0
174
100k
0
19
0
24
0
39
0
49
0
62
0
74
0
82
0
87
250k
0
7
0
9
0
15
0
19
0
24
0
29
0
32
0
34
500k
0
3
0
4
0
7
0
9
—
—
0
14
—
—
—
—
1M
0
1
0
3
0
4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2.5M
0
0*
1
5M
2
93
1
1
0
1
—
—
0
2
—
—
—
—
0
0*1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
[Legend]
Space: Setting prohibited.
:
Can be set, but there will be error.
Notes: 1. Continuous transmission or reception is not possible.
2. No clocked synchronous mode exists in SCI_5 and SCI_6.
Table 14.8 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode)*
Pφ (MHz)
External Input
Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
Pφ (MHz)
External Input
Clock (MHz)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
8
1.3333
1333333.3
20
3.3333
3333333.3
10
1.6667
1666666.7
25
4.1667
4166666.7
12
2.0000
2000000.0
30
5.0000
5000000.0
14
2.3333
2333333.3
33
5.5000
5500000.0
16
2.6667
2666666.7
35
5.8336
5833625.0
3.0000
3000000.0
18
Note
*
No clocked synchronous mode exists in SCI_5 and SCI_6.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 574 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Table 14.9 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Smart Card Interface Mode, n = 0, S =
372)
Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz)
7.1424
Bit Rate
10.00
10.7136
n
N
Error (%) n
N
Error (%) n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
0
0
0.00
1
30
1
25
0
1
8.99
(bit/sec)
9600
13.00
0
0
Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz)
14.2848
Bit Rate
16.00
18.00
n
N
Error (%) n
N
Error (%) n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
0
1
0.00
1
12.01
2
15.99
0
2
6.60
(bit/sec)
9600
20.00
0
0
Operating Frequency Pφ (MHz)
25.00
Bit Rate
30.00
33.00
n
N
Error (%) n
N
Error (%) n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
0
3
12.49
3
5.01
4
7.59
0
4
1.99
(bit/sec)
9600
35.00
0
0
Table 14.10 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Operating Frequency (Smart Card Interface
Mode, S = 372)
Pφ (MHz)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
n
N
Pφ (MHz)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
n
N
7.1424
9600
0
0
18.00
24194
0
0
10.00
13441
0
0
20.00
26882
0
0
10.7136
14400
0
0
25.00
33602
0
0
13.00
17473
0
0
30.00
40323
0
0
14.2848
19200
0
0
33.00
44355
0
0
16.00
21505
0
0
35.00
47043
0
0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 575 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.3.10 Serial Extended Mode Register (SEMR_2)
SEMR_2 selects the clock source in asynchronous mode of SCI_2. The base clock is
automatically specified when the average transfer rate operation is selected.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name




ABCS
ACS2
ACS1
ACS0
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
7 to 4

Undefined R
Description
Reserved
These bits are always read as undefined and cannot be
modified.
3
ABCS
0
R/W
Asynchronous Mode Base clock Select (valid only in
asynchronous mode)
Selects the base clock for a 1-bit period.
0: The base clock has a frequency 16 times the transfer
rate
1: The base clock has a frequency 8 times the transfer
rate
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 576 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2
ACS2
0
R/W
1
ACS1
0
R/W
Asynchronous Mode Clock Source Select (valid when
CKE1 = 1 in asynchronous mode)
0
ACS0
0
R/W
These bits select the clock source for the average
transfer rate function. When the average transfer rate
function is enabled, the base clock is automatically
specified regardless of the ABCS bit value.
000: External clock input
001: 115.192 kbps of average transfer rate specific to
Pφ = 10.667 MHz is selected (operated using the
base clock with a frequency 16 times the transfer
rate)
010: 460.784 kbps of average transfer rate specific to
Pφ = 10.667 MHz is selected (operated using the
base clock with a frequency 8 times the transfer
rate)
011: 720 kbps of average transfer rate specific to Pφ =
32 MHz is selected (operated using the base clock
with a frequency 16 times the transfer rate)
100: Setting prohibited
101: 115.192 kbps of average transfer rate specific to
Pφ = 16 MHz is selected (operated using the base
clock with a frequency 16 times the transfer rate)
110: 460.784 kbps of average transfer rate specific to
Pφ = 16 MHz is selected (operated using the base
clock with a frequency 16 times the transfer rate)
111: 720 kbps of average transfer rate specific to Pφ =
16 MHz is selected (operated using the base clock
with a frequency 8 times the transfer rate)
The average transfer rate only supports operating
frequencies of 10.667 MHz, 16 MHz, and 32 MHz.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 577 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.3.11 Serial Extended Mode Register 5 and 6 (SEMR_5 and SEMR_6)
SEMR_5 and SEMR_6 select the clock source in asynchronous mode of SCI_5 and SCI_6. The
base clock is automatically specified when the average transfer rate operation is selected. TMQ
output in TMR unit 2 and unit 3 can also be set as the serial transfer base clock. Figure 14.3
describes the examples of base clock features when the average transfer rate operation is selected.
Figure 14.4 describes the examples of base clock features when the TMO output in TMR is
selected.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name



ABCS
ACS3
ACS2
ACS1
ACS0
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
0
0
0
0
0
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
7 to 5

Undefined R
4
ABCS
0
R/W
3
2
1
0
ACS3
ACS2
ACS1
ACS0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 578 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Description
Reserved
These bits are always read as undefined and cannot be
modified.
Asynchronous Mode Base Clock Select (valid only in
asynchronous mode)
Selects the base clock for a 1-bit period.
0: The base clock has a frequency 16 times the transfer
rate
1: The base clock has a frequency 8 times the transfer
rate
Asynchronous Mode Clock Source Select
These bits select the clock source for the average
transfer rate function in the asynchronous mode. When
the average transfer rate function is enabled, the base
clock is automatically specified regardless of the ABCS
bit value. The average transfer rate only corresponds to
8MHz, 10.667MHz, 12MHz, 16MHz, 24MHz, and
32MHz. No other clock is available. Setting of ACS3 to
ACS0 must be done in the asynchronous mode (the
C/A bit in SMR = 0) and the external clock input mode
(the CKE bit I SCR = 1). The setting examples are in
figures 14.3 and 14.4.
(Each number in the four-digit number below
corresponds to the value in the bits ACS3 to ACS0 from
left to right respectively.)
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
2
1
0
ACS3
ACS2
ACS1
ACS0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0000: Average transfer rate generator is not used.
0001: 115.152 kbps of average transfer rate specific to
Pφ = 10.667 MHz is selected (operated using the
base clock with a frequency 16 times the transfer
rate)
0010: 460.606 kbps of average transfer rate specific to
Pφ = 10.667 MHz is selected (operated using the
base clock with a frequency 8 times the transfer
rate)
0011: 921.569 kbps of average transfer rate specific to
Pφ = 16 MHz is selected or 460.784 kbps of
average transfer rate specific to Pφ = 8MHz is
selected (operated using the base clock with a
frequency 8 times the transfer rate)
0100: TMR clock input
This setting allows the TMR compare match
output to be used as the base clock. The table
below shows the correspondence between the
SCI channels and the compare match output.
SCI Channel
SCI_5
SCI_6
Compare Match
TMR Unit Output
Unit 2
TMO4, TMO5
Unit 3
TMO6, TMO7
0101: 115.196 kbps of average transfer rate specific to
Pφ = 16 MHz is selected (operated using the base
clock with a frequency 16 times the transfer rate)
0110: 460.784 kbps of average transfer rate specific to
Pφ = 16 MHz is selected (operated using the base
clock with a frequency 16 times the transfer rate)
0111: 720 kbps of average transfer rate specific to Pφ =
16 MHz is selected (operated using the base clock
with a frequency 8 times the transfer rate)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 579 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
2
1
0
ACS3
ACS2
ACS1
ACS0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
1000: 115.132 kbps of average transfer rate specific to
Pφ = 24 MHz is selected (operated using the base
clock with a frequency 16 times the transfer rate)
1001: 460.526 kbps of average transfer rate specific to
Pφ = 24 or MHz or 230.263 kbps of average
transfer rate specific to Pφ = 12MHz is selected
(operated using the base clock with a frequency
16 times the transfer rate)
1010: 720 kbps of average transfer rate specific to Pφ =
24 MHz is selected (operated using the base clock
with a frequency 8 times the transfer rate)
1011: 921.053 kbps of average transfer rate specific to
Pφ = 24 or MHz or 460.526 kbps of average
transfer rate specific to Pφ = 12MHz is selected
(operated using the base clock with a frequency 8
times the transfer rate)
1100: 720 kbps of average transfer rate specific to Pφ =
32 MHz is selected (operated using the base clock
with a frequency 16 times the transfer rate)
1101: Reserved (setting prohibited)
111x: Reserved (setting prohibited)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 580 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
1.8424 MHz
4 5
6 7
8 9
10 11 12
15 16
3.6848 MHz
4 5
6 7
8
Average transfer rate = 3.6848 MHz/8 = 460.606 kbps
Average error with 460.6 kbps = -0.043%
1 bit = Base clock × 8*
1 2 3
5.333 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 1 2 3 4
Note: * The length of one bit varies according to the base clock synchronization.
Base clock
10.667 MHz/2 = 5.333 MHz
5.333 MHz × (38/55)
= 3.6848 MHz
(Average)
13 14
Average transfer rate = 1.8424 MHz/16 = 115.152 kbps
Average error with 115.2 kbps = -0.043%
1 bit = Base clock × 16*
1 2 3
2.667 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 1 2 3 4
Base clock with 460.606-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to 0 = B'0010)
Base clock
10.667 MHz/4= 2.667 MHz
2.667 MHz × (38/55)
= 1.8424 MHz
(Average)
Base clock with 115.152-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to 0 = B'0001)
When φ = 10.667 MHz
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Figure 14.3 Examples of Base Clock when Average Transfer Rate Is Selected (1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 581 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
REJ09B0219-0100
Average transfer rate = 1.8431 MHz/16 = 115.196 kbps
Average error with 115.2 kbps = -0.004%
1.8431 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
1 bit = Base clock × 16*
2 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 582 of 966
Average transfer rate = 5.76 MHz/8 = 720 kbps
Average error with 720 kbps = ±0%
5.76 MHz
1 2 3
4 5
6 7 8
1 bit = Base clock × 8*
8 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Average transfer rate = 7.3725 MHz/8 = 921.569 kbps
Average error with 921.6 kbps = -0.003%
1 bit = Base clock × 8*
7.3725 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Note: * The length of one bit varies according to the base clock synchronization.
Base clock
16 MHz/2 = 8 MHz
8 MHz × (47/51)
= 7.3725 MHz
(Average)
Base clock with 921.569-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to 0 = B'0011)
Base clock
16 MHz/2 = 8 MHz
8 MHz × (18/25)
= 5.76 MHz
(Average)
Base clock with 720-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to 0 = B'0111)
Average transfer rate = 7.3725 MHz/16 = 460.784 kbps
Average error with 460.8 kbps = -0.004%
Base clock with 460.784-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to 0 = B'0110)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Base clock
8 MHz
16 MHz/2 = 8 MHz
8 MHz × (47/51)
7.3725 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
= 7.3725 MHz
(Average)
1 bit = Base clock × 16*
Base clock
16 MHz/8 = 2 MHz
2 MHz × (47/51)
= 1.8431 MHz
(Average)
Base clock with 115.196-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to 0 = B'0101)
When φ = 16 MHz
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Figure 14.3 Examples of Base Clock when Average Transfer Rate Is Selected (2)
6 7
8 9
1 bit = Base clock × 16*
1.8421 MHz
2 3
4 5
3 MHz
10 11
12
Average transfer rate =1.8421 MHz/16 = 115.132 kbps
Average error with 115.2 kbps = -0.059%
1
13 14
15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 1 2
6 7
8 9
1 bit = Base clock × 16*
7.3684 MHz
2 3
4 5
Average transfer rate = 5.76 MHz/8= 720 kbps
Average error with 720 kbps = ±0%
1 bit = Base clock × 8*
5.76 MHz
12 MHz
13 14
15 16
1
8
Average transfer rate = 7.3684 MHz/8= 921.053 kbps
Average error with 921.6 kbps = -0.059%
7.3684 MHz
2 3
4 5
6 7
1 bit = Base clock × 8*
12 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 1 2
Note: * The length of one bit varies according to the base clock synchronization.
Base clock
24 MHz/2 = 12 MHz
12 MHz × (35/57)
= 7.3684 MHz
(Average)
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Base clock with 921.053-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to 0 = B'1011)
Base clock
24 MHz/2 = 12 MHz
12 MHz × (12/25)
= 5.76 MHz
(Average)
10 11
Average transfer rate = 7.3684 MHz/16 = 460.526 kbps
Average error with 921.6 kbps = -0.059%
1
12 MHz
Base clock with 720-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to 0 = B'1010)
Base clock
24 MHz/2 = 12 MHz
12 MHz × (35/57)
= 7.3684 MHz
(Average)
Base clock with 460.526-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to 0 = B'1001)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 1 2
Base clock
24 MHz/8 = 3 MHz
3 MHz × (35/57)
= 1.8421 MHz
(average)
Base clock with 115.132-kbps average transfer rate (ACS3 to 0 = B'1000)
When φ = 24 MHz
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Figure 14.3 Examples of Base Clock when Average Transfer Rate Is Selected (3)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 583 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
REJ09B0219-0100
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 584 of 966
SCK5
Base clock
= 4 MHz ´ 3/4
= 3 MHz (Average)
Clock enable
TMO5 output
Base clock
TMO4 output
= 4 MHz
3
3
3
4
4
1
1
1 bit = Base clock × 16
2
4 MHz
3 MHz
2
2
5
2
2
6
3
3
4
7
1
1
Average transfer rate = 3 MHz/16 = 187.5 kbps
1
1
1
8
2
2
9
3
3
4
10
1
1
11
2
2
12
3
3
4
13
1
1
14
2
2
15
3
3
4
1
1
16
TMR and SCI Settings:
TMR (Unit 2)
· TCR_4 = H'09 (TCNT4 cleared by TCORA_4 compare match, TCNT4 incremented at rising edge of Pφ/2)
· TCCR_4 = H'01
TMO5
· TCR_5 = H'0C (TCNT5 cleared by TCORA_5 compare match, TCNT5 incremented by TCNT_4 compare match A)
TMO4
· TCCR_5 = H'00
· TCSR_4 = H'09 (0 output on TCORA_4 compare match, 1 output on TCORB_4 compare match)
· TCSR_5 = H'09 (0 output on TCORA_5 compare match, 1 output on TCORB_5 compare match)
· TCNT_4 = TCNT_5 = 0
· TCORA_4 = H'03, TCORB_4 = H'01
· TCORA_5 = H'03, TCORB_5 = H'00
· SEMR_5 = H'04
When SCI_6 is used, set TMO6 as a base clock and TMO7 as a clock enable.
Example when TMR clock input is used in SCI_5
187.5-kbps average transfer rate is generated by TMR when φ = 32 MHz
(1) TMO4 is set as a base clock and generates 4 MHz.
(2) TMO5 is set as TCNT_4 compare match count and generates a clock enable multiplied by 3/4.
The average transfer rate will be 3 MHz/16 = 187.5 kbps.
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
Base clock
Clock enable
3
1
1
4
2
2
5
3
3
4
SCK5
SCI_5
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Figure 14.4 Example of Average Transfer Rate Setting when TMR Clock Is Input
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.3.12 IrDA Control Register (IrCR)
IrCR selects the function of SCI_5.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IrE
IrCKS2
IrCKS1
IrCKS0
IrTxINV
IrRxINV


0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W


Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
IrE
0
R/W
IrDA Enable
Sets the SCI_5 I/O to normal SCI or IrDA.
0: TxD5/IrTxD and RxD5/IrRxD pins operate as
TxD5 and RxD5.
1: TxD5/IrTxD and RxD5/IrRxD pins are operate as
IrTxD and IrRxD.
6
IrCK2
0
R/W
IrDA Clock Select 2 to 0
5
IrCK1
0
R/W
4
IrCK0
0
R/W
Sets the pulse width of high state at encoding the IrTxD
output pulse when the IrDA function is enabled.
000: Pulse-width = B × 3/16 (Bit rate × 3/16)
001: Pulse-width = Pφ/2
010: Pulse-width = Pφ/4
011: Pulse-width = Pφ/8
100: Pulse-width = Pφ/16
101: Pulse-width = Pφ/32
110: Pulse-width = Pφ/64
111: Pulse-width = Pφ/128
3
IrTxINV
0
R/W
IrTx Data Invert
This bit specifies the inversion of the logic level in IrTxD
output. When inversion is done, the pulse width of high
state specified by the bits 6 to 4 becomes the pulse
width in low state.
0: Outputs the transmission data as it is as IrTxD output
1: Outputs the inverted transmission data as IrTxD
output
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 585 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2
IrRxINV
0
R/W
IrRx Data Invert
This bit specifies the inversion of the logic level in IrRxD
output. When inversion is done, the pulse width of high
state specified by the bits 6 to 4 becomes the pulse
width in low state.
0: Uses the IrRxD input data as it is as receive data.
1: Uses the inverted IrRxD input data as receive data.
1, 0

All 0
—
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. It should not be set to
0.
14.4
Operation in Asynchronous Mode
Figure 14.5 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. One frame consists
of a start bit (low level), transmit/receive data, a parity bit, and stop bits (high level). In
asynchronous serial communication, the communication line is usually held in the mark state
(high level). The SCI monitors the communication line, and when it goes to the space state (low
level), recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and
receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication. Both the transmitter and the
receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during
transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transmission and reception.
1
Serial
data
LSB
D0
0
Idle state
(mark state)
1
MSB
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
Start
bit
Transmit/receive data
1 bit
7 or 8 bits
D6
D7
0/1
Parity
bit
1 bit,
or none
1
1
Stop bit
1 or
2 bits
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
Figure 14.5 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 586 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.4.1
Data Transfer Format
Table 14.11 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in asynchronous mode. Any of 12
transfer formats can be selected according to the SMR setting. For details on the multiprocessor
bit, see section 14.5, Multiprocessor Communication Function.
Table 14.11 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)
SMR Settings
2
Serial Transfer Format and Frame Length
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
CHR
PE
MP
STOP
1
12
0
0
0
0
S
8-bit data
STOP
0
0
0
1
S
8-bit data
STOP STOP
0
1
0
0
S
8-bit data
P
STOP
0
1
0
1
S
8-bit data
P
STOP STOP
1
0
0
0
S
7-bit data
STOP
1
0
0
1
S
7-bit data
STOP STOP
1
1
0
0
S
7-bit data
P
STOP
1
1
0
1
S
7-bit data
P
STOP STOP
0
–
1
0
S
8-bit data
MPB STOP
0
–
1
1
S
8-bit data
MPB STOP STOP
1
–
1
0
S
7-bit data
MPB STOP
1
–
1
1
S
7-bit data
MPB STOP STOP
[Legend]
S:
Start bit
STOP: Stop bit
P:
Parity bit
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 587 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.4.2
Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, the SCI operates on a base clock with a frequency of 16 times* the bit rate.
In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the base clock, and performs
internal synchronization. Since receive data is sampled at the rising edge of the 8th pulse* of the
base clock, data is latched at the middle of each bit, as shown in figure 14.6. Thus the reception
margin in asynchronous mode is determined by formula (1) below.
M = | (0.5 –
1
) – (L – 0.5) F – | D – 0.5 | (1 + F ) | × 100
2N
N
[%]
... Formula (1)
[Legend]
M: Reception margin
N: Ratio of bit rate to clock (When ABCS = 0, N = 16. When ABCS = 1, N = 8.)
D: Duty cycle of clock (D = 0.5 to 1.0)
L: Frame length (L = 9 to 12)
F: Absolute value of clock frequency deviation
Assuming values of F = 0 and D = 0.5 in formula (1), the reception margin is determined by the
formula below.
M = ( 0.5 –
1
) × 100
2 × 16
[%] = 46.875%
However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed in
system design.
16 clocks
8 clocks
0
7
15 0
7
15 0
Internal basic
clock
Receive data
(RxD)
Start bit
D0
D1
Synchronization
sampling timing
Data sampling
timing
Figure 14.6 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode
Note: * This is an example when the ABCS bit in SEMR_2, 5, and 6 is 0. When the ABCS bit
is 1, a frequency of 8 times the bit rate is used as a base clock and receive data is
sampled at the rising edge of the 4th pulse of the base clock.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 588 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.4.3
Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input to
the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI's transfer clock, according to the setting of the C/A bit in
SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. When an external clock is input to the SCK pin, the
clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate (when ABCS = 0) and 8 times the bit rate (when
ABCS = 1).
In addition, when an external clock is specified, the average transfer rate or the base clock of
TMR_4 to TMR_7 can be selected by the ACS3 to ACS0 bits in SEMR_5 and SEMR_6.
When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK pin. The
frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the
rising edge of the clock is in the middle of the transmit data, as shown in figure 14.7.
SCK
TxD
0
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0/1
1
1
1 frame
Figure 14.7 Phase Relation between Output Clock and Transmit Data
(Asynchronous Mode)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 589 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.4.4
SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode)
Before transmitting and receiving data, first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize
the SCI as described in a sample flowchart in figure 14.8 When the operating mode, transfer
format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change. When
the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not
initialize the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or RDR. When the external clock is used in
asynchronous mode, the clock must be supplied even during initialization.
Start initialization
[1]
Set the bit in ICR for the corresponding
pin when receiving data or using an
external clock.
[2]
Set the clock selection in SCR.
Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and
MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0.
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
Set corresponding bit in ICR to 1
[1]
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR
(TE and RE bits are 0)
[2]
Set data transfer format in
SMR and SCMR
[3]
Set value in BRR
[4]
When the clock output is selected in
asynchronous mode, the clock is output
immediately after SCR settings are
made.
[3]
Set the data transfer format in SMR and
SCMR.
[4]
Write a value corresponding to the bit
rate to BRR. This step is not necessary
if an external clock is used.
[5]
Wait at least one bit interval, then set the
TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1. Also set
the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits.
Setting the TE and RE bits enables the
TxD and RxD pins to be used.
Wait
No
1-bit interval elapsed
Yes
Set TE or RE bit in
SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE,
and MPIE bits
[5]
<Initialization completion>
Figure 14.8 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 590 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.4.5
Serial Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode)
Figure 14.9 shows an example of the operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. In
transmission, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if it is cleared to 0, recognizes that data has been
written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TXI interrupt request is generated.
Because the TXI interrupt processing routine writes the next transmit data to TDR before
transmission of the current transmit data has finished, continuous transmission can be enabled.
3. Data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order: start bit, transmit data, parity bit or
multiprocessor bit (may be omitted depending on the format), and stop bit.
4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.
5. If the TDRE flag is 0, the next transmit data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is
sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started.
6. If the TDRE flag is 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the mark
state is entered in which 1 is output. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI
interrupt request is generated.
Figure 14.10 shows a sample flowchart for transmission in asynchronous mode.
1
Start
bit
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop Start
bit
bit
bit
D7
0/1
1
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop
bit
bit
D7
0/1
1
1
Idle state
(mark state)
TDRE
TEND
TXI interrupt
Data written to TDR and
request generated TDRE flag cleared to 0 in
TXI interrupt processing
routine
1 frame
TXI interrupt
request generated
TEI interrupt
request generated
Figure 14.9 Example of Operation for Transmission in Asynchronous Mode
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 591 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Initialization
[1]
Start transmission
[2]
Read TDRE flag in SSR
TDRE = 1
[2] SCI state check and transmit data
write:
Read SSR and check that the
TDRE flag is set to 1, then write
transmit data to TDR and clear the
TDRE flag to 0.
No
Yes
[3] Serial transmission continuation
procedure:
Write transmit data to TDR
and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
All data transmitted?
No
Yes
[3]
Read TEND flag in SSR
TEND = 1
No
Yes
Break output
Yes
[1] SCI initialization:
The TxD pin is automatically
designated as the transmit data
output pin. After the TE bit is set to
1, a 1 is output for a frame, and
transmission is enabled.
No
[4]
To continue serial transmission,
read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible,
then write data to TDR, and clear
the TDRE flag to 0. However, the
TDRE flag is checked and cleared
automatically when the DMAC or
DTC is initiated by a transmit data
empty interrupt (TXI) request and
writes data to TDR.
[4] Break output at the end of serial
transmission:
To output a break in serial
transmission, set DDR for the port
corresponding to the TxD pin to 1,
clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit
in SCR to 0.
Clear DR to 0 and
set DDR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.10 Example of Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 592 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.4.6
Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode)
Figure 14.11 shows an example of the operation for reception in asynchronous mode. In serial
reception, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI monitors the communication line, and if a start bit is detected, performs internal
synchronization, stores receive data in RSR, and checks the parity bit and stop bit.
2. If an overrun error (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag in SSR
is still set to 1) occurs, the ORER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this
time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR. The RDRF
flag remains to be set to 1.
3. If a parity error is detected, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to
RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated.
4. If a framing error (when the stop bit is 0) is detected, the FER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive
data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt
request is generated.
5. If reception finishes successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is
transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is
generated. Because the RXI interrupt processing routine reads the receive data transferred to
RDR before reception of the next receive data has finished, continuous reception can be
enabled.
1
Start
bit
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop Start
bit
bit
bit
D7
0/1
1
0
Data
D0
D1
Parity Stop
bit
bit
D7
0/1
0
1
Idle state
(mark state)
RDRF
FER
RXI interrupt
request
generated
RDR data read and RDRF
flag cleared to 0 in RXI
interrupt processing routine
ERI interrupt request
generated by framing
error
1 frame
Figure 14.11 Example of SCI Operation for Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 593 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Table 14.12 shows the states of the SSR status flags and receive data handling when a receive
error is detected. If a receive error is detected, the RDRF flag retains its state before receiving
data. Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the
ORER, FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 14.12 shows a sample
flowchart for serial data reception.
Table 14.12 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling
SSR Status Flag
RDRF*
ORER
FER
PER
Receive Data
Receive Error Type
1
1
0
0
Lost
Overrun error
0
0
1
0
Transferred to RDR
Framing error
0
0
0
1
Transferred to RDR
Parity error
1
1
1
0
Lost
Overrun error + framing error
1
1
0
1
Lost
Overrun error + parity error
0
0
1
1
Transferred to RDR
Framing error + parity error
1
1
1
1
Lost
Overrun error + framing error +
parity error
Note:
*
The RDRF flag retains the state it had before data reception.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 594 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Initialization
[1]
Start reception
[1] SCI initialization:
The RxD pin is automatically
designated as the receive data input
pin.
[2] [3] Receive error processing and break
detection:
[2]
If a receive error occurs, read the
ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to
identify the error. After performing the
appropriate error processing, ensure
Yes
PER ∨ FER ∨ ORER = 1
that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are
[3]
all cleared to 0. Reception cannot be
No
resumed if any of these flags are set to
Error processing
1. In the case of a framing error, a
(Continued on next page) break can be detected by reading the
value of the input port corresponding to
[4]
Read RDRF flag in SSR
the RxD pin.
Read ORER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR
No
[4] SCI state check and receive data read:
Read SSR and check that RDRF = 1,
then read the receive data in RDR and
clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of
the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be
identified by an RXI interrupt.
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR, and
clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received?
Yes
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
[5]
[5] Serial reception continuation procedure:
To continue serial reception, before the
stop bit for the current frame is
received, read the RDRF flag and RDR,
and clear the RDRF flag to 0.
However, the RDRF flag is cleared
automatically when the DMAC or DTC
is initiated by an RXI interrupt and
reads data from RDR.
<End>
Figure 14.12 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 595 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
[3]
Error processing
No
ORER = 1
Yes
Overrun error processing
No
FER = 1
Yes
Break?
Yes
No
Framing error processing
No
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
PER = 1
Yes
Parity error processing
Clear ORER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.12 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (2)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 596 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.5
Multiprocessor Communication Function
Use of the multiprocessor communication function enables data transfer to be performed among a
number of processors sharing communication lines by means of asynchronous serial
communication using the multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the
transfer data. When multiprocessor communication is carried out, each receiving station is
addressed by a unique ID code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles:
an ID transmission cycle which specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle for
the specified receiving station. The multiprocessor bit is used to differentiate between the ID
transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. If the multiprocessor bit is 1, the cycle is an ID
transmission cycle, and if the multiprocessor bit is 0, the cycle is a data transmission cycle. Figure
14.13 shows an example of inter-processor communication using the multiprocessor format. The
transmitting station first sends data which includes the ID code of the receiving station and a
multiprocessor bit set to 1. It then transmits transmit data added with a multiprocessor bit cleared
to 0. The receiving station skips data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent. When data with
a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its own ID. The
station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose ID does not match
continue to skip data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received.
The SCI uses the MPIE bit in SCR to implement this function. When the MPIE bit is set to 1,
transfer of receive data from RSR to RDR, error flag detection, and setting the SSR status flags,
RDRF, FER, and ORER in SSR to 1 are prohibited until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is
received. On reception of a receive character with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the MPB bit in SSR is
set to 1 and the MPIE bit is automatically cleared, thus normal reception is resumed. If the RIE bit
in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt is generated.
When the multiprocessor format is selected, the parity bit setting is invalid. All other bit settings
are the same as those in normal asynchronous mode. The clock used for multiprocessor
communication is the same as that in normal asynchronous mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 597 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Transmitting
station
Communication line
Receiving
station A
Receiving
station B
Receiving
station C
Receiving
station D
(ID = 01)
(ID = 02)
(ID = 03)
(ID = 04)
Serial
data
H'01
H'AA
(MPB = 1)
(MPB = 0)
ID transmission cycle = Data transmission cycle =
receiving station
Data transmission to
specification
receiving station specified by ID
[Legend]
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Figure 14.13 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format
(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 598 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.5.1
Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission
Figure 14.14 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. For an ID
transmission cycle, set the MPBT bit in SSR to 1 before transmission. For a data transmission
cycle, clear the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 before transmission. All other SCI operations are the same
as those in asynchronous mode.
Initialization
[1]
Start transmission
[2]
Read TDRE flag in SSR
TDRE = 1
[2] SCI status check and transmit
data write:
Read SSR and check that the
TDRE flag is set to 1, then write
transmit data to TDR. Set the
MPBT bit in SSR to 0 or 1.
Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0.
No
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR and
set MPBT bit in SSR
Clear TDRE flag to 0
All data transmitted?
No
[3]
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR
TEND = 1
No
Yes
Break output?
No
[1] SCI initialization:
The TxD pin is automatically
designated as the transmit data
output pin. After the TE bit is set
to 1, a 1 is output for one frame,
and transmission is enabled.
[4]
[3] Serial transmission continuation
procedure:
To continue serial transmission,
be sure to read 1 from the TDRE
flag to confirm that writing is
possible, then write data to TDR,
and then clear the TDRE flag to 0.
However, the TDRE flag is
checked and cleared
automatically when the DMAC or
DTC is initiated by a transmit
data empty interrupt (TXI)
request and writes data to TDR.
[4] Break output at the end of serial
transmission:
To output a break in serial
transmission, set DDR for the
port to 1, clear DR to 0, and then
clear the TE bit in SCR to 0.
Yes
Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.14 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 599 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.5.2
Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception
Figure 14.16 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data reception. If the MPIE bit in
SCR is set to 1, data is skipped until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent. On receiving data
with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the receive data is transferred to RDR. An RXI interrupt request is
generated at this time. All other SCI operations are the same as in asynchronous mode. Figure
14.15 shows an example of SCI operation for multiprocessor format reception.
1
Start
bit
0
Data (ID1)
MPB
D0
D1
D7
1
Stop
bit
Start
bit
1
0
Data (Data 1)
D0
D1
Stop
MPB bit
D7
0
1
1 Idle state
(mark state)
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
MPIE = 0
RXI interrupt
request
(multiprocessor
interrupt)
generated
RDR data read
and RDRF flag
cleared to 0 in
RXI interrupt
processing routine
If not this station's ID,
MPIE bit is set to 1
again
RXI interrupt request is
not generated, and RDR
retains its state
(a) Data does not match station's ID
1
Start
bit
0
Data (ID2)
D0
D1
Stop
MPB bit
D7
1
1
Start
bit
0
Data (Data 2)
D0
D1
D7
Stop
MPB bit
0
1
1 Idle state
(mark state)
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
MPIE = 0
Data 2
ID2
RXI interrupt
request
(multiprocessor
interrupt)
generated
RDR data read and
RDRF flag cleared
to 0 in RXI interrupt
processing routine
Matches this station's ID,
so reception continues, and
data is received in RXI
interrupt processing routine
MPIE bit set to 1
again
(b) Data matches station's ID
Figure 14.15 Example of SCI Operation for Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 600 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
[1] SCI initialization:
The RxD pin is automatically designated
as the receive data input pin.
[1]
Initialization
Start reception
Set MPIE bit in SCR to 1
[2] ID reception cycle:
Set the MPIE bit in SCR to 1.
[2]
[3] SCI state check, ID reception and
comparison:
Read SSR and check that the RDRF
flag is set to 1, then read the receive
data in RDR and compare it with this
station’s ID. If the data is not this
station’s ID, set the MPIE bit to 1 again,
and clear the RDRF flag to 0. If the data
is this station’s ID, clear the RDRF flag
to 0.
Read ORER and FER flags in SSR
Yes
FER ∨ ORER = 1
No
[3]
Read RDRF flag in SSR
No
RDRF = 1
[4] SCI state check and data reception:
Read SSR and check that the RDRF
flag is set to 1, then read the data in
RDR.
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
No
[5] Receive error processing and break
detection:
If a receive error occurs, read the ORER
and FER flags in SSR to identify the
error. After performing the appropriate
error processing, ensure that the ORER
and FER flags are both cleared to 0.
Reception cannot be resumed if either
of these flags is set to 1. In the case of a
framing error, a break can be detected
by reading the RxD pin value.
This station’s ID?
Yes
Read ORER and FER flags in SSR
FER ∨ ORER = 1
Yes
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
RDRF = 1
[4]
No
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
No
All data received?
Yes
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
[5]
Error processing
(Continued on
next page)
<End>
Figure 14.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 601 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
[5]
No
Error processing
ORER = 1
Yes
Overrun error processing
No
FER = 1
Yes
Break?
Yes
No
Framing error processing
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
Clear ORER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 602 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.6
Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode (SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4 only)
Figure 14.17 shows the general format for clocked synchronous communication. In clocked
synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received in synchronization with clock pulses. One
character in transfer data consists of 8-bit data. In data transmission, the SCI outputs data from one
falling edge of the synchronization clock to the next. In data reception, the SCI receives data in
synchronization with the rising edge of the synchronization clock. After 8-bit data is output, the
transmission line holds the MSB output state. In clocked synchronous mode, no parity bit or
multiprocessor bit is added. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units,
enabling full-duplex communication by use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the
receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that the next transmit data can be written during
transmission or the previous receive data can be read during reception, enabling continuous data
transfer.
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
*
*
Synchronization
clock
LSB
Bit 0
Serial data
MSB
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Don't care
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Don't care
Note: * Holds a high level except during continuous transfer.
Figure 14.17 Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication (LSB-First)
14.6.1
Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external
synchronization clock input at the SCK pin can be selected, according to the setting of the CKE1
and CKE0 bits in SCR. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the synchronization clock
is output from the SCK pin. Eight synchronization clock pulses are output in the transfer of one
character, and when no transfer is performed the clock is fixed high. Note that in the case of
reception only, the synchronization clock is output until an overrun error occurs or until the RE bit
is cleared to 0. (Setting is prohibited in SCI_5 and SCI_6.)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 603 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.6.2
SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4 only)
Before transmitting and receiving data, first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize
the SCI as described in a sample flowchart in figure 14.18. When the operating mode, transfer
format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change. When
the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1. However, clearing the RE bit to 0 does not
initialize the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or RDR.
Start initialization
[1]
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
Set the bit in ICR for the corresponding
pin when receiving data or using an
external clock.
Set corresponding bit in ICR to 1
[1]
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR
(TE and RE bits are 0)
[2] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure
to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE,
and bits TE and RE, to 0.
[2]
[3] Set the data transfer format in SMR and
SCMR.
Set data transfer format in
SMR and SCMR
[3]
Set value in BRR
[4]
Wait
1-bit interval elapsed?
No
[4] Write a value corresponding to the bit
rate to BRR. This step is not necessary
if an external clock is used.
[5] Wait at least one bit interval, then set
the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1.
Also set the RIE, TIE TEIE, and MPIE
bits. Setting the TE and RE bits enables
the TxD and RxD pins to be used.
Yes
Set TE or RE bit in SCR to 1, and
set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits
[5]
<Transfer start>
Note: In simultaneous transmit and receive operations, the TE and RE bits should both
be cleared to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously.
Figure 14.18 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 604 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.6.3
Serial Data Transmission (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4 only)
Figure 14.19 shows an example of the operation for transmission in clocked synchronous mode. In
transmission, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been written to
TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TXI interrupt request is generated.
Because the TXI interrupt processing routine writes the next transmit data to TDR before
transmission of the current transmit data has finished, continuous transmission can be enabled.
3. 8-bit data is sent from the TxD pin synchronized with the output clock when clock output
mode has been specified and synchronized with the input clock when use of an external clock
has been specified.
4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the last bit.
5. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the next transmit data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and
serial transmission of the next frame is started.
6. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, and the TxD pin retains the
output state of the last bit. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request
is generated. The SCK pin is fixed high.
Figure 14.20 shows a sample flowchart for serial data transmission. Even if the TDRE flag is
cleared to 0, transmission will not start while a receive error flag (ORER, FER, or PER) is set to 1.
Make sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting transmission. Note that clearing the
RE bit to 0 does not clear the receive error flags.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 605 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Transfer direction
Synchronization
clock
Serial data
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
TDRE
TEND
TXI interrupt
request generated
Data written to TDR
and TDRE flag cleared
to 0 in TXI interrupt
processing routine
TXI interrupt
request generated
TEI interrupt request
generated
1 frame
Figure 14.19 Example of Operation for Transmission in Clocked Synchronous Mode
[1]
Initialization
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR
TDRE = 1
[2]
No
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR and
clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
All data transmitted
No
Yes
[3]
[1] SCI initialization:
The TxD pin is automatically
designated as the transmit data output
pin.
[2] SCI state check and transmit data
write:
Read SSR and check that the TDRE
flag is set to 1, then write transmit data
to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0.
[3] Serial transmission continuation
procedure:
To continue serial transmission, be
sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible, then
write data to TDR, and then clear the
TDRE flag to 0. However, the TDRE
flag is checked and cleared
automatically when the DMAC or
DTC is initiated by a transmit data
empty interrupt (TXI) request and
writes data to TDR.
Read TEND flag in SSR
TEND = 1
No
Yes
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.20 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 606 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.6.4
Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) (SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4 only)
Figure 14.21 shows an example of SCI operation for reception in clocked synchronous mode. In
serial reception, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI performs internal initialization in synchronization with a synchronization clock input
or output, starts receiving data, and stores the receive data in RSR.
2. If an overrun error (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag in SSR
is still set to 1) occurs, the ORER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this
time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR. The RDRF
flag remains to be set to 1.
3. If reception finishes successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is
transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is
generated. Because the RXI interrupt processing routine reads the receive data transferred to
RDR before reception of the next receive data has finished, continuous reception can be
enabled.
Synchronization
clock
Serial data
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
RDRF
ORER
RXI interrupt
request
generated
RDR data read and
RDRF flag cleared
to 0 in RXI interrupt
processing routine
RXI interrupt
request generated
ERI interrupt request
generated by overrun
error
1 frame
Figure 14.21 Example of Operation for Reception in Clocked Synchronous Mode
Transfer cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the ORER,
FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 14.22 shows a sample flowchart
for serial data reception.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 607 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
[1]
Initialization
Start reception
[2]
Read ORER flag in SSR
Yes
ORER = 1
No
[3]
Error processing
[1] SCI initialization:
The RxD pin is automatically
designated as the receive data input
pin.
[2] [3] Receive error processing:
If a receive error occurs, read the
ORER flag in SSR, and after
performing the appropriate error
processing, clear the ORER flag to 0.
Reception cannot be resumed if the
ORER flag is set to 1.
(Continued below) [4] SCI state check and receive data
read:
[4]
Read SSR and check that the RDRF
flag is set to 1, then read the receive
RDRF = 1
data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag
to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from
Yes
0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI
interrupt.
Read receive data in RDR and
clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
[5] Serial reception continuation
Read RDRF flag in SSR
No
No
All data received
Yes
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
[3]
Error processing
[5]
procedure:
To continue serial reception, before
the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is
received, reading the RDRF flag,
reading RDR, and clearing the RDRF
flag to 0 should be finished. However,
the RDRF flag is cleared automatically
when the DMAC or DTC is initiated by
a receive data full interrupt (RXI) and
reads data from RDR.
Overrun error processing
Clear ORER flag in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.22 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart
14.6.5
Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Clocked Synchronous
Mode) (SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4 only)
Figure 14.23 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations.
After initializing the SCI, the following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data
transmit and receive operations. To switch from transmit mode to simultaneous transmit and
receive mode, after checking that the SCI has finished transmission and the TDRE and TEND
flags are set to 1, clear the TE bit to 0. Then simultaneously set both the TE and RE bits to 1 with
a single instruction. To switch from receive mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode,
after checking that the SCI has finished reception, clear the RE bit to 0. Then after checking that
the RDRF bit and receive error flags (ORER, FER, and PER) are cleared to 0, simultaneously set
both the TE and RE bits to 1 with a single instruction.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 608 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
[1] SCI initialization:
The TxD pin is designated as the
transmit data output pin, and the
RxD pin is designated as the
receive data input pin, enabling
simultaneous transmit and receive
operations.
[1]
Initialization
Start transmission/reception
Read TDRE flag in SSR
No
[2]
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR and
clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
Read ORER flag in SSR
ORER = 1
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
[3]
Error processing
[4]
[2] SCI state check and transmit data
write:
Read SSR and check that the
TDRE flag is set to 1, then write
transmit data to TDR and clear the
TDRE flag to 0. Transition of the
TDRE flag from 0 to 1 can also be
identified by a TXI interrupt.
[3] Receive error processing:
If a receive error occurs, read the
ORER flag in SSR, and after
performing the appropriate error
processing, clear the ORER flag to
0. Reception cannot be resumed if
the ORER flag is set to 1.
[4] SCI state check and receive data
read:
Read SSR and check that the
RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the
receive data in RDR and clear the
RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the
RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be
identified by an RXI interrupt.
[5] Serial transmission/reception
continuation procedure:
To continue serial transmission/
Read receive data in RDR, and
reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of
clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
the current frame is received, finish
reading the RDRF flag, reading
RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag to
No
0. Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of
All data received?
[5]
the current frame is transmitted,
read 1 from the TDRE flag to
Yes
confirm that writing is possible.
Then write data to TDR and clear
the TDRE flag to 0.
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
However, the TDRE flag is checked
and cleared automatically when the
DMAC or DTC is initiated by a
<End>
transmit data empty interrupt (TXI)
request and writes data to TDR.
Similarly, the RDRF flag is cleared
Note: When switching from transmit or receive operation to
automatically when the DMAC or
simultaneous transmit and receive operations, first clear
DTC is initiated by a receive data
the TE bit and RE bit to 0, then set both these bits to 1
full interrupt (RXI) and reads data
simultaneously.
from RDR.
Yes
Figure 14.23 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmission and Reception
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 609 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.7
Operation in Smart Card Interface Mode
The SCI supports the smart card interface, supporting the ISO/IEC 7816-3 (Identification Card)
standard, as an extended serial communication interface function. Smart card interface mode can
be selected using the appropriate register.
14.7.1
Sample Connection
Figure 14.24 shows a sample connection between the smart card and this LSI. As in the figure,
since this LSI communicates with the smart card using a single transmission line, interconnect the
TxD and RxD pins and pull up the data transmission line to VCC using a resistor. Setting the RE
and TE bits to 1 with the smart card not connected enables closed transmission/reception allowing
self diagnosis. To supply the smart card with the clock pulses generated by the SCI, input the SCK
pin output to the CLK pin of the smart card. A reset signal can be supplied via the output port of
this LSI. (In SCI_5 and SCI-6, the clock generated in SCI cannot be provided to smart cards.)
VCC
TxD
RxD
SCK
Rx (port)
This LSI
Data line
Clock line
Reset line
I/O
CLK
RST
Smart card
Main unit of the device
to be connected
Figure 14.24 Pin Connection for Smart Card Interface
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 610 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.7.2
Data Format (Except in Block Transfer Mode)
Figure 14.25 shows the data transfer formats in smart card interface mode.
• One frame contains 8-bit data and a parity bit in asynchronous mode.
• During transmission, at least 2 etu (elementary time unit: time required for transferring one bit)
is secured as a guard time after the end of the parity bit before the start of the next frame.
• If a parity error is detected during reception, a low error signal is output for 1 etu after 10.5 etu
has passed from the start bit.
• If an error signal is sampled during transmission, the same data is automatically re-transmitted
after at least 2 etu.
In normal transmission/reception
Ds
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Dp
D7
Dp
Output from the transmitting station
When a parity error is generated
Ds
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
DE
Output from the transmitting station
[Legend]
Ds:
D0 to D7:
Dp:
DE:
Output from
the receiving station
Start bit
Data bits
Parity bit
Error signal
Figure 14.25 Data Formats in Normal Smart Card Interface Mode
For communication with the smart cards of the direct convention and inverse convention types,
follow the procedure below.
(Z)
A
Z
Z
A
Z
Z
Z
A
A
Z
Ds
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Dp
(Z) state
Figure 14.26 Direct Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 0)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 611 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
For the direct convention type, logic levels 1 and 0 correspond to states Z and A, respectively, and
data is transferred with LSB-first as the start character, as shown in figure 14.26. Therefore, data
in the start character in the figure is H'3B. When using the direct convention type, write 0 to both
the SDIR and SINV bits in SCMR. Write 0 to the O/E bit in SMR in order to use even parity,
which is prescribed by the smart card standard.
(Z)
A
Z
Z
A
A
A
A
A
A
Z
Ds
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Dp
(Z) state
Figure 14.27 Inverse Convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E = 1)
For the inverse convention type, logic levels 1 and 0 correspond to states A and Z, respectively
and data is transferred with MSB-first as the start character, as shown in figure 14.27. Therefore,
data in the start character in the figure is H'3F. When using the inverse convention type, write 1 to
both the SDIR and SINV bits in SCMR. The parity bit is logic level 0 to produce even parity,
which is prescribed by the smart card standard, and corresponds to state Z. Since the SNIV bit of
this LSI only inverts data bits D7 to D0, write 1 to the O/E bit in SMR to invert the parity bit in
both transmission and reception.
14.7.3
Block Transfer Mode
Block transfer mode is different from normal smart card interface mode in the following respects.
• Even if a parity error is detected during reception, no error signal is output. Since the PER bit
in SSR is set by error detection, clear the PER bit before receiving the parity bit of the next
frame.
• During transmission, at least 1 etu is secured as a guard time after the end of the parity bit
before the start of the next frame.
• Since the same data is not re-transmitted during transmission, the TEND flag is set 11.5 etu
after transmission start.
• Although the ERS flag in block transfer mode displays the error signal status as in normal
smart card interface mode, the flag is always read as 0 because no error signal is transferred.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 612 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.7.4
Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin
Only the internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator can be used as a transfer
clock in smart card interface mode. In this mode, the SCI can operate on a base clock with a
frequency of 32, 64, 372, or 256 times the bit rate according to the BCP1 and BCP0 bit settings
(the frequency is always 16 times the bit rate in normal asynchronous mode). At reception, the
falling edge of the start bit is sampled using the base clock in order to perform internal
synchronization. Receive data is sampled on the 16th, 32nd, 186th and 128th rising edges of the
base clock so that it can be latched at the middle of each bit as shown in figure 14.28. The
reception margin here is determined by the following formula.
M = | (0.5 –
1
) – (L – 0.5) F – | D – 0.5 | (1 + F ) | × 100%
2N
N
[Legend]
M: Reception margin (%)
N: Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 32, 64, 372, 256)
D: Duty cycle of clock (D = 0 to 1.0)
L: Frame length (L = 10)
F: Absolute value of clock frequency deviation
Assuming values of F = 0, D = 0.5, and N = 372 in the above formula, the reception margin is
determined by the formula below.
M=
( 0.5 –
1
) × 100% = 49.866%
2 × 372
372 clock cycles
186 clock
cycles
0
185
371 0
185
371 0
Internal
basic clock
Receive data
(RxD)
Start bit
D0
D1
Synchronization
sampling timing
Data sampling
timing
Figure 14.28 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Interface Mode
(When Clock Frequency is 372 Times the Bit Rate)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 613 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.7.5
Initialization
Before transmitting and receiving data, initialize the SCI using the following procedure.
Initialization is also necessary before switching from transmission to reception and vice versa.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0.
Set the ICR bit of the corresponding pin to 1.
Clear the error flags ERS, PER, and ORER in SSR to 0.
Set the GM, BLK, O/E, BCP1, BCP0, CKS1, and CKS0 bits in SMR appropriately. Also set
the PE bit to 1.
Set the SMIF, SDIR, and SINV bits in SCMR appropriately. When the DDR corresponding to
the TxD pin is cleared to 0, the TxD and RxD pins are changed from port pins to SCI pins,
placing the pins into high impedance state.
Set the value corresponding to the bit rate in BRR.
Set the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR appropriately. Clear the TIE, RIE, TE, RE, MPIE, and
TEIE bits to 0 simultaneously.
When the CKE0 bit is set to 1, the SCK pin is allowed to output clock pulses.
Set the TIE, RIE, TE, and RE bits in SCR appropriately after waiting for at least a 1-bit
interval. Setting the TE and RE bits to 1 simultaneously is prohibited except for self diagnosis.
To switch from reception to transmission, first verify that reception has completed, then initialize
the SCI. At the end of initialization, RE and TE should be set to 0 and 1, respectively. Reception
completion can be verified by reading the RDRF, PER, or ORER flag. To switch from
transmission to reception, first verify that transmission has completed, then initialize the SCI. At
the end of initialization, TE and RE should be set to 0 and 1, respectively. Transmission
completion can be verified by reading the TEND flag.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 614 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.7.6
Data Transmission (Except in Block Transfer Mode)
Data transmission in smart card interface mode (except in block transfer mode) is different from
that in normal serial communication interface mode in that an error signal is sampled and data can
be re-transmitted. Figure 14.29 shows the data re-transfer operation during transmission.
1. If an error signal from the receiving end is sampled after one frame of data has been
transmitted, the ERS bit in SSR is set to 1. Here, an ERI interrupt request is generated if the
RIE bit in SCR is set to 1. Clear the ERS bit to 0 before the next parity bit is sampled.
2. For the frame in which an error signal is received, the TEND bit in SSR is not set to 1. Data is
re-transferred from TDR to TSR allowing automatic data retransmission.
3. If no error signal is returned from the receiving end, the ERS bit in SSR is not set to 1.
4. In this case, one frame of data is determined to have been transmitted including re-transfer, and
the TEND bit in SSR is set to 1. Here, a TXI interrupt request is generated if the TIE bit in
SCR is set to 1. Writing transmit data to TDR starts transmission of the next data.
Figure 14.31 shows a sample flowchart for transmission. All the processing steps are
automatically performed using a TXI interrupt request to activate the DTC or DMAC. In
transmission, the TEND and TDRE flags in SSR are simultaneously set to 1, thus generating a
TXI interrupt request if the TIE bit in SCR has been set to 1. This activates the DTC or DMAC by
a TXI request thus allowing transfer of transmit data if the TXI interrupt request is specified as a
source of DTC or DMAC activation beforehand. The TDRE and TEND flags are automatically
cleared to 0 at data transfer by the DTC or DMAC. If an error occurs, the SCI automatically retransmits the same data. During re-transmission, TEND remains as 0, thus not activating the DTC
or DMAC. Therefore, the SCI and DTC or DMAC automatically transmit the specified number of
bytes, including re-transmission in the case of error occurrence. However, the ERS flag is not
automatically cleared; the ERS flag must be cleared by previously setting the RIE bit to 1 to
enable an ERI interrupt request to be generated at error occurrence.
When transmitting/receiving data using the DTC or DMAC, be sure to set and enable the DTC or
DMAC prior to making SCI settings. For DTC or DMAC settings, see section 8, Data Transfer
Controller (DTC) and section 7, DMA Controller (DMAC).
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 615 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
(n + 1) th
transfer frame
Retransfer frame
nth transfer frame
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp
(DE)
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4
TDRE
Transfer from TDR to TSR
Transfer from TDR to TSR
Transfer from TDR to TSR
TEND
[2]
[4]
FER/ERS
[1]
[3]
Figure 14.29 Data Re-Transfer Operation in SCI Transmission Mode
Note that the TEND flag is set in different timings depending on the GM bit setting in SMR.
Figure 14.30 shows the TEND flag set timing.
Ds
I/O data
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Dp
DE
Guard time
TXI
(TEND interrupt)
12.5 etu
GM = 0
11.0 etu
GM = 1
[Legend]
Ds:
D0 to D7:
Dp:
DE:
Start bit
Data bits
Parity bit
Error signal
Figure 14.30 TEND Flag Set Timing during Transmission
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 616 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Start
Initialization
Start transmission
ERS = 0?
No
Yes
Error processing
No
TEND = 1?
Yes
Write data to TDR and clear
TDRE flag in SSR to 0
No
All data transmitted?
Yes
No
ERS = 0?
Yes
Error processing
No
TEND = 1?
Yes
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
End
Figure 14.31 Sample Transmission Flowchart
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 617 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.7.7
Serial Data Reception (Except in Block Transfer Mode)
Data reception in smart card interface mode is similar to that in normal serial communication
interface mode. Figure 14.32 shows the data re-transfer operation during reception.
1. If a parity error is detected in receive data, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1. Here, an ERI
interrupt request is generated if the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1. Clear the PER bit to 0 before the
next parity bit is sampled.
2. For the frame in which a parity error is detected, the RDRF bit in SSR is not set to 1.
3. If no parity error is detected, the PER bit in SSR is not set to 1.
4. In this case, data is determined to have been received successfully, and the RDRF bit in SSR is
set to 1. Here, an RXI interrupt request is generated if the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1.
Figure 14.33 shows a sample flowchart for reception. All the processing steps are automatically
performed using an RXI interrupt request to activate the DTC or DMAC. In reception, setting the
RIE bit to 1 allows an RXI interrupt request to be generated when the RDRF flag is set to 1. This
activates the DTC or DMAC by an RXI request thus allowing transfer of receive data if the RXI
interrupt request is specified as a source of DTC or DMAC activation beforehand. The RDRF flag
is automatically cleared to 0 at data transfer by the DTC or DMAC. If an error occurs during
reception, i.e., either the ORER or PER flag is set to 1, a transmit/receive error interrupt (ERI)
request is generated and the error flag must be cleared. If an error occurs, the DTC or DMAC is
not activated and receive data is skipped, therefore, the number of bytes of receive data specified
in the DTC or DMAC is transferred. Even if a parity error occurs and the PER bit is set to 1 in
reception, receive data is transferred to RDR, thus allowing the data to be read.
Note: For operations in block transfer mode, see section 14.4, Operation in Asynchronous Mode.
(n + 1) th
transfer frame
Retransfer frame
nth transfer frame
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp
(DE)
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4
RDRF
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
PER
Figure 14.32 Data Re-Transfer Operation in SCI Reception Mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 618 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Start
Initialization
Start reception
ORER = 0
and PER = 0?
Yes
No
No
Error processing
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read data from RDR and
clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0
No
All data received?
Yes
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
Figure 14.33 Sample Reception Flowchart
14.7.8
Clock Output Control
Clock output can be fixed using the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR when the GM bit in SMR is set
to 1. Specifically, the minimum width of a clock pulse can be specified.
Figure 14.34 shows an example of clock output fixing timing when the CKE0 bit is controlled
with GM = 1 and CKE1 = 0.
CKE0
SCK
Given pulse width
Given pulse width
Figure 14.34 Clock Output Fixing Timing
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 619 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
At power-on and transitions to/from software standby mode, use the following procedure to secure
the appropriate clock duty cycle.
• At power-on
To secure the appropriate clock duty cycle simultaneously with power-on, use the following
procedure.
1. Initially, port input is enabled in the high-impedance state. To fix the potential level, use a
pull-up or pull-down resistor.
2. Fix the SCK pin to the specified output using the CKE1 bit in SCR.
3. Set SMR and SCMR to enable smart card interface mode.
Set the CKE0 bit in SCR to 1 to start clock output.
• At mode switching
 At transition from smart card interface mode to software standby mode
1. Set the data register (DR) and data direction register (DDR) corresponding to the SCK
pin to the values for the output fixed state in software standby mode. (SCI_0, 1, 2, and
4 only)
2. Write 0 to the TE and RE bits in SCR to stop transmission/reception. Simultaneously,
set the CKE1 bit to the value for the output fixed state in software standby mode.
3. Write 0 to the CKE0 bit in SCR to stop the clock.
4. Wait for one cycle of the serial clock. In the mean time, the clock output is fixed to the
specified level with the duty cycle retained.
5. Make the transition to software standby mode.
 At transition from smart card interface mode to software standby mode
1. Clear software standby mode.
2. Write 1 to the CKE0 bit in SCR to start clock output. A clock signal with the
appropriate duty cycle is then generated.
Software
standby
Normal operation
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5]
Normal operation
[6]
[7]
Figure 14.35 Clock Stop and Restart Procedure
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 620 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.8
IrDA Operation
If the IrDA function is enabled using the IrE bit in IrCR, the TxD5 and RxD5 pins in SCI_5 are
allowed to encode and decode the waveform based on the IrDA Specifications version 1.0
(function as the IrTxD and IrRxD pins). Connecting these pins to the infrared data transceiver
achieves infrared data communication based on the system defined by the IrDA Specifications
version 1.0.
In the system defined by the IrDA Specifications version 1.0, communication is started at a
transfer rate of 9600 bps, which can be modified later as required. Since the IrDA interface
provided by this LSI does not incorporate the capability of automatic modification of the transfer
rate, the transfer rate must be modified through programming.
Figure 14.36 is the IrDA block diagram.
IrDA
TxD5/IrTxD
Pulse encoder
RxD5/IrRxD
Pulse decoder
SCI5
TxD
RxD
IrCR
Figure 14.36 IrDA Block Diagram
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 621 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
(1)
Transmission
During transmission, the output signals from the SCI (UART frames) are converted to IR frames
using the IrDA interface (see figure 14.37).
For serial data of level 0, a high-level pulse having a width of 3/16 of the bit rate (1-bit interval) is
output (initial setting). The high-level pulse can be selected using the IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 bits in
IrCR.
The high-level pulse width is defined to be 1.41 µs at minimum and (3/16 + 2.5%) × bit rate or
(3/16 × bit rate) +1.08 µs at maximum. For example, when the frequency of system clock φ is 20
MHz, a high-level pulse width of 1.6 µs can be specified because it is the smallest value in the
range greater than 1.41 µs.
For serial data of level 1, no pulses are output.
UART frame
Data
Start
bit
0
1
0
1
0
0
Stop
bit
1
Transmission
1
0
1
Reception
IR frame
Data
Start
bit
0
1
Bit
cycle
0
1
0
0
Stop
bit
1
1
0
1
Pulse width is 1.6 µs to
3/16 bit cycle
Figure 14.37 IrDA Transmission and Reception
(2)
Reception
During reception, IR frames are converted to UART frames using the IrDA interface before
inputting to SCI. 0 is output when the high level pulse is detected while 1 is output when no pulse
is detected during one bit period. Note that a pulse shorter than the minimum pulse width of 1.41
µs is also regarded as a 0 signal.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 622 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
(3)
High-Level Pulse Width Selection
Table 14.13 shows possible settings for bits IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 (minimum pulse width), and this
LSI's operating frequencies and bit rates, for making the pulse width shorter than 3/16 times the bit
rate in transmission.
Table 14.13 IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 Bit Settings
Bit Rate (bps) (Upper Row)/Bit Interval × 3/16 (µs) (Lower Row)
Operating
Frequency
2400
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Pφ (MHz)
78.13
19.53
9.77
4.88
3.26
1.63
7.3728
100
100
100
100
100
100
8
100
100
100
100
100
100
9.8304
100
100
100
100
100
100
10
100
100
100
100
100
100
12
101
101
101
101
101
101
12.288
101
101
101
101
101
101
14
101
101
101
101
101
101
14.7456
101
101
101
101
101
101
16
101
101
101
101
101
101
17.2032
101
101
101
101
101
101
18
101
101
101
101
101
101
19.6608
101
101
101
101
101
101
20
101
101
101
101
101
101
25
110
110
110
110
110
110
30
110
110
110
110
110
110
33
110
110
110
110
110
110
35
110
110
110
110
110
110
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 623 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.9
Interrupt Sources
14.9.1
Interrupts in Normal Serial Communication Interface Mode
Table 14.14 shows the interrupt sources in normal serial communication interface mode. A
different interrupt vector is assigned to each interrupt source, and individual interrupt sources can
be enabled or disabled using the enable bits in SCR.
When the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated. When the TEND flag
in SSR is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is generated. A TXI interrupt request can activate the
DTC or DMAC to allow data transfer. The TDRE flag is automatically cleared to 0 at data transfer
by the DTC or DMAC.
When the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated. When the ORER,
PER, or FER flag in SSR is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated. An RXI interrupt can
activate the DTC or DMAC to allow data transfer. The RDRF flag is automatically cleared to 0 at
data transfer by the DTC or DMAC.
A TEI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 while the TEIE bit is set to 1. If a TEI
interrupt and a TXI interrupt are requested simultaneously, the TXI interrupt has priority for
acceptance. However, note that if the TDRE and TEND flags are cleared to 0 simultaneously by
the TXI interrupt processing routine, the SCI cannot branch to the TEI interrupt processing routine
later.
Note that the priority order for interrupts is different between the group of SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4 and
the group of SCI_5 and SCI_6.
Table 14.14 SCI Interrupt Sources (SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4)
Name
Interrupt Source
Interrupt Flag
DTC Activation
DMAC Activation
Priority
ERI
Receive error
ORER, FER, or PER
Not possible
Not possible
High
RXI
Receive data full
RDRF
Possible
Possible
TXI
Transmit data empty TDRE
Possible
Possible
TEI
Transmit end
Not possible
Not possible
TEND
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 624 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Low
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Table 14.15 SCI Interrupt Sources (SCI_5 and SCI_6)
Name
Interrupt Source
Interrupt Flag
DTC Activation
RXI
Receive data full
RDRF
TXI
Transmit data empty TDRE
ERI
Receive error
TEI
Transmit end
14.9.2
DMAC Activation
Priority
Not possible
Possible
High
Not possible
Possible
ORER, FER, or PER
Not possible
Not possible
TEND
Not possible
Not possible
Low
Interrupts in Smart Card Interface Mode
Table 14.16 shows the interrupt sources in smart card interface mode. A transmit end (TEI)
interrupt request cannot be used in this mode.
Note that the priority order for interrupts is different between the group of SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4 and
the group of SCI_5 and SCI_6.
Table 14.16 SCI Interrupt Sources (SCI_0, 1, 2, and 4)
Name
Interrupt Source
ERI
Interrupt Flag
DTC Activation
DMAC Activation
Priority
Receive error or error ORER, PER, or ERS
signal detection
Not possible
Not possible
High
RXI
Receive data full
RDRF
Possible
Possible
TXI
Transmit data empty
TEND
Possible
Possible
Low
Table 14.17 SCI Interrupt Sources (SCI_5 and SCI_6)
Name
Interrupt Source
Interrupt Flag
DTC Activation
DMAC Activation
Priority
RXI
Receive data full
RDRF
Not possible
Possible
High
TXI
Transmit data empty
TDRE
Not possible
Possible
ERI
Receive error or error ORER, PER, or ERS
signal detection
Not possible
Not possible
Low
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 625 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Data transmission/reception using the DTC or DMAC is also possible in smart card interface
mode, similar to in the normal SCI mode. In transmission, the TEND and TDRE flags in SSR are
simultaneously set to 1, thus generating a TXI interrupt. This activates the DTC or DMAC by a
TXI request thus allowing transfer of transmit data if the TXI request is specified as a source of
DTC or DMAC activation beforehand. The TDRE and TEND flags are automatically cleared to 0
at data transfer by the DTC or DMAC. If an error occurs, the SCI automatically re-transmits the
same data. During re-transmission, the TEND flag remains as 0, thus not activating the DTC or
DMAC. Therefore, the SCI and DTC or DMAC automatically transmit the specified number of
bytes, including re-transmission in the case of error occurrence. However, the ERS flag in SSR,
which is set at error occurrence, is not automatically cleared; the ERS flag must be cleared by
previously setting the RIE bit in SCR to 1 to enable an ERI interrupt request to be generated at
error occurrence.
When transmitting/receiving data using the DTC or DMAC, be sure to set and enable the DTC or
DMAC prior to making SCI settings. For DTC or DMAC settings, see section 8, Data Transfer
Controller (DTC) and section 7, DMA Controller (DMAC).
In reception, an RXI interrupt request is generated when the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1. This
activates the DTC or DMAC by an RXI request thus allowing transfer of receive data if the RXI
request is specified as a source of DTC or DMAC activation beforehand. The RDRF flag is
automatically cleared to 0 at data transfer by the DTC or DMAC. If an error occurs, the RDRF
flag is not set but the error flag is set. Therefore, the DTC or DMAC is not activated and an ERI
interrupt request is issued to the CPU instead; the error flag must be cleared.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 626 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.10
Usage Notes
14.10.1 Module Stop Mode Setting
Operation of the SCI can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial
setting is for operation of the SCI to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop
mode. For details, see section 22, Power-Down Modes.
14.10.2 Break Detection and Processing
When framing error detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value
directly. In a break, the input from the RxD pin becomes all 0s, and so the FER flag is set, and the
PER flag may also be set. Note that, since the SCI continues the receive operation even after
receiving a break, even if the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again.
14.10.3 Mark State and Break Detection
When the TE bit is 0, the TxD pin is used as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) and
level are determined by DR and DDR. This can be used to set the TxD pin to mark state (high
level) or send a break during serial data transmission. To maintain the communication line in mark
state (the state of 1) until TE is set to 1, set both DDR and DR to 1. Since the TE bit is cleared to 0
at this point, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 1 is output from the TxD pin. To send a break
during serial transmission, first set DDR to 1 and DR to 0, and then clear the TE bit to 0. When the
TE bit is cleared to 0, the transmitter is initialized regardless of the current transmission state, the
TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 0 is output from the TxD pin.
14.10.4 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only)
Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (ORER, FER, or RER) is set to 1, even if
the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting
transmission. Note also that the receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is
cleared to 0.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 627 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.10.5 Relation between Writing to TDR and TDRE Flag
The TDRE flag in SSR is a status flag which indicates that transmit data has been transferred from
TDR to TSR. When the SCI transfers data from TDR to TSR, the TDRE flag is set to 1.
Data can be written to TDR irrespective of the TDRE flag status. However, if new data is written
to TDR when the TDRE flag is 0, that is, when the previous data has not been transferred to TSR
yet, the previous data in TDR is lost. Be sure to write transmit data to TDR after verifying that the
TDRE flag is set to 1.
14.10.6 Restrictions on Using DTC or DMAC
• When the external clock source is used as a synchronization clock, update TDR by the DMAC
or DTC and wait for at least five Pφ clock cycles before allowing the transmit clock to be
input. If the transmit clock is input within four clock cycles after TDR modification, the SCI
may malfunction (see figure 14.38).
• When using the DMAC or DTC to read RDR, be sure to set the receive end interrupt (RXI) as
the DTC or DMAC activation source.
SCK
t
TDRE
LSB
Serial data
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Note: When external clock is supplied, t must be more than four clock cycles.
Figure 14.38 Sample Transmission using DTC in Clocked Synchronous Mode
• The DTC is not activated by the RXI or TXI request by SCI_5 or SCI6.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 628 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.10.7 SCI Operations during Mode Transitions
Transmission: Before making the transition to module stop mode or software standby mode, stop
the transmit operations (TE = TIE = TEIE = 0). TSR, TDR, and SSR are reset. The states of the
output pins during module stop mode or software standby mode depend on the port settings, and
the pins output a high-level signal after mode cancellation. If the transition is made during data
transmission, the data being transmitted will be undefined.
To transmit data in the same transmission mode after mode cancellation, set the TE bit to 1, read
SSR, write to TDR, clear TDRE in this order, and then start transmission. To transmit data in a
different transmission mode, initialize the SCI first.
For using the IrDA function, set the IrE bit in addition to setting the TE bit.
Figure 14.39 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during transmission. Figures 14.40 and
14.41 show the port pin states during mode transition.
Before making the transition from the transmission mode using DTC transfer to module stop mode
or software standby mode, stop all transmit operations (TE = TIE = TEIE = 0). Setting the TE and
TIE bits to 1 after mode cancellation sets the TXI flag to start transmission using the DTC.
Reception: Before making the transition to module stop mode or software standby mode, stop the
receive operations (RE = 0). RSR, RDR, and SSR are reset. If transition is made during data
reception, the data being received will be invalid.
To receive data in the same reception mode after mode cancellation, set the RE bit to 1, and then
start reception. To receive data in a different reception mode, initialize the SCI first.
For using the IrDA function, set the IrE bit in addition to setting the RE bit.
Figure 14.42 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during reception.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 629 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Transmission
No
All data transmitted?
[1]
[1] Data being transmitted is lost
halfway. Data can be normally
transmitted from the CPU by
setting the TE bit to 1, reading
SSR, writing to TDR, and
clearing the TDRE bit to 0 after
clearing software standby mode;
however, if the DTC has been
activated, the data remaining in
the RAM of the DTC will be
transmitted when both the TE
and TIE bits are set to 1.
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
TEND = 1
Yes
TE = 0
[2]
Make transition to
software standby mode
[2] Clear the TIE and TEIE bits to 0
when they are 1.
[3]
[3] Module stop mode is included.
Cancel software standby mode
No
Change operating mode?
Yes
Initialization
TE = 1
Start transmission
Figure 14.39 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission
Transmission start
Transition to
Software standby
Transmission end software standby mode canceled
mode
TE bit
SCK*
output pin
TxD
output pin
Port
input/output
Port
input/output
High output
Start
SCI TxD output
Port
Stop
Port input/output
Port
Note: * Not output in SCI_5, 6.
Figure 14.40 Port Pin States during Mode Transition
(Internal Clock, Asynchronous Transmission)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 630 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
High output
SCI
TxD output
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Transmission start
Transmission end
Transition to
Software standby
software standby mode canceled
mode
TE bit
SCK
output pin
TxD
output pin
Port
input/output
Port
input/output
Marking output
Last TxD bit retained
SCI TxD output
Port
Port input/output
High output*
SCI
TxD output
Port
Note: * Initialized in software standby mode
Figure 14.41 Port Pin States during Mode Transition
(Internal Clock, Clocked Synchronous Transmission)
(Setting is Prohibited in SCI_5 and SCI_6)
Reception
Read RDRF flag in SSR
RDRF = 1
No
[1]
[1] Data being received will be invalid.
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
[2] Module stop mode is included.
RE = 0
Make transition to
software standby mode
[2]
Cancel software standby mode
Change operating mode?
No
Yes
Initialization
RE = 1
Start reception
Figure 14.42 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 631 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.11
CRC Operation Circuit
The cyclic redundancy check (CRC) operation circuit detects errors in data blocks.
14.11.1 Features
The features of the CRC operation circuit are listed below.
•
•
•
•
CRC code generated for any desired data length in an 8-bit unit
CRC operation executed on eight bits in parallel
One of three generating polynomials selectable
CRC code generation for LSB-first or MSB-first communication selectable
Figure 14.43 shows a block diagram of the CRC operation circuit.
Internal bus
CRCCR
CRCDIR
Control
signal
CRC code
generation
circuit
CRCDOR
[Legend]
CRCCR: CRC control register
CRCDIR: CRC data input register
CRCDOR: CRC data output register
Figure 14.43 Block Diagram of CRC Operation Circuit
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 632 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.11.2 Register Descriptions
The CRC operation circuit has the following registers.
• CRC control register (CRCCR)
• CRC data input register (CRCDIR)
• CRC data output register (CRCDOR)
(1)
CRC Control Register (CRCCR)
CRCCR initializes the CRC operation circuit, switches the operation mode, and selects the
generating polynomial.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DORCLR




LMS
G1
G0
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
W
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
DORCLR
0
W
CRCDOR Clear
Setting this bit to 1 clears CRCDOR to H'0000.
6 to 3
—
All 0
R
Reserved
The initial value should not be changed.
2
LMS
0
R/W
CRC Operation Switch
Selects CRC code generation for LSB-first or MSB-first
communication.
0: Performs CRC operation for LSB-first
communication. The lower byte (bits 7 to 0) is first
transmitted when CRCDOR contents (CRC code)
are divided into two bytes to be transmitted in two
parts.
1: Performs CRC operation for MSB-first
communication. The upper byte (bits 15 to 8) is first
transmitted when CRCDOR contents (CRC code)
are divided into two bytes to be transmitted in two
parts.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 633 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
1
G1
0
R/W
CRC Generating Polynomial Select:
0
G0
0
R/W
Selects the polynomial.
00: Reserved
8
2
01: X + X + X + 1
16
15
2
10: X + X + X + 1
16
12
5
11: X + X + X + 1
(2)
CRC Data Input Register (CRCDIR)
CRCDIR is an 8-bit readable/writable register, to which the bytes to be CRC-operated are written.
The result is obtained in CRCDOR.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
(3)
CRC Data Output Register (CRCDOR)
CRCDOR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that contains the result of CRC operation when the
bytes to be CRC-operated are written to CRCDIR after CRCDOR is cleared. When the CRC
operation result is additionally written to the bytes to which CRC operation is to be performed, the
CRC operation result will be H'0000 if the data contains no CRC error. When bits 1 and 0 in
CRCCR (G1 and G0 bits) are set to 0 and 1, respectively, the lower byte of this register contains
the result.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 634 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.11.3 CRC Operation Circuit Operation
The CRC operation circuit generates a CRC code for LSB-first/MSB-first communications. An
example in which a CRC code for hexadecimal data H'F0 is generated using the X16 + X12 + X5 + 1
polynomial with the G1 and G0 bits in CRCCR set to B'11 is shown below.
1. Write H'83 to CRCCR
7
CRCCR
1
2. Write H'F0 to CRCDIR
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
CRCDIR
1 1
1
1
0
1
1
0
CRCDOR clearing
0 0
CRC code generation
0
7
0
0
7
CRCDORH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
CRCDORH
1
1
1
1
0
1
1 1
CRCDORL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
CRCDORL
1
0
0
0
1
1
1 1
3. Read from CRCDOR
CRC code = H'F78F
4. Serial transmission (LSB first)
Data
CRC code
7
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
F
0
7
1
1
0
7
0
0
1
1
8
1
0
7
1
1
0
1
F
1
1
0
0
F
0
0
Output
0
Figure 14.44 LSB-First Data Transmission
1. Write H'87 to CRCCR
7
CRCCR
0
1
2. Write H'F0 to CRCDIR
7
0
0
0
0
1
CRCDIR
1 1
1
CRCDOR clearing
0
7
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
CRC code generation
0
7
CRCDORH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
CRCDORH
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
CRCDORL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
CRCDORL
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
3. Read from CRCDOR
CRC code = H'EF1F
4. Serial transmission (MSB first)
CRC code
Data
7
Output
1
1
1
F
1
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
1
1
1
E
0
1
1
1
0
7
1
0
F
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
F
Figure 14.45 MSB-First Data Transmission
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 635 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
1. Serial reception (LSB first)
Data
CRC code
7
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
F
0
7
1
1
0
7
0
0
8
2. Write H'83 to CRCCR
1
1
1
7
1
1
F
1
1
0
0
F
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
1
3. Write H'F0 to CRCDIR
7
CRCCR
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
CRCDIR
1
0
1
1
1
0
CRC code generation
CRCDOR clearing
0
7
0
0
7
CRCDORH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CRCDORH
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
CRCDORL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CRCDORL
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
4. Write H'8F to CRCDIR
5. Write H'F7 to CRCDIR
7
CRCDIR
1
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
CRCDIR
1
0
1
1
CRC code generation
CRC code generation
0
7
0
7
CRCDORH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CRCDORH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CRCDORL
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
CRCDORL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6. Read from CRCDOR
CRC code = H'0000 → No error
Figure 14.46 LSB-First Data Reception
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 636 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Input
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
1. Serial reception (MSB first)
Data
CRC code
7
Input
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
F
0
7
0
1
0
2. Write H'83 to CRCCR
1
1
0
1
1
E
0
7
1
0
0
0
F
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
CRCDIR
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
CRC code generation
0
0
7
CRCDORH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CRCDORH
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
CRCDORL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CRCDORL
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4. Write H'EF to CRCDIR
5. Write H'1F to CRCDIR
7
1
7
0
1
1
0
1
CRCDOR clearing
7
CRCDIR
1
1
F
7
0
0
1
3. Write H'F0 to CRCDIR
7
CRCCR
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
CRCDIR
0
0
0
0
CRC code generation
CRC code generation
0
7
0
7
CRCDORH
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
CRCDORH
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CRCDORL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CRCDORL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6. Read from CRCDOR
CRC code = H'0000 → No error
Figure 14.47 MSB-First Data Reception
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 637 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA, CRC)
14.11.4 Note on CRC Operation Circuit
Note that the sequence to transmit the CRC code differs between LSB-first transmission and
MSB-first transmission.
1. CRC code generation
After specifying the operation method, write data to CRCDIR in the sequence of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4).
7
0
(1) → (2) → (3) → (4)
CRCDIR
CRC code generation
0
7
CRCDORH
(5)
CRCDORL
(6)
2. Transmission data
(i) LSB-first transmission
CRC code
7
07
07
(6)
(5)
07
(4)
07
(3)
07
(2)
0
Output
(1)
(ii) MSB-first transmission
CRC code
7
Output
07
(1)
07
(2)
07
(3)
0 7
(4)
07
(5)
0
(6)
Figure 14.48 LSB-First and MSB-First Transmit Data
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 638 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
This LSI incorporates a USB function module (USB).
15.1
Features
• The UDC (USB device controller) conforming to USB2.0 and transceiver process USB
protocol automatically.
Automatic processing of USB standard commands for endpoint 0 (some commands and
class/vendor commands require decoding and processing by firmware)
• Transfer speed: Supports full-speed (12 Mbps)
• Endpoint configuration:
Endpoint
Name
Endpoint 0
Maximum
FIFO Buffer
Abbreviation Transfer Type Packet Size Capacity (Byte)
DMA Transfer
EP0s
Setup
8
8
—
EP0i
Control-in
8
8
—
EP0o
Control-out
8
8
—
Endpoint 1
EP1
Bulk-out
64
128
Possible
Endpoint 2
EP2
Bulk-in
64
128
Possible
Endpoint 3
EP3
Interrupt-in
8
8
—
Configuration1-Interface0-AlternateSetting0
EndPoint1
EndPoint2
EndPoint3
• Interrupt requests: Generates various interrupt signals necessary for USB
transmission/reception
• Power mode: Self power mode or bus power mode can be selected by the power mode bit
(PWMD) in the control register (CTLR).
IFUSB40A_000020020100
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 639 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Figure 15.1 shows the block diagram of the USB.
Peripheral bus
USB function module
Status and
control registers
Interrupt requests
D+
UDC
Transceiver
FIFO
Clock for USB
(48 MHz)
[Legend]
UDC: USB device controller
Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of USB
15.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 15.1 shows the USB pin configuration.
Table 15.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
I/O
Function
VBUS
Input
USB cable connection monitor pin
USD+
I/O
USB data I/O pin
USD-
I/O
USB data I/O pin
DrVcc
Input
Power supply pin for USB on-chip transceiver
DrVss
Input
Ground pin for USB on-chip transceiver
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 640 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
D-
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3
Register Descriptions
The USB has following registers. For the information on the addresses of these registers and the
state of the register in each processing condition, see section 23, List of Registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Interrupt flag register 0 (IFR0)
Interrupt flag register 1 (IFR1)
Interrupt flag register 2 (IFR2)
Interrupt select register 0 (ISR0)
Interrupt select register 1 (ISR1)
Interrupt select register 2 (ISR2)
Interrupt enable register 0 (IER0)
Interrupt enable register 1 (IER1)
Interrupt enable register 2 (IER2)
EP0i data register (EPDR0i)
EP0o data register (EPDR0o)
EP0s data register (EPDR0s)
EP1 data register (EPDR1)
EP2 data register (EPDR2)
EP3 data register (EPDR3)
EP0o receive data size register (EPSZ0o)
EP1 receive data size register (EPSZ1)
Trigger register (TRG)
Data status register (DASTS)
FIFO clear register (FCLR)
DMA transfer setting register (DMA)
Endpoint stall register (EPSTL)
Configuration value register (CVR)
Control register (CTLR)
Endpoint information register (EPIR)
Transceiver test register 0 (TRNTREG0)
Transceiver test register 1 (TRNTREG1)
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 641 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.1
Interrupt Flag Register 0 (IFR0)
IFR0, together with interrupt flag registers 1and 2 (IFR1and IFR2), indicates interrupt status
information required by the application. When an interrupt source is generated, the corresponding
bit is set to 1. And then this bit, in combination with interrupt enable register 0 (IER0), generates
an interrupt request to the CPU. To clear, write 0 to the bit to be cleared and 1 to the other bits.
However, since EP1FULL and EP2EMPTY are status bits, these bits cannot be cleared.
Bit
Bit Name
7
6
5
BRST
EP1 FULL
EP2 TR
3
EP2 EMPTY SETUP TS
2
1
0
EP0o TS
EP0i TR
EP0i TS
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial Value
R/W
4
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
BRST
0
R/W
Bus Reset
This bit is set to 1 when a bus reset signal is detected on
the USB bus.
6
EP1FULL
0
R
EP1 FIFO Full
This bit is set when endpoint 1 receives one packet of
data successfully from the host, and holds a value of 1
as long as there is valid data in the FIFO buffer.
This is a status bit, and cannot be cleared.
5
EP2TR
0
R/W
EP2 Transfer Request
This bit is set if there is no valid transmit data in the FIFO
buffer when an IN token for endpoint 2 is received from
the host. A NACK handshake is returned to the host until
data is written to the FIFO buffer and packet
transmission is enabled.
4
EP2EMPTY
1
R
EP2 FIFO Empty
This bit is set when at least one of the dual endpoint 2
transmit FIFO buffers is ready for transmit data to be
written.
This is a status bit, and cannot be cleared.
3
SETUPTS
0
R/W
Setup Command Receive Complete
This bit is set to 1 when endpoint 0 receives successfully
a setup command requiring decoding on the application
side, and returns an ACK handshake to the host.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 642 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2
EP0oTS
0
R/W
EP0o Receive Complete
This bit is set to 1 when endpoint 0 receives data from
the host successfully, stores the data in the FIFO
buffer, and returns an ACK handshake to the host.
1
EP0iTR
0
R/W
EP0i Transfer Request
This bit is set if there is no valid transmit data in the
FIFO buffer when an IN token for endpoint 0 is
received from the host. A NACK handshake is returned
to the host until data is written to the FIFO buffer and
packet transmission is enabled.
0
EP0iTS
0
R/W
EP0i Transmit Complete
This bit is set when data is transmitted to the host from
endpoint 0 and an ACK handshake is returned.
15.3.2
Interrupt Flag Register 1 (IFR1)
IFR1, together with interrupt flag registers 0 and 2 (IFR0 and IFR2), indicates interrupt status
information required by the application. When an interrupt source is generated, the corresponding
bit is set to 1. And then this bit, in combination with interrupt enable register 1 (IER1), generates
an interrupt request to the CPU. To clear, write 0 to the bit to be cleared and 1 to the other bits.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name




VBUS MN
EP3 TR
EP3 TS
VBUSF
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

0
R
Reserved
6
—
0
R
5
—
0
R
These bits are always read as 0. The write value
should always be 0.
4
—
0
R
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 643 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
VBUS MN
0
R
This is a status bit which monitors the state of the
VBUS pin.
This bit reflects the state of the VBUS pin and
generates no interrupt request. This bit is always 0
when the PULLUP_E bit in DMA is 0.
2
EP3 TR
0
R/W
EP3 Transfer Request
This bit is set if there is no valid transmit data in the
FIFO buffer when an IN token for endpoint 3 is
received from the host. A NACK handshake is returned
to the host until data is written to the FIFO buffer and
packet transmission is enabled.
1
EP3 TS
0
R/W
EP3 Transmit Complete
This bit is set when data is transmitted to the host from
endpoint 3 and an ACK handshake is returned.
0
VBUSF
0
R/W
USB Disconnection Detection
When the function is connected to the USB bus or
disconnected from it, this bit is set to 1. The VBUS pin
of this module is used for detecting connection or
disconnection.
15.3.3
Interrupt Flag Register 2 (IFR2)
IFR2, together with interrupt flag registers 0 and 1 (IFR0 and IFR1), indicates interrupt status
information required by the application. When an interrupt source is generated, the corresponding
bit is set to 1. And then this bit, in combination with interrupt enable register 2 (IER2), generates
an interrupt request to the CPU. To clear, write 0 to the bit to be cleared and 1 to the other bits.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name


SURSS
SURSF
CFDN

SETC
SETI
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
—
0
R
Reserved
6
—
0
R
These bits are always read as 0. The write value
should always be 0.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 644 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
5
SURSS
0
R
Suspend/Resume Status
This is a status bit that describes bus state.
0: Normal state
1: Suspended state
This bit is a status bit and generates no interrupt
request.
4
SURSF
0
R/W
Suspend/Resume Detection
This bit is set to 1 when the state changed from normal
to suspended state or vice versa. The corresponding
interrupt output is RESUME, USBINTN2, and
USBINTN3.
3
CFDN
0
R/W
End Point Information Load End
This bit is set to 1 when writing data in the endpoint
information register to the EPIR register ends (load
end). This module starts the USB operation after the
endpoint information is completely set.
2
—
0
R
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
1
SETC
0
R/W
Set_Configuration Command Detection
When the Set_Configuration command is detected, this
bit is set to 1.
0
SETI
0
R/W
Set_Interface Command Detection
When the Set_Interface command is detected, this bit
is set to 1.
15.3.4
Interrupt Select Register 0 (ISR0)
ISR0 selects the vector numbers of the interrupt requests indicated in interrupt flag register 0
(IFR0). If the USB issues an interrupt request to the INTC when a bit in ISR0 is cleared to 0, the
interrupt corresponding to the bit will be USBINTN2. If the USB issues an interrupt request to the
INTC when a bit in ISR0 is set to 1, the corresponding interrupt will be USBINTN3.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
BRST
EP1 FULL
EP2 TR
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
4
2
1
0
EP0o TS
EP0i TR
EP0i TS
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
3
EP2 EMPTY SETUP TS
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 645 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
BRST
0
R/W
Bus Reset
6
EP1 FULL
0
R/W
EP1 FIFO Full
5
EP2 TR
0
R/W
EP2 Transfer Request
4
EP2 EMPTY 0
R/W
EP2 FIFO Empty
3
SETUP TS
0
R/W
Setup Command Receive Complete
2
EP0o TS
0
R/W
EP0o Receive Complete
1
EP0i TR
0
R/W
EP0i Transfer Request
0
EP0i TS
0
R/W
EP0i Transmission Complete
15.3.5
Interrupt Select Register 1 (ISR1)
ISR1 selects the vector numbers of the interrupt requests indicated in interrupt flag register 1
(IFR1). If the USB issues an interrupt request to the INTC when a bit in ISR0 is cleared to 0, the
interrupt corresponding to the bit will be USBINTN2. If the USB issues an interrupt request to the
INTC when a bit in ISR0 is set to 1, the corresponding interrupt will be USBINTN3.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name





EP3 TR
EP3 TS
VBUSF
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

0
R
Reserved
6

0
R
5

0
R
These bits are always read as 0. The write value
should always be 0.
4

0
R
3

0
R
2
EP3 TR
1
R/W
EP3 Transfer Request
1
EP3 TS
1
R/W
EP3 Transmission Complete
0
VBUSF
1
R/W
USB Bus Connect
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 646 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.6
Interrupt Select Register 2 (ISR2)
ISR2 selects the vector numbers of the interrupt requests indicated in interrupt flag register 2
(IFR2). If the USB issues an interrupt request to the INTC when a bit in ISR0 is cleared to 0, the
interrupt corresponding to the bit will be USBINTN2. If the USB issues an interrupt request to the
INTC when a bit in ISR0 is set to 1, the corresponding interrupt will be USBINTN3.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name



SURSE
CFDN

SETCE
SETIE
Initial Value
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

0
R
Reserved
6

0
R
5

0
R
These bits are always read as 0. The write value
should always be 0.
4
SURSE
1
R/W
Suspend/Resume Detection
3
CFDN
1
R/W
End Point Information Load End
2

1
R
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1. The write value should
always be 1.
1
SETCE
1
R/W
Set_Configuration Command Detection
0
SETIE
1
R/W
Set_Interface Command Detection
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 647 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.7
Interrupt Enable Register 0 (IER0)
IER0 enables the interrupt requests of interrupt flag register 0 (IFR0). When an interrupt flag is set
to 1 while the corresponding bit of each interrupt is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the
CPU. The interrupt vector number is determined by the contents of interrupt select register 0
(ISR0).
Bit
Bit Name
7
6
5
BRST
EP1 FULL
EP2 TR
2
1
0
EP0o TS
EP0i TR
EP0i TS
3
EP2 EMPTY SETUP TS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial Value
R/W
4
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
BRST
0
R/W
Bus Reset
6
EP1 FULL
0
R/W
EP1 FIFO Full
5
EP2 TR
0
R/W
EP2 Transfer Request
4
EP2 EMPTY
0
R/W
EP2 FIFO Empty
3
SETUP TS
0
R/W
Setup Command Receive Complete
2
EP0o TS
0
R/W
EP0o Receive Complete
1
EP0i TR
0
R/W
EP0i Transfer Request
0
EP0i TS
0
R/W
EP0i Transmission Complete
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 648 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.8
Interrupt Enable Register 1 (IER1)
IER1 enables the interrupt requests of interrupt flag register 1 (IFR1). When an interrupt flag is set
to 1 while the corresponding bit of each interrupt is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the
CPU. The interrupt vector number is determined by the contents of interrupt select register 1
(ISR1).
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name





EP3 TR
EP3 TS
VBUSF
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

0
R
Reserved
6

0
R
5

0
R
These bits are always read as 0. The write value
should always be 0.
4

0
R
3

0
R
2
EP3 TR
0
R/W
EP3 Transfer Request
1
EP3 TS
0
R/W
EP3 Transmission Complete
0
VBUSF
0
R/W
USB Bus Connect
15.3.9
Interrupt Enable Register 2 (IER2)
IER2 enables the interrupt requests of interrupt flag register 2 (IFR2). When an interrupt flag is set
to 1 while the corresponding bit of each interrupt is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the
CPU. The interrupt vector number is determined by the contents of interrupt select register 2
(ISR2).
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SSRSME


SURSE
CFDN

SETCE
SETIE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 649 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
SSRSME
0
R/W
Resume Detection for Software Standby Cancel
For the details of the operation, see section 15.5.3,
Suspend and Resume Operations.
6, 5

All 0
R/W
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value
should always be 0.
4
SURSE
0
R/W
Suspend/Resume Detection
For the details of the operation, see section 15.5.3,
Suspend and Resume Operations.
3
CFDN
0
R/W
End Point Information Load End
2

0
R
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
1
SETCE
0
R/W
Set_Configuration Command Detection
0
SETIE
0
R/W
Set_Interface Command Detection
15.3.10 EP0i Data Register (EPDR0i)
EPDR0i is an 8-byte transmit FIFO buffer for endpoint 0. EPDR0i holds one packet of transmit
data for control-in. Transmit data is fixed by writing one packet of data and setting EP0iPKTE in
the trigger register. When an ACK handshake is returned from the host after the data has been
transmitted, EP0iTS in interrupt flag register 0 is set. This FIFO buffer can be initialized by means
of EP0iCLR in the FCLR register.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
R/W
Description
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
7 to 0
D7 to D0
Undefined W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 650 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Data register for control-in transfer
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.11 EP0o Data Register (EPDR0o)
EPDR0o is an 8-byte receive FIFO buffer for endpoint 0. EPDR0o holds endpoint 0 receive data
other than setup commands. When data is received successfully, EP0oTS in interrupt flag register
0 is set, and the number of receive bytes is indicated in the EP0o receive data size register. After
the data has been read, setting EP0oRDFN in the trigger register enables the next packet to be
received. This FIFO buffer can be initialized by means of BP0oCLR in the FCLR register.
Bit
Bit Name
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 0
D7 to D0
All 0
R
Data register for control-out transfer
15.3.12 EP0s Data Register (EPDR0s)
EPDR0s is an 8-byte FIFO buffer specifically for receiving endpoint 0 setup commands. Only the
setup command to be processed by the application is received. When command data is received
successfully, the SETUPTS bit in interrupt flag register 0 is set.
As a latest setup command must be received in high priority, if data is left in this buffer, it will be
overwritten with new data. If reception of the next command is started while the current command
is being read, command reception has priority, the read by the application is forcibly stopped, and
the read data is invalid.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit
Bit Name
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 0
D7 to D0
All 0
R
Data register for storing the setup command at the
control-out transfer
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 651 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.13 EP1 Data Register (EPDR1)
EPDR1 is a 128-byte receive FIFO buffer for endpoint 1. EPDR1 has a dual-buffer configuration,
and has a capacity of twice the maximum packet size. When one packet of data is received
successfully, EP1FULL in interrupt flag register 0 is set, and the number of receive bytes is
indicated in the EP1 receive data size register. After the data has been read, the buffer that was
read is enabled to receive data again by writing 1 to the EP1RDFN bit in the trigger register. The
receive data in this FIFO buffer can be transferred by DMA. This FIFO buffer can be initialized
by means of EP1CLR in the FCLR register.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit Name
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 0
D7 to D0
All 0
R
Data register for endpoint 1 transfer
15.3.14 EP2 Data Register (EPDR2)
EPDR2 is a 128-byte transmit FIFO buffer for endpoint 2. EPDR2 has a dual-buffer configuration,
and has a capacity of twice the maximum packet size. When transmit data is written to this FIFO
buffer and EP2PKTE in the trigger register is set, one packet of transmit data is fixed, and the
dual-FIFO buffer is switched over. The transmit data for this FIFO buffer can be transferred by
DMA. This FIFO buffer can be initialized by means of EP2CLR in the FCLR register.
Bit
7
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
7 to 0
D7 to D0
Undefined W
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 652 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Description
Data register for endpoint 2 transfer
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.15 EP3 Data Register (EPDR3)
EPDR3 is an 8-byte transmit FIFO buffer for endpoint 3. EPDR3 holds one packet of transmit data
for the interrupt transfer of endpoint 3. Transmit data is fixed by writing one packet of data and
setting EP3PKTE in the trigger register. When an ACK handshake is returned from the host after
one packet of data has been transmitted successfully, EP3TS in interrupt flag register 0 is set. This
FIFO buffer can be initialized by means of EP3CLR in the FCLR register.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
7 to 0
D7 to D0
Undefined W
Description
Data register for endpoint 3 transfer
15.3.16 EP0o Receive Data Size Register (EPSZ0o)
EPSZ0o indicates the number of bytes received at endpoint 0 from the host.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 0
—
All 0
R
Number of receive data for endpoint 0
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 653 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.17 EP1 Receive Data Size Register (EPSZ1)
EPSZ1 is a receive data size resister for endpoint 1. EPSZ1 indicates the number of bytes received
from the host. The FIFO for endpoint 1 has a dual-buffer configuration. The size of the received
data indicated by this register is the size of the currently selected side (can be read by CPU).
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 0
—
All 0
R
Number of received bytes for endpoint 1
15.3.18 Trigger Register (TRG)
TRG generates one-shot triggers to control the transfer sequence for each endpoint.
Bit
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

EP3 PKTE
EP1 RDFN
EP2 PKTE

Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined

W
W
W

W
W
W
Bit Name
Initial Value
7
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

Undefined

Reserved
EP0s RDFN EP0o RDFN EP0i PKTE
The write value should always be 0.
6
EP3 PKTE
Undefined
W
EP3 Packet Enable
After one packet of data has been written to the
endpoint 3 transmit FIFO buffer, the transmit data is
fixed by writing 1 to this bit.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 654 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
5
EP1 RDFN
Undefined
W
EP1 Read Complete
Write 1 to this bit after one packet of data has been
read from the endpoint 1 FIFO buffer. The endpoint 1
receive FIFO buffer has a dual-buffer configuration.
Writing 1 to this bit initializes the FIFO that was read,
enabling the next packet to be received.
4
EP2 PKTE
Undefined
W
EP2 Packet Enable
After one packet of data has been written to the
endpoint 2 transmit FIFO buffer, the transmit data is
fixed by writing 1 to this bit.
3

Undefined

Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
2
EP0s RDFN Undefined
W
EP0s Read Complete
Write 1 to this bit after data for the EP0s command
FIFO has been read. Writing 1 to this bit enables
transfer of data in the following data stage. A NACK
handshake is returned in response to transfer
requests from the host in the data stage until 1 is
written to this bit.
1
EP0o RDFN Undefined
W
EP0o Read Complete
Writing 1 to this bit after one packet of data has been
read from the endpoint 0 transmit FIFO buffer
initializes the FIFO buffer, enabling the next packet to
be received.
0
EP0i PKTE
Undefined
W
EP0i Packet Enable
After one packet of data has been written to the
endpoint 0 transmit FIFO buffer, the transmit data is
fixed by writing 1 to this bit.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 655 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.19 Data Status Register (DASTS)
DASTS indicates whether the transmit FIFO buffers contain valid data. A bit is set when data is
written to the corresponding FIFO buffer and the packet enable state is set, and cleared when all
data has been transmitted to the host.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name


EP3 DE
EP2 DE



EP0i DE
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

0
R
Reserved
6

0
R
These bits are always read as 0. The write value
should always be 0.
5
EP3 DE
0
R
EP3 Data Present
This bit is set when the endpoint 3 FIFO buffer
contains valid data.
4
EP2 DE
0
R
EP2 Data Present
This bit is set when the endpoint 2 FIFO buffer
contains valid data.
3

0
R
Reserved
2

0
R
These bits are always read as 0.
1

0
R
0
EP0i DE
0
R
EP0i Data Present
This bit is set when the endpoint 0 FIFO buffer
contains valid data.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 656 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.20 FIFO Clear Register (FCLR)
FCLR is a register to initialize the FIFO buffers for each endpoint. Writing 1 to a bit clears all the
data in the corresponding FIFO buffer. Note that the corresponding interrupt flag is not cleared.
Do not clear a FIFO buffer during transfer.
Bit
7
5
4
3
2
1
0

EP3 CLR
EP1 CLR
EP2 CLR


EP0o CLR
EP0i CLR
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined

W
W
W


W
W
Bit Name
Initial Value
6
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

Undefined

Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
6
EP3 CLR
Undefined
W
EP3 Clear
Writing 1 to this bit initializes the endpoint 3 transmit
FIFO buffer.
5
EP1 CLR
Undefined
W
EP1 Clear
Writing 1 to this bit initializes both sides of the
endpoint 1 receive FIFO buffer.
4
EP2 CLR
Undefined
W
EP2 Clear
Writing 1 to this bit initializes both sides of the
endpoint 2 transmit FIFO buffer.
3

2

1
EP0o CLR
Undefined
Undefined

Reserved

The write value should always be 0.
W
EP0o Clear
Writing 1 to this bit initializes the endpoint 0 receive
FIFO buffer.
0
EP0i CLR
Undefined
W
EP0i Clear
Writing 1 to this bit initializes the endpoint 0 transmit
FIFO buffer.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 657 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.21 DMA Transfer Setting Register (DMA)
DMA transfer can be carried out between the endpoint 1 and 2 data registers and memory by
means of the on-chip direct memory access controller (DMAC). Dual address transfer is
performed in bytes. To start DMA transfer, DMAC settings must be made in addition to the
settings in this register.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name





PULLUP_E
EP2DMAE
EP1DMAE
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

0
R
Reserved
6

0
R
5

0
R
These bits are always read as 0. The write value
should always be 0.
4

0
R
3

0
R
2
PULLUP_E
0
R/W
PULLUP Enable
This pin performs the pull-up control for the D+ pin,
with using PM4 as the pull-up control pin.
0: D+ is not pulled up.
1: D+ is pulled up.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 658 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
1
EP2DMAE
0
R/W
Endpoint 2 DMA Transfer Enable
When this bit is set, DMA transfer is enabled from
memory to the endpoint 2 transmit FIFO buffer. If
there is at least one byte of open space in the FIFO
buffer, a DMAC start interrupt signal (USBINTN1) is
asserted. In DMA transfer, when 64 bytes are written
to the FIFO buffer the EP2 packet enable bit is set
automatically, allowing 64 bytes of data to be
transferred, and if there is still space in the other side
of the two FIFOs, the DMAC start interrupt signal
(USBINTN1) is asserted again. However, if the size of
the data packet to be transmitted is less than 64
bytes, the EP2 packet enable bit is not set
automatically, and so should be set by the CPU with a
DMA transfer end interrupt.
As EP2-related interrupt requests to the CPU are not
automatically masked, interrupt requests should be
masked as necessary in the interrupt enable register.
•
Operating procedure
1. Write of 1 to the EP2 DMAE bit in DMAR
2. Set the DMAC to activate through USBINTN1
3. Transfer count setting in the DMAC
4. DMAC activation
5. DMA transfer
6. DMA transfer end interrupt generated
See section 15.8.3, DMA Transfer for Endpoint 2.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 659 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
0
EP1DMAE
0
R/W
Endpoint 1 DMA Transfer Enable
When this bit is set, a DMAC start interrupt signal
(USBINTN0) is asserted and DMA transfer is enabled
from the endpoint 1 receive FIFO buffer to memory. If
there is at least one byte of receive data in the FIFO
buffer, the DMAC start interrupt signal (USBINTN0) is
asserted. In DMA transfer, when all the received data
is read, EP1 is automatically read and the completion
trigger operates.
EP1-related interrupt requests to the CPU are not
automatically masked.
•
Operating procedure:
1. Write of 1 to the EP1 DMAE bit in DMA
2. Set the DMAC to activate through USBINTN0
3. Transfer count setting in the DMAC
4. DMAC activation
5. DMA transfer
6. DMA transfer end interrupt generated
See section 15.8.2, DMA Transfer for Endpoint 1.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 660 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.22 Endpoint Stall Register (EPSTL)
The bits in EPSTL are used to forcibly stall the endpoints on the application side. While a bit is set
to 1, the corresponding endpoint returns a stall handshake to the host. The stall bit for endpoint 0
is cleared automatically on reception of 8-byte command data for which decoding is performed by
the function and the EP0 STL bit is cleared. When the SETUPTS flag in the IFR0 register is set to
1, writing 1 to the EP0 STL bit is ignored. For detailed operation, see section 15.7, Stall
Operations.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name




EP3STL
EP2STL
EP1STL
EP0STL
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

0
R
Reserved
6

0
R
5

0
R
These bits are always read as 0. The write value
should always be 0.
4

0
R
3
EP3STL
0
R/W
EP3 Stall
When this bit is set to 1, endpoint 3 is placed in the
stall state.
2
EP2STL
0
R/W
EP2 Stall
When this bit is set to 1, endpoint 2 is placed in the
stall state.
1
EP1STL
0
R/W
EP1 Stall
When this bit is set to 1, endpoint 1 is placed in the
stall state.
0
EP0STL
0
R/W
EP0 Stall
When this bit is set to 1, endpoint 0 is placed in the
stall state.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 661 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.23 Configuration Value Register (CVR)
This register stores the Configuration, Interface, or Alternate set value when the Set Configuration
or Set Interface command from the host is correctly received.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CNFV1
CNFV0
INTV1
INTV0

ALTV2
ALTV1
ALTV0
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit
Bit Name
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
CNFV1
All 0
R
6
CNFV0
These bits store Configuration Setting value when
they receive Set Configuration command. CNFV is
updated when the SETC bit in IFR2 is set to 1.
5
INTV1
All 0
R
4
INTV0
These bits store Interface Setting value when they
receive Set Interface command. INTV is updated
when the SETI bit in IFR2 is set to 1.
3

0
R
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
2
ALTV2
0
R
1
ALTV1
0
R
0
ALTV0
0
R
These bits store Alternate Setting value when they
receive Set Interface command. ALTV2 to ALTV0 are
updated when the SETI bit in IFR2 is set to 1.
15.3.24 Control Register (CTLR)
This register sets functions for bits ASCE, PWMD, RSME, and, PWUPS.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name



RWUPS
RSME
PWMD
ASCE

Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 662 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

0
R
Reserved
6

0
R
5

0
R
These bits are always read as 0. The write value
should always be 0.
4
RWUPS
0
R
Remote Wakeup Status
This status bit indicates remote wakeup command
from USB host is enabled or disabled.
This bit is set to 0 when remote wakeup command
from UBM host is disabled by
Device_Remote_Wakeup due to Set Feature or Clear
Feature request. This bit is set to 1 when remote
wakeup command is enabled.
3
RSME
0
R/W
Resume Enable
This bit releases the suspend state (or executes
remote wakeup). When RSME is set to 1, resume
request starts. If RSME is once set to 1, clear this bit
to 0 again afterwards. In this case, the value 1 set to
RSME must be kept for at least one clock period of
12-MHz clock.
2
PWMD
0
R/W
Bus Power Mode
This bit specifies the USB power mode. When PWMD
is set to 0, the self-power mode is selected for this
module. When set to 1, the bus-power mode is
selected.
1
ASCE
0
R/W
Automatic Stall Clear Enable
Setting the ASCE bit to 1 automatically clears the stall
setting bit (the EPxSTL (x = 1, 2, or 3) bit in EPSTLR0
or EPSTR1) of the end point that has returned the
stall handshake to the host. The automatic stall clear
enable is common to the all end points. Thus the
individual control of the end point is not possible.
When the ASCE bit is set to 0, the stall setting bit is
not automatically cleared. This bit must be released
by the users. To enable this bit, make sure that the
ASCE bit should be set to 1 before the EPxSTL (x = 1,
2, or 3) bit in EPSTL is set to 1.
0
—
0
R
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 663 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.25 Endpoint Information Register (EPIR)
This register sets the information for each endpoint. Each endpoint needs five bytes to store the
information. Writing data should be done in sequence starting at logical endpoint 0. Do not write
data of more than 50 bytes (five bytes multiplied by ten endpoints) to this register. The
information should be written to this register only once at a power-on reset and no data should be
written after that. Description of writing data for one endpoint is shown below.
Although this register consists of one register to which data is written sequentially for one address,
the write data for the endpoint 0 is described as EPIR00 to EPIR05 (EPIR endpoint number in
write order) to make the explanation understood easier. Write should start at EPIR00.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
Undefined
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
• EPIR00
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7 to 4
D7 to D4
Undefined
W
Description
Endpoint Number
[Enable setting range]
0 to 3
3, 2
D3, D2
Undefined
W
Endpoint Configuration Number
[Enable setting range]
0 or 1
1, 0
D1, D0
Undefined
W
Endpoint Interface Number
[Enable setting range]
0 to 3
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 664 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
• EPIR01
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7, 6
D7, D6
Undefined
W
Endpoint Alternate Number
[Possible setting range]
0 or 1
5, 4
D5, D4
Undefined
W
Endpoint Transmission
[Possible setting range]
0: Control
1: Setting prohibited
2: Bulk
3: Interrupt
3
D3
Undefined
W
Endpoint Transmission Direction
[Possible setting range]
0: Out
1: In
2 to 0
D2 to D0
Undefined
W
Reserved
[Possible setting range]
Fixed to 0.
• EPIR02
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7 to 1
D7 to D1
Undefined
W
Description
Endpoint Maximum Packet Size
[Possible setting range]
0 to 64
0
D0
Undefined
W
Reserved
[Possible setting range]
Fixed to 0.
• EPIR03
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7 to 0
D7 to D0
Undefined
W
Description
Reserved
[Possible setting range]
Fixed to 0.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 665 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
• EPIR04
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 0
D7 to D0
Undefined
W
Endpoint FIFO Number
[Possible setting range]
0 to 3
The endpoint number is the endpoint number the USB host uses. The endpoint FIFO number
corresponds to the endpoint number described in this manual. Thus data transfer between the USB
host and the endpoint FIFO can be enabled by putting the endpoint number and the endpoint FIFO
number in one-to-one correspondence. Note that the setting value is subject to a limitation
described below.
Since each endpoint FIFO number is optimized by the exclusive software that corresponds to the
transfer system, direction, and the maximum packet size, make sure to set the endpoint FIFO
number to the data described in table 15.2.
1. The endpoint FIFO number 1 cannot designate other than the maximum packed size of 8 bytes,
control transfer method, and out transfer direction.
2. The endpoint number 0 and the endpoint FIFO number must have one-on one relationship.
3. The maximum packet size for the endpoint FIFO number 0 is 8 bytes only.
4. The endpoint FIFO number 0 can specify only the maximum packet size and the data for the
rest should be all 0.
5. The maximum packet size for the endpoint FIFO numbers 1 and 2 is limited to 64 bytes.
6. The maximum packet size for the endpoint FIFO numbers 3 is limited to 8 bytes.
7. The maximum number of endpoint information setting is ten.
8. Up to ten endpoint information setting should be made.
9. Write 0 to the endpoints not in use.
Table 15.2 shows the example of limitations for the maximum packet size, the transfer method,
and the transfer direction.
Table 15.2 Example of Limitations for Setting Values
Endpoint FIFO Number
Maximum Packet Size
Transfer Method
Transfer Direction
0
1
2
3
8 bytes
64 bytes
64 bytes
8 bytes
Control
Bulk
Bulk
Interrupt

Out
In
In
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 666 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Table 15.3 shows a specific example of setting.
Table 15.3 Example of Setting
Endpoint
Number Conf.
Int.
Alt.
Transfer
Method
Transfer
Direction
Maximum
Packet Size
Endpoint
FIFO Number
0



Control
In/Out
8 bytes
0
1
1
0
0
Bulk
Out
64 bytes
1
2
1
0
0
Bulk
In
64 bytes
2
3
1
0
0
Interrupt
In
8 bytes
3

1
1
0





1
1
1




N
EPIR[N]0
EPIR[N]1
EPIR[N]2
EPIR[N]3
EPIR[N]4
0
00
00
10
00
00
1
14
20
80
00
01
2
24
28
80
00
02
3
34
38
10
00
03
4
00
00
00
00
00
5
00
00
00
00
00
6
00
00
00
00
00
7
00
00
00
00
00
8
00
00
00
00
00
9
00
00
00
00
00
Configuration
Interface
Alternate
Setting
Endpoint
Number
Endpoint
FIFO Number
Attribute



0
0
Control
1
0
0
1
1
BulkOut
2
2
BulkIn
3
3
InterruptIn
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 667 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.26
Transceiver Test Register 0 (TRNTREG0)
TRNTREG0 controls the on-chip transceiver output signals. Setting the PTSTE bit to 1 specifies
the transceiver output signals (USD+ and USD-) arbitrarily. Table 15.4 shows the relationship
between TRNTREG0 setting and pin output.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PTSTE



SUSPEND
txenl
txse0
txdata
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R
R
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
PTSTE
0
R/W
Pin Test Enable
Enables the test control for the on-chip transceiver
output pins (USD+ and USD-).
6 to 4

All 0
R
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value
should always be 0.
3
SUSPEND
0
R/W
On-Chip Transceiver Output Signal Setting
2
txenl
0
R/W
1
txse0
0
R/W
SUSPEND: Sets the (SUSPEND) signal of the on-chip
transceiver.
0
txdata
0
R/W
txenl:
Sets the output enable (txenl) signal of the
on-chip transceiver.
txse0:
Sets the Signal-ended 0 (txse0) signal of
the on-chip transceiver.
txdata:
Sets the (txdata) signal of the on-chip
transceiver.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 668 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Table 15.4 Relationship between TRNTREG0 Setting and Pin Output
Pin Input
Register Setting
Pin Output
VBUS
PTSTE
txenl
txse0
txdata
USD+
USD-
0
X
X
X
X
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
1
0
X
X
X


1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
x
0
0
1
1
1
X
X
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
[Legend]
X:
Don't care.
:
Cannot be controlled. Indicates state in normal operation according to the USB operation
and port settings.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 669 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.3.27 Transceiver Test Register 1 (TRNTREG1)
TRNTREG1 is a test register that can monitor the on-chip transceiver input signal.
Setting bits PTSTE and txenl in TRNTREG0 to 1 enables monitoring the on-chip transceiver input
signal. Table 15.5 shows the relationship between pin input and TRNTREG1 monitoring value.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit Name





xver_data
dpls
dmns
Initial Value
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 3

All 0
R
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0. The write value should
always be 0.
2
xver_data
*
R
On-Chip Transceiver Input Signal Monitor
1
dpls
*
R
0
dmns
*
R
xver_data: Monitors the differential input level
(xver_data) signal of the on-chip
transceiver.
Note:
*
dpls:
Monitors the USD+ (dpls) signal of the onchip transceiver.
dmns:
Monitors the USD- (dmns) signal of the onchip transceiver.
Determined by the state of pins, VBUS, USD+, and USD-
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 670 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Table 15.5 Relationship between Pin Input and TRNTREG1 Monitoring Value
Register Setting
TRNTREG1
Monitoring Value
Pin Input
PTSTE
SUSPEND
VBUS
USD+
USD-
xver_data dpls
dmns Remarks
0
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
Cannot be monitored
when PTSTE = 0
1
0
1
0
0
X
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
Can be monitored
when PTSTE = 1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
X
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
X
0
X
X
0
1
1
Can be monitored
when VBUS = 0
[Legend]
X:
Don't care.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 671 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.4
Interrupt Sources
This module has five interrupt signals. Table 15.6 shows the interrupt sources and their
corresponding interrupt request signals. The USBINTN interrupt signals are activated at low level.
The USBINTN interrupt requests can only be detected at low level (specified as level sensitive).
Table 15.6 Interrupt Sources
Description
Interrupt
Request
Signal
EP0i_TS*
EP0i transfer
complete
USBINTN2 or ×
USBINTN3
×
1
EP0i_TR*
EP0i transfer
request
USBINTN2 or ×
USBINTN3
×
2
EP0o_TS*
EP0o receive
complete
USBINTN2 or ×
USBINTN3
×
3
SETUP_TS*
Setup command
receive complete
USBINTN2 or ×
USBINTN3
×
EP2_EMPTY
EP2 FIFO empty
USBINTN2 or ×
USBINTN3
USBINTN1
EP2_TR
EP2 transfer
request
USBINTN2 or ×
USBINTN3
×
Register
Bit
IFR0
0
4
Transfer
Mode
Interrupt
Source
Control
transfer
(EP0)
Bulk_in
transfer
(EP2)
5
IFR1
DTC
Activation
DMAC
Activation
6
Bulk_out
transfer
(EP1)
EP1_FULL
EP1 FIFO Full
USBINTN2 or ×
USBINTN3
USBINTN0
7
Status
BRST
Bus reset
USBINTN2 or ×
USBINTN3
×
0
Status
VBUSF
USB
disconnection
detection
USBINTN2 or ×
USBINTN3
×
1
EP3 transfer
complete
USBINTN2 or ×
USBINTN3
×
2
Interrupt_in EP3_TS
transfer
(EP3)
EP3_TR
EP3 transfer
request
USBINTN2 or ×
USBINTN3
×
3
Status
VBUSMN
VBUS connection
status
—
×
×
4
—
Reserved
—
—
—
—
5
6
7
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 672 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
Register
Bit
Transfer
Mode
IFR2
0
Status
1
Description
Interrupt
Request
Signal
SETI
Set_Interface
command detection
USBINTN2 or ×
USBINTN3
×
SETC
Set_Configuration
command detection
USBINTN2 or ×
USBINTN3
×
—
Interrupt
Source
DMAC
DTC
Activation Activation
2
—
Reserved

—
3
Status
CFDN
Endpoint information
load end
USBINTN2 or ×
USBINTN3
×
4
SURSF
Suspend/resume
detection
×
USBINTN2,
USBINTN3, or
RESUME
×
5
SURSS
Suspend/resume
status
—
×
×
Reserved
—
—
—
—
6
—
—
7
Note:
*
EP0 interrupts must be assigned to the same interrupt request signal.
• USBINTN0 signal
DMAC start interrupt signal only EP1. See section 15.8, DMA Transfer.
• USBINTN1 signal
DMAC start interrupt signal only EP1. See section 15.8, DMA Transfer.
• USBINTN2 signal
The USBINTN2 signal requests interrupt sources for which the corresponding bits in interrupt
select registers 0 to 2 (ISR0 to ISR2) are cleared to 0. The USBINTN2 is driven low if a
corresponding bit in the interrupt flag register is set to 1.
• USBINTN3 signal
The USBINTN3 signal requests interrupt sources for which the corresponding bits in interrupt
select registers 0 to 2 (ISR0 to ISR2) are cleared to 0. The USBINTN3 is driven low if a
corresponding bit in the interrupt flag register is set to 1.
• RESUME signal
The RESUME signal is a resume interrupt signal for canceling software standby mode. The
RESUME signal is driven low at the transition to the resume state for canceling software
standby mode.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 673 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.5
Operation
15.5.1
Cable Connection
USB function
Application
Cable disconnected
VBUS pin = 0 V
UDC core reset
USB module interrupt
setting
As soon as preparations are
completed, enable D+ pull-up
in general output port
USB cable connection
No
Initial
settings
General output port
D+ pull-up enabled?
Yes
Interrupt request
IFR1.VBUSF = 1
USB bus connection interrupt
Firmware preparations for
start of USB communication
UDC core reset release
Bus reset reception
IFR0.BRST = 1
Bus reset interrupt
Wait for setup command
reception complete interrupt
Clear VBUSF flag
(IFR1.VBUSF)
Interrupt request
Clear bus reset flag
(IFR0.BRST)
Clear FIFOs
(EP0, EP1, EP2, EP3)
Wait for setup command
reception complete interrupt
Figure 15.2 Cable Connection Operation
The above flowchart shows the operation in the case of in section 15.9, Example of USB External
Circuitry.
In applications that do not require USB cable connection to be detected, processing by the USB
bus connection interrupt is not necessary. Preparations should be made with the bus-reset
interrupt.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 674 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.5.2
Cable Disconnection
USB function
Application
Cable connected
VBUS pin = 1
USB cable disconnection
VBUS pin = 0
UDC core reset
End
Figure 15.3 Cable Disconnection Operation
The above flowchart shows the operation in section 15.9, Example of USB External Circuitry.
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 675 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
15.5.3
(1)
Suspend and Resume Operations
Suspend Operation
If the USB bus enters the suspend state from the non-suspend state, perform the operation as
shown in figure 15.4.
USB function
Application
Clear SURSF in IFR2 to 0
USB cable connected
Check if SURSS in IFR2
is set to 1
Bus idle of 3 ms or
more occurs
Suspend/resume
interrupt occurs
(IFR2/SURSF = 1)
RESUME
Remote
wakeup enabled?
(CTLR/RWUPS = 1?)
No
Yes
Check remote-wakeup
function enabled
System needs to
enter power-down
mode?
Check remote-wakeup
function disabled
No
Yes
Need to enter
software standby
mode?
No
Yes
Clear SURSE in IER2 to 0
Set SURSE in IER2 to 1
Set SSRSME in IER2 to 1
Clear SSRSME in IER2 to 0
Enter software
standby mode
USB module stop
Wait for suspend/
resume interrupt
Figure 15.4 Suspend Operation
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 676 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
(2)
Resume Operation from Up-Stream
If the USB bus enters the non-suspend state from the suspend state by resume signal output from
up-stream, perform the operation as shown in figure 15.5.
USB function
Application
USB cable connected
USB bus in suspend state
Resume interrupts is
requested from the
up-stream.
Suspend/resume
interrupt occurs.
(IFR2/SURSF = 1)
RESUME
Yes
Software standby
mode ?
No
Cancel software
standby mode
Oscillation stabilization
time has passed?
No
Yes
No
USB module
stopped?
Yes
Start USB operating
clock oscillation
Cancel USB module stop
Clear SURSF in IFR2 to 0
Check if SURSS in IFR2 is
cleared to 0
Set SURSE in IER2 to 1
Clear SSRSME in IER2 to 0
Return to normal state
Figure 15.5 Resume Operation from Up-Stream
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 677 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
(3)
Transition from Suspend State to Software Standby Mode and Canceling Software
Standby Mode
If the USB bus enters from the suspend state to software standby mode, perform the operation as
shown in figure 15.6. When canceling software standby mode, ensure enough time for the system
clock oscillation to be settled.
Transition from suspend state to
software standby mode
Canceling software standby mode
(1)
Detect that USB bus is in suspend state
(8)
Detect that USB bus is in resume state
(2)
Set SURSF in IFR2 to 1
(9)
RESUME interrupt
(3)
USBINTN interrupt
(10)
Cancel software standby mode
Wait for system clock oscillation to be settled
(4)
(5)
Clear SURSF in IFR2 to 0
Check if SURSS in IFR2 is set to 1
(11)
Clear SURSF in IFR2 to 0
Check if SURSS in IFR2 is cleared to 0
(12)
Set SURSF in IER2 to 1
Clear SSRSME in IER2 to 0
Clear SURSF in IER2 to 0
Set SSRSME in IER2 to 1
(6)
Shift to software standby mode
(execute SLEEP instruction)
(7)
Stop all clocks of LSI
USB communications can be resumed
through USB registers
Denotation of figures
: Operation by firmware setting
: Automatic operation by LSI hardware
Figure 15.6 Flow of Transition to and Canceling Software Standby Mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 678 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
(1)
USB bus state
(8)
Normal
Suspend
Resume normal
(3)
USBINTN interrupt
SURSF
(2)
(4)
(11)
SURSS
(11)
(4)
SSRSME = 1
(5)
(12)
RESUME interrupt
Software standby
(9)
(6)
(10)
Oscillator
(7)
USB dedicated clock
(cku)
Module clock (pφ)
(7)
Software standby
Oscillation
settling time
Figure 15.7 Timing of Transition to and Canceling Software Standby Mode
Rev.1.00 Sep. 08, 2005 Page 679 of 966
REJ09B0219-0100
Section 15 USB Function Module (USB)
(4)
Remote-Wakeup Operation
If the USB bus enters the non-suspend (resume) state from the suspend state by the remotewakeup signal output from this function, perform the operation as shown in figure 15.8.
USB function
Application
USB cable connected
USB bus in suspend state
Remote
wakeup enabled?
(CTLR/RWUPS = 1?)
No
Yes
Bus wakeup source
generated
Yes
Software standby
mode ?
Cancel software
standby mode
Oscillation
stabilization time
has passed?
Wait for resume
from up-stream
No
No
Yes
USB module
stopped?
Yes
Start USB operating
clock oscillation
Resume output signal
Suspend/resume
interrupt occurs.
(IFR2/SURSF = 1)
Cancel USB module stop
Remote wakeup execution
(CTLR/RSME= 1)
RESUME
Clear SURSF in IFR2 to 0
Check if SURSS in IFR2 is
cleared to 0
Return to normal state
Figure 15.8 Remote-Wakeup
Rev.1.00 Sep